Configure UTM and Custom Parameters for Your Links: Configure Urchin Tracking Module (UTM) and custom tracking parameters for your links. Add fallback values so links remain tagged when editors don't enter values for individual links.
Add Advocates: Advocates of a referral program are the partners who are willing to refer your brand to another businesses. Channel managers can either add all partners as advocates or add a select set of partners to the referral program. If the number of partners to be added is small, partner managers can add the advocates one by one. Or, they can work with the admin to set up a process that adds all the advocates simultaneously.
Add Rewards: Incentivize advocates and their referred parties to engage with your brand by adding rewards to your referral program. Channel managers can include rewards like vouchers and payout commissions that resonate with their audience. They can add multiple reward types within a referral program, tailored for both advocates and their referred parties. If a referral program includes several promotions, each can offer its own unique set of rewards to create a personalized experience.
Create Extended Reward Definitions: Channel managers can design diverse reward types for the company's referral program, including payout comissions for both advocates and referred parties. With extended rewards, channel managers get the flexibility to adjust reward values at runtime and control when rewards are issued. Use services like Flows or Apex to define processes for integrating with external downstream rewarding systems.
Create Voucher Definition: Channel managers can create voucher definitions to incentivize advocates and their referred parties with diverse rewards. They can add multiple vouchers to a referral program, offering different reward types to advocates and their referred parties. Each referral promotion within a program can feature its own unique set of vouchers, enhancing engagement and driving conversions.
How Activities are Tracked in B2B Referral Management: A referral promotion must track activities that advocates and their referred parties complete through the promotion's stages. For activities in each stage, a set of records is created or updated.
Example Flows to Track B2B Referrals Across Sales Lifecycle: Design flows that progressively track B2B referrals provided by customers and partners as referred businesses advance through sales lifecycle stages. For example, the flow can track the progression of referrals from lead generation to opportunity closure or from opportunity generation to first order fulfillment. B2B Referral Management provides businesses the flexibility to plug their referral programs in any type of B2B sales lifecyle. In this example, two reference flows are designed to visualize how partner referrals are tracked across the referral lifecycle during the lead to opportunity sales lifecycle and how partners are paid out for successful referrals.
Enroll Advocate in B2B Referral Promotion Action: Use the Enroll Advocate in B2B Referral Promotion Enrollment action to enroll business account as an advocate if B2B referral promotions. Integrate the action with external system or site where partners can join the referral promotion.
Process B2B Referral Event Action: Use the Process B2B Referral Event action in Flow Builder or through Connect API to create tracking records for referral activities that advocates and their referred party complete during the last three stages of promotions. The action also automates the issuing of rewards after advocates and their referred party complete eligible activities. For each activity, a transaction journal is created and other records are created or updated. Use the additional elements in Flow Builder to decide the eligibility criteria for referral activities. You can also add follow-up actions after the Process B2B Referral action.
Configure Processes: After channel managers create the referral program and add its promotions, the admin or the developer can configure the everyday processes. The processes include advocate enrollment and activity tracking.
Referral Activity Tracking: The activities of advocates and their referred parties are tracked in a referral program. Rewards are automatically provided to advocates and their referred party when reward-eligible activities are completed. You can use a flow action to create records that track the activities of advocates and their referred parties.
Advocate Enrollment: After channel managers activate referral promotions, you can use a flow action to process advocate enrollments.
Create a Promotion: Promotions are the primary vehicle that run your referral program. Channel managers can design different types of promotions with varying duration, audience, rewards, and stages.
Create a Referral Program: The cornerstone of a referral strategy is the referral program. After setting up a referral program, channel managers can manage and implement all aspects of their referral strategy from the referral program.
Design a Referral Program: Channel managers can use a guided flow to design and launch a referral program and its promotions by completing a few simple steps.
Design a Referral Promotion Using a Guided Flow: Use a guided flow to design and launch a referral promotion within minutes. The guided flow consists of three simple steps that let channel managers add the promotion’s rewards, decide the target audience, and set limits.
Promotion Definition: In the first step of the guided flow, define the key attributes of the promotion.
Matching Rules and Duplicate Rules for Business Accounts and Leads: When running a referral program, partners and their referred parties might attempt to sign up multiple times. Create duplicate rules and matching rules to avoid creating duplicate accounts for advocates and duplicate lead and account records for referred parties.
Learn About B2B Referral Management: Learn about the key terms and roles in B2B Referral Management. Explore the B2B Referral Management data model and the referral program workflow.
Manage Activities: While channel managers review the performance of a referral program and its promotions, they can review the activities completed by advocates and their referred parties.
Track Advocate Count for Promotions: When an advocate joins a promotion, a Loyalty Program Member Promotion record is automatically created to track their participation. From the Loyalty Program Member Promotion related list on a promotion, channel managers can track the count of advocates who have joined the promotion, the active advocate count, and their details. channel managers can use a promotion's advocate count as a key performance indicator of the promotion.
Manage Advocates: After a brand launches its referral promotion, channel managers can review the details of the advocates who are part of the referral program and can add advocates to referral promotions.
Manage a B2B Referral Program: After advocates join the brand’s referral promotion and start referring another businesses, channel managers can track the progress of each referral.
Track Issued Extended Rewards: Extended rewards issued to advocates are associated with the advocate's account and extended rewards issued to referred parties are associated with the referred party's account. channel managers can keep a track of the extended rewards issued to a person by viewing their account.
View Promotion Configuration: View the detailed configuration of a referral promotion with one click. Users with read-only access to referral entities can quickly view the promotion configuration. Promotion owners can review the promotion details and determine the changes they want to make without deactivating the promotion.
Track Referrals: Referral records help channel managers track the progress of an advocate’s referral. When an advocate’s referral progresses across the promotion stages, the Referral record is also updated to the current stage.
Track Issued Vouchers: Vouchers issued to advocates are associated with the advocate's loyalty program member record. Channel managers can keep track of the vouchers issued to an advocate by viewing their loyalty program member record.
B2B Referral Management: B2B Referral Management helps your brand run referral programs with evergreen and time-bound promotions for your channel partners. Channel managers can design and launch referral promotions within minutes. B2B Referral Management takes care of the rest with its inbuilt automations by rewarding advocates and their referred parties.
Page Layout Customizations: If you enable B2B Referral Management, Loyalty Management, and Referral Marketing in the same org, the admin must update the page layouts of a few objects that B2B Referral Management, Loyalty Management, and Referral Marketing share.
Activate Promotions: Activate your promotion on the day when you want to launch the promotion for the target audience. After the promotion is activated, advocates can start joining the promotion from the promotion's start date.
B2B Referral Promotion Prerequisites: Before channel managers design a referral promotion, they must ensure that all the information that's required to design a promotion is already available.
Promotion Audience: Referral promotions can be targeted either towards your entire partner base or towards specific partner groups. Before you use the Referral Promotion guided flow to design a promotion, decide the promotion’s target audience. If you want to target a specific partner group, you can filter the target audience by using a campaign.
Eligible Activities for Promotions: A promotion rewards advocates and their referred parties when an eligible activity is completed. Before you create a referral promotion, decide the promotion's eligible activities for advocates and their referred parties. Eligible activities are represented as journal subtypes in Salesforce.
Promotion Rewards: Based on the promotion template that you want to use for your promotion, decide the rewards that you want to offer as part of the promotion. If the promotion template rewards both advocates and their referred parties, then decide whether you want to give the same reward to advocates and their referred parties, or different rewards.
Promotion Template: Promotion templates determine promotion configuration. Use promotion templates to define stage names, the stages at which advocates and their referred parties are rewarded, and the activities that trigger rewards. Every promotion uses a promotion template. Before creating a promotion, decide whether to use an existing template or create a unique one.
Rewards and Audience: In the second step of the guided flow, select the promotion’s rewards, limits, and target audience.
B2B Referral Management Strategy: Every brand crafts its referral program uniquely to align with its specific requirements. B2B Referral Management helps businesses design and manage multiple promotions simultaneously or one promotion at a time based on the brand’s marketing strategy. Brands can also customize each promotion's stages, define rewards, and target specific audiences to perfectly fit their unique B2B objectives.
Summary: In the last step of the guided flow, review the journey of the advocates and their referred party in the promotion. Verify your promotion's duration, target audience, and rewards. If something isn't right, you can go back and make the required changes.
Promotions FAQ: Review the frequently asked questions about B2B referral promotions and understand how you can work around some of the limitations.
B2B Referral Management Scenarios: Effective referral management can occur through various channels, including customer and partner networks.
Set Up B2B Referral Management: Set up capabilities that enable channel managers to design and run referral programs. Set up rules to prevent duplicate records and protect against malicious activities. Enable channel managers and service representatives to track referral rewards issued to advocates and their referred parties.
Permission to Create Target Audience for Promotions: Use B2B Referral Management to target promotions towards all partners or specific partner groups. Filter accounts in the org by selecting all advocates or campaign that consists of the accounts you want to target. Provide channel managers the permission to create campaigns in the org.
Object Permissions for B2B Referral Management: B2B Referral Management comes with a set of objects to view and manage referral programs. Admins must provide role-specific object access to users in the org. For example, channel managers need permission to view, create, and edit referral programs and their related records whereas admins need access to delete records as well.
Role-Based Permissions for B2B Referral Management: Salesforce admins provide access to features based on the user's role in the company. For B2B Referral Management, admins provide themselves, channel managers, and business executives the permissions they require to work with referrals. Depending on the user’s role, determine which permission sets are assigned to users.
Add the Extended Rewards Related List to Business Account: In B2B Referral Management orgs, advocates have Account and Loyalty Program Member records, while referred parties have Lead, Opportunity, and Account records. Channel managers can view extended rewards that are issued to advocates and their referred parties on their Account and Loyalty Program Member records. Channel managers can view issued extended rewards on Loyalty Program Member records by default. To also view issued vouchers on Account records, add the Vouchers related list to Account page layout.
B2B Referral Workflow: The workflow of a referral program involves two personas, an advocate and their referred party. Before you create a referral program, learn how advocates and their referred parties interact with the referral program.
Add Users to a Business Unit: When you create your first business unit, users with the required Marketing Cloud Admin or Marketing Cloud Manager permission set are automatically added as members. For the second business unit and any additional business units you create, you can manually add users with one of the required permission sets. Only the users who you add to a business unit can use segments, flows, personalization, and Marketing Performance Intelligence, and activate flows in campaigns within the business unit.
Business Units in Marketing Cloud Next: Business units create divisions within your org to focus on specific marketing goals, while also providing global visibility and control across the entire enterprise. Business units act as a junction between data and content, aligning your marketing efforts with specific organizational divisions.
Market to Your Customers with Account Engagement: Account Engagement provides a full suite of tools that help marketers create meaningful connections, generate more pipeline, and empower sales to close more deals.
Show Engagement History on Records: Together, Account Engagement and Salesforce track valuable engagement data that can tell you how well your marketing assets resonate with your customer base. Turn on Engagement History and choose where to surface this valuable data throughout Salesforce in the form of fields, related lists, and Lightning components.
Configure Business Unit Filters for DLOs: To make sure that a business unit’s data is available only in its data space and supports accurate segmentation and analytics, add business unit filters for marketing Data Lake Objects (DLOs) automatically. Filters are appended to your existing filters with the BusinessUnitId or DataSpaceId field by using an OR condition. Filters aren’t added to existing DLO filters with an AND condition.
Configure a Sender Authentication Package or Private Domain: Set up your domain to use authenticated email sending and a branded URL. To improve email deliverability and assure your customers that your messages are legitimate, turn on authenticated email sending. When you use a branded URL, the images and tracked links in your messages use a domain that you own instead of a generic one that Salesforce owns.
Licenses and Considerations for a Sender Authentication Package and Private Domain: If you try to brand domains and URLs and find that some options are turned off, some Sender Authentication Package (SAP), Private Domain, or SSL certificate licenses are missing. Contact your Salesforce account executive or Salesforce Customer Support for assistance.
Adobe Analytics Custom 2.0 API Connector: The Adobe Analytics 2.0 Custom API Connector integrates with the latest Adobe Analytics 2.0 API endpoints. The new custom connector allows for simplified query methods and increased capacity for multiple breakdown reports making it the optimal choice for high volume use cases.
Activation Center: Use the Activation Center to connect to third-party platforms, such as Slack, Facebook Ads, and Google Ads, to trigger alerts, collaborate, and automate workflows in other systems. For example, you can create an action that sends a notification in Slack every time a certain campaign hits the target value you set for it.
Create Action Rules in the Activation Center: Action rules define how a rule is triggered. For example, the action can be triggered by time or by a specific event. You can create a rule for several actions.
Trigger an Action Rule from the Management Screen: Triggering an action manually allows you to run an action rule at any time. If the action rule condition is met, the rule executes the actions specified in it. For example, if your stakeholders ask for an updated report in the middle of the week, you can trigger the action rule and see the latest information.
Einstein Marketing Insights: Einstein Marketing Insights analyzes your data to show key factors that affect your marketing performance. Track your KPIs and verify that they perform as you intend by using Einstein Marketing Insights bots. For example, if you track the average time on your website, the bot can point out the path that increased the average time spent.
Create an Einstein Marketing Insight Bot: To analyze your datasets and uncover aspects that affect performance in a positive or negative way, use an Einstein Marketing Insights bot.
Review Your Insights Bots: After you create your insights bots you can view and review the insights that are available.
Use Database Exports to Export Datasets: Export data from Marketing Cloud Intelligence, and connect it to an enterprise database such as Snowflake and PostgreSQL. With Database Exports, automate the export of Intelligence marketing data. Enhance enterprise-wide analytics by making marketing insights accessible, and get a full view of your company’s data.
Adding or Editing Database Integrations: Before creating a database export, configure an external database to import data from Marketing Cloud Intelligence. The database user requires INSERT and DELETE permissions for at least one table. Capitalize the table name for Snowflake databases to avoid connection failures.
Configure the Destination Database and Connect Data: Set the external database where you’re exporting the data to. Databases are configured in Workspace Integrations. Configure the database first, and then you can select it.
Configure the Database Export Feed: After you connect to the database and map your fields, configure how the exported data is inserted into your database table and how often to execute the export. This step defines what happens when new data is loaded into the database and how to handle it.
Create a Database Export: Create a database export to export marketing data from Marketing Cloud Intelligence, and import it to an external database. Select the criteria that you want to export, define scheduling to determine when the export occurs, and map the source data fields to the database fields.
Define the Data to Export: Define the source dataset by selecting the dataset, required dimensions, and measurements and date range.
Troubleshoot Database Exports: After a database export is created, view and manage exports execution in the History tab. If an export fails, troubleshoot to find out what happened. You can download a report, and even rerun or reprocess it.
Goals: Use Marketing Cloud Intelligence Goals to track your performance KPIs. The goal tool helps you monitor your progress against benchmarks you set. Marketing Cloud Intelligence goals bring you closer to actionable insights and help you improve the efficiency and effectiveness of your data. You can visualize your goals in your dashboards allowing you to view and monitor your KPIs in context, and get notifications in real time for your KPIs.
Set Your Goal Actions: In the Action section, define the actions you want taken for your goal.
Create a Goal: Use goals to track your campaign KPIs and improve the outcome.
Set Your Goal Filters and Values: Filters can be set to customize your goal. You can filter goals according to a dimension or measurement value. For example, you can choose to filter your clicks goal by a specific campaign.
Set Your Goal Notifications: While your goal is active, you can get notified on the progress of your goals and where they stand compared to the benchmarks you set.
Pivot Tables in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Explore your data from multiple perspectives using pivot tables. You can calculate, summarize, and analyze data by seeing comparisons, patterns, and trends in your data. You can also create custom reports without using query formulas, such as SQL queries.
Reports in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Use reports to retrieve, view, and share a detailed analysis of the data that you’ve integrated into Marketing Cloud Intelligence. You can save them locally or share them via email or the cloud. The data uploaded into Intelligence is displayed as a flat file and includes selected dimensions and measurements within a defined time range.
Configure Report Scheduling and Delivery: You can choose when and how to run and share a report. You can set up multiple schedules for a report. For example, you can send the report to the management team on a weekly basis and to the analyst team daily.
Customize Report Email Text: Reports scheduled to be delivered by email are accompanied by short text that includes details about the report. You can customize the email text on the workspace level and apply the text to all workspace reports. Or you can customize the email text on the report level for a specific report.
Create a Data Report: A data report is based on the data that exists in your workspace. You can save it as an Excel, CSV, TSV, or TXT file.
Unrelated Measurements in Data Reports: When you query entities from different data types with different measurements that are unlinked in the platform, unrelated measurements appear in your report. For example, a report pulling Ads data— Impressions and a measurement that isn’t in the Ads data type—visits, results in unrelated measurements in your report.
Manage Reports: After you create a report, it appears in your reports list. From your reports list, you can view all your reports and edit, delete, and create a copy.
Create a Visual Report: A visual report is a screenshot of a dashboard page. You can export it as a PNG, PDF, or PPT file.
Connect Marketing Cloud Intelligence with Tableau: Connect Marketing Cloud Intelligence with Tableau to easily query your data. With the Marketing Cloud Intelligence Tableau integration, you get harmonization capabilities with Intelligence’s ETL solution and Tableau’s advanced visualization tools.
Push Reports from Marketing Cloud Intelligence to Tableau: Use the push method to integrate your marketing data to create Tableau views, group them together, and then download them to Tableau Desktop. With the push method, you work in Marketing Cloud Intelligence. You can control where to send your data, which server to use, and which views you want to make available to your users. You can push a single view or multiple views.
Push a Single View from Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Integrate Marketing Cloud Intelligence with Tableau by pushing a single view. During the process, you create a Tableau view, a Tableau feed, run the data source, and then visualize your data in Tableau Online.
Control Flow Operators: Marketing Cloud Intelligence supports an assortment of control flow operators, so you can perform advanced scripting operations. Aside from the custom functions that are supported in the formula editor, you can write formulas based in C and Java Script syntax to make more complex decisions.
Uploading Data in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: One of the most crucial steps when working with Marketing Cloud Intelligence, is uploading data. Since Marketing Cloud Intelligence supports numerous types of data, you can choose from many different ways to upload it. During the upload stage, you can map your data to determine which fields appear in Marketing Cloud Intelligence, and you can even create custom calculated fields to get the most out of your data. All these actions are done in the Connect & Mix tab.
Advanced Settings in Data Streams in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Define advanced settings to your data stream to select load modes, load rules, or configure additional settings. The available settings vary based on the type of data stream that you’re creating.
Define Data Stream Attributes: You can define or modify the data stream attributes, including custom attributes and channels.
Configure Data Stream Refresh and Frequency: If you’re creating or editing an API connector data stream, you can define the frequency and schedule for refreshing the data stream.
Data Stream Version History: Use data stream version history to save versions of your data streams. Save your changes without processing the data, and then edit the data stream later. Create versions to compare their settings and apply the settings that you prefer.
Navigate Your Version History: Access your version history to view your data stream versions, make edits, and apply changes.
Automatic Data Refresh in Data Streams: You can use automatic data refresh to import data from a third-party technical vendor or to have data sent automatically via email or FTPS/SFTP. Automatic data refresh allows you to avoid uploading your data manually each time new data must be ingested into the data stream.
Import Data via Technical Vendor: Importing data via technical vendors schedules the data stream to update automatically via a remote server. This method tells the platform to import files from remote servers according to the delivery method of your choice. The settings are dynamic and based on the technical vendor you select. Typically, you use this method when you want to retrieve data from an external source and have it update automatically. Available for TotalConnect data streams.
Send Data via Email to the Data Stream: This method allows you to send files via email to the data stream. Every data stream has its own unique email address and can accept attachments or files downloaded through links.
Data Load Rules: You can use Data Load rules to filter out unwanted data before you upload it to Marketing Cloud Intelligence. Create a load rule to set the criteria for the data that you want to upload. Then apply that rule to a data stream, and then apply a rule to filter out data before it’s loaded. For example, you want to upload data from your latest campaign, but due to an input error, the campaign dates are incorrect in your spreadsheet. Rather than create another spreadsheet, you can create a rule that tells Marketing Cloud Intelligence to ignore this campaign’s data.
Create a Load Rule: Data load rules filter out unwanted data before you upload data to Marketing Cloud Intelligence. After you create load rules, they can be applied to data streams.
Define Additional Settings to a Data Stream: Define additional settings to your data stream, such as ignore empty rows, execute only when part of a workflow and more. The settings are dynamic according to the data stream type you’re creating or editing.
Data Load Modes: When Marketing Cloud Intelligence receives new data, it checks whether the dates contained in the file are new or if they overlap with a previous file that was processed. If the dates are new, the information is added to the data stream. If the dates are already accounted for, the specified load mode determines how the new data is displayed.
Upload Files Using FTPS or SFTP: This method allows you to upload files into a TotalConnect data stream by using an FTPS or SFTP connection. Available for TotalConnect Data Streams
Classification Data Stream Type: Classification data streams are used to apply a classification logic that exists in a secondary data source to your primary data.
Use TotalConnect to Pull Data 360 Data into Intelligence: If you have Data 360 data and you want to bring it into Marketing Cloud Intelligence, you can use the TotalConnect connector. With this connector you can fetch up to 50,000 rows per query and run up to 1,000 queries per day. After you connect your data, a data stream is created and you can then get insights on your data.
Pull Data 360 Data into Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Data 360 unifies your data from multiple sources so that you can build a comprehensive view of your customer. Pull in a small amount of data with TotalConnect or try the Granular Data Center connector for larger amounts. You can also install the Data Cloud app to get predefined insights.
Set Up Access to Pull Data 360 Data: Before you can pull in data from Data 360 into Marketing Cloud Intelligence, authenticate access between the apps.
Data Stream Control Center: The Data Stream Control Center is a dashboard that centralizes data stream management into a single view. You can assess stream status, evaluate data quality, and identify ingestion issues. Get actionable insights for improved data hygiene and row management. The Data Stream Control Center is automatically filtered to show data for Today. To view the Data Stream Control Center dashboard, in the Connect & Mix tab, expand the Control Center tab.
Dimension Explorer in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: The Dimension Explorer shows the values of all the dimensions in the platform and the origin of these values. Use the Dimension Explorer when you need to troubleshoot dimension issues so you can get to the root of the problem.
Use the Dimension Explorer to Explore and Fix Data Issues: When you encounter issues with dimensions, for example an incorrect value, use the Dimension Explorer to find out what happened. Search for the dimension, discover where the issue stems from and then fix the issue instantly.
Data Stream Jobs Data Stream Type: The data stream jobs data stream type allows you to view statistics and information relevant to the execution of your data streams. The data included in this data stream type is the same as the data displayed in the data stream's log.
Granular Data Center in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Granular Data Center is a premium feature designed for ingesting raw data into the system. Due to this data’s granularity, row count can be hundreds of millions or even billions of rows. As opposed to other data stream types, usage and pricing don’t go by the row count but rather by terabytes of storage space. Some examples of data types that work best with Granular Data Center data streams are keyword level data, event level data, log data, and granular geodata.
Use a Marketing Vendor to Create a Granular Data Center Data Stream: Use a marketing vendor to pull in your granular data when creating a Granular Data Center data stream. Marketing vendors are set up the same way as Marketing Cloud Intelligence API connectors, but these connectors are big data compatible and work differently.
Use a Technical Vendor to Create a Granular Data Center Data Stream: To create a Granular Data Center data stream, use a technical vendor. A technical vendor is a data storage service, such as DropBox or Amazon S3. The process for defining the Granular Data Center data stream is dynamic according to the vendor, so it’s possible that not every step listed is relevant.
Direct Retrieval: Direct retrieval solves the bottlenecks that can occur when processing a large number of files in between retrieval cycles. It also helps in managing the data stream’s execution log, which can be a challenge when the number of files that accumulate between processing cycles is in the thousands.
Deleting Data from a Granular Data Center: To facilitate compliance with various data protection and privacy regulations, you can delete data from a Granular Data Center.
Enable the Granular Data Center in a Workspace: Purchasing the Granular Data Center automatically enables it in the account. However, an admin must enable it in the workspace. If it isn’t enabled, the Granular Data Center tab doesn’t appear.
Granular Data Center Query Export Options: After you create and run your queries, you can download the results locally, export, and schedule an export for your results.
Mapping Granular Data Center Data: If you uploaded a file or used a technical vendor to create a Granular Data Center data stream, you’re redirected to a mapping preview screen. Here you can verify that your data has been identified correctly, change mapping, add mapping formulas, and more. When data is uploaded to a Granular Data Center data stream, a table is created. The table is dynamic according to the type of loaded data. The type affects the data load options and behavior.
Add a Field: When you add more dimensions and measurements to the table, you add more columns. All column names appear as display names in the table. The display names are also used to set the system names, which are formatted using SQL standards.
Configure the Granular Data Center Table: A Granular Data Center data stream creates a table automatically. The Granular Data Center table is created within the database and holds the data uploaded by the respective data stream. When querying the Granular Data Center using SQL, the tables are queried and visualized by the names defined in the table. In the mapping screen, you can configure the table’s settings via the Configure tab.
Querying Granular Data Centers: Query your Granular Data Centers to pull data from your workspace. You can also query a Granular Data Center in another workspace through sharing. You can create a query manually with an SQL editor or use the Query Builder for an all-click-no-code option. Convert a query from the query builder into SQL to build onto the existing query or to better understand the parameters.
Create a Query Using the Query Builder: Use the Query Builder to create the query without having to manually create the query in SQL. All you have to do is select the dimensions and measurements and then a query is created automatically. You can convert a query from the query builder into SQL and use it as a regular SQL query. For example, you can save or export the converted query.
Create a Query Using SQL: You can use SQL to create joins between tables sourced from different data streams, perform calculations, and apply filters.
Export Query Results: You can download or export query results to S3, SFTP, Google Cloud Platform, Azure Blob, or email and define an ongoing schedule.
Granular Data Center Query Limitations: There are two tools you can use to create queries, the query builder and SQL. SQL should be used for more complex use cases. If you experience any limitations with the preview or downloading your data, consider the export or schedule export options.
Create a Logical View: You can call a query from another query by creating a view. The view saves the entire query statement so that you don’t have to rewrite it.
Save Query Results as a Data Source: You can upload query results to Marketing Cloud Intelligence as a new data source that complements existing data not related to the Granular Data Center.
View Granular Data Center Queries: All saved queries appear in the Query Granular Data dialog. Here you can view, edit, and even create queries.
Managing Shared Granular Data Centers: You can view and manage shared Granular Data Centers and workspaces that have access to the Granular Data Centers.
Query Shared Granular Data Centers: You can query a shared Granular Data Center and pull views and tables from other Granular Data Centers.
Sharing Granular Data Centers: You can share a Granular Data Center if it contains data that is relevant to other workspaces in the same account.
View Granular Data Center Data: The Granular Data Center landing page summarizes all the Granular Data Center data streams created in that workspace. View and manage ingested data, aggregations, extracted data, share data streams, create queries, and more all from one main location.
Visualizing Granular Data Center Data: The Entity-Relationship Diagram (ERD) displays a visual representation of all the tables and connections between specific dimensions from within these tables. Each block represents an existing table and contains a list of all the fields available within the table. The lines connecting tables also depict connections between specific dimensions from the connected tables.
Change Granular Data Center Connections: You can change the joins created between dimensions and tables by modifying the ERD. Connect relevant fields in just a few clicks, while defining the join type, and the cardinality type.
Incremental Data Load Mode: If you want to add new data alongside the old data, use the incremental data load mode. With this mode, the new file supplements the old measurement data.
Upsert Data Load Mode: The upsert data load mode inserts new data by updating main entity keys that exist in previous files. With this mode, two actions are performed: update and insert. Measurement data linked to main entity keys that exist in the previous file is updated, and then new main entity keys are inserted as new rows of data.
Manage Data Streams: After you create data streams, they appear in the data streams list. Here you can create new data streams, edit existing data streams, view history logs, create templates, and more.
Apply Changes to Data Streams: You have multiple options to make changes to the data that’s pulled into your data stream. Choose the option that fits your use case the best.
Update Data Manually: You can edit raw measurement data for specific data in a data stream. Dimension data can’t be edited and remains as is. Also, dimension values appear as they do in the raw data. If you made changes in the Dimension Explorer, you don’t see those changes here.
Re-run and Recreate Data Streams: When you make changes to data streams, for the changes to take effect, sometimes you must rerun some of your data or recreate your data stream. Other times, such as when the changes only apply to data going forward, all it takes is saving the data stream.
Mapping Your Source Data in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Mapping connects the source fields in your uploaded file to the corresponding Marketing Cloud Intelligence fields. Intelligence uses machine learning algorithms to map your data. The mapping process is similar regardless of which method you use to upload your data, with some minor differences. If you’re using an API connector to upload your data, Marketing Cloud Intelligence automatically maps the fields for you, but you can make changes to the mapping. If you’re using TotalConnect, Intelligence identifies the most suitable data stream type according to your data and offers an initial mapping suggestion.
Mapping Actions: There are some handy actions you can apply when mapping. Some appear in the toolbar, while others can be found in the More Actions dropdown list.
Adding a Date in the Mapping Process: If your file doesn’t include a date in any of the fields, you can add a date in the mapping process, without having an existing date field in your file.
Date Format Syntax: When setting up date formats in TotalConnect, you may need to convert textual data to dates using formulas. The PARSEDATE function can be used for the conversion. The function receives text containing the date information, and an expression that specifies how to construct the date using the text.
Extracting a Date From the File Name: If your file includes a date in the file name but not in the file itself, you can extract the date field from the file name and use it as the date field.
Mapping a File With No Date Column: To map a file with measurement data in Marketing Cloud Intelligence Platform, the file must contain a date column. The platform automatically identifies and pulls date information. If a date isn’t included the file can’t be uploaded.
Use the Formula Editor to Map: You can apply formulas directly to your field mappings to perform complex manipulations of your data. The formulas are intuitive and use a similar syntax found in Excel. For more complex manipulations, you can also use MVEL, a Java-based expression language. You apply formulas during the mapping stage when creating data streams.
Mapping Formulas: Use the mapping formula editor to apply formulas directly in your mapping fields. Using functions in your mapping formulas, such as text and date functions, allows you to perform more complex manipulations to your data.
Escape a Metacharacter: To use the literal meaning of a Java RegEx metacharacter in a regular expression, you must cancel the metacharacter, which is called escaping. You can escape a metacharacter in two ways.
FUZZYVLOOKUP: The FUZZYVLOOKUP mapping formula helps identify two elements of text, strings, or entries that are similar but not identical.
GROUPCONCAT: Use the GROUPCONCAT function to merge data from multiple rows into one field. GROUPCONCAT is a GROUP BY function and returns a string if the group contains at least 1 non-null value, if no non-null values exist, it returns a null value.
PARSEDATE and FORMATDATE Functions: You can convert a date to text format, for example converting a date to a string format. The conversion is called formatting and you can use the FORMATDATE function. You can also do the opposite—convert a string into a date format to obtain a date object, the conversion is called parsing and the PARSEDATE function is used
REPLACE: Use the REPLACE function to replace characters or patterns in a string.
Using Special Characters in Java Regular Expressions: In Marketing Cloud Intelligence, you can use the Java Regular Expression (RegEx) API to search for and modify text strings, for example, in a mapping formula or a calculated dimension. RegEx API uses special characters called metacharacters. A metacharacter is a character that has a special meaning during pattern processing. You can use a metacharacter as a regular character by escaping.
VLOOKUP: Use the VLOOKUP function to retrieve specific data from a table. You can use it when you’re mapping fields from your source file to Marketing Cloud Intelligence.
Mapping Functions in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Functions are used when creating mapping formulas, allowing you to perform complex manipulations to your data. These functions are available in Marketing Cloud Intelligence and are divided into different groups to easily search for the function you’re looking for.
Formula Operators: A formula is a mathematical relationship or rule expressed in symbols. With Marketing Cloud Intelligence, you can use formulas to create calculated measurements and dimensions when mapping your data. Operators specify the type of calculation to perform on the terms in a formula—such as addition, subtraction, multiplication, or division.
Change the Data Stream Type: All data in Marketing Cloud Intelligence is categorized using data steam types. A data stream type is assigned automatically when data is uploaded. For example, if the data includes advertising data, such as clicks, impressions, and campaigns, Marketing Cloud Intelligence applies the Ads data stream type. You can change the data stream type if it isn’t correct, or use a different type.
Mapping Validations: TotalConnect and API data streams offer enhanced mapping validations during the Map to Model stage of data ingestion. The mapping validations allow you to check if there are errors or irregularities with your mapping. They also provide details on how you can rectify errors.
Data Mapping Visualizer: Use the Data Mapping Visualizer tool to view an animated display of the mapped data in your Intelligence workspace. Data Mapping Visualizer lets you easily view and search your mapped data.
Group External Data in the Mapping Visualizer: The Mapping visualizer groups the data in the External Data column by Source Type by default. If you have defined custom attributes, you can group by an attribute instead.
Use the Data Mapping Visualizer: Use the Data Mapping Visualizer tool to view an animated display of mapped data in your Marketing Cloud Intelligence workspace.
View Your Mapped Source Data: View your external mapped source data in the mapping visualizer using a hierarchy structure.
View Your Mapped Dimensions and Measurements: View your mapped dimensions and measurements in the My Data Model column by expanding the entities and drilling down to view the mapped dimensions and measurements.
Mapping Geolocation Dimensions in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Geolocation refers to the geographical location of an internet-connected device. Found from the user's IP address, geolocation includes information about the device user's location, such as country, region, and city. After you map geolocation, you can create a Map widget so that you can see performance broken down by region.
Map Geolocation Dimensions: If your data stream contains geolocation information, you can use the different geolocation dimensions when mapping.
Use Map Widgets: After you map geolocation dimensions, use the Map widget to view your geolocation data live. Map widgets are created and defined just like all other widgets.
Data Model for Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Marketing Cloud Intelligence pulls data from a variety of sources with different data types. Each one of these different data types has its own unique combination of dimensions and measurements. The dimensions are made up of entities that have a certain relationship, or hierarchy, between them. It’s important to maintain this relationship in Marketing Cloud Intelligence’s database, otherwise the data can get aggregated incorrectly.
Prioritize Processing Tasks: Use the processing queue to prioritize your data stream processing tasks. With the processing queue, you can drag an urgent task to the top of the queue to prioritize it over other tasks. In the processing queue, a task is a collection of data streams with the same date range, triggered to process together. By default, all scheduled tasks, regardless of their date range, are grouped as one task that takes precedence over any manually triggered tasks. The Processing Queue doesn’t determine the order in which processing tasks are executed, and it doesn’t guarantee that prioritized data streams are completed first. Rather, the Priority Queue ensures that the prioritized task receives priority if any tasks compete for the same resources. However, if the tasks don’t compete for the same resources, the tasks can be processed simultaneously. Admins can now process data for up to 365 days back, directly from the platform without opening a support ticket.
Prioritize a Task in the Processing Queue: Prioritize your data stream processing tasks by organizing them in the queue based on priority. Place the task at the top of the queue for the highest priority. Priority is allocated based on the placement of the tasks in the queue.
Reach Data in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Reach represents the number of unique visitors exposed to your content over a specified time period. Reach differs from impressions, which includes multiple views by the same visitor.
Field Mapping for Reach Data Streams: It’s important to map the day and reach fields correctly in a reach data stream. The mapping can vary depending on the granularity that you’re setting up. Only map the required fields.
Processing Historical Data for Reach Data Streams: When manually processing data streams, Marketing Cloud Intelligence doesn’t consider the sliding window. Data needs to be processed in one month increments to ensure integrity of reach data is not compromised. You have to be conscious of how your regular retrieval is set up - to ensure that the newly loaded historical data and what you will regularly receive in the data stream are even comparable.
Reporting Reach at Multiple Entity Levels: To see reach at multiple levels or different frequencies in Intelligence for example, daily, weekly, or monthly, you create multiple APIs or TotalConnect data streams, differing the entity dimensions or date range per data stream.
Create a Data Source Authentication in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Create a data source authentication manually via the Connect & Mix tab so you can easily connect to different API connectors. During this process you can decide who has access to this authentication and who can create data streams with it.
Data Stream List: View, manage, and create data streams from the Data Stream List, in the Connect & Mix tab.
Data Stream Types in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Marketing Cloud Intelligence includes different data stream types to map your data. A data stream type defines which Marketing Cloud Intelligence fields are available for mapping based on your data source. For example, if your data source contains campaign, placement, and ad ID fields, Marketing Cloud Intelligence recognizes this as ads data and offers the Ads data stream type when mapping.
Competitive Data Stream Type: The competitive data stream type is suitable for datasets coming from public APIs and competitive analysis tools. This data stream type is designed to fit multiple content worlds, all under the competitive data category. It includes vendor-specific measurements like Facebook page and Twitter likes and generic measurements suitable for multiple cases, such as lifetime likes.
Competitive Data Stream Type Entities: The competitive data stream type has three entities, with the competitive page entity being the data stream type’s main entity.
CRM Data Stream Types: CRM stands for Customer Relationship Management. There are two data stream types for uploading CRM data. One type for uploading leads data called CRM Leads, and one for opportunities data called CRM. The CRM data stream type is equipped with slowly changing type 2 dimensions such as lead stage, lead status, and lead modified date.
Lead Stage Dimension: The Lead Stage, one of the attributes of the Lead Entity, is a type 2 dimension from the CRM leads data stream type. Over its life-span, it evolves and changes until it hopefully converts to an Opportunity.
Lead Modified Data in the CRM Data Stream Type: The Lead Modified Date is mandatory and serves as the only date-type field in the CRM data stream types. It allows you to put the data on a timeline or have it filtered by date.
Lead Status: The lead status value has direct implications on how the lead stage value is displayed over a selected date range.
Measurements in the CRM Data Stream Types: There are two system-generated measurements, one for each CRM data stream type: Leads Count, and Opportunities Count. These measurements perform a distinct count at Lead Key and Opportunity Key level. For example, if you have a lead with three stages, the Leads Count measurement returns the result of one as opposed to three.
Row Count in CRM Data Stream Types: When a slowly changing type 2 dimension changes its value over time, each value along with its Modified Date is stored on a separate row in the database, identified by a unique Detail ID.
Storing CRM Data: The CRM data is stored in the database in two separate tables.
Slowly Changing Dimensions Type 2: With CRM data, opportunity or lead attributes are updated over time because an opportunity can go through different stages. The CRM leads data stream type uses the slowly changing dimensions type 2 method to enable a data display suitable for these changes in dimension values. After a dimension’s value changes, the new value appears from the modification date and onwards. The value isn’t updated retroactively.
Visualizing CRM Data: There are different ways that you can visualize CRM data. The visualization of a type 2 dimension, such as Lead Stage, filtered for a certain date range, returns the dimension’s updated value. This is according to its last Lead Modified Date value contained within the filtered date range.
Ecommerce Data Stream Type: The ecommerce data stream type ingests different data types from ecommerce platforms. It provides levels of data for product catalogs, placed orders, number of purchased items within each order, and more.
Ecommerce Data Stream Type Entities: The ecommerce data stream type contains the entities Ecommerce Order, Clients, Campaigns, Order Item, and Products as well as Web Analytics entities.
Mapping Advertiser Data to Campaign Data in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Campaign data isn’t connected to advertiser data, so you can’t see campaign data with the ecommerce data stream type. Instead, you can manually map your campaign data to either the order level or order item (SKU) level.
Reducing the Number of Rows Produced with the Ecommerce Data Stream Type: Ecommerce data contains different levels, from product to order level data. As a result, it can include a large number of rows to map to get the desired insights. (For example, you can have a woman’s dress in three colors and three sizes). When viewing this data, each level has several rows. To reduce the number of rows, you can aggregate the data on a less granular level using these options.
Uploading New Data into an Ecommerce Data Stream: What happens to ecommerce data after it’s been uploaded to Marketing Cloud Intelligence and new data is retrieved? When is the data stream performing an upsert as opposed to a replace? The ecommerce data stream type acts differently from other data stream types.
Generic Data Stream Type in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: The generic data stream type ingests data that doesn’t comply with any of the existing Marketing Cloud Intelligence data models. All entities in a generic data stream type are in a many-to-many relationship. It offers 50 custom attributes for each entity and 100 custom measurements. The generic data stream type is flexible and caters to a wide range of data types.
Create a Generic Data Stream: Create a generic data stream when you must upload data that doesn’t comply with any of the existing Marketing Cloud Intelligence data models. For example, create a generic data stream if you have survey data that you want to visualize but it doesn’t fit into any of the preset data stream types.
Messaging Data Stream Type in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: The messaging data stream type ingests email, mobile phone, and journey data. A message can be in the form of an email, text message, or app notification. It’s typically associated with measurements such as how many people received, opened, or clicked a message. This data stream type can be used to ingest data from platforms such as Salesforce Marketing Cloud, Marketo, and Adobe.
Create Data Streams in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Whenever you upload data, data streams are created. These data streams can be referenced throughout the Marketing Cloud Intelligence platform, for example in pivot tables, reports, and dashboards. There are several methods available for creating data streams in Marketing Cloud Intelligence. You can use an API connector to connect via API, TotalConnect to upload external files, LiteConnect if you have data from a single source, or even Granular Data Centers if you have granular data. You can choose which method is best for you.
Creating Data Streams with API Connectors in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: API connectors enable you to easily connect data sources such as Google Ads or Facebook to Marketing Cloud Intelligence. When you connect an API connector, an API data stream is created that automatically maps the data fields the vendor provides to the Marketing Cloud Intelligence data model, allowing you to access your information.
Use API Connectors to Connect Your Data in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Marketing Cloud Intelligence offers thousands of API connectors that you can use to connect to Intelligence. The API connectors vary from marketing vendors to technical vendors. You can also download additional connectors via the Marketplace.
Account Analytics API Connector in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: With the Marketing Cloud Intelligence Account Analytics connector, you can monitor engagement, page views, audit changes, and entity creation logs. You can use this data to create customized views, add dynamic dashboards, and pull actionable reports. The connector includes logs for both unpublished and published pages.
Adform API Connector: The Adform API connector retrieves Leads data. The data is aggregated and can only be seen at the campaign level.
Adglow API Connector: Adglow is a Social Media Advertising Campaign Management Tool.
Adjust API Connector: Adjust provides analytics, measurement, and fraud prevention solutions for mobile app marketers worldwide.
Adobe Analytics Data Warehouse 2.0 API Connector: Retrieve Adobe Analytics Data Warehouse reports with the 2.0 API. Use this connector to pull Data Warehouse data into Marketing Cloud Intelligence. Data Warehouse reports don’t include calculated metrics, and only supported segments are available.
Adocean Gemius API Connector: Adocean is an Ad Server platform that offers advertising space to several Ad Providers at the same time, allowing the same space to be used for direct sales. This enables the automatic optimization of revenue from a single advertising space.
Adroll API Connector: AdRoll is an Ecommerce Growth Platform helping brands grow revenue through marketing and ads.
Affiliate Future API Connector: Affiliate Future provides advertisers with an effective marketing solution through its affiliate network and tools.
AirPush API Connector: Airpush is a mobile ad network that displays data on mobile advertising.
Amazon Advertising API Connector: This API connector retrieves data for Amazon Campaign Types Sponsored Products and Headline Search Ads
Amazon Attribution API Connector: Amazon Attribution is a platform that gives marketers insights into how their non-Amazon marketing channels across search, social, video, and display impact shopping activity and sales performance on Amazon.
Amazon Vendor Brand Analytics API Connector in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: First-party sellers, such as manufacturers and distributors, use the Amazon Vendor Central web interface for selling products directly to Amazon. Connecting to the Amazon Vendor Brand Analytics API gives you information about sales and traffic, consumer behavior, and operations.
Amazon DSP API Connector: Amazon DSP is a demand-side platform that enables advertisers to programmatically buy display, video, and audio ads both on and off Amazon.
Apple Search Ads API Connector: The Apple Search Ads API retrieves data related to Search Campaigns advertised on Apple App Store. By using this API, you’ll be able to retrieve standard Display data. The Dimensions and Measurements that are pulled through the API match the data that’s displayed on each of the Ad Groups views within the Apple Search UI.
AppNexus Advertiser API Connector: AppNexus is a global internet technology company that operates an independent marketplace for digital advertising, and enterprise technology for buyers and sellers of digital ads. AppNexus Advertiser is used to retrieve performance, revenue, and profit data across a selected advertiser's creatives and campaigns.
AppNexus Network API Connector: AppNexus is a global internet technology company that operates an independent marketplace for digital advertising, and enterprise technology for buyers and sellers of digital ads. AppNexus Network is used to retrieve high-level performance data for a selected member of the AppNexus Network.
AppNexus Reports API Connector: AppNexus is a global internet technology company that operates an independent marketplace for digital advertising, and enterprise technology for buyers and sellers of digital ads. AppNexus for Reports is used to retrieve a selection of AppNexus reports.
AppsFlyer API Connector: The AppsFlyer API connector retrieves App Analytics data. Through our API, you can retrieve the data that’s available in the Geo Daily Report in the AppsFlyer Reports section. The report includes Campaigns data, broken down by Countries and Media Sources.
Automation Studio for Exporting Data from Marketing Cloud: When you’re unable to use the Marketing Cloud Intelligence API to grab granular data or a specific dimension and then connect that data to a Granular Data Center, try Automation Studio. With Automation Studio (a Marketing Cloud app) you can extract the granularity of data you need so you can analyze your data with ease.
AWIN API Connector: AWIN is a global affiliate marketing network that delivers marketing solutions for advertisers, agencies, and publishers around the world.
Baidu API Connector: Baidu, Inc. operates as an Internet Search Provider, which offers internet search solutions and online marketing solutions.
Basis by Centro API Connector: Basis by Centro is a provider of enterprise software for digital advertising organizations. Its technology platform, Basis, is the first of its kind SaaS advertising solution unifying programmatic and direct media buying, along with workflow automation, cross-channel campaign planning, universal reporting, and business intelligence.
Bing Ads API Connector in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Use Bing Ads to track and manage your pay-per-click advertising Bing and Yahoo! search engines. Bing Ads is a search channel connector, the data stream types are Ads, Conversion Tag, Conversion Tag with Keywords, and Search Keywords. The data lagging is one day. Bing Ads data is reported in the UTC timezone.
Brandwatch API Connector: Brandwatch is a Social Media Monitoring Tool that allows your business to analyze and use business conversations from across the social web.
BrightEdge API Connector: BrightEdge is an SEO and content performance marketing platform, helping customers generate more organic traffic.
Call Tracking Metrics API Connector: All fields retrieved are unmapped by default. When you save the data stream you’ll be directed to the mapping screen. Choose the relevant data stream type under the Extended Properties section.
Marketing Cloud Intelligence Connector for B2C Commerce: Use the Marketing Cloud Intelligence Connector for B2C Commerce to pull aggregated orders or product-level data from your B2C Commerce site. B2C Commerce gathers data from your realm and configures it into logical datasets called dashboards.
Create an API Data Stream Using the Marketing Cloud Intelligence Connector for B2C Commerce: Create an API data steam to connect your Commerce Cloud site data to Marketing Cloud Intelligence. You can bring in either product-level or order-level data. Product-level data includes revenue generated for each product (SKU) according to the date range. Order-level data is aggregated order revenue over time without the details of specific products.
Comscore API Connector: Comscore provides a comprehensive, consistent, and unique view of media consumption across media and screens to accurately capture modern media consumption
Convertr API Connector: Convertr is a Customer Acquisition Management Platform helping publishers, brands, and agencies improve their leads and the business model that generates them.
Facebook Attribution API Connector: Facebook Attribution tool, a platform that gives marketers a better picture of their clients’ journey by measuring performance across publishers, channels, devices and conversions.
Facebook Ads Custom API Connector in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Use the Facebook Ads Custom API connector to retrieve a custom set of measurements and dimensions from the Facebook Ads API into Marketing Cloud Intelligence. The Facebook Ads Custom API connector facilitates the retrieval of unique measurements, such as Reach. These measurements cannot be aggregated. This custom connector requires manual setup. The Facebook ads custom is a display channel connector, the data stream type is ads, conversion tag, and generic. The data lagging is one day.
Troubleshooting Reach Data for Facebook Ads Custom: After you set up reach, ensure that all parameters in the Facebook platform match the parameters and granularities set in Marketing Cloud Intelligence.
Define Reach Data in Facebook Ads Custom API Connector: Define how to calculate reach data in the Facebook Ads custom API. Facebook uses user-level data to calculate reach. When a date or field is adjusted in Facebook, the granularity changes, and Facebook recalculates the reach value based on the new parameters. Processing historical reach data streams requires unique date ranges for each process. Set a unique reach value for each day based on the granularity. Every date must be processed separately to return the aggregated value for that date.
Facebook Page Insights API Connector in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Use Facebook Page Insights to track user interaction on your Facebook Fan Page. Facebook Insights is seen by all the Admins of your page to help you track the number of active users so you can better understand your page performance. Facebook Page Insights is an organic social channel connector, the data stream type is social objects, and the data lagging is three days.
Facebook Post Insights API Connector in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Use the Facebook post insight connector to understand data on how users engage with your Facebook post so you can make informed decisions on the content you post. Facebook post insights is social channel connector, the data stream type and there’s no data lagging. Facebook post insights pulls data from Graph API, and Insights.
Google Ads API Connector in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Use the Google Ads API connector to retrieve a predefined set of dimensions and measurements from the Google Ads API. Google Ads is a display and search channel connector. The data stream type is Ads, and the data lagging is one day.
Google Ads Custom API Connector in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Use the Google Ads Custom API connector to retrieve a custom set of measurements and dimensions. You can also use the Google Ads Custom connector when creating a Granular Data Center. Google Ads Custom is a display and search channel connector, and the data lagging is one day.
Google Analytics API Connector in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Google Analytics is a web analytics service offered by Google that tracks and reports website traffic. Google Analytics is a web analytics channel connector, the data stream type is web analytics, and the data lag is one day.
Add Commerce Fields to Google Analytics Connector in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Add commerce fields to your Google Analytics connector to view Product and Order level data—displaying engagement and performance data alongside analytics data. With this view you can learn more about your commerce marketing spend and generated revenue.
Google Analytics Custom API Connector in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Use the Google Analytics Custom API connector to retrieve custom dimensions and metrics. Use custom dimensions to collect and analyze data that Google Analytics doesn’t automatically track. You can combine Analytics data with non-Analytics data using the custom connector. Google Analytics Custom is a web analytics channel connector, and the data lagging is one day.
Google Analytics Attribution API Connector: The Google Analytics Attribution tool is available on the Google Analytics platform. It enables a view of the conversion path a client goes through before the conversion takes place. Tracking starting in the client's first interest until the conversion takes place, across different marketing channels.
Gartner API Connector: Gartner is a global research and advisory firm providing information, advice, and tools for leaders in IT, finance, HR, customer service and support, communications, legal and compliance, marketing, sales, and supply chain functions.
Google Campaign Manager API Connector: Google Campaign Manager is a web-based ad management system for advertisers and agencies, which helps you manage digital campaigns across websites and mobile.
Google Campaign Manager Custom API Connector: Google Campaign Manager Custom, is a web-based ad management system for advertisers and agencies, which helps you manage digital campaigns across websites and mobile platforms.
Google Display and Video 360 API Connector: Google Display & Video 360 is a Demand-Side-Platform (DSP) providing global Display Media Buying across Ad Exchanges. Google Display & Video 360 (DV360) was formerly known as DoubleClick Bid Manager (DBM).
Google Display and Video 360 TrueView API Connector: TrueView line items allow you to create video campaigns with a range of formats to engage customers on YouTube and across the web on partner sites and apps.
Google My Business API Connector: The Google My Business API connector retrieves data related to listings of businesses that are advertised on Google.
Google Ads Manager Custom API Connector: Google Ad Manager Custom, formerly known as DoubleClick for Publishers (DFP). Use the Google Ad Manager custom API connector to create the dimension and metric combinations that work best for your use cases. With the custom connector you can analyze your custom data that isn’t available in the standard connector.
Google Search Console API Connector: Google Search Console is a free service offered by Google that helps you monitor, maintain, and troubleshoot your site's presence in Google Search results.
Instagram by Facebook Connector in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: The Instagram by Facebook API connector retrieves lifetime post data from Instagram using Facebook’s graph API. This connector pulls a larger variety of measurements, such as organic impressions. Instagram by Facebook is a social channel connector, the data stream type is social objects, and there’s no data lag.
Instagram Public API Connector: The Instagram Public (competitive) API allows you to get basic metadata and metrics for other Instagram Business Accounts.
Integral Ad Science Custom API Connector: Integral Ad Science Custom (IAS Custom) is an ad verification connector that streams performance, viewability, brand safety, invalid traffic, site quality, video, and other IAS report data into Marketing Cloud Intelligence.
Integrate API Connector: Integrate is a Demand Generation Marketing Orchestration Software that provides tools for management and scalability of demand marketing efforts
Kenshoo API Connector: Kenshoo provides digital marketing solutions in Search, Social, and Display.
LinkedIn Ads API Connector in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Use the LinkedIn Ads API connector to retrieve LinkedIn ad and conversion data. LinkedIn Ads is a display channel, the data stream type is ads, and conversions, and the data lagging is one day.
Line Ads API Connector: LINE Ads is a performance-based ad platform for services related to the LINE chat app that enables you to retrieve delivery data from the platform.
Data 360 CI Connector: Data 360 allows you to unify all your data - from anywhere - for a complete view of your customers. The Data 360 API connector allows you to pull either your calculated insights from Data 360 or use Marketing Cloud Intelligence predefined insights in order to get advanced insights with a click of a button.
Salesforce Marketing Cloud Data Extensions: Salesforce Marketing Cloud is a platform for delivering relevant, personalized journeys across channels and devices - enabling marketers to deliver the right message at the right time throughout all phases of the relationship.
Marketing Cloud (Granular) API Connector: The Salesforce Marketing Cloud platform delivers relevant, personalized journeys across channels and devices, enabling marketers to deliver the right message at the right time throughout all phases of the relationship. The Marketing Cloud Granular (Standard) connector enables you to pull in all data from Email Studio, Mobile Studio, and Journey Builder into a Granular Data Center.
MediaMath API Connector: MediaMath is a Demand-Side Platform (DSP) that provides advertisers and marketers with tools to buy ads online through a single interface.
MOZ API Connector: MOZ API is a Search Engine Optimization tool, which among other things, provides different competitive views. By using our API, you’re able to select Domains, and retrieve a variety of Measurements related to them.
Naver API Connector: Naver is a Korean search engine, it’s also frequently referred to as 'the Google of South Korea'. This integration allows you to retrieve your search and delivery data from the platform.
NetBase API Connector: Netbase is a Social Listening Platform. They develop Natural Language Processing technology that is used to analyze social media and other web content.
Oauth2 Authentication: Oauth2 is an authentication method commonly used as a way for users to authorize websites or applications to access their information on other vendors using authentication tokens, without giving them the credentials to the vendor. Oauth2 is used when the connection to a vendor is done through a mediator app.
Order Management System API Connector: Order Management System (OMS) is a central hub for handling all aspects of the order life cycle, including order capture, fulfillment, shipping, payment processing, and services.
Pinterest API Connector: Pinterest is an online pinboard for collecting visual pieces of multimedia and sharing the content with other users within the platform.
Pinterest Ads API Connector: Pinterest Ads is Pinterest’s Advertising Channel, through which Promoted Pins are created, edited, and managed.
Python Data Stream Retrievals: Python scripts are an effective, fast growing and easy to use technology, and they are now supported in Marketing Cloud Intelligence as a Retrieval Method for TotalConnect Data Streams. Although in some cases the same results can be achieved using HTTP requests, Python retrievals are more robust while still being flexible, powerful, and relatively easy to set up.
Quora Ads API Connector: Quora is an online community that allows users to share knowledge (by asking and answering questions). Quora is one of the highest-quality user-generated content platforms.
Radarly API Connector: Radarly by Linkfluence, is a social listening platform that uses Artificial Intelligence (AI) to turn social data into valuable insights. With Radarly, users can leverage social data and gather valuable consumer insights online.
Reddit Ads API Connector: Reddit is a social news aggregation, web content rating, and discussion website. Reddit Ads is a platform users can purchase and manage advertising space.
SEMrush API Connector: SEMrush is a competitive research platform that allows you to analyze your competitors' domains, looking into their traffic, relevant keyword, and so on, SEMrush offers different types of data so you can set up the connector to your liking.
Salesforce Marketing Cloud For Email & Mobile API Connector: Salesforce Marketing Cloud is a platform for delivering relevant, personalized journeys across channels and devices - enabling marketers to deliver the right message at the right time throughout all phases of the relationship. This API connector can be used to retrieve Email data from Email Studio, including device, browser, operating system, geolocation and domain breakdowns, and campaign details.
Salesforce Account Engagement API Connector: Marketing Cloud Account Engagement (Pardot) is Salesforce’s B2B marketing automation solution. If you’re a business that sells to other businesses (or B2B), Account Engagement can automate your marketing activities and unite your marketing and sales departments so that they can work better together.
Salesforce Reports API Connector: The Salesforce Reports API connector retrieves reports created in Salesforce, in this connector you will have access to all the reports in Salesforce to which you have permissions for. Since the reports in Salesforce are customizable, once you save the stream you will be directed to the Mapping screen to allow you the same level of customization in Marketing Cloud Intelligence.
Snapchat API Connector: Snapchat Ads is an ads platform that provides three types of advertising - Snap Ads, Snapchat Geofilters, and Lenses.
Socialbakers API Connector: The Socialbakers platform is an AI-powered social media marketing company offering social media analysis on Facebook, Instagram, Twitter, YouTube, LinkedIn, Google+, VK, and Pinterest. With this new integration, Socialbakers users can retrieve their owned accounts data across different social media platforms.
Social Studio API Connector: Salesforce Social Studio is a Management Center and Social Listening Platform for owned social accounts on popular social networks, such as Facebook, LinkedIn, Twitter, Instagram, Pinterest, and Google+. It’s also a platform for Social Listening.
Spotify Ads API Connector: Spotify Ad Studio is an ad server that provides tools for advertisers to create campaigns and track them in Spotify, a digital music service. Through Spotify's integration with Marketing Cloud Intelligence, you can access your Ad Studio campaign data within Intelligence's platform.
Sprout Social API Connector: With the Sprout connector you can pull analytics of owned social profiles you’ve integrated with Sprout. Profile-level data is shown in PST and Post-level data is shown according to the social channels own timezone. Sprout Social is a social channel connector and the data stream type is social objects and Lifetime.
Synthesio API Connector: Synthesio is a social intelligence tool that provides the ability to listen to and analyze consumer conversations across social and mainstream media.
The Trade Desk (My Reports) API Connector: A Demand-Side Platform (DSP) that allows ad buyer teams to manage data-driven digital advertising campaigns across various advertising formats, including display, video, and social, on a multitude of devices.
The Trade Desk (My Reports) Custom API Connector: The Trade Desk (TTD) is a Demand-Side Platform that allows ad buyer teams to manage data-driven digital advertising campaigns across various advertising formats, including display, video, and social, on a multitude of devices. The TTD Custom API connector allows you to retrieve a custom set of Measurements and Dimensions from the API into Marketing Cloud Intelligence. It enables you to pull data from any of the TTD (My Reports) reports. While the standard TTD (My Reports) API connector is preset to be automatically mapped to the Data Model, the Custom connector requires manual setup.
X Social Engagement API Connector in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Use the X Social Engagement API to pull organic data from your X accounts. The X Social Engagement connector uses the X Engagement API connector. This connector measures the performance of content using metrics that aren’t available in other X connectors.
Verizon Media API Connector: Verizon Media, is an advertising platform that provides simplicity, flexibility and transparency to buying media, managing campaigns, and maximizing performance.
Weborama API Connector: Marketing Cloud Intelligence connects to Weborama’s Ad Server solution, retrieving data pertaining to the marketing activity conducted in Weborama, and its performance.
Yahoo Gemini API Connector: Yahoo Gemini is Yahoo’s platform for native advertising and mobile search ads.
Yahoo Japan Display API Connector: Yahoo! JAPAN Display delivers ads based on Yahoo’s ad distribution technology on several Yahoo! JAPAN services such as News, Auction, and Shopping. This API integration allows you to retrieve ad data from the Yahoo Japan platform.
Yahoo Japan Search Ads API Connector: Yahoo! Japan Search Ads is a platform from which users can purchase and manage advertising space on Yahoo! Japan.
Yandex API Connector: The report retrieved from Yandex is the "Statistics for all Campaigns" report. The report includes data at the campaign level only.
YouTube Ads API Connector in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Use YouTube ads to discover videos in various ways: by searching on the YouTube search page, clicking suggested videos on the watch page, or choosing a video from the homepage feed. You can use YouTube ads to advertise more effectively to people who are searching for your product or brand. The YouTube ads connector is a display connector with a data lag of one day.
YouTube Insights API Connector: YouTube is a video sharing service where users can create their own profile, upload videos, watch, like, and comment on other videos
Interaction Studio API Connector: Use the Interaction Studio API connector to explore and pull personalization data from your Marketing Cloud Personalization (formerly Interaction Studio) Data Warehouse.
Re-process Data in API Data Streams: Re-process is a common action that updates the data within a selected data stream. The most popular use for Re-process is when a dataset changes on the platform’s side, such as Facebook, and the user wants to pull the update back to Marketing Cloud Intelligence. This action proactively pulls the new data instead of waiting for a scheduled update to take place (if applicable).
Re-run Data in API Data Streams: Re-run doesn’t initiate the retrieval of new data into the data stream, it reruns the data stream’s existing data.
Troubleshoot API Data Streams in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Errors can occur that prevent API data streams from being created or processed. For example, it’s possible you used invalid credentials and processing failed. You can view errors using the Log button. The log contains important technical information and can help you diagnose issues.
Create Data Streams with DirectConnect: DirectConnect is a premium feature that allows you to retrieve data directly from an external database, without having to store the data in Marketing Cloud Intelligence’s database. DirectConnect is used in cases where you have data sensitivity issues, or you want to display and interact with your data from an external source instead.
Connection and Performance Optimization in DirectConnect Data Streams: Setting up a DirectConnect data stream establishes a real-time connection to your database. Each time an entity that uses dimensions or measurements sourced from DirectConnect is loaded, your database is queried in real time. A real-time connection can potentially result in many calls being made to your database concurrently, leading to slower performance and exceeding rate limits.
Create a Data Stream with DirectConnect: Use DirectConnect to create a data stream and retrieve data directly from an external database. You can either configure a database, or connect to a database manually with a user and password. After connecting to the database and testing the connection, you can create a query to determine how data from the database is represented in Marketing Cloud Intelligence. Make sure the scope of the query is as close to the consumption requirements as possible for faster processing and performance.
Creating Data Streams with LiteConnect in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: With LiteConnect, you can upload a file into Marketing Cloud Intelligence as is and visualize the data automatically. You don’t need to consider the predefined structure and constraints of the data model or map fields.
Harmonizing LiteConnect with Other Data Sources: You can harmonize or integrate LiteConnect data streams with other data streams using Vlookup, data fusion, or calculated dimensions. However, LiteConnect data streams are naturally harmonized at the date level, so you can consolidate measurements by date.
Creating Data Streams with TotalConnect in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: If you need to upload data from a source and no API connector exists, you can create a data stream with TotalConnect. For example, if you have a proprietary dataset in Excel, CSV, or another file format, or if a custom report is sent to you by a data partner that is beyond the scope of what their API can provide.
Mapping Your Source Data in TotalConnect: Mapping connects the source fields in your uploaded file to the corresponding Marketing Cloud Intelligence fields. Marketing Cloud Intelligence uses machine learning algorithms to map your data. The mapping process is similar regardless of which method you use to upload your data, with some minor differences. If you’re using TotalConnect, Intelligence identifies the most suitable data stream type according to your data and offers an initial mapping suggestion.
Preview Source Data in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: After you upload your data with TotalConnect, a preview of your source data lets you see how Marketing Cloud Intelligence reads the raw data, including fields and their types. The table reflects all the fields (columns) from your source file. Each field is defined with a type—text, number, or date—and you change the type if needed. You can also change the date format.
Transformers in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Transformers are a set of configurations applied to files that are uploaded into Marketing Cloud Intelligence. Transformers are used to alter the structure of the data files in order to pull the exact data sets you need. They instruct the platform as to what data table must be extracted from your source file allowing you to manipulate the file structure.
Apply File Transformers in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Use file transformers when you want to transform a file that has special characteristics like uncommon delimiters, multiple sheets, or specific file encoding. For example, if a file uses ~~ as the delimiter instead of a comma or a tab, use the file transformer to specify the custom delimiter so that you can map the file correctly.
Apply Header Transformers in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: If you want to customize the header structure when headers aren’t available or span multiple rows, you can use a header transformer. For example, if a file has a two-line header that must be combined into one row.
Total Rows Transformers in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Use the total rows transformer when you want to change the default behavior of Marketing Cloud Intelligence to strip out “totals” rows from all files. For example, if a file has non-additive measurements, and you want only the totals row mapped, use this transformer.
Transpose Transformers in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Use a transpose transformer when you want to reconstruct a flat-file format by translating columns of data into rows. For example, if a file has three conversion types in three separate columns that you want to aggregate into “total conversions,” they must be transposed into rows from columns. A column of data in a flat-file corresponds to a field that could be mapped in the Marketing Cloud Intelligence data model. So anytime you can streamline the number of potential mapped fields, you free up fields that can be used for other dimensions or measurements. After transpose settings are set for a data stream, new files uploaded to the data stream automatically inherit the predefined pattern that was specified upon initial integration.
Apply Transpose Transformers: Apply a transpose transformer when you want to reconstruct a flat-file format by translating columns of data into rows.
Apply Unnest Transformers in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: The unnest transformer enables you to transform concatenated values into separate rows. The measurement values linked to the nested row are duplicated to each new row. For example, If there are three values, comma-separated, and one field must be broken out into individual rows of data, this transformer creates individual rows for each value in that field.
Troubleshoot Total Connect Data Streams: Errors can occur that prevent data streams from being created or processed. You can view errors using the Log button. The log contains important technical information and can help you diagnose issues.
Data Stream Templates in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Use data stream templates to create a mapping template that you can replicate to create data streams. Store the template on the workspace or account level. You can share data stream templates between workspaces and accounts. The data stream template saves formulas used in the original data stream.
Create a Data Stream Template: You can create a data stream template for a TotalConnect data stream or an API data stream. To create an API data stream you must have at least one template for the source in your workspace.
Transformation Groups: Transformation groups allow you to classify attributes of entities, such as sites, campaigns, or products, so you can filter information.
Transformation Group Use Cases: Transformation groups are used in different ways, for example to filter by a group of campaigns. These use cases show how to set up specific transformation groups and their results.
Create Transformation Rules: Create a transformation rule to set a value of a specific attribute, for example whenever the Campaign Key is set to 1234, the Campaign Type is set to Search.
Set a Rules Method for Transformation Rules: Rules run according to the Rules Method, which determines the type of the data the rules apply to. By default, the platform uses the Run Rules on New Data Only method, running rules on all the data uploaded to the workspace after the rule is created. The Rules Method affects all the workspace's transformation rules.
Transformation Rules: Use transformation rules to set values to a specified attribute, based on a set of defined criteria. The rules can be set at the level of the entity key or name. Transformation rules are most effective when the entity key or name has a consistent naming convention.
Workflows in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Use workflows to execute data streams, reports, and actions in your workspace. For example, create a workflow to generate a report after specific data streams are processed.
Create a Workflow in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Create a workflow to set the order of when to execute data streams, reports, and actions. You can also chain workflows together so that the end of the workflow initiates the next workflow.
Troubleshoot a Workflow in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: If a workflow fails, view the log file to see what caused the failure. A workflow can run for 6 hours. If the workflow doesn’t finish executing in that time, it times out.
Dimensions: In Marketing Cloud Intelligence, a dimension is a qualitative non-numerical attribute that provides information about your dataset, for example, campaign name and campaign ID. A dimension can’t be counted, even when it includes a number. For instance, a campaign ID consists of numbers but you can’t calculate them.
Related Measurements in Calculated Dimensions: A related measurement is linked to a calculated dimension and used to populate the dimension values in a list. You can add a related measurement when creating a calculated dimension, in the Advanced section.
Calculated Dimensions: A calculated dimension is a non-numerical field or dimension that you can create on top of your existing data. Calculated dimensions don’t exist physically in the database. Rather, each calculated dimension represents a query that can be referenced to from any report, pivot table, and widget in your dashboard pages.
Calculated Dimension Functions: Marketing Cloud Intelligence provides basic functions you can use to create dynamic calculated dimensions
Get Started with Marketing Cloud Intelligence: With Marketing Cloud Intelligence, you can integrate all your data from marketing and advertising platforms, web analytics, CRM, e-commerce, and more. You can then use this unified view of your data to optimize campaign performance and discover and act on insights in real time.
Account Settings in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: A Marketing Cloud Intelligence account is divided into workspaces. An account can contain multiple workspaces. Account settings allow you to manage and view data, user actions, and analytics for your account. In the account menu you can find account settings, such as account name and logo, number of allowed workspaces, and rows, and all the way to more advanced settings, such as currency, and password permissions.
Archiving in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: If you have a lot of data that you no longer use but want to keep, you can archive it . You can pull up archived data from previous time periods to use in reports.
What Are Cookies?: Cookies temporarily store a small amount of information in a user’s browser. For example, logging in to a website, preferences for particular content, capping how often a user sees ads, or tracking what a user does online. Cookies are set at the user level, allowing every user to customize their own cookie settings.
Manage Cookie Settings: You can manage your Marketing Cloud Intelligence cookie settings.
Custom Date Range in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: You can define your own date range categories using formulas or functions. You can use your custom date ranges anywhere a date can be selected in the workspace, such as reports, pivot tables, and widgets.
Collection Permissions in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Admins can set permissions to control access to collections for user groups, power users, and viewers. If a viewer has access to several workspaces, you can set permissions for each collection individually.
Set Individual Collection Permissions in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Set permissions to manage user access to your collections. The default collection permission table columns are collection, workspace, account, and permissions. You can show or hide additional columns in the table settings.
Collection Permissions for User Groups: You can apply collection permissions to a user group. If the group includes users with different user roles, such as admins, power users, and viewers, the collection permissions don’t extend the individual user role permissions.
Exchange Rates in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Manage your exchange rates easily and intuitively, see market rates, and export and customize your exchange rate table. You can set exchange rates at both the account and workspace levels.
Date Ranges in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Use a date range to display specific data. You can set a date range for a pivot table, report, and dashboard. You can select a predefined date range from the date picker, such as Last 30 days or This Month, or you can enter a range. When you set a date range, your data updates according to the dates selected.
Add an Exchange Rate at the Workspace Level: If you are setting an exchange rate at the workspace level, then you have the option to inherit the account level exchange rates by checking the Inherit account rates checkbox. If the inherit account rates checkbox is checked you can’t add new currency exchange rates on the workspace level.
Executive Workspaces in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: An executive workspace incorporates data from other workspaces, so you view and analyze data as if it’s one data pool. Executive workspaces can also function as a regular workspace allowing you to create data streams, and analyze data by creating rules, goals, calculated dimensions, and measurements.
Get Ready for Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Before we start, explore the Marketing Cloud Intelligence platform. Then check that you are using one of Salesforce’s support browsers. Finally, familiarize yourself with the user roles in Marketing Cloud Intelligence.
Location of all Help Topics: Beginning May 1, 2022, you can access Marketing Cloud Intelligence help documentation and training materials in Salesforce Help. The Datorama Success Center is no longer available.
Invite a User in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Invite Intelligence users to gain access to your workspace using the Access Invitation tab. Users have two weeks to accept or decline invitations. An email confirmation is sent to you when the invitation is accepted. You can view the invitation statuses in the Access Invitation tab.
Manage the Account Activity Logs in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Admin users can view and audit changes made in the account in the activity logs. The Account activity log shows high-level changes, such as adding and deleting users and changing the account row limits.
View Page Activity in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: You can monitor total page views and average views per the selected time period in the Account Analytics dashboard. The information is dynamic and changes according to the filters you select.
Account Deactivation in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Marketing Cloud Intelligence offers two types of customer accounts: Paying and POC. If an account expires and no renewal contract has been issued, a deactivation process is automatically initiated.
Activity Log in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Admin users can view and audit changes made in the account in the activity logs. The Account activity log shows high-level changes, such as adding and deleting users and changing the account row limits. The Entity activity log lists the changes made to a specific entity, such as a data stream, report, and collection.
Data Row Usage in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: When you upload a file into Marketing Cloud Intelligence, each row of data in the file occupies a row of data in the Intelligence database. Row usage is calculated as the sum of rows in the database for a specific account or workspace. Each Intelligence account has a set number of rows in the database that can be divided between the workspaces in the account.
Re-enable a Disabled User in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: A Marketing Cloud Intelligence Admin can re-enable a user or another admin. Users can be manually disabled. You can also disable users automatically if they’re inactive for a certain number of days.
Delete a User in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: When a user creates an entity, that user is the entity owner. If an entity owner is deleted, the entities created by that user become unowned. Some entities, such as actions, report schedulers, and data streams with specific retrieval settings, require an owner to function properly. When a user is being deleted, Marketing Cloud Intelligence checks whether the user owns entities that require an owner. You can then assign the entity to a new owner to keep the entities functioning properly.
Switching Between Accounts in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Switching between accounts can be done through the account settings. This enables you to view another account’s settings, account users, workspaces, data streams, and collections.
Manage Users in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Admins with Manage Account Users permissions can view and manage users across their account and workspaces from account settings in the Manage Users tab.
User Roles and Permissions: Marketing Cloud Intelligence includes three types of user roles: viewer, power user, and admin. A user role defines which actions a user can perform. Each user role has a default set of permissions, but you can assign users with the same role different permissions. For example, one user with the viewer role can view unpublished pages but another user with the viewer role can’t.
Marketing Cloud Intelligence Sandbox Testing Environment: You can use the Marketing Cloud Intelligence sandbox to test setup configurations and explore how new, modified, or deleted entities could impact and change live data before implementing them to production. Sandbox is enabled at the account level, so all workspaces under the account have access to the sandbox environment.
Manage Sandbox Entities in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Because sandbox is shared at the workspace level, all admins have access to the same sandbox mode. However, you can choose to let users see only the sandbox entities that they created.
Resolve Dependencies in the Marketing Cloud Intelligence Sandbox: Sometimes an entity is dependent on another entity. For example, if you create a calculated measurement in sandbox that is based on another calculated measurement also created in sandbox, the first measurement is dependent on the second to work correctly.
Marketing Cloud Intelligence Security: Marketing Cloud Intelligence uses a variety of industry-standard and state-of-the-art security technologies and procedures to help protect your information from unauthorized access, use, or disclosure. All users must have a registered MFA method in order to access the Marketing Cloud Intelligence platform directly. You can decide on which methods best suit your needs. Session timeout is another form of security and determines the amount of inactive time after which a user is logged out of the platform. The session timeout period can be set in the account settings. For security purposes there is a forced timeout after five days regardless of inactivity. Keeping up with the evolving security landscape is an ongoing, joint partnership between Marketing Cloud Intelligence and our customers. As security threats grow more common, it’s important to implement stronger measures to protect your business and customers.
Multi-Factor Authentication in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Multi-factor authentication (MFA) requires users to enter two or more pieces of evidence, or factors, to prove identification. One factor is something the user knows, such as a username and password combination. Other factors are verification methods that the user has in possession, such as an authenticator app or security key. All users must have a registered MFA method in order to access the Marketing Cloud Intelligence platform directly.
Supported Verification Methods in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: When a user logs in to Marketing Cloud Intelligence for the first time using Multi-Factor Authentication, the user must select at least one verification method. It’s recommended to provide users with several verification options.
Single Sign-On (SSO) in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: If you’re the administrator of a Marketing Cloud Intelligence account, you can grant team members access by signing into a central identity provider. SSO) makes access easier and more secure for everyone. You can put the identity provider that you already trust in charge of authentication, while team members can access Marketing Cloud Intelligence without another password to manage.
Add a User in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: When you add users, you can specify their user role and permissions to control which actions they can take and which features they have access to.
Token API and Authorization Settings in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Marketing Cloud Intelligence uses unique tokens to identify users and grant access to API resources. A user generates a token on the intelligence platform to be included in subsequent API calls. Account admins can enable or disable the Token API generator for specific users.
Generate a JSON Web Token (JWT): To obtain an access token, you need to generate a JWT with specific claims, and sign it using the RS256 algorithm with your private key.
Use the Access Token: After you have obtained the access token from the token request response, you can use it to make authenticated API calls to other endpoints.
Manage User Groups in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: You can create a user group to apply a set of content permissions and workspace user filters to users who need access to specific accounts or workspaces. A user role determines what a user can and can’t do, while a user group determines where the user can apply these permissions. You can assign a user to more than one user group.
Create a User Group: Create a user group to apply content permissions and workspace filters to a group of users who need access to specific accounts or workspaces.
Workspace Integrations in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Workspace integrations bring together multiple systems allowing them to work collaboratively with Marketing Cloud Intelligence. For example with the Slack integration you can share and export dashboard pages and widgets directly into Slack.
Intelligence Insights for Slack Integration: Marketing Cloud Intelligence Insights for Slack provides seamless collaboration with colleagues and clients allowing marketing teams to work together and communicate on campaigns and improve cross-functional work.
Create Slack Integration for Collections in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Configure Marketing Cloud Intelligence Insights for Slack to share dashboard pages and widgets. After the integration is set up, users with permissions and access to the collection can share dashboard pages and widgets in Slack.
Create a Slack Integration for Workspaces in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Configure Marketing Cloud Intelligence Insights for Slack to share dashboard pages and widgets. After the integration is set up, users with permissions and access to the workspace can share dashboard pages and widgets in Slack.
Workspace Settings in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Each Marketing Cloud Intelligence account can have multiple workspaces. Each workspace has its own data streams, dashboards, and reports. You typically use workspaces to separate clients, business units, channel views, internal views, or role-based views—whatever best fits your needs.
Workspace Analytics Report in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Workspace Analytics provides information about your workspace and helps you measure and improve user engagement. The report is available at both the account and workspace level. The data in the workspace report applies to the specific workspace. At the account level, you can view the data for all the workspaces in the account.
Calendar Events in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: You can add an event when you want to track important occasions in your workspace. For example, if you want to monitor spikes in sales around holidays or special sale events, you can add a calendar reminder.
Set Up Your First Workspace in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: After your Marketing Cloud Intelligence account is provisioned, you can now start setting up your workspace. A Marketing Cloud Intelligence account is divided into workspaces. Each workspace is a separate working environment with its own permissions. When you make changes, the changes are applied only to the workspace that you’re working in.
Restore Deleted Workspace Items in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: When you delete collections, pages, data streams, goals, templates, reports, pivot tables, calculated dimensions, dimension hierarchies, calculated measurements, filtered measurements, transformation rules, or highlighting rules, they are placed in the workspace bin. You can restore these items if needed.
Data Row Usage for Workspaces in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Data row usage is calculated as the sum of rows in Marketing Cloud Intelligence’s database for a specific account or workspace. The row count is mainly affected by the lowest level entity in your data, multiplied by the number of days for which there is measurement data.
Sharing Entities Between Workspaces in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: You can share common entities across workspaces and accounts. When the original entity is modified, you can opt to push the changes to all the workspaces that share the item. You can change only the original item, but you can de-link a shared item and then change it. You can also import new entities without updating existing shared items.
Harmonize Your Data: Marketing Cloud Intelligence offers multiple tools for harmonizing your data. Because you can upload data from various sources, you need a way to merge the data and provide a complete view of your marketing activity. In most cases, no single data source holds all relevant data on a marketing event or campaign. The data is shared by the multiple platforms that digital marketers use to do things like promoting the campaign on multiple channels. To analyze the full picture, harmonize data from all sources into one. If data isn’t harmonized, you must analyze each source individually—making it a challenge to gain insights quickly and efficiently.
Harmonize Data with the Harmonization Center: The Harmonization Center in the Connect & Mix tab, unifies, enriches, and validates your data in one place. In the Harmonization Center, create and manage your naming convention patterns, classifications, and harmonized dimensions.
Manage and Monitor Harmonized Dimensions: After harmonized dimensions are created, they appear in a list so you can easily manage them. Add classifications and validations, see previews, find and replace in bulk, and more.
Multi-Delimiter Patterns and Structure Compliance: A multi-delimiter pattern contains different types of delimiters in a pattern, such as an underscore, colon, and comma. Structure compliance determines how and when extractions take place. With a single delimiter pattern, an extraction occurs only for dimension values that adhere to the pattern’s exact structure. For example, dimensions that have the same number of positions as the dimension that you’re currently creating this pattern for. When working with multi-delimiter patterns, the logic is different.
Naming Convention Patterns: In the distraction-filled world of a digital marketer, clarity is important. Therefore, when using different marketing platforms, digital marketers often name an activity with all the information in the name. Proper naming allows them to differentiate between the different campaigns, and understand campaign goals and details at a glance without having to look elsewhere.
Create a Naming Convention Pattern: Create a naming convention pattern to deconstruct your dimension, which is in a naming convention form, and create harmonized dimensions for each segment of your naming convention. A harmonized dimension acts like any regular calculated dimension and can be used in the platform, for example in reports.
Data Classification: Classify your data without using a single line of code. For example, classify your sites by news, sports, or entertainment, and so on. Upload a classification file and create a classification rule.
Configure Classification Rules: After you upload or create a classification file using data classification, customize and configure the columns in your file. Determine which column is the Key column and which is the Value column. Control the way the system recognizes values in your file as well.
Classification Rule Example: This table shows how configuration types affect data classification and what happens when data is classified.
Create a Data Classification Rule: Create a classification rule to classify your data. You can upload a classification file or define the classification from scratch.
Classification Files: Use classification files when creating classification rules and to tell Marketing Cloud Intelligence how to classify the values.
Create a Classification File from Scratch: When creating classification rules you either upload a classification file or you create it from scratch. The file tells Marketing Cloud Intelligence how to classify your data.
Custom Classification Use Cases: Use this example to see how custom classifications are used to connect data from different data streams.
Fusing Data Between Datasets: Data fusion creates a link between dimensions that don’t already have a data model relationship between them.
Create a Data Fusion: Create a data fusion to link two datasets with a shared dimension together.
Applying Filters to Fused Dimensions: When applying a filter to fused dimensions, the filtering impacts the datasets associated with all the fused dimensions.
When to Use Data Fusion: Use data fusion to unify data that doesn’t naturally harmonize by virtue of the data model based on shared dimension values.
Generate Media Names with the Media Naming Builder: Create consistent campaign, placement, and creative names that match your naming conventions using the Media Naming Builder. Instead of manually generating names using other third party tools, add hundreds of names instantly based on your naming convention patterns and avoid data discrepancies.
Parent-Child Connections in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: A parent-child connection describes a case where two or more data streams are linked by a matching entity key. This connection establishes hierarchical dependencies between entities, allowing for grouping at various granular levels such as campaign, media buy, or creative. Matching entity keys between the data streams are required to establish a parent-child relationship.
Define a Parent Data Stream: Define a parent data stream to determine a connection between two data streams using a shared entity.
Parent-Child Use Cases: You can use parent-child connections when there are multiple data streams that share the same keys, but have unique attributes, and you must share a hierarchy between them. Here are examples of when parent-child can be used.
Validate and Maintain Your Harmonized Data in the Harmonization Center: Keeping track of your naming convention patterns, classifications, and harmonized dimensions is overwhelming and time-consuming. Fix & Maintain offers a solution for identifying data that doesn’t adhere to your predefined naming conventions or data classifications. Validate and maintain harmonized data with Fix & Maintain and if issues arise, fix, and adjust as needed.
Fix and Maintain Interface: Fix & Maintain, part of the Harmonization Center, identifies data that doesn’t adhere to predefined naming conventions or data classifications. In the Harmonization Center landing page, click Fix & Maintain.
Fixing Data in Fix & Maintain: Use Fix & Maintain to make corrections to source dimensions, harmonized dimensions, and data classification values. There are two ways to fix data. To make bulk changes, export exception reports manually, fix incorrect values, and then import the fixed data. To make a few changes, use in-line editing within Fix & Maintain and make changes directly in Marketing Cloud Intelligence.
Modify Harmonized Dimension: If after applying fixes to a harmonized dimension the setup changes by deleting a pattern or adding or removing a dimension, future fixes aren’t saved.
Fix Multiple Files Using Import and Export: Use import and export to fix multiple files when exceptions occur. There are two types of export options; export and download a file, or use schedule export to export the report at a set time and send to specific recipients.
Fix Single File Using In-Line Edit: To fix an entity inside Fix & Maintain, use in-line editing. A list of your harmonized data, including harmonized dimensions, source dimensions, and data classifications appears in order of least successful harmonization to most successful.
Marketplace Add-On Features: The Add-On Features tab is a centralized location for all of Marketing Cloud Intelligence add-ons. Add-on features extend the capabilities of the platform, and can be enabled for free, or at an extra cost.
Understanding App Installations: What happens when Marketplace apps are installed? What determines whether an app installs successfully or fails? Is there anything I can do to make sure the app installs successfully? If an app fails during an installation, is there a way to see why and even fix it? These are only some questions you’re probably asking yourself when installing Marketplace apps. This section explains how to troubleshoot and fix errors that occur when installing apps.
Fix a Failed App: If an app fails during installation you can explore and find out why this happened. You can see which processes must be fixed to install the app, and those that can be fixed at a later date.
Failed Apps and Their Implications: Apps don’t always install successfully. Sometimes there’s an issue with the app, or the processing of the underlying entities. For example, the provider timed out, the app installation timed out before the underlying entities were processed, or even due to invalid mapping.
App Installation Statuses: When an app starts to install, two synchronous steps occur during installation. These steps affect the installation status of the app.
Uninstall an App: If for some reason you no longer need an app and you want to remove it, you can use the uninstall option.
Marketplace Connectors: The Marketplace offers a Connectors library with a number of customized connectors. With connectors, connect to an external environment, instead of creating a custom connector. You can find connectors that were developed by partners, third-party vendors, and Intelligence.
Install a Connector: Install a connector to get a custom connector in your account. Connectors are installed for the entire account, meaning all workspaces in the account can use and see the connector.
View Marketplace Connectors: Explore the available connectors in the Marketplace to find the one that works best for your business needs. Here you can view the available connectors, get more information, and install a connector in your account.
View Installed Connectors: All installed connectors appear in the Installed Solutions page. From here, you can view information about the connector, uninstall, and report an issue.
Marketplace Widgets: Install and use Marketplace widgets in your workspace to get the full functionality of pre-defined custom widgets. Custom widgets include ready-to-use page visualization, navigation, and API solutions. After installing a custom widget, you can edit it and change your dashboard page’s design and behavior.
Add a Custom Widget to a Dashboard: Add a custom widget to apply more advanced use cases to your dashboard page. For example, use an EMI custom widget to surface AI-powered insights in your dashboards.
Install a Custom Widget: Add functionality to your workspace’s dashboard pages with a custom widget. After the custom widget installs it appears in your Installed Solutions page, and also becomes available in the Visualize tab just like other widget types.
Ecommerce Marketing Insights App: The Ecommerce Marketing Insights app shows you how your marketing efforts are driving ecommerce revenue. You can analyze your ecommerce performance, at any granularity and from any platform.
Set Up the Ecommerce Marketing Insights App: Connect your ecommerce, marketing, and web analytics platforms with the Ecommerce Marketing Insights app. You can connect to data streams in your workspace or add new ones. You can use the existing API connectors or ingest your data as a TotalConnect data stream.
Media Pacing App: The Media Pacing app is an instant pacing package for your Media Transparency Center. It provides you with visualization into your Planned Spend and Booked Units against your Actual Spend and Delivered Units.
Install the Media Pacing App: The Media Pacing app provides an overview of how well your media campaigns are pacing based on already defined data.
Run the Media Pacing App: After you install the Media Pacing app you can start visualizing your IO data. This allows you to easily and efficiently identify under and over pacing campaigns.
Media Planning Center App: The Media Planning Center enables advertisers to create plans for strategic allocation of advertising budget. It facilitates budget allocation at a high level, for entities such as channels, platforms, or strategy.
Analyze Your Budget By Dimension: Whenever you highlight an entity on the grid, an analytic display appears at the bottom presenting two analytic types, Forecast, and YoY (Year-over-Year). The data that displays is per the level that you’re currently highlighting, meaning if you drill up or down, the numbers change accordingly.
Calculation of Optimization Recommendations: The Media Planning Center performs a calculation to determine the performance of a specific dimension in terms of past performance and planned budget. It uses a scatter plot quadrant display to perform this calculation.
Set EMI Budget Constraints: From the Budget constraints tab, you can apply and remove optional settings. For example, turn off the EMI Budget allocator, set limitations, or expand how the EMI budget allocator splits your budget. This allows you to customize your budget and see more results.
EMI Budget Allocator: The Media Planning Center EMI Budget allocator is a tool used to automatically produce a recommended media budget scenario. Using AI-based forecasting and optimization algorithms, the EMI Budget Allocator offers an optimal suggestion on how to split your allocated budget, across your channels, platforms, and overall strategy.
Optimize Your Budget With Analysis Tools: The Optimize section looks at different entities in terms of past performance and planned budget. It then recommends how you can change your allocated budget to improve performance. It uses a scatter plot quadrant display, which shows a selected KPI against a certain dimension associated with the KPI in question.
Plan Your Budget Allocation: After you install the app, you can see the outline, or grid, of your budgeting plan. This grid contains all of the dimensions (in the hierarchy) alongside the timeframe, which was defined during the installation process.
Use The EMI Scenario Plan: The EMI scenario plan is a read-only plan, created automatically by the EMI Budget Allocator tool. The latest scenario is displayed in the Media Planning Center app.
Underlying Entities in Marketplace Apps: Underlying entities are created behind the scenes after Marketplace apps install. They enable the app to function properly. Each app has its own set or combination of underlying entities depending on the app’s purpose and functionality.
Editing Underlying Entities: Underlying Entities are editable so that you can apply your own business logic to the app’s entities.
Identifying Underlying Entities: You can differentiate between different types of entities, by looking at the naming convention of the entity.
Marketplace Apps and Tools in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: To enhance your marketing intelligence solutions, check out the apps and tools offered on the Marketing Cloud Intelligence Marketplace. Anyone can access the Marketplace, but depending on your user role, your access might be limited.
Add App Pages to Collections: An app page displays a view of an app instance without overriding the app instance’s settings. The name of the app appears as the app’s instance name and can’t be modified. If you want to change the name, go to the app page in the collection. If you must add another app page based on the same instance to the same collection, this can be done in the collection as well.
Marketplace Apps: The Marketplace offers easy down-loadable apps that you can customize to your own needs. No coding knowledge is required. After an app is installed, underlying entities are installed in your workspace. You also get a run mode of the app with configured dashboards allowing you full control of your views. It’s important to note that apps are installed for an entire workspace and only admins can install them. If you’re a power user or viewer, you can add the app to your wishlist and your admin installs the app for you.
Marketing Assistant App: Interact with Marketing Cloud Intelligence using voice or text to ask simple questions about marketing data. The Marketing Assistant app provides detailed answers in both voice and visuals.
Run the Marketing Assistant App: Use the Marketing Assistant app to ask questions about your marketing data and see results.
Set Up the Marketing Assistant App: The Marketing Assistant app displays a high-level overview of your marketing data. If you’re using voice commands, you configure the top KPIs and goals and define filters.
Audience Insights for Advertising Studio App: Optimize your audience strategy with a single, cross-channel view to analyze the effectiveness of your Facebook and Twitter audiences. The Audience Insights for Advertising Studio app connects Marketing Cloud Advertising to your paid media channels.
Run the Intelligence App for Marketing Cloud Advertising: After installing the Intelligence App for Marketing Cloud Advertising, the Audience Insights for Marketing Cloud Advertising dashboard appears on the Visualize tab. Use the dashboard to see how your campaigns using first-party audiences are performing.
Set Up the Audience Insights for Advertising Studio App: The Audience Insights for Advertising Studio app provides a single, cross-channel view of your Facebook and Twitter audiences. Setting up the app involves classifying your campaign strategies.
Available Marketplace Apps: Here you can find information about all the available apps in the Marketplace. Click an app to view more details about what it does, how to install it and how to use it after it’s installed in your workspace.
Create Another Instance of an App: Create another instance of an app when you want to install the same app twice, with two configurations for two different business units. This prevents you from having to go back to the Marketplace to search for and install the app.
Cross-Channel Marketing Insights: The Cross-Channel Marketing Insights App (CCMI) connects your cross channel marketing data including Facebook Ads, Instagram Ads, LinkedIn Ads, Pinterest Ads, Twitter Ads, and Google Ads. The app allows you to optimize your paid campaigns across every major channel. This app is a great starting point for users who are still going through an implementation process, as it enables you to quickly connect your data sources with just one click. The app is also useful for customers who are looking for a quick and clear overview of their campaign performance.
Run the Cross-Channel Marketing Insights App: Use the Cross-Channel Marketing Insights app to view campaigns across your marketing channels all in one place. Get customized, data-driven insights. Switch between the different tabs to explore views and insights of your cross channel marketing data.
Customer Insights for Marketing Cloud Customer Data Platform App: Unify all your data from anywhere for a complete view of your customers. With the Customer Insights for Marketing Cloud Customer Data Platform app, you can pull calculated insights, ingest predefined insights on demographics, engagement, and conversion, and deploy out-of-the-box dashboards in Marketing Cloud Intelligence.
Run the Customer Insights for Marketing Cloud Customer Data Platform App: Installing the Customer Insights for Marketing Cloud Customer Data Platform app creates a collection and dashboards for each insight type that you selected during the installation. For example, if you selected two insight types, engagement and conversion, a dashboard appears for each type. You can also access the collection directly from Data 360.
Data Dictionary App: The Data Dictionary app provides access to a list of all available fields in your workspace, including calculated fields, such as calculated dimensions and measurements. Use this app to understand how fields are built and how they relate to your data.
Run the Data Dictionary App: Use the Data Dictionary app to view a list of all the available fields in your workspace. After the app has been created and shared with you, you can open it.
Set Up the Data Dictionary App: The Data Dictionary app provides a list of all the available fields in your workspace. Setting up the app involves selecting the fields that you want to view, refining the selected fields, and then reviewing them to make sure that you included the correct fields.
Data Readiness App: The Data Readiness app monitors the quality of your data harmonization efforts across all designated dimensions. The app focuses on calculated, harmonized, and mapped dimensions. Use the Data Readiness app to view the naming convention compliance of your dimensions and identify noncompliant data sources.
Run the Data Readiness App: Run the Data Readiness app to monitor the quality of your data harmonization efforts. Review and analyze the success rates for each harmonization dimension, and filter the data by data sources and data streams. After the app installs, two new app pages are created for you and appear in your dashboards.
Set Up the Data Readiness App: The Data Readiness app provides an overall view of your harmonized data and helps you ensure that your data is classified based on the naming convention that you defined in your workspace.
The Marketing Cloud Intelligence Developer Portal: The Developer Portal is an easy-to-use and centralized location for developers who want to develop tools, use cases, and examples. The Developer Portal offers these tools: Query API, Platform API, Custom Data Connectors, and Apps.
Email to Web Conversion GA4 App: Connect your web analytics and email data into one dashboard using the Email to Web Conversion GA4 app. The app simplifies the process of data harmonization between emails and traffic and addresses the email use case for multiple email vendors.
Run the Email to Web Conversion GA4 App: Installing the Email to Web Conversion GA4 app creates a collection with two complementary visualizations: the Email Campaign Performance dashboard and the Email to Web Conversion app page. The dashboard provides a comprehensive view of your email campaign’s performance.
Set Up the Email to Web Conversion GA4 App: The Email to Web Conversion GA4 app connects your web analytics and email data into one dashboard. The app simplifies data harmonization between emails and traffic. Setting up the app involves classifying your Google Analytics campaign names and email campaign names so that they match.
Requirements for Harmonizing Your Data in the Email to Web Conversion G4 App: To harmonize your data, the Email to Web Conversion GA4 app matches your Google Analytics and email campaign names. Therefore, if you’re using different naming conventions for Google Analytics and your email data, classify your campaign names so that the app can locate the data from each source.
Marketing Insights for Sales Cloud App: The Marketing Insights for Sales Cloud app helps marketers and sales understand how their marketing efforts and spend convert into revenue. The app provides various views to analyze data based on objectives. For example, find the weak links in a sales funnel or the business justifications to allocate a certain percentage of your marketing budget to a campaign.
Set Up the Marketing Insights for Sales Cloud App: The Marketing Insights for Sales Cloud app provides an overview of marketing efforts and spend and how they convert into revenue. Setting up the app involves connecting CRM data, connecting ad data, and harmonizing CRM and ad data.
Search Keyword Insights App: Connect your organic and paid search data to view overall search performance and keyword insights. Automatically identify what is and isn’t covered by your paid campaigns and use that information in future campaigns to drive growth.
Run the Search Keyword Insights App: Installing the Search Keyword Insights app creates an app page that shows all search terms that weren’t covered by your SEM. It also shows organic and paid data side by side so that you can compare their performance.
Set Up the Search Keyword Insights App: To optimize keywords based on their organic insights, the Search Keyword Insights app shows which organic search terms are included in paid keywords and which aren’t. Setting up the app involves connecting your SEO and SEM data and applying filters.
Lead Generation App: The Lead Generation app tracks the relationship between Lead Generations and Opportunities, and it harmonizes and connects your lead generation data.
Set Up the Lead Generation App: The Lead Generation app provides an analysis of lead generation data. Setting up the app involves authenticating and setting queries, setting up a funnel, and classifying your opportunity stages.
Salesforce Marketing Cloud Email App: The Salesforce Marketing Cloud Email app pulls data from both Marketing Cloud Email Studio and Journey Builder. The app provides enhanced analytics, identifies and classifies top KPIs, and tracks the progress of data points.
Set Up the Salesforce Marketing Cloud Email App: The Salesforce Marketing Cloud Email app provides an analysis of Marketing Cloud Email Studio and Journey Builder data. Setting up the app involves connecting a Marketing Cloud account, configuring data sets, and setting goals.
Media Naming Builder App: Create consistent campaign, placement, and creative names that match your naming conventions using the Media Naming Builder app. Instead of manually generating names with other third-party tools, add hundreds of names instantly based on your naming convention patterns and avoid data discrepancies.
Install the Media Naming Builder App: The Media Naming Builder app allows you to create hundred of names (campaign, placement, and creative) based on naming conventions.
Use the Media Naming Builder App: After the Media Naming Builder app installs, you can use it to create hundreds of names based on naming convention patterns.
Multi-Touch Attribution App: Discover which first-party marketing touchpoints led to conversions or brought in the highest revenue according to attribution models.
Run the Multi-Touch Attribution App: Run the Multi-Touch Attribution app to see which first-party marketing touchpoints led to conversions or brought in the highest revenue according to the attribution model. Each attribution model selected during setup has its own dashboard page.
Set Up the Multi-Touch Attribution App: The Multi-Touch Attribution app provides an analysis of first-party marketing touchpoint data. Setting up the app involves ingesting first-party user-level data into the Granular Data Center and defining touchpoints, conversions, and attribution models. The fields that appear during setup are derived from Granular Data Centers. Changes to data must be done in the Granular Data Center.
eCommerce Optimizer App: The eCommerce Optimizer app provides a complete interactive picture of your Return On Ad Spend (ROAS) by connecting ecommerce spend and revenue. This app provides a detailed visual breakdown of where your spend is performing best and how individual platform and channel performance updates. Discover which first-party marketing touchpoints led to conversions or brought in the highest revenue according to attribution models.
Run the eCommerce Optimizer App: Run the eCommerce Optimizer app to see which channels and platforms are generating the most optimized ROAS on your ecommerce sites
Set Up the eCommerce Optimizer App: The eCommerce Optimize app provides an analysis of Return On Ad Spend (ROAS) data. Setting up the app involves connecting your revenue data and spend data.
Share a Live App Externally: Create an external link to your app and share it with others outside of the Marketing Cloud Intelligence platform.
Share an Offline Version of the App: Use the export option to share an offline version of the app with other users. You can either export the app instance into a PDF format, or create a scheduled export and define a report. Apps can be shared either within the app itself, or in the Installed Solutions page.
Social Intelligence App: See how your brand compares to your competitors’ brands by looking at follower growth, post patterns, overall messaging, and preconfigured AI insights.
Run the Social Intelligence App: Installing the Social Intelligence app creates an app page that shows all the social competitive data gathered during configuration.
Set Up the Social Intelligence App: The Social Intelligence app provides an analysis of social competitive data from Twitter, Facebook, Instagram, and YouTube. Setting up the app involves connecting your brand and competitor data.
Get Started with the Marketing Cloud Intelligence Marketplace: The Marketing Cloud Intelligence Marketplace is a repository of tools and apps for anyone creating a marketing intelligence solution. Easily download and customize apps, connectors, and more from the Marketplace. While anyone can access the Marketplace, each user role has different permissions.
Get to Know the Marketplace Interface: The Marketplace provides a large repository of apps and tools to help you enhance your marketing intelligence solutions. All the apps and tools can be accessed via the Marketplace main page.
Manage an Installed App: The Installed Solutions page displays all of the apps you have installed to your workspace. From here you can access and manage all of your installed apps, including sharing, uninstalling, and troubleshooting.
Sharing Apps: Share an app from the Installed Solutions page to enable other people to use the apps installed on your workspace.
Share an Installed App: Share installed apps to enable other user roles within your workspace to use the app. You can share apps only with users who have access to your workspace. All admins of the workspace automatically see all of the apps.
View Installed Solutions: Access and manage all of your installed solutions from the Installed Solutions page.
Implementation Templates App: Use the Implementation Templates app to download QA templates for testing and validating data sources. When you download a template, a new page is added to your collection so that you can easily access the template.
Install the Implementation Templates App: Use the Implementation Templates app to access ready-to-use QA templates. No setup is required after you install the app.
Run the Implementation Templates App: Download QA templates for testing and validating data sources directly to your workspace. You can then access the template whenever needed. A new page is created in your collection for each template you select. You can then go directly to the page and start checking your data sources.
Workspace Health Monitoring App: The Workspace Health Monitoring app lets you monitor and handle any processing issues in your Marketing Cloud Intelligence workspace. This app provides a simple, centralized view of your automatic processes running in Marketing Cloud Intelligence. View failed reports, actions, data streams, and workflows, and fix entities by logging a ticket or notifying a colleague about outstanding issues.
Configure the Workspace Health Monitoring App: You can customize the information that you display for each entity in the Workspace Health Monitoring app. For example, you can change the tolerance to set the urgency level and register to a daily email service.
Install the Workspace Health Monitoring App: The Workspace Health Monitoring app provides an overall view of the health of your workspace. View the status of all your data streams, reports, actions, and workflows. If a process fails, take immediate action to fix the failed entity. No setup is required with this app—install it and the app is ready for use.
Run the Workspace Health Monitoring App: Get an overall view of your workspace entities with the Workspace Health Monitoring app. View all successful and failed data streams, reports, actions, and workflows. Open an entity to view more details, and then fix an issue by opening a ticket or by sending an email to a colleague informing them of the issue.
Calculated Measurements: A calculated measurement is a numerical custom calculation that you can create on top of your existing data. The calculated measurement doesn’t physically exist in the database. Rather, it represents a query that you can reference from any report, pivot table, or widget in your dashboard pages.
Aggregation and Total Aggregation Functions: An aggregation function computes numerical calculations on data, allowing the query to return summarized information about a given column or result set. You can use an aggregation function to calculate each row at the dimension level or the total value. In Marketing Cloud Intelligence, you define the aggregation function when creating a calculated measurement.
Create a Calculated Measurement from a Widget: Create calculated measurements on top of existing data so you can refer to them across your workspace. Widgets can be used to display the calculated measurement data.
Filtered Measurements: A filtered measurement is used to customize an existing measurement to include information relating to a specific dimension attribute.
Create a Filtered Measurement: Create a filtered measurement to customize a measurement to include specific information correlating to certain dimensional attributes. For example, you want to display your impressions only from an ads verification source. You can create a filtered measurement based on impressions that is filtered for only the ads verification source. The filtered measurement is a separate measurement and does not affect the original measurement it is based on. Filtered measurements can only be based on system measurements, not calculated measurements.
Create a Filtered Measurement from a Widget: A filtered measurement is used to customize a measurement to include information relating to a specific dimension attribute. You can create a filtered measurement directly from within a widget.
Granularity in Calculated Measurements: Granularity is the level of detail considered and then represented in an analysis or query. The greater the granularity, the deeper the level of detail. With more detail, you can better understand the smaller components of your data and create a fuller picture.
System Calculated Measurement: Marketing Cloud Intelligence calculates popular industry measurements that you can use as data in widgets, reports, and pivot tables. The measurements are calculated using fixed formulas using your workspace’s data. A measurement is available only if its formula’s components are mapped in an existing data stream. For example, if you uploaded a data source with MTC data, the MTC system calculated measurements appear. This table describes the available system calculated measurements and their formulas.
Measurements: In Marketing Cloud Intelligence, measurements are quantitative numerical data that you can count, for example, number of clicks and emails opened. Measurements are used to set KPIs and analyze your data.
Media Transparency Center: The Marketing Cloud Intelligence Media Transparency Center allows you to ingest, unify, and analyze Media Plan and Delivery data to pace, track costs, and effectively optimize your media budgets and campaigns.
Applying Pacing Dimensions: When viewing periodic data at a daily level, the data appears as spikes of metrics on the first day of the week or month. To avoid data spikes, you can map one or more pacing dimensions to the data stream. Pacing equally divides periodic data into multiple chunks of rows and spreads the chunks over the selected time period. Because pacing creates multiple new rows across the time period, using a pacing dimension can increase your row count.
Map a Pacing Dimension: A pacing dimension divides data into shorter time periods to avoid data spikes. Map a pacing dimension according to the way your data is brought in. For example, if your data stream uses only the start date, map the Start Date to the Day dimension and then set the pacing period.
Mapping Measurements with a Pacing Period: When using a pacing period, it’s important to map the measurements correctly. For example, if you map impressions or clicks, their type is Integer. However, mapping an Integer type can result in the calculation being rounded down. You can avoid miscalculations by using a delivery custom metric.
Collections: After you connect your data to Marketing Cloud Intelligence, you can start to organize and manage your data for the different departments of your organization—for example, delivery data, cost data, or social impact. The relevant data for each department is managed in separate visualization entities or collections.
Get Started: To get started, learn about visualization elements (collections, pages, and widgets), visualization tools, and how to navigate the Visualize tab in the Marketing Cloud Intelligence platform.
Get to Know Visualization Elements: The visualization process in Marketing Cloud Intelligence includes three elements: collections, pages, and widgets.
Navigate the Visualize Tab: Go to the Visualize tab to familiarize yourself with the available options and to find all the visualize elements. The Visualize tab is dynamic and changes when you select different elements.
Get to Know Visualize Tools: Marketing Cloud Intelligence offers an array of different tools to help you create professional, eye-catching dashboards quickly and efficiently. View your data clearly and share it using multiple formats.
Pages: Pages segment your collections so you can divide up your data according to your preferences, such as products, campaigns, or social platforms. Each page can be customized and filtered, so you can modify the design and remove any unwanted data. To assist you in dividing the visualization into manageable sections, you can have multiple pages within a collection.
Add Filters to Your Page: You can add filters to your page when you want to filter the page by any dimension, measurement, or date. Filters are defined in the Filters tab when in Edit Mode.
App Pages: An app page is a page added to your collection that displays all the valuable data generated from an installed app. App pages enable you to visualize and customize a marketplace app within your collection, without running over the app instance settings.
Create an App Page: You can add new app pages directly from the marketplace or the Visualize tab.
Edit an App Page: You can edit an app page in collections when you want to apply filters to the page or change the page design. You can align the colors of your app visuals to your dashboard’s look and feel so you can share your app pages with your end users.
Create Blank Dashboard Pages: You can use a blank dashboard page to create visualizations of your data without any predefined settings or design. For example, create a dashboard page to illustrate how campaigns are performing to an executive overview. Divide dashboard pages according to products, campaigns, or social platforms. And customize them to your preferences.
Use Custom Themes: Custom themes provide you with the flexibility to create any designed theme you want. After you apply an InstaBrand design, you can apply manual changes to your dashboard page from the different customization options available beneath the InstaBrand options.
Customize Dashboard Pages: After you create a dashboard page, you can customize it to meet your needs via Edit Mode.
Dashboard Page Templates: Dashboard page templates are based on a dashboard template saved to the workspace. Dashboard templates allow you to replicate your dashboard pages across your collections and workspace. When you create a dashboard template, all the data and design, including theme, widgets, and filters, are cloned into the new dashboard page. Using dashboard templates helps unify your workspace and save valuable time because you don’t create the same dashboard page from scratch.
Use Dashboard Page Templates: Use a dashboard page template when you want to replicate your dashboard pages across your collections and workspace.
Design Your Page: In the Design tab when in Edit Mode, you can design your page to create beautiful and effective dashboard pages.
Create Interactive FilterSets: Interactive FilterSets enable admins and power users to save different views of their dashboard page by saving the selections made to the interactive filter widgets. You can also apply interactive FilterSets as a filter option within the dashboard page. For example, if your dashboard page displays all your campaigns around the world but you want viewers to quickly see the most successful campaigns in the US.
Use InstaBrand: InstaBrand is an AI-powered image analysis tool that automatically generates beautiful, branded dashboard page themes. You can upload an image or choose from a vast catalog of images.
Use Designed Themes: Designed themes provide an array of generic themes that you can instantly apply to your dashboard page to produce stunning visualizations of your data.
Share and Export Pages and Widgets: After you’re done creating and designing your page, you’re ready to publish and share it with others. Use the Share option to share pages and widgets from the same place.
Use Advanced Export: Advanced export gives you the power to design the layout of your page before exporting it and customizing it for print, presentations, or emails. A layout includes a page’s structure and saved settings so that you can reuse it in the future. You can maintain different layouts based on your use case, including interactive filtersets, and only include relevant materials.
Download Dashboard Pages and Widgets: You can download dashboard pages and widgets so you can share them with multiple people within your organization. This download produces a local version of your dashboard page or widget.
Create an Email Rule: Create a rule to trigger an email. You can schedule email alerts based on specific KPIs or by a particular date and time. Use rules to stay updated on the progress of your data.
Share and Embed Dashboard Pages and Widgets: After creating a visualization of your data, you can embed it as a page or widget in a third-party site or share a link with stakeholders.
Share Pages and Widgets: You can share pages and widgets to collaborate with colleagues and clients.
Scheduled Reports: Admin and power users can create a scheduled report so that a collection, dashboard page, or widget is sent to them at a specific time. This feature is especially useful to send executive overviews automatically or to send a weekly report to stakeholders without manually downloading and sending the report.
Create a Slack Rule: Create a rule in Slack to trigger alerts based on specific KPIs or by a particular date and time. Use rules to stay updated on the progress of your data.
Share to Email: You can share widgets and pages via email to collaborate with colleagues and clients.
SmartLenses in Marketing Cloud Intelligence: SmartLenses are predefined dashboard pages that are created for you after a supported data source is created for the first time. After the data source is processed and data is retrieved, a notification appears with a link to the SmartLenses dashboard page. All SmartLenses dashboard pages are hosted under one designated SmartLenses collection.
Widgets: Widgets are the graphic elements that appear on the page and display your data through pie charts, tables, and bar graphs. Marketing Cloud Intelligence offers multiple widget types: interactive, element, and custom.
Additional Widgets: You can find an array of widgets in the Visualize tab.
Advanced Customizations: Apply advanced customizations to your widgets such as forecasting, highlighting rules, and cascading filters.
Cascading Filters: Cascading filters allow you to apply a filtering component such as a page filter or an interactive filter widget to other interactive filter widgets. After you apply a cascading filter, the list of values in the selected interactive filters widgets are filtered to only contain values that are relevant to the selected value.
Forecasting: Forecasting allows you to activate sophisticated algorithms that predict the behavior of a specific measurement.
Activate Forecasting: Forecasting is available within the bar graph widget when using a date dimension (day, month, or week).
Highlighting Rules: Highlighting rules enable you to highlight values in a widget, allowing you to track specific values associated with measurements and dimensions. For example, you can use a highlighting rule to track the click-through rate (CTR) of a specific campaign to make sure that you remain within your key performance indicators (KPIs). Or you can use a highlighting rule to mark a specific media buy that you want to monitor.
Set Up a Highlighting Rule: You can create highlighting rules directly from the widget you want to add the rule to or from the Highlighting Rules section under the Visualize tab. To create multiple rules at a time, use the Highlighting Rules section.
Create a Widget: You can create a widget from the Visualize tab.
Add Data to Your Widget: You can add data to your widget by selecting the measurements and dimensions you want to display. This step is mandatory because you can’t save the widget without data.
Add a Filter to a Widget: Narrow what a widget shows by adding a filter, for example, limiting results to a particular campaign.
Design Your Widget: The Design tab provides capabilities to further tailor the appearance of specific widgets on your page. You can make the widget stand out more by modifying the background and changing fonts. Widget design is based on your pre-determined page theme, so your page’s design is always cohesive and put together.
Apply a Dimension Filter to a Page: Filter a page to a dimension from a widget. For example, filter the page to show the results of a specific product
Create an Apply Filter Widget: Use the apply filter widget to update a page after you apply all the filters to the page, instead of updating the page values after applying each filter. When using the apply filter widget, click Apply after you select all the filters you want to apply to the page and the page updates.
Create a Custom Widget: Custom widget is a complete development interface within Marketing Cloud Intelligence collections that allows nearly limitless dashboard page design and behavior. It includes HTML, CSS, and JavaScript coding environments, with access to a full library of functions that provide ready-to-use page visualization, navigation, and API solutions.
Add EMI APIs to Custom Widgets: Einstein Marketing Insights (EMI) is an insights discovery tool used to analyze a data set and uncover key highlights that affect your performance in a positive or negative manner. This tool enables you to become proactive with your marketing efforts. The EMI APIs allow you to pull your insight bots and insights into custom widgets.
Create a Headers Widget: A headers widget is a preconfigured custom widget that allows you to quickly and easily insert a header on your page. The header can contain a logo and links to specific widgets on the page, links within Marketing Cloud Intelligence, or links to external web pages. Use a headers widget to introduce the content displayed on the page, to brand the page, to insert links to other pages, or to scroll to specific areas on the page.
Create an Image Widget: The image widget provides you with the ability to upload an image into your page. You can either upload a file or link to a URL.
Create a Map Widget: Map widgets illustrate the geographical location of a data variable. Color progression or bubble size is used to represent value in each region of the map—the darker the color, or the bigger the bubble, the higher the value. You can use map widgets to illustrate which areas within selected locations have the most or least data. For example, where in the world do you gain the most page views.
Create a Rich Text Widget: The rich text widget allows you to enter freestyle text in your page and edit it with an editor. You can also make a query and then display the results of that query within the widget. You can also style the text any way you want.
Create a Goal Widget: After you create a goal in your workspace, you can visualize the goal using a goal widget. A goal widget can only be set up if you have a goal in your workspace.
Apply Interactive Filters via a URL: Marketing Cloud Intelligence allows you to include the interactive filter values you want to apply to a page inside the page URL. You can use this feature when you want to send pages that are filtered by different values to different users. For example, if your page is filtered at a high-level view, you can send different market heads this high-level view filtered by specific markets.
Create an Interactive Filter Widget: The interactive filter widget manages the filter settings for other widgets in a dynamic, flexible manner. It displays all values contained in a given dimension, and it can be applied to specific widgets on the page.
Use an Interactive Date Filter Widget: The interactive date filter widget offers an easy way to set and toggle between date ranges on your entire page or for specific widgets of your choice. This option is available for admins, power users, and viewers. But one of its main objectives is to enable viewers to filter the page according to a specific date range.
Create a Switch Widget: A switch widget is an interactive filter widget that is available in the widget library. You can switch or add measurements or dimensions.
Create a Switch Currency Widget: A switch currency widget is a type of interactive filter widget available in the widget library. With this widget you can switch the currency for all currency-metrics on the page.
Create a Switch Date Widget: A switch date widget is a type of interactive filter widget available in the widget library. With this widget you can switch the date granularity of widgets used in the page.
Widget Types: Marketing Cloud Intelligence offers three different types of widgets so you can visualize your data. The creation process is dynamic according to the type of widget you select.
Chart Widgets: A chart widget shows data in various forms, such as a bar graph, line chart, and pie chart.
Element Widgets: Element widgets are static elements that you can add to a page, such as rich text, videos, images, and custom widgets created using JavaScript, CSS, or HTML.
Interactive Widgets: Interactive widgets allow users who browse the page to toggle between measurements and dimensions without modifying the data on the page.
Visualize Your Data with Marketing Cloud Intelligence: Marketing Cloud Intelligence offers many tools so you can get a real-time view of all your marketing data in one place. You get everything from standard key performance indicator (KPI) reporting to complex visualizations required for audience segmentation, customer journey analytics, and predictive modeling. And it’s all done in the Visualize tab in the Marketing Cloud Intelligence platform.
Integrate and Analyze Marketing Data with Marketing Cloud Intelligence: With Marketing Cloud Intelligence you connect, harmonize, visualize, and act on your marketing data to optimize performance within campaigns, discover insights in real-time, and then act on them. Learn more about each in the associated help sections.
Default Dimension Hierarchies: When using drill-down, these system hierarchies are used, listed from the highest to lowest dimension in the hierarchy.
Delete Data from Data Streams: When you delete data from a data stream in your workspace within the Delete Data tab, only the measurements are deleted. The dimension values associated with the deleted data aren’t deleted nor are the classification data, dimension-only data, CRM entities, and overarching entities. To delete all data from a data stream, remove the data stream from the Data Stream List.
Distributed Multivariate Block: Give Marketing Cloud Engagement business users the ability to interact with content variations using the multivariate content block. First, define a variable and up to 12 value options for the variable. Then, use the variable in your email AMPscript to define content variations, similar to dynamic content. Business users select from the options you define.
Drill-Down Hierarchies: You can drill down dimensions in a bar graph or pie chart widget to view data at a lower granularity. You can use the default system dimension hierarchies or create your own.
Enhanced Email for Account Engagement: Connect to customers with emails that are easy to design on the Salesforce platform. After you build email templates or email content, customize them with HML merge fields. Then, choose whether to send an individual email or add it to a program in Engagement Studio. Streamline writing time by reusing email content, or send and resend email content to different segments. Tailor the send experience, and track email engagements to determine how well your email content is performing.
Work with Marketing Flows: Flows are an independent object in Salesforce and they have a wide variety of use cases. In marketing, campaigns and flows are designed to work together to organize marketing efforts, automate content distribution, and report outcomes.
Share Standalone Marketing Flows: Marketing flows that are related to a campaign inherit the campaign’s sharing settings. If a flow isn’t related to a campaign or the campaign is deleted, the flow is private by default. You can share standalone flows categorically with sharing rules, or share an individual flow manually.
Design Promotions Programmatically: Use the Promotion Creation API to create, configure, and manage promotions. System integrators can seamlessly integrate the API with external systems where users such as store managers can create promotions.
Design Promotions: With Global Promotions Management, companies can run promotions for their complete customer base. Marketing managers use the Promotion Console app to create promotions and perform their day-to-day promotion management tasks.
What Happens After Pricing Promotion Activation: When you activate a promotion that uses the pricing promotion template, a set of records is created and associated with the promotion record. The associated records track the promotion’s eligibility criteria and limits. If a pricing promotion is associated with a Marketing Cloud Engagement business unit and you activate the promotion’s launch email, a journey is automatically created for the promotion in the business unit.
Things to Keep in Mind Before Creating Promotions: Before marketing managers create promotions, they must make sure that admins complete the required setup. Marketing managers must also understand what types of promotions they can create.
Promotion Console Tab: From the Promotion Console tab, marketing managers create promotions and manage all the tasks related to promotions.
Promotion Console App for Promotion Management: Global Promotions Management provides marketing managers an app to design and run promotions. The Promotion Console app is a one-stop solution for marketing managers to run promotions for the company or the company’s loyalty program.
Plan Your Promotion’s Design: Global Promotions Management provides marketing managers multiple options for key promotion configurations such as eligibility, rules, and limits. Before marketing managers create a promotion, they can finalize their requirements and map the requirements to the options on the Quick Promotion guided flow.
Reward Catalog: On the Rewards Catalog, marketing managers add and manage the types of rewards that they offer customers as part of the company’s promotions.
Quick Promotion Wizard Steps: Each step of the Quick Promotion wizard provides marketing managers a set of options to design promotions based on their company’s marketing strategy. Review the configuration options of each step to understand how you can get the most out of the Quick Promotion wizard.
Select Personalization Configuration: On the Select Personalization Configuration step of the Quick Promotion wizard, marketing managers choose which values to personalize and select the predictive AI source that generates the values.
Add Promotion Limits: To keep the promotion within the approved budget and prevent malicious activities, on the Add Promotion Limits step of the wizard, marketing managers can set promotion limits for the whole promotion and for individual customers.
Configure Promotion Template: On the Configure Promotion Template step, marketing managers configure a promotion rule based on the template that they selected in the Select Promotion Template step.
Build Your Own Promotion: Use the Build Your Own Promotion template to design rules with nuanced eligibility criteria. Add multiple eligibility criteria, with each criterion consisting of a set of conditions. Decide the logic for each criterion and further tailor your promotion by adding product attribute–based criteria and an aggregate condition.
What Customers Get Section in the Build Your Own Promotion Template: Offer customers a wide variety of rewards with the Build Your Own Promotion template. You can offer customers discounts on their cart, cart items, and combos. Along with cart-level discounts, you can also offer rewards such as vouchers, games, points, and badges.
Buy X, Get Discount + Rewards: Use the Buy X, Get Discount + Rewards promotion template to offer customers a discount on their cart and other rewards when they purchase specific products.
Spend X, Get Discount + Rewards: Use the Spend X, Get Discount + Rewards promotion template to offer customers a discount on their cart and other rewards when their shopping cart is worth a specific value.
Buy X, Get Discounted Combo + Rewards: Use the Buy X, Get Discounted Combo + Rewards promotion template to offer customers a discounted combo of specific products or products from specific categories. You can also offer other rewards to customers when they purchase specific products or products from specific categories. This template is available only when Promotion Evaluation and Execution is turned off.
Spend X, Get Discounted Combo + Rewards: Use the Spend X, Get Discounted Combo + Rewards promotion template to offer customers a discounted combo of specific products or products from specific categories. You can also offer customers other rewards when their shopping cart is worth a specific value.
Decision Table-Based Promotion: When customers fulfill conditions specified in the decision table, they get the corresponding rewards.
What Customers Get Section in the Decision Table-Based Promotion Template: Offer customers a discount on their cart or on the unit price of a product with the Decision Table-Based Promotion template. The discount value for each promotion rule comes from the output column of the decision table that you select.
Buy X, Get Discount on Y + Rewards: Use the Buy X, Get Discount on Y + Rewards promotion template to offer customers a discount on cart lines that include specific products or products from specific categories. You can offer other rewards to customers when they purchase specific products or products from specific categories. You can offer the discount on the price of each line item or the combined price of the line. You can also use the Buy X, Get Discount on Y + Rewards template to offer customers a product for free.
What Customers Get Section in the Buy X, Get Discount on Y + Rewards Promotion Template: Offer customers a discount on the specific lines of their cart if the cart line includes specific products or products from specific categories. On the cart line, you can provide the discount on either the price of each line item or the combined price of the line. You can also offer other rewards such as vouchers, badges, games, and points. You can offer vouchers and games to all the customers.
Spend X, Get Discount on Y + Rewards: Use the Spend X, Get Discount + Rewards promotion template to offer customers a discount and other rewards on cart lines when their shopping cart is worth a specific value. You can configure specific rewards for individual products or categories within the cart rather than the cart as a whole. You can also use this template to offer customers a product for free when the spend threshold is met.
What Customers Get Section in the Spend X, Get Discount on Y + Rewards Promotion Template: Offer customers a discount on the specific lines of their cart if the cart line includes specific products or products from specific categories. On the cart line, provide the discount on either the price of each line item or the combined price of the line. You can also offer other rewards such as vouchers, badges, games, and points. You can offer vouchers and games to all the customers. You can offer points and badges to only the members of the promotion’s loyalty program.
Pricing Promotion Template Limits: Review the limits that you come across when using pricing promotion templates for creating the rules of your promotions.
Buy X, Get Unit Price Discount on Y + Rewards: Use the Buy X, Get Unit Price Discount on Y + Rewards promotion template to offer customers a discount on the unit price of a specific product or products from a specific category.
Spend X, Get Unit Price Discount on Y + Rewards: Use the Spend X, Get Unit Price Discount on Y + Rewards promotion template to offer customers a discount on the unit price of a specific product or products from a specific category when their shopping cart is worth a specific value.
Enter Primary Information: On the first step of the Quick Promotion wizard, marketing managers enter the promotion’s name, duration, code, and business unit.
Review and Activate Promotion: On the Review and Activate step of the wizard, marketing managers can review the promotion’s complete configuration before they activate the promotion. If the promotion needs a business executive’s approval before activation, marketing managers can save the promotion.
Design Distribution Assets: On the Design Distribution Assets step of the wizard, marketing managers can design and activate the launch email for pricing promotions. Marketing managers get a predefined email and they can customize the email based on the promotion’s branding requirements. To personalize the email for customers, marketing managers can add promotion and contact merge fields.
Select Promotion Template: The Select Promotion Template step in the guided flow lists the pricing promotion templates that marketing managers use and the loyalty templates that program managers use to create the promotion’s rules.
Define Promotion Eligibility: On the Define Promotion Eligibility step in the Quick Promotion guided flow, marketing managers decide the products, channels, customer groups, and customer events that are eligible for the promotion. Marketing managers also decide whether customers must sign up for the promotion before they can use it. They can also choose to add coupons to the promotion.
Cart Level Promotions: Understand how the chosen evaluation method determines the final discount when a cart is eligible for multiple cart promotions.
Cross-Line Level Promotions: Understand how the chosen evaluation method determines the final discount when a cart is eligible for multiple cross-line promotions.
Line Level Promotions: Understand how the chosen evaluation method determines the final discount when the cart is eligible for multiple line-level promotions.
Evaluate Promotions: After promotions are defined, marketing managers can configure how the promotions are evaluated and applied to customer carts.
Select Promotion Evaluation and Execution Strategy: With Promotion Evaluation and Execution, marketing managers can define the process of determining which promotions to apply to customer carts. They can control how multiple promotions interact to make sure that rewards align with the company's business goals. Review the configuration options of promotion evaluation and execution and then select the options that work best for your company's promotions.
Design and Manage Promotions with Global Promotions Management: With Global Promotions Management, your marketing managers can create and execute promotions that align with your marketing strategy. Global Promotions Management provides precise promotion control with built-in usage limits and automated launch emails. Customers see applicable offers in their cart, so they can select and apply their preferred promotions during checkout.
Manage Promotions: After promotions are activated and running, marketing managers can track the usage of promotions. Marketing managers can also easily replicate seasonal promotions and promotions that run multiple times a year.
Clone Promotions with Global Promotions Management: Marketing managers can clone seasonal and repetitive promotions. For example, if a promotion that ran during Christmas last year does well, the marketing manager can clone last year’s promotion, make changes for the current year, and activate the promotion. Cloning promotions is particularly useful when marketing managers want to run similar promotions at different times of the year.
Ways to Track Customers' Usage of Promotions: After customers start using promotions, marketing managers can track the usage of promotions. You can track promotion usage only when the Promotion Reward Application API is used to update customers' promotion reward details in Salesforce.
Run Promotions: After you activate your promotions, you can run the promotions for your customers. Eligible customers can use the promotion from the promotion’s start date time until the promotion’s end date time. If your promotion doesn’t have an end date time, then customers can use the promotion until you deactivate the promotion.
Run Pricing Promotions: After marketing managers activate a promotion that uses pricing promotion templates, system integrators can integrate business APIs with external systems. The APIs show customers the promotions that their carts are eligible for and to apply the promotions that customers select for their cart.
Coupon Usage APIs: Use the Coupon Usage APIs to accurately track the usage of coupons by customers. When customers select a coupon for their cart, use the Coupon Usage Increase API to increase the coupon usage count. If a customer removes a selected coupon from their cart, use the Coupon Usage Decrease API to revert the coupon usage count.
Coupon Validation API: Use the Coupon Validation API to verify manually entered coupon codes before applying discounts. Validating coupons upfront—rather than waiting until checkout—gives customers immediate feedback on whether their code works. The API checks if the coupon exists, is active, hasn't reached redemption limits, and if the cart is eligible for the promotion.
Eligible Promotions API: Use the Eligible Promotions API to provide customers with a list of pricing promotions that are eligible for customer carts. The API can get the list of eligible promotions for contacts, accounts, and loyalty program members.
Promotion Evaluation and Execution API: The Promotion Evaluation and Execution API evaluates cart details and returns the adjusted price of cart and line items after applying eligible promotions based on the selected promotion evaluation method.
Promotion Configuration API: Use the Promotion Configuration API to access and export active promotion configurations.
Promotion Enrollment API: Use the Promotion Enrollment API to enroll a customer in a promotion and create an enrollment record. To provide a seamless experience, integrate this API with external systems such as shopping sites and mobile apps that manage customer profiles.
Run Pricing Promotions for Global Audiences: If your promotions are translated in different languages, Get Eligible API and Promotion Evaluation and Execution API show the promotional details in the translated languages. The promotion’s display language depends on the default language of the user who runs the API.
Promotion Reward Application API: Issue non-pricing rewards and update promotion and customer limits after customers place their orders.
Workflow to Run Pricing Promotions: Review the workflow for how multiple APIs work together to show customers the promotions their carts are eligible for and to apply the promotions that customers use for their orders. The workflow differs depending on whether your company's promotions use coupons or not.
Promotions on Your Experience Cloud Site: Run promotions on Experience Cloud sites for your logged-in customers, or give site users the same guided experience that marketing managers use to create and manage promotions.
Set Up Global Promotions Management: Turn on Global Promotions Management in your org and provide marketing managers the permission to design promotions by using the Global Promotions wizard. Define evaluation and execution logic to control how multiple eligible promotions are applied.
Context Definition for Global Promotions Management: Global Promotions Management provides the Eligible Promotions List API and the Promotion Evaluation and Execution API to interact with your external systems. The payload structure of these APIs depends on context definitions and Salesforce provides a standard context definition that works for most common use cases. If your external systems—such as shopping sites, point-of-sale (POS) systems, and global distribution systems (GDS)—use a different structure, you can create and use custom context definitions based on the structure of your cart in those systems to make integrations easier.
Context Definition Customizations for Custom Product Attributes: With Build Your Own Promotion promotion template, marketing managers can create product attribute-based promotion rules such as get 10% off on buying a 512-GB phone. Companies can choose to either use Product Catalog Management or use their own configuration to create product attributes. If a company decides to go ahead with their own product attribute configuration, then the admin must create a custom object that relates products with their attributes. And map the lookup fields of the custom object to attributes in their promotion context definitions.
Promotion Context Definition Customizations: Salesforce admins configure context definitions based on their company's unique business needs. Based on the requirements that marketing managers have for their promotions' configuration and that system integrators have for the Eligible Promotions API, the admin customizes the context definition for promotions.
Extend Standard Context Definition: The standard CartDetailGetEligiblePromotion context definition consists of nodes and context tags that are required to configure pricing promotions with different types of promotion and promotion rule eligibility criteria. To enable marketing managers to use the standard context definition for pricing promotions, admins extend and activate the standard context definition.
Configure Rule Libraries for Promotion Context Definitions: Global Promotions Management uses rule libraries to let marketing managers use context definition tags in promotion rule eligibility criteria. Rule libraries also enable the Eligible Promotions API to evaluate all active promotions available in the org and find the promotions and rules that are eligible for customer carts. If the admin and marketing managers decide to use different context definitions for the company's various promotions, the admin must create a rule library for each context definition.
Configure Data Cloud for Global Promotions Management: Gain insights about your company's promotions and your customers with Data Cloud. A prepacked data bundle enables admins to set up the connection that sends data from Global Promotions Management to Data Cloud. To create targeted customer segments for promotions, users must be assigned the Data Cloud Activation Specialist permission set.
Data Cloud for Global Promotions Management: Every Salesforce org that has Global Promotions Management and Data Cloud gets a data stream bundle with preconfigured Global Promotions Management-specific object data streams.
Create a Decision Table for the Decision Table-Based Promotion Template: Marketing managers use the Decision Table-Based Promotion template to configure a promotion rule from the conditions and rewards that a decision table defines. Before marketing managers can use the template, create a reference decision table that uses the Global Promotions Management usage type.
Add an Organization-Wide Email Address: Promotion launch emails are sent to the promotion’s eligible audience from an organization-wide email address. The admin works with the marketing manager to decide the name and address of the email that’s used to send the emails. Then, the admin has to add the email as an organization-wide email address.
Turn On Global Promotions Management: Turn on the setting in your org to enable the capabilities of Global Promotions Management. You can also turn on personalized values for Buy X and Spend X promotion rules.
Promotion Evaluation and Execution: Turn on Promotion Evaluation and Execution in your org to empower marketing managers to automate the process of prioritizing, combining, and applying promotions to customer carts. Define a pricing procedure and use the Promotion Evaluation and Execution API to determine and show the updated cart and line item prices in real-time.
Create Constant Resources: If your variables lack context tags, create a constant resource to serve as a placeholder for fixed values in your pricing procedures. Constants are used for inputs, outputs, and other values passed from a pricing element.
Automated Global Promotions Management Data Sync in Marketing Cloud Engagement: Global Promotions Management relies on the Marketing Cloud Connect managed package to send data from the Global Promotions Management org to a Marketing Cloud Engagement instance. The marketing journeys that are created in the connected Engagement org for activated promotions use the Global Promotions Management data to send out promotion launch emails. The admin must install and set up Marketing Cloud Connect in the Global Promotions Management org and in the connected Engagement instance. After setting up Marketing Cloud Connect, the admin must create Synchronized Data Sources for Global Promotions Management objects in the Engagement instance.
Access Global Promotions Management Data in Marketing Cloud Engagement: The marketing journeys that send the promotion launch emails for activated promotions require data from Global Promotions Management objects. Use Synchronized Data Sources in Marketing Cloud Engagement to access the data that is stored in Global Promotions Management objects. Create Synchronized Data Sources for the Global Promotions Management objects whose data the marketing journeys use.
Provide Marketing Cloud Connect API User Access to Global Promotions Management: The Marketing Cloud Connect API user connects the Global Promotions Management org and the Marketing Cloud Engagement instance. To ensure that Global Promotions Management data is sent to the connected Engagement instance, provide the Marketing Cloud Engagement Connect API user access to Global Promotions Management and its objects.
Install and Set Up Marketing Cloud Connect Package: Install the Marketing Cloud Connect managed package in the Global Promotions Management org. Complete the package’s set up in the Global Promotions Management org and the Marketing Cloud Engagement instance.
Marketing Cloud Engagement Business Unit Connection: Marketing managers can design launch emails for pricing promotions. After a pricing promotion is activated, the promotion’s launch email is sent to the promotion’s eligible audience by using a journey in Marketing Cloud Engagement. To send promotion launch emails by using journeys, connect Global Promotions Management with Engagement business units. Complete the required setup tasks in your Engagement business units and Global Promotions Management to set up the connection.
Create a Package to Connect Marketing Cloud Engagement Business Unit to Global Promotions Management: Global Promotions Management and Marketing Cloud Engagement are two different instances. To connect an Engagement business unit with Global Promotions Management, create a package in the business unit that you want to connect. The package consists of the scope of the connection and the API integration details required to connect Global Promotions Management with the business unit.
Assign Permission Set to Activate Promotions: A permission set named Marketing Cloud Authorization is created when you connect Global Promotions Management with a Marketing Cloud Engagement business unit. Users with this permission set can activate pricing promotions and launch the automated process to create journeys in the connected Engagement business unit for the activated promotion. Assign the authorization permission set to marketing managers or other users who activate promotions.
Add a Send Classification in Marketing Cloud Engagement Business Unit for Promotion Launch Emails: The journeys that are created in connected Marketing Cloud Engagement business units for active pricing promotions send the promotion launch email to the promotion’s eligible customers. To uniquely classify emails sent for promotions, create Global Promotions Management-specific send classifications in the business unit that you want to connect with Global Promotions Management.
Connect Global Promotions Management with Marketing Cloud Engagement Business Unit: After you create a send classification and a package in your Marketing Cloud Engagement business unit to connect Global Promotions Management with the business unit, use the send classification and package details to connect Global Promotions Management and the business unit in the Global Promotions Management org.
Turn On Product Catalog Management to Create Attributes and Bundles for Promotions: With Product Catalog Management, product designers can create attributes to capture the characteristics or properties of products, and create bundled products that group items. Marketing managers can create promotions that depend of these attributes and bundled products.
Role-Based Permissions for Global Promotions Management: Admins provide access to features based on the user's role in the company. For Global Promotions Management, admins have to provide themselves, marketing managers, system integrators, and Experience Cloud site users the permissions that they require to work with promotions. Depending on the user’s role, determine which permission sets are assigned to users.
Permissions to Create Eligible Audience for Promotions: Global Promotions Management provides the capability to decide the eligible audience for promotions. A promotion’s eligible audience can be a Data Cloud segment or members of a campaign. Marketing managers can create targeted segments or campaigns for each promotion and then select the segment or campaign as the promotion’s target audience. Provide marketing managers the permission to create segments and campaigns in the org.
Assign Permissions to Other Users: Global Promotions Management has varying user roles based on company requirements. Assign users permissions to create and manage a product portfolio, configure pricing procedures, and view promotions.
Set Up Record Access Assignment for Promotions: Provide users who run the Eligible Promotions and Promotion Evaluation and Execution APIs access to record details. They require access to all records that the APIs return. The integration user runs these APIs when customer carts and activities are managed outside Salesforce on external systems. If your Experience Cloud sites allow customers to view and apply promotions on their carts, you must provide your customers’ Experience Cloud site user access to promotion records. And if your implementation requires users in Salesforce to run the APIs, the users also require access to promotion records.
Data Cloud Segment-Based Promotion Audience Segmentation: Marketing managers can design promotions that are targeted toward specific customer groups. Customers of your company can be categorized in to customer groups by using Data Cloud segments and campaigns for pricing promotions. The segments can be a part of any Data Cloud companion org. If marketing managers want to use Data Cloud segments to decide promotion target audience, admins have to determine how to verify whether customers are part of the segments that are associated with promotions.
Enable Customer Segment Verification: After you've completed the setup that enables marketing managers to use Data Cloud segments as promotion target audience, select how the Eligible Promotions API must verify customer segments.
Set Up Data Cloud Segment Verification for Promotions: Specify the mechanism that APIs and automated processes use to check segment membership to identify eligible promotions. When you use APIs, such as the Eligible Promotions List API, they use the specified mechanism to identify the Data Cloud segments that the customer is a part of.
Turn on Translations for Promotions: Set up translation to show promotions to in-store employees, sales representatives, and customers in their preferred language. Add translation support for languages that your business runs promotions in, and assign translators permissions required to translate promotions.
Translate Promotions: Show promotions to in-store employees, sales representatives, and customers in their preferred language. Translate promotions in the local languages of the customers and users that the promotions are intended for.
Agent Topic: Promotion With Spend X Rule: Marketing managers can use the Promotion With Spend X Rule topic to create and update promotions that reward customers for placing orders worth a specific amount.
Budget Management for Promotions and Campaigns: Use Budget Management to allocate funds, estimate utilization, and track spending for promotions and campaigns. Define hierarchical structures to organize budgets based on business requirements, and track utilization across time periods for financial control and accounting.
Configure Recommended Promotions Widget: Use the Recommended Promotions widget to show personalized promotions on your website. The widget includes a parent Flexcard to show a collection of promotions recommended for a customer and a child Flexcard to show the details of a promotion recommended for a customer. Clone the Recommended Promotions widget, configure it based on your requirement, and then, activate and deploy it.
Promotion Personalization Data Kits: Use prebuilt data graphs and a preconfigured recommender to deliver personalized product recommendations to your customers.
Promotion Personalization Data Graphs: The Promotion Personalization: Unified Profile and Product Data Kit contains a real-time data graph which contains mappings for unified profiles required to recommend promotions and a data graph with product mappings required for recommender training.
Promotion Personalization Recommender: The Promotion Personalization: Recommender data kit offers a preconfigured product recommender that includes a personalization point, an objective, and engagement signals.
Show Personalized Promotion Recommendations: Use the Promotion Recommendations API to obtain personalized promotion recommendations. You can show these recommendations on your website by using the Recommended Promotions Flexcard, or a system integrator can integrate the API with external systems to show the recommended promotions on your website.
Promotion Recommendations API: Use the Promotion Recommendations API to provide customers personalized promotions based on their product preferences. This API can retrieve recommended promotions for loyalty program members, individuals, and anonymous users. System integrators can integrate the API with external systems to show recommended promotions on their websites.
Schema for Promotion Personalization: An event schema defines the structure and attributes of event data collected on your website. With the Interactions SDK, you can track various types of interactions on your website, each capturing specific data. To send this data to Data Cloud, set up a website connector and upload a JSON schema file that outlines the structure of the event data you're tracking.
Set Up Promotion Personalization: Configure Data Cloud and Salesforce Personalization to retrieve personalized product recommendations based on each customer's purchase and browsing history. Then, use the Promotion Recommendations API to obtain personalized promotion recommendation.
Recommended Promotions Widget Template: The Recommended Promotions widget template lets customers see promotions recommended for them. Customer can view the name, description, and coupon code of the recommended promotions. The widget also enables members to copy the coupon code.
Using Einstein in Marketing Cloud Engagement: In Marketing Cloud Engagement, Einstein provides insights and data to inform the content and timing of your marketing activities. Use powerful Einstein features to understand the engagement and behaviors of your customers so you can personalize every interaction that you create in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Add User-Created Attribute: Create attributes in Audience Builder to segment the messages that you send from Marketing Cloud Engagement. These attributes map information from Contact Builder.
Audience Builder for Administrators: A Marketing Cloud Engagement admin can manage user access to Audience Builder attributes, existing dimensions, and segment templates.
Assign a Saved Segment to a Business Unit: You can make segments available to Marketing Cloud Engagement business units. Save a segment, and then assign it to the correct business unit.
Audience Builder Attribute Library: Use the Attribute Library in Audience Builder to drag subscriber criteria onto the canvas as you filter or segment your audience. The Attribute Library displays raw subscriber data as readable attribute labels. The data that appears in the Attribute Library depends on the Data Packages in your Marketing Cloud Engagement org.
Audience Builder: Segment your customers in a variety of ways with Audience Builder in any Marketing Cloud Engagement org. Enterprise 2.0 customers can contact an account executive to enable additional features, such as business unit filters.
Automation Studio Activities for Audience Builder: You can increase productivity in Marketing Cloud Engagement when you use a combination of tools. Audience Builder actions are available as activities in Automation Studio and are related to an Email Studio program. Add one or more activities to an automation to accomplish your tasks.
Audience Builder Channels: Audience Builder can add filters to your overall population, such as by channel. When Marketing Cloud Engagement includes more than one channel-activated application, the channel selector filter appears in the Filter tab.
Publish an Audience to Salesforce Data Extension Folder: Publish an audience of your subscribers to the Salesforce data extension folder so that you can use a user-initiated Salesforce send. Marketing Cloud Engagement receives only subscriber tracking data that’s returned from Salesforce. Subscribers without a Salesforce ID can’t send data back to Salesforce.
Audience Builder Scenarios: Review these Audience Builder scenarios for examples on how to use this Marketing Cloud Engagement feature. These scenarios use sample data that doesn’t always match your own data.
Audiences and Segments: These diagrams show the relationship between audience filters and segments in Audience Builder for Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Change Group Operators: In Audience Builder for Marketing Cloud Engagement, you can change the operator used on an attribute group.
Configure the Data Factory Utility: Marketing Cloud Engagement Professional Services usually configures the Data Factory Utility as part of its original implementation.
Configure the Data Load Widget: Follow these steps to configure the data load widget in Audience Builder in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Create a Drill Tree: Add and arrange a hierarchy of attributes to create a drill tree for Audience Builder in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Data Load Widget: In Marketing Cloud Engagement, you can work faster with the data load widget. Add up to 10 programs that load Audience Builder data.
Dimension Drill Tree in Marketing Cloud Engagement: In Audience Builder Setup, create and assign drill trees based on specific attributes and data packages. You can then assign drill trees to specific business units.
Dimension Packages: Dimension packages describe the way you use Audience Builder to interact with the subscriber data in Marketing Cloud Engagement. Dimension packages translate raw subscriber attributes into readable information in your Attribute Library. Use this information to build and segment audiences.
eCommerce Dimension Package: Use the eCommerce Dimension Package in Audience Builder to import data directly into standard data extension templates.
eCommerce Package Configuration Guide: The eCommerce Dimension Package includes standard dimension packages derived from a standardized data extension–based data model. This functionality provides a turnkey solution that brings ecommerce and purchase data into Marketing Cloud Engagement without the need for a costly custom implementation.
Einstein Engagement Scoring Data Package: The Engagement Scoring data package offers preconfigured attributes that are based on predicted engagement over the next 14 days. The package can help you improve ROI on email sends and web conversions and understand the quality of your subscriber lists in Marketing Cloud Engagement. Use predicted engagement behavior to target specific customer segments.
Examples: These examples apply to For Purchase or Browse Events with Product Attributes in Audience Builder.
Exclusions Tab: Use the Exclusions tab in Audience Builder to create suppression criteria from your attribute library. You can then remove a subset of contacts from a filtered audience or segment.
Filter an Audience: Follow these steps to filter an audience in Audience Builder.
Filter Tab: The Filter tab in Audience Builder allows you to take your total population and query it to match the subscriber data of interest. Filter an audience either for send purposes, such as sending emails to specific subscribers that match your query target. You can also filter for analytic purposes, such as examining the number of subscribers that match a given criteria.
Get Started with Audience Builder: Audience Builder dynamically creates targeted audiences from contacts stored in your account based on stored attribute and behavioral values. Use these audiences to either target or exclude contacts from activities in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Include Operator Support: Review this information for support on using the Include operator with Audience Builder dimension packages in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Load Data into Audience Builder: Audience Builder requires professional services to load data extension information into Marketing Cloud Engagement for all activities. Contact your account executive to discuss your options.
Manage User Roles and Permissions for Audience Builder: Enable users to use Audience Builder functionality by assigning roles or permissions to that user. Review the Marketing Cloud Engagement Roles for Audience Builder page to view which permissions match the assigned role.
MobileConnect Dimension Package for Audience Builder: The MobileConnect dimension package in Audience Builder allows you to create MobileConnect campaigns in Marketing Cloud Engagement. These campaigns use standard dimension packages comparable to those packages found in the Standard Email Edition.
MobilePush Dimension Package: The MobilePush Dimension Package segments large amounts of subscriber data and creates audiences for use in MobilePush. The package includes information based on application behavior and subscriber information from Audience Builder in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Publish an Audience: Publish an audience in Audience Builder to use with messaging in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Publish an Audience: Follow these steps to publish an audience in Audience Builder.
Audience Publishing: After you filter and segment your audience in Audience Builder, you can publish your audience as a publish definition. Publish definitions represent data extensions containing the filter and segment data you defined in the audience. Use publish definitions across the Marketing Cloud Engagement in other applications. Access your published definition in the Audience data extension folder, located in Email Studio under the Subscribers tab.
Remove a User-Created Attribute: Follow these steps to remove a user-created attribute in Audience Builder. This process only removes a user-created attribute from Audience Builder and does not delete information from Contact Builder.
Segment Tab: Segment an audience in Audience Builder to suppress certain subscribers from either your total population or a filtered population.
Send - Append Attributes to the Audience for Easier Email Creation: Northern Trail Outfitters wants to use Audience Builder to personalize a message by adding the subscriber's age without writing complex AMPscript or executing a query activity to join data relational data in the system.
Standard Edition Dimension Package: This Audience Builder dimension package set contains more than 30 standard dimension packages and profile attributes.
Target and Suppress - Limit the Segment to a Desired Size: Northern Trail Outfitters wants to use Audience Builder to send an offer to all recent buyers of hiking gear. They also want to suppress all contacts sent to yesterday or contacts interested in cycling. The company uses a limited number of promotional SKUs reserved for hiking buyers. And the marketers don’t want to over-send messages to contacts.
Operator Use Cases: When you define and segment your audience in Audience Builder, work with operators to change the logic of your expressions.
User-Created Attribute Troubleshooting: Review details to help you troubleshoot user-created attributes in Audience Builder for Marketing Cloud Engagement.
User-Created Attribute Management: Manage attributes in Marketing Cloud Engagement choose data for creating and segmenting audiences. Available data includes raw data or unique values taken from the data model created in Contact Builder. For example, you can use attributes added via this tool to create and segment audiences using stored demographic and purchasing information.
Web Analytics Dimension Package: The Web Analytics Dimension Package in Audience Builder provides standard dimensions and requires no custom implementation.
Web Analytics Dimension Package Technical Specifications: The Web Analytics Dimension Package Set includes standard dimension packages derived from a standardized data extension–based data model. It brings web analytics data into Audience Builder without needing custom implementation.
Add, Reauthorize, or Remove Ad Accounts: To use Marketing Cloud Advertising, add ad accounts for Facebook, Instagram, Google Ads, LinkedIn, Twitter, Pinterest, or Snapchat.
Advertising Audiences: Marketing Cloud Advertising helps you target your digital advertising campaigns across various platforms with Advertising Audiences. These platforms include Facebook, Instagram, Google Ads, LinkedIn, X (Twitter), Pinterest, and Snapchat.
Advertising Audiences Administration: A Marketing Cloud Engagement admin can add and authenticate ad networks for access to topic profiles. The associated ad accounts are used for creating and activating audiences. To remove existing social accounts and Social Studio accounts, open the Ad Accounts section.
Marketing Cloud Advertising: Marketing Cloud Advertising helps you engage and advertise to your customers and prospects. Use it to coordinate campaigns with social, mobile, sales, and customer service efforts and enhance your email marketing goals with advertising. You can engage with existing customers, find new prospects with lookalikes, and re-engage inactive users within the customer journey across digital advertising.
Explore Audience Insights in Marketing Cloud Advertising: As a Marketing Cloud Advertising customer with a Marketing Cloud Intelligence license, you have access to deeper audience and campaign analytics with Audience Insights for Marketing Cloud Advertising. The application is available in the Marketing Cloud Intelligence Marketplace.
Configure Notifications in Marketing Cloud Advertising: To send a notification email from Marketing Cloud Advertising when an audience upload or refresh is complete or when errors or other events occur, enable and configure notification settings.
Create an Audience in Marketing Cloud Advertising: You can create an audience in Marketing Cloud Advertising for Facebook, Instagram, Google Ads, LinkedIn, Twitter, Pinterest, and Snapchat ad accounts.
Delete a Lead Capture Task in Marketing Cloud Advertising: When you want to update a lead form, first delete the Lead Capture task in Marketing Cloud Advertising. Deleting the task prevents the import of future leads, but preserves any previously imported leads.
Import Facebook or Google Leads into Sales Cloud: Collect Facebook and Google leads captured in Sales Cloud using the Lead Capture application. A lead capture task synchronizes advertising leads with a Sales Cloud Lead Object.
Advertising in Journey Builder: In Journey Builder, you can create a Facebook campaign or build ad audiences for Facebook, Google Ads, LinkedIn, Twitter, or Pinterest. To use this feature, make sure you have enabled Marketing Cloud Advertising and Journey Builder.
Lead Capture in Marketing Cloud Advertising: Lead Capture in Marketing Cloud Advertising helps you connect your Facebook or Google advertising leads with data extensions or Sales Cloud lead objects.
Lead Capture Error Detail View in Marketing Cloud Advertising: For visibility and control over failed leads in a lead task, refer to the Lead Capture Error Detail View. Details include failed lead IDs, an error description, error details as it relates to the associated lead form and the lead failure date. You can use this information to resolve formatting and other errors quickly to retry the leads or ignore unqualified leads. Marketing Cloud Advertising retains leads for 30 days.
Refresh an Audience: Configure refresh for an Marketing Cloud Advertising audience.
Review an Audience: After an audience has been created, you can review the details, change configurations, or refresh the audience. Here is a description of the information available when you review an audience in Marketing Cloud Advertising.
Review and Launch the Journey Builder Advertising Campaign: Review and save the configurations for your Journey Builder Advertising campaign. From here, you can return to the Journey Builder canvas and continue your campaign launch.
Target Accounts in LinkedIn: With Marketing Cloud Advertising, marketers can target and tailor their advertising using company-specific identifiers in LinkedIn.
Test Lead Capture Tasks: Use the Facebook Lead Ads Testing Tool to create a test lead in Marketing Cloud Advertising.
Activate Einstein Engagement Scoring: Turn on Einstein Engagement Scoring for Marketing Cloud Engagement in Setup. Einstein requires historical contact or subscriber engagement data, including at least 1,000 events in the 90 days before activation. It can take up to 90 days to generate initial scores, but engagement scores are typically available 24–48 hours after implementation.
Analytics Builder: Analytics Builder enables you to gain deep insights into the behaviors and interests of your contacts across channels. Use these insights to set marketing goals and refine customer journeys.
Data Residency: Hyperforce is the next-generation Salesforce infrastructure architecture that gives you more choice and control over data residency. If your organization in Australia, Canada, India, and Japan uses Hyperforce, Einstein can process data outside your geographical location. The United States and Europe maintain data residency in their local region.
Einstein Engagement Frequency: Avoid a lack of awareness from too few messages or burnout from too many messages. Einstein Engagement Frequency in Marketing Cloud Engagement evaluates your contacts and subscribers and identifies the optimal number of email messages to send.
Activate Einstein Engagement Frequency: Activate Einstein Engagement Frequency (EEF) at the MID level for your account. The activation process can take up to 72 hours to complete. Provision Journey Builder before you use Einstein Engagement Frequency. To use EEF for MobilePush, first provision Journey Builder and create at least one mobile app.
The Einstein Engagement Frequency Dashboard: Use the dashboard to get an overview of sending saturation levels among your contacts. Then analyze the way that your sending frequency affects your contacts’ saturation levels. You can review how your sending frequency has affected engagement including opens, clicks, and unsubscribes, over time. Use the What-If analyzer to help maximize your On Target saturation contact levels. See how contacts are performing across all your journeys.
Does Updating to the New Version of Einstein Engagement Frequency Remove My Old Data?: Yes. Updating the app removes older data used by Einstein Engagement Frequency. Specifically, the two data extensions populated by Einstein Engagement Frequency, called Einstein_MC_EMAIL_Frequency_Undersaturation and Einstein_MC_Email_Frequency_Oversaturation, are deleted. No other data extensions are deleted or modified.
Are Saturated Contacts Suppressed from Email Sends?: No. Einstein Engagement Frequency identifies segments and groups your contacts by segment, but you control sending. To prevent saturated contacts from receiving unwanted messages, remove or reduce messaging activities in their journey path.
Einstein Engagement Frequency FAQs: Find out how Journey Builder access affects Einstein Engagement Frequency use. And get informed about what happens to your older send frequency data after you upgrade to the latest Einstein Engagement Frequency experience.
What-If Analyzer: Test future saturation levels corresponding to message frequency using the What-If Analyzer on the Einstein Engagement Frequency dashboard. The goal is to maximize the On Target contacts in your business unit. Use the bar chart to predict how many contacts you can move from Saturated or Undersaturated to On Target.
Einstein Engagement Scoring for Email Dashboard: On the email dashboard, get email engagement prediction data that groups contacts into a persona based on engagement thresholds. Use detail pages to dig into prediction specifics and audience health.
Einstein Engagement Scoring for Email Model Card: The model analyzed in this card predicts five types of engagement scores for each individual consumer contact in each customer’s business unit. Predictions include email opens and clicks, subscriber retention, web conversion, and overall engagement.
Einstein Engagement Scoring for Mobile Dashboard: On the mobile dashboard, predicted app engagement groups contacts into four segments based on engagement thresholds. Thresholds are shown beneath each segment.
Understand the Data That Einstein Uses: Providing Einstein with good data makes it more likely to get good predictions. For Einstein predictive features, use data quality scores to understand the quality of the data that each Einstein app requires to generate predictions, insights, analytics, and more. Find data quality metrics on each Einstein app dashboard and Einstein Overview card.
Einstein Copy Insights: Einstein Copy Insights uses text analytics and natural language processing to analyze the text from your commercial email subject lines to uncover language insights. Use these insights to craft subject lines and body copy that drive stronger email engagement.
Einstein Copy Insights Dashboard: Review insights about the subject lines that your organization’s emails use and test subject lines that you plan to include in upcoming messages. See top performing and most used subject lines, as well as insights derived from language factors and phrases within a subject line.
Subject Line Groups: Einstein analyzes most of your commercial subject lines in order to detect and surface interesting insights and patterns in the language that you use.
Test a Subject Line Before You Send: Find out how your message’s subject line is likely to influence message performance. Test the performance of a single message or compare up to 10 subject lines.
Gauge Your Einstein Engagement Frequency Data Quality: Check your data quality score for insight about the engagement data that Einstein uses to predict your customers’ likelihood to engage. Data quality scores for Einstein Engagement Frequency are generated at the business unit level only.
Gauge Your Einstein Engagement Scoring Data Quality: Check your mobile app’s data quality score for insight about the engagement data that Einstein uses to predict your customers’ likelihood to engage. Data quality scores for Einstein Engagement Scoring are generated at the mobile app level only.
Einstein Engagement Frequency Model Card: The model in this card analyzes each contact’s engagement record to determine the optimal frequency at which to send email or MobilePush messages to that contact.
Einstein Engagement Scoring Dashboard: Use the dashboard to view engagement predictions for email and MobilePush channels, including the likelihood to click an email or spend time in a mobile app, and other key performance indicators (KPI). To enable Web Conversion scoring, implement Collect Tracking Code. You can analyze subscriber Persona changes over time.
Einstein Engagement Scoring: Einstein Engagement Scoring predicts consumer engagement with email and MobilePush messaging. It uses customer data and machine learning to assign scores for each contact’s likelihood to engage with emails or interact with push notifications. Einstein Engagement Scoring aggregates your customer data in a dashboard that provides audience-level insights and individual contact-level scores.
Einstein Engagement Scoring for Mobile Model Card: The model in this card analyzes each contact’s engagement record to assign scores for the contact’s likelihood to interact with mobile messaging.
Einstein Engagement Scoring Personas: The Einstein Engagement Scoring heatmap groups subscribers into a customer persona based on predicted email engagement.
Enable Einstein Generative AI in Marketing Cloud Engagement: Enable Einstein generative AI features to create subject lines and body copy in Einstein Copy Insights and Content Builder. When you use Einstein generative AI instead of a generally available service such as OpenAI, you’re protected by the Salesforce Trust Layer.
Creating Content in Einstein Copy Insights Using Einstein Generative AI: Use Einstein to generate subject lines and body copy in messages. Test the likelihood of subject line success, and ideate and iterate with colleagues to land on the perfect message content in your preferred language.
Marketing Cloud Engagement Einstein Generative AI Limits: Einstein generative AI features are included in Corporate, Enterprise, and Enterprise + editions. Using Einstein generative AI to create subject lines or body copy options constitutes a generation. To prevent misuse, each Enterprise account is capped at 10,000 generations, giving you plenty of ability to use your creativity and harness the power of Einstein to improve your marketing copy.
The Einstein Messaging Insights Dashboard: See more insights in one place and find out more about each insight on the Einstein Messaging Insights dashboard. Click an insight to access contributing factors that influenced the send’s performance.
Einstein Messaging Insights Model Card: The model in this card analyzes message engagement rates and notifies marketers when anomalies in their marketing performance occur.
Einstein Send Time Optimization: Einstein Send Time Optimization (STO) in Marketing Cloud Engagement determines the best time to send a message. Using machine learning, Einstein predicts optimal send times so that a user is more likely to engage with your message.
Einstein Send Time Optimization Dashboard: Visualize optimal predicted send times for email addresses or contacts in a Marketing Cloud Engagement tenant or for all contacts in a business unit. Find out when subscribers are most likely to engage with your messages and insight about your Enterprise’s data quality, which fuels Einstein’s predictions.
Gauge Your Einstein Send Time Optimization Data Quality: Check your Enterprise’s data quality score for insight about the engagement data that Einstein uses to predict optimal send times. Data quality scores for Einstein Send Time Optimization are generated at the Enterprise level only.
Delete a Send Time Preview: When a preview is no longer useful, you can delete it from Marketing Cloud Engagement. If you delete a data extension that a preview is based on, the preview is available for 90 days after deletion.
Global Model Data Opt In and Opt Out in Marketing Cloud Engagement: Einstein intelligence is built on data. The more data Einstein has, the more powerful the resulting predictions. Most organizations don’t have enough data to build their own models. To give you more meaningful predictive AI, Salesforce builds global predictive models that scan for aggregate, anonymous trends across many Salesforce customers. To protect your customer data, your account is opted out of the global data model by default.
Einstein Send Time Optimization for Mobile Model Card: The model in this card analyzes the optimal time to send a mobile message to maximize a contact’s probability of interacting with it. In Marketing Cloud Engagement, Einstein Send Time Optimization for Mobile optimizes notification push time to maximize the overall engagement of mobile apps.
Preview Optimal Send Times: Review potential times that Einstein can send messages to the contacts in a data extension. If a data extension has numerous rows, previews are based on sampling data.
Refresh a Send Time Preview: After you create a preview of a data extension in Marketing Cloud Engagement, you can refresh it to find out if Einstein’s optimal send times have changed.
Subject Line Tester: Find out how your message’s subject line is likely to influence message performance. Test the performance of a single message or compare up to 10 subject lines. The subject line tester is available only if you opt in to global models. Subject line tester won't appear on the dashboard if global models aren't enabled. You can also use the tester to analyze subject lines generated in Einstein Copy Insights if you have Einstein generative AI features and global models enabled.
A Marketer's Guide to the Trusted Use of Einstein: Salesforce believes that the benefits of AI can, and should, be accessible to everyone. But increasingly, AI is facing a crisis of trust. Therefore, trust is at the top of Salesforce’s priority list for customers.
Einstein Generative AI in Marketing Cloud Engagement: Use Einstein generative AI to create and personalize nearly-there drafts of message copy, already contextualized and grounded in your Salesforce data. In Einstein Copy Insights, you can test, copy, and download your generated subject lines and body copy. In Content Builder, quickly create subject lines and body copy to use in your messages. An optional Typeface add-on provides generative image capabilities using a content block in Content Builder.
Engagement Score Thresholds: Each key performance indicator (KPI) in Einstein Engagement Scoring has an Audience Health indicator. This indicator shows whether the average grade for that score across all your subscribers is Excellent, Good, Fair, or Poor.
Explore Marketing Cloud Engagement Einstein Solutions: Add AI to your marketing efforts, and see how Einstein can help your marketing organization solve common use cases with better results. Use Einstein Overview and Learning Center to review important key performance indicators for individual applications.
Einstein Messaging Insights: Einstein Messaging Insights alerts you to changes in your marketing performance no matter where you are in Marketing Cloud Engagement. The Einstein notifications badge appears in the header, where it’s constantly accessible to let you know how your email sends and journeys perform. When an anomaly occurs, the notifications badge alerts you. Go to the insights hub for more information about quantifying your results.
Einstein Engagement Scoring Model Confidence: Model confidence is a way to express the relative strength of a prediction generated by a model. Understanding the concept can help you interpret Einstein Engagement Scoring for email model confidence scores.
Prerequisites for Einstein Engagement Scoring: Up to 250 business units or MIDs per Enterprise ID can use Einstein Engagement Scoring for email. You can also use Einstein Engagement Scoring for mobile if you’re using the Marketing Cloud Engagement Mobile SDK.
Brand Settings and Personalities: Define your organization’s brand identity and add the personalities to use when generating tailored content. In addition to the provided Professional and Casual personalities, you can create up to 10 more personalities to match your needs. Then use Einstein generative AI features to create messages that reflect what you want to convey to your customers.
Set Up a Brand for Generating Content: Define your organization’s brand identity and personality. In addition to the provided Professional and Casual personalities, you can create up to 10 more personalities to match your needs. Einstein generative AI features use the information to create messages that reflect what you want to convey to your customers. You can set any personality as your default.
Set Up Einstein Copy Insights: When you enable Einstein Copy Insights, all users in the business unit can view the insights. You can also use Einstein generative AI features in Marketing Cloud Engagement. Einstein generative AI isn’t enabled by default, even if Einstein Copy Insights is turned on. You can disable Einstein Copy Insights at any time.
Set Up Einstein Messaging Insights: Einstein Messaging Insights is turned off by default for all units in an enterprise. Insights that relate to sends or journeys within a business unit are visible to all users in the business unit.
View Einstein Copy Insights: To review insights and find the word and phrase combinations that drive better email engagement, navigate to the insights hub.
View Einstein Messaging Insights: Check out recent insights by clicking the Einstein notifications badge that appears in the header. Or navigate to the insights hub to review insights and quantify your email send and journey results with more information.
Add a Wait Activity: Tell an automation how long to pause before proceeding to the next activity in Automation Studio.
Advanced Run Once: Automation Studio includes options to schedule an automation, run it automatically when a file is dropped, or run an automation once. Use Advanced Run Once to run only a portion of an automation.
API Data Extract Options: To better organize Email Studio data extracts, use these categories for your SQL database. You can retrieve up to 6 months of data.
Attributes: The attributes tracking extract output file contains the attributes associated with subscribers in an account.
Automatically Deactivated Automations: When an automation fails repeatedly over an extended time period, the automation is deactivated to improve system stability and performance. When an automation is deactivated, you receive an email notification to the email address entered in the automation’s Notification Settings > Runtime Error or Skipped Run box. An inactive automation can’t run again until it’s fixed and reactivated. This feature is turned on for all accounts and can’t be turned off.
Automation Duration: When you schedule automations in Automation Studio, make sure that the duration and schedule are aligned to prevent system stability issues.
Automation History and Health: In Automation Studio, you can view your automations over time and improve overall automation health using the automation history dashboard. You can also evaluate your automations by downloading your automation history as a CSV file.
Get Automation History: Monitor and enhance automation performance with the History dashboard in Automation Studio. View run frequency, success rates, errors, and skipped automatons. You can also identify automations that overlap and could negatively impact run times. The dashboard is updated daily and loads the latest data each time you access it.
Download Automation History as CSV File: Evaluate your automations over time by downloading your automation history as a CSV file. Improve automation health by reviewing each automation’s success rate and identifying automations with high skip or error counts.
Automation Studio: Automate your Marketing Cloud Engagement email sends, queries, imports, and more with Automation Studio. Build simple or complex workflows that automate marketing and data management tasks based on criteria that you configure.
Automation Studio Errors: Find out what Automation Studio error messages mean and how to resolve them. After applying the suggested action, run the activity or automation again to make sure that the error was addressed.
Bounces: The bounce event extract file shows all the hard and soft bounces that occurred in a specific date range. The events in this report relate to all subscribers for a particular send.
ClickImpression: The click event extract file shows all the instances of a clicked link in an email occurring within the specified date range. The file also includes the impression region name associated with the click event. The events in this report can relate to all sends for subscribers on a list or related to a particular send.
Clicks: The click event extract file shows all instances of a clicked link in an email occurring within the specified date range. The events in this report relate to all sends for subscribers on a list or related to a particular send.
Mapping Contacts to Business Unit: Map existing Contacts to selected Business Units to maintain brand and geographical boundaries when you activate segments in Data 360.
Contacts Without Channel Addresses: Find and manage your contacts that aren’t associated with any channels. Understand the source of your contacts and delete the ones you don’t want.
Conversions: The conversions file contains a row for each conversion event associated with a subscriber related to an email send job.
Convert XML: This data extract type converts XML files to delimited files so that you can import them into data extensions. Use this extract for simple XML files only. Files that have subnodes on attributes require a different process. Contact Salesforce Support for additional information.
Import or Copy a Large Dataset Using a Data Extension as the Source: Use the Data Copy or Import activity to copy data between data extensions and eliminate the need for complex SQL queries. You can use a data extension as the source to update another data extension but not a subscriber list. To update a subscriber list, use an external file.
Copy an Automation: Create an exact copy of an automation to extend or modify it in Automation Studio.
Create a Data Extract File: Use the Automation Studio Data Extract activity to create a file that you can use outside of Marketing Cloud Engagement. This activity can also be used to transform an XML file to a comma-delimited, tab-delimited, or pipe-delimited file for import into your account.
Create a Script Activity: Add your own server-side JavaScript using this Automation Studio activity to accomplish any task for which you would use server-side JavaScript in an email or landing page.
Script Activity: A server-side JavaScript® (SSJS) activity contains SSJS code that is executed when started, either on its own or as part of an automation in Automation Studio. You provide the SSJS code, a name, external key, and description to identify the activity within the application interface and for API calls.
Import or Copy Large Datasets: When transferring a large dataset from an external file or a data extension, use the Data Copy or Import activity to help prevent data loss, minimize downtime, and maintain business continuity. With the Data Copy or Import activity, you can also manage data transfers without using complex SQL queries.
Data Extension Storage Usage: View and manage your marketing data usage by downloading your data extension storage details as a CSV file. Optimize your storage usage, improve performance, and ensure compliance by removing unneeded data and updating retention policies.
Data View: Automation Activity Instance: Improve the efficiency and success rate of your automations by reviewing automation activity health. Query the _AutomationActivityInstance data view in Automation Studio to prevent failures by identifying activities that often fail or run long.
Data View: Automation Instance: Get a big-picture view of all automations within a tenant, and improve the efficiency and success rate of your automations by reviewing automation health. Query the _AutomationInstance data view in Automation Studio to prevent failures by identifying long-running processes, and fix failed automations by addressing the cause of failure.
Data View: Bounce: To view bounce data for emails sent from your account, query the _Bounce data view in Automation Studio. Bounce data is retained for six months.
Data View: BusinessUnitUnsubscribes: To find unsubscribe data for subscribers in your account at the enterprise level, query the _BusinessUnitUnsubscribes data view in Automation Studio. You can run this data view on the parent account only and not on child business units.
Data View: Click: To view click data for emails sent from your account, query the _Click data view in Automation Studio. Click data is retained for six months.
Data View: Complaint: To view complaint data for emails sent from your account, query the _Complaint data view in Automation Studio. Complaint data is retained for six months.
Data View: EnterpriseAttribute: To view your subscribers and their profile attributes, query the _EnterpriseAttribute data view in Automation Studio.
Data View: FTAF: To view data about messages that were forwarded to friends, query the _FTAF data view in Automation Studio. Forward data is retained for six months.
Data View: GroupConnect Contact Subscriptions: To view active LINE followers and users who have blocked your brand, query the data view in Automation Studio. With Contact Subscriptions, you can view your current subscribers each day.
Data View: Job: To view email send job data, query the _Job data view in Automation Studio.
Data View: Journey: To find a journey's status, created and last modified date, and other general journey information, query the _Journey data view.
Data View: Journey Activity: To view data about activities used in your journeys, use the _JourneyActivity data view in Automation Studio.
Data View: ListSubscribers: To view subscribers on lists in your account, query the _ListSubscribers data view in Automation Studio.
Data View: Open: To view email opens for your account, query the _Open data view in Automation Studio. Open data is retained for six months.
Data View: GroupConnect MobileLineOrphanContactView: To view orphaned contacts, query the _MobileLineOrphanContactView data view in Automation Studio. Contacts are orphaned when a GroupConnect contact import has multiple ContactKeys for the same LINE Address ID.
Data View: Reconcilable Disposition: To view reconciliation disposition data for emails sent from your account, query the _ReconcilableDispositionView data view in Automation Studio. Data is retained for seven days.
Data View: Sent: View the subscribers you sent emails to by querying the _Sent data view.
Data View: SMSMessageTracking: To view your message send and receive history from MobileConnect SMS sends, query the _SMSMessageTracking data view. Information from this query relates to the owner of a private short code or long code. Query information can also relate to a client by using a shared short code to which the subscriber has opted in.
Data View: SMSSubscriptionLog: To find subscription log information from MobileConnect SMS sends, query the _SMSSubscriptionLog data view in Automation Studio. For example, you can view a history of all mobile numbers subscribed to a keyword.
Data View: Social Network Impressions: To view impression data on content shared from your email sends via Social Forward, query the _SocialNetworkImpressions data view in Automation Studio.
Data View: Social Network Tracking: To view tracking data on content shared from your email sends via Social Forward, query the _SocialNetworkTracking data view.
Data View: Subscribers: To view email subscribers and their statuses, query the _Subscribers data view in Automation Studio. Subscriber attributes aren’t available. This data view only returns results at the Enterprise level, and not for child business units.
Data View: Undeliverable SMS: To find failed SMS message deliveries to MobileConnect subscribers, query the _UndeliverableSMS data view.
Data View: Unsubscribe: To find unsubscribes related to your email sends, query the _Unsubscribe data view in Automation Studio.
Data Views: Query system data views using Automation Studio for up to six months of Marketing Cloud Engagement subscriber and journey information.
Configure a Trigger Automation: Set up an automation that starts when a file is placed in an external location, such as Amazon S3, Google Cloud Storage, Microsoft Azure, or your own SFTP location.
Configure a File Drop Automation: Set up an automation in Marketing Cloud Engagement that starts when a file is uploaded to your Enhanced SFTP location.
Automate Processes in Automation Studio: Use an automation to start a process when specific criteria are met. For example, when a file is uploaded to the Enhanced SFTP, you can automatically run activities, like an import, a file transfer, or an email send.
Delete an Automation: Remove unneeded automations from Overview or the automation page in Automation Studio.
Edit an Inline Email Activity: You cannot edit Send Email activities that were created with classic email editor inside an automation, but you can replace them. After replacing the email send definition, you can edit it within an automation.
Edit Emails in a Running Automation: To edit the subject line or content of a user-initiated email send in a running automation, update or recreate the Send Email activity.
Einstein Engagement Frequency in Automation Studio: Use Einstein Engagement Frequency (EEF) in a Send Email activity in a bulk or batch send to maximize engagement rates and reduce unsubscribes. A segment is based on saturation levels to avoid sending contacts too few messages or too many. EEF automatically segments your contacts at send time based on their individual saturation levels.
Einstein in Automation Studio: Reach contacts when they’re most likely to engage by using Einstein Send Time Optimization in a Send Email activity. Help your contacts avoid message fatigue by selecting the right message for each contact at the right time. Message recommendations are based on saturation levels using Einstein Engagement Frequency in a Send Email activity.
Einstein Send Time Optimization in Automation Studio: Reach contacts when they’re most likely to engage by using Einstein Send Time Optimization in a Send Email activity in Automation Studio. Einstein Send Time Optimization uses machine learning and 90 days of engagement data to determine the best time within the next 24 hours to send an email message to each contact.
Extract Types: Refer to the topic that corresponds with the extract type you are using.
Extract Outputs Reference: This table describes the outputs available for the Tracking Extract extract type.
Manage a File with the File Transfer Activity in Automation Studio: In Automation Studio, unzipped or decrypted files using file transfer are typically named according to a filename pattern. If the file you’re unzipping or decrypting resulted from a data extract activity, the file name pattern must match the data extract pattern.
Filename Patterns Reference: Review these guidelines for the design of a file naming pattern in Automation Studio.
Create a Filter Activity: Apply a data filter to create a group or data extension containing records that meet a set of criteria. For example, use a Filter activity in Automation Studio to sort out subscribers from a larger subscriber list.
Find Activity Configuration and Error Details: To access configuration details and run history for an Automation Studio activity, view the activity's object detail page. Use this page to locate error information about the activity, too.
FTP and File Drop Automation Example: In this use case, learn how to trigger an automation in Automation Studio by dropping a file in an FTP location.
Get Automation Studio Notifications: Add your email address to get notified when an automation run is skipped, encounters an error, or completes. You can also receive alerts through the Event Notification Service (ENS).
GlobalUnsubImport: Use this data extract to import data into the global unsubscribe list for an Enterprise 1.0 account. Only Enterprise 1.0 accounts with the GlobalUnsub feature can use this data extract.
ListMembershipChanges: The ListMembershipChanges file includes rows that contain information on the subscriber, list, and status data change for every event.
Lists: The lists file contains rows including name, description, and other information for a unique list.
Move a File with the File Transfer Activity in Automation Studio: In Automation Studio, files moved from the safehouse to an FTP location are typically named according to a file name pattern. If your moved file is from a data extract activity, the file name pattern must match the data extract that it was configured to produce.
NotSent: This list contains information on send jobs and messages that didn’t send. Only the most recent two months of data is available.
Opens: An Open event extract file shows open instances of an HTML email during the date range. The open events relate to all sends for subscribers on a list or to a particular send.
Optimizing a SQL Query Activity: SQL query activities time out after 30 minutes. You can prevent timeouts and failures by optimizing your SQL query activities. If your query consistently runs longer than 10 minutes, we recommend using a different tool, such as Salesforce Customer Data Platform, to transform your data.
Pause an Automation: Temporarily stop an automation’s schedule in Automation Studio. If the automation is running when you pause it, it continues to run, but future scheduled runs don’t occur. You can see who paused an automation in the automation’s summary.
Query: Bounce History: Find a history of individual bounce responses, and identify how to resolve them.
Query: Subscriber Status: Find subscribers on a list and their statuses. Or, find only subscribers with a specific status, such as active or unsubscribed.
Query: Subscribers in a Publication or Suppression List: Find subscribers who were placed on a publication or suppression List. Or, find only subscribers on the list with a specific status, such as active or unsubscribed. If you have problems retrieving suppression list data, contact Salesforce Customer Support to activate this feature.
Query: Subscribers with No Opens or Clicks: Find subscribers who haven’t opened or clicked an email. Use this query for jobs with fewer than 500,000 subscribers. For larger jobs, use intermediate tables.
Query: Top Bounces for a Job: Find the top bounces by percentage for a specific job. Use this query for jobs with fewer than 5,000,000 subscribers.
Query: Journey Builder Sends by Email Across Versions: Aggregate all Journey Builder email sends across multiple versions of the same journey. Or modify this query to find opens, clicks, bounces, complaints, or unsubscribes across versions during a specific time frame.
Query: Journey Builder Sends in Last 24 Hours: Find subscribers who were sent an email from a journey in Journey Builder within the last 24 hours. Or, modify this query to find opens, clicks, bounces, complaints, or unsubscribes for an email from Journey Builder during a specific time frame.
Query: Opens in Last 30 Days: Find all unique opens for a specific email over the last 30 days. Or, modify this query to find sends, clicks, bounces, complaints, or unsubscribes for an email during a specific time frame.
Restart a Suspended SQL Query Activity: When a SQL Query activity encounters a system error or fails 24 consecutive times, we suspend it. To find out why your query is suspended, check the action log.
Run a Subset of Activities: To run specific automation activities in Automation Studio, click Run Once and then select the activities to run.
Schedule an Automation: You can schedule an automation that’s in draft mode or already running.
Audit Trail Activity Log Fields: Learn about the data that's available in the Audit Trail Activity Log extract in Automation Studio.
Audit Trail Access Log Fields: View the audit data from the Audit Trail security event extract available in Automation Studio.
Send Email Activity: Choose and configure an email message to be sent on its own or as part of one or more automations. You can put it in sequence with other Automation Studio activities and schedule it for a particular date and time.
SendImpression: The SendImpression event extract file shows instances of an email send occurring during a specified date range. The file also includes the impression region name associated with the click event. The send events relate to all sends for subscribers on a list or to a particular send.
SendJobImpression: The SendJobImpression file represents all impression tracking information from sends with activity logged against them for the timeframe of the extract. This list reflects only jobs that already processed. Sends scheduled for the future do not appear in this list.
SendJobs: The SendJobs file represents all sends with activity logged against them for the timeframe of the extract. This list reflects only jobs that already processed. Sends scheduled for the future do not appear in this list.
Sent: The Sent event extract file shows instances of an email send occurring during a specified date range. The send events relate to all sends for subscribers on a list or to a particular send.
Skip an Automation: Indicate in Automation Studio that an automation's next run will not occur without stopping the automation's schedule.
Spam Complaints: The Extract Spam Complaints extract file shows subscriber, list, and domain data, including sendID and date, for subscribers who received an email and reported it as spam.
SQL Query Examples: Learn how to build effective SQL queries in Automation Studio by following use cases.
SQL Reference: Get SQL query information for Automation Studio’s SQL Query activity at a glance.
Automation Studio Statuses: You can view an automation’s status from the Automation Studio interface or a related data view. Use this guide to understand what each status means.
StatusChanges: The StatusChanges file shows instances of change in a subscriber's status. Only data from the most recent six months is available.
Stop a Running Automation: When an automation is stopped in Automation Studio, activities in the step that is in progress complete, but subsequent steps do not start.
Subscribers: The Subscribers file contains subscribers with a tracking event occurring during a specified data range.
Substitution Strings Example: Use substitution strings in a File Transfer activity or Data Copy or Import (formerly Import File) activity in Automation Studio.
Surveys: The Surveys file contains information on responses to surveys included in email sends.
Tracking Extract: Tracking extracts provide granular tracking data for import from Email Studio into external systems. Use tracking extracts to export granular data regarding several different aspects of email send jobs, such as clicks, bounces, and survey data. Then, import that information into an automation or system.
Tracking Extract Configuration in Automation Studio: You can create a data extract activity in Automation Studio using the Extract Type dropdown. To specify the data you want to include, configure the tracking extract fields. See the example at the end of this section for a categorization of extraction objects. When you’ve configured it, start your activity to produce results.
Tracking Extract Output: Tracking extracts output several types of data related to an email send.
Use Transactional Reconciliation in Automation Studio: Automation Studio supports Transactional Reconciliation for email activities that send time-sensitive messages, such as confirmations, alerts, and notifications. When enabled, Marketing Cloud Engagement monitors messages and assigns a final disposition (Sent or Not Sent) based on delivery signals during the expiration window.
Automation Starting Sources: A starting source defines how an automation starts. You can schedule an automation to run at specific intervals or start an automation when a file is uploaded to the Enhanced FTP. Or, use a trigger to start an automation when a file is uploaded to an external location such as Amazon Web Services, Google Cloud Platform, or Microsoft Azure.
Unsubs: The Unsubs file includes information on unsubscriptions that occurred during a specified data range. The unsubscribe events can be related to all sends for subscribers on a list or to a particular send.
Data Extract Activity: The Automation Studio data extract activity creates one or more zipped files for your use outside of Marketing Cloud Engagement. It can also convert an XML file into a comma-delimited, tab-delimited, or pipe-delimited file for import into your account.
Filter Activity: Apply the logic of a data filter you select to create a group or data extension in Automation Studio. Filtering subscribers or contacts makes targeting specific subscribers or contacts based on their attributes and other conditions easier.
Considerations When Importing a File: Use an external file to update a subscriber list or data extension in Automation Studio. During the process, you also create an import definition to configure the Data Copy or Import (formerly Import File) activity’s behavior while running. The activity uses the import definition each time it runs.
Build a SQL Query Activity: In Automation Studio, build a SQL query activity that retrieves the data that you’re interested in, and then add it to an automation.
Automation Studio Activities: Easily understand and use the Automation Studio Activities tab in the Marketing Cloud.
The Automation Studio Overview Page: When you access Automation Studio, view up to 50 automations in your account, a snapshot of automation activities, run history, and folders. You can also run each automation once from the Overview page.
How to Use the File Transfer Activity in Automation Studio: In Automation Studio, you can unzip or decrypt a file found in the Enhanced FTP directory for Marketing Cloud Engagement. With the File Transfer Activity, you can securely transfer files from the Safehouse, a secure file transfer location, to a selected FTP location.
Retrieving and Segmenting Data with a SQL Query Activity: Retrieve and unify data across data extensions and system data views with SQL query activities. For example, you can prepare a subscriber list, view open and send history, or review automation and journey health.
Verification Activity: Avoid unintended outcomes by verifying the data used in an Automation Studio automation.
Wait Activity: Wait activities in Automation Studio cause an automation to wait for a specific duration or until a specific time before performing the next step. You can include one or multiple wait activities in a single automation.
Campaigns in Marketing Cloud Engagement: Plan, coordinate, and measure cross-channel campaigns in real time using campaign tags. You can create campaigns from emails, mobile messages, landing pages, and data extensions, or events such as automations.
Engagement Campaign FAQs: Learn about where to find things and how to use the Campaigns app in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Campaign Tags in Marketing Cloud Engagement: Use tags in Marketing Cloud Engagement to categorize campaigns by any criteria, such as geography, marketing tactic, and product line.
Contact Delete Best Practices in Contact Builder: Apply these best practices to implement Contact Delete. All contact deletion processes are final, and Marketing Cloud Engagement can’t restore deleted contact information.
Data Extensions for Data 360: The Data 360 activation workflow creates audiences in Marketing Cloud Engagement as Sendable Data Extensions.
Contacts Configuration: Use the Contact Configuration screen to enable Contact Builder functionality.
Contacts Analytics in Contact Builder: Contacts Analytics shows the status of your contact delete requests via either the Marketing Cloud Engagement Contact Builder app or your REST API calls. Use this dashboard to view four separate types of contact delete statistics. Use this dashboard in your top-level account.
Contact Builder in Marketing Cloud Engagement: The Contact Builder app provides access to contact data contained within your account and the relationships designed to help you use that data. Use Contact Builder to manage, consolidate, organize, and link data from all Marketing Cloud Engagement apps and external sources.
Contact Builder Best Practices: Contact Builder helps you maintain the contact information you use to identify individual contacts across multiple channels and personalize messaging and marketing activities. To ensure that your marketing activities work the way you want them to, make sure that all contact information relates to a single contact record.
Contact Definition and Count Determination in Contact Builder: A contact in Contact Builder is an individual added to any contact database in Marketing Cloud Engagement. A contact can be someone who received a message from any Engagement tool, such as GroupConnect, Journey Builder, MobileConnect, or MobilePush.
Contact Deletion in Contact Builder: To remove contact information from Marketing Cloud Engagement for any reason, including compliance regulations, delete contacts from Contact Builder. This feature applies only to contacts in Email Studio - All subscribers, MobileConnect, MobilePush, Journey Builder, and Contact Builder.
Find Contacts Without Channel Addresses: Find and manage your contacts that aren’t associated with channels in Marketing Cloud Engagement. Understand the source of your contacts, and delete the ones that you don’t want.
Create an Event: Follow these steps to create an event in Contact Builder.
Attribute Group Creation in Contact Builder: Attribute groups enable you to organize your data in Contact Builder. Each attribute group includes a data model consisting of data extensions linked to either the contact record or other data extensions. You can create attribute groups including all relevant data extensions at the same time to ensure that all necessary data resides in the correct group.
Data Source Creation in Contact Builder: Data Sources establish where the data contained within Contact Builder originates. You can assign attributes to these data sources and view precisely how data enters your account and how you can best use that data.
Create Mobile Contacts in Contact Builder: You can create mobile channel lists in Contact Builder. For multichannel mobile customers, creating the mobile lists in Contact Builder streamlines the contact creation process.
Create Synchronized Data Sources in Contact Builder: After you integrate Marketing Cloud Connect and link a data source in Contact Builder, your synchronized data source appears in the Data Sources section. This process takes some time to complete.
Data Designer in Contact Builder: The Data Designer tool in Contact Builder defines, organizes, and relates information to contacts within your account. All contact information resides on subscriber lists and data extensions contained in Marketing Cloud Engagement. Data Designer enables you to manage how data extensions store that information and how those data extensions relate to each other.
Data Designer Templates: Data Designer includes these templates for creating attribute groups in Contact Builder.
Data Extensions in Contact Builder: Data extensions in Contact Builder form the basis of contact information in Marketing Cloud Engagement. By creating and linking data extensions, you can access information about contacts and use that information to segment, filter, and target contacts with relevant sends. You can also use this data to target contacts across multiple channels, such as email, social, and mobile messaging. Finally, you can use data extensions to hold information imported from external sources and use that information as part of your segmenting, filtering, and targeting activities.
Manage Data Extensions: In Marketing Cloud Engagement, a data extension is a table that contains data that you provide. Use data extensions to hold customer data, track loyalty points, collect tracking and usage data, and any other use case that requires you to store information in a table.
Manage Data Extension Records: A record is a row of data in a data extension. You can use Contact Builder to create, edit, remove, or restore data extension records.
Synchronized Data Sources in Contact Builder: Synchronized Data Sources in Contact Builder bring data from Salesforce into Marketing Cloud Engagement. At defined time intervals, they synchronize data from your Salesforce account, including data schemas and relationships previously established in your Salesforce CRM account.
Contact Builder Data Sources: Data sources in Contact Builder indicate where your account stores and locates contact attributes. To determine the origin of the attribute values that you use to filter and segment contacts, use data sources in Marketing Cloud Engagement. When you know the origin, you can use the most recent and effective data to connect your attribute groups for your communication activities. For example, you can tag customer purchasing data as arriving from an outside source. Other users acting on this data can then identify the custom data source and use the most up-to-date data in your activities.
Deprecated Root Relationships: A root relationship represents a 1:1 relationship between a contact record and a data extension that acts as a source for contact information in Contact Builder. A root relationship can only exist between the contact record and a single data extension. That contact record relates via the contact key or contact ID to the data extension. The data extension used as part of the root relationship can contain only one row per individual contact. Each row in a root relationship represents a contact, and you cannot link to multiple rows for a single contact in a root relationship.
Disconnect Synchronized Data Sources: To disconnect synchronized data sources, disconnect Marketing Cloud Connect. As part of this process, Synchronized Data Sources removes all synchronized data extensions, the Contacts attribute group, and the synchronized data source. Only disconnect these tools when necessary, because data is removed from Marketing Cloud Engagement, which can disrupt your marketing activities.
Edit an Attribute Group: Follow these steps to edit an attribute group in Data Designer for Contact Builder. You can edit custom objects only. System objects can’t be modified.
Edit Contact Attributes in Contact Builder: To edit contact attribute information, use the Contact Builder app for Marketing Cloud Engagement. Make sure that you understand how changing the attribute value affects how this contact interacts with journeys, segmentation, and other attribute-based activities. System-generated attributes aren’t editable.
Edit Synchronization Settings: Edit synchronization settings in Contact Builder for a previously configured data source. You can filter how often synchronization occurs and filter the record collection. Editing an already synchronized object causes a refresh for that object.
Contact Builder Access: A Marketing Cloud Engagement admin can restrict which Marketing Cloud Engagement users can access Contact Builder.
Enable Contact Events in Contact Builder: Enabling Contact Events in Marketing Cloud Engagement requires admin permissions. It’s scheduled for feature retirement, and we recommend that you filter or query activities in Automation Studio.
Contact Builder Events: Events in Contact Builder allow you to take contact behavior into account as you segment and filter your audience. Use this information to begin marketing processes and activities within your account, including Journey Builder. The events collect data based on what actions your contact performs or occurrences involving your contact. You can target that behavior and modify your communications to better target that contact. For example, you can find out which contacts abandoned shopping carts and contact them to complete their order.
Get Started with Contact Builder: New accounts include Contacts and Contact Builder. Account administrators with existing accounts can opt to replace their current data structure with the new Contacts structure. After switching to the Contacts structure, your account can’t return to the previous data structure.
Data Import: You can import contact data into Marketing Cloud Engagement. You can also save and reuse import definitions that bring information into Contact Builder.
Contact Builder Imports: The Imports tab in Contact Builder displays a complete list of the import definitions within your account. Use import definitions to bring data linked to your contacts into your account.
Interact with Synchronized Data Sources: Before you add a data source to Contact Builder, configure the original data source and allow changes to synchronize to Marketing Cloud Engagement. You can’t import data to a synchronized data source from Contact Builder.
Interact with Synchronized Fields: Synchronized fields represent entities that are synchronizing data with Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Data Extension Linking in Contact Builder: Link data extensions in Contact Builder to relate data in existing data extensions to either the contact record or another data extension.
Manage Data Extension Policies: Follow these steps to manage policies for data extensions in Contact Builder. Data extension policies govern which users and processes can modify or delete a data extension, including attributes and information. Only administrators can make changes.
Enable and Modify Data Extension Retention Policies: Manage data retention policies for data extensions in Contact Builder. Use these policies to manage high-volume temporary data, comply with data retention policies, and maintain clean customer profiles by removing outdated data.
Pause and Resume Synchronization: Pause the synchronization process in Contact Builder to prevent further updates to the data synchronized from the external data source. Resume the synchronization process to refresh the data with the latest version from the external data source. Any pause or refresh performed in a multi-org environment affects all business units integrated using the same active Salesforce System user.
Importing to a Data Extension: To use updated data across channels in Marketing Cloud Engagement, perform imports on a data extension from Contact Builder.
Synchronized Object Relationship Priority: Contact Builder supports a single relationship between objects in an attribute group. When you synchronize Marketing Cloud Engagement with object data from another cloud, Synchronized Data Sources creates that single relationship between attributes using a predetermined priority.
Access Recycle Bin: Access items sent to the Marketing Cloud Engagement recycle bin. The recycle bin is a list view that lets you sort and filter items. This feature can only be accessed in Content Builder.
Add a Reference Block: Use Content Builder to add a reference block to your content.
Add Content to a Template: Use one or more options to add content in Content Builder to display in the email.
Use Einstein Content Selection in Your Emails: Add an Einstein Content Selection content block to your messages. At open, Einstein then can select an image for your messages by analyzing the assets that are engaging your customers. Enable Einstein Content Selection in Marketing Cloud Engagement Setup.
Use Einstein Recommendations in Your Emails: Add an Einstein Recommendations content block to your messages. At open, Einstein selects content from the content catalog that best engages each subscriber.
Add Free Form Content: To add text, links, images, and more, use the free form content block in Content Builder.
Add HTML Content: HTML Content allows you to paste in HTML or upload HTML in Content Builder.
Add Image Content: Add images to the Content Blocks that you create in Content Builder. Content Builder supports .jpg, .gif, .png, and .svg images.
Content Builder Administration: Access Content Builder setup from the Marketing Cloud Engagement toolbar by hovering over your username and selecting Setup, then searching for Content Builder Settings.
Appendix: Use GTL with AMP for Email Mustache Syntax: Guide Template Language and AMP Mustache templates use the same delimiters (double curly braces {{ and }}). Therefore, when sending AMP containing Mustache templates through Marketing Cloud Engagement, ensure that you add a snippet of code at the top to change the GTL delimiters.
AMP for Email Best Practices: Use these tips and best practices when building AMP emails in Marketing Cloud Engagement Content Builder.
Get Started with AMP for Email: To build an AMP email in Marketing Cloud Engagement Content Builder, first create the email by choosing an AMP email template or accessing the AMP editor view in an email.
Content Builder Approvals Permissions: Review permission names and descriptions for use with Approvals in Content Builder. A Marketing Cloud Engagement admin can assign permissions to users.
Cell Properties: Format the properties of a specific cell after creating a table in Content Builder.
Complete Create Template Fields: Follow these steps to complete the field information and steps when creating a template in Content Builder.
Content Builder: Content Builder is our cross-channel content management tool that allows you to consolidate images, documents, and content in a single location for use in Marketing Cloud Engagement. With an easy-to-use, drag and drop interface, Content Builder is more efficient than our previous create and edit tools. Content Builder also includes the content repository (CMS) and API, the content management application (formerly referred to as Content Canvas), and the new HTML content editor (formerly referred to as Content Builder).
Content Builder Permissions: As you get started with Marketing Cloud Engagement Content Builder, it is important to review permissions for the users in your account.
Content Builder Tags: Create and manage nested and Einstein tags in Marketing Cloud Engagement Content Builder.
Copy File URL: Copy the URL of a Marketing Cloud Engagement Content Builder file for use in another email, landing page, or another location
Create A/B Test Content: Create A/B test content in Content Builder. Use this block to create two different content areas and track which content performs better during an A/B Test. A/B Test works with Content Builder emails for testing content areas only. You can’t use the A/B Test block to test emails, From Name, Subject Line, Preheaders, and Time with Content Builder emails.
Create and Send a Carousel Push Notification: Use the Carousel template to create a push notification that can have up to six images. This lets you show multiple images in one notification.
Create a Code Snippet: Use code snippets in Marketing Cloud Engagement Content Builder to save reusable bits of HTML, AMPscript, and Guide Template Language. Insert snippets when editing HTML via the Code Snippets toolbar selector, or by typing the Customer Key value for the snippet followed by the Tab key. You can also create a code snippet content block by clicking Create > Content Blocks > Code Snippet. You can reference Code Snippets with the AMPscript ContentBlockByKey and ContentBlockByID functions.
Create Content Blocks: Use content blocks to create reusable modular content for messages. Manage content blocks in Content Builder.
Create an Interactive Email Form Block: Follow these steps to create an Email Form block in Marketing Cloud Engagement Content Builder. Ensure that you have the Data Extension > Create, View, and Update permissions, and that Email Form is enabled in Setup > Content Builder Settings.
Create Dynamic Content: Use dynamic content in email messages. Dynamic content appears according to the rules that you define, based on the subscriber's attributes, data extension values, or audiences. If a subscriber matches more than one rule, they receive the content for the first rule that applies.
Create a Dynamic Subject Line and Preheader: Use Content Builder to create a dynamic subject line and preheader. An email with a dynamic subject line or dynamic preheader has the content that a subscriber sees based on the subscriber's attributes according to the rules that you define. For example, you can define one subject line to appear for all the males in your list and another for all the females. These attributes can be taken from a subscriber list or a sendable data extension.
Create Emails in Content Builder: Use this task to create an email in Content Builder for Marketing Cloud Engagement. Email names must be unique within a folder.
Create In-App Messages in Content Builder: Create in-app messages in Content Builder to target your engaged app audiences. Choose from full-page, modal, or banner-style templates in Content Builder, and send using the new In-App activity in Journey Builder.
Create a Layout: Use Content Builder to create a layout for an email message.
Create LINE Carousel Messages in Content Builder: A carousel message is a LINE message that can include 10 different messages within one carousel. To create LINE messages, your account must have LINE channels enabled. To learn more about how to get LINE access and channels, contact your Salesforce account executive.
Create Mobile Messages: Create SMS, push notification, and LINE messages in Marketing Cloud Engagement Content Builder.
Create a Push Notification in Content Builder: Create a Journey Builder push notification in Marketing Cloud Engagement Content Builder. You can also use the Content Builder editor in Journey Builder to create and send a MobilePush message.
Create Multi-Content LINE Messages in Content Builder: Create multi-content messages in Content Builder and use them in your Journey Builder sends. A multi-content message includes a single video, image, audio, or text message or up to five of these elements in one message.
Create an SMS/MMS Message in Content Builder: Create an SMS or MMS message in Marketing Cloud Engagement Content Builder. You can also use the Content Builder editor in Journey Builder to create and send an SMS or MMS message. MMS is only available in the United States and Canada.
Create and Send a Standard Push Notification: Use the Standard template to create a push notification with one media attachment, that includes an image, video, or audio file, to make it more engaging. Add customizable buttons for Android devices. Specify custom sound for Android and iOS.
Create Templates: Use Content Builder to create templates by pasting HTML or using a layout tool.
Create a WhatsApp Session Message: Use Content Builder to create session messages to respond to user-initiated conversations. When a user sends a message to your WhatsApp channel, you can respond to them without using a template. Session messages are free-form messages and don’t need approval.
Customer Key: Each Content Builder asset has a Customer Key, a unique 36 character identifier that can be referenced via AMPscript.
Delete Recycle Bin Items: Permanently delete items from the Recycle Bin if they’re no longer needed.
Duplicate Content: Use duplicate content in Content Builder to copy the style or format of a previously created content asset. We recommend copying the structure of a piece of content before adding actual content. When duplicating a content area in an email or template, the duplicate option is disabled if the content area block limit is reached.
Dynamic Content: Use Marketing Cloud Engagement Content Builder to create dynamic content to deliver a targeted message to an audience. Dynamic content lets you define attributes to content, making the information your subscribers receive more relevant.
Shared Content Edit Permissions: While Marketing Cloud Engagement Content Builder business units that create content can take all actions on content, business units that receive shared content can only take these actions based on their edit permissions. Review the different Content Builder edit permissions.
Einstein Content Tagging Confidence Level: With Einstein Content Tagging, you can select the confidence level between 0.5 (lowest) and 1.0 (highest) to use for automatic tags in Marketing Cloud Engagement. Use a higher confidence level to improve the accuracy of the tags applied to your images. Use a lower confidence level to broaden the scope of tags included.
Einstein Content Tagging: Einstein Content Tagging applies searchable tags to image files in your Marketing Cloud Engagement account. You can have Einstein add up to 25 tags per image. Einstein tags existing JPG, JPEG, and PNG files that are 10 MB or less.
Creating Messages in Content Builder Using Einstein Generative AI: To generate subject line and body copy options for your Content Builder messages use Einstein generative AI. If you’ve created subject lines or body copy in Einstein Copy Insights, you can copy the text to use in Content Builder and create tailored variations for your audiences.
Set Up Nested Content Tags: Better organize and manage your content tags using nested, or hierarchical, content tagging.
Enable Content Builder Approvals: To use the built-in approvals process in Marketing Cloud Engagement, an admin must turn on the feature for Content Builder. Notify content creators before you enable approvals because it can disrupt their workflow.
Enhanced Dynamic Content: Enhanced Dynamic Content lets you import into Content Builder a delimited file containing text and image URLs to create enhanced dynamic content for emails.
Add External Content: Add external content blocks to an email in Content Builder
Folder Management: Store images, documents, templates, emails, and more in the same or different folders in Marketing Cloud Engagement Content Builder. Create, rename, move, or delete folders by right-clicking in the appropriate folder space.
Gauge Content Performance Using Einstein Content Tags: See the content tags that Einstein generates in Einstein Content Selection Performance Analytics to understand which aspects of your content are performing well.
Generate Barcodes in Emails with AMPscript: Use barcodes to create personalized messages, such as ticket purchase confirmation emails, in Marketing Cloud Engagement. Instead of using a barcode generator, use the AMPscript BarcodeURL function to automatically generate barcodes based on information from a recipient's profile.
Get Started with Content Builder Approvals: In Marketing Cloud Engagement, you can submit a draft email for approval. Requiring approvals can help you maintain control and consistency over your email communications and branding. Launch the approval process from the Content Builder grid, the Approvals dashboard, or when you’re creating an email.
Get Started with Content Builder: Content Builder consolidates images, documents, and content in a single location for use in Marketing Cloud Engagement. Create subject lines and body copy for messages by harnessing the power of Einstein generative AI. Use the third-party Typeface integration option to generate images to completely tailor your message.
Google Promotions Tab: Learn how to use a Google Promotions Tab code in Marketing Cloud Engagement Content Builder to enhance your email promotions with images, deals, expiration dates, and more.
Insert a Table: Insert and manage a table in a Content Builder text block in Marketing Cloud.
Insert an Anchor: Add or remove an anchor to link to in a Content Builder text block.
Interactive Email Form Data FAQ: View frequently asked questions for the Email Form block in Marketing Cloud Engagement Content Builder.
Interactive Email Form Display FAQ: View frequently asked questions for the Email Form block in Marketing Cloud Engagement Content Builder.
Interactive Email Form Block: The Interactive Email Form block in Marketing Cloud Engagement Content Builder allows marketers to receive subscriber information like profile data, product reviews, and sales leads directly from embedded forms in an email. Allowing subscribers to submit forms without leaving their inbox increases customer engagement and gives marketers more data.
Interactive Email Form FAQ: View frequently asked questions for the Email Form block in Marketing Cloud Engagement Content Builder.
Live Image: The Content Builder Live Image block lets you control message content at the time of open by switching relevant images in real time. You can send an email with image A that changes to image B based on a user-defined trigger.
Lock a Content Area: Follow these steps to lock content areas in Content Builder. This feature allows you to add content to a template and then lock the content. You cannot change that content when using that template to create an email.
Lock Shared Content: Email content areas in Content Builder can now be locked before sharing the email with other business units. This allows recipient business units to only edit unlocked content areas in shared emails with Edit Globally or Edit Locally permissions.
Manage Table Properties: Use a text block’s table properties to format the properties of a specific table cell or manage rows, columns, and cells in Content Builder.
Modify A/B Content: Make changes to A/B content blocks in Content Builder.
Modify the Content Area Properties: Follow these steps modify the content properties in Content Builder. Limit the number of blocks added to a content area. You can also specify the types of blocks added to a content area or change the default message displayed for a content block.
Modify Dynamic Content: Use Marketing Cloud Engagement Content Builder to modify a Dynamic Content block.
Nested Tags: Nested tags allow you to add two child tags to a parent tag, creating a tag hierarchy to make them easier to find, categorize, and analyze.
Content Builder Recycle Bin: Content Builder Recycle Bin is a repository for recently deleted items that can be restored to Marketing Cloud Engagement. Items moved to the Recycle Bin are unavailable in emails and journeys. You can restore items from the Recycle Bin and use them again.
Replace Content: Replace content in Marketing Cloud Engagement Content Builder. You can only replace content added using the upload process.
Disable, Delete, or Reset Einstein Content Tags: You can pause automatic tagging, remove existing automatically generated tags, or reset Einstein-generated tags within a single business unit. Pause automatic tagging by disabling Einstein Content Tagging (ECT). Then you can resume tagging, delete tags, or reset tags.
Restore Recycle Bin Items: Restore items sent to Marketing Cloud Engagement recycle bin. You can restore one or more items at once.
Restrict a Content Area: Follow these steps to restrict a content area in Content Builder. This action allows the addition of only the specified number and types of content to the content area when creating an email from the template.
Search for Content: Content Builder provides several ways to locate specific content.
Send Items to the Recycle Bin: To remove an item from an active email or journey, move it to the Recycle Bin. You can restore the item if you want to access it again.
Set Up Einstein Content Tagging: Configure Einstein Content Tagging in Marketing Cloud Engagement Setup. Some settings can’t be modified after you configure them, but you can change the tagging language and tagging location at any time.
Share Content: The share content feature allows you to share content, templates, and emails with other business units in your account. Enterprise 2.0 accounts, you can share from any business unit to any other business unit. For Enterprise 1.0 and Agency accounts you can share down to child business units. Contact your relationship manager to enable this feature.
Sharing and Approvals: If you have Content Builder Approvals enabled, use these guidelines when sharing emails.
Single Source Template Strategy: A Single Source template allows you to create content once and reuse the content for multiple emails, contexts, and audiences. For example, if you’re sending a campaign to multiple countries that have multiple languages, each language requires a separate email which can total 200 emails or more. The number of emails increases when you segment into commercial and transactional or other customer-based profiles. To reduce unnecessary work, create a single source template that never changes, and create new emails based on the template.
Sitecore Content: Sitecore content is available via Sitecore Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement, which enables a real-time sync of images created and updated in Sitecore to Content Builder.
Sitecore Content Hub Connect Custom Block: Sitecore Connect allows you to build Content Builder messages with images stored in Sitecore Content Hub (StyleLabs). The connector installs the Sitecore Content Hub Connect custom content block, which you drag in a message and select your Sitecore images.
Add a Social Follow Content Block: Add a social follow content block to an email in Content Builder. Social Follow allows you to add links to your social networks in your email. Social Follow directs subscribers from your email to your social networks where they can then choose to follow your social accounts.
Add a Social Share Content Block: Add a social share content block to your email in Content Builder. Social Share allows recipients to share the email on their preferred social network.
Preview Mobile Subscriber Details: Before sending, get a subscriber-level preview for mobile messages that use Marketing Cloud Engagement Content Builder. Use Subscriber Preview to see personalization and code rendered for that subscriber.
Supported File Types: You can upload to Content Builder these file types up to 5 MB per file.
Table Commands: Manage table rows, columns, and cells in Content Builder with table commands.
Typeface Generative AI Content: Salesforce has partnered with Typeface, a non-SFDC application, to generate images to take your generative AI content to the next level.
Modify the Tagging Language: Select from one of over 100 languages to use when automatically tagging images.
Upload Files: Upload content to Content Builder by dragging and dropping existing content, by browsing your computer for the content, or by uploading content from an external URL. The maximum file size per file is 5 MB.
Use a Text Content Block: Use the text content block to create text-based reusable email content in Content Builder
View or Modify a Template: Follow these steps to view or modify a template in Marketing Cloud Engagement Content Builder.
Drip Campaign: This Marketing Cloud Connect tutorial shows how to use email send definitions and programs in Marketing Cloud Engagement to automate and schedule sends to Sales or Service Cloud reports and campaigns.
Account Configuration for User Data Access: Marketing Cloud Engagement administrator and Sales or Service Cloud administrator review these options for configuring Marketing Cloud Connect data. Choose to set the account as scope by user or non-scope by user.
Account, Edition, and Other Compatibility FAQs: Answers to your questions about Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement compatibility with product editions, accounts, and more.
Add IP Addresses to Allowlist in Marketing Cloud Connect: If you didn’t use the Marketing Cloud Connect Setup Wizard, follow these steps to manually add IP addresses to your allowlist. The allowlist identifies them as safe and grants access to trusted networks, allowing Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement to communicate across networks.
Advanced FAQs: Answers to your advanced questions about Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Assign Business Units: For Marketing Cloud Engagement Enterprise 2.0 accounts, assign applicable business units to the Marketing Cloud Engagement API user. The Marketing Cloud Connect API user’s business unit access in Engagement determines which business units are available for use within Sales or Service Cloud.
Authentication Between Clouds: Connected App Authentication is a secure authentication mechanism used by Marketing Cloud Connect to connect from Marketing Cloud Engagement to Sales or Service Cloud. Now your users are authenticated automatically without Sales or Service Cloud user password management.
Authentication FAQs: Answers to your questions about Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement authentication, including Connected Apps and OAuth 2.0.
Automation Studio Support: Marketing Cloud Connect supports automated Salesforce sends through Automation Studio in Marketing Cloud Engagement by creating a Salesforce send definition. Next, define an automation with the Send Salesforce Email activity that includes the send definition. After sending, view tracking results in the Sales or Service Cloud.
Map Business Units: Map business units from Marketing Cloud Engagement Enterprise 2.0 accounts across clouds to enable them in Marketing Cloud Connect.
Campaign Member Integration: Campaign member integration provides insight into customer engagement behavior with a single view of a contact or lead, called a subscriber in Marketing Cloud Engagement. View historical results of a campaign for all email interactions and members, including: date sent, bounce, date bounced, date opened, date unsubscribed, link name, and last clicked. Customize Marketing Cloud Connect to define and track events with campaign member status using the Activity or Status field. Plan how values are mapped to statuses and ensure that they’re available for all campaigns before configuring.
Campaign Member Status Hierarchy: Understand the campaign member status hierarchy for processing rules and how mapped values are updated through Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Configure a Campaign Member Picklist: Through Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement, define tracking events by customizing the campaign member picklist values for the Activity or Status field.
Configure Campaign Member Tracking: Edit the Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement configuration to enable campaign member tracking and map the status fields.
Configure Objects and Triggers: Complete the steps to create triggers, enable objects, and configure triggers with Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Configure Settings: Configure Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement settings after installation and setup.
Configure the CRM: The Salesforce CRM admin performs these tasks to configure Sales or Service Cloud for Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Use Marketing Cloud Connect to Connect Accounts: Connect your Marketing Cloud Engagement account to the corresponding Sales or Service Cloud org at the account level to continue Marketing Cloud Connect setup.
Connect the Marketing Cloud API User in Marketing Cloud Connect: Connect the Marketing Cloud API user to the Salesforce system user to enable core system communication activities in Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement. These activities include pushing tracking data from Engagement into your Sales or Service Cloud.
Connect Clouds with Marketing Cloud Connect: Get familiar with requirements, install the latest managed package, and configure your Salesforce accounts to start using Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Connect to Marketing Cloud: The Sales or Service Cloud admin connects the Sales or Service Cloud account with the Marketing Cloud Engagement account using the Marketing Cloud API user credentials. This task completes the account-level connection for Marketing Cloud Connect.
Create an Automation: Create an automation to use in this Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement tutorial for drip campaigns.
Create Custom Fields for Preferences: Create custom fields in Sales or Service Cloud for the communication preferences you want to include in the Profile Center to use with Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement. You can create different custom fields for contacts and leads.
Create Salesforce Email Send Interactions: Create Salesforce email send interactions to use in this Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement tutorial for drip campaigns.
Create a Personalized Email with Standard Object Data: For this Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement tutorial example, create a personalized email from a case with standard object data using AMPscript.
Create a Personalized Triggered Send: For this Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement tutorial example, create a triggered send with personalization from a case and a custom object.
Create a Report: Create reports to use in this Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement tutorial for drip campaigns.
Create a Triggered Send Data Extension: For this Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement tutorial example, create a dynamic triggered send for new and closed cases using the same email content and triggered send definition.
Custom Settings for the Tracking Data Cleanup Tool: In Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement, the Tracking Data Cleanup Tool includes custom settings for batch size and cascade-delete.
Dedupe Subscribers: Deduplication prevents sending more than one email to the same email when using reports or campaigns through Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement. To enable this feature when executing a send, select the Dedupe Subscriber flag.
Deferment Notices: Deferment occurs when an account using Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement is unable to authenticate or contact Sales or Service Cloud when attempting to share tracking data or synchronizing data from Sales or Service Cloud.
Disconnect Account: The ability to disconnect a Marketing Cloud Engagement account from a Sales or Service Cloud account is only available for Enterprise 2.0, Core, and Lock & Publish accounts. Install managed package version 5.493 or later. The account must use connected app authentication. The Engagement admin can disconnect the accounts by editing the Salesforce Integration in the Email Studio admin. Disconnecting takes from 5 minutes to several hours depending on the number of synchronized data extensions. The Sales or Service Cloud admin then uninstalls the package.
Dynamic Send Preview: Use Dynamic Send Preview with Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement to see personalized content based on real data, such as contacts or leads, in an email before sending. The preview renders exactly as the email recipient sees it.
Dynamic Sender Profile: With Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement, map Salesforce attributes with Engagement preference attributes. Send emails to reports or campaigns from multiple email addresses using sender profiles.
Email Sends: Integrated users send Marketing Cloud Engagement emails through the Sales or Service Cloud with Marketing Cloud Connect. Send single emails to leads, contacts, and person account records, or send to a list through campaigns and reports.
Email Send Records: In Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement, go to the Email Send tab in Sales or Service Cloud to access a specific Email Send record. An Email Send record includes related lists with tracking information on individual email results, aggregate link level details, and support requests that have been opened for the send.
Email Send Statuses: When completing email sends through Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement, the status of the email send in Engagement can differ from the status in Sales or Service Cloud. These statuses are based on the latest managed package.
Email Sends and Reports: Answers to your questions about Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement email sends and reports.
Encryption: Answers to your questions about Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement encryption.
Frequently Asked Questions: Review frequently asked questions about Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Multi-Org FAQs: Answers to your questions about Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement multi-org configuration.
Marketing Cloud Connect Features: Learn about edition compatibility with Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement and what features are available.
Synchronized Data Sources Best Practices: Follow these best practices to synchronize data into Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement using Synchronized Data Sources.
Industry Compliance and Regulations: Answers to your questions about Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement industry compliance and regulations.
Initiate Logging: Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement includes an option for logging all package-related API calls and associated details, which is useful for monitoring and troubleshooting. Enable the log through the Marketing Cloud Connect Configuration page.
Installation and Setup FAQs: Answers to your questions about Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement installation and setup.
Journey Builder Integration: Journey Builder is a Marketing Cloud Engagement application used for creating responsive automated multichannel campaigns. Use Journey Builder to design a communication plan that reaches customers at every stage of their journey with your brand. Configure Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement in your org to access specific Journey Builder features within the Sales or Service Cloud. For example, add a lead, contact, or a user to a journey, or update a Salesforce object as a step in the journey.
Launch the Setup Wizard: To configure Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement in Sales or Service Cloud, launch the setup wizard in Salesforce Classic UI.
Link-Based Campaign from Custom Report: This Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement tutorial shows how to create a custom report in Sales or Service Cloud. Use the report to identify contacts who clicked a link in an Engagement email send.
Manage Marketing Cloud Connect Settings: Admins access Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement settings and send configuration by navigating to the Engagement object in the Sales or Service Cloud. Admins can configure these settings, including sends, tracking, users, and business units, after the installation and setup process to enable sending through Marketing Cloud Connect.
Manage Users: After completing the Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement installation and setup, integrate Engagement and Sales or Service Cloud users to enable access to Marketing Cloud Connect.
Map Attribute Fields: To personalize communications, map Sales Cloud Contact, Lead, and Account objects in Marketing Cloud Engagement to share attributes across the clouds and enable personalization for Marketing Cloud Connect communications. Multi-org doesn’t support Web Collect or custom field and attribute mapping.
Marketing Cloud Connect: Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement combines the digital marketing capabilities of Engagement with the data management, segmentation, and campaign management tools in Salesforce. Create unitary customer relationships with more data-driven, personalized conversations and the ability to automate the customer journey. With Marketing Cloud Connect, access powerful Engagement tools directly within Sales or Service Cloud. Ensure a consistent branding and messaging experience, while engaging customers in relevant conversations and ultimately driving more leads into Salesforce.
Encryption: Enable Encrypted Data Sending (EDS) permissions in Marketing Cloud Engagement to identify encrypted fields from Sales or Service Cloud using Classic or Platform Encryption. Re-encrypt those fields in Engagement. Marketing Cloud Connect supports these encryption methods.
Marketing Cloud Sends to Campaigns or Reports: Use this Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement feature to create a Salesforce Send Definition and send to Salesforce campaigns or reports in Engagement. Reports must contain Contact ID, ContactID, Lead ID, or LeadID fields. Store reports in a custom Salesforce folder for sending and ensure that the user who executes the send can access the folder. Marketing Cloud Connect doesn’t support sending to joined reports or reports stored in standard Salesforce folders.
Multi-Org Account and User Configuration: Through Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement, multi-org supports connections for one Engagement business unit to one Sales or Service Cloud org. Multi-org also supports many Engagement business units to one Sales or Service Cloud org. Multi-org doesn’t support connections for a single business unit to multiple Sales or Service Cloud orgs, or business units of multiple Enterprise 2.0 accounts to the same org. Multi-org supports various user mappings based on these business unit configurations.
Multi-Org Account Configuration in Marketing Cloud Connect: Multi-Org is an Enterprise 2.0 account configuration. This configuration allows individual Marketing Cloud Engagement business units to connect with a single Salesforce org, independent of the parent account or other business units. Using Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement, this configuration includes two setup scenarios.
Multi-Org Examples: These Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement scenarios show guidelines for disconnecting and reconnecting multi-org accounts.
Permission-Based Access: If you purchased Marketing Cloud Engagement Licensing after our September 2016 Release, you can access Marketing Cloud Connect functionality. You can access the features when your Marketing Cloud and CRM users are connected: enter a valid username in the Salesforce.com status field on the Marketing Cloud user record.
Personalize with Custom Objects: Use custom objects and AMPscript to personalize your messages in Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Create a Personalized Email with Custom Object Data: For this Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement tutorial example, create a personalized email from a case with custom object data using AMPscript.
Prerequisites: Review these prerequisites before installing Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Profile Center and Marketing Cloud Connect: Use the Profile Center with Marketing Cloud Connect. Create custom fields in the Sales or Service Cloud and map them to Marketing Cloud Engagement attributes for use in the Profile Center. Every Engagement email to a Salesforce contact, lead, report, or campaign includes a link to the Profile Center where customers manage their attributes and subscription preferences. These changes update Salesforce contact and lead data. You can also manage the opt-in preference on behalf of leads and contacts using Marketing Cloud Connect.
Remove Users: Admins in Sales Cloud, Service Cloud, or Experience Cloud can remove user access to Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Reports: View a list of standard Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement reports and report types.
Review Prerequisites and Marketing Cloud Connect Install Package: Review the system requirements and key Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement concepts to understand user types. Choose a data access option for configuration. Install the latest managed package and begin the setup process.
Salesforce Data Extensions in Marketing Cloud Connect: A data extension is a table that contains your data. With Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement, push tracking data from Engagement back to your Sales or Service Cloud orgs using a Salesforce data extension (SFDE). Push any tracking data for emails sent to SFDE audiences using Salesforce Sends to the Salesforce Contact or Lead record in the connected org. An SFDE can use the same Engagement segmentation and filtering tools as a standard data extension. Data extensions created from sends to reports or campaigns have a hard-coded retention policy of 5 days.
Salesforce Sends: There are many benefits of using the Salesforce Sends option in Marketing Cloud Engagement through Marketing Cloud Connect. Keep sending behavior consistent between Sales Cloud, Service Cloud, and Engagement. Share tracking data from Engagement by selecting the Salesforce Sends option within Email Studio Interactions.
Send Analytics: Access the Marketing Cloud Connect Send Analytics tab within the Sales or Service Cloud. This tab provides aggregate tracking data for all sends, specific subscriber activities, and specific email send activities. Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement reports are based on tracking data stored in the CRM.
Send to a Salesforce Data Extension or Filter: With Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement, sending to a Salesforce data extension or filter is a two-step process. First, create a Salesforce send email definition and then schedule the send.
Send Emails to Campaigns or Reports: Send a Marketing Cloud Engagement email from Sales or Service Cloud to a campaign or report through Marketing Cloud Connect. Reports must contain Contact ID, ContactID, Lead ID, or LeadID fields. Store reports in a custom Salesforce folder for sending and ensure that the user who executes the send can access the folder. Marketing Cloud Connect doesn’t support sending to joined reports or reports stored in standard Salesforce folders.
Set Up Connected App Authentication: Set up connected app authentication for Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement. This mechanism authenticates between Sales Cloud, Service Cloud, and Engagement without requiring you to store passwords in Engagement. It also prevents SOAP and REST API calls made by Marketing Cloud Connect from counting against your rolling 24-hour limit.
Set Up the Salesforce System User in Marketing Cloud Connect: The Sales or Service Cloud administrator creates the Salesforce System User. This user connects the accounts for the Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement configuration.
Subscriber Key: A subscriber key is a text field that contains a value that uniquely identifies a subscriber in your Marketing Cloud Engagement account. Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement uses the subscriber key to identify the Sales or Service Cloud record associated with the tracking data returned from Engagement.
Synchronized Data Sources: Use Synchronized Data Sources with Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement to access data from Sales and Service Clouds in Engagement for use in your marketing activities. As changes occur in the Sales or Service Cloud, Engagement receives those updates.
Testing an Object Trigger Before Sending: Before sending a triggered email through Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement, use a test script. Repeat the script for each object with a trigger setup. Ensure that the object’s defined properties account for all required properties on an object.
Tokenized Sending Across Clouds: Tokenized Sending lets you use data for your messages that is deemed too sensitive to store in Salesforce due to laws, regulations, or security policies. To protect sensitive information across clouds, use tokenized sending with Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Tracking Triggered Sends: Find related lists to help track the triggered sends through Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Tracking and Analytics: Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement tracking information is located in multiple places in Sales or Service Cloud. Use tracking data directly from Engagement for your business-critical processes. Marketing Cloud Connect tracking data is a subset of all tracking data available for a send and is a replication of data from Engagement.
Tracking and Unsubscribes: Answers to your questions about Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement tracking and unsubscribes.
Manage Data Storage: Use Tracking Data Cleanup to manage the storage of Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement tracking data in Sales or Service Cloud. Managing storage data helps reduce data storage costs.
Triggered Sends: Use triggered email sends to create and send automated messages to Salesforce contacts, leads, or person accounts when object records are created or updated.
Personalize Triggered Sends with Object Data: Use standard and custom object data to personalize triggered sends through Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Advanced Troubleshooting: Tips for advanced troubleshooting with Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Troubleshoot Connected App: Follow these tips to troubleshoot your Connected App authentication for Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Troubleshoot API Calls and Data Load Jobs: Tips for troubleshooting bulk API calls and data load jobs, and using API request logs with Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Troubleshooting Guide: Review troubleshooting tips for Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Tutorial Prerequisites: Complete these prerequisites before starting the Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement Drip Campaign tutorial.
Tutorials: Practice Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement features with these tutorials for specific use cases.
Marketing Cloud Connect Triggered Sends: Automatically send relevant, timely, personalized messages using triggered sends. Welcome emails to new customers or thank you notes for purchases are examples of how triggered sends are commonly used. Review important prerequisites and learn how to effectively use triggered sends with Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Unsubscribes: The first time a message is sent through Marketing Cloud Connect to a contact, lead, or person account from Sales or Service Cloud, the recipient is added to the All Subscribers list in Marketing Cloud Engagement. For example, when an Engagement email is sent from Sales Cloud to a report containing contacts, those contacts are added to the All Subscribers list. The Engagement status for that subscriber is set to Active in the All Subscribers list.
Update Campaign Member Page Layout: Through Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement, modify the campaign member page layout to include the Status or Activity field and the activity history.
Update Contact Page Layouts: Configure the contact page to ensure Marketing Cloud Connect users can see the relevant Marketing Cloud Connect fields.
Update Field-Level Security: To send Marketing Cloud emails through Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement, you must make the email opt-out field visible on leads and contacts.
Update Lead Page Layouts: Configure the lead page to ensure Marketing Cloud Connect users can see the relevant Marketing Cloud Connect fields.
Update User Page Layouts: Add email and mobile send tracking to contact and lead pages to continue configuration of Sales and Service Cloud for Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Upgrade FAQs: Answers to your questions about Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement upgrade.
Upgrade to Connected App: Upgrade your account to use Connected App Authentication, which is required for all Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement accounts as of June 1, 2016.
Upgrade to Marketing Cloud Connect: Learn the benefits of upgrading to Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement from an earlier version of the connector. Marketing Cloud Connect is a more efficient and effective way to manage your connection to the Sales or Service Cloud.
Upgrade to a Multi-Org Account: With Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement, multi-org accounts offer flexibility, but upgrading impacts the underlying structure of your Enterprise 2.0 account. Before upgrading, review these considerations for compatibility. The upgrade requires a minimum of 2 hours.
Upgrade to the Latest Marketing Cloud Connect Release: To make sure that you have the most recent features and bug fixes before each release, we automatically update the managed package in your production org to the previously released version. In addition, your non-production org is upgraded to the newest version when the managed package is released. This process provides you with a full release cycle to test the new package before we auto-update your production org.
Use Apex to Create Triggers: A trigger is Apex code that executes before or after the following types of operations: insert, update, delete, merge, upsert, and undelete. Developer environments, sandboxes, and trial orgs can create, edit, and delete Apex classes and triggers directly in the Salesforce CRM user interface. Unlimited Edition and Enterprise Edition production orgs can execute and view Apex in the user interface, but modifying Apex in the user interface is not allowed.
Marketing Cloud Connect User Types and Permissions: To use most Marketing Cloud Connect functionality, users need a license for Marketing Cloud Engagement and a license for Sales or Service Cloud. Understand the user types and permissions associated with Marketing Cloud Connect.
View Campaign Member Tracking: Through Marketing Cloud Connect for Marketing Cloud Engagement, track the status of all campaign members from the campaign record in Sales or Service Cloud.
Contact Data in Marketing Cloud Engagement: Access contact data and the relationships designed to help you use that data. Segment your subscribers to better target your sends.
Create Content in Marketing Cloud Engagement: Manage, create, and publish targeted and relevant marketing content to customers across multiple Marketing Cloud Engagement channels.
CloudPages Permissions: CloudPages supports specific Marketing Cloud Engagement user permissions. Choose whether to assign individual permissions or roles to users who create and manage web content. To support the expected access, you must assign some permissions in pairs or in conjunction with other Engagement permissions.
CloudPages: CloudPages combines the best of Marketing Cloud Engagement to capture, organize, and act on prospect data. Use capture forms to grow your audience and then nurture those prospects with a journey. Optimize your content for distinct mobile, social, and web experiences to catch those prospects wherever they are. Built-in reports help you monitor performance and optimize as you go.
Review CloudPages Analytics: CloudPages offers built-in analytics that track views of a page over the past 90 days. To see more information, create a report in Analytics Builder.
Create a CloudPages Folder: To organize your CloudPages content, create folders (formerly known as collections). You can also nest your folders and group relevant subfolders.
Create a Personalized URL for a Landing Page: When private domains are enabled, you can configure friendly and personalized URLs that help people find your content. A friendly URL can contain recognizable text in any part of the URL. With a personalized URL (PURL), you can customize the URL’s page key to serve dynamic content to the viewer.
Create a Smart Capture Form: To start a customer journey with people who submit a form, configure a Smart Capture form and then set it as an entry event in Journey Builder. You can add a Smart Capture form to any landing page in CloudPages.
Create an Interactive Email Page: When you want to increase engagement on form submissions, such as surveys or profile updates, an interactive email can help. After you build an email using an interactive email form block in Content Builder, you can customize a landing page for the submission confirmation.
Creating Content in CloudPages: You can create a few types of content in Marketing Cloud Engagement with CloudPages. Decide whether to create content from scratch or to work using other Engagement tools, such as Content Builder, Smart Capture forms, or code resources.
Create a Code Resource: To add styles or functionality to CloudPages content, such as custom CSS or JavaScript, create a code resource. After you create and publish the code resource, work with a Marketing Cloud Engagement developer to apply it to content using AMPscript.
Use a Smart Capture Form in Journey Builder: You can initiate activities after someone submits a Smart Capture form on a landing page. For example, send a confirmation email or add the person as a lead or contact in Sales Cloud. You can add a Smart Capture form only to a multistep journey.
Create Landing Pages with CloudPages: A landing page is a key part of many marketing campaigns. In CloudPages, a landing page is also a building block of a microsite. Use pages to build awareness, collect prospect data, and promote events or encourage downloads.
Create a Microsite: In Marketing Cloud Engagement, a CloudPages microsite is a collection of landing pages that you can organize into a meaningful site map. Add pages to the site map in the order that you want them to appear.
Collect Tracking Code: Collect Tracking Code is a JavaScript snippet that captures data about the behaviors of known and unknown visitors to your site. You can use this data to enhance contact profiles and optimize customer journeys across channels through predictive and personalized recommendations. You can also update product and content catalog details in real time or track email-driven revenue.
Do Not Track Script: Use Do Not Track Script code to suppress Collect Tracking Code on your website when a subscriber opts out of tracking. Collect Tracking Code doesn’t use browser settings to determine whether to track user activity.
Third-Party Cookies in Marketing Cloud Engagement: Marketing Cloud Engagement uses third-party cookies to track how users interact with your websites. Most web browsers have discontinued—or are in the process of discontinuing—support for third-party cookies. To ensure that you have access to the same engagement data that you’ve always had, Marketing Cloud Engagement uses partitioned cookies, sometimes known as Cookies Having Independent Partitioned State (CHIPS).
Set Contact Attribute Affinity: Use Collect Tracking Code to build subscriber affinity models based on contact attributes.
Streaming Catalog Updates Through Collect Tracking Code: To configure server-side streaming updates for items in your catalog, use the API key or catalog import option. Streaming updates replaces the standard file upload process.
Track Items in Cart: Configure Collect Tracking Code to track items that are added or removed from a contact’s cart.
Track Category Viewed: Configure Collect Tracking Code to store category data for the product a contact views on your website.
Track Purchase Details: Configure Collect Tracking Code to store details about a contact’s purchases from your website.
Track In-Site Search: Configure Collect Tracking Code to store data about a contact’s search on your website.
Track Items Viewed: Configure Collect Tracking Code to track the items that a contact views on your site.
Track Page View: The trackPageView call is the most common call and can capture three types of information: product or content views, categories views, or search views.
Track User Rating: Configure Collect Tracking Code to store contact ratings for items on your website.
Access Intelligence Reports: To access Intelligence Reports for Engagement, you need the required user role assigned to your account. When assigning the user role, you can also assign permissions in Intelligence Reports. For example, you can create pivot tables, but you can’t edit or save them.
Apply Filters to Dashboards: Filters enable you to focus on the data most relevant to you. When you select a filter in a dashboard, it applies to all dashboards.
Create a Builder Calculation: Use a builder calculation to create a custom measurement when you have subscriber-level data and you want more information, such as click rates or open rates. For example, you have geographical location data and you want to see the click rate per city.
Builder Calculations in the Query Builder: Use a builder calculation to create a custom field, such as click rate and open rate, directly in the Query Builder without using SQL code.
Click Rate Builder Calculation Example: Use this example to see how data is pulled from connected data extensions (regions) and engagement data (sends, bounces, and clicks).
Calculated Measurement Functions: Use functions when creating a calculated measurement in Intelligence Reports Advanced to make your functions more dynamic.
Contact Deletion in Intelligence Reports Advanced: Data protection and privacy compliance is a top priority for Intelligence Reports Advanced. If a contact is deleted through the contact deletion framework, the subscriber key is deleted in Intelligence Reports within seven days. The events linked to the subscriber aren’t deleted and are anonymously reflected in reports with no identifiable subscriber information.
Create a Dashboard Report: You can create a dashboard report in PDF format. You can also create a dashboard report by exporting a dashboard page. When creating the report from scratch, you must link to a dashboard page. The configuration settings come from the dashboard page, so any changes made to the source affect the configuration settings of the report later on.
Create a Flat Table Report: You can create a flat table report when you want a report that extracts your raw data into a CSV or Excel file.
Create a Pivot Table in Intelligence Reports: Use a pivot table to explore and extract data. For example, you can get sends and open rates for all your emails to see how well a specific email performed. You can also export a pivot table locally or use it to create a scheduled report.
Create a Pivot Table Report: To export a report to an Excel file or display the data in a pivot table, you create a pivot table. The pivot table isn't a real Excel object, rather it appears only in the form of a pivot table. You can also create a pivot table report by exporting a pivot table to a scheduled report.
Create a Report: You can create a report when you want to retrieve, view, and share a detailed analysis of your data. You can create a report from scratch or export an entity like a pivot table or dashboard page to a scheduled report.
Manage Cross-Channel App Credentials: Use the app credentials manager to view data sources that you added to your cross-channel apps and the credentials for each data source. When connecting third-party platforms to your apps, you can add new account credentials, refresh, or update existing credentials. If a data error occurs with your app, you can access and edit the credentials or log a support ticket.
Audience Insights for Advertising Studio App: Connect Marketing Cloud Advertising, formerly known as Advertising Studio to your paid media channels to optimize your audience strategy with a single, cross-channel view, and analyze the effectiveness of your first-party audiences. Explore how your audiences are performing across channels with a ready-made dashboard.
Install the Audience Insights for Advertising Studio App: Measure how your activated audiences are affecting your leading KPIs, prove the impact of first-party audiences in your campaigns, and track when and where your first-party audiences are being used.
Classify Campaign Names: To harmonize your data, the Email to Web Conversion GA4 app relies on matching your Google Analytics and Marketing Cloud Engagement campaign names. Therefore, if you use different naming conventions for Google Analytics and Salesforce, you must classify your campaign names so that the app can locate the data from each source.
GA4 Fields Available in the Email to Web Conversion App: The Email to Web Conversion GA4 app was rebuilt to work with GA4, and therefore some fields were changed accordingly. This list displays the old fields that were used in the previous version of the app (Email to Web Conversion Deprecated), and the new fields that the new app (Email to Web Conversion GA4) uses. These fields appear in the run mode of the app.
Install the Email to Web Conversion GA4 App: Installing the Email to Web Conversion GA4 app requires a Google Analytics account for the web analytics data. You must have UTM campaigns defined for your emails.
Email to Web Conversion GA4 App: The Email to Web Conversion GA4 app combines your Marketing Cloud Engagement and Google Analytics data into one view so that you can easily see how well your email campaigns are performing.
View Email Campaign Performance: Use the Email Campaign Performance dashboard to monitor your campaigns. The dashboard that’s created with this app is read-only and can’t be modified.
Cross-Channel Marketing Insights: The Cross-Channel Marketing Insights app unifies your data to help you make data-driven decisions. Users with a full Intelligence Reports license can edit and customize the app.
Install the Cross-Channel Marketing Insights App: When you install the app, your Marketing Cloud Engagement data is automatically connected and ready to use. If you don’t need the data, you can remove it. Installing the Cross-Channel Marketing Insights app requires a Google Analytics account and credentials for each marketing platform that you want to add.
Marketing Insights for Sales Cloud: The Marketing Insights for Sales Cloud solution helps marketing and sales understand how marketing efforts and spend are converting into revenue. For example, discover weak links in your sales funnel or find business justifications to ramp up or pause a campaign.
Install the Marketing Insights for Sales Cloud Solution: Get insights on the complete sales cycle, from spend to revenue, through return on investment. Using the Marketing Insights for Sales Cloud solution requires the Cross-Channel Marketing Insights solution with at least one paid ad campaign on a common advertising platform.
View Marketing Insights for Sales Cloud: Use the Marketing Insights for Sales Cloud dashboard to understand how your marketing efforts and spend are converting into revenue.
Cross-Channel Apps: Cross-Channel apps allow you to take your data from separate silos, and then connect, visualize, and analyze your key data sources. The apps are available in the Cross-Channel tab, where you can demo and install various apps.
Create a Collection: A collection contains your dashboard pages. After you create a collection, you can easily add dashboard pages to create a cohesive and full display of your data.
Manage a Collection: After you create a collection, you can edit the collection and its dashboard pages to fit your needs.
Collections: Collections are like notebooks, and the pages inside the notebooks are what we call dashboard pages. Collections allow you to organize related dashboards together.
Create and Configure Dashboards: In Intelligence Reports Advanced you can create and customize dashboards to meet your business needs.
Dashboard Pages: Dashboard pages segment your collections so you can divide up your data according to your preferences. Each page can be customized and filtered, so you can modify the design and remove any unwanted data.
In-App Deliveries Dashboard: View your in-app delivery data including unique sends, message deliveries, device displays, and display rate. Get breakdowns by day of the week, mobile operating system, and mobile app.
In-App Engagement Dashboard: Get details about your in-app engagement key performance indicators (KPIs), including device button clicks, device dismisses, device button click rate and more. View breakdowns by day of the week, mobile OS, and mobile apps. You can export the dashboard and its widgets into different formats.
Journey Performance by In-App Dashboard: View your journey and in-app message performance data. View breakdowns by day of the week, mobile operating system, and mobile app.
In-App Performance Dashboard: Get details about your in-app message performance, including an overview of sends, by looking at deliveries, display rate, and dismisses. View breakdowns by day of week, mobile OS, and mobile app.
Customize Dashboard Pages: Customizing your dashboard pages allows you to modify and focus on specific data in a view. You can apply filters and interactive filtersets to your dashboards to get a better understanding of the data that appears on your dashboard.
Add a Dashboard Page to a Collection: After you create a collection, you can add dashboard pages to suit your specific reporting needs. You can then add widgets to your dashboards to visualize and explore actionable insights.
Design Your Page: After you add a dashboard page to your collection, you can customize and design your page to create a visually appealing and effective dashboard page.
Custom Themes: Custom themes provide you with the flexibility to create any designed theme you want. After you apply an InstaBrand design, you can apply manual changes to your dashboard page from the different customization options available beneath the InstaBrand options.
Use InstaBrand: InstaBrand is an AI-powered image analysis tool that automatically generates beautiful, branded dashboard page themes. You can upload an image or choose from a catalog of images.
Use Designed Themes: Designed themes provide an array of generic themes that you can apply to your dashboard page to produce stunning visualizations of your data.
Create a Dashboard Page Filter: You can apply filters to dashboard pages to limit or modify the data in a view. You can filter by a dimension, measurement, or date dimension. Page level filters affect the page and the widgets on the filtered page.
Dashboard Page Filters: You can apply filters to dashboard pages to limit or modify the data in a view. You can filter by a dimension, measurement, or date dimension. Page level filters affect the page and the widgets on the filtered page. You can see if there are any filters applied to your page from the filters tab.
Interactive FilterSet: Interactive filtersets enable you to save various configured views of your dashboard page by saving the selections made to the interactive filter widgets. You can apply Filtersets as a filter option within the dashboard page.
Create an Interactive Filter: Interactive filtersets enable you to save various configured views of your dashboard page by saving the selections made to the interactive filter widgets. You can apply filtersets as a filter option within the dashboard page.
Add Widgets to Dashboard Pages: After you create a collection, you can add dashboard pages to segment your data. You can then add widgets to your dashboards to visualize and receive actionable insights.
Calculated Dimensions: Calculated Dimensions are non-numerical fields or dimensions that you can create on top of your existing data. Calculated dimensions don’t exist physically in the database. Rather, each calculated dimension represents a query that can be referenced to from any report, pivot table, and dashboard page.
Create a Calculated Measurement: Create calculated measurements on top of existing data so you can refer to them in other tabs. You can also create calculated measurements from a widget on a dashboard page. Calculated measurements created from widgets appear in the calculated measurements section in the Setup tab.
Calculated Measurements: Calculated measurements are numerical custom calculations that you can create on top of your existing data. You can create calculated fields from the widget editor, referencing dimensions and measurements, as well as functions and operators.
Create a Widget: The widget creation process is streamlined so you can build your widget in just three steps.
Add Data to Your Widget: You can add data to your widget by selecting the measurements and dimensions you want to display. This step is mandatory because you can’t save the widget without data.
Apply a Filter to Your Widget: The Filters tab allows you to go over all the filters applied to the widget through the page, for example, date filters or top results.
WhatsApp Deliveries Dashboard: View your WhatsApp delivery data including sends, deliveries, and delivery rates. Get breakdowns by day of the week, WhatsApp business account, and WhatsApp channel name.
WhatsApp Engagement Dashboard: Get details about your WhatsApp engagement key performance indicators (KPIs), including the number of messages opened and the message open rate. View breakdowns by day of the week, WhatsApp business account, and WhatsApp channel name. You can export the dashboard and its widgets into different formats.
Journey Performance by WhatsApp Dashboard: View your journey and WhatsApp message performance data. View breakdowns by day of the week, WhatsApp business account, WhatsApp channel name, Journey name, Journey version, and Journey activity name.
WhatsApp Performance Dashboard: Get details about your WhatsApp message performance, including an overview of sends, by looking at deliveries, bounce rate, and open rate. View breakdowns by day of the week, WhatsApp business account, WhatsApp channel name, WhatsApp send name, and locale.
Dashboards: Dashboards provide an out-of-the box view of your Email, Push, and Journey data. With dashboards, you gain valuable insights and can quickly identify trends or anomalies. With the premium Advanced version, you can also create and edit dashboards.
Data Extensions: Query your engagement data with data extension data to retrieve additional attributes and measurements. Identify trends and get marketing insights based on performance by audience attributes from your data extensions.
Querying Data Extensions: You can create queries with your engagement data and data extension data all in one place.
Connect to a Data Extension: Connect to a data extension to pull in additional attributes along with your engagement data. You can connect to any data extension that’s in your business unit and is below 50 million rows.
Create a Join Between Engagement and Data Extension Data: While connecting to a data extension, you can create a connection between the data extension and engagement data. This way when querying, you’re pulling in data from both datasets.
Manage Data Extensions: All connected data extensions appear in the Setup tab. From here you can view more information about each data extension. If errors occur during the sync, they appear here. You can also disconnect a data extension if you no longer require it, and edit joined fields too.
Create a Query with a Data Extension: Create a query with data extensions to view your engagement data with your data extension data. For example, view total clicks per region.
Troubleshoot Data Extension Failures: During the data extension sync process, different statuses appear. If for some reason the process fails, troubleshoot according to these guidelines.
Overview of Data in Intelligence Reports: Intelligence Reports for Engagement displays both Email, Push, and Journey campaign-level data. Intelligence Reports for Engagement doesn’t display subscriber-level data or event-level data. However, subscriber-level data can be used to generate campaign-level analytics. With Intelligence Reports for Engagement you can see how many emails or messages were opened, delivered, and clicked. The data that is displayed is daily aggregated metrics. For example, you can see the number of send and open rates per day, during the last 90 days, for a specific campaign.
Send Date Versus Event Date: All engagement events in Intelligence Reports have two date dimensions: Event, and send.
Intelligence Reports for Engagement: Use Intelligence Reports for Engagement to generate, view, and share a detailed analysis of your email, push, and journey campaign-level data. Intelligence Reports for Engagement Advanced, which is available for an additional cost, includes more features, functionality, and analytics. Intelligence Reports on Hyperforce supports email and push channels.
Intelligence Reports Versus Data Views: When using Intelligence Reports and Data Views, you might encounter discrepancies because the logic behind the reports and structure is different. Review the differences so that you can better understand your results.
Dimensions and Measurements: Dimensions and measurements are included when viewing dashboards, pivot tables, and reports. Use categories to find the data that’s most relevant to you.
Email Deliveries Dashboard: View your email delivery data, including key performance indicators (KPIs) such as sends, deliveries and bounces, and delivery timelines.
Email Engagement Dashboard: A detailed look into your email engagement key performance indicators (KPIs), including opens, clicks, unsubscribes, and engagement timelines.
Email Overview Dashboard: Get a high-level overview of your email campaigns, such as the number of emails sent, the open rate, delivery and engagement, and the top- and bottom-performing journey emails.
Email Performance Dashboard: Get details of your email send data, including the open rate, click rate, unsubscribe rate, and performance funnel.
Export a Pivot Table in Intelligence Reports: You can export a pivot table as a report and run it as part of a workflow in real time or on a defined schedule. You can also export to an Excel file, for example, and share it with others.
Start Learning About Intelligence Reports: If you’re a new user or need a refresher, click on the learning maps below to learn the basics of Intelligence Reports and Intelligence Reports Advanced. The learning maps contain links to other resources, like Trailhead and videos, and starter help topics. You can always come back to the learning maps to refresh your skills, or check out newly added content.
Set Up Intelligence Reports on Hyperforce: Create a connection between Data 360 and Marketing Cloud Engagement to use Intelligence reports on Data 360. Intelligence Reports provisioned for Marketing Cloud Engagement based on Salesforce Tableau Semantic Layer and the standard MCE data streams bundles. Intelligence Reports use Data 360 credits.
Billing Considerations for Intelligence Reports on Hyperforce: When you use Intelligence Reports on Hyperforce, your engagement data is stored and processed in Data 360, which has billing implications. Data 360 services and usage impacts the consumption of credits used for billing.
Journey Performance by Email Dashboard: Get an in-depth view into your email journey and activities performance data. It also provides a breakdown by domain, day of the week, and audience.
Manage Pivot Tables in Intelligence Reports: You can manage pivot tables in Intelligence Reports for Engagement after you create them. You can edit, duplicate, and delete existing pivot tables.
Manage Reports: After you create a report, it appears in your reports list. From your reports list, you can view all your reports, edit, delete, and create a copy.
Apply Filters to a Pivot Table: Add filters to a pivot table to narrow down the data and focus on what’s relevant to your use case. For example, add a filter to focus on a specific email name instead of all the emails in the campaign. Or filter by a campaign name to focus on that campaign.
Out-of-the-Box Pivot Table Examples: By default, Intelligence Reports for Engagement comes with five out-of-the-box pivot table examples. These examples help you get started so you can see how the most common pivot tables are configured and set up. You can use them as is, copy and then adjust them, or even delete them if they‘re not required.
Create a Pivot Table from a Widget: Transform a widget into a pivot table to get insights on your data. You can customize the pivot table, apply filters, and even share it with others.
Pivot Tables Overview: Pivot tables allow you to explore your data from multiple perspectives. You can calculate, summarize, and analyze data by seeing comparisons, patterns, and trends in your data. With pivot tables, you can create custom reports without the need for query formulas, such as SQL queries.
Push Deliveries Dashboard: View your push notification delivery data and timelines. Get breakdowns by day of the week, mobile OS, and mobile app.
Journey Performance by Push Dashboard: View your journey and push notification performance data. View breakdowns by day of the week, mobile OS, and mobile app.
Push Engagement Dashboard: Get details about your push notification engagement key performance indicators (KPIs), including deliveries, opens, and open rate. View breakdowns by day of the week, mobile OS, and mobile apps. You can export the dashboard and its widgets into different formats.
Push Performance Dashboard: Get details about your push performance, including an overview of push sends, by looking at deliveries, delivery rate, and bounces. View breakdowns by day of week, mobile OS, and mobile app.
Queries: Use Queries to pull granular data and get insights on your subscriber level data. For example, learn which subscribers engaged in a particular journey or investigate messages sent to a specific subscriber. Explore and export results for a deeper understanding of your data.
Query Your Data with Query Builder: Create queries automatically based on selected dimensions and measurements with clicks-no-code. You can also use or modify one of the predefined queries in the Query Library. They represent commonly used queries in Query Builder and SQL formats.
Queries Data View: When querying your data in Intelligence Reports Advanced, there are many fields available. You can view the available data set fields in the Queries tab, in the Data Set tab in the left pane. Queries unify all the available fields into one Engagement Data table.
Query Export Options: After you create and run your queries, you can download the results locally, export, and schedule an export for your results.
Query Limitations: There are two tools you can use to create queries, the query builder and SQL. SQL should be used for more complex use cases. If you experience any limitations with the preview or downloading your data, consider the export or schedule export options.
Export Your Query Results: Download or export query results to S3, SFTP, Google Cloud Platform, Azure Blob, or email and define an ongoing schedule.
Query Your Data with SQL: You can create queries manually using an SQL editor. You can also use or modify one of the predefined queries in the Query Library. These represent commonly used queries in Query Builder and SQL formats.
Query Builder: Use the Query Builder to create queries without code. Select dimensions, measurements, and then and run your query all within one place. You can also create custom builder calculations inside the Query Builder to create custom fields.
Reports Overview: Reports are an easy way to retrieve, view, and share a detailed analysis of your data. You can create the report from scratch by going to the Reports tab and clicking Create New Report. Or you can create the same report by using the Schedule Export option when in a dashboard page or in a pivot table. For example, to create a flat table report, create the report from scratch in Excel, or go to a predefined pivot table and use the Schedule Export Flat Table option.
Set Report Schedule and Delivery Method: You define scheduling and delivery methods for a report to decide how you want to run and share it. As a result, you decide when the report is sent. For example, if you want the report to go out every day at a specific time, you can set a daily frequency and the time, say, 10:00 PM. You can also define how you want the report to be executed and shared.
Calculated Fields: Create calculated fields in Intelligence Reports Advanced when you need customized dimensions and measurements.
Create a Calculated Dimension: Create calculated dimensions on top of existing data so you can refer to them from different tabs. You can also create calculated dimensions from a widget on a dashboard page. Calculated dimensions created from widgets appear in the calculated dimension part of the Setup tab.
Find and Replace Calculated Dimensions: You can use the find and replace function to search for a specific dimension, edit and replace the edited dimension across your entire business unit. You can do this without searching for the location of the calculated dimension, which is especially useful when creating a calculated dimension that is meant to replace an existing dimension.
Calculated Dimensions Use Cases: Use these examples when creating calculated dimensions in Intelligence Reports Advanced to easily create fields. Each example contains an explanation with a code sample.
Find and Replace Calculated Measurements: You can use the find and replace function to search for a specific measurement. Then, you can edit and replace the edited measurement across your entire business unit without finding every location where the calculated measurement is used. This feature is especially useful when creating a calculated measurement that is meant to replace an existing measurement across your business unit.
Calculated Measurements Use Cases: Use these examples when creating calculated measurements to easily create fields. Each example contains an explanation with a code sample.
Report Settings: You can set your report settings to allow or prevent users from receiving a download link for large attachments. In Intelligence Reports for Engagement, large files—over 7 MB—are shared via a download link. Any user with the download link can download the report.
Sharing Dashboard Pages and Widgets: Slack provides seamless collaboration with colleagues and clients. Marketing teams can work together and communicate on campaigns and improve cross-functional work. You can share dashboards and widgets via Slack, email, or as downloaded local files. You can also schedule when to share reports.
Integrate Insights for Slack and Intelligence Reports: Integrate with Intelligence Reports Insights for Slack to share dashboard pages and widgets. You can configure the integration on the business unit or collection level. Users with permissions and access to the business unit or collection can then share dashboard pages and widgets in Slack.
Share Dashboard Pages and Widgets via Slack: In order to share your dashboard pages and widgets through Slack you need to set up your Intelligence Reports Insights for Slack Integration in the Setup tab. After you set up the integration you can track and monitor your campaigns and collaborate with Slack. Slack is permission based, only users with permissions and access to the business unit or collection can share dashboard pages and widgets.
Pre-Configured Dashboards: Intelligence Reports for Engagement’s pre-configured dashboards provide valuable insights and help you quickly identify trends or anomalies.
Apply Filters to a Report: Add filters to a report to narrow down the data that you see in reports and focus on what’s relevant to your use case. You can filter by a standard or custom dimension, such as a campaign, email domain, or country, or by a custom measurement, such as an email bounce rate over 60%.
User Roles and Permissions in Intelligence Reports: To use Intelligence Reports for Engagement, your account must be assigned the Intelligence Reports for Engagement user role. The user role has the following permissions: Access, View and Export, Schedule, and Create and Edit.
Review Report Execution Information in Intelligence Reports: When a report runs in Intelligence Reports for Engagement, you can see a list of all the report executions. Each time a report runs, a new job is executed and a new row appears in the list.
View Report History: You can use the report history to monitor your reports. The report history log displays a list of all the times the report ran. And it provides information about each report execution, such as whether the run was successful and the start and end dates of the execution. You can also download report outputs.
Einstein and Analytics in Marketing Cloud Engagement: Gain deep insights into the behaviors and interests of your contacts across channels. The insights provided in Marketing Cloud Engagement help you set marketing goals and refine customer journeys.
Campaign Messages: Campaign messages let your business users send single or multi-touch engagements to Contacts, Leads, and Person Accounts at scale from the Salesforce Campaign object.
Add Custom Personalization Interactions: The Distributed Marketing personalization flow includes these interaction tabs: Edit and Send Settings. Add one or more interaction tabs for more complex use cases, such as carbon copying or sending to alternate email addresses. To extend Distributed Marketing interactions, create a custom external integration Lightning component, register it with Distributed Marketing, and name the new tab in Distributed Marketing Administration.
Add Custom Personalization Interactions for Bulk Sends: You can make custom personalization interaction tabs available in the Bulk Send workflow, including Auto Send. To extend Distributed Marketing interactions, create an Apex class. Then register the new Apex class, a custom interaction Lightning component, with Distributed Marketing. Optionally, name the new tab in Distributed Marketing Administration. Custom personalization interactions can be approved individually or for all quick sends.
Add Quick Send Components: To help your business users send a single email to a part of their book of business, add one or more of the Distributed Marketing Quick Send components to their experience.
Upgrade to Tenant-Specific Endpoints Authentication: To enhance the performance of the Marketing Cloud Engagement platform, tenant-specific subdomains are assigned automatically to all customers. This automatic assignment improves API performance, creates a faster experience, and is required for some Marketing Cloud Engagement data centers. You can self-update any connected business units not already using Tenant-Specific Endpoints (TSE) authentication without disrupting any existing connections. All new connections automatically use TSE authentication.
Administer the Campaign Send Audience Batch Cap: Set the maximum number of campaign members that can be sent to at once when performing a Segmented Send. Reducing the number of individuals included in segments can help improve performance for customers who have backend processes based on campaigns or campaign members. If your organization uses Bulk Send, the batch cap doesn’t apply.
Administer the Email Header: Show business users who an email is going to, and who it is sent from, as part of the Distributed Marketing preview. The To information displays the standard Name and Email Address fields on the recipient’s contact or lead record. The From information displays the standard Name and Address fields on the record of the running user or record owner.
Administer Frequency Capping: Define the maximum number of sends a user can initiate through Distributed Marketing. Users see the number of messages remaining before they send a message. When the cap is reached, sending is disabled until the cap is reset. The frequency send cap can be reset daily, weekly, or monthly. The cap resets at midnight in the user’s time zone and is a rolling reset. Sends are credited back 1, 7, or 30 days after they’re consumed. If your organization uses Bulk Sends, users can’t target an audience with more recipients than remaining sends.
Administer Default Greeting Options: To help control voice and tone, select the greeting options for standard Distributed Marketing users to choose from. Distributed Marketing automatically includes First Name and Full Name options, which can’t be edited or removed. If you use custom fields, such as Preferred Name, add up to eight more greeting options.
Administer Compliance and Approvals: Ensure that your content remains on brand and legally compliant. Use a Salesforce Approval Process to route Distributed Marketing content to other Salesforce users to review, automatically block sends containing customer-defined restricted words, and define a list of domains that user-defined images can come from.
Enable Manual Approval: Ensure that content sent through Distributed Marketing is compliant by routing sends through other Salesforce users for review. To enable manual approval, create an approvals process for Distributed Marketing content. Then enable manual approvals in the Distributed Marketing Administration app. Designated approvers review content before it's sent.
Assign Permissions: To grant access to Distributed Marketing, follow these steps to assign the installed permission sets.
Distributed Attachment Block: To help your Marketing Cloud business users personalize a message, they can choose their own image using the distributed attachment block and select the attachments to use in a message.
Use Business Units with Content Marketplace: Create content marketplaces that display Campaigns or Quick Send messages connected to journeys from a specific business unit by including its name in the marketplace’s filter criteria.
Bulk Send a Message from a List View: Business users can start a bulk Quick Send message directly from a contact, lead, or account list view. List views can contain up to 100,000 recipients, and they support audience-level user personalization.
Use Business Units with Distributed Marketing: If you use Marketing Cloud Engagement business units to manage content by categories - like brand, line of business, or region - you can add them to Distributed Marketing to support unique groups of business users. Then, use sharing rules and campaign marketplace to manage the content that groups of sellers, partners, distributors, or agents can access. You can set up business unit access for both Distributed Marketing administrators and standard users in Salesforce Setup. Business users do not require unique Marketing Cloud Engagement logins.
Campaign Inheritance and Distributed Marketing: Use campaign hierarchies to manage content distribution when multiple individuals must use the same general marketing activity. For example, use a Welcome drip campaign instead of giving everyone access to the same campaign record.
Campaign Sends: Use Campaign Sends created by your Marketing teams to send your customers single or multi-touch engagements. Campaign Sends use data and real-time engagement feedback to send your customers the right message at the right time. If collaborative content is enabled, you can modify content. Personalize content for individuals or segments, preview content exactly how individuals see it in their inbox or text message, and more.
Change Journey Connected to a Campaign: Before or after campaign members are added to a campaign or a child campaign is created, you can change the journey connected to the campaign through Distributed Marketing. After saving, an association between a campaign and a journey is required.
Add Campaign Messages Component: Customize your Campaigns page layout for Distributed Marketing to include this custom Campaign Messages component. This component provides access to review Marketing Cloud Engagement messages within the connected journey, preview content, review pending campaign members for approval, and more. Think of the Campaign Messages component as a Distributed Marketing campaign’s “home base.”
Add Pending Approvals Page: Add a Pending Approvals page to continue setting up Distributed Marketing in your Experience Cloud. Through this page, you can review contacts, leads, and others to approve or reject them for receiving campaign messages.
Add Settings Page: Add a Distributed Marketing Settings page to continue setting up Distributed Marketing in your Experience Cloud. Through this page, you can select the default personalization and create options for personalizing messages, such as selecting how the message recipient is greeted.
Expose User Settings: Add a Settings navigation menu item to continue setting up Distributed Marketing in your Experience Cloud. This navigation menu item provides quick access to the Distributed Marketing Settings page.
Guided Setup: Distributed Marketing for Experience Cloud: In general, you can use the standard Distributed Marketing help and training documentation to set up, configure, and use Distributed Marketing. However, use this guide when setting up Distributed Marketing in Experience Builder instead of Lightning App Builder.
Add Business Units to Your Org: After installing the Distributed Marketing managed package, you can add up to 200 business units to your account. You can choose which users to share the business units with to control access to content. Distributed Marketing uses named principal authentication with the OAuth 2.0 protocol.
Configure an External Integration Component: The first step to create an interaction in Distributed Marketing is to configure an external integration component. Your component works with Distributed Marketing as follows.
Enable Journeys for Campaign Send: To share single or multistep journeys, connect a Salesforce campaign to a Marketing Cloud Engagement Journey. This connection exposes marketing content to your owners, partners, and sellers for personalization in Distributed Marketing.
Create a Distributed Marketing Sender Profile: Create a sender profile in Marketing Cloud Engagement to control who emails are sent from. By default, Distributed Marketing messages are sent on behalf of the running, or logged in, user. To allow people to send on behalf of other team members, use custom Distributed Marketing personalization interactions and update this sender profile to reference that data.
Create Entry Event Data Extension: Create a standard, sendable data extension that captures information from the approved contacts that you use for journey messaging. For example, capture the sender email address and ID.
Set Up Journeys for Distributed Marketing: All messages in Distributed Marketing are sent using Marketing Cloud Engagement’s Journey Builder. Create single-message journeys to provide business users individual assets such as birthday emails, knowledge articles, or world event updates. Or create multi-message journeys to empower users with more involved engagements such as welcome series, drip campaigns, or event outreach campaigns. You create a unique journey for each asset or multi-step engagement, then share the journey with business users using Distributed Marketing’s Campaign or Quick Send Workflows.
Create Profile Attribute Mappings: When you use Distributed Marketing content blocks, users can automatically customize emails and preview those modifications within their editing experience. If you also use the additional data included in Distributed Marketing sends for email personalization, you must include that data as a profile attribute to preview content. For example, add ‘greeting’ as a profile attribute to allow your users to modify how they address email recipients, and preview those modifications.
Administer Org-Wide Pending Member Table Defaults: After contacts, leads, or person accounts are added to campaigns, standard Distributed Marketing users review campaign members to personalize content and to approve or reject them for receiving messages. You can define the default fields your users see. By default, the list of pending campaign members is sorted by the creation date, which is when the member was added to the campaign.
Customize Pending Member Table: After contacts, leads, or person accounts are added to campaigns, standard Distributed Marketing users review pending campaign members to personalize content and to approve or reject them for receiving messages. You can add fields to the pending member table to provide context when personalizing and approving campaign members. By default, the list of pending campaign members is sorted by the creation date, which is when the member was added to the campaign.
Define Valid Image Domains: Provide up to 10 domains that business users can add images from when providing a custom image via a URL. If a business user enters a URL with an invalid domain, sending features are disabled.
Discover Distributed Marketing Content: If your organization is set up to use Content Marketplaces, you can use them to easily find assets you can send. Each marketplace shows a collection of single messages or campaigns that you can access. Assets are sorted by their creation date, and each marketplace displays up to 9 assets at once. You can page through marketplaces with more than 9 assets, or select View All to see the complete list at once. To send the message, simply click the tile.
Distributed Image Block: To help your Marketing Cloud Engagement business users personalize a message, they can choose their own image using the distributed image block and select the image to use in a message. Options include traditional images, offers, head shots, and more.
Distributed Phrases Block: Create a single template to reuse for similar emails with the new Phrases content block in Distributed Marketing.
Distributed Plain Text Block: Give Marketing Cloud Engagement business users more flexibility when personalizing messages with the ability to enter plain text in a message. Use this text block to let users contextualize images and marketing content, create their own messages and personal notes, and more.
Distributed Marketing: Distributed Marketing from Salesforce bridges the gap between corporate marketing, employees, channel partners, and your brand to deliver consistent experiences across corporate marketing and partner networks. Corporate marketers build and share on-brand, collaborative content in Marketing Cloud Engagement. Distributed teams of advisers, partners, and more can view, personalize, and send this content directly from CRM experiences such as Sales, Service, Financial Services, or Experience Cloud.
Edit an Email in Distributed Marketing: Follow these steps to edit an email in Distributed Marketing. Editing options become available when your organization enables collaborative content for the email message.
Edit an SMS Message in Distributed Marketing: Follow these steps to edit an SMS message in Distributed Marketing. Editing options are available only if your organization has enabled collaborative SMS messages.
Edit Send Settings: If your organization enables the Send Settings option, you can choose to send emails from an individual’s record owner or from yourself. The name and email address of the user you select is visible in preview mode, and appear in the From field in your customer’s email inbox.
Enable Custom SMS Messages: Add AMPscript to SMS messages to allow a user to write and send a custom SMS message through Distributed Marketing. SMS messages are sent through journeys using the MobileConnect SMS message activity.
Enable Journeys for Quick Send: Marketers can make up to 1,000 Marketing Cloud Engagement journeys per connected Business Unit available in Distributed Marketing Quick Send workflows. Journeys are available in all Distributed Marketing Quick Send workflows and can be shared with users using sharing rules.
Enable Legacy Personalization: Use this procedure if you need to use the previous Introduction and Conclusion personalization methods. These methods will eventually be discontinued. We recommend using Distributed Marketing Content Blocks.
Distributed Marketing Content: Distributed Marketing allows you to extend powerful and dynamic content to distributed teams. You can also use it to allow those teams to interact with that content safely and efficiently.
Track Quick Send Activities with Distributed Marketing: You can enable tracking Distributed Marketing sends to monitor what Quick Send Distributed Marketing uses most. You have two options to view adoption records for leads and contacts. The option you choose depends on whether you’re using Experience Cloud or Communities and whether you need to display the adoption records. Tracking activities adds to your storage consumption limits. To stay within your limits, we recommend deleting objects that are no longer needed.
Enable Send Scheduling: Allow business users to schedule single and bulk send Quick Send messages for a future time and date. Messages are scheduled and sent in the running user’s time zone. Messages must be scheduled at least 5 minutes in the future and can be canceled up to 5 minutes before the send.
Enhance Distributed Marketing: Enhance Distributed Marketing functionality to fit your company’s needs. To extend the message personalization flow, create custom personalization interactions. Extend the Distributed Marketing payload to include more data for journey decisions, content personalization, and more.
Extend Entry Source Data: Distributed Marketing includes a standard set of fields used to populate the associated journey's entry source data extension. You can add fields to the standard set to include data from contact or lead objects. When a campaign member is approved through Distributed Marketing or when a Quick Send message is sent, the values of the additional data fields for the underlying contact or lead are added to the entry source data extension in Marketing Cloud Engagement. Use this data for Marketing Cloud Engagement journey decisions, content personalization, and more.
Distributed Rich Text Block: Give Marketing Cloud Engagement business users more flexibility when personalizing messages with the ability to enter formatted text in a message. Use this to let users contextualize images and marketing content, create their own messages and personal notes, and more.
Get Started with Distributed Marketing: You saw the demos and identified compelling use cases that enable your advisors, partners, dealers, and others to inform, market, and sell to their customers at scale. Now, it’s time to start setting up Distributed Marketing for Marketing Cloud Engagement Use these guided setups to quickly activate new workflows for your teams.
Guided Setup: Campaign Send: Use this guide to set up the Campaign Send workflow in Distributed Marketing for Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Guided Setup: Install and Configure Distributed Marketing: Before rolling out Distributed Marketing, we suggest having an internal alignment meeting to review tasks and determine a timeline and rollout strategy. This meeting typically involves stakeholders from corporate marketing, IT, and your business users such as Sales or Partner Management. Distributed Marketing installation is a multistep process that has you work in your Marketing Cloud Engagement and Sales Cloud environments. Some instances require you to work with multiple individuals in your organization who have administrative permissions in both environments. The environment you’re working in is indicated on each task.
Image Content Block Options: Admins can set up an image library for users to choose from up to 12 images. Or, to add their own, they can use a URL or upload an image from their computer.
Install Content Blocks: Marketing users with custom content blocks in Content Builder can enable personalization. Register blocks with your Marketing Cloud Engagement account, and then drag them into email content to create areas of collaboration for business users. To use Distributed Marketing content blocks, create a Marketing Cloud Engagement installed package for Distributed Marketing. Then, determine access and add the custom blocks you want to use.
Add a Distributed Marketing Content Block Package: Follow these steps to create a Distributed Marketing Content Block package in Marketing Cloud Engagement. This package is where you can add the Distributed Marketing content blocks you want to use.
Installation Overview: Follow these steps to complete the initial installation and configuration of the Distributed Marketing managed package in your Sales, Service, Financial Services, or Experience Cloud org and Distributed Marketing content block package in your Marketing Cloud Engagement account. To complete configuration in your Sales, Service, Financial Services, or Experience Cloud, you must be able to install the managed package, assign permission sets, and complete post-installation authentication setup. To complete configuration in Marketing Cloud Engagement, you must have access to administrative privileges and be able to install packages.
Interact with Distributed Marketing Content: Whether you’re nurturing a lead sending a new customer a personalized welcome campaign, or just wishing a long-time client happy birthday, Distributed Marketing provides an easy-to-use interface to preview and send compelling emails and SMS messages. If your marketing teams have enabled content collaboration, simply click on the areas of the content you want to interact with and make it your own. Depending on your set-up, you can add personal notes, select the images used in email, send on behalf of other team members, and more.
Journeys for Campaign Sends: To create a unique journey for marketing activities when using the Distributed Marketing Campaign Send workflow in Marketing Cloud Engagement, follow these steps.
Journeys for Quick Send Messages: To create a unique journey for marketing activities when using the Distributed Marketing Quick Send workflow in Marketing Cloud Engagement, follow these steps
Set Content Block Permissions: You can manage who can access Distributed Marketing for Marketing Cloud Engagement content blocks.
Manage Replies to Distributed Marketing Emails: Most messages sent through Distributed Marketing don’t warrant a reply from the recipient or have specific calls to action embedded in the message. But sometimes recipients reply to messages sent through Distributed Marketing. Review the following information to understand how Distributed Marketing works with reply mail management and Sender Authentication Packages (SAP).
Manage Settings: Distributed Marketing allows you to enhance your CRM with Marketing Cloud Engagement content to send relevant, on-brand content at every touchpoint. With administrator access, typically granted to marketers, connect a Marketing Cloud Engagement journey to a campaign, enable Quick Send, and customize Distributed Marketing to fit your needs.
Name the Custom Tab: To complete the setup of your new personalization interaction in Distributed Marketing, name the custom tab for the component you created and registered. If you don’t name the tab, the tab name defaults to More.
Personalization Data Extension: Distributed Marketing creates personalization data extensions in Marketing Cloud Engagement to store personalization data Distributed Marketing users enter when personalizing email messages. We automatically create a personalization data extension for you when you first connect a journey to a campaign or enable a journey for quick send. Custom SMS messages aren’t stored here, but are available on the journey’s event data extension.
Personalize Campaign Messages: As a Distributed Marketing user, you can personalize the message content for contacts, leads, or person accounts to receive campaign messages.
Set Up Quick Send from Contacts, Leads, and Accounts: To set up Quick Send to individuals, add the Quick Send Lightning component in Lightning App Builder or Experience Builder to Contact, Lead, or Account page layouts. You can’t set up Quick Send for business accounts.
Set Up Quick Send from List Views: To set up Quick Send to List Views, add the Send Quick Send Message custom button to the Contact, Lead, or Person Account List View Search Layout in Lightning App Builder. Users can send up to 75 recipients at once.
Quick Send Message Default Values: Default personalizations allow users to streamline their Distributed Marketing experience by creating default customizations for Quick Send messages. You can modify these customizations for individual recipients before sending through any of the Quick Send workflows you can access.
Set Up Quick Send from Cases: To set up Quick Send from a case, add the MCDM Quick Send Message Lightning component to the Case page layout in the Lightning App Builder or Experience Builder to a Case.
Set Up Quick Send from Quick Send Message Records: To set up Quick Send from a Quick Send Message Record, add the MCDM Quick Send Audience component to the Quick Send Message page layout in the Lightning App Builder or Experience Builder. When enabled, users can search for, select, and send a single contact, lead, or person account without leaving the message.
Quick Send: Use Quick Send to personalize and send a single message to contacts, leads, or person accounts from throughout the Salesforce platform. Your access to email messages, SMS messages, or both depends on your organization's configuration.
Reference a Distributed Marketing Content Block: You can use Distributed Marketing content blocks as reference blocks. Reference blocks allow marketers to create a content block one time, and then use it again in multiple emails. When you change the content block, emails referencing that content block are automatically updated.
Refresh Authentication: Authenticated tokens are used to manage access to individual Marketing Cloud Engagement business units. Tokens are periodically refreshed to ensure a secure connection. If a token fails to refresh, you can manually reconnect the business unit.
Register Component with Distributed Marketing: After building the external integration component for the new interaction tab, register your component with Distributed Marketing. This registration allows Distributed Marketing to render your custom interaction within the personalization modal. Insert a mcdm_15__JourneyApprovalsPlugin__c record for the external integration component.
Remove Business Units: Want to clean up your business units? You can remove a business unit as long as none of its journeys are enabled as a Quick Send or in use by a campaign.
Remove a Custom Personalization Interaction: To remove your custom interaction from the personalization modal in Distributed Marketing, delete the registered external integration component.
Requirements for Distributed Marketing: Before installing Marketing Cloud Engagement Distributed Marketing, review the required products, licenses, and permissions to help determine if you can use Distributed Marketing in your environment. Within Distributed Marketing, certain features require complementary Salesforce products. Requirements are noted in the feature’s setup instructions.
Restrict Sending: Prevent business users from temporarily using content, or retire content permanently.
Define Restricted Words: Define a list of words that, when detected in Distributed Marketing rich or plain text areas, automatically disable sending through Distributed Marketing. You can define specific words to restrict, and you can use standard regular expressions to prevent business users from sending information that’s deemed sensitive, such as account numbers.
Review the Audience for a Bulk Quick Send Message: By default, you can view the first 2,000 results of a list view when you create the list view. For Bulk Send, you can review all recipients before sending in the Bulk Send Audience component on the Bulk Send Batch records linked to the Bulk Send Job.
Review Pending Campaign Members: After contacts, leads, or person accounts are added to campaigns, review the new campaign members and personalize messages before sending. Use data filters to personalize messages for segments of campaign members, or select a single campaign member to make modifications for just one recipient.
Schedule a Quick Send Message: Schedule a single or bulk send Quick Send message. Messages are scheduled in your time zone and must be scheduled at least 5 minutes in the future. You can cancel a send up to 5 minutes before the scheduled time.
Enable Segmented Sends: You can specify which users can view segmented sends within a campaign. Segmented sends were previously the default.
Bulk Send a Message from a Quick Send Message Record: Send a single message to up to 100,000 contacts, leads, or person accounts from any Quick Send message record using Salesforce list views. SMS messages aren't available in Bulk Quick Send.
Bulk Send a Campaign Send: Use a Bulk Campaign Send when you want to message large groups of individuals at once without making individual modifications. You can modify content for the entire audience, and you can review the entire audience before sending. However, you can’t personalize messages for individuals or groups. Bulk Campaign Sends are optimized for speed, and they work best when your target audience is more than 1,000 individuals.
Send Distributed Marketing Content: Distributed Marketing offers different workflows designed to help you reach your customers wherever you are in your Salesforce experience. After your marketing team sets up the workflows that make sense for you, use Quick Sends or Campaign Sends to send the perfect, personalized messages to your customers.
Send a Segmented Send: Use a Segmented Send when you want more control and flexibility over your audience, content, or both. Segmented Sends allow you to use data filters to select a subset of your entire target audience and then personalize messages for that subset. You can also use these data filters to opt certain individuals out of messaging without removing them from the campaign entirely. You can message these members later or not at all.
Set Default Message Greeting: As a standard Distributed Marketing user, you can customize your Distributed Marketing experience by setting a preferred default for how your campaign message recipients are greeted.
Set Default Personalization for a Campaign: As a standard Distributed Marketing user, streamline your Distributed Marketing experience by creating default customizations for message templates within specific campaigns. These customizations can be modified for individual recipients when you review them before sending.
Set Default Personalization for a Quick Send Message: Default personalizations allow you to streamline your Distributed Marketing experience by creating default customizations for Quick Send messages. You can modify these customizations for individual recipients before sending through any of the Quick Send workflows you can access.
Quick Send Messages: Quick Send messages enable your business users to rapidly send a single, personalized Marketing Cloud Engagement email or SMS message to contacts, leads, and person accounts from throughout the Salesforce platform.
Distributed Marketing Setup: Distributed Marketing uses Marketing Cloud Engagement journeys and Salesforce campaigns inside the Sales, Service, Financial Services, and Experience Clouds. After installing the managed package and configuring authentication, set up Distributed Marketing by creating an entry event data extension, profile attributes, content, sender profile, and journey. Then customize the Campaign page layout for Distributed Marketing.
Set Up Collaborative Campaigns (Auto Send): Coordinate with your business users to plan your campaign launch at a specified date and time. With the proper permission set, you can set up an Auto Send for a Campaign. At the selected date and time, all campaign members not yet sent to and not part of a scheduled or bulk send are added to the Auto Send campaign journey. Your business users can add up to 25,000 members for an Auto Send campaign. If more than one campaign is scheduled by the same person for the same time and date, your business users can still send to a total of 25,000 members.
Set Up Campaign Messages: Customize your Campaigns page layout for Distributed Marketing to include the Distributed Marketing MCDM Campaign Messages component. This component provides access to review Marketing Cloud Engagement messages within the connected journey, preview content, send messages, and more. Think of the Campaign Messages component as a Distributed Marketing campaign’s home base for campaign sends.
Set Up Images for Content Marketplaces: Add images to content marketplace tiles to help business users visually identify assets. An image can be added to individual campaign or quick send message records. If no image is added, marketplaces with images enabled display a default image. To allow users to add images for content marketplaces, follow these instructions.
Set Up Content Marketplaces: Content Marketplaces provide structure and guidance to help business users quickly and visually navigate the assets available for them to use. Create multiple marketplaces to showcase collections of assets grouped how your users think, such as Recommended, High ROI, and more. List views of Campaign or Quick Send message records power marketplaces, so setup and management is a breeze.
Set Up Email Sends: Users can send pre-approved or customized email messages through Distributed Marketing. Email messages are created using Content Builder and sent through Journey Builder using the Email activity.
Set Up Quick Send from Opportunity Records: To set up Quick Send to Opportunity Records, add the Send Quick Send Email custom button to the Contact, Lead, or Person Account List View Search Layout in Lightning App Builder. Quick Send to Opportunity Records isn’t supported in Experience Cloud.
Set Up SMS Sends: Users can send preapproved or fully custom SMS messages through Marketing Cloud Engagement Distributed Marketing. SMS messages are sent through Journey Builder using the Mobile Connect SMS activity. The Mobile Messaging Product Special Terms (PST) apply to SMS messages sent through Distributed Marketing.
Create an Approval Process for Distributed Marketing: Define the Salesforce users who are responsible for approving Distributed Marketing content and the workflow they follow. You can create a simple approval process for Distributed Marketing, or a more complex approval process, to support your specific business needs by modifying approver and action selections.
Track Activities with Distributed Marketing Reports: Distributed Marketing administrators can enable tracking for Distributed Marketing sends to provide visibility on what activities Distributed Marketing uses most.
Update Campaign Member Details: As a standard Distributed Marketing user, you review contacts, leads, or person accounts to receive campaign messages through Distributed Marketing. Click a campaign member to view and update their record details.
Update Content with Personalization AMPscript: Add AMPscript to messages in Marketing Cloud Engagement to create sections of content for standard Distributed Marketing users to personalize, such as greeting, introduction, and conclusion.
Distributed Marketing Upgrades and Maintenance: Distributed Marketing features are automatically included in the Marketing Cloud Engagement releases and Distributed Marketing managed package updates. Content block updates are available immediately with each Marketing Cloud Engagement release. Distributed Marketing managed package updates are first available in Salesforce non-production environments and then in Salesforce production environments.
Use Distributed Marketing: Distributed Marketing provides tools, workflows, and experiences that help you better serve and engage your entire book of business.
Add a Distributed Marketing Image Block to an Email Template: Add a Distributed Marketing image block to an email template so that business users can choose the image used in the email. You can define up to 12 images per block area for business users to select from in the Image Library. At least one image must be defined. You can also let users add their own image using a URL or by uploading an image from their computer.
Use Legacy Personalization: You can continue to use the legacy Introduction, Conclusion, and Greeting personalization options until End of Support is announced.
Add a Distributed Marketing Rich Text Block to an Email Template: Add a rich text block to your email template so that business users can enter formatted text, including apply bold, italic, or underline formatting, set the justification, and embed hyperlinks.
Use Distributed Marketing with Field Level Encryption: Keep these considerations and limitations in mind when you use Distributed Marketing with Marketing Cloud Engagement accounts that use Field Level Encryption.
View Send Errors for a Bulk Quick Send Message: If something happens to prevent Distributed Marketing from adding an individual to a journey, you can review errors on a record-by-record basis. For example, errors can happen if an individual is missing an email address or SMS mobile phone number.
Share Business Units: Use sharing rules to manage business unit access per user, or allow all Marketing Cloud Engagement distributed marketing business users to access content from any added business unit.
Why isn’t Einstein Engagement Scoring automatically enabled in my account?: Not every Marketing Cloud Engagement account is used to market to subscribers via email or the web. For example, some accounts are used for testing, automations, or other channels, such as social or mobile. This ensures that we’re scoring the right audiences in an efficient, scalable manner.
Can I Customize the Prediction Model or Algorithm?: No, you cannot customize the models. Scores are smoothed so they present an even, understandable view of your customer personas. The models are automatically tuned on the Einstein Platform.
Email in Marketing Cloud Engagement: Plan, personalize, segment, and optimize the customer journey with the email apps that are available in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
A/B Testing in Email Studio: A/B Testing is a market testing method in which you send two versions of your Email Studio communication to two test audiences from your subscriber list. Track which version receives the highest unique open rate or highest click-through rate and send that version to all remaining subscribers.
Cancel A/B Test: You can cancel an A/B Test in Email Studio before completion. However, the current stage of the process completes.
Configure A/B Test in Email Studio: Create A/B Tests to send two versions of your message to two test audiences from your subscriber list in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
A/B Test Duplicate: Create an A/B Test in Email Studio by copying the conditions from an existing test. If you set up an A/B test to test the Subject Line and determine the winner by the highest open rate, you can create the same test again without reconfiguring those settings.
Edit A/B Test: You can edit A/B tests in Email Studio.
Track A/B Test: You can view near real-time results for A/B Test sends in Email Studio.
A/B Test Overview: Use standard A/B Testing to determine which version of your Marketing Cloud Engagement email receives the highest click-through rate or highest unique open rate. After reviewing, send the best performing version to your remaining subscribers.
Activities: An activity is a discrete unit of work in the application.
Add an Email From Address: To add an email address to your account, you must use a previously Verified Domain.
Add a Channel Member: Add a Marketing Cloud Engagement channel member and create login information under Email Studio Admin.
Import Email From Addresses: Enter up to 20 email addresses in From Address Management of Marketing Cloud Engagement Setup for verification.
Add Forward to a Friend to an Email: Use the Forward to a Friend feature to let subscribers share your emails, track forwards, and gain new subscribers. Follow these steps to add Forward to a Friend to an email message in Email Studio.
Add a Subscriber Manually: Create Subscriber steps you through defining an individual subscriber in Email Studio. When you add one subscriber, you have the option of creating another individual subscriber with the same attribute selections. This information applies to accounts with the enhanced subscriber features enabled. If your account doesn’t have this feature enabled, refer to Subscribers without Enhanced Subscriber Features.
Email Studio Admin: Use Email Studio admin to perform actions in your Email Studio.
All Subscribers List in Email Studio: The All Subscribers list is considered the main list of records for the Email Studio account. Every subscriber in your account appears in the All Subscribers list. Subscribers added to a subscriber list join the All Subscribers list at the same time. Subscribers stored on data extensions join the All Subscribers list when you send your first message to that subscriber. If a subscriber is unsubscribed in the All Subscribers list, the subscriber is unsubscribed from all lists and groups. When a subscriber is set back to active on the All Subscribers list, the subscriber must also opt in for any other list and group separately. A subscriber can be unsubscribed on lists and groups and be active on the All Subscribers lists.
Allow Customized Local Content: Allow customized local content for a new email or an existing email under Content in Email Studio.
Android Deep Link Setup: In Marketing Cloud Engagement, you can access Android asset link setup and upload a JSON file to meet the Trusted Domain requirements for Web Intent Resolution.
AppExchange Deliverability Partners: Marketing Cloud Engagement offers both standard deliverability features and access to a network of partners with advanced deliverability tools whose products can be purchased via AppExchange . AppExchange deliverability partners have developed products and features that meet various deliverability needs.
Apple Private Relay Configuration: Apple maintains a special subscriber email domain called privaterelay.appleid.com for their Private Email Relay Service. Senders use this domain to communicate with users who opted to use an anonymous email address with Apple’s “Sign in with Apple” functionality.
Apply a CSS File from Portfolio to Shared Content: When IDs receive multiple attributes from different style sheets or instances in the same style sheet, the resulting landing page may not appear as you expected. For best results, create a dedicated style sheet that provides the CSS for the landing page. This step prevents problems with cascading attributes from multiple style sheets.
ASCII Characters: View information about ASCII characters in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Associate Your Brand: The Associate Your Brand page in BrandBuilder lists the subaccounts associated with your Marketing Cloud Engagement administrative account. To associate your brand, follow these steps in Email Studio after you create a brand.
Audience Counts: The counts for total targeted, total excluded, and total suppressed represent the total number of rows found within the selected audiences in Email Studio.
Audience Rules: When you add audiences in Email Studio’s Send Flow to the targeted, excluded, and suppressed areas, not all combinations are valid, and you receive an error message if there’s a conflict with one or more audience types. These rules describe which combinations are permitted and which are invalid.
Auto-Suppression Lists: Assign a suppression list for use across an entire Marketing Cloud Engagement tenant or for specific business units for specific send classifications. You can assign auto-suppression lists at different levels of your account. Suppression lists filter out email addresses and prevent those addresses from receiving Email Studio messages. Suppression lists serve as a do-not-contact list for your email sends. Auto-suppression lists typically include addresses with a history of spam complaints, unsubscribe lists from previous providers or advertisers, addresses of your competitors, and canceled customers.
BrandBuilder: BrandBuilder allows you to customize the color scheme used within your Email Studio account. Use BrandBuilder to select color schemes that match your company’s logo. You can use the color scheme when you design your email template to help maintain brand integrity. Based on the colors of the logo you upload, BrandBuilder provides you with several pre-designed color schemes. After you choose how to privately label your account, BrandBuilder applies the color scheme, providing your users with a branded experience.
Build a Text Email Using Content Builder Tools: Use Email Studio Content Builder tools to build a text-email that displays as text only in your subscribers’ inbox, regardless of their display preferences. The open rate data is never reported for text-only emails.
Business Units in Marketing Cloud Engagement: Business units let you control access to and the sharing of information. Use the hierarchical structure of business units to control your brand while enabling access to messaging technologies to your users. Manage user roles for the business unit, view users who have access to the business unit, and define filter criteria for subscribers. Business units are available in Enterprise and Enterprise 2.0 accounts.
CAN-SPAM Requirements: Learn about CAN-SPAM requirements for Marketing Cloud Engagement.
How Do I Know If This Change Applies to My Account?: Do you send emails from Marketing Cloud Engagement? If you do, this change applies to your account. No matter how you send your messages, there are required actions.
How Do I Know If My From Addresses Are Verified?: First, check the From Address Management page in Marketing Cloud Engagement Setup to ensure that the From addresses used when sending are verified. Next, verify From addresses in all sender profiles and users.
Choose Your Brand Color Scheme: Select a color scheme for BrandBuilder in Email Studio that displays within your Marketing Cloud Engagement account.
Tracking Click Activity Tab: To see which links people are interacting with in an email, go to Tracking, select a send, and then select the Click Activity tab. Export click activity to a PDF file in Email Overlay View or to an Excel file in Link View.
Clicks and Opens Behavior: Marketing Cloud Engagement tracks details about email engagement, such as when a message was opened or when a link was clicked. Click and open events are always related to the original subscriber in a send. Email Studio records all events that occur, as there are no clear indicators whether opens are from a human or a bot program. So if an email is shared, opens or clicks that occur show in tracking or reports as belonging to the original subscriber.
Compare Tracking Results: Compare high-level metrics for each message in a campaign and overall campaign numbers. The tracking results comparison feature shows how many emails were sent, how many were delivered, how many of the subscribers unsubscribed, how many emails were opened, and the number of click-throughs.
Configure Delivery: In Email Studio Send Flow, use Configure Delivery to set the timing of your sends and configure delivery options. In some accounts, some of these options aren’t enabled by default.
Configure Self-Hosted DNS for Custom Domains Routed Through a Proxy: Custom domains hosted by Marketing Cloud Engagement route directly to Engagement servers by default, and Salesforce manages the security for those domains. If your security policy requires a proxy or web application firewall (WAF) for all your domains, self-host DNS and point the proxy at the Domain Specific Endpoint (DSE) so that Salesforce can provision and renew SSL certificates for the domain.
Configure Send Throttling: To prevent server crashes due to an influx of incoming website traffic, you can reduce the number of email recipients who click incoming links by turning on send throttling. Send throttling controls the approximate number of emails that are sent over time, based on values that you set.
Transactional Reconciliation for Email Sends: Transactional Reconciliation helps you verify the final delivery status of your transactional emails. Use Transactional Reconciliation to confirm whether time-sensitive messages were delivered or failed within a specific time frame.
Content: Create content for your emails, and send your emails use Email Studio content creation tools. Create reusable content blocks, including text, HTML, images, buttons, dynamic content, and A/B testing, to ensure that relevant messaging reaches the right person every time.
Content Area Sharing using Paste HTML and Social Markup: The HTML code in this example shares a static piece of content from an Email Studio email to Facebook. The first commented part of the pasted HTML names the content area Shared content Region 1, and the second commented part of the pasted HTML contains the creates the Social Markup link using the GetSocialPublishURLByName() AMPscript function.
Content Area Sharing using Paste HTML, AMPscript, and Social Markup: The HTML code in this example shares a dynamic piece of content from an Email Studio email to Facebook. The first commented part of the pasted HTML names the content area Shared content Region 1, and the second commented part of the pasted HTML contains the Social Markup link using the GetSocialPublishURLByName() AMPscript function.
Content Detective: Content Detective is an Email Studio tool that helps you identify spam triggers in your email content. This feature mirrors the logic used by spam-filtering software to identify words, phrases, and patterns that are likely to trigger filters and then recommends a resolution to each identified problem. After running Content Detective, edit the triggers identified in the email using the recommend resolutions.
Content Syndication: Use Email Studio content syndication to bypass typing in the email and include content in your emails directly from an outside source.
Landing Pages for Conversion Tracking: When you configure conversion tracking in Email Studio, the system can pass selected parameters from email links to a landing page.
Conversion Pages: Set up your conversion pages in Email Studio to track click-through data at a deeper level.
Conversion Tracking: Track click-through data at a deeper level with Conversions Tracking, which allows you to track the customer traffic and revenues generated by multiple links within your emails. By inserting the necessary tracking code into your website, you are able to test, read, and optimize traffic rates and revenues for various campaigns.
Copy a Registered Domain to All Business Units: After you register a domain in Marketing Cloud Engagement From Address Management, copy the registered domain to all existing business units in an Enterprise or Enterprise 2.0 account. Copying a domain allows you to register the domain once and use the domain across your Enterprise account.
Copy a Collection: Follow these steps to copy an Enterprise Reply Mail Management collection in Marketing Cloud Setup.
Copy a Marketing Cloud Engagement Data Filter: Follow these steps to copy an existing data filter in Email Studio. This process creates a new data filter when copying a data extension.
Copy and Move Subscribers: Copy one or more subscribers from one list to another list while retaining them on the original list, or you can move subscribers off one list to another. Subscribers are always included in All Subscribers in Email Studio. You can copy subscribers from All Subscribers to another list, but you cannot remove them from All Subscribers.
Copy a Rule: Follow these steps to copy an Enterprise Reply Mail Management rule in Marketing Cloud Engagement Setup.
Create a Suppression List in Marketing Cloud Engagement: To prevent your users from receiving your messages, create a suppression list. You can also let users control whether they receive messages by making the suppression list public in the subscription center.
AMP for Email: AMP for Email is a new open-source email standard that allows customers to interact with messages directly in their inbox and offers real-time content and data at open. Use Marketing Cloud Content Builder to build AMP emails. Common use cases include carousels, confirmations and opt-ins, real-time data, browsing and research, and appointment booking.
Create an Email in Content Builder: The process of creating an email in Email Studio starts with choosing the type of email you want to create. After you create an email, you can send it immediately or schedule it to be sent later.
Create an Auto-Suppression List: To automatically prevent sends to selected contacts, create an auto-suppression list in Email Studio.
Create a Custom Tab: To enable a landing page of job-level tracking information, create a custom tab to display a link on your Email Studio tracking screen. For more information about enabling this feature, contact your Marketing Cloud Engagement account representative.
Create a Data Extension in Email Studio: A data extension is a table that contains data that you provide. Use data extensions to hold customer data, track loyalty points, collect tracking and usage data, and many more use cases that require you to store information in a table.
Create a Data Extension from a Template: Create a data extension with a data extension template. A few data extension templates are provided with Email Studio to enable specific use cases, such as data extensions used in coupon-based solutions.
Create a Delivery Profile: Follow these steps to create a delivery profile in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Why Does Marketing Cloud Engagement Require Domain Verification?: Domain verification ensures that Marketing Cloud Engagement customers can only send email from domains that they’re allowed to send from. Without domain verification, customers could send emails that appear to come from any other domain. Domain verification protects your reputation and the reputations of other customers.
Create an Email Message to Send from Multiple Email Addresses: Follow these steps in Email Studio to create the email to send from multiple email addresses. Use the sender profile and send classification you created within Marketing Cloud Engagement Setup for this process.
Create a Filtered Data Extension: A filtered data extension is generated by filtering fields, filters, and measures and takes on the same characteristics as the source data extension. To identify a filtered data extension to sendable or non-sendable, change the source data extension to sendable or non-sendable. To remove data from a filtered data extension, remove the data from the source data extension, and then refresh the filtered data extension.
Create a Keyword List: Follow these steps to create an Enterprise Reply Mail Management keyword list.
Create a List: Create a list of subscribers who match the attributes you select in Email Studio.
Create and Manage Nodes: Enterprise channel members are grouped into nodes, or organizational units, in your organizational chart.
Create a New Brand: Create a BrandBuilder brand for Email Studio in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Create Profile and Preference Attributes in Marketing Cloud Engagement: If the subscriber attribute is a yes or no value, create a preference attribute in Email Studio. If the attribute requires more complexity, create a profile attribute. Create several attributes, up to the limit specified in your account contract. For Enterprise 2.0 accounts, create the attribute in the top-level account.
Create a Push Notification Send Logging Data Extension: The send log stores data about each of your sends in a data extension. Only push notifications and inbox messages are included in the MobilePush (in Marketing Cloud Engagement) send log. You can use send log data in reports and other data extracts.
Create a Data Extension That Contains Randomly Selected Subscribers: A random data extension splits up subscribers from a selected standard data extension and places the subscribers into new data extensions in Email Studio. You can create as many as 12 data extensions at a time.
Create a Sender Profile: Follow these steps to create a sender profile in Marketing Cloud Engagement Setup.
Create a Sender Profile to Use with Enterprise Reply Mail Management: In Marketing Cloud Engagement Setup, create a sender profile to use with Enterprise Reply Mail Management. You can use On-Your-Behalf sends or enhanced sender profiles to build dynamic from names as part of your email sends. Enterprise Reply Mail Management can direct these valid replies to the dynamic from names instead of the default email address.
Create a Sender Profile for Use with Reply Mail Management: The sender profile contains the name and address that the message appears to be from in the subscriber’s email client. Use a sender profile with Reply Mail Management (RMM) to manage replies from systems that use nonstandard protocols. This feature sends replies using the From address instead of the account’s Reply-To address.
Create a Triggered Email Message Interaction: Create a triggered email interaction in Email Studio to respond to a subscriber action with an email message. Create your email content before creating the interaction. After completing this procedure, start the interaction.
Create a UI Extension: Follow these steps to create a UI extension in Email Studio. The UI extension lets you create a custom tab within the user interface that displays the content of a different page. Users can click that tab to view the page within the context of the Marketing Cloud Engagement user interface.
Customized Local Content: Use the customized local content features in Email Studio to make content editable and usable by other business units.
Data Extension Data Types: When you create a column in a data extension in Marketing Cloud Engagement, select one of these data types.
Operators: Learn about the expression operators that you can use with profile and preference attributes in data extensions.
Filter Activity in Marketing Cloud Engagement: If you use interactions in Email Studio, you can use data filters to segment subscriber lists or data extensions. Select the data filter when you create a filter activity.
Data Filter Definition for Marketing Cloud Engagement: You can create a data filter definition on the Subscribers tab in Email Studio. Choose whether to create a filter that segments a subscriber list or a data extension.
Data Filters in a Marketing Cloud Engagement Group: You can use data filters to segment subscriber lists by selecting the data filter when you create a group, regardless of whether you use interactions in Email Studio.
Data Filters with Enhanced Subscriber Features in Marketing Cloud Engagement: A data filter is a group of criteria that segments a subscriber list or data extension. You can segment a subscriber list or data extension using data filters and use the segments during an automation. Data Filters can be used with accounts that have enhanced subscriber features turned on in Email Studio.
Data Relationships: A data relationship in Email Studio specifies that a column in one data extension contains the same kind of information as a column in another data extension or in a subscriber attribute. Use a data relationship to relate two data extensions based on a common column contained in both data extensions. You can then apply a filter to the two data extensions and create a new segment of data.
Data Extension Properties for Marketing Cloud Engagement: View statistics about the data extension and change properties of the data extension in the data extension details section of Email Studio. To access data extension properties, select the data extension name.
Dedicated IP Addresses in Email Studio: Assign a unique IP address to your account and manage your own sending reputation in Email Studio. When your send volume is high enough that your sending reputation is hard to control in a shared IP pool, consider using a dedicated IP address.
Subscriber De-Duplication on Sends: De-duplication is a process Email Studio uses to remove duplicate instances of the same subscriber on a send. Our system does removal either automatically or requires configuration from the user, depending on the audience type used in the sent.
Define a Subscriber Filter in Marketing Cloud Engagement: The subscriber filter determines which subscribers in your account the business unit can access. Define subscriber filters for Enterprise 2.0 accounts in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Define Properties: Define Properties in Email Studio’s Send Flow allows you to preview the email you selected.
Delete an Attribute in Marketing Cloud Engagement: In Email Studio, delete subscriber attributes you no longer want to track. Enterprise 2.0 accounts, delete the attribute in the top-level account.
Delete Changes of Other Business Units: Follow these steps to delete all customized local content modified by all business units in Email Studio. The item loses all customized content and reverts to the default content created by the owner.
Delivery Profiles: A delivery profile in Marketing Cloud Engagement Setup specifies the delivery information for a message in a central location. Engagement reuses the information across multiple sends without requiring selection of the information each time.
Disable a Channel Member Account: Disabled accounts are no longer usable but remain visible in your Marketing Cloud Engagement account.
Disable or Re-enable Client Accounts: You can't access disabled client accounts, but you can re-enable them as necessary. A disabled client account can’t be used, but it remains in your account to re-enable in the future.
DNS Record Maintenance for Your Marketing Cloud Engagement Custom Domain and Email Sending: Marketing Cloud Engagement recommends using a custom domain for email sending and Reply Mail Management activities. Domain configuration for use with Engagement requires several DNS entries for proper operation, whether you self-host DNS or delegate DNS to Engagement name servers.
Do Not Track Email Opens and Clicks: At send time, in accounts without Do Not Track, Marketing Cloud Engagement tracking IDs are applied while rendering subscriber messages. The Do Not Track functionality adds a send-time check that honors a subscriber’s preference. For subscribers who don’t want to be tracked, the check suppresses Engagement tracking IDs from being applied to the rendered message. So, open and click events aren’t known.
Domain Delegation versus Self-Hosting: Work with your IT administrators to determine whether it’s best to set up your own domain or delegate a subdomain for email sending. Typically, organizations that self-host email content are subject to security or branding requirements that don’t allow domain delegation. Delegation can be simpler to implement and works for most organizations. Before making your choice, consider your branding preferences, security requirements, and available resources for long-term support.
Domain Registration: Domain Registration verifies From addresses of accounts that aren't part of a recommended authenticated domain. To streamline the verification process and avoid sending restrictions, register a non-authenticated domain and validate the entire domain’s ownership. All associated user email addresses that use the registered domain are verified without sending an email to that address. Authenticating a domain in Marketing Cloud Engagement requires a Sender Authentication Package or Private Domain.
Domain Verification for Marketing Cloud Engagement Email: To send an email from Marketing Cloud Engagement, you must use a Verified Domain as the Sending Domain in a From Address. Verification ensures that only authorized domains can be used within your account to send emails using your company’s domain, preventing domain spoofing and unauthorized use.
Domain Verification FAQ: Review frequently asked questions about Domain Verification in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Dynamically Populated Reply Names and Addresses: To dynamically populate the Reply-To header, first request the Dynamic Reply-To feature. When this is enabled, the header Reply-To value is populated with the Reply Email from the Populate Reply-to Address Dynamically section rather than a unique address at the Reply sub domain.
Edit an Auto-Suppression List: Edit an existing auto-suppression list in Email Studio to change any applicable properties and update the associated triggered sends. Enabling this feature republishes the suppression list changes for the triggered send. Triggered send content isn’t updated. Clear your triggered send queues before enabling. Subscribers in a triggered send queue when this feature is enabled aren’t auto-suppressed. The auto-suppression isn’t applied to the send already in the queue.
Edit Channel Member’s Information: You can edit general information about a channel member or the channel member’s login information in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Edit Client Accounts: Edit general information, account settings, or user login information for a client account under Admin in Email Studio.
Edit a Collection: Follow these steps to edit an Enterprise Reply Mail Management collection using Marketing Cloud Engagement Setup.
Edit or Disable a User Security Record: Change a user’s access rights or information by editing the Marketing Cloud Engagement user’s security record. For example, you can disable a user record so that the user can’t log in. The user’s security record remains in your account so that it can be re-enabled. You can’t delete users.
Edit a Rule: Follow these steps to edit an Enterprise Reply Mail Management rule in Marketing Cloud Engagement Setup.
Email Archiving: To selectively extract a copy of an email message sent through Email Studio and store the copy on the account’s enhanced FTP site, archive the message. The output file format is EML and can be encrypted. To configure this feature, contact your account executive.
Email Attachments: Use Email Studio to send email attachments that aren’t included in the main body of an email. The recipient can open and save the attachment independently of the email message.
Email Deliverability Setup: Make sure that your mail reaches your subscribers and represents your brand well. Authenticate your domain, manage your sending reputation, and keep your IP unblocked.
Email Delivery Checklist: Before you send an email in Email Studio, follow this checklist to ensure that the email meets your standards before it arrives in subscribers' inbox.
User-Initiated Email Messages: Use Email Studio email message interactions, also referred to as send definitions, to determine how an email send occurs.
Optional Email Features: Learn more about the optional email-related features that you can enable in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Email Sharing with Paste HTML and Social Markup: The HTML code in this example shares the content of an email from Email Studio to Facebook. The first commented part of the pasted HTML names the email Shared content Region 1, and the second commented part of the pasted HTML contains the Social Markup link using the GetSocialPublishURLByName() AMPscript function. In this case, the Social Markup link refers to the aggregator ShareThis.
Email Sharing with Paste HTML Templates and Social Markup: The HTML code in this example creates an email in Email Studio with three separate content areas, each one defined by the @@ContentArea lines. The first commented part of the HTML email names the email Shared content Region 1, and the second commented part of the pasted HTML contains the creates the Social Markup link using the GetSocialPublishURLByName() AMPscript function. In this case, the Social Markup link refers to the aggregator ShareThis.
Email Studio: With Email Studio, build and send personalized email from basic newsletters to the most complex campaigns. Deliver promotional, transactional, and triggered messages. Track and optimize to drive performance.
Enable Forward Reply Header Rewrite: Use Forward Reply Header Rewrite with Enterprise Reply Mail Management in Marketing Cloud Setup to specify a reply-to header value that complies with DMARC requirements. These requirements mandate that email messages originate from the expected destination for a domain. This feature uses those values to ensure that while Reply Mail Management processes all replies, those messages use the correct domain. This process facilitates communication between you and your subscribers.
Known Issues: There are a small number of known issues that are specific to Enterprise 2.0 accounts in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Profile and Preference Attributes: Review tips about profile and preference attributes in Marketing Cloud Engagement with Enterprise 2.0.
Enterprise 2.0 Overview: With Enterprise 2.0 in Email Studio, control your brand while still enabling a diverse user base to access messaging technologies.
Subscriber Filter Unsubscribe Settings: Processing unsubscribes for Enterprise 2.0 business units in Marketing Cloud Engagement are set using subscriber filters.
Enterprise 1.0 Overview: Use the Email Studio Enterprise 1.0 tool, also known as Channel Management, to manage your users across the enterprise. Enterprise 1.0 is built on the concepts of nodes and channel members.
Personalization Strings: In Marketing Cloud Engagement with Enterprise, use personalization strings to insert the member ID, display name, account name, and email address of the member account from which you send the email.
Enterprise Reply Mail Management: To automate management of incoming messages received by your reply-to email address, turn on Reply Mail Management in Marketing Cloud Engagement. These message types include out-of-office replies, auto-replies, auto-forwards, unsubscribes, and individual customer responses.
Enterprise Reply Mail Management Scenario: In this scenario, Northern Trail Outfitters uses Enterprise Reply Mail Management rules to manage their incoming email in Email Studio. The application automatically detects out-of-office replies, bounces, and automatic replies and deletes them. Enterprise Reply Mail Management also deletes unsubscribe requests after it unsubscribes each subscriber automatically. This setting helps Northern Trail Outfitters honor unsubscribe requests within a certain amount of time. Northern Trail Outfitters configures Enterprise Reply Mail Management in Marketing Cloud Engagement so replies that are not filtered out are responded to by auto-reply customized messages.
Exclusion Lists in Marketing Cloud Engagement: An exclusion list is any list, group, or data extension you create in the application that at the time of send you select to exclude from the send. If your Email Studio account has subscriber key enabled, the system excludes using the subscriber key value. If your account does not have subscriber key enabled, the system excludes using email address.
Export Bounce Data: You can export data for bounced email messages in Email Studio.
Export a Data Extension: Export subscribers from Email studio to a Marketing Cloud Engagement data extension.
Export a List: Export a subscriber list from Email Studio.
Export Email Studio Subscribers by Status: You can export subscribers based on subscriber status in Email Studio. This information applies to accounts with the enhanced subscriber features enabled. To export subscribers, account admin role or permission to access lists is required.
Create a File from a Tracking Tab: A PDF file presents a visual representation of the screen or email, while the Excel file contains data on the report requested.
Filtered Data Extensions: Use a filtered data extension to target a more specific set of subscribers. You can filter a data extension by fields or measures or apply existing data filters.
Forward to a Friend: Forward to a Friend is an image you add to emails you send to your subscribers. When subscribers want to share the information in your email with friends, they click the image and fill out the form.
From Address and Domain Verification Checklist: To avoid restricted sends, verify any From email address you plan to use with Marketing Cloud Engagement. Use this checklist to help you locate and verify sending From addresses. You may not use From addresses found in all these areas. All verified From addresses can be found in From Address Management.
From Address Management: Add a single From address and import multiple From addresses within Setup From Address Management. Importing multiple addresses is ideal for accounts that use AMPscript in Sender Profiles to create dynamic From addresses in email sends. Only import addresses that you plan to use as From addresses in email sends.
Get Started with Email Studio: Welcome to Email Studio! We’re so glad you’re here. Onboarding to Email Studio can be intimidating, even for the most experienced Trailblazers. This guide helps you navigate the setup process and make sure that you don’t miss a thing.
Global Unsubscribe: A global unsubscribe occurs when a subscriber chooses to unsubscribe from every email that anyone sends from Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Headers and Footers in Email Messages: Marketing Cloud Engagement can automatically add text and images to the beginning and end of your email messages to ensure compliance with CAN-SPAM regulations. You can set this information in Email Studio as part of the send classification, or you can customize how the headers and footers appear at an account level.
Identify Subscribers Who Marked Emails as Spam: Find out which subscribers have marked your email communications as spam. You can also learn when they unsubscribed and other information they provide.
Using iOS Universal Links in Email Studio: The iOS universal link feature configures whether links in your Email Studio messages open in a previously installed iOS app or in a browser.
Import Activity in Email Studio: Each import activity uses information from an outside file to update a subscriber list or data extension.
Import Email From Addresses from a Data Extension: To verify email addresses in a data extension, import the data extension in From Address Management in Marketing Cloud Engagement Setup. This process is ideal for accounts that use AMPscript to create dynamic from addresses in email sends.
Import into a List: Import enhanced subscriber data into a list in Email Studio.
Import Microsoft Outlook Contacts: You can use Marketing Cloud Engagement to send emails to the contacts you keep in Microsoft Outlook. In Outlook, prepare and export the contacts who have given you permission to send marketing messages. Then, import the contact data into Email Studio.
Import Subscribers from a File: You can import email subscribers to Email Studio in Marketing Cloud Engagement by uploading a CSV file.
Impression Region Using Dynamic Content: Once your account has been configured with Impression Tracking, track the performance of the dynamic content block, rules, and content by using impression tracking reports.
Impression Tracking: Impression tracking allows you to track the performance of emails that contain content built by AMPscript or dynamic content in Email Studio.
Insert the Link in Your Email: For the system to pass parameters to your landing page, the landing page hyperlink must be designated a conversion tracking link within Email Studio when inserted into the email.
Interactions: Email Studio Interactions contain the communications and data processes that build and support your relationship with customers.
International File Encoding: Learn about international file encoding in Email Studio for Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Email Encoding Settings: Learn about email encoding settings in Email Studio for Marketing Cloud Engagement.
International Sends Best Practices: International Sends best practices for Email Studio can help you reach your subscribers as you create your international sends.
Internationalized Web Pages: Content syndication in Email Studio can get content from web pages that use any of a broad range of character encoding, including double-byte characters.
iOS Universal Link: The iOS Universal Link feature allows links in Email Studio messages to open directly into previously installed apps on iOS devices. This process is also known as deep linking into an app. By default, links embedded in an email message open in a browser window. After implementing this feature, you can specify the app and location to open on iOS devices.
IP Addresses for Inclusion on Allowlists in Marketing Cloud Engagement: Add the Salesforce IP address to your allowlists so that your users can process login authentication requests. Allowing the entire set of IP addresses avoids unintended service disruptions caused by movement between primary and secondary instances.
Launch Send Flow: Use Send Flow to send Content Builder emails in Email Studio.
Link Tracking: For link tracking in Email Studio, Marketing Cloud Engagement uses link redirection before sending recipients to a destination link.
List Detective: List Detective is a tool that maintains information on email addresses and domains that could cause deliverability problems for your email sends. This includes email addresses that are known spam traps (inactive addresses used by domains to identify spammers) and domains that no longer provide email services.
List Properties: View statistics and change the basic properties of a list in Email Studio.
List Unsubscribe: Learn about list unsubscribes in Email Studio.
Can I Preview Email Personalization in Litmus?: Yes. Select a subscriber in Subscriber Preview and then select Litmus to preview how the selected subscriber’s personalization renders across multiple clients. Only previews emailed to your Litmus address display in your Litmus account.
What If I Have Multiple Business Units?: Switching between business units in Marketing Cloud Engagement doesn’t require logging in multiple times. Your authenticated credentials are remembered and previews are displayed.
Access Litmus Email Previews in Content Builder: To preview Marketing Cloud Engagement emails with Litmus, you must have a Litmus Pro or Enterprise account and Advanced Preview permissions.
Litmus Email Previews in Content Builder: When you use Content Builder in Marketing Cloud Engagement, you can preview emails across 90+ browsers, devices, and clients. Configure in Litmus which browsers, devices, and clients you want to preview. Access Litmus on the Preview and Test screen of the Content Builder editor.
What Litmus Plan Is Required to Access the Integration?: Only Litmus Enterprise accounts can access this integration. Free Litmus Demo accounts do not work with this feature. If you don’t have a Litmus account, sign up for a Litmus Enterprise free trial access for seven days through the integration.
How Does This Work with Different Users?: Litmus authenticates each user’s Litmus credentials. Multiple users using a shared Litmus account can’t view the previews unless they sign in with their Litmus user credentials.
Log in to a Channel Member Account: You can offer support and troubleshoot issues by logging in to a channel member account. You use the same access rights as that user.
Log In to Client Accounts: Offer support and troubleshoot issues by logging in to a client account in Email Studio. You use the same access rights as that user.
Manage Policies for an Email Studio Data Extension: If you have this feature enabled in Email Studio, the admin user for your account can allow or disallow users to delete a data extension, modify existing fields in a data extension, or add more fields to a data extension. Even if a user’s permission allows them to delete or update data extensions, the change control policy takes precedence over their permissions. If all users permissions for the account are set to deny for deleting data extension and deny for updating a data extension, the change control policy doesn’t need to be configured. Contact your account administrator if you would like to activate this feature.
Manage Salesforce Data: Use this Email Studio feature to control the amount of storage used. For example, you may have 90 days of data stored in Salesforce but only want to retain information from the last 30 days.
Measures: A measure is a unit of subscriber behavior that you define in Email Studio. After you create a measure, you can include the measure as criteria in a data filter to segment a subscriber list using the measure.
Measures for Events That Don’t Occur in Marketing Cloud Engagement: In Email Studio, measures calculate a total value for subscribers, where the value is greater than zero. If the value is zero, meaning there are no statistics, the value is not calculated for a subscriber. In other words, each open for a subscriber is counted. If a subscriber does not perform any Opens, they can’t be counted.
Messages: A message is a communication sent to an individual subscriber or a collection of individuals, such as a list, group, or data extension. In Marketing Cloud Engagement, you can send emails and SMS messages.
Messages Example: A marketer at Northern Trail Outfitters sends a welcome email message to subscribers who opt in to the newsletter mailing list through their web page. The marketer creates a triggered email message interaction in Email Studio to automate the process.
Identify Unique Subscribers Using Keys in Marketing Cloud Engagement: Identify unique subscribers by a value that isn’t an email address by enabling subscriber keys. Changing your implementation to use subscriber keys takes careful planning to avoid losing data during the process. To learn the best way to prepare and migrate your data, work with your account executive.
Modify Subscriber Data in Marketing Cloud Engagement: View subscriber data and modify subscribers from subscriber properties in Email Studio. Regardless of where you access subscriber properties, changes you make take effect throughout the application.
List-Unsubscribe Header Unsubscribe: A List-Unsubscribe header is included with all commercial sends and supports the one-click unsubscribe method. An email client uses the header and DKIM signature included with authenticated domains to display a uniform unsubscribe link in its interface. The header helps subscribers easily unsubscribe from unwanted emails. Inbox service providers choose if, where, and how the unsubscribe link appears.
Page Actions: Page actions are UI extensions that allow you create toolbar buttons in the application in Email Studio. Clicking the buttons moves data from one grid listing to an external page or a landing page, using AMPscript or your preferred programming language. You can also use AMPscript to customize page actions. The code that you create in your grid listings is used to move data to your target page.
Partner Seed Lists: With the Partner Seed Lists feature, you can see inbox results within the AppExchange Partner applications.
Pause and Resume a Send in Tracking: Pause a Content Builder email send in Email Studio Tracking to stop the system from processing and sending any further email messages.
Pending Sends and Past Sends: Use Pending Sends in Email Studio to view scheduled and in-progress email sends. Use Past Sends to view email send history.
Perform the Initial Configuration: You can configure Enterprise Reply Mail Management in the top-level app settings for Marketing Cloud Engagement. Use sender profiles to make configured keywords, rules, and collections available for child business units.
Personalization Strings in Marketing Cloud Engagement: A personalization string lets you insert subscriber attributes, such as subscriber name, into your emails. Personalization strings can appear in the subject line, preheader, or in the content of the email. You may hear personalization strings referred to as merge fields or substitution strings.
Prebuild Burst Sending: When enabled in your account, Prebuild Burst Sending allows you to send emails fast. The audience is locked down and the emails are built when the schedule send time is set. Use this feature for flash sales or emergency messaging.
Preview Your Brand: The Preview Your Brand page in BrandBuilder shows your Marketing Cloud Engagement app and login page side-by-side. To preview your brand, follow these steps in Email Studio.
Preview the Subscription Center: You can view the Subscription Center through Email Studio Profile Center in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Scenario: Profile Attributes: See an example of portfolio attribute setting in Email Studio for Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Profile Center for Marketing Cloud Engagement: The Profile Center is a web page where subscribers enter and maintain the personal information that you keep about them. When you import a list in Email Studio, you can import attribute values for your subscribers. Subscribers can see this information in the Profile Center and update and add to it. Every email that you send through Email Studio contains a link to the Profile Center for subscribers to use.
Profile and Preference Attributes in Email Studio: Email Studio uses profile and preference attributes to store information about subscribers. The profile attribute contains information to characterize a subscriber profile. For example, each subscriber is asked to provide their birth date and email address. By default, every account has three profile attributes: Full Name, Email, and UserDefined, which is intended as a generic attribute that you can use as needed. By default, every account also receives an HTML Email preference attribute that is set to Yes. You can’t modify these attributes.
Publication Lists in Email Studio: Use publication and suppression lists to manage opt-ins for your email account in Email Studio. Use either publication lists or suppression lists to control how subscribers receive your sends. Choose a publication list when sending email messages and SMS messages to a sendable data extension.
Purchase and Configure a Domain: Purchase and configure a Marketing Cloud Engagement domain if you don’t already have one. Purchase a domain then configure it to point to Salesforce DNS servers for Engagement.
Refresh a Filtered Data Extension: Newly added or modified records are not automatically added to filtered data extensions. To add new records to a data extension, refresh the filtered data extension in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Register a Domain in Marketing Cloud Engagement: Register a non-authenticated domain and validate an entire domain’s ownership by using Domain Registration in your Marketing Cloud Engagement settings. All associated user email addresses that use the registered domain are verified without sending an email to that address.
Rename a Brand: Your brand name appears as the browser tab name when you're using Marketing Cloud Engagement. You can change that name in Email Studio.
Reply Mail Management for Email Studio: Reply Mail Management (RMM) manages replies to the email jobs you send. RMM processes the reply automatically, if appropriate, and forwards the message if the message requires personal review.
Report Activity: A report activity defines the parameters for a report for use every time the report runs using the activity. You can also run reports outside of activities.
Reports: You run a report asynchronously from the Tracking tab in Email Studio and have them delivered to your email inbox or FTP server. Use the Report Status and History screen to view a list of reports that have been requested in your account. This list shows the status, scheduled run time, delivery channel, and delivery details for scheduled reports in the workspace.
Update DNS File to Manage Replies: If you decided to self-host when you configured SAP, and haven't set up reply mail management, you can configure it at any time. Work with your IT or web admin to add the necessary MX record to your DNS zone file. If you chose to delegate your domain, the MX record is already in place.
Reseller Account Administration: As a Reseller administrator, you control the setup of your client and demo accounts. Use the Admin section to configure and manage users of your Reseller administrator account and the initial users of your client accounts in Email Studio.
Reset User Password: To reset a password for Marketing Cloud Engagement, an admin can reset it with the user's previous password.
Email Studio Resources: View resource documentation for Email Studio and Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Retention Policy Support with Triggered Sends: If you use a TriggeredSendDataExtension in Email Studio with a triggered send, the data extension supports automatic data retention policies. When defining a triggered send with a data extension source, you specify how long to retain the data.
Revert Your Brand to the Default: When you create a brand in Email Studio for BrandBuilder, you can revert to the default at any time. Contact your account executive to begin the process.
Review Send: Review and Send in Email Studio’s Send Flow allows you to see configurations previously made and confirm that all information is correct and ready to send.
Review Subscription Information: Follow these steps to review information about your Marketing Cloud Engagement subscription. This information includes the start and end dates for your subscription, and a link to a report that shows the number of emails sent from your account.
Sender Authentication Package Domain Features: The domain that you choose for your Sender Authentication Package (SAP) determines your platform and CloudPage pathways. Marketing Cloud Engagement creates subdomains for hosting click, image, view, and CloudPage pathways.
Save a Data Extension Filter: You can create and save a data filter based on the filter settings of a data extension in Marketing Cloud Engagement. You can include more filtered data extensions using the filter as a starting point in Email Studio.
Search for a Subscriber: Search for a subscriber using enhanced subscriber features in Email Studio for Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Search Tracking Data: Follow these steps to search tracking data in Email Studio.
Select Audience: The Email Studio root subscriber folders represent different audience types such as lists, groups, and more. Select a folder to view the individual audience items. There are rules governing the types of audiences that can be targeted, excluded, and suppressed in email sends. At least one audience must be targeted before you can proceed. Advanced Options allows you to include exclusion scripts, domain exclusions, and more advanced options.
Send Classifications for Email Studio: Send classifications define parameters for an email job in a central location. The account can reuse those parameters for multiple email send definitions. For example, you can create a send classification that’s used every time a message is sent to make sure that it always uses the appropriate parameters. Select a send classification, together with content information and audience information, when you define a message send by creating a message interaction.
Send an Email: Send an email from Email Studio using the most applicable method for your use case.
Send Email Messages from Multiple Addresses Via Sender Profiles and Data Extensions: It's possible to send a single email and direct all replies directed to a subscriber's individual representative with Marketing Cloud Engagement. You can also create multiple sender profiles to handle different aspects of your business email sends. For example, you can use one sender profile can handle normal commercial email, another for transactional, and a third one for special offers. This method maintains your corporate branding and makes sure that information sent out remains consistent. You can also use list attributes to populate substitution strings for enhanced sender profiles instead of data extensions.
Send Flow: Send Flow replaces Guided Send for Content Builder emails in Email Studio. Send Flow allows you to see what you are sending to reduce errors, and consolidates all major sending functionality into a simple, highly visual interface.
Send Logging in Email Studio: Use send logging in Email Studio to obtain run-time information about email send attributes for use in reports and data extracts. You can also use information in your send log to provide information for highly available clicks. Send logging gives you access to data not available via standard tracking functions. You can specify how long that information remains available depending on your data retention needs.
Send Logging Best Practices and Tips: Here’s a list of best practices for send logging in Marketing Cloud Engagement. Follow all general data extension best practices for send logging data extensions as well.
Perform Send Preview: Perform a send preview in Email Studio to generate a preview of the email and send a test.
Send to Subscribers in a Data Extension: Send an email to subscribers in a data extension in Email Studio for Marketing Cloud Engagement. For your convenience, you can preview email sends to a data extension, for example, to see personalization and dynamic content.
Send to a List in Email Studio: Send to a subscriber list with enhanced features in Email Studio for Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Working with the Email Sender Authentication Package: To brand your links and image URLs with your authenticated sending domain, use the Sender Authentication Package (SAP) for Marketing Cloud Engagement. The consistent branding that SAP offers can help any marketer improve sender reputation and subscriber trust, while ensuring domain-level compliance with bulk-sender guidelines. Customers who send more than 250,000 email messages per month must use SAP.
Sender Header Support in the Sender Profile: A sender header helps sender deliverability for those users sending on behalf of someone else. You can enable Sender Header in your Sender Profile feature to store a header name and address. Your sender header name and address can use static or dynamic values. For static sender header information, enter the values into the fields. To use dynamic sender information, include a personalization string in the fields. You can use sender headers with Reply Mail Management in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Sender Profile: A sender profile specifies the From information for a send in a central location. Email Studio reuses that information across multiple sends without requiring selection each time. The sender profile contains the name and address that the message appears to be from in the subscriber's email client.
Server-Side JavaScript Activity: Use server-side JavaScript activities to host and run resources for landing pages. Server-side JavaScript allows you to customize and run these activities flexibly with Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Set Enterprise 2.0 Shared Data Extension Permissions: Data Extension Permissions is a Marketing Cloud Engagement tool that controls business unit access to shared data extensions in Email Studio. By checking the box next to a permission, you can enable or disable that permission.
Set a List to Public: Selecting the Public option in Email Studio will result in this list being displayed in the Subscription Center. A subscriber can opt-in or opt-out of any public list.
Folder Management in Email Studio: Folders are a great way to keep your account organized. Easily locate and access what you need in Email Studio for Marketing Cloud Engagement. Start creating folders to organize your lists, data extensions, emails, templates, and content.
Set Up the Dynamic Content Area: Follow these steps to set up the dynamic content area for sharing to different social networks in Email Studio.
Set URL Expiration: You can change the URL expiration settings in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
SSH Keys for SFTP: You can use an SSH key to use to authenticate SFTP connections. Upload each key that you want to use in the Data Management section of Marketing Cloud Engagement Setup.
Paste HTML Email Share: Social Forward in Email Studio can share an entire email instead of sharing select content areas from a message. This functionality uses a Paste HTML email in Email Studio.
Enterprise 2.0 Shared Items: A shared item is an email, template, portfolio, data extension, or content area that you control access to. Users outside the business unit can access the shared item with the appropriate role and permission settings. For example, user with view only permissions can view but not change a shared item.
Social Content Slot Sharing in a Paste HTML Email: Creating an email in Email Studio by pasting HTML code into an email allows you a great deal of control over how your email appears to your subscribers. That same control makes sharing social content slots via pasted HTML an effective tool in getting your content onto social networks. You can create and place your shared social content slots and icons with great precision using the directions provided below. You can also easily create multiple shared social content slots in one document. If your normal workflow included using pasted HTML to create your emails, adding Social Forward markup should integrate easily into your process.
Social Content Slot Sharing via AMPscript in a Paste HTML Email: Creating an email in Email Studio by pasting HTML code into an email allows you a great deal of control over how your email appears to your subscribers. That same control makes sharing social content slots via pasted HTML an effective tool in getting your content onto social networks.
Social Forward: Social Forward in Email Studio enables email recipients to share content from emails with other users via their preferred social network. Choose the sections of the email to enable with Social Forward and the networks represented by links and images in the email. Social Forward also tracks any clicks from an email to a social network and the resulting page views from the URL shared by the email recipient.
Social Forward Tags: Email Studio wraps shared content in tags that indicate which sections of the email are shared to social networks. Tags also designate the link used to share the content to those social networks.
Specify a Reply Subdomain: Specify the reply subdomain to which the reply email is directed. Configure this reply subdomain on your own domain to use it with Marketing Cloud Engagement and Email Studio.
SSL Certificates for Custom Domain Security: Use a Secure Socket Layer (SSL) certificate to improve the security of your page-based interactions. Give your subscribers and contacts more confidence when they visit pages that you host with Marketing Cloud Engagement. A certificate adds a layer of encryption to the transfer of sensitive or personal information. This encryption helps prevent external parties from accessing information sent to or from your contacts.
Custom Domain or Subdomain Delegation: You can use domain or subdomain delegation, also called zone delegation, to configure your DNS. Subdomain configuration transfers only part of your existing custom domain to Marketing Cloud Engagement as part of your authenticated domain configuration. Engagement uses only the specified subdomain for appropriate activities.
Subject and Preheader Validation: This feature displays a notification to the user to highlight words in the Subject and Preheader of emails prior to sending. The notification warns users and prevents accidental live sends that contain test-related words in the subject and preheader.
Import File Requirements for Marketing Cloud Engagement: Add subscribers by placing the data using specific columns before importing. Ensure that the file meets the proper requirements to successfully import the subscriber data into Email Studio.
Subscriber Key in Marketing Cloud Engagement: A subscriber key is a text field that contains a value that uniquely identifies a subscriber in Marketing Cloud Engagement. A subscriber key is limited to 254 English characters. Avoid using email addresses as subscriber keys.
Subscriber Preview and Test Send: Subscriber Preview and Test in Email Studio is a rendering of an email as viewed by a recipient. After the initial subscriber preview, consider proceeding through the rest of the recipients to see previews for each subscriber. The preview feature doesn’t display in a particular operating system or email client.
Subscribers: A subscriber is a person who has opted to receive communications from your organization. You must have a valid email address for each subscriber who receives emails. For each subscriber who receives SMS messages, you must have a valid phone number. You can track additional information about subscribers using profile and preference attributes. Use the subscriber key to identify your subscribers in Marketing Cloud Engagement. Create lists or data extensions to store your subscribers. Store email subscriber information in lists or data extensions, and store SMS subscriber information in data extensions only. To segment your subscribers, create as many lists and data extensions as you need. You populate the information in the lists and data extensions when you add or import subscribers.
Subscribers on a Suppression List: Marketing Cloud Engagement lets you add subscribers to a suppression list in Email Studio via an Automation Studio import activity, SOAP Web Services API, or the import wizard in Email Studio Suppression List. The subscriber must be imported without a status column. Subscribers can also add themselves to public suppression lists via their subscriber center. When a subscriber uses a one-click unsubscribe, the subscriber is added to the suppression list. The subscriber remains on the list, data extension, or publication list with a status of Unsubscribed.
Subscribers with Enhanced Subscriber Features: Include the subscriber's email status when exporting individual subscriber data or when exporting an entire subscriber list in Email Studio for Marketing Cloud Engagement. You can also filter subscriber searches by status from the all subscribers list and the lists subscriber tab.
Supported Social Networks: This list contains all social networks supported by Social Forward in Email Studio.
Suppression Lists in Email Studio: You can use suppression and publication lists to manage opt-ins in Email Studio for Marketing Cloud Engagement. Use publication lists when you send email and SMS messages to a sendable data extension. Use suppression lists with guided, user-initiated, and triggered email sends.
Using a Suppression List: A suppression list is a list of subscribers in Email Studio that you don't want to receive your communications. Suppression lists filter out subscriber keys and prevent those keys from receiving your messages.
Tracking Surveys Tab: You can view a snapshot of responses to surveys deployed through Email Studio on the Tracking Surveys Tab.
Defined Measures in Email Studio: When you enable Measures for Email Studio in Marketing Cloud Engagement, you can select the system-defined measures as criteria in your data filters.
System Performance Preservation: The process of pulling content from another system into an email involves HTTP calls from Marketing Cloud Engagement to your content management system or web site.
Test Your Reply Mail Management Configuration: To confirm that Reply Mail Management is configured correctly in Marketing Cloud Engagement, send a test email to a test list and test replies also.
Tracking Conversions Tab: The Conversions tab contains information about the conversions resulting from the email send. You can export the Conversions tab to an Excel file.
Tracking Custom Tab: The Tracking Custom Tab allows you create a button in your tracking screen that links to a landing page of job-level tracking information. This enables you to pull in web analytics data, create custom reporting dashboards, and tailor summary information for a specific tracking job.
Tracking in Email Studio: Tracking is an aggregated collection of data that allows you to view critical elements such as email opens, clicks, undeliverable messages, and other metrics online. You can also capture how many emails are forwarded and how many new subscribers each forward generates. You can create a subscriber list from tracking data to monitor subscriber and list performance. Marketing Cloud stores your tracking data for the life of your contract.
Tracking Overview Tab: The Overview tab is a dashboard that contains tracking data related to subscribers and the email sent to them.
Tracking Properties: View real-time tracking information in Email Studio. The information is presented in five tabs which allow you to drill down to specific information.
Tracking Workspace: Email Studio provides a tracking workspace where you can view real-time performance of your email sends. From there, you can also pause, cancel, or delete send jobs.
Transactional Reconciliation in User-Initiated Sends: Transactional Reconciliation helps you track the final delivery status of each transactional email sent through a user-initiated send. When enabled, Marketing Cloud Engagement monitors messages and assigns a final disposition (Sent or Not Sent) based on delivery signals during the expiration window.
Connect to the SFTP Server: Learn how to use a third-party SFTP client to connect to the Marketing Cloud Engagement SFTP server. After you connect, you can download files from the SFTP server and upload files to it.
Trigger Words: This list includes trigger words that prompt a warning from Content Detective in Email Studio. This list is not complete and may change without notice.
Triggered Emails in Email Studio: Use triggered emails in Email Studio to respond to email replies and to send email list opt-in confirmation messages. To use triggered emails for other needs, you must implement the Email Studio app and SOAP API. This guide covers the tools in the application interface.
Triggered Sends Tracking: The Overview tab for triggered sends tracking displays a graph of your triggered sends activity based on the date range you define.
Understand International Sends: The International Sends feature in Email Studio lets you select the specific language encoding for your email and provides translated supporting pages for your subscribers.
Universal Unsubscribe: A universal unsubscribe occurs when a subscriber unsubscribes from every email your company sends. When a subscriber uses the universal unsubscribe option, their status is set to Unsubscribed on all your lists and your universal list.
Unshare Content: Unshare content by editing permissions to shared items in Email Studio.
Unsubscribe Settings: Enterprise 2.0 admins can manage how their accounts handle business-level unsubscribes in Email Studio.
Unsubscribes: Learn about unsubscribes in Email Studio and Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Update a Job Link: Follow these instructions to update job links in Email Studio Tracking.
Update a Job Link: Update Job Links allows you to edit links in completed or canceled sends in Email Studio Past Sends.
Update Job Links Overview: Use the Update Job Links feature in Email Studio to edit links in a job after an email send completes. To use this feature, you must allow click tracking. The email job status must be Completed or Canceled. Only account users with View Tracking or View History permission can view this feature. Only the administrator or users with Create or Edit Email permissions can edit the link in the job. You may need to refresh the email and browser for the changes to take effect.
Update Business Unit Parent Account: A marketing admin can update a business unit parent account for Marketing Cloud Engagement Enterprise 1.0 and 2.0.
Update Your Mailing Address: Your mailing address is the address where your organization accepts postal mail. Where required by law, your emails must contain your mailing address. Before Marketing Cloud Engagement sends an email, it can validate that the mailing address is included. This step ensures compliance with commercial email laws such as CAN-SPAM.
Update Subscriber Status: Although it is possible to update a subscriber status in Marketing Cloud Engagement, it is discouraged.
Upload Your Logo: Follow these steps to upload a logo for BrandBuilder in Email Studio.
URL Expiration: The URL Expiration feature allows administrators to configure when to expire tracked links and where to redirect them. An admin sets a threshold for expiration, and as long as the click occurs before that time, the link resolves to its original location. After that point, the link opens the redirect URL.
Use Standard and Custom Icons to Share Content: Social Forward uses a default set of icons to represent the social networks supported within Email Studio. You can alter the appearence of icons to call attention to a section, such as changing the size or color of the icon. You can also alter the icon to better fit the design of your email. These steps allow you to change the icons used in Social Forward in a specific message without alterting the default icons.
Scenario: Send Email to Subscribers Who Clicked a Link: This scenario tracks the subscriber clicks link in an email during a period of time using Measures and Email Studio in Marketing Cloud Engagement. You can use that information to send those subscribers links to a related item by including the measure in a filter for an automation that sends triggered emails.
Use Subscriber Preview: To preview a microsite landing page as a subscriber in Email Studio, open the landing page and use Subscriber Preview.
Account Settings in Marketing Cloud Engagement: Marketing admins can control configuration information in Account Settings. Key information regarding your account is stored here, and an admin can modify that information for users.
View Conversions: For user-initiated email sends, the data that your conversions page passes to the system appears in the Conversions summary of the email sends tracking page.
View Users: View the users associated with a business unit in Email Studio.
Web Collect: Use Web Collect to add, update, and remove subscribers in these types of lists in Marketing Cloud Engagement with Enterprise 2.0.
Email Studio Welcome Emails: Welcome emails are the most opened emails among subscribers and often the first impression of your company's email marketing. Send an Email Studio welcome email when a subscriber is added or joins a list. The Welcome Email feature doesn’t support imports, manually created subscribers, Smart Capture, or API.
Google Analytics Integration FAQs: Review answers to frequently asked questions about the Google Analytics Integration for Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Google Analytics Integration for Marketing Cloud Engagement: The Google Analytics integration for Marketing Cloud Engagement uses Google Analytics 4 (GA4), which offers free and paid versions. You can use either version with Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Google Analytics Audiences: When you activate a Google Analytics audience in Marketing Cloud Engagement, a persistent user ID is created in both systems. With this user ID, you can collect data about customer behaviors and create Google Analytics audiences to use in Journey Builder.
Configure Google Analytics App Tracking: To track engagement with mobile URLs, set up Google Analytics 4 (GA4) property tracking for your Marketing Cloud Engagement business unit.
Google Analytics Tracking: To get web and mobile app metrics in the Journey Analytics dashboard, set up Google Analytics 4 (GA4) tracking for app and web. You can analyze how mobile app conversions impact web behavior.
Configure Google Analytics Web Tracking: To track the URLs used in Journey Builder emails and SMS activities in Marketing Cloud Engagement, set up Google Analytics 4 (GA4) property tracking. Configure tracking parameters in Google Analytics first, and then enable them in Engagement Setup.
Create a Google Analytics Audience: To segment your Marketing Cloud Engagement contacts based on dimensions, metrics, and events, create an audience in Google Analytics.
Deactivate a Tracking Parameter: To stop tracking a Google Analytics parameter in Marketing Cloud Engagement, deactivate the parameter in Setup. Deactivation is immediate, and future sends aren’t tracked.
Edit Default Google Analytics Tracking Parameters: Change the default Google Analytics tracking parameters for your Marketing Cloud Engagement account. These parameters apply to all business units unless otherwise specified.
View Google Analytics Email Activity Metrics: Email metrics measure how journey email message activities impact the behaviors of your customers. You can track the performance of each email activity in a journey.
Google Analytics Delivery and Engagement Tiles: View Google Analytics email, SMS, and push message performance metrics in the Journey Builder Analytics dashboard. Monitor how email, SMS, and push message interactions drive the online behavior of subscribers through live metrics. Metrics can include page views, bounce rate, goal completion, conversion rate, and average order value.
Google Analytics Engagement and Views Tiles: Find out which marketing content is reaching your customers. Monitor the engagement that your messages are driving by checking out Google Analytics views and engagement data on the Journey Analytics dashboard.
What Is the Largest Selectable Date Range in the Date Filter?: The system defaults to the maximum of 30 days. If the journey started less than 30 days ago, the date range automatically adjusts to a custom range to include the start date through today.
Can I Match Contacts Between Google Analytics and Marketing Cloud Engagement?: Yes. To identify a customer in an audience by matching the Client ID stored on the client machine in the GA cookie and the SFMC ID, the user’s machine must initiate a session. You need both IDs to simulate a session and send a hit through the Google Analytics measurement protocol. To encourage engagement, you can send the customer a welcome email with a call-to-action link or button when they complete their online registration.
Can I Add the SubscriberID Parameter to a Link in Journey Builder?: Yes. You can manually append the sfmc_id=%%subscriberid%% parameter to a link, just like other UTM parameters. When you do, the subscriber is added to an audience, published to Marketing Cloud Engagement, and added back into a journey using the data extension for the audience.
Can I Remove Duplicate IDs?: Yes. In Google Analytics, you can expose the subscriber ID from Marketing Cloud Engagement as a custom dimension. If multiple Google Client IDs have the same subscriber ID, the integration deduplicates the Google ID before it’s sent to Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Why Don’t My Subscribers Appear in My Google Analytics Audience?: Marketing Cloud Engagement uses an ID to link subscribers to Google Analytics audience members. To ensure that this link is created, configure the sfmc_id parameter with a value of %%subscriberid%%.
What Limits Apply to My Use of Google Analytics?: Google enforces several limits on Google Analytics. A free Google Analytics account can contain up to 100 audiences, while a paid account can contain up to 400. Free accounts can retain audience data for up to 14 months, while a paid account can retain data for up to 50 months.
Journey Analytics Dashboard No Longer Shows Google Analytics Data: A Google Analytics account administrator can revoke the permission to share data with Marketing Cloud Engagement. When permission is revoked, the data no longer appears in the Engagement dashboard. Contact your Google Analytics account administrator to verify that the property is configured to share data with Engagement.
Why Can't I See My Google Analytics Information?: Administrator permissions are required to view the accounts, properties, and views associated with your Google account. If this information isn’t appearing in the selector, check your permissions.
Google Analytics Goals Tile: Google Analytics goal metrics are aggregated at the journey level in the Journey Analytics dashboard. Goal data provides insight into how the journey contributes to the overall success of your marketing strategy. Get information about completed activities, such as purchases and user engagement for website traffic generated by Marketing Cloud Engagement activities. Configure the dashboard to display up to five goals.
Journey Analytics Metrics: Learn about the metrics and dashboard tiles available on the Journey Analytics dashboard with the Google Analytics 4 integration. View journey performance against the goals you set and email and site metrics all in one place. App and web conversion events appear in context with your journey’s native metrics. To display the metrics that matter most to you, customize your dashboard’s appearance.
Google Analytics Integration for Marketing Cloud Engagement: To use Google Analytics capabilities to track and analyze journey activity, integrate Google Analytics with Marketing Cloud Engagement. You can also view the resulting metrics directly in Marketing Cloud Engagement. Google’s native authentication creates a secure link between your Marketing Cloud Engagement instance and your Google Analytics account.
Link Google Analytics and Marketing Cloud Engagement Accounts: Connect your Marketing Cloud Engagement account to Google Analytics. Google’s native authentication process creates a secure connection between your accounts and sets view permissions for your reports. If you have multiple Engagement instances under the same EID, the Google Analytics accounts that you link are added to those instances also.
Track a Google Analytics Audience: To use a Google Analytics audience as an entry source in Journey Builder, create the audience in Google Analytics, and then add it to the Marketing Cloud Engagement integration. When you connect an audience to Engagement, it synchronizes the audience automatically or according to a schedule that you set.
Share an Audience with Another Business Unit: When you link Marketing Cloud Engagement with Google Analytics 4, the GA4 audiences are available to every business unit that has the same enterprise ID (EID). You can choose which business units are able to access these audiences.
View SMS Analytics in Journey Builder: SMS analytics measure the impact of Journey Builder SMS message activities on the behavior of your customers. You can track the performance of each SMS activity in a journey. Metrics for SMS activities aggregate usage data for all versions of a journey.
Google Analytics Traffic Tile: Gain insights that help you evaluate the impact of your marketing communications strategy. View Google Analytics site usage metrics on the Journey Builder Analytics dashboard in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Use an Audience Data Extension in a Journey Entry Step: When you import a Google Analytics audience, Marketing Cloud Engagement creates a data extension based on the data associated with the audience. You can use the data extension to add an audience into a journey.
Setting Up Parameters: UTM parameters help you measure how clicks from your messages relate to activities on your websites. After you set up these parameters, Marketing Cloud Engagement appends them to the URLs in your messages.
Create a Filtered List of Contacts: Use a filtered list in GroupConnect to send messages to a specific audience based on their demographics. A filtered list includes contacts filtered on their demographic or interest data, such as zip code, income, products purchased, or birth date. You can also use filtered lists as suppression lists to exclude a specific audience from messages.
Delete a List: Follow these steps to delete a list in GroupConnect.
Duplicate a List: After you duplicate a filtered list in GroupConnect, you can change the name and other aspects of the copy. Contacts automatically appends the name of the copy with “Copy####.”
Dynamically Add Emoji to a Message: To add an emoji dynamically in GroupConnect, use AMPscript. The condition determines which emoji is included in the message.
Edit Filters: Edit your filters in GroupConnect to create a filtered list of contacts.
Edit or Deactivate a LINE Channel: If you have administrative rights in GroupConnect, you can edit or deactivate LINE channels within the Setup app.
Get Started with GroupConnect: If you have administrative rights in GroupConnect, get started with GroupConnect by adding LINE channels within the Setup app.
GroupConnect: Use GroupConnect to send messages to contacts via messaging apps. Currently, GroupConnect supports the LINE mobile messaging app and Facebook Messenger (available only via chat messaging API). The LINE app is integrated into Content Builder and Journey Builder. Use GroupConnect to create and send messages, manage contact subscriptions, and review messaging activities.
GroupConnect Reports: Four GroupConnect reports are available under Analytics Builder in Marketing Cloud Engagement. In Analytics Builder, select Reports to run them.
Manage Filtered Lists: In GroupConnect, edit a filtered list, refresh contacts, duplicate, and delete.
Manage Messages: Review an outbound message's activity, learn about how GroupConnect stores opt-ins and opt-outs, and run GroupConnect reports.
Add and Manage Contacts: Use the Contacts feature in GroupConnect to view and interact with GroupConnect-related contact information for a contact. Use the contact information made available by Contacts to GroupConnect to better segment and target the correct audience for your messaging.
Opt-ins and Opt-outs: GroupConnect recognizes opt-ins and opt-outs based on information from the messaging app. The app provides user information when the opt-in initially takes place, and GroupConnect stores that information in the contact record. If a contact opts out of receiving further information, the messaging app relays that opt-out to GroupConnect and deletes any applicable information from the contact record.
Prompt a Contact to Follow Your Account: Steps to prompt a contact to follow your account and send attribute information using the Follow template in GroupConnect. You can use only one active follow message per account. To use another follow message, inactivate the current follow message. Any user who follows your account sees these messages.
Refresh Contacts: Manually refresh your filtered list of contacts in GroupConnect. Refresh adds or removes recently imported contacts.
Respond Automatically to Messages: Use the Response message template in GroupConnect to create an automatic response message for incoming messages from your contacts.
Review Outbound Message Activity: After you send, schedule, or activate an outbound message in GroupConnect, review information about that message's activity.
Send a Message to a Contact: Use the Outbound message template in GroupConnect to send a message to a contact.
Interaction Studio (Classic): This article applies to the Interaction Studio (Classic) (formerly Evergage Classic) Web Campaign system.
Create or Update an Account: Although the deprecated Account activity can appear in old journeys, it’s no longer an option for new journey activities. Instead, use the Object, Campaign, or Convert Lead activity when creating journeys. The Account activity creates an account for each Marketing Cloud Engagement contact or updates an existing account using its account ID or a Marketing Cloud Engagement attribute corresponding to that field.
Account Activity in Journey Builder: To create or update an account in Sales or Service Cloud based on attribute relationships, use the Account activity in the Marketing Cloud Engagement Journey Builder app. Populate Sales or Service Cloud account fields with Marketing Cloud Engagement attributes, other values from the journey, or with fixed values you designate.
Activate Einstein Send Time Optimization: To find out how sending works for subscribers with low data, turn on Einstein Send Time Optimization (STO) in Marketing Cloud Engagement Setup.
Activity Types: Learn what each Journey Builder activity does.
Activity IDs in Journey Builder: Find any activity’s unique identifier in a draft, running, paused, or stopped journey after the journey is saved. This feature helps customers and Support agents locate the issue when troubleshooting an activity.
Activity Type Reference: This table identifies and explains Activity Type messages displayed on the Contacts page in Journey Builder.
Advertising Campaign Activity: Create an Advertising Audience and a simple Facebook advertising campaign without leaving Journey Builder. The Advertising Campaign activity creates an advertising campaign and posts your advertising content on social media. As the journey continues, customers populate the advertising campaign and see your advertisement.
Add Contacts to a Campaign: Use the Add to Campaign activity to add Marketing Cloud Engagement contacts to a Sales and Service Cloud campaign.
Journey Builder Administration: Journey Builder includes an administrative interface that is accessed by clicking links in the top navigation.
Admit Contacts Via an API: The API event in Journey Builder connects the journey canvas to an API used to admit contacts into a journey. When the API fires an event, the contacts entering the journey are stored in your chosen Marketing Cloud Engagement data extension. You can set a filter using Marketing Cloud Engagement data attributes to ensure that only intended customers enter the journey.
All Journeys Dashboard View: This default Journey Builder dashboard shows available journeys in your Marketing Cloud Engagement account.
Analytics and History: Journey Builder includes journey health, history, and dashboards.
Anniversary Campaigns: Even a simple reminder campaign in Journey Builder can help build a relationship with your clients and increase brand engagement. Typical anniversary campaigns focus on a special date for a customer, like a birthday or sign-up date. These yearly messages can be part of a renewal strategy. You can also celebrate your company’s milestones or send a reminder to customers who haven’t purchased in a while.
API Event Entry Source Use Case: A marketer at Northern Trails Outfitters (NTO) works with a developer to set up an API that admits customers into a Marketing Cloud Engagement journey every day. In this example, the marketer and developer work to set up the API Event and API request, and then test sending a single contact into a journey. The API is intended to send a single contact at a time. It admits contacts when they’re ready to enter the journey rather than queuing or batching them.
Attribute to Attribute Comparison: Compare an attribute value to another attribute in entry events and decision splits in Journey Builder.
The Audience Entry Source: Use an audience to admit a list of contacts into a journey. Select from the push, SMS, and published Audience Builder audiences available in your account. To create or edit audiences, use Contact Builder.
Journey Builder Audit Log: Get full visibility into the changes made to your journeys to monitor their evolution and maintain accountability across teams in your business unit. The Journey Builder Audit Log feature shows information about the users creating, modifying, activating, deactivating, stopping, and deleting journeys. You can also view the activity and status history of a contact, journey, or journey version.
Behavioral Triggers Optional Features: Use Behavioral Triggers to reach customers who abandon unpurchased items or services in their cart in Marketing Cloud Engagement (Einstein).
Behavioral Triggers: Use Marketing Cloud Engagement to reach customers who abandon unpurchased items or services. Configure the flow of this behavioral data into the data extensions for email sends and journeys. Using behavioral data this way is called Behavioral Triggers.
Behavioral Triggers Prerequisites: To implement Behavioral Triggers, first install Collect Tracking Code and upload a product catalog.
Bulk Actions in Journey Builder: Manage your journeys more easily from the Journey dashboard. You can modify up to 10 journeys at one time, and choose to do so for the current version or for all versions. Long or complex journeys may take longer to complete the request. You can modify up to 50 journey versions. If your request has more than 50 versions, only the first 50 are requested. The Journey and Version dashboards show which journeys have successfully completed.
Use Data 360 in Journey Builder: Data 360 is optimized for messaging using Journey Builder. You can also use Data 360 to select an audience in Email Studio and MobileConnect. Audiences can include enriched unified individual records and new records. It’s important to consider consent management when sending.
Campaign Member Activity in Journey Builder: The Campaign Member activity in Journey Builder provides a connection between campaigns, contacts, and leads. This connection helps define a relationship between the contact or lead and the status within a campaign. Use the Campaign Member activity to track important moments of engagement throughout the journey.
Journey Builder Activities: Canvas activities include messages, decisions, updates, or a combination of these elements
Create a Case: Create a case and associate it to the Sales or Service Cloud contact that matches the Marketing Cloud Engagement contact ID. Or create a Sales and Service Cloud contact to associate the case to.
Choose a Contact Entry Mode: Journey Builder observes Contact Entry mode at the journey level, and it persists for each version of a journey in Marketing Cloud Engagement. Contact entry mode dictates when a contact is eligible to enter a journey. Journey Builder offers three entry options to define when contacts can enter a journey.
Create a Choose Object Activity: Use the Choose Object activity to create or update any type of object record in the Sales and Service Cloud.
Clear a Transactional Send Journey Queue: You can clear a Transactional Send Journey queue when messages in a paused or errored journey are outdated and no longer eligible for delivery.
Journey Builder Configuration Recommendations: As part of journey validation functionality, Journey Builder makes recommendations about configurations that can impact system performance. These recommendations don’t prevent you from activating your journey.
Configure an Existing Content Builder Carousel Message in Journey Builder: Use a carousel message in a LINE Message activity to power Journey Builder sends to Marketing Cloud Engagement contacts in a journey. A carousel message is a LINE message that can include 10 different messages within one carousel. To create LINE messages, your account must have LINE channels enabled. To learn more about how to get LINE access and channels, contact your Marketing Cloud Engagement account representative. You can add carousel messages that you created in Content Builder to a Journey Builder LINE activity.
Configure an Existing Content Builder In-App Message in Journey Builder: Use the in-app message activity to power Journey Builder sends to Marketing Cloud Engagement contacts in a journey. An in-app message is a full-page, window, or banner message that is sent to users of your mobile app. The message is displayed when the user opens the app. You can use in-app messages to announce new content in your app, invite users to take a survey, or encourage users to enable features in your app. You can add in-app messages that you created in Content Builder to a Journey Builder Push activity.
Configure an Existing Content Builder Multi-Content Message in Journey Builder: Use a multi-content message in a LINE Message activity to power Journey Builder sends to Marketing Cloud Engagement contacts in a journey. A multi-content message can include a single video, image, audio, or text message or up to five of these elements in one message. You can add multi-content messages that you created in Content Builder to a Journey Builder LINE activity.
Configure an Existing Content Builder Push Notification in Journey Builder: Use the push notification activity to power Journey Builder push notification sends to Marketing Cloud Engagement contacts in a journey. You can add push notifications that you created in Content Builder to a Journey Builder Push activity.
Configure an Existing Content Builder SMS/MMS in Journey Builder: Use the SMS/MMS activity to power Journey Builder SMS sends to Marketing Cloud Engagement contacts in a journey. You can add SMS or MMS messages that you created in Content Builder to a Journey Builder SMS/MMS activity. MMS is only available in the United States and Canada.
Configure a Frequency Split: Journey Builder’s Frequency Split activity sends each contact down a path based on their individual engagement frequency. Real-time engagement analysis enables Einstein to automatically segment contacts, even in a running journey.
Configure Events for Business Accounts: Follow these steps in Journey Builder to configure the event to fire when an object associated with a business account is created or updated.
Configure Events for Person Accounts: Create a person account for each Marketing Cloud Engagement contact who enters the journey. When a person account is created, an identical contact record is created in Sales or Service Cloud
Create an In-App Message Activity in Journey Builder: Use the in-app message activity to power Journey Builder sends to Marketing Cloud Engagement contacts in a journey. An in-app message is a full-page, window, or banner message that’s sent to users of your mobile app. The message appears when the user is in the app. Use in-app messages to announce offers, invite users to take a survey, or encourage them to turn on push notifications or location settings for your app.
Create the Carousel LINE Activity in Journey Builder: Use a carousel message in a LINE Message activity to power Journey Builder sends to Marketing Cloud Engagement contacts in a journey. A carousel message is a LINE message that can include 10 different messages within one carousel. To create LINE messages, your account must have LINE channels enabled. To learn more about how to get LINE access and channels, contact your Marketing Cloud Engagement account representative.
Create a Multi-Content Message LINE Activity in Journey Builder: Use a multi-content message in a LINE Message activity to power Journey Builder sends to Marketing Cloud Engagement contacts in a journey. A multi-content message can include a single video, image, audio, or text message or up to five of these elements in one message.
Configure the Salesforce Data Event: Using this Journey Builder event, contacts enter the journey when a Sales Cloud record is created or updated.
Create an SMS/MMS Activity in Journey Builder: Use the SMS/MMS activity to power Journey Builder SMS sends to Marketing Cloud Engagement contacts in a journey. MMS is only available in the United States and Canada.
Configure the Data Extension Entry Source: To admit Marketing Cloud Engagement contacts from a sendable data extension in Journey Builder, use the data extension entry source.
Configure the Email Activity: Use an email activity to power Journey Builder email sends to Marketing Cloud Engagement contacts in a journey.
Configure the Sitecore Connect for SFMC Activity: Use the Sitecore Connect for SFMC activity to send contact status from Marketing Cloud Engagement to Sitecore as a contact moves through a journey.
Connect a Data Extension for Decision Splits: To use data that isn’t in the entry source or that changes in a Decision Split in Journey Builder, follow these steps to link a data extension in Contact Builder.
Contact Activity: Use the Contact activity to create or update a contact in the Sales and Service Cloud for each Marketing Cloud Engagement contact that reaches this activity.
Contact Activity in Journey Builder: Use the Contact Activity in Journey Builder to create or update a Sales and Service Cloud contact based on attribute relationships. Or populate Sales and Service Cloud contacts with values from Marketing Cloud Engagement attributes.
Convert Lead Activity: Use the Convert Lead activity in Journey Builder to convert qualified leads from Sales and Service Cloud into a contact or an account. Assign a lead owner and notify that person via email. Create an opportunity and task.
Copy a Marketing Cloud Engagement Journey: Use the Journey Builder copy feature to duplicate a journey. A copy is created in draft mode and doesn’t include statistics from the original journey version, but it does include the original entry source, goal, and activity flow.
Copy a Decision Split Path: To save time, you can copy decision split paths in Journey Builder. After you make a copy, edit the attribute values to make it distinct from other paths. You can't activate a journey when two decision split paths are configured identically.
Create a Behavior Trigger Email: After you create a Behavioral Trigger in Content Builder, you can create an email based on that trigger.
Create a Filter: Create a filter to ensure that the intended Marketing Cloud Engagement contact enters your journey, follows a split activity path, or reaches the goal. Use contact data and journey data attributes in a filter as needed.
Create a Journey: Use a Contact Data entry event to fire events in Journey Builder using a Marketing Cloud Engagement automation or an API entry event.
Create a Shared Entry Event: An Entry Event is an action that prompts one or more contacts to enter a journey in Journey Builder. This topic contains information for IT administrators to set up shared entry events for marketer use.
Create a Behavioral Trigger: Set up a behavioral trigger to map data to a target data extension when a user takes a particular action, such as abandoning a cart or browser session. The target data extension name displays on the Behavioral Triggers dashboard after you create the trigger.
Create a Date-Based Event Entry: Use Date-Based Events in Journey Builder to use a date-based attribute from Contact Builder to determine when contacts enter the journey. Common use cases include birthday and anniversary campaigns. Other typical cases are journeys based on subscription dates or the last time a contact opened or used an app. If a contact doesn’t have a contact record in Marketing Cloud Engagement, they aren’t admitted into the journey.
Create a Journey-Specific Event: A journey-specific event in Marketing Cloud Engagement Journey Builder is configured within a single journey. Only that journey can use the event.
Create a Journey Version: To add, remove, reconfigure, or change the order of activities on the Journey Builder canvas, create a draft version of a Marketing Cloud Engagement journey. To prompt contacts to enter the new version, activate the draft.
Create a Multi-Step Journey in Journey Builder: Use the Multi-Step feature in Journey Builder to create automated, customized, multiple-touch customer journeys in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Create an Object Record: Use the Object activity in Journey Builder to create Sales and Service Cloud object records during a journey.
Create a Shared Template: Create a shared template from a journey that you created in Marketing Cloud Engagement Journey Builder.
Create a Single Send Journey: Use the Single Send feature in Journey Builder to create a single-message journey for a batch audience. You can schedule Single Send journeys to send immediately or at a future date and time. And you can use Einstein activities to send at the optimal time and frequency for each contact.
Create a Tag: Create a tag from the journeys dashboard in Journey Builder.
Create a Transactional Send Journey: Use the Transactional Send feature in Journey Builder to create messages triggered by the Transactional Send API
Salesforce Data Entry Dashboard View: The Salesforce Data Entry view helps you stay within data entry limits and avoid contact injection disruptions in Journey Builder. Salesforce Data Events count toward your total Salesforce data entry limits.
Resolve Excess Salesforce Data Events in Journey Builder: Actions in Sales and Service Cloud, such as creating or updating an object record that injects a contact into a journey, count toward your total Salesforce data event limits.
Data Extension Entry Source: The data extension entry source lets you choose a sendable data extension, then admit contacts in that data extension into a journey in a batch. You can configure a filter to control which contacts enter or admit all contacts in the data extension. You can also use Automation Studio to create and refresh the data extension, or you can use an SMS list created in MobileConnect.
Linked Data Extensions in Journey Builder: Your data setup affects how Marketing Cloud Engagement evaluates the contact attributes used in journey entry source filters, wait activities, or decision splits. Review what happens when a data extension is linked to one or more other data extensions.
Data Extension Entry Source Use Cases: Read about how Northern Trail Outfitters (NTO) used the data extension entry source to hold a raffle, sell winter accessories, and support disaster relief.
Define the Automation: Define a Marketing Cloud Engagement automation using the Fire Event activity to fire an event prompting Journey Builder to detect updates. When you set up the Fire Event activity, select the same data extension used in the entry event you set up in your journey. Automations used for journeys can be set up in advance using Scheduled or File Drop Automations.
Define Exit Criteria: Set exit criteria in Journey Builder to remove Marketing Cloud Engagement contacts that the journey is no longer relevant to.
Set a Goal in Journey Builder: Follow these steps to define a journey's goal in Journey Builder. Goal attainment is measured by whether a contact meets the goal criteria you set. To evaluate a goal one last time before a contact exits, add a Wait by Duration activity before each exit path.
Define Your Mobile App Event Schema: An app event requires a name and can optionally contain many attributes. Depending on your app and use cases, you can capture events or attributes that are more descriptive than others.
Delete Drafts and Inactive Journeys: You can delete draft and inactive Marketing Cloud Engagement journeys in Journey Builder. When you delete an inactive version, all of that journey's goal and performance data are permanently removed. The journey's cumulative totals still include the goal and performance data tied to it.
Delete a Marketing Cloud Engagement Journey: Remove drafts and journeys you no longer need from Journey Builder. If a journey is running or finishing, stop it before you delete it.
Delete a Shared Template: Users with Create/Edit permission in Journey Builder can delete shared templates from a business unit. When you delete a shared template, it is no longer available to any business unit. Existing journeys created from the template are not affected.
Edit an Entry Source: After you configure an entry source, you can edit it or review its configuration before activation. After activation, you can review the entry source configuration, but you can’t edit it. To edit an active entry source, pause or stop the Journey and then create a new version.
Edit a Behavioral Trigger: Update a behavioral trigger to include a different suppression period or suppression rule time frame.
Edit a Shared Template: Users with Create/Edit permission in Journey Builder can edit a shared template. Existing journeys created from the template are not affected.
Configure Einstein Scoring Splits: Use the Einstein Scoring Split activity in Journey Builder to segment customers into logical split paths according to prebuilt Einstein personas. Each persona is built on engagement score segments.
Einstein Send Time Optimization for Journey Builder: Einstein Send Time Optimization (STO) uses machine learning and 90 days of email or push notification engagement data to determine the best time within the next 24 hours to send a message to each contact. Include the Einstein STO activity in a journey immediately before an email or push notification activity to reach contacts when they’re most likely to engage. Or preview Einstein’s optimal send times for a data extension before you send. To use this activity, activate Einstein Send Time Optimization for your business unit.
Create a Control Path with Random Send: Find out how Einstein Send Time Optimization (STO) performs when you compare the engagement rates of random sends to optimized sends. Use the Random Send option to send to some contacts at randomized times. To use Random Send, enable Einstein STO first.
Einstein Send Time Optimization Use Cases: Focus on increasing overall engagement, measure the impact of send time optimization, and optimize send times when there’s a wait activity between messages.
Email Activity Tracking in Journey Builder: In Marketing Cloud Engagement, find tracking information for each running journey’s canvas. More Journey Builder email tracking is available in Email Studio.
Email Personalization Use Case: In Journey Builder, email personalization replaces the personalization string in the email with the matching attribute value found in journey data. This feature means that each personalization string is replaced with the specified attribute value as it exists when the contact enters the journey. Using journey data to substitute personalization strings for data values ensures that emails aren’t sent with blank or unintended data values.
Enable or Disable Google Analytics: The Google Analytics Free integration allows marketers with Journey Builder to apply automated tracking on email and SMS messages. Google Analytics users can also see reporting in Journey Builder that provides insights into how their customers are engaging with their messaging and web-based marketing. Marketing Cloud Engagement customers with the GA360 integration can also act on these insights by creating audiences in Google Analytics, then sending them to Engagement to use for remarketing.
The Contact Event Entry Source: An entry event uses data about customer behavior to put contacts into a journey. Entry events generally require a change in data about the customer that triggers an evaluation of that contact for admission in the journey. The records Journey Builder evaluates for events are stored in a data source, which Journey Builder monitors on a schedule that you set.
Events and Data Extensions: When a journey's entry source is configured in Journey Builder, the data source from which contacts are admitted is usually a data extension.
Entry Results: Use this page to understand and gauge the flow of contacts into a journey in Journey Builder. This page also shows the journeys that use this entry source under Journey Usage. View a list of contacts that weren’t accepted and an explanation by clicking View Rejected Contacts.
Entry Source Administration: An entry event is the action that prompts one or more contacts to enter a journey. Entry events are recorded in a data source, which Journey Builder monitors on a schedule you set. Entry events can be journey-specific or reusable.
Entry Sources: The entry source on the canvas tells Journey Builder where customers entering this journey come from. Each journey must include an entry source.
Error Message Troubleshooting: Review possible solutions to common contact journey errors in Journey Builder. These errors can cause a contact to exit a journey earlier than expected.
Exit Criteria: Create a simple or complex contact filter in Journey Builder to remove contacts from a journey.
Fire an Event: Entry events prompt Journey Builder to evaluate Marketing Cloud Engagement contacts for journey entry. An entry event occurs when records in a journey's entry event data source, often a data extension, are added, updated, or overwritten. Firing an event lets you kick off a journey using an API or an automation created in Automation Studio.
Google Analytics Use Case: An NTO marketer wants to compel past purchasers to review the item or service they purchased. The marketer uses Journey Builder to create a journey in Marketing Cloud Engagement, which uses data from their company’s Google Analytics (GA) account.
Get Started with Mobile App Events: Before events can be used to trigger the display of in-app messages, they must first be defined in Marketing Cloud Engagement and then implemented in the MobilePush SDK.
Goals in Journey Builder: In Journey Builder, a goal is a measurement of customer actions that you want to promote. Measure goals based on a goal target you set by creating a filter on contact data. After you activate a journey, Journey Builder evaluates contact data against the filter set as the goal target. When Journey Builder determines that a contact has met the goal, that contact is counted in goal target statistics. Reaching the goal can also prompt the contact to exit, if applicable.
Journey Analytics Dashboard: Access unified cross-channel performance data in Journey Builder, and easily track your marketing campaign’s effectiveness. Journey Analytics, powered by Google Analytics, unites Marketing Cloud Engagement SMS, push messaging, and email capabilities with Analytics behavioral data in a single dashboard. You can compare how goals configured in Google Analytics perform over time, and you can see ecommerce, messaging performance, and site usage data.
Journey Builder High-Throughput Sending: You can enable HTS for an individual journey in Journey Settings. After you activate HTS in a journey, it can't be deactivated for that specific journey. You can also ask your admin to turn on default HTS for all new journeys in a business unit.
Honor Opt-Out Requests for Personalized Ads: Google integration partners can display personalized ads to your customers. If you use Google Analytics to manage your customers’ requests to opt out of personalized ad targeting, use these steps to observe those requests in Engagement.
Inbound Chat Message: You can use the Inbound Chat entry source in Journey Builder to admit contacts who send one of the keywords that you selected to your app channel.
Journeys and Messages: Journey Builder is a campaign planning tool in Marketing Cloud Engagement that enables you to design and automate campaigns that guide customers through their journey with a brand. Its foundation is the journey, which is the communication plan you design. Canvas activities tell Journey Builder how to communicate to and direct contacts in the journey. Contacts enter from an entry source. The journey then continually evaluates contacts to determine when to move them to the next activity.
Journey and Contact Data: Journey data preserves the state of a contact's data at the moment an entry event fires, facilitating the use of that data throughout a journey. Contact data captures the data values in the event source data extension at the time when Journey Builder evaluates it. Both are uniquely useful in journey creation.
Journey and Contact Data in Decision Splits: Use journey and contact data in Journey Builder decision splits to direct contacts down a path based on changes to an attribute value during a journey. This step is useful when you want to promote to a specific event, even if that event happened before the contact is admitted to the journey.
Journey Health: The Health panel in Journey Builder shows goal and journey population data for a running or stopped multi-step journey. The statistics in the Health panel are shown for the version of the journey you are in currently.
Journey History: Get historical data about your contacts and journeys with the Journey History feature. See how a contact or journey performed, and use that data to improve journey performance.
Journey Settings: To get the best performance from your journeys, configure Journey Settings to determine when the contact enters a Marketing Cloud Engagement journey and which address Journey Builder uses to message the contact.
Journey Tags: Use journey tags to organize your journeys in Journey Builder and make them easily searchable.
Journey Templates: Journey Templates are pre-defined journeys created by Salesforce or other users. Use a template as-is, or modify it to meet your use case.
Journey Testing: Use Journey Builder’s test feature to confirm that a Marketing Cloud Engagement journey behaves as expected. When you use a data extension as the entry source, you can configure a test to simulate a journey with real contacts. But the classic test mode is available with any entry source.
Manage Customer Journeys: Journey Builder’s enables you to efficiently create and track Single Send, Transactional Send, and Multi-Step customer journeys in Marketing Cloud Engagement from a unified workspace.
Journey Versions: Manage multiple versions of customer journeys in Journey Builder. Configure a new journey version to change journey activities without affecting contacts in the current journey version.
The Journeys Dashboard: The Journeys Dashboard provides an overview of all the journeys you create in Journey Builder. The overview includes journey type, status, and the last date changes were made. You can also see which version of a journey is accepting new contacts. In this dashboard, you can sort by journey, status, performance by entry total and goal attainment, or last modified date. You can also filter the list of journeys, open a journey, and access the journey creation workspace.
Journey Builder Last Wait Recommendations: For better journey management and orchestration, we removed the final wait requirement as of the Summer ’25 release. Journeys created after the Summer ’25 release no longer include a final wait activity by default.
Lead: Use the Lead activity to create or update a lead record in the Sales and Service Cloud for each contact that reaches the activity.
Choose How to Process Entry Source Data: Configure your Journey Builder entry source so that it promotes efficient processing. When an entry source includes a repeating schedule, choosing a processing option is necessary. Processing options tell Journey Builder how to evaluate contacts in a data extension or list.
Manage Journey Folders: Use journey folders to organize your journeys in Journey Builder. You can create, rename, move, or delete folders as needed.
Single Send Journeys: Single Send journeys enable you to create and manage simple, one-touch customer journeys within the same workspace used for Multi-Step journeys. Define the target audience for the entry source, add existing message content or create a message from scratch, and send or schedule the send for a later date and time. You can also get Einstein’s help to send at the right time and monitor message engagement metrics all within Journey Builder.
Email Client Privacy and Non-Subscriber Activity in Marketing Cloud Engagement Email and Journeys: Some email client providers are making privacy changes that can impact open metrics and calculations. Trust is the #1 Value at Salesforce. Privacy and security continue to gain importance in our digital lives. Our top priority is to create the solutions that help you respond, act, and succeed in these new environments. Marketers traditionally create automations, campaign engagement strategies, and more based on email opens because email opens can signal whether a customer or prospect is interested in your content. But the privacy options available to customers can make email opens less reliable as engagement signals.
Message Activities: Messaging activities include email, SMS, LINE message, push notification, inbox message, in-app message, or any other form of content sent to contacts. To provide a mix of information about your brand or your product, vary the message content. Create message content before you build a journey.
Mobile Activities in Journey Builder: Journey Builder includes the SMS, LINE Message, Push Notification, In-App Message, and Inbox activities for sending to mobile devices from a journey. Add MobilePush inbox messages without leaving the journey. Configure SMS, LINE Message, In-App Message, and Push Notification Journey Builder activities to use messages created in Mobile Studio and Content Builder.
Configure a Mobile App Event Entry Source: Use the Mobile App Event entry source in Journey Builder to listen for user behavior and admit contacts who take specific actions in your mobile app, such as installing the app or making a purchase. You can set a filter using App Event data attributes to ensure that only intended customers enter the journey. Mobile App Events aren’t stored in a data extension, but you can use Mobile App Event metadata as journey data.
Marketing Cloud Engagement Mobile App Events Overview: Highly relevant and contextually aware interactions are the cornerstone of amazing customer experiences. Now, user behaviors on your mobile app can drive relevant and personalized touchpoints, powered by easy-to-configure listening rules in Journey Builder. Mobile App Events help your brand deliver mobile moments that matter by creating meaningful engagement, increasing brand loyalty, and generating a higher return on investment for your marketing campaigns.
Multi-Step Journeys: Journey Builder’s Multi-Step journeys enable you to create and manage customer journeys through a series of interactions with your brand. These journeys can include multiple channels and customized journey paths based on customer interactions or attributes.
Object Activity in Journey Builder: Use the Object activity in Journey Builder to create or update a Sales or Service Cloud record in an object. You can also use this activity to create or update a custom object.
Opportunity: Use the Opportunity activity to create an opportunity record in the Sales and Service Cloud. Marketing Cloud Engagement contact attributes can be used to populate fields on the opportunity record. Or populate each record with fixed values you choose.
Journey Builder System Optimization Dashboard: The System Optimization dashboard shows the journeys and configurations that can affect overall system processing speed and identifies changes to improve system performance. The dashboard monitors running journey versions when contacts are actively flowing and identifies inefficiencies and recommendations to improve performance. You can activate a journey without correcting warnings, but we recommend reviewing issues that can impact Journey Builder performance.
How to Optimize Journey Builder Performance: The Journey Builder processing rate varies based on your data model, filters, configuration, activities, and content complexity. Journeys share processing resources, so stagger the start time for each journey to reduce the demand and increase the processing speed of individual journeys. Use the System Optimization Dashboard to identify and prioritize optimizations that could increase your overall throughput.
Organize Your Journeys: Organize your journeys in folders so they’re easy to access. You can add a journey to a folder when you create and save it. Or drag one or more journeys from the dashboard into a folder.
Path Optimizer Test Activity in Journey Builder: The Path Optimizer activity enables you to test up to 10 variations of a journey path to determine which path performs best. Use a sample from your contacts to test multiple versions of messages, wait times, channels, and message frequencies during an active journey. You can let Journey Builder pick the winner automatically based on email metrics such as opens, clicks, or unsubscribes. Or you can manually choose a winner at any time based on metrics tracked inside or outside Marketing Cloud Engagement. The remaining contacts take the winning journey path.
Journey Pause: Pause a running journey to temporarily halt processing contacts and sending messages through the journey. Resume a paused journey to restart processing contacts. Use this feature to temporarily halt sending messages for business reasons or to update content included in a journey. You can also pause a journey to allow a higher priority campaign to run instead, and then resume the journey after that campaign ends.
Pause a Behavioral Trigger: To stop a behavioral trigger from directing engagement data to your target data extension, pause the trigger.
Person Accounts and Salesforce Data Events: A person account is a type of account that stores information about individual consumers. By default, Salesforce accounts are business accounts, but administrators can choose to set up person accounts. Person accounts facilitate business-to-consumer functionality within Sales and Service Clouds. Use the Salesforce Data Event to tell Journey Builder to perform one of these actions:
Journey Builder Prerequisites: Review these items before using Journey Builder in Marketing Cloud Engagement whether you’re a marketer or administrator.
View Recent Contacts by Activity: View up to 30 days of contacts processed in any non-wait activity in any active, stopped, or paused journey in Journey Builder. Expand for a detailed view to identify trends in contact success and error rates to troubleshoot and resolve issues more quickly.
Recent Single Sends Dashboard View: View metrics for sent Single Send journeys in the Recent Single Sends tab of the Journeys Dashboard in Journey Builder.
Reorder Decision Split Paths: Journey Builder evaluates contacts that reach a Decision Split activity against the split’s filter criteria in succession from top to bottom on the canvas. You can change the order of the paths.
Permissions for Journey Builder: Marketing Cloud Engagement user permission settings supersede user permissions granted in the Journey Builder app. Review the list of permissions required to access these features in Journey Builder.
Resume a Behavioral Trigger: To restart a behavioral trigger so it begins directing engagement data to your target data extension, resume a paused trigger.
Retail Campaigns: Retailers use marketing campaigns built in Journey Builder to promote a sale, announce a new product, or invite customers to a special event. The goal for these campaigns is to increase conversion and drive sales.
Reuse a Journey Builder Activity: Make building a Marketing Cloud Engagement journey faster and easier by copying activities or groups of activities. Copied activities, with a few exceptions, don’t have to be configured again after you paste them on the Journey Builder canvas.
Run the Automation: Prompt Journey Builder to filter contacts into journeys configured to use this entry event.
Sales and Service Cloud Activities: Use Sales and Service Cloud canvas activities in Journey Builder to create or update object records for connected Marketing Cloud Engagement contacts. You can grant users access to create or edit Sales and Service Cloud activities, except users with the Marketing Cloud Engagement Administrator role.
Journey Builder Sales and Service Cloud Best Practices: Review these best practices to prevent a Sales or Service Cloud activity from negatively impacting your account. Adhering to these practices can reduce impact on other journeys in your enterprise and improve processing times.
Create a Salesforce Campaign Event: The Salesforce Campaign event in Journey Builder adds contacts to a Marketing Cloud Engagement journey when they’re added to a Sales Cloud campaign. You can also use this event to send Salesforce object data into the data extension created upon entry.
Salesforce Experience Cloud: The Salesforce Experience Cloud entry source in Journey Builder starts activities in a journey when new members are added to your Experience Cloud site. Use the Salesforce Data Event for activities that aren’t related to adding new members.
The Salesforce Data Event: A Salesforce Data Event is an action in Sales Cloud or Service Cloud, such as creating or updating an object record, that injects a contact into a journey. If the primary object meets rule criteria and reference object filtering criteria, Flow Builder initiates a Journey Builder event.
Schedule a Data Extension Entry Source: To define how often Marketing Cloud Engagement Journey Builder admits contacts from a data extension entry source, set a schedule. You can schedule how often you want to check the data extension for updates, from hourly to yearly. You can also select how long you want the entry source schedule to run for some entry events. After you configure a data extension entry source, a schedule tile appears.
Schedule an Audience: To determine how often Journey Builder admits contacts from an audience, set a schedule. To prompt the schedule tile to appear, configure an entry source.
Select a Reusable Entry Source: Select a reusable entry source in Journey Builder when the event you want to use was already created in another Marketing Cloud Engagement journey or on the Entry Sources page.
Email Activity in Journey Builder: The Journey Builder email activity uses the power of Email Studio to send to Marketing Cloud Engagement contacts in a journey. Configure and review statistics without leaving Journey Builder.
Set Behavioral Trigger Session Timeout Limit: Configure the Behavioral Triggers app to observe a session timeout limit that you set. This timeout limit dictates how long a customer’s session lasts before it’s considered abandoned.
Share a Template: Users with Create/Edit permission in Journey Builder can share the template when they create or edit it.
Show and Hide Journey Builder Tips: You can show or hide Journey Builder's in-app user tips in Marketing Cloud Engagement. Tips are available for new and returning users and are on by default.
Mobile Activity Tracking: Find tracking information for each mobile message activity on your running journey’s canvas. Click a mobile message activity to access statistics. Select a timeframe for your analytics from the date field. Access more Journey Builder mobile message tracking in Mobile Studio.
Specify an Explicit Attribute Path: Where multiple paths to an attribute exist, some filters have an ambiguous path in the filter expression. For instance, the filter could use an attribute other than the one you intended to determine which path a contact takes. If your filter’s configuration resulted in an ambiguous path, use these instructions to make the path explicit.
Journey Builder Split and Join Activities: Journey Builder’s split activities allow you to customize a contact’s path through a journey. The join activity allows you to bring contacts from two or more paths into a single path.
Configure a Random Split: Journey Builder’s Random Split activity divides contacts in the journey into random groups. Contacts are grouped in up to 10 configurable paths that you create. As each contact reaches the activity, the contact is assigned a path at random based on the distribution that you select.
Status Key Reference: Understand the status messages shown on the Contacts page in Journey Builder.
Stop a Journey: Stop a customer journey in Journey Builder.
Tag a Journey: Apply tags to journeys in Journey Builder so they’re easy to filter.
Task: Use the Task activity to create a task in the Sales and Service Cloud for each Marketing Cloud Engagement contact that reaches this activity. See Marketing Cloud Connect for information about using the Sales and Service Cloud.
Task Activity: Use the Task activity to create a Sales or Service Cloud task with pre-populated field values. Connect Journey Builder and contacts, leads, and tasks. Create or update a Sales or Service Cloud task for a contact or lead that reaches this journey activity. The activity assigns tasks to the contact or lead owner, Salesforce System user, or a custom-defined user.
Test an Entry Event: Test your entry event in Journey Builder to ensure that it admits contacts as intended without contacts entering a live journey and receiving messages.
Transactional Send Dashboard View: View metrics for sent Transactional journeys in the Transactional tab of the Journeys Dashboard in Journey Builder.
Use Transactional Reconciliation in Journey Builder: Journey Builder can use Transactional Reconciliation to monitor the outcome of transactional emails sent within a journey. When enabled, Marketing Cloud Engagement monitors messages and assigns a final disposition (Sent or Not Sent) based on delivery signals during the expiration window.
Transactional Send Journeys: Transactional Send journeys enable you to create and manage transactional API messages in the same Journey Builder workspace used to manage Single Send and Multi-Step journeys. This journey type allows non-technical users to configure a Transactional API entry source without assistance from a developer. You can also monitor journey performance, such as error counts and queue depth, from the Journeys Dashboard.
Things to Know About Journey Builder Triggered Send: When you create a Journey Builder email, a triggered send is created automatically. Activating the journey creates the triggered send definition that the journey’s email activity uses.
Undo or Redo a Canvas Action: Before you save or activate a journey, you can undo or redo up to 50 consecutive actions, one at a time, in Journey Builder.
Update a Contact: Update or modify a Marketing Cloud Engagement contact record in Journey Builder using the update contact activity.
Update the Campaign Member Activity in Journey Builder: Use the Update Campaign activity to update a Campaign record in the Sales and Service Cloud. Also populate campaign member record fields using the campaign activity with Marketing Cloud Engagement contact attributes. You can’t use this legacy activity for new journey activities. Use the Object activity, Campaign activity, or Convert Lead activity when creating journeys.
Prioritization Example: Update Entry Event: In this decision split prioritization example, Journey Builder updates the entry events for a post-purchase confirmation and follow-up journey.
Update Existing Mobile App Event Schemas: Use care when updating events that are being used in running journeys. Changing the names or data types of app events can cause errors if newly defined event doesn't match the inbound data coming from the MobilePush SDK.
Update an Object Activity: Use the Object activity in Journey Builder to update Sales and Service Cloud object records that are created or updated by the journey or included in journey data.
Update Person Accounts: Journey Builder updates person accounts using the Account activity.
Upload Mobile App Events in Journey Builder: Before you can use events within Marketing Cloud Engagement, you must define the event schema for your applications. When you complete your .csv template, you can upload your file into Journey Builder.
Use the Journey Analytics Dashboard: To see robust data on Journey Builder emails, push messages, and SMS messages, access the Journey Analytics dashboard in your Google Analytics-enabled Marketing Cloud Engagement account. When the Analytics integration is enabled, any user in your account can access the dashboard in a journey.
Configure a Decision Split: The Decision Split activity in Journey Builder evaluates contact journey data, then sends each contact down a path based on the filter criteria you set. The paths in a decision split are evaluated in succession from top to bottom. Contacts who meet more than one set of criteria for a path follow the path they qualify for first. Contacts that don’t meet conditions to follow one of the paths you configure follow the Remainder path.
Use the Einstein Send Time Optimization Activity: Add the Einstein Send Time Optimization (STO) activity immediately before an email or push notification activity in a customer journey to maximize the chance that recipients engage with your message. When a contact reaches the activity, Einstein finds the best upcoming hour to send, starting at the beginning of the next hour.
Create a Journey from a Template: To create a journey using a journey template, select a template from the Marketing Cloud Engagement home page or in Journey Builder. Alternately, select a template from the template gallery, which includes both Salesforce and shared templates. Users with the Journey Builder Create/Edit permission in the business unit where the template was created can edit and delete shared templates.
Use Person Accounts with Sales and Service Cloud Activities: This legacy activity can appear in old journeys but is no longer available as an option for new journey activities. Use the Object activity, Campaign activity, or Convert Lead activity when creating journeys.
Use Restricted Values: To control the values available to select in the filter expression, an admin can use restricted values. Users who build the filter expression can choose from designated values only, not a default or blank value. In practice, restricted values are created in Contact Builder. Then when a user creates a journey, the dropdown menu used to set the attribute value displays a list of preselected values only.
Use the Ad Audience Activity: Use the Ad Audience activity to build an audience in Journey Builder. To use this activity, set up Facebook Twitter, Google Adwords, or LinkedIn as destinations in Marketing Cloud Engagement Advertising Audiences Administration. This activity is available only in accounts provisioned to use Advertising Audiences.
Configure an Engagement Split: The Journey Builder Engagement Split activity sends contacts down a Yes or No path based on whether they open the email or click a link or if the email bounces.
Configure a Join Activity: Use a Journey Builder Join activity to bring contacts from two or more paths into a single path.
Use Data in Journey Builder: The essential functions of Journey Builder depend on data. To maximize the reach of your journeys, explore how you can use data for filtering, personalization, and other Journey Builder tasks.
Validate a Journey in Journey Builder: When you create or edit a journey, use validation to fine-tune the journey. Validation confirms that the journey’s components are configured correctly and work as planned.
The Versions Dashboard: The Versions page in Journey Builder provides an overview of all journeys and their performance. Use this page to view all versions of a journey. You can also copy a version or create a version of the journey.
View Frequency Split Analytics: Einstein Engagement Frequency’s activity-level analytics in Journey Builder show how many contacts were evaluated after reaching the activity, and which paths those contacts took in the journey.
View Einstein STO Activity Analytics: Get deeper insight into which Marketing Cloud Engagement contacts have exited and which contacts are waiting to exit, including their send time personalization status. Einstein Send Time Optimization (STO) activity-level analytics show how many contacts have entered, are waiting in, or have exited the activity in close to real time.
View Email Activity Statistics: In Marketing Cloud Engagement, see the results of each email activity send on the Journey Builder canvas.
View Journey Health Data: Use the Journey Health panel in Journey Builder to view goal and journey population data for a running or stopped journey.
View a Contact Path on the Journey History Dashboard: Use this feature to locate a contact in a running or stopped journey and view the path they took within the last 30 days. From here, you can determine where a contact is in a journey and if they exited a journey early or finished a journey. You can also remove the contact from any point in the journey.
View a Contact Path in a Journey: Use this feature to locate a contact in a running or stopped journey and view the path they took within the last 30 days. From here, you can determine where a contact is in a journey and if they exited a journey early or finished a journey. You can also remove the contact from any point in the journey.
View Rejected Contacts: Follow these steps in Journey Builder to view a list of contacts that weren’t accepted into a journey.
View Your Contact and Journey Data: Access your contact data and see your Journey and Contact Data attributes in the Journey History dashboard. Journey Data is data from the data extension of your configured entry source, which is only visible after you configured your entry source. Contact Data consists of attributes linked to your contact model in Contact Builder.
Wait Activities in Journey Builder: To manage the timing of messages in Journey Builder, add wait activities. A wait activity holds customers between activities for a specified amount of time before they move to the next activity. During wait activities, Journey Builder evaluates customers to see if they met a goal, reached criteria for a decision split, or engaged with a message.
Configure a Wait Until API Event Activity: Follow these steps to configure a Wait Until API Event activity in Journey Builder. This feature uses the same API events configured for journey entry events.
Configure a Wait Until In-App Engagement Activity: Orchestrate a journey and react in real time based on whether the contact interacts with an in-app message within a certain period. If the engagement doesn’t occur within the predefined time, you can send the contact on an alternate path.
Configure a Wait Until Push Event Activity: Orchestrate a journey and react in real time based on whether the contact opens a push notification within a certain period. If the engagement doesn’t occur within the predefined time, you can send the contact on an alternate path.
Welcome Campaigns: Welcome email campaigns are a good way to greet new customers when they sign up or opt in for marketing communications. You can use Journey Builder to improve the customer experience by expanding from a single email to a series of messages.
WhatsApp Analytics and Reporting: For WhatsApp-First Business Messaging (Meta), analyze the aggregate deliverability and performance of your WhatsApp messages with Marketing Cloud Intelligence reports. View customer engagement at the subscriber level with Chat Messaging Data Extracts.
Configure a Blockout Window for WhatsApp Messages: Specify times when not to send messages. For example, if a customer has opted out of receiving messages at night or if a regulation restricts when messages can be sent, use a blockout window to prevent WhatsApp messages from being delivered during those hours.
Add a Call-to-Action Button in a WhatsApp Message: Add a button in your WhatsApp message that takes customers to a web page, such as an order status or product page. This makes navigation easier, helping increase engagement.
Create a WhatsApp Carousel Message: Simplify complex information and guide customers through product demonstrations using the interactive WhatsApp Carousel Template. For example, if a customer is interested in your apparel offers, send them a carousel featuring up to 10 selected items. Each item can include an image or video, offer details, and a Call to Action to streamline the buying process. This template supports up to 10 cards.
Create a WhatsApp Catalog Message: Engage customers by sending a WhatsApp message featuring your product catalog and cart functionality, enabling them to easily place orders.
Create Single Catalog and Multi-Catalog WhatsApp Messages: Showcase your products directly within WhatsApp conversations in a rich and interactive format. Highlight a single product or display multiple items so customers can browse your catalog without leaving the conversation.
Marketing Cloud Engagement WhatsApp Messaging: Use Marketing Cloud Engagement WhatsApp Chat Messaging and WhatsApp-First Business Messaging to expand your Omni-Channel engagement. Use Contact Builder to manage your audience. Use Content Builder for content generation, preview, and personalization. Use Journey Builder to send your customers messages as part of a customer journey. Sinch and Meta are official Salesforce Marketing Cloud Engagement partners.
Connect Data 360 to Marketing Cloud Enterprise ID: To enable data sharing between Data Cloud and Marketing Cloud, connect a channel to the Marketing Cloud Enterprise ID (EID) for the target account. Each channel can be associated with a different EID.
Using WhatsApp Data in Data 360: Ingest WhatsApp contact and tracking data from Marketing Cloud Engagement and create personalized interactions with customers in Data 360.
Create a Direct Send Quick Reply Message: Send WhatsApp messages to your customers without creating or managing templates by using Direct Send quick reply messages in Journey Builder. Direct Send automatically matches your message content to a template, so you can reach customers quickly without waiting for template approvals.
WhatsApp-First Business Account Statuses for Marketing Cloud Engagement: The status of your WhatsApp Business account or channel tells you what you can do with your account and helps you figure out your next steps. An account or channel is marked as active, pending, error, or disabled.
Use WhatsApp Flows in Journeys: Gather information from your customers during a conversation by using WhatsApp Flows. You can configure both session messages and template messages to include Flows.
Personalize Your WhatsApp Flows: Include dynamic content within WhatsApp Flows to provide a personalized experience for each user. You can personalize user details such as first name, last name, city, and so on in your messages.
Create a WhatsApp Limited Time Offer Message: Encourage quick action by sending limited-time offers using a WhatsApp Template message. For example, announce a flash sale with a coupon code that expires at a specific date and time, encouraging customers to purchase right away.
Create WhatsApp List Messages: Give your customers a list of options during a conversation by using WhatsApp list messages in Marketing Cloud Engagement journeys. For example, if a customer sends you a message asking to reorder a product that they've previously purchased, your response can include a list of their most recent purchases.
Locales for WhatsApp Data Extension Sends in Marketing Cloud Engagement: You can send a WhatsApp message only to a data extension with a mobile number that includes a valid locale. Include a locale with each mobile number as part of the Phone field in your source file when you import contacts to your data extension. Check this list to make sure that you’re using the correct two-character locale. You can enter either uppercase or lowercase letters. Imported locales are converted to uppercase.
Create WhatsApp Location Request Messages: To request your customers to share their location, use a WhatsApp Session message. For example, if a customer needs a home visit for a telecom service, send a message requesting them to share their location using WhatsApp’s inbuilt location sharing feature. You can add only text to location request messages.
Create a WhatsApp Location Send Message: Help customers find your business by sending your location in a WhatsApp message. For example, if a customer has an upcoming appointment, send a message with your location, address, and a pinned map pin.
Edit a WhatsApp Template Message: After you edit a template message, resubmit it for approval. It can take up to 24 hours to receive a response.
WhatsApp Media Attachments in Marketing Cloud Engagement: To send a media message with WhatsApp, attach a media file in the message header. The recipient can open and save the attachment independently of the WhatsApp message. For all message types, you can include an image, document, or video file. You can include an audio file only with a session message.
WhatsApp Message Types and Use Cases for Marketing Cloud Engagement: You can send two types of WhatsApp messages: template messages and session messages. Your messages can include interactive elements that help customers quickly respond to your messages, choose from lists of options, or provide you with detailed information.
Enable Marketing Messages Lite API: Achieve a higher return on investment and delivery rates by transitioning to the user-friendly Marketing Messages Lite (MMLite) API to execute large-scale campaigns.
Send Payment Options in a WhatsApp Message: Streamline the checkout process by sending payment options in a WhatsApp message. Send an order total with a payment link so customers can complete their purchase instantly.
Create an Order Status WhatsApp Message: Keep customers informed about their purchase by sharing order updates in a WhatsApp message. For example, notify a customer when their payment is captured or when their order ships.
Personalize Your WhatsApp Session Messages in Marketing Cloud Engagement: Use Content Builder to create session messages to respond to user-initiated conversations. When a user sends a message to your WhatsApp channel, you can respond without using a template. Session messages are free-form messages and don’t need approval.
Create WhatsApp Quick Reply Messages: Make it easy for your customers to get the assistance they need by including quick reply buttons in your WhatsApp messages in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
WhatsApp Session Transfer Activity: You can transfer a WhatsApp conversation from a Marketing Cloud Engagement interaction to a Service Cloud interaction. Place the WhatsApp Session Transfer activity after a Wait Until Chat Response or an Inbound Chat activity. The information passed as part of the transfer includes conversation history, journey data, the recipient’s WhatsApp number, and the cross-cloud WhatsApp phone number.
Create a WhatsApp Session Transfer Activity: Transfer a WhatsApp conversation initiated in a Marketing Cloud Engagement interaction to a Service Cloud interaction. The information passed as part of the transfer includes conversation history, journey data, the recipient’s WhatsApp number, and the cross-cloud WhatsApp phone number.
Set Up Your WhatsApp Account in Marketing Cloud Engagement: To send WhatsApp messages, you need a WhatsApp Business account. In Journey Builder, your WhatsApp display name and phone number are referred to as a channel. When you send a message from your business channel, customers see the display name and number.
Add Stickers to a WhatsApp Message: Strengthen your brand by adding static or animated stickers to your WhatsApp messages. For example, if a customer makes a purchase, send a branded sticker to acknowledge their order. Customers can also download and forward stickers, increasing brand awareness.
WhatsApp Template Message Approval: After you create a template, submit it for approval. Approval decisions can take up to 24 hours. When a decision is made, a notification appears in your WhatsApp Manager, and your Business Manager admins receive an email.
Transfer a WhatsApp Phone Number Between Business Units in Marketing Cloud Engagement (Meta): If you’re using WhatsApp-First Business Messaging, you can move a WhatsApp phone number from a Marketing Cloud Engagement business unit to another business unit. If you’re using Sinch, you can’t transfer a phone number to a WhatsApp-First business unit. Before you can transfer a phone number, you must delete the phone number from the business unit. After you complete transferring the phone number, all active journeys for the business unit originally using the phone number fail.
Journeys and Automations in Marketing Cloud Engagement: Design and automate Marketing Cloud Engagement campaigns that guide customers through their journey with a brand. Execute simple or multistep marketing and data management activities on an immediate, triggered, or scheduled basis.
Anchor Your Campaign Data in Marketing Intelligence: An Anchor Campaign groups related marketing campaigns into a single performance view. By consolidating cross-channel efforts like email, social, and search, you can track how an entire initiative performs as a whole rather than managing fragmented reports.
Third-Party API Connectors for Marketing Intelligence: Marketing Intelligence provides third-party API connectors that help you bring data from ad networks, analytics tools, and social media platforms into a unified view. By connecting these sources, you can analyze performance across channels and see how fields are mapped.
Attribution in Marketing Intelligence: Attribution in Marketing Intelligence is the practice of identifying which marketing activities, channels, and touchpoints contribute to a desired business outcome—such as a lead conversion, pipeline creation, or closed deal. By understanding attribution, marketing teams can make smarter investment decisions, optimize campaign performance, and demonstrate the business impact of their work.
Field Mapping in Marketing Intelligence: Automapping streamlines data integration by automatically mapping source file or Data Lake Object (DLO) fields to the Marketing Intelligence data model. TotalConnect automatically creates the data transforms necessary to align input with the Marketing Intelligence semantic data model.
Reallocate Daily Campaign Budgets (Beta): Use Budget Reallocation to shift daily budget between campaigns within Google Ads or Meta Ads, or across those channels, based on a metric that you select.
Budget Reallocation in Marketing Intelligence(Beta): Budget Reallocation analyzes campaign performance and recommends daily budget changes within or across channels. You review and approve every recommendation before Budget Reallocation applies the proposed change.
Connect Your Data to Marketing Intelligence with Data Pipelines: Data pipelines automate the collection, transformation, and organization of marketing data to prepare it for analysis in Marketing Intelligence in Marketing Cloud Next. By using a predefined API connector or TotalConnect, pipelines structure data with entities like data streams and transforms. This process ensures accuracy, consistency, and alignment with the Marketing Intelligence data model, delivering faster insights and more reliable campaign optimization.
Configure a Funnel-Based Attribution: Configure funnel-based attribution to distribute conversion credit across funnel stage transitions and track how prospects progress through the buyer journey.
Configure Agentforce with Marketing Intelligence: Paid Media Agent (Beta): Use Marketing Intelligence with Agentforce to improve ad performance by identifying underperforming ads based on industry benchmarks. Manage budget distribution effectively and optimize campaigns without manually tracking multiple reports and dashboards. The agent recommends which ads to pause and can automatically pause them in certain channels.
Create a Marketing Intelligence Goal (Beta): Create a goal to make informed decisions that drive success. Goals help you set clear KPIs, track, and measure key metrics, experiment with different marketing channels, and understand the customer journey.
Create Users and Assign Permissions: Create users and provide access to Marketing Intelligence features. Assign a single Permission Set Group containing all required permissions, instead of individual permission sets.
Custom Connectors for Marketing Intelligence: Marketing Intelligence includes a prebuilt connector library for popular ad platforms and analytics tools. Custom connectors extend this library to ingest data from sources with specific reporting requirements, custom configurations, or fields that aren't available in standard connectors. Configure a custom connector to define exactly what data to extract, including specific dimensions and metrics. Map fields manually to align data with the Marketing Intelligence semantic data model.
Customize the Campaign Summary in Marketing Intelligence: The campaign summary helps you quickly understand how your campaigns are performing. In the Home tab, you see an overall summary of all campaign objectives. In the Marketing Analytics dashboards, you see summaries grouped by objective and tailored to each dashboard. Select objectives, define the metrics that measure success, and take action directly from the summary.
Anchor Campaign Dashboard in Marketing Intelligence: The Anchor Campaign dashboard provides a unified view of how campaigns from different channels, such as social, email, and search, perform together under a shared business objective. Anchor Campaigns group related campaigns using rules that automatically include new campaigns, reducing the need to track campaigns individually.
Funnel-Based Attribution Dashboards in Marketing Intelligence: The Funnel-Based Attribution dashboards show how customers progress through defined stages in the customer journey, from first engagement to conversion. Unlike touch-based attribution, which measures the contribution of individual marketing interactions to conversions, funnel-based attribution measures how effectively users move from one stage to the next. Use these dashboards to identify where users drop off, understand how marketing drives progression through each stage, and evaluate how channels and campaigns contribute to advancement through the funnel.
Cross-Channel Segment Intelligence Dashboard in Marketing Intelligence: The Cross-Channel Segment Intelligence dashboard brings together data from paid channels, such as Meta and Google, and owned channels, such as Email and SMS, to provide a unified view of audience performance across segments.
Touch-Based Attribution Dashboards in Marketing Intelligence: Touch-based attribution shows how individual marketing interactions contribute to conversions across customer journeys. While funnel-based attribution tracks journey stages, touch-based attribution compares models and shows which channels and campaigns influence conversions across the customer journey and shape outcomes. Cross-Channel Path Exploration complements this view by showing the order of channels in each customer journey. Use the Path Exploration tab to identify common paths and drop-off points.
Enrich Your Data in Marketing Intelligence: Data enrichment enhances the quality and usability of your marketing data by adding business context, providing consistency, and improving categorization. You can generate more accurate insights and make better-informed decisions. With Marketing Intelligence in Marketing Cloud Next, you can use a preexisting Data 360 data model object (DMO), upload an enrichment file, or apply Einstein Data Enrichment to refine and structure your data.
Automate Data Retrieval in Marketing Intelligence: Configure automated data retrieval for TotalConnect data pipelines to regularly import data from Amazon S3 or email sources into Marketing Intelligence.
Create a Data Enrichment With Data 360 Objects: You can enhance your data in Marketing Intelligence using multiple methods. Use Data 360 Data Model Objects (DMO) to normalize your data for better consistency and insights.
Create a Data Enrichment with Einstein: Use Einstein to draft and refine enrichments to standardize and harmonize data for consistency and improved segmentation. Einstein Data Enrichment unifies variations, fills in missing details, and categorizes data. For example, it normalizes entries like facebook, FACEBOOK, and FaceBook into a consistent format, improving data accuracy and organization.
Create a Data Enrichment With a File: You can enhance your data in Marketing Intelligence using multiple methods. Use a data enrichment file to normalize your data for better consistency and insights.
Enable Marketing Intelligence Features: You can enable Marketing Intelligence features using the Feature Manager. This screen is visible only when there are one or more features to enable or disable.
Funnel-Based Attribution in Marketing Intelligence: Funnel-based attribution in Marketing Intelligence tracks how prospects progress through defined stages of a conversion funnel, such as Email Send → Click → Add to Cart → Order Placed. Funnel-Based Attribution evaluates engagement signals in a defined sequence, so the order in which prospects reach the stages matters.
Get Started With Marketing Intelligence in Marketing Cloud Next: Marketing Intelligence in Marketing Cloud Next helps you analyze marketing performance using the power of Data 360 and Tableau. To get started, make sure you have the required roles, and permissions. Admins can enable Data 360, deploy the semantic model, and install the app to unlock insights and optimize campaigns.
Measure Performance with Marketing Intelligence Goals (Beta): Goals are essential for developing and executing an effective marketing strategy. Marketing goals are specific, measurable objectives that align with broader business goals, guiding teams toward success. With Goals from Marketing Intelligence in Marketing Cloud Next, you can create, manage, track, and visualize goals that measure advertising campaign performance, return on investment (ROI), and marketing KPIs.
Harmonize Your Data: Make your marketing data consistent, structured, and easy to analyze. Use patterns and data enrichment to standardize naming, extract key attributes, and add business context to reduce errors, save time, and generate more accurate insights.
View Insights on the Marketing Intelligence Home Page: The Marketing Intelligence in Marketing Cloud Next home page provides an interactive overview of your marketing strategies, data health, and goals. It helps you navigate the marketing landscape and make informed decisions by providing a clear picture of your overall performance and trends.
Mapping Formulas in Marketing Intelligence: Mapping formulas transform source data during ingestion, before it’s stored in Marketing Intelligence. Use them to clean, standardize, and enrich incomplete, inconsistent, or incorrectly formatted data without editing the source files. Unlike calculated fields in the semantic layer, which apply logic at runtime, mapping formulas permanently change the stored values.
Map Data in Marketing Intelligence: Map source data to the Marketing Intelligence data model to prepare it for analysis and reporting. Review automatically suggested mappings, transform source values with mapping formulas, and resolve validation errors before deploying your data pipeline.
Dashboards in Marketing Intelligence: Dashboards in Marketing Intelligence help you analyze performance, evaluate marketing impact, and understand customer behavior across channels, campaigns, and segments. Each dashboard focuses on a specific type of analysis, enabling you to explore trends, compare results, and make data-driven decisions.
Marketing Intelligence in Marketing Cloud Next: Marketing Intelligence in Marketing Cloud Next empowers marketers to improve customer experiences across multiple channels and at scale. Marketing Intelligence simplifies data management by providing automated connectors, a unified data model, and data enrichment. Maximize conversions and improve campaign performance with AI-generated campaign summaries and cross-channel attribution.
Supported Multi-Touch Attribution Models: Multi-Touch Attribution (MTA) offers several default models that analyze channel contribution. Select a model based on your specific business strategy.
Multi-Touch Attribution in Marketing Intelligence: Multi-Touch Attribution (MTA) in Marketing Intelligence shows how each engagement contributes to conversions across your marketing efforts. MTA connects first-party and third-party interactions across email, SMS, social, search, and other channels to help you understand the true impact of your campaigns.
Enable Multicurrency Support for Marketing Intelligence: Configure the currency settings in Salesforce so that dashboards display data accurately in Marketing Intelligence. If a dashboard uses a currency without a defined conversion rate, the system can't aggregate data, which causes errors. For orgs working with multiple currencies, first enable Multiple Currencies within your Company Information settings.
Understand Named Credentials, Connections, and Pipelines: When you create a data pipeline in Marketing Intelligence, three components work together to ingest data: Named Credential, Connection, and a Pipeline. This architecture separates authentication, connectivity, and data processing so you can reuse credentials and configure pipelines efficiently.
Pause Underperforming Ads with the Paid Media Optimization Agent (Beta): The Paid Media Optimization Agent analyzes ad performance, recommends which ads to pause, and supports actions directly in Marketing Intelligence for supported channels. Use the agent to optimize campaigns and manage budgets without switching between reports or dashboards.
Patterns in Marketing Intelligence (Beta): Make data more structured and easier to analyze by creating naming conventions in fields like campaign names, ad names, and ad group names. By defining these patterns, you can extract key attributes, such as a product type, region, or business unit, from lengthy text strings. Using patterns improves data consistency, reduces errors, saves time, and ensures uniform classification across marketing campaigns.
Required Roles and Permissions for Marketing Intelligence: Before you set up Marketing Intelligence in Marketing Cloud Next, confirm that you have the necessary licenses, roles, and permissions to access the data and features. Marketing Intelligence uses permission set groups, which bundle the permissions for a specific role into one assignment. A Salesforce admin can assign a user one of three permission set groups based on their role: MI Admin, MI Data Specialist, or MI Marketing Manager.
Monitor Data Pipeline Health: Identify pipelines that need attention, investigate failed runs, and determine whether to reprocess or retransform data.
Create Data Pipelines With Third-Party Vendors: Connect to a marketing data source by setting up a data pipeline. After creating a data pipeline, DLOs, DMOs, and transforms are generated and automatically connect your data to the data model. You can monitor the pipeline’s performance and health through the Pipeline Record Page.
Setting Up a Custom Connector: Use Marketing Intelligence's prebuilt API connectors to connect to paid media and analytics platforms and automatically generate the data pipelines you need.
Set Up the Paid Media Optimization Agent (Beta): Use the The Paid Media Optimization Agent to review underperforming ads, see pause recommendations, and pause ads directly from Marketing Intelligence in supported channels. The agent helps you optimize campaigns and manage budgets without switching between reports or dashboards.
Set Up Marketing Intelligence: Set up Marketing Intelligence in Marketing Cloud Next to centralize your marketing data and generate AI-powered insights. Setup includes activating Data 360 and Tableau Next, deploying your semantic model, and installing the app.
Create a Data Pipeline With Custom Data in TotalConnect: Use TotalConnect to upload data from files or pull data directly from a Data Lake Object (DLO) into Marketing Intelligence, enabling flexible integration of custom datasets without an API connector.
Troubleshooting Mapping Errors in Marketing Intelligence: TotalConnect automatically validates your data mapping to meet system requirements during ingestion. These validations detect errors like missing templates, mismatched data types, or unmapped primary keys and provide guidance for resolution. Improving data accuracy enhances analysis and reporting quality.
Unified Marketing Intelligence Semantic Data Model: The Unified Marketing Intelligence Semantic Data Model (SDM) combines paid media, owned-channel engagement, and CRM data in one queryable semantic layer. Use the SDM to report across channels with consistent measurements, shared dimensions, and supported join paths.
MobilePush Install, Inactive Devices, Push Delivery Events: In MobilePush for Marketing Cloud Engagement, you can use the Event Notification Service (ENS) to receive notifications for your own system when install, inactive devices, and delivered events occur.
Inactivate a Message: You can inactivate a message after evaluating its send status in MobileConnect.
Add Contacts: Under Manage, you can add contacts to a standard list in MobileConnect.
MobileConnect Account Administration: Access the send blockout, From name, headers and footers, subscription information, keywords, short and long codes, and other account-level settings in the Marketing Cloud Engagement Setup app by searching for MobileConnect.
Align Sender ID with SMS Campaigns: To adhere to compliance guidelines, build customer trust, and improve deliverability, choose the right sender ID for your SMS campaigns based on message type.
Automatic Opt-outs: Some US wireless carriers produce a daily carrier deactivation file, which contains phone numbers that were deactivated from their network or ported from one carrier to another. Each day, Marketing Cloud Engagementautomatically opts these phone numbers out of active SMS and MMS subscriptions.
Bounced Messages and Held Numbers: MobileConnect logs a message send as a bounce when it receives a report from the aggregator that the message send failed.
Import and Manage Contacts: Use contacts in Marketing Cloud Engagement to view and interact with MobileConnect-related contact information.
MobileConnect Conversation Windows: Use conversation windows to respond to inbound messages that don’t have keywords assigned to them. Use the double opt-in template to opt users in to an SMS campaign. Conversation windows are enforced at the keyword level.
Copy and Reuse a Message: Once you copy a message in MobileConnect, you can make further edits and send the SMS or MMS message as necessary.
Create a Filtered List of Contacts: A filtered list contains contacts based on their demographic or interest data, such as ZIP code, income, products purchased, or birth date. In Marketing Cloud Engagement, use a filtered list to send SMS messages to a specific audience. You can also use a filtered list to create a suppression list to exclude a specific audience from SMS message sends.
Create a HELP Keyword: Create one or more HELP keywords for MobileConnect in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Create a MobileConnect SMS or MMS Message: Create and send engaging messages using templates in Marketing Cloud Engagement. MMS is only available in the United States.
Create Multiple-Question Surveys: String together multiple vote or survey messages in MobileConnect for Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Requesting an SMS Custom Domain for Shortened Links: Instead of using a generic Salesforce domain, enhance your brand recognition by using a custom domain for links shortened with the Marketing Cloud Engagement shortener. Each business unit can have one custom domain. After your custom domain is set up, all links that are in scheduled and in-progress sends use the custom domain.
Valid Locales for Data Extension Sends: For MobileConnect in Marketing Cloud Engagement, you can send only to data extensions whose mobile numbers include a locale. Review this list to ensure that your locales are valid. Include a locale with each mobile number as part of the Phone field in your source file when you import contacts to your data extension. Imported locales are converted to upper-case letters. Upper-case and lower-case letters are allowed for SMS sending.
Data Extension Sends: Improve audience segmentation and filtering for your MobileConnect messages. Use attributes and information stored in Marketing Cloud Engagement data extensions.
Use Default Keyword: The default keyword feature defines how MobileConnect handles unrecognized keywords. End users are prone to misspelling or responding to an SMS message as if there is a live person reading their responses. Default keyword is a great way to account for misspellings by end users or to get confused end users back on target.
Global STOP Keywords: MobileConnect automatically recognizes some keywords as STOP keywords: STOP, QUIT, CANCEL, END, UNSUBSCRIBE, REVOKE, and OPT OUT. If these words occur before the first space in a message, the user is immediately unsubscribed from all keywords associated with that code.
Disable Bounce Logic and Clear Held Numbers in MobileConnect: You can disable or enable bounce logic, clear numbers from your held list, and view how many numbers are on the held list. Disabling bounce logic prevents bounced numbers from being added to a held list. Clearing the held list allows you to resume sending to contacts whose numbers bounced twice in more than 30 days.
DLT Template Settings for SMS Messages in India: In MobileConnect, use Digital Ledger Technology (DLT) templates to ensure that you comply with the Telecoms Regulatory Authority of India (TRAI) regulations. DLT templates reduce spam messages and streamline the campaign process. You can use DLT template only for sending messages in India.
Edit a Message: You can edit a scheduled message. For an in-progress message, inactivate it to stop the sends. Then, make a copy of the inactive message and edit the copy. Changes apply to the message's future sends.
Edit Filters in MobileConnect: Under Manage, you can edit the filters you used to create a filtered list of contacts in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Create an Email Opt-In Message in MobileConnect: Use the Email Opt-in template in Marketing Cloud Engagement to invite people to subscribe to your email messages. In-store signs can prompt people to opt in. The Email Opt-in template defines the code and keyword combination, the message that responders receive back, and so on.
Enable Web-Based Opt-in: Customers can sign up for mobile messages via a web form when a form, a mobile opt-in message, and the MobileConnect API are used to create the QueueMO REST API call.
Export Contacts from a List in MobileConnect: Under Manage, you can export contacts from a filtered or standard list in Marketing Cloud Engagement. The list exports as a comma-separated values (.csv) file or a tab-separated values (.txt) file.
Export Contacts from a List: Under Manage, you can export contacts from a filtered or standard list in Marketing Cloud MobileConnect. The list exports as a comma-separated values (.csv) file or a tab-separated values (.txt) file.
GSM 3.38 Character Set: Use this page as a reference list for the GSM 3.38 character set.
HELP Keywords: HELP keywords allow people sending messages to or receiving messages from the account to request assistance in MobileConnect. For an example response to a HELP keyword, text HELP to 88769.
Manage Standard Lists in MobileConnect: Under Manage, you can add contacts to a standard list, delete a standard list, and export contacts from a standard list in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Keywords and Codes: Use codes and keywords to conduct SMS and MMS sends in MobileConnect.
Message Concatenation: Many markets allow you to concatenate messages, or to deliver multiple messages together as one long message. During message creation in MobileConnect, select Concatenate Message to concatenate your outbound message.
Message Content Considerations: Some content considerations to keep in mind are character sets and character limits in MobileConnect.
Create a Mobile Opt-In Message in MobileConnect: Use the Mobile Opt-in template to invite people to subscribe to your SMS or MMS messages. For example, in-store signs can prompt people to opt in. The Mobile Opt-in template defines the code and keyword combination, the message they receive, and other information.
MobileConnect: Create, send, receive, and track SMS and MMS text messages using MobileConnect. Send alerts and transactional messages to subscribers using templates and a drag-and-drop interface. Automatically respond to incoming messages, manage keywords, and many other tasks.
MobileConnect Guides for SMS Sending: Review the MobileConnect SMS sending guidelines and restrictions for your country. The information provided does not, and is not intended to, constitute legal advice. Instead, all information is for general informational purposes only. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on your MobileConnect use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Create an Outbound Media Message in MobileConnect: Create and send an MMS message to your subscribers in Marketing Cloud Engagement. The Outbound Media template is available only in the United States and Canada.
Import File Guidelines: Follow these guidelines to prepare your contact import file. The import file must be in a comma-delimited (.csv) format, 20 MB or less.
Send Information to Conference Attendees: Invite conference attendees to subscribe to your SMS and email messages sent during the conference by using the outbound message, email opt-in, and mobile opt-in templates in MobileConnect.
Refresh Contacts: Manually refresh the filtered list of contacts or set it to automatically refresh in MobileConnect. Refreshing adds or removes contacts that were recently imported into Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Refresh Mobile Filtered List: Create an automation in Automation Studio to refresh the mobile filtered list in MobileConnect.
MobileConnect Reports: You can use three MobileConnect reports available in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Review Undelivered Messages in MobileConnect: Use a SQL query activity in Automation Studio to retrieve information about undelivered SMS messages. This information shows only messages that failed to reach the mobile device.
Manage Messages: Review message activity in MobileConnect to determine which contacts received your message, where any errors occurred, and what changes to make to improve the effectiveness of your campaigns. Message activity includes a summary of successful sends, sends with errors, and other information.
Review Specific Message Activity: After you send, schedule, or activate a message in MobileConnect, you can get information about that message’s activity.
Send Automated Personalized Messages: Use Automation Studio and the MobileConnect outbound message template to automatically send personalized messages in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Send Blockouts: Set a period during which your MobileConnect account doesn’t send outgoing messages, such as when subscribers might be asleep. This feature prevents you from scheduling sends or beginning an immediate send during a specified send blockout period.
Send SMS Contacts: Create an automation in Automation Studio to send to SMS Contacts in MobileConnect.
Send Automated Transactional Alerts: Send automatic alerts about account activity using the MobileConnect outbound message template and a QueueMO REST API call.
MobileConnect Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Russia: Review the MobileConnect guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Russia. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on MobileConnect use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
MobileConnect Guide for Sending SMS Messages to the United Arab Emirates: Review the MobileConnect guidelines and restrictions for SMS sending in the United Arab Emirates (UAE). The information provided doesn’t, and isn’t intended to, constitute legal advice. Instead, all information is for general informational purposes only. Customers should consult their own independent legal counsel for guidance on their MobileConnect use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
MobileConnect Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Vietnam: Review the MobileConnect guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Vietnam. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on MobileConnect use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Stored Headers and Footers: Use headers and footers to ensure consistency across SMS messages sent from MobileConnect in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
From Names in MobileConnect: Set a personalized word instead of a code to send from Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Shorten URLs in SMS Message: In MobileConnect and Journey Builder, shorten single and multiple links to reduce the size of an SMS message. You can use either Bitly or the Marketing Cloud Engagement link shortener. Bitly tracks the total clicks for all subscribers. The Engagement shortener tracks the total clicks and unique clicks per subscriber.
SMS Marketing Best Practices: SMS is a great way to market your business. To drive success, plan early, comply with regulations, and focus on delivering a trustworthy, personalized experience that protects your brand’s reputation.
Understanding SMS Codes: To optimize deliverability and cost, use the correct sender ID for your campaigns based on your country's regulations. For international SMS service, use an international long code in transactional alerts and provide a separate opt-out option through a web form or call center.
Craft Effective SMS Content: To improve clarity and reduce cost, keep your messages under 160 characters. Make sure that content is relevant, valuable, and includes an easy way to opt out. Exclusive offers, personalized recommendations, or important updates can be effective. Avoid generic content by tailoring content to specific SMS types.
Ensure Compliance in SMS Campaigns: To stay compliant, adhere to regulations like Telephone Consumer Protection Act (TCPA) in the United States and General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) in Europe, and other regional laws. Here are a few best practices to deliver a positive customer experience.
Manage SMS Bounces: An SMS message is marked as a bounce when delivery fails. It’s caused by incorrect or inactive mobile numbers, roaming outside the service area, network issues, blocked sender IDs, or messages flagged as spam.
Optimize Campaign Strategy: To improve customer engagement through SMS campaigns, segment your audience based on purchase history, demographics, and location. Personalize your messages with dynamic content to tailor offers to individual preferences.
STOP Keywords in MobileConnect: Every Marketing Cloud Engagement account must have a STOP keyword so that people sending SMS messages to or receiving messages from the account can unsubscribe.
Connect Customers to Support from an Outbound Text Campaign: If a customer sends you a text message that doesn't contain any recognized keywords, you can use MobileConnect to connect the customer to a live support agent. In this scenario, the customer first receives an automated response. When a support agent becomes available, the agent responds to the customer's question via text message.
Create a Text Response Message in MobileConnect: Use the Text Response template to send an automatic response to incoming SMS messages with a specific keyword in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Set Up DLT Template Settings: To use a DLT template for SMS messaging, upload the template to MobileConnect in CSV format and provide the Principal Entity ID (PEID). The PEID is a unique identifier that the Distributed Ledger Technology (DLT) provides when the principal entity is registered.
Use Cases: Use cases are things you can do in MobileConnect to expand its functionality and the reach of your messages.
Use a Date-Based Send: You can send messages on significant dates for each of your contacts in Mobile
Use a DLT Template in an SMS Message: In MobileConnect and Journey Builder, use a DLT template in an Outbound message to simplify the campaign creation process.
Use MobileConnect with Automation Studio: You can create three different automations in Automation Studio for MobileConnect: Import Mobile Contacts, Refresh Mobile Filtered List, and Send SMS Contacts.
MobileConnect and Journey Builder: Before using MobileConnect with Journey Builder in Marketing Cloud Engagement, complete these prerequisites and review the information regarding personalization.
Use Next Keyword: Next Keyword sets up what the keyword for the next response should be. Contacts can text in without a keyword, and MobileConnect automatically appends the Next keyword to the contact’s response. You can use Next Keyword functionality to transition seamlessly from one message to the next, like a conversation. For example, enable the Next Keyword functionality on an outbound message to proceed to a text response message. When a subscriber receives the outbound message, that message includes a request for a response. The subscriber’s response triggers the text response message.
MobilePush Advanced Template Category: Advanced Template Category helps to send the carousel content in a push notification. By configuring this category in your app settings, you enable iOS devices to process and display these messages effectively. This field specifies the category name, allowing the SDK to correctly handle the push message. Without this configuration, carousel content can't be delivered to iOS devices.
Manage Messages in MobilePush: You can review a list of users who were sent messages, the number of messages that were sent, and the percentage of messages opened. See how opens are defined. View message activity and analytics, such as the average amount of time users spent in your app and the growth of opted-in devices for the last 30 days and run reports.
App Inbox Messaging: Send a message that downloads to your app's inbox on recipients' mobile devices until you set it to expire. First, create the CloudPage and ask your mobile app developer to turn on the app inbox via MobilePush SDK. Then, create an Inbox 1.0 or Inbox 2.0 message.
Optional Settings in MobilePush: In Marketing Cloud Engagement Setup, you can add custom sounds, specify a screen that the contact sees, use custom keys to add tracking to your app, and create interactive notifications.
MobilePush Beacon Scenarios: Learn more about what happens in different situations when you use beacons with MobilePush.
Beacon Best Practices: A list of recommendations to help you successfully implement beacons in Marketing Cloud MobilePush.
Beacon Terminology: Definitions of common beacon terms used in MobilePush in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Beacon Messaging: Beacons are physical devices that you position in the locations where you want your customers to receive messages. Beacons use a Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE) signal to broadcast a universally unique identifier (UUID) to a compatible app. Use beacons to send messages based on an individual’s location. When a device enters the range of the beacon, the device uses the broadcast UUID to trigger and display a message. Beacons provide a precise location around which to plan and execute your marketing activities. Because you know the exact location of the beacon, you can tailor your messages to better target your mobile app users.
Campaign Planning for Mobile App Events: Start planning by creating an outline for a few potential campaigns. To build a successful campaign, consider the campaign goal, journey audience, and corresponding messages. Review how you can use your app event within the scope of the campaign.
MobilePush and Journey Builder: To use MobilePush with Journey Builder, complete these prerequisites and review the personalization considerations.
Contacts and Devices: The contact key, also known as a subscriber key, is a unique identifier for a contact in MobilePush. Use this value to associate cross-channel addresses and subscriptions for a single contact. You can use the same key for a contact across multiple channels, such as email, SMS, and push messaging.
Contact Time Zones: In MobilePush, you can include a setting in your messages to override the time zone used in your account and honor the time zone specified by the contact instead. Find this setting under Advanced Options when you create a message.
Contact Time Zones and Send Throttling: If you select to throttle sends and to use the time zone of the contact, Marketing Cloud MobilePush prioritizes the Use time zone specified by Contact setting. First, the system determines how many devices it must send to in each time zone. The system then throttles each time zone group individually.
Audiences: Use the contact information made available by Contacts in MobilePush to segment and target audiences for your push notifications.
Copy and Reuse a Push Notification: In MobilePush, copy a push notification to use the same general content and settings from an existing push notification. After you copy a push notification, you can make edits and send the new message. Any tracking information related to the new message does not affect tracking information from the original message.
Create a Beacon Location: Create beacon locations in Marketing Cloud Engagement to specify the physical location of your beacons.
Create a Beacon Message: Complete these steps to create a message in MobilePush that users receive when they come near your beacon. Save your message at any point and return to it later. To use custom sounds, OpenDirect, or Custom Keys, enable them for your app before you create a message.
Create a Filtered List Using Tags: Select which tag values to filter a list by when you create a filtered list in MobilePush, just like you select attributes or data extension values. For example, select the tag hiking to send hiking-related messages to contacts. You can combine tags to send messages to combined groups of contacts. For example, send the same message to fishing and boating audiences who could be interested in the same content.
Create a Location Entry Message: Use the Location Entry Message template to send a push message to mobile devices that enter a specific geographic location. MobilePush limits outbound messages to 2048 bytes, including sounds and features.
Create a Location Exit Message: Use the Location Exit Message template to send a push message to mobile devices that leave a specific geographic location. Outbound messages that you send using MobilePush are limited to 2,048 bytes, including sounds and features.
Create a MobilePush Audience: In MobilePush, an audience is a group of contacts that you can send a notification or message to.
Create and Send an Inbox 1.0 Message: Use Inbox 1.0 messages in MobilePush to send a persistent message along with a CloudPage. This method creates a standard inbox message that includes a title and a CloudPage link.
Create and Send an Inbox 2.0 Message: Use the Inbox 2.0 messages in MobilePush to deliver a persistent message with or without a CloudPage. This method creates an inbox message that includes a title, subtitle, message, and optional calls to action (CTA).
Create an App in MobilePush: In Marketing Cloud Engagement, you can create an app with MobilePush that sends messages to your users.
Create a Filtered List: A filtered list is a list of contacts who are filtered based on their demographic or interest data, such as ZIP code, income, products purchased, or birth date. In MobilePush for Marketing Cloud Engagement, you can use a filtered list to send push messages to a specific audience based on their demographics, such as age, gender, or interests.
Create a Rich Notification: Create rich notifications in MobilePush for Marketing Cloud Engagement. Rich notifications include images, video, or sound. If the device cannot load the image, video, or sound, the notification displays without the media. iOS devices must use iOS 10 or later to receive rich notifications. Apple and Google control rich notification dimensions and scaling.
Push Notifications: In Marketing Cloud Engagement, you can create a message using one of the templates in MobilePush or the Push Notification template in Content Builder or Journey Builder.
MobilePush Custom Keys: To add push notification metadata, such as tracking, to your app, you can use custom keys in MobilePush for Marketing Cloud Engagement.
MobilePush Custom Sounds: In MobilePush for Marketing Cloud Engagement, you can enable the user’s mobile device to play a sound upon arrival of a push notification.
Data Extension Sends in MobilePush: Improve audience segmentation and filtering for your MobilePush messages with attributes and information stored in data extensions. When you send to a data extension, you can reach audiences in multiple channels and use existing data extensions for sends rather than creating lists from scratch. You can further personalize messages using data from your data extension that is not included in the Contact data.
Delete a Geofence Location: Delete a geofence location in MobilePush. You can only delete a geofence location that is associated with an inactive message or with no messages. If the geofence location is associated with an active or scheduled message, make the message inactive before deleting the geofence location. If the geofence location is associated with a draft message, associate the message with a different location or remove the association before deleting the geofence location.
Delete a Push Notification: In Marketing Cloud Engagement, you can delete MobilePush messages that you no longer need. Make sure that you no longer need the message for any reason because deleting a message permanently removes it from your account.
Delete a List: Delete a filtered or standard list in MobilePush. If you delete a standard list, the contacts and their information remain in Contacts.
Delete a List: Delete a filtered or standard list in MobilePush. If you delete a standard list, the contacts and their information remain in Contacts.
Provide a Dynamic Image in a Rich Push Message: Rich push notifications include an image. For example, you can send your contact an abandoned cart push notification that contains an image of the item left in their cart to entice them to complete the purchase. You can personalize the image that your contact receives by using a recurring send, a data extension that tracks the abandoned cart items, and AMPscript to populate the push notification’s image URL.
Edit a Beacon Location: Follow these steps in MobilePush to edit details about a beacon’s location, such as the beacon’s name and description and the GUID, major, and minor values listed on the hardware.
Edit a Push Notification: Edit a push notification in MobilePush. You can edit a draft or scheduled message. Any change you make applies to future sends of the message.
Edit a MobilePush Send Blockout: Edit a send blockout in MobilePush to enable or disable it, or to change the times of the blockout.
Edit Filters: You can edit the filters you used to create a filtered list of contacts in MobilePush.
Export Contacts from a List: Export Marketing Cloud Engagement contacts from a filtered list or a standard list in MobilePush. The list exports as a comma-separated values (CSV) file or a tab-separated values (TXT) file.
Export Contacts from a List: You can export Marketing Cloud Engagement contacts from a filtered list or a standard list in MobilePush. The list exports as a comma-separated values (CSV) file or a tab-separated values (TXT) file.
Implementation FAQs: Frequently asked implementation questions about MobilePush.
MobilePush FAQs: Review these frequently asked questions about MobilePush in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Troubleshooting FAQs: Frequently asked troubleshooting questions about MobilePush in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
MobilePush FAQs: Frequently asked questions about MobilePush. Question types include Implementation, Product, and Troubleshooting.
Geofence Messaging: Contacts can receive a message when their mobile device enters or exits the geofence. A geofence location is a circular boundary that surrounds a geographical point. Contacts can receive a message when their mobile device enters or exits the geofence. In MobilePush, specify the geofence location by address or by dragging a pin onto the map. Also specify the size of the geofence, which is the radius of the circular boundary.
Get Started in MobilePush in Marketing Cloud Engagement: MobilePush is included in Corporate and Enterprise editions. These prerequisites are required before push notifications can be sent to devices from Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Get Started with Rich Notifications: In MobilePush, you can send a push notification that contains rich media, such as an image or video, to your subscribers. When subscribers interact with the media in the push notification, the image or video expands. After interacting with the expanded version, they go to your app.
Headers and Footers: Use headers and footers in MobilePush to ensure consistency across messages sent from your account.
Implement Tags in MobilePush: To help better segment your contacts into more precise audiences, use tags in MobilePush.
Inactivate a Push Notification: When you create and schedule a message, the message status is set to active. An active message sends as scheduled. To keep a push notification from functioning in MobilePush, change the message status to inactive.
In-App Messaging FAQs: Frequently asked questions about MobilePush in-app messaging.
In-App Messages: In-app messages allow you to interact with your mobile app users while they use your mobile app, which is when they’re most engaged. Trigger a message to show in your mobile app when a user opens the app on their device. While you can send this message to all of a contact’s devices, it only shows on the first device that opens the app. In-app messages can’t be created in MobilePush.
In-App Message Priority Best Practices: When you send an in-app message in Content Builder, you can add a priority. The message priority determines which message appears first when you send multiple in-app messages. The highest priority is 1.
MobilePush Interactive Notifications: Interactive notifications allow you to display button controls with custom actions in your messages in MobilePush. For example, use interactive notifications to add an item to a checkout cart or add a comment to a message.
Manage Filtered Lists: In MobilePush, manage is the first step to editing filters, duplicating a filtered list, etc.
Manage Push Notifications: After you create a push notification in MobilePush, you can edit, inactivate, copy and reuse, or delete the notification. Edit the message before it sends. Inactivate the message to keep it from functioning. While you can’t reactivate the message, you can copy it and reuse the message. Delete the message when it’s no longer needed.
Manage Standard Lists: In MobilePush, add contacts, delete lists, and export contacts.
MobilePush App Administration: Salesforce admins can manage MobilePush in Setup. Here, access the send blockout period, stored headers and footers, subscription information, custom sound optional settings, OpenDirect, custom keys, interactive notifications, and other account-level settings.
Message and Job Statuses: Learn about the message and job statuses that are shown on the Sends page in MobilePush.
MobilePush: In Marketing Cloud Engagement, MobilePush lets you create and send notifications that encourage use of your app.
MobilePush and Automation Studio: To use MobilePush with Automation Studio, confirm that both applications are enabled for your account. To confirm, log in to Marketing Cloud Engagement and look for MobilePush under Mobile Studio and Automation Studio under Journey Builder. If you don’t see these applications, contact your account executive.
MobilePush Message Detail Extract Errors: On the MobilePush Message Detail Extract, the Status column lists whether the send was successful, and the ServiceResponse column lists any errors with the send. This topic includes information that can help you understand and troubleshoot failures.
Use Cases for MobilePush: These use cases describe MobilePush functionality and the reach of your messages. For example, use lists and tags to segment your audience and send to contacts with the same attribute values.
MobilePush OpenDirect: In Marketing Cloud Engagement, you can create a push notification in MobilePush, Content Builder, or Journey Builder. Specify a URL to open a customized web page, or work with your app developer to launch a page of your mobile app when a contact taps a message. For example, take contacts directly to a product page after they interact with a related alert.
How Opens Are Counted: In MobilePush, Android and iOS open rates are counted differently based on the limitations of the two operating systems.
Opt-ins: After contacts download your app and enable notifications, they’re opted in to receive your push notifications and messages that you create in MobilePush.
Opt-outs: If a contact deletes your app or disables notifications for your app on their device, they are opted out of receiving messages that you create in MobilePush.
Create and Send a Push Notification: Use the Outbound Message template in MobilePush to send a push message to mobile devices based on demographic attributes.
Provisional Push Notifications in iOS: Turn on provisional push notifications to message iOS users who haven't granted full notification permissions. Target this audience from a Push Notification activity in Journey Builder.
Add Provisioning Info to Your App: To connect your mobile app to the correct Marketing Cloud Engagement account, add the provisioning information to the MobilePush app.
Quiet Notifications in MobilePush: Quiet notifications for iOS 12 and later versions are enabled but not shown to the user as an alert. Instead, notifications go to the notification center without an alert, badge, or sound, and the user must swipe to see their notifications for an app. Users do not opt out, but notifications are delivered to the notification center to be viewed later. Users can determine their level of engagement for a specific app.
Refresh Contacts: Manually or automatically refresh a filtered list of contacts in MobilePush. Refresh adds or removes any new contacts that were recently imported into your account.
Replace Inbox and Deleted Contacts: When you send an Inbox message, you can use the Replace Inbox feature to overwrite an existing Inbox message on the user’s device. Here’s an example of what happens when a user is deleted or removed from the source audience in between message sends.
Reports: There are three MobilePush reports available through Reports in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Specific Message Activity: After you send, schedule, or activate a message in MobilePush, you can review information about that message's activity.
Run the MobilePush Detail Extract Report: Use the MobilePush Detail Extract report to extract large amounts of data. The extract report counts only unique opens. The data extract places a ZIP file with the analytics information on an FTP site that you choose.
Send Blockouts: A send blockout is a period during which your MobilePush account does not send immediate outgoing messages. This feature prevents you from beginning an immediate send or scheduling a message from the UI to be sent during a specified send blockout period. Use this feature to prevent contacts from receiving messages at inopportune times, such as when they are asleep.
Send Message Using Tags Via API: After you implement tags in MobilePush, authenticate your app and use the messageTag REST API call to send messages based on tag values.
Send Throttling: Throttling limits the maximum number of outbound messages MobilePush queues to send in a specified time period. Throttling limits a specified time period. Consider throttling if you are concerned that your internal resources won’t be able to handle the traffic caused by all the users engaging with your app.
Send to a List: Send a push message to a list of contacts in MobilePush.
Sends: View the status and send progress of your scheduled outbound messages and scheduled automations in MobilePush.
Set a MobilePush Send Blockout: Set a send blockout in MobilePush. Any existing send blockouts display in the Send Blockout section of the MobilePush Setup.
Send a Test Message to Validate Accuracy: Send a test push notification, in-app message, or inbox message to a user or device to test its content and personalization attributes before you send it to customers.
Troubleshoot Mobile App Events: Work with your app developer to troubleshoot message issues. Most issues are related to either message display or delivery.
Upgrade Contacts in MobilePush: Upgrading Contacts in MobilePush provides access to functionality that makes it easier to manage contacts across channels.
Use Multiple Providers for Push Notifications: Implementing a push notification provider’s SDK in addition to the MobilePush SDK is not recommended. While multiple push SDKs can be integrated into a single app, this practice can cause issues. Results are not guaranteed.
Use the MobilePush SDK to Send a Location Message to Selected MobilePush Users: MobilePush can trigger location messages when users enter or exit a geofence or come within range of a beacon. Choosing an existing audience list or data extension can't be done in Marketing Cloud Engagement, so you must use the SDK to segment location message recipients.
Set the Subscriber Key or Contact Key: Contact key, also known as subscriber key, is the unique identifier used to aggregate a contact’s devices in Marketing Cloud Engagement. Set the contact key to a specific value provided by your customer or to another unique identifier for the contact. You can use a mobile number, customer number, Salesforce ContactID, or another value.
Use MobilePush with Automation Studio: You can create four different automations in Automation Studio for MobilePush. Use Automation Studio to schedule recurring messages, such as a monthly reminder.
Send Push Notifications with Journey Builder: You can send push notifications and inbox messages in Journey Builder to create a sequence of messages, such as a welcome experience or an abandoned cart reminder.
Account Login Access: Enable Account Login Access to give Salesforce Support permission to log in to your account to configure features or troubleshoot problems.
Add a Campaign to Calendar: Use the calendar to create a visual representation of your campaign schedule.
Add a User: Add users to your Marketing Cloud Engagement account.
Add an Event to the Calendar: Create events on your calendar to mark milestones and other important dates. You can create single-day and multi-day events.
Create SFTP User Accounts: Create user accounts for SFTP users in Marketing Cloud Engagement. You can have up to 10 active SFTP user accounts per member ID (MID).
Marketing Cloud Engagement Setup: Marketing Cloud Engagement Setup is a centralized location for viewing and managing your account. It also contains links to other helpful sources of information.
Configure Marketing Cloud Engagement as a Service Provider: After you configure your identity provider and create a key, configure Marketing Cloud Engagement to use the identity provider. Enable this feature in the parent account for all Enterprise and Enterprise 2.0 accounts.
Test Your SAML Configuration: Test your SAML enablement on a single user before enabling others on your account.
Alert Manager: Use Alert Manager to specify the email addresses that receive critical system alerts for email batch sends and email triggered sends.
Add a Domain to the Export Email Allowlist: Add an entire domain to the Export Email allowlist if you trust all of the email addresses in that domain to receive data exported from your account. In some cases, Marketing Cloud Engagement prevents you from adding certain domains to the list. However, you can add any individual email address to the allowlist, regardless of its domain.
Using the Login IP Allowlist with Broad or Dynamic IP Ranges: For the login IP allowlist to be effective, traffic that accesses your Marketing Cloud Engagement account must come from a stable IP range. If your organization uses the public cloud, dynamic infrastructure, or distributed networks, or if you have many remote employees, your users can access Marketing Cloud Engagement from a diverse range of IP addresses. In these situations, establish a stable egress path for your users before you turn on the login IP allowlist in blocking mode.
Add Recommended IP Ranges to the Login Allowlist: Review recommended IP address ranges and quickly add them to your login IP allowlist. Marketing Cloud Engagement tracks the IP addresses of users who log in to your org, and then suggests trusted IP ranges for your allowlist. Instead of entering IP ranges by hand, you review the suggested ranges and add the ones you trust to your allowlist.
Assign a Role to All Business Unit Users: In Marketing Cloud Engagement, you can assign a role to all users in a business unit. Additional roles can be assigned directly to the user. When roles conflict, deny settings override allow roles.
Assigning Marketing Roles: When you assign roles in Marketing Cloud Engagement, consider the jobs and tasks that each team member performs. Defining these tasks helps you determine the correct product roles and associated permissions to be assigned to each team member. Give each team member only the roles and permissions that are necessary to perform their job. This example reviews the roles and permissions assigned to a sample team from Northern Trail Outfitters.
Associate Your Brand: Use BrandBuilder to associate your brand to content in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Audit Trail: View Marketing Cloud Engagement access and activity records with Audit Trail. Pull Audit Trail records in Automation Studio data extracts or by using REST API. Analyze the information from Audit Trail in your preferred tools or archive it for later reference.
Advanced Audit Trail Metrics: Advanced Audit Trail is available as an add-on. It includes all the metrics that Basic Audit Trail provides, and extra metrics related to channels, sites, analytics, and automations. Advanced Audit Trail retains data for 60 days.
Basic Audit Trail Metrics: Basic Audit Trail provides fundamental security-related metrics. With Basic Audit Trail, Marketing Cloud Engagement retains 30 days of data. Basic Audit Trail is on by default in all accounts.
BrandBuilder for Marketing Cloud Engagement: BrandBuilder helps you customize the color scheme for your Engagement app based on colors in a logo file you upload. Choose how to privately label your account, and BrandBuilder applies the color scheme so that your users have a branded experience. Set the brand at your top-level account, then associate that brand with your other business units.
Bring Your Own Key for Encryption at Rest: Provide your own encryption key to help in encrypting data in Marketing Cloud Engagement. This feature uses an RSA2048 encryption key that you generate in your own environment. Use the key as part of encrypting data at rest using Data at Rest Encryption for a Dedicated Database Environment. This feature applies to the top-level account in your tenant and can’t be activated for individual business units. Perform all operations for this feature in the top-level account of your tenant.
Build OpenSSL Version for Encryption Keys: Marketing Cloud Engagement uses the OpenSSL software library to generate and wrap encryption keys. A patch is required to enable AES key wrapping on OpenSSL 1.1.1.
Change a User's Password: An admin can update the password for a user account in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Change Single Sign-On Information: When you renew your security certificate or change your identity provider, update the single sign-on (SSO) settings in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
CloudPages Roles: Learn about CloudPages roles in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Create Your Own Encryption Key: You can create an encryption key in Marketing Cloud Engagement, using multiple keys for the creation and wrapping process. You provide the wrapped version of the Intermediate Key and Private Key. Use Base64 encoding for the wrapped keys before you import them.
Create a Custom Role: In Marketing Cloud Engagement, you can create a custom role to better align a user with permissions associated with your business needs. After you create the custom role, assign it to the appropriate user. Use this custom role in top-level tenant accounts and in business units.
Set Up an Enhanced FTP or Safehouse File Location: Transfer files to and from Marketing Cloud Engagement using a file location with Enhanced FTP. Available locations are the import directory, export directory, a subfolder, or the Safehouse. Files stored in Enhanced FTP and the Safehouse are available for 21 days and then deleted.
Secure a Domain Using a Custom SSL Certificate: You can obtain an SSL certificate for Marketing Cloud Engagement from a certificate authority (CA). The CA that you use must let you use your own certificate signing request (CSR) rather than generate one for you. Image domains don’t support customer-supplied certificates, because the service is delivered from a shared infrastructure that uses common certificates. Salesforce uses DigiCert and Amazon as the certificate authorities.
Data at Rest Encryption in Marketing Cloud Engagement: Use Data at Rest Encryption to help meet compliance and regulatory requirements without modifying application code. Contact your account executive for more information about enabling Data at Rest Encryption.
Data Retention Guidelines: In Marketing Cloud Engagement, data retention refers to a process that periodically removes information from data extensions. It helps keep data extensions smaller and more efficient by retaining only the most useful or relevant data that marketers want to use.
Types of Data Usage in Marketing Cloud Engagement: The types of data that you use and receive bills for depends on the Marketing Cloud Engagement features you use. Data usage can appear to differ depending on the report, data view, or extract you're looking at. For example, standard reports don't always include data usage that can increase your bill, such as test sends.
Define IP Allowlist Source for Enterprise 2.0 Accounts: Choose how the IP allowlist applies to business units in Enterprise 2.0 accounts. You can choose to let each business unit specify the IP ranges for the allowlist separately, or you can configure all business units to inherit the settings from the parent account.
Delete an Encryption Key: After you deactivate a key and delete it, Marketing Cloud Engagement removes the key from service immediately. The standard data retention protocol retains the deleted key value for up to 90 days.
Deploy an Industry Solution: Deploy an industry solution to a Marketing Cloud Engagement business unit or enterprise.
Deploy Packaged Items: Marketing Cloud Engagement business units and enterprise accounts support package installations from AppExchange and ZIP.
Determine Your Marketing Cloud Engagement Instance: To check the status of your Marketing Cloud Engagement account, use the member ID (MID) for your instance. It's also helpful to know your MID when you configure a Web Collect URL, or when you want to obtain the URL endpoints for the Marketing Cloud Engagement APIs.
Edit an IP Range: Change an IP address or range for the IP allowlist.
Update Packaged Items: To keep your Marketing Cloud Engagement packages working as expected, update them regularly.
Permissions for Email Studio Roles: Email Studio uses classic roles and permissions to assign Email Studio functionality manually. For Default Permissions, All refers to all permissions enabled for the specified feature. Although you can edit these permissions, we can’t restore there default permissions after changes are made.
Enable Contacts to Business Unit Mapping: Enterprise 2.0 users of Marketing Cloud Engagement can map contacts to specific business units. When you enable it, it's available for all of your business units.
Enable the Export Email Allowlist: Limit the sites that can receive your email data by enabling the email export allowlist in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Enable SAML 2.0 Single Sign-On Authentication: To enable single sign-on (SSO), you must have an identity provider, a Security Assertion Markup Language (SAML) key, and a completed Marketing Cloud Engagement service provider configuration.
Enable User Login Access: Allow a Salesforce Customer Support agent to access your Marketing Cloud Engagement user account so that they can diagnose and troubleshoot issues.
Encryption Configuration Options: Ensure that the data you bring into Marketing Cloud Engagement is encrypted by using a supported method of data ingestion.
Rotate a Key Encryption Key: Protect your customers by rotating the key encryption key (KEK) that’s used in the process of encrypting the data in your Marketing Cloud Engagement account. A KEK is an AES 256 cryptographic key that encrypts and decrypts other keys to provide those keys with an additional layer of protection. Work with your security and compliance teams to determine the appropriate rotation interval for your KEK. We recommend that you rotate the KEK at least one time per year. Repeat these steps at each rotation interval.
Event Notification Service: Use the Event Notification Service (ENS) to receive notifications for your own system when certain events occur in Marketing Cloud Engagement. You can be notified when customers request password resets, get order confirmations, log in using multi-factor authentication (MFA), and other events. You can also subscribe to email engagement events, such as opens, clicks, and unsubscribes. And you can subscribe to automation alerts, such as when an automation starts, finishes, or errors.
Get Started with Event Notification Service: Configure your system to work with the Event Notification Service (ENS) in Marketing Cloud Engagement. The configuration process registers the callbacks and creates the subscriptions used to interact with your external system.
Expired Marketing Cloud Engagement Subscriptions: When your Marketing Cloud Engagement subscription expires, you have limited access to your account for 90 days. If you don’t renew your account within 90 days, all access is revoked.
Export Email Allowlist: The export email allowlist contains email addresses and domains that are allowed to receive data exports from your Marketing Cloud Engagement account.
What Happens to Data from Audience Builder?: Marketing Cloud Engagement doesn’t decrypt data from Audience Builder. You can add data to encrypted fields, but you can’t query them.
Can I Change or Rotate My Keys?: You can't rotate your Data Encryption Key (DEK). However, you can rotate the Key Encryption Key (KEK) that Marketing Cloud Engagement uses to encrypt your DEK.
How is Field-Level Encryption Different from Data at Rest Encryption?: Data at Rest Encryption encrypts the underlying files stored in the file system. It’s transparent to Marketing Cloud Engagement and doesn’t impact other features. Field-Level Encryption (FLE) protects sensitive data at the level of the Marketing Cloud Engagement application. Users and admins can’t view FLE data as plain text in the Marketing Cloud Engagement web interface.
How Do Query Activities Work with Field-Level Encryption?: You can use plain text values to filter, copy, or overwrite data in other data extensions with matching field types. Marketing Cloud Engagement can perform AMPscript functions on unencrypted data in a data extension, but can’t encrypt or decrypt manipulated data.
Can I Use Field-Level Encryption with Data at Rest Encryption?: You can use Data at Rest Encryption at the same time as Field-Level Encryption. Data at Rest Encryption encrypts the underlying files stored in the file system. Field-Level Encryption is applied at the application level for certain configurable fields.
Can I Use Mobile Studio with Field-Level Encryption?: You can use Mobile Studio with Field-Level Encryption. Mobile Studio doesn’t permit encryption for mobile numbers used as subscriber keys and doesn’t decrypt mobile numbers at send time.
How Do I View the Data in an Encrypted Field?: Marketing Cloud Engagement automatically decrypts data stored in encrypted fields. Use personalization strings in sent emails, web pages, preview sends and landing pages to view the unencrypted data.
Feature Settings: Review and configure settings for Marketing Cloud Engagement features.
Field-Level Encryption in Marketing Cloud Engagement: To facilitate compliance with corporate privacy policies, regulatory requirements, and contractual obligations for handling private data, enable encryption at rest for the field-level data in your data extensions. When you enable this feature, you can still use encrypted data in your messages. Marketing Cloud Engagement decrypts encrypted fields at send time.
Frequently Asked Questions: Find answers to common questions about Field Level-Encryption in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Field-Level Encryption Limits: Learn about the limits apply to field-level encryption in the security and encryption components of Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Authorizing File Locations: A file transfer location is an external public cloud file storage location or FTP site used to transfer files to or from Marketing Cloud Engagement. For example, to import encrypted files from an Amazon Simple Storage Service (S3) bucket, you set up an Amazon S3 file location. The location settings give authorization details to access the files in your bucket.
Filter Events and Messages: Use filters to view only the automated or scheduled messages to review in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
SFTP Accounts in Marketing Cloud Engagement: SSH File Transfer Protocol (SFTP) is a method of securely transferring data from one computer to another over the internet. Use the Marketing Cloud Engagement SFTP server to import lists, export analytics data, and extract customer data. You can also use the SFTP server with Data Extract and File Transfer activities in Automation Studio.
Get Token API Specification: Use this information to provide token representation of plain text values. Marketing Cloud Engagement uses this API method to retrieve the token representation of a plain text value.
Browser Support: Learn about the web browsers that Marketing Cloud Engagement supports.
Headers and Footers: Marketing Cloud Engagement can add text and images to the beginning and end of your email messages that ensures compliance with CAN-SPAM regulations.
HTTP Response Codes: The statusCode property handles and sets all HTTP response codes.
Comparison of Salesforce-Hosted and Hyperforce Environments: Marketing Cloud Engagement is hosted in two environments. The first environment uses servers that Salesforce hosts, operates, and maintains. The second environment, called Hyperforce, is built on public cloud services. Hyperforce offers several benefits over Salesforce-hosted instances, and there are differences between the features available in Salesforce-hosted environments and the features available on Hyperforce.
Single Sign-On Identity Provider Support: Marketing Cloud Engagement supports identity providers that use the Security Assertion Markup Language (SAML) 2.0 specification, such as Salesforce Identity, Shibboleth, PingFederate, and Active Directory Federation Services (AD FS). The identity provider must trust Engagement as a service provider, sometimes called a relying party.
Create Encryption Keys for Field-Level Encryption: Field-level encryption adds an extra layer of protection to the customer data in your data extensions. Using field-level encryption requires purchasing Marketing Cloud Engagement Professional Services to configure the necessary changes to your account. To use field-level encryption in your data extensions, complete these prerequisites.
Implement Header and Footer Rules: To use standard header and footer content with the content you create in Marketing Cloud Engagement, enable header and footer rules.
Implement Tokenized Sending: Before you enable Tokenized Sending in Marketing Cloud Engagement, review requirements and test the functionality. Note that some features don't work when Tokenized Sending is enabled but not yet implemented.
Import an Encryption Key: To provision data for encryption at rest, you get a key that's generated by Marketing Cloud Engagement. After you import your own key, perform a key rotation operation to use your newly imported key.
Key Management: Security keys and other settings are used to encrypt and decrypt data, digitally sign email messages, and implement SAML single sign-on (SSO). The encryption applies only to information stored in Marketing Cloud Engagement and not in other Salesforce apps.
Limits and Guidelines: There are limits that apply to your usage of Marketing Cloud Engagement. Salesforce implements some of these limits, and some are due to external factors.
API Limits and Guidelines: Use the Marketing Cloud Engagement APIs to integrate your apps and other systems with Marketing Cloud Engagement. To protect our Service and ensure the availability of Marketing Cloud Engagement for all customers, Salesforce places limits on API usage.
Data Extension Limits and Guidelines: The size, structure, and number of data extensions and contact attributes data can impact their performance. To optimize the performance of your data extensions and contact attributes, stay within recommended ranges.
Email Limits and Guidelines: There are several ways to use Marketing Cloud Engagement to send email, including Email Studio, Journey Builder, SOAP API, and REST API. When you send email, there are limits that apply to throughput, file size, and data retention policies.
Database Query Limits and Guidelines: Query limits protect the health and performance of the Marketing Cloud Engagement database. There are two types of limits: hard and soft. If you issue a query that exceeds a hard limit, the request is rejected. You can exceed a soft limit, but doing so can degrade performance. Salesforce reserves the right to limit the execution of queries that exceed soft limits if they cause system performance or security issues.
SMS Limits and Guidelines: Get to know the limits that apply to sending SMS messages in MobileStudio.
Associate Users with Business Units: In Enterprise 2.0 accounts, an admin can add users to Marketing Cloud Engagement business units. Users who have access to multiple business units can switch between business units manually after they log in.
Manage Marketing Items Across Business Units: Use packaged solutions to deploy best practices and company or industry-specific solutions across your Marketing Cloud Engagement business units. You can create packages containing fully configured journeys, automations, content assets, data extensions, attribute groups, and more. Then keep those items current and version-controlled by updating your packaged solutions across all instances.
Marketing Cloud Engagement: Build relationships with engagement marketing tools, powered by AI. Marketing Cloud Engagement gives you apps that help you design messaging and web content, organize and track customer engagement, and automate complex marketing campaigns.
Package Manager in Marketing Cloud Engagement: Scale your best practices and reduce time to value by bundling company or industry-specific solutions and deploying them across business units with Package Manager.
Calendar in Marketing Cloud Engagement: The Calendar provides a weekly or monthly view of all scheduled and past interactions. You can filter Calendar views by campaign or interaction type.
Marketing Cloud Engagement Shield: Use Shield to protect your data and gain insights into who accesses that data. Shield combines security products to provide trusted encryption solutions with advanced Audit Trail functionality.
Multi-Factor Authentication for Marketing Cloud Engagement: Multi-factor authentication (MFA) enhances your Marketing Cloud Engagement login process by adding another layer of protection against common security threats, including phishing attacks, credential stuffing, and account takeovers. With MFA, a user provides two factors to prove their identity—their username and password combination plus a supported verification method—before they can log in. Even if a user’s credentials are compromised, the additional factor helps prevent unauthorized access.
Configure MFA Verification for Marketing Cloud Engagement Logins: Configure a multi-factor authentication (MFA) method to provide an additional layer of security for your Marketing Cloud Engagement account. MFA is required for all users and can’t be turned off. The first time you log in to your account, you must register an MFA verification method. On all subsequent logins, you must log in using MFA.
View MFA Events in Marketing Cloud Engagement: You can review a log of all multi-factor authentication (MFA) registration and verification attempts for your account. This log includes enablement and revocation actions and authentication attempts. Marketing Cloud admins can view all events in a tenant. Specific users see only those events related to their account.
Revoke an MFA Verification Method for Marketing Cloud Engagement: If a user loses their multi-factor authentication (MFA) verification method, a Marketing Cloud Engagement admin can disconnect it for them. Each user account must have one registered method for access. If the user hasn't registered additional methods, they're prompted to set up a new method the next time they log in.
Generate a Temporary MFA Verification Code for Marketing Cloud Engagement: A Marketing Cloud Engagement admin can generate a temporary verification code for a user who forgot or lost their multi-factor authentication (MFA) verification method. This code is effective for 24 hours. The user can enter this code multiple times until 24 hours elapses or you revoke the code.
Enable and Require MFA for Marketing Cloud Engagement: For most tenants, multi-factor authentication (MFA) is integrated with the Marketing Cloud Engagement login experience and can’t be disabled. If Salesforce hasn’t made MFA mandatory for your tenant yet, you should do so yourself as soon as possible. Follow these steps to transition from Identity Verification (IDV) to multi-factor authentication (MFA).
Mobile Studio Settings: Review and configure settings for Mobile Studio in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
MobileConnect Account Administration: Admins can access the send blockout, from name, headers and footers, subscription information, keywords, short and long codes, and other account-level settings in the Setup app by searching for MobileConnect.
MobileConnect Roles: View MobileConnect roles in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
MobilePush App Administration: An admin can manage MobilePush in Marketing Cloud Engagement Setup. Here, access the send period, stored headers and footers, subscription information, custom sound optional settings, OpenDirect, custom keys, interactive notifications, and other account-level settings.
MobilePush Roles: View MobilePush roles in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Modify Security Settings: An admin can modify security settings in Setup for Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Modify User Preferences: Learn how to modify user preferences in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
No Token Queue for MO SMS Messages: Your GET Token API must provide a token to Marketing Cloud Engagement in five or fewer tries. Otherwise, the system logs the message that there’s no token in a No Token Queue. This queue ensures you can still handle STOP messages and other important communications. You can also set up a custom data extract to retrieve the log. Contact your account executive for more information about enabling this custom data extract.
Customize Branding in Packaged Items: Include custom fields within the items in your packaged solution to enable the user who deploys the package to customize branding. For example, if an asset contains a logo that varies across environments, you can create a custom field where the correct logo is inserted during deployment.
Package Manager Notifications: If a packaged solution has unsupported objects, a notification appears before you deploy the package. To help you troubleshoot issues, review this list of in-app notifications.
Package Manager Reference: Learn how to get the most out of Package Manager by understanding supported objects, supported actions, and notifications for Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Package Manager Supported Actions: Here are some actions you can take when deploying a packaged solution with Package Manager in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Manage Parameters: Set up or edit the tracking parameters that are appended to the links in messages sent from Marketing Cloud Engagement. The parameters you configure here are applied to all messages sent from your business unit.
Password Management: Learn how to reset lost or forgotten passwords in Marketing Cloud Engagement by using the password management feature.
Perform a File Transfer to a Safehouse Location: When you import an encrypted file with your Marketing Cloud Engagement safehouse location set as the default location, follow these steps to perform an encrypted file transfer
Permissions for Email Studio: Review the permissions that enable Email Studio functionality in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Configure an Auto Account Onboarding Journey: Onboard a new car buyer while verifying their customer information. Drive personalized and targeted content in future communications with this Package Manager solution.
Package Manager Industry Solutions: Package Manager Industry Solutions are campaign templates that include industry-specific journeys, content, automations, landing pages, and more to help marketers work faster. Streamline your setup time, and manage multiple instances for Marketing Cloud Engagement business units.
Configure an Interactive Email Form: Gather information from customers by embedding an interactive form in an email. Subscribers can respond and submit the form without leaving their inbox.
Onboard a Retail Customer with an Interactive Email Form: When onboarding a customer, gather profile and preference data by embedding an interactive form in an email. The recipient can respond and submit the form without leaving their inbox.
Configure a Retail Post Purchase Journey: Increase customer confidence and interaction by sending customers confirmation emails and surveys with this Package Manager solution.
Package Manager Supported Objects: The Package Manager in Marketing Cloud Engagement supports these objects. Packages that contain unsupported objects display errors when packaged or deployed.
Reconcile Transactional Sends in Marketing Cloud Engagement: To help meet regulatory reporting requirements regarding SMS and transactional email delivery and cadence, Marketing Cloud Engagement captures delivery information for these messages. It also captures the final delivery status as Sent or Not Sent.
Reset a Forgotten Password: Complete these steps to reset a forgotten password for your Marketing Cloud Engagement account.
Reset a User's Password: A Marketing Cloud Engagement admin can reset the passwords and security questions for multiple users at the same time.
Reset an Expired Password: Follow these steps to reset a Marketing Cloud Engagement account password that is expired.
Change Your Password: Learn how to change the password that you use to log in to Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Resolve Token API Specification: Marketing Cloud Engagement performs an HTTP POST to the URL that authenticates your sends. Your remote server replies in the specified format, allowing Engagement to parse and send to resolved email addresses or phone numbers.
Restore an Encryption Key in Marketing Cloud Engagement: To import your key value and restore your encryption key, use the Restore application in Marketing Cloud Engagement. Contact your account executive to confirm the correct URL for restoring your encryption key. It can take up to a week to restore a key. You can restore databases up to two weeks after the initial revocation. Databases that remain inactive for more than two weeks cannot be restored.
Review and Edit Your Brand: After you create a brand in BrandBuilder for Marketing Cloud Engagement, review and edit login and configuration details.
Revoke an Encryption Key: When you revoke an active key, Marketing Cloud Engagement deletes the key and you can't log in to your account. Nobody can access the data in your database after revocation.
Marketing Cloud Advertising Roles: When you enable Marketing Cloud Advertising, you gain access to additional functionality in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Assign a Role to a User: Grant Marketing Cloud Engagement users access to the areas and features that pertain to their job functions.
Roles and Permissions Reference: Marketing Cloud uses roles and permissions to determine the information and actions you can access in your Marketing Cloud account. Review this information for both the recommended role and the basic permissions necessary to enable specific access.
Rotate an Encryption Key in Marketing Cloud Engagement: Follow these steps to rotate your encryption key in Marketing Cloud Engagement for Data at Rest Encryption. This process makes an imported key active and replaces the current encryption key.
Resolve Marketing Cloud Engagement Single Sign-On Errors: Marketing Cloud Engagement returns an error message if an incorrect SAML assertion is received. Errors can occur during initial integration configuration or when you make modifications.
Step-Up Authentication: Step-up authentication is the process of reauthenticating with multi-factor authentication before performing specific tasks. In accounts where admins can log in with a username and password, Marketing Cloud Engagement enforces step-up authentication when an admin tries to make certain critical changes. For example, an admin must reauthenticate before they can edit the security settings for an account.
Set the Default Login App for Marketing Cloud Engagement: When you log in to Marketing Cloud Engagement, you see the dashboard. You can change this behavior so that you see the overview page for a specific app when you log in. Changing this setting doesn’t restrict access to any part of Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Set Up an Amazon Simple Storage Service File Location: Import and export files with Amazon Simple Storage Service (S3). Transferring files from Amazon S3 is faster than transferring them from the Enhanced FTP server that’s built in to Marketing Cloud Engagement. You can fine-tune access to buckets and folders, and manage data access with an AWS Access Key or IAM role.
Set Up a Microsoft Azure Blob Storage File Location in Marketing Cloud Engagement: Transferring files directly from Microsoft Azure is faster than transferring files from the Enhanced FTP server that’s built in to Marketing Cloud Engagement. You can grant Marketing Cloud Engagement access to your cloud storage through Microsoft Azure Directory or Shared Access Signatures.
Setup Assistant: Use the Setup Assistant to configure a new Marketing Cloud Engagement account so that you can take advantage of all of its features.
Enable Single Sign-On with Marketing Cloud Engagement and the Salesforce Platform: Unify the login experience for your users by implementing single sign-on (SSO) for Marketing Cloud Engagement and Salesforce Platform applications, such as Data 360, Sales Cloud, and Service Cloud. For example, if your organization uses Data 360 with Marketing Cloud Engagement, you can configure both platforms so that your users log in only one time to use both applications.
Increase Login Security by Using Tenant-Specific Endpoint Isolation: Enterprises that have multiple Marketing Cloud Engagement accounts can use Tenant-Specific Endpoint (TSE) Isolation for additional login security. If you turn on this feature, users who use single sign-on (SSO) to access Marketing Cloud Engagement can only do so by using a unique URL that’s specific to each account, as opposed to using a global login endpoint.
Supported Email Messaging Functionality: Tokenized Sending supports functionality such as file-based imports, auto-response and forwards from Reply Mail Management, plus much more.
Supported MobileConnect Messaging Functionality: Tokenized Sending supports the following MobileConnect functionality , such as file-based imports, stops and unsubscribes, send to all lists, and a mobile list.
Suspended Marketing Cloud Engagement Accounts: Access to a suspended Marketing Cloud Engagement account is restricted, and the account is deleted if you don't resolve the issue and reactivate it. To reactivate your service, contact your Salesforce account executive.
Tags: In Setup for Marketing Cloud Engagement, create and manage tags for use with Content Builder, Journey Builder, and Campaigns. Each tag includes a name and description for identification purposes. You can add tags from Setup and the Content Builder editor.
Time Zone User Preferences: Set your time zone and culture code preferences in Setup for Marketing Cloud Engagement. View time-related data in your time zone and culture rather than the default Central Standard Time zone and en-US.
Token API Security: Marketing Cloud Engagement can authenticate using your token resolver service with HTTP basic authorization or OAuth 2.0. Apex REST isn’t supported.
Token Formats: Use email address-based tokens or phone number-based tokens.
Tokenized Sending: Use Tokenized Sending to send contact data that is too sensitive to store in your Marketing Cloud Engagement database. You can take information from your own data systems and transmit it via API for use at send time.
Version 1: Review this information when implemented a Resolve Token API for Tokenized Sending in Marketing Cloud Engagement. New users must use Version 2 of the specifications. Version 1 information is a reference for users with existing implementations.
Version 2: Review this information when implemented a Resolve Token API for Tokenized Sending in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Generate Tenant-Specific Single Sign-On Metadata for Multiple Tenants: Configure a globally unique, tenant-specific service provider ID to use multiple Marketing Cloud Engagement tenants with the same identity provider (IdP) for single sign-on (SSO). You can request a tenant-specific endpoint entity ID for each tenant that you manage.
Unsupported Tokenized Sending Features: Tokenized Sending doesn’t work with certain Marketing Cloud Engagement features. Review this list for additional information.
Update Your Marketing Cloud Engagement SSO Certificate: When you use single sign-on (SSO), your identity provider (IdP) authenticates the identity of each user that attempts to log in to Marketing Cloud Engagement. Salesforce provides a digital certificate that ensures the security and integrity of communications to and from your IdP. These certificates expire after a specific amount of time. When your certificate expires, you must update the certificate details with your IdP.
Use a Created Key with AMPscript: Use AMPscript functions to encrypt and decrypt information stored in a custom data extension. The necessary AMPscript includes the EncryptSymmetric() and DecryptSymmetric() functions.
Use a Created Key with File Transfer Activities: You can configure your file transfer activities in Automation Studio to use either a generated encryption key or an RSA private key you create and supply to Marketing Cloud Engagement. Use this key as part of the process to decrypt a file from an Engagement FTP site and save the contents to a safehouse location. This activity prepares the data for a file import activity. You can also use the key as part of the process to encrypt a file from a safehouse location and save that data to an Engagement file location. That data is saved in preparation for secure data export.
Use Audit Trail: A security admin user can view access and activity records from user tasks in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Validate Your Own Encryption Key: You can perform this process outside of Marketing Cloud Engagement to troubleshoot key wrapping procedures to ensure you used the correct algorithms.
View the Access Log: See a list of attempts to log in to your Marketing Cloud Engagement account from IP ranges that are outside the ones specified by your IP allowlist.
Add an Asset: Upload an asset catalog file or use the Einstein Content Selection API to quickly add multiple assets at once. You can also add a single asset. For improved reliability, image size is limited to 2 MB when using the CSV catalog import option or the API. Images added through in the application are still limited to 1 MB.
Add an Asset Attribute: Help Einstein make the best, most context-rich selections by adding attributes to your assets. An attribute is metadata about an asset that helps Einstein categorize it, making selections smarter when paired with subscriber profile information.
Archive an Asset: When an image asset isn’t available for use, archive it.
Einstein Recommendations Catalog: A catalog includes all fields that contain attributes used to make Einstein Recommendations. Einstein Recommendations filters assets based on these attributes. For instance, you can define assets in the recommendation pool based on a product’s color or size, or an article’s author and subject matter.
Catalog FAQ: Get the answers to frequently asked questions about the Einstein Recommendations catalog feature.
Does Einstein Recommendations Integrate with Tag Management Vendors?: Yes, Einstein Recommendations can integrate with tag management solutions. Salesforce doesn’t provide templates, but many vendor partners have templates that you can use or other customized methods to add Collect Tracking Code to your content. Tag management can reduce page load time and reduce implementation and maintenance time and effort.
When Do Recommendation Images Refresh?: Images refresh when a new display is published or manually refreshed. The images also refresh after one of these fields change via a catalog file import or streaming update API call.
Can I Use a URL as My ContentID?: You can use a URL as your ContentID if it’s fewer than 256 characters. However, using a URL as the Content ID isn’t recommended as a best practice.
Can Einstein Recommendations Import Offline Data Feeds?: Yes. A one-time historical data feed of online or offline purchases can be imported, in catalog format, as part of a standard implementation. This option is great for building “people who bought….also bought” lists, one of our highest revenue generating algorithms.
Where Is Catalog Data Stored?: Catalog data is stored in Einstein Recommendations and exposed in Marketing Cloud Engagement through these standard data extensions: IGO_PRODUCTS and IGO_PRODUCTATTRIBS. To view standard data extensions in your account, go to Data Extensions in Contact Builder.
Einstein Recommendations Catalog Field Definitions: Catalog fields store your catalog’s asset attributes for Einstein Recommendations. These attributes are both required and recommended catalog fields. You can also add custom attributes. Catalog field values can contain up to 1,024 single-byte characters or 512 double-byte characters.
Create a Catalog Field Mapping: To ensure that catalog heading names are mapped to the required application field names, create a catalog field mapping in Einstein Recommendations.
Import a Catalog: Import a catalog to use in Einstein Recommendations by uploading a delimited text file. The first row of data must contain the column headings, and there must be at least two additional rows of catalog data. We recommend that you update your catalog daily to reflect the changes on the site by the next business morning. For improved reliability, file size is limited to 2 MB when using the catalog import option.
Catalog Summary: The Einstein Recommendations catalog summary includes the type of import used and the currently selected reminders interval. The file history table in the Status Console includes the date, time, and status history of the catalog uploads.
Common Einstein Recommendations Rule Types: To create your own algorithm, use rules in the Einstein Recommendations Rule Manager tool. A rule can override top-performing algorithms and negatively impact predictive performance, so we recommend that you use rules sparingly.
Configure a Rule: Configure a rule to refine Einstein Recommendations.
Configure Custom Attributes for Einstein Recommendations: You can create custom attributes to use with your recommendations. Unmapped fields are automatically used to make recommendations. For streaming updates, Custom Attributes Configuration is available after Marketing Cloud Engagement starts receiving data from your site.
Configure the Data Suppression Period for Einstein Recommendations: The default suppression period before deleting a customer profile is 14 days. During the suppression period, the system holds existing data but doesn’t collect more. At the end of the suppression period, all profile data is deleted. You can change the default suppression period.
Content: Learn how Einstein Recommendations store data in the content data extension.
Content Attributes: Learn how Einstein Recommendations stores information in the content attributes data extension.
Content Views: Learn how Einstein Recommendations stores information in the content views data extension.
Create and Upload an Asset Catalog File: Give Einstein the images that can be selected as content assets in your messages. Provide an asset catalog .csv file that contains a URL and metadata for each content asset image file that Einstein can select. We provide a template to guide you. You can use Einstein Content Selection in your email messages after uploading assets.
Create Einstein Email Recommendations: To create Einstein Email Recommendations, set up the customer profile privacy. Then the system generates generic recommendations from the scenarios you configured.
Create an Einstein Web Recommendation: Use Einstein Recommendations to create product or content recommendations to display on your website. The Einstein Recommendation Engine requires at least three active items in your product catalog.
Customer Profile Data Extension in Einstein Recommendations: Einstein Recommendations customer profile data extensions store the top five attributes for customer affinity based on behavioral data. The profile updates at the end of every customer session. You can delete a customer profile at any time.
Customize the Calls: Einstein Recommendations code accepts several different parameters. To initiate an API call, use HTTP or HTTPS to match the address prefix of the page on your site where the call is made.
Manage Einstein Recommendations Customer Profile Data Privacy: To honor subscriber privacy and data protection preferences, manage consent, data deletion, and restriction of processing for a customer profile in Einstein Recommendations. To export Einstein Recommendations data, contact your account executive for assistance.
Displays by Item Report: Retrieve a report in Einstein Recommendations that displays the number of email recommendations by product code. This report is accessible through the email tab in Email Recommendations reporting.
Edit Asset Attributes: Update asset attributes so that Einstein’s selection incorporates current, relevant metadata. You can add, edit, or delete attribute values.
Change or Remove a Fallback Asset: If Einstein Content Selection can’t find an asset that matches your content selection rules, it displays a fallback image. You can change or remove the fallback image for each asset class.
Supported Fonts: Einstein Email Recommendations supports multiple fonts.
Einstein Content Selection: Einstein Content Selection is a no-code, open-time experimentation tool for personalized content. Because Einstein selects content at open time, it continues to evaluate for winning content while also experimenting to ensure that click-through rates are optimized.
Archive a Content Test: Clean up your list of content tests by archiving tests that are no longer relevant.
Einstein Content Selection Asset Distribution: Import more assets and keep an eye on your asset inventory’s status. Find an overview of assets and their distribution. Monitor how many assets are active or expired, and how many assets expire soon.
Einstein Content Selection Performance Analytics: Discover which aspects of your content images resonate with your audience. View performance over time by asset class, by asset attributes including Einstein’s tag and tone attributes, or by job. You can also get details about assets that Einstein doesn’t select.
Create a Content Test: Use Einstein Content Testing to compare up to 32 images to determine what works best. You can create automated tests or manual A/B/n tests. You can also access previous tests on the Content Test page. Draft, completed, and archived tests aren’t available.
Einstein Content Testing: To optimize engagement, quickly test images in Einstein Content Testing. For more complex personalized targeting, use Einstein Content Selection, which includes fatigue rules and targeted content based on user preferences.
Daily Selection and Click Events Report: The daily events report is a summary of subscriber content selection and click events. Use the report in Einstein Content Selection to track subscriber views and engagement. Reports are retained for 90 days.
Einstein Email Recommendations: Use Einstein Email Recommendations to observe customer behavior, build preference profiles, and deliver the next-best content or product. You can also refine recommendations to match your business rules. Recommendation content surfaces in placeholders for recommendations on your website.
Einstein Email Recommendations Dashboard: The email recommendations dashboard in Einstein Recommendations displays a list of available recommendations. From here, you can create, edit, or delete a recommendation.
Einstein Recommendation Scenarios: These scenarios help you produce Einstein Recommendations for email or the web in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Use Local Weather Conditions to Target Assets: You can target assets based on the weather forecast and conditions for a subscriber’s location. For example, you can promote sunscreen when the Ultraviolet (UV) index is high or promote raincoats when there’s a 75% chance of rain in the next five days.
Einstein Web Recommendations: Einstein Web Recommendations use Einstein’s capabilities to observe behavior, build preference profiles, and deliver the next-best personalized content to each website visitor. Use scenarios in the application to refine recommendations to match your specific business rules. Predictive content is surfaced in placeholders for recommendations on your website.
Does Apple Safari Intelligent Tracking Prevention Impact Einstein Recommendations?: Yes. Apple's Intelligent Tracking Prevention is a WebKit feature that reduces cross-site tracking by limiting cookies and other website data. This feature works for Safari web browser users. Due to the limited nature in which the Einstein Recommendation platform uses cookies, Einstein Recommendations work as designed for Safari users. Some users have reported that they must disable Safari's cross-site tracking feature to see the recommendations. If the recommendations aren’t appearing on your main page, try enabling Safari’s Prevent cross-site tracking setting. The cross-tracking option is enabled by default.
Find Out Why an Asset Was Selected: Search by subscriber key to review the details of an asset that was selected because of its likelihood to engage a specific subscriber. Find out why Einstein Content Selection didn’t select other assets.
Get Code Details in Einstein Recommendations: Find the JavaScript and HTML code required to render Einstein Recommendations on your page. Copy the code and embed it in your page source for each piece of code.
Get Code Procedures: Learn how to add the Einstein Web Recommendations code you create in Einstein Recommendations to your website.
Implement Einstein Recommendations: Einstein Recommendations is an application that provides product recommendations in your emails and on your sites. The information in this map guides you through the process of implementing Einstein Recommendations in your Marketing Cloud Engagement account.
Integration with Audience Builder: Learn how the data from Einstein Recommendations integrates with Audience Builder. You can use this data to filter and segment subscribers.
Einstein Recommendations Integration with Contact Builder: Einstein Recommendations passes raw data gathered via the Collect Tracking Code into Contact Builder. The data is organized in up to eight data extensions that enable you to search and filter information. Data is available to all tools that integrate with Contact Builder.
Localized Recommendations: Configure Einstein Recommendations to deliver localized recommendations in multiple languages and currency values from a single business unit.
Manage Einstein Content Selection Assets: Manage the asset pool you created on the Asset Pool page after you add assets to Einstein Content Selection. You can add assets to the pool in several ways. Upload an asset catalog file, upload a file from your desktop, import the asset from Content Builder, or add the asset through an API The assets available to you are the image assets that Einstein Content Selection chooses from based on the asset class of the content block. If you’re importing profile information, the selection is based on how the image attributes align with the subscriber profile attributes.
Identify Attributes That Can Introduce Bias: To help you ensure that your customer profile attributes don’t facilitate intentional or unintentional bias, Einstein Content Selection scans and flags English language profile attributes that can introduce bias. Einstein scans attribute names and attribute values, then notifies you that an attribute you created can introduce bias so that you can decide whether to include, edit, or exclude the attribute.
Map Asset Attributes to Consumer Attributes: To help Einstein make targeted selections, map asset catalog attributes to consumer attributes. If an asset class contains assets in multiple languages, you can specify that only the assets that correspond to the subscriber’s language are available to select.
Einstein Recommendations: Einstein Recommendations deliver the next-best product, content, or offer to every individual through product and content recommendations for email and web. Every customer interaction is an insight. With every click, download, view, and purchase, customers are giving data about their preferences. Einstein Recommendations combine user behavior with algorithms and your unique business rules to build a user profile of affinities. Use that profile to determine the most-relevant content and products for each customer in real time. Hyperforce doesn’t support using email or web recommendations.
Einstein Recommendations Status Console: Einstein Recommendations Status Console monitors the Collect Tracking Code and catalog imports for common implementation errors. View where an error occurred and the details to help resolve the issue. This feature helps ensure that the Einstein Recommendations engine receives the data necessary to power optimal Einstein Recommendations and behavioral triggers for campaigns and journeys.
Preview and Insert Einstein Web Recommendations: Include the Einstein Web Recommendations code in the selected page’s code. Both the JavaScript code for the recommendation call and the HTML recommendation zone placeholder are provided.
Purchases Data Extension: Data from purchases monitored in Einstein Recommendations is stored in the Purchases data extension. The data extension is automatically updated.
Dashboard Tabs: Learn about the dashboard tabs in Einstein Recommendations reports.
Where Does Einstein Recommendations Reporting Come From?: Reporting shown in the Einstein Recommendations dashboard comes from the Collect Tracking Code on the account’s site. For example, revenue captured at the time of conversion is dependent upon what is passed through Collect Tracking Code rather than pricing in the catalog.
What Time Zone Is Used for Einstein Recommendations Reporting?: Einstein Recommendations reporting uses Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). For this reason, orders and metrics from a single date might not match when compared with data from other tracking systems.
Are Recommendation Displays Calculated at the Item or Call Level?: Recommendation displays are calculated at the call level. A single display is tracked, despite the number of recommended items shown. When the recommendation call is made, the first image renders, or through a Collect Tracking Code or event triggers.
How Do You Calculate the Site Lift Percentages on the Summary Tab in Einstein Recommendations?: Site lift is the percentage increase from the non-influenced number to the total number. Site lift for conversion rate and revenue per session are shown on the Summary tab. This visualization helps represent the lift that Einstein Recommendations provides to the overall site performance and is best analyzed trending over time.
Reserved Attributes: See a list of attributes that are reserved for specific use in Einstein Recommendations. You can’t use these attributes to store other values.
Rule Manager Options: To refine your email and web recommendations, use the rules in Einstein Recommendations Rule Manager.
Add a Web Recommendation to a Page: Configure where Einstein Web Recommendations appear on your site and the type of recommendations to provide.
Set Exclusion Rules: Exclusion rules are conditions that you set to tell Einstein Content Selection when not to select a particular type of asset for a subscriber.
Set Fallback Assets: Choose an image asset that Einstein Content Selection displays when a matching asset can’t be found. Pick an image for each asset class in your asset catalog file. Even if your fallback assets are unavailable, Einstein Content Selection selects an image if possible.
Set Fatigue Rules: Because assets that get clicks and generate engagement guide asset selection, Einstein Content Selection can select the same asset for the same customer more than once. Configure fatigue rules to prevent a customer from seeing the same image more often than you want them to.
Set Up Content Selection Rules: If you want Einstein Content Selection to observe rules about what content to select, set content selection rules. A content selection rule governs when some assets can and can’t be selected and included in a message.
Set Up Einstein Content Selection: Enable the Einstein Content Selection message block so that you can add it to your messages in Content Builder.
Set a Variety Rule: Prevent Einstein from selecting the same asset image for an asset attribute more than once for a subscriber in a single message. By setting a variety rule, you can tell Einstein to vary the assets displayed when you use an asset with the same attribute more than once in a message. You can set one variety rule per business unit.
Stop a Content Test: You can stop a manual or automated content test at any time. For example, you might want to stop a manual test after you’ve received engagement data on a few thousand opens. Generally, you don’t need to stop an automated test unless you want to override the continual testing portion and ensure that all images are optimized to a single asset.
Sync Your Consumer Profile Data Extension: If your organization has consumer or customer profile data that you want Einstein Content Selection to use when making selections, sync the sendable data extension that contains your customer profile data. When the data extension gets updated, sync it again so Einstein has the latest profile data. Or set up automatic daily profile syncing so you don’t have to.
View Content Test Performance: To increase your subscriber interactions, use the performance results data to review the click rate and open rate and guide your messaging.
Views: Learn how Einstein Recommendations stores data in the Views data extension.
Waterfall Predictions: Prioritize your recommended scenarios from highest to lowest using waterfall predictions in Einstein Recommendations. In a waterfall prediction, Einstein goes down the list of scenarios and returns all available matching items until it reaches the total number of recommendations that you set. Set up a default site data scenario last in your hierarchy to ensure that Einstein fills the total number of recommendations.
Einstein Web Recommendation Dashboard: The web recommendation dashboard in Einstein Recommendations displays a list of available recommendations. From here, you can edit or delete a recommendation or create a new one.
Marketing Cloud Personalization: With Marketing Cloud Personalization (formerly Interaction Studio), you can visualize, track, and manage customer experiences with real-time interaction management. Use the customer experience to drive valuable engagement at the right moment and just the way your audience prefers. Personalization enhances the power of Marketing Cloud Engagement with expanded real-time personalization.
Grant Personalization Access to an Individual Salesforce Employee: You can authorize individual Salesforce Customer Support employees to access your site to assist with support, configuration, and strategy. Add each individual separately, and customize the role and duration. After the selected duration is over, you can grant access again. Salesforce employees who have been granted access to an account can’t configure identities.
Personalization Access for Salesforce Customer Support: Before a support team or success manager can access your account, an administrator must grant access. Salesforce provides the strictest access controls to customer data.
Grant Salesforce Customer Support Access to Personalization: You can authorize the support team to log in to your site to assist with support issues. You can select the duration of access up to 1 year. The duration period starts as soon as you grant access.
Create an Account Profile Attribute: Account profile attributes can collect data you can use in segmentation, reporting, or with integrated third-party systems. For example, if you create a form in Personalization, you can assign each field to an existing attribute. Depending on the configuration of your dataset, the attributes can either collect the data for reporting, or can write it to a third-party integrated system.
Generate API Tokens to Authorize Data Changes: Authorize all data changes by creating a token for use in API calls. You generate the API token with the User Look-Up and Deletion API. This API exports individual user data to satisfy right of access requests.
Personalization API Tokens: Marketing Cloud Personalization uses API tokens to authenticate and authorize all API requests to Personalization's REST API.
Create an API Token: Marketing Cloud Personalization uses API tokens to authenticate and authorize all API requests to Personalization's REST API.
View the Personalization Audit Log: Administrators can use Marketing Cloud Personalization’s Audit Log to view access and activity records in support of compliance and investigation efforts. The Audit Log includes events related to authentication, user management, API token management, campaigns, templates, catalog configurations, and other activity for a dataset.
B2B Detect: B2B Detect lets you access firmographic data about your users, such as their industry, beginning with their first interaction. The addition of firmographic data allows Marketing Cloud Personalization to provide more targeted personalization to your accounts and their users.
Campaign Statistics: Use Campaign Statistics to measure the impact of your campaigns. The information available on the Campaign Statistics screen helps you analyze where you can make campaign changes to improve results.
Campaign Statistics Calculations: Campaign statistics are available for every Personalization campaign. The calculations and information available on the campaign statistics screen helps you determine the success of your campaign.
Confidence Explained in Campaign Statistics: Confidence on the Campaign Statistics screen refers to the term statistical confidence. It’s a measure of how sure you are of your results from an A/B test. It isn’t a measure of how effective a campaign was, but a measure of how certain you can be with the campaign’s displayed impact.
Campaign Statistics Filters: Use campaign statistics filters to focus on how various subgroups behave in a campaign. You can view statistics based on selected results filters, tailor statistics output to account for outliers, view statistics by attribution and activity, or compare baselines.
Campaign Statistics Optimizations by KPI: Every campaign and use case is distinct, with their own nuances. However, when thinking about how to improve and optimize your campaign performance, these general guidelines can help.
Campaign Statistics Reports: Reports are available on the Campaign Statistics screen. They give additional insight into campaign performance by specific metric.
Results Filter Attribution Statistics: How Personalization calculates attribution statistics can depend on whether individuals are included or excluded from the calculations based on their campaign activity.
Get Statistics for a Campaign: Monitor and analyze the effectiveness of a campaign. You can apply different filters to view activity and attribution metrics during a particular time period. To collect statistics, the campaign must have recorded campaign impressions.
Catalogs: Use catalogs for campaigns, promotions, recommendations, segmentation, reporting, and other key functions.
About Catalogs: Learn about catalog objects and catalog items.
Ingesting Locale-Specific Product and Catalog Data: You can load localized versions of items into Personalization using several methods. Personalization supports loading localized iterations using the Product Localization ETL Data Feed and Catalog Localization ETL Data Feed. You can also capture the data using the Marketing Cloud Personalization Event API.
Catalog Localization: The Personalization user interface is available only in English. However, you can localize parts of the Marketing Cloud Personalization platform. Localization isn’t supported for the Personalization Platform UI, Mobile SDK, or Open Time Email.
Manage Catalog Localization: You can localize catalog settings, including the language and currency that your site uses, and the catalog metadata. You can define a primary locale and primary currency for each dataset. The primary locale is the dataset’s default locale.
Localizing Product and Catalog Objects: Personalization supports catalog item localization for individual datasets. You can create and store localized data for specific fields based on the language and country codes that you select for the dataset. For catalog items containing localized data, you can deliver locale-specific personalization experiences in the language that matches the customer’s locale.
Catalog Objects: Catalog objects and their relationships define the structure of your catalog. Personalization uses catalog objects to interpret and understand customer engagement and affinities. Examples of catalog objects include products, articles, blog posts, categories, brands, styles, and features. Personalization includes several built-in catalog objects, and you can create custom ones to meet your specific needs.
Customizing the Affinities Graph: The Affinities graph displays affinities for objects that use a specific catalog object type as their Name value. You can define custom catalog objects to appear in the Affinities graph when viewing a unified customer profile.
Built-In Catalog Objects: Built-in catalog objects enable you to quickly begin building your catalog and define its structure. Personalization uses catalog objects to interpret and understand customer engagement and affinities. Personalization collects behavioral data about your customers in the context of your catalog. Catalog objects can be standalone entities, or they can relate to one another to provide a more granular structure for your catalog.
Category Cardinality Options: Before building your category hierarchy, determine which category cardinality you want to use: one per item or many per item. You choose the cardinality in the Category catalog object. The Category catalog object plays a key role in category assignment and tracking statistics.
Cardinality and Category Hierarchy: With Marketing Cloud Personalization, you can build category hierarchy using either the Category ETL or the Sitemap/Event API. Before building your category hierarchy, choose how you want to configure category cardinality. Then choose which build approach best suits your business needs.
Choose Category Cardinality: Before building your category hierarchy, select which category cardinality you want to use: one per item or many per item.
Build Category Hierarchy Using the Category ETL: Using the Category ETL to build category hierarchy, along with the Category ID Path framework, results in a hierarchy with a many-per-item category cardinality.
Create a Custom Catalog Object: Personalization collects behavioral data in the context of the catalog that you create and uses catalog objects to assess and analyze customer engagement and affinities. You can add more detail to your catalog by using custom objects. The more detailed you make your catalog, the more granular your insights are regarding customer engagement and affinity.
Catalog Object Limits: Marketing Cloud Personalization imposes limits per dataset for catalog objects and attributes.
Build Category Hierarchy Using the Sitemap/Event API: Using the Sitemap/Event API to build category hierarchy with a many-per-item category cardinality results in a pipe-delimited category structure that is separate from the idPath framework used by the category ETL.
Static Relationships: Use static relationships as ingredients in Einstein Recipes to help determine which additional related products to recommend to your customers.
Create a Static List: Use the StaticList tag to group products together in a static list. You can upload a comma-separated values (CSV) file of products to a static list, and then use that list in Einstein Recipes as an exclusion, inclusion, or booster.
Assign Static Relationships Manually: After you define static relationships for your catalog, you can associate products with one another. You can then use static relationships in an Einstein Recipe so that Personalization can recommend associated products to your customers. Before you can associate products with one another in a static relationship, you must define the static relationships for your catalog.
Define Static Relationships: Define static relationships to associate products with one another in your catalog. You can use static relationships as ingredients in Einstein Recipes to help determine which additional related products to recommend to your customers.
Upload Static Relationships: After you define static relationships for your catalog, you can upload a CSV file to associate products with each other. You can then use static relationships in an Einstein Recipe so that Personalization can recommend associated products to your customers.
Strict Catalog Security: When adding or updating catalog objects, use the Strict Catalog Security setting to determine how Personalization adds new items to your catalog, and how it updates an item’s information. When you enable the Strict Catalog Security setting, Personalization ignores catalog item metadata, such as attributes, unless it comes from a feed or an authenticated event source.
Channels and Campaigns: In Personalization, channels are the various digital touch points you use to interact and engage with your customers and leads. Campaigns are the heart of providing personalized experiences within each of those channels. Depending on your Marketing Cloud Personalization license, you have access to develop campaigns for channels such as web, email, mobile, and third-party integrations.
Personalization Data Warehouse: Marketing Cloud Personalization tracks and measures engagement—at the individual and account levels—across your company’s channels. The Data Warehouse is a repository of personalization data that is optimized for analysis. Business analysts can use their preferred business intelligence (BI) tool to access the Data Warehouse and run queries to transform, report on, analyze, and visualize your Marketing Cloud Personalization data.
Connect to the Data Warehouse: Connect to your Marketing Cloud Personalization Data Warehouse from your BI tool using the user account credentials, the JDBC or ODBC connection string, and other connection settings. For example, you can explore personal data in the Personalization Data Warehouse using Tableau, Marketing Cloud Intelligence, or CRM Analytics.
Configure the Data Warehouse IP Allowlist: Use the Data Warehouse IP Allowlist to improve system security and help prevent unauthorized access to your Data Warehouse. Marketing Cloud Personalization permits connections only from the IP ranges on the Allowlist. If the Allowlist is empty, the Data Warehouse doesn’t accept connections from any IP address.
Create a Data Warehouse User Account: Access to the Data Warehouse requires authentication with a Data Warehouse user account. After you create a user account, Marketing Cloud Personalization sends an email with a JDBC and ODBC connection strings, along with other information you need to connect to the Data Warehouse from your BI tool.
Personalization Datasets: Marketing Cloud Personalization datasets are collections of events, catalog configurations, and user profiles that keep your Personalization data separate and organized. Within your Personalization account, you can set up multiple datasets. Data within one dataset is separate from data in other datasets so that you can analyze customer engagement differently.
Add a Personalization Dataset: Datasets in Marketing Cloud Personalization are collections of events, catalog configurations, and user profiles that keep your Personalization data separate and organized.
Clone a Personalization Dataset: Datasets in Marketing Cloud Personalization are collections of events, catalog configurations, and user profiles that keep your Personalization data separate and organized. You can clone an existing Personalization dataset so that you don’t have to recreate all of its settings.
Delete a Personalization Dataset: Delete a Personalization dataset you no longer need. When you delete a dataset, none of the data within it can be recovered.
Einstein Decisions: When a user views a promotion on your website, Marketing Cloud Personalization captures the user's context—including whether they’re a returning visitor, the device they’re using, and other information that provides insight into that user. Einstein Decisions, Personalization’s machine learning approach for next-best-offer decisioning, uses that context to predict the value of showing a specific offer to a particular user.
About Einstein Decisions: Einstein Decisions automates the process of deciding who sees what content, so you don’t have to manually create complex rules. For example, you define an area on the homepage for five different promotions—credit cards, mortgages, auto loans, checking accounts, and retirement plans—and you're not sure which promotion to display when. Einstein Decisions takes away the guesswork by continuously learning from the data Personalization collects about users, and presents the promotion with the highest likelihood of generating the most lift.
Configure Einstein Decisions: Einstein Decisions analyzes many unique data points when determining the right experience to present to a particular user. This data includes user behaviors as well as contextual data, such as device type, time of day, and demographic data. Einstein Decisions can also reference segment membership and user attribute data, along with catalog objects you create in your catalog. To determine which data Einstein Decisions references, you define the machine learning features on the Feature Engineering page. Typically, a data science or analytics team member configures the feature engineering options for Einstein Decisions.
Feature Engineering in Einstein Decisions: Feature engineering refers to the process of selecting features to use in a machine learning model. A feature is a data type that the model can observe and include in its training. To determine which data Einstein Decisions references, you define the machine learning features on the Feature Engineering page.
Einstein Decisions Limits: Marketing Cloud Personalization has limits for some Einstein Decisions features.
Promotion Management for Einstein Decisions: After you configure Einstein Decisions, add an initial set of promotions and assets to a dataset, and publish an Einstein Decisions campaign, you can begin planning your ongoing promotion management.
Einstein Recipes: Einstein Recipes are Personalization's machine learning algorithms. With Einstein Recipes, you can create configurable algorithmic strategies to present each customer with customized product and content recommendations throughout your various channels. You can use Einstein Recipes to support specific scenarios, such as cross-sells, content promotions, and trending products.
Boosters in Einstein Recipes: Include boosters in Einstein recipes to boost items matching a customer’s affinity in any recommendations Personalization presents.
Create an Einstein Recipe: Einstein Recipes consist of ingredients, exclusions, inclusions, boosters, and variations. Combine these components to suggest content or products according to an individual customer’s behavior and affinities. Personalization uses your recipes to create algorithms that present each customer with their own personalized recommendations.
Exclusions and Inclusions in Einstein Recipes: Use exclusions and inclusions to add filtering criteria to your Einstein Recipes to control which items to recommend to your customers. For example, you can add an exclusion to show only items from the same category as the item a customer is viewing. A customer who views a specific hat brand only sees recommendations for other hats, and not items from the same brand.
Fallback Strategies: Fallback techniques can enhance your Einstein recipe-building strategy and ensure that a recipe returns enough items to fill the recommendation slots designated by a campaign.
Einstein Recipe Ingredients: Ingredients form the core algorithm in Einstein Recipes. When Personalization creates recommendations for your customers, ingredients define the parameters for considering items in your catalog. Personalization then weights those items according to your customers’ behaviors and affinities. Exclusions, inclusions, boosters, and variations help refine the recommendations.
Use a SmartBundle Relationship in an Einstein Recipe: After you associate categories with each other in a SmartBundle relationship, you can use the SmartBundle ingredient in Einstein Recipes to define which items to recommend with other items. When making recommendations, Personalization considers items from SmartBundle-related categories that customers bought together in the same cart.
Define a SmartBundle Relationship: Define SmartBundle relationships to associate categories with one another in your catalog. You can use SmartBundle relationships as ingredients in Einstein Recipes to recommend additional items to your customers. The SmartBundle ingredient considers items from SmartBundle-related categories that customers bought together in the same cart.
Use a Static Relationship in an Einstein Recipe: After you associate products with each other in a static relationship, you can use it as an ingredient in Einstein Recipes to define which products to recommend with other products. When making recommendations, Personalization considers any static relationships you’ve configured.
Test an Einstein Recipe: After creating and training an Einstein recipe, make sure to test it before you publish it. Using test groups can simulate the recommendations that Personalization presents to a group of customers. Testing your recipe with groups that have varying behaviors and affinities helps ensure optimal customer experiences.
Troubleshoot an Einstein Recipe: Examine Einstein recipes and unified customer profiles if you run into unexpected recommendations. Einstein Recipes can consist of multiple components with a variety of parameters. The algorithms are complex, and some recipe options can conflict with one another. Any initial recommendations you receive can require some fine-tuning to meet your expectations.
Variations in Einstein Recipes: Use variations in Einstein Recipes to modify the recommendations that Personalization presents so that your customers see a wider array of items. For example, you can configure a variation to force a recipe to show at most two items from the same category. So if a customer has an affinity for the "hats" category, Personalization recommends the two most relevant hats and a variety of other items from different categories.
Einstein Reports: Einstein Decisions provides reports as an outcome of Marketing Cloud Personalization’s continuous model training. Each time the machine learning model trains, which typically occurs multiple times per week, Personalization creates a report. These reports provide your analytics and data science teams with additional insight into how and why the Einstein Decisions algorithms are making their decisions.
Einstein Report Breakdown: Navigate Einstein reports to gain insights into content zones, summary data, performance over time, training session information, and the selected deployment models.
View Einstein Reports: Einstein Reports provide insight about Einstein Decisions’s continuous model training. Each time the model trains, which typically occur multiple times per week, Personalization creates a report with details about how and why the Einstein Decisions algorithms are making their decisions.
Open Time Email Campaigns: Use open time email campaigns to deliver personalized content and product recommendations each time a recipient opens an email. Using existing email campaigns that you send using your mail marketing service, Open Time Email campaigns deliver real-time personalized content to each member of your subscriber list.
About Open Time Email Campaigns: Email campaigns use an individual’s unique intent and preferences to deliver true 1:1 personalized content, regardless of the email marketing or marketing automation system. With Marketing Cloud Personalization open time email campaigns, you can deliver up-to-the-second personalized content and recommendations. Email messages can address a customer’s latest actions on your site, include expiration date reminders, show low product inventory levels, and more.
Create an Open Time Email Campaign: Generate a block of HTML code for an Open Time Email campaign and use it in your existing email marketing service to add personalized content for each recipient. After creating an Open Time Email campaign, you can clone it and reuse it with the same recipe for additional campaigns. You can also add exclusions and inclusions to your campaigns to tailor them to your overall email strategy.
Create HTML Code for Your Email Campaign: Generate HTML code that you can use to deliver personalized recommendations to campaign recipients. After generating the HTML code, insert it into the Open Time Email campaign in your email marketing service.
View Stored Item Images: View images to validate them for each item on the network. Personalization generates all images in your catalog when you publish an open time item template, and refreshes individual images when you update the template’s metadata. However, if an item’s image changes, but the image URL remains the same, Personalization doesn’t automatically update the image it stores.
Use Promotions in Email Campaigns: Tailor email campaign experiences for each recipient using promotions, without using different copy or separate recipient segments. For each promotion, you can view detailed statistics, so you know what's working and can adjust what isn't. After you create a promotion, you can add it to an Open Time Email campaign. You can use the same promotion across multiple campaigns and experiences. For example, in one campaign, you can create a different experience for tablet, phone, and desktop users.
Create an Open Time Item Template: Create open time item templates, which are used with content blocks, to define the layout for recommendations in a recipe-driven Open Time Email campaign.
Available Fonts: Select from available fonts when using open time item templates. Licensing restrictions prevent adding fonts or using custom fonts.
Publish Open Time Item Templates: Publish open time item templates to define a layout for recommendations in a recipe-driven Open Time Email campaign.
Capture Open Time Email Campaign URLs: Use URLs from Open Time Email campaigns to import item images or link to catalog items in externally-managed email campaigns. For some email marketing services, you can use only the URLs from your Open Time Email campaign, and not the entire HTML code block generated using Personalization.
Engagement Score: The engagement score is an index that tracks how engaged your application users and site visitors are. The score is based on different factors—visit information, actions, key performance indicators (KPIs), and segments—during the defined business cycle.
Set Up an Engagement Score: The engagement score is an index that tracks how engaged your site visitors and application users are. The score is based on several different factors during a defined business cycle—visit information, actions, key performance indicators (KPIs), and segment membership.
Engagement Score Usage: After your engagement score is set up and synced, you can view user and account engagement scores in Personalization.
Account ETL Data Feed: Use the Account ETL data feed to update account information in Unified Account Profiles.
Data 360 Activation ETL Data Feed: Use the Data 360 Activation ETL data feed (SalesforceCDPActivationETL) to import user profile and segment data from Data 360 into Marketing Cloud Personalization using the connector in Data 360.
Archive and Restore Files: You can archive files to prevent them from processing. You can restore archived files at any time.
Catalog Object ETL Data Feed: Use the Catalog Object ETL data feed to update articles, blog posts, and custom catalog objects.
Category ETL Data Feed: Use the Category ETL data feed to add categories to your catalog when creating your category hierarchies. You can update categories by uploading subsequent files that include existing category IDs. Categories are configured by default, but you can add attributes for them.
External Email Campaign Events ETL Data Feed: You can use the External Email Campaign Events ETL data feed to import data from email campaigns that were sent by an external email service provider (ESP). Data can include sends, opens, and clicks.
Cancel a Running ETL Job: With proper Feed role permission settings, you can cancel a running ETL job.
Navigate the Feeds Dashboard: Open the Feeds Dashboard and explore ETL jobs that are queued, in progress, or complete.
Disable or Re-Enable an ETL Feed: Before you can cancel a running ETL job, you must first disable the ETL feed. You can re-enable a disabled ETL feed at any time.
Verify Feeds Role Permission Settings: To cancel running ETL jobs or manage feed files, ensure that the Cancel permission for the Feeds role is enabled.
ETL File Requirements: ETL files contain entries such as users, products, subscription list members, promotions, transactions, and more. These files must be in a CSV format and can be encrypted or compressed. The file formats must follow the explicit schema requirements for each ETL data feed. Typically, you upload ETL files automatically using the SFTP site, but you can also manually upload a file.
Upload an ETL File Manually: ETL data feeds are commonly configured to automatically upload the ETL files using the SFTP site. However, you can upload files manually if, for example, you want to ingest data that doesn’t get updated frequently, or if you want to confirm the .CSV file format without committing changes.
View ETL Files on the SFTP Site: Review processed ETL files after creating SFTP accounts and beginning data transfer. Personalization deletes files after 60 days.
ETL Integration: Ingest data into Marketing Cloud Personalization using ETL data feeds. ETL integration lets you batch load data using CSV files that are generated externally. Update the catalog, import and export segments, upload historical data, and more. You import CSV files using an SFTP site or uploading them manually.
About ETL Data Feeds: Learn more about loading data into Marketing Cloud Personalization.
Encrypt Sensitive Data: Use the Personalization public PGP key to encrypt sensitive data in your ETL data feeds. Because Personalization uses a secure file transfer protocol (SFTP) to process ETL data feeds, you don’t need to use PGP encryption unless your organization requires it.
FAQs for ETL Integration: Answers to frequently asked questions about ETL integration in Marketing Cloud Personalization.
Manage ETL Running Jobs and Feeds: By enabling the Cancel level for the Feeds permission setting, you can manage ETL jobs and feed files directly. This permission level provides the ability to cancel running jobs and archive files.
Define a Personalization ETL Data Feed Automation: In Automation Studio, configure an automation process to load CSV export files from Marketing Cloud Engagement data extensions to Personalization, and encode them using UTF-8.
Import ETL Data Feeds from Marketing Cloud: Use Marketing Cloud Personalization ETL data feeds to import data from Marketing Cloud Engagement. In Automation Studio, configure an automatic process to export data from data extensions and load them directly into Personalization. Before sending ETL data feeds from Marketing Cloud Engagement to Personalization, make sure to first create an SFTP account.
Load Data to a Source Data Extension: Use a SQL query to retrieve data from other data extensions and standard views of Marketing Cloud Engagement, transform the data to the required format, and save it to the source data extension.
ETL Ingestion Performance: Marketing Cloud Personalization doesn’t guarantee a throughput rate for ETL ingestion, so it’s helpful to know which factors can affect ETL ingestion rates. Many of these factors depend on the type of record that the feed modifies. ETL processing speeds vary across accounts and datasets.
Product ETL Data Feed: Use the Product ETL data feed to update the products in your catalog and to add new products.
Product Localization ETL Data Feed: Localize your catalog items based on language and country codes to display product information with the locale-specific data for each item. Used with the Product ETL data feed, the Product Localization ETL data feed enhances your catalog with a localized experience.
Promotion ETL Data Feed: Use the Promotion ETL data feed to add promotions for your catalog for both rule-based and machine learning-driven cross-channel decisioning.
Transaction ETL Data Feed: Use the Transaction ETL data feed to bulk upload transactions to associate purchases of items with individual user profiles.
User ETL Data Feed: Use the User ETL data feed to update Unified Custom Profiles, and Unified Account Profiles if you have B2B Detect. Personalization stores user profiles for each anonymous and known user in the system.
View Data Cloud Activation ETL Files: For Marketing Cloud Personalization accounts with Salesforce CDP Activations in Data 360, you can review processed Data 360 activation feed files after activations begin transferring data. Data 360 files are retained for 30 days.
Export Events: Export events (that is, user activities) and bring this data into other systems for further evaluation.
View the Event Stream on a Customer Profile: View the Unified Customer Profile page for accounts and individuals, which are referred to as users throughout Personalization. After you view a profile, you can see the event stream for the account or user.
Event Types: Personalization captures user activity as events. Depending on your dataset’s configuration, you see various event types.
Export Events from a Personalization Dataset: For periodic data reviews, you can export the events in a Personalization dataset to a CSV or JSON file as needed. This data helps you analyze how fields are associated with one another, and to find statistical trends. Adjust the time period for the export to get the specific data you need.
Filters and Global Goals: Establishing filters and global goals to better monitor the results of specific campaigns and gauge the impact of campaigns against overall business goals.
Create a Filter: Create filters for your dataset for use in reporting and campaign statistics. When you apply a filter, only the people who meet the filter category are included in the metrics. Global goals are the primary objectives that you want visitors or users to complete. A visitor or user completes a global goal when they join the corresponding segment. You can use filters in reporting and campaign statistics.
Filter Strategy and Planning: Create filters for use with reporting and campaign statistics, or use any default filters.
Use Filters: Use filters to view data on a more granular level. You can apply filters to data in certain reports or in campaign statistics.
Configure Marketing Cloud Personalization Gears: The gears framework in Marketing Cloud Personalization allows you to integrate Personalization with other systems, take advantage of reusable templates, and access the rich analytics data stored in Marketing Cloud Personalization. You can enable or disable individual gears. For some gears, you can configure gear settings in the UI.
Resources for Getting Started With Marketing Cloud Personalization: If you’re new to Marketing Cloud Personalization, welcome! We’re excited to have you join us on the journey to personalization greatness, and we have lots of great content to start you off on the right path.
A - F: Marketing Cloud Personalization common terms from A to F.
G - L: Marketing Cloud Personalization common terms from G to L.
M - R: Marketing Cloud Personalization common terms from M to R.
S - Z: Marketing Cloud Personalization common terms from S to Z.
Create a Goal: Global goals are the primary actions that you want visitors or users to complete on your website, SaaS app, or mobile app. Because global goals are created from segments, you must first create a segment defined with the criteria that you want to use for the global goal. Any global goal can also be used as a filter.
Global Goal Strategy and Planning: Create filters for use with reporting and campaign statistics, or use any default filters. Create global goals (primary objectives) that you want your visitors to complete.
Use Goals: Select a global goal in campaign statistics to display the number and the rate of goal completions for that global goal. Selecting a goal also adds a corresponding graph of these values over time below the summary. Global goals are recorded for all relevant activity from the time they’re created. It’s important to plan ahead and create goals before the activity you want to measure occurs.
Guardian: Make the most out of your Personalization campaigns using Guardian.
About Guardian: Guardian continuously monitors thousands of metrics that it gathers from your site, web application, or mobile app. It uses these metrics to discover current trends, identify potential issues, and surface optimization opportunities. Guardian is part of Personalization, so there’s nothing to set up or configure for it to recognize what's important to your business.
Guardian Metric Types: Personalization’s Guardian constantly monitors your site for several metrics. Understanding what Guardian is measuring is critical to understanding the information it displays about your site or your app.
Adjust Guardian Notification Settings: You can adjust Guardian notification settings to customize the email alerts you receive based on what’s most important to you. Guardian automatically sends notification emails to anyone @mentioned using the Add Comment feature for any metrics.
View Guardian Signals: Signals are Guardian’s way of alerting you when a metric falls outside of a predicted range for the seasonal daily and weekly activity for your site and dataset. Using signals, Guardian can provide either positive or negative indications of how metrics are impacting your digital property.
Use Guardian Topics: Guardian topics are groups of user behaviors that Guardian uses to predict positive or negative impacts on your website.
Hotel Gear Integration: The Hotel Gear is a data model you can use to feed data from your hotel booking systems into Marketing Cloud Personalization. You can use the data for segmentation, as well as for campaign and promotion targeting.
About the Hotel Gear: The Hotel Gear is part of the Personalization ETL framework for ETL (extract, transform, and load data) jobs. The Hotel Gear includes two ETLs (Booking and Booking Add-Ons) and a set of rules available for segmentation, campaign, and promotion targeting.
Activate the Hotel Gear: Activate the Hotel Gear to bring in data from your hotel booking systems. The Hotel Gear is dataset-specific, so you must activate it for each dataset that has campaigns or promotions that you want to target with booking system data. You send booking system data by the Booking ETL data feed.
Booking Add-On ETL: You can send booking add-on transaction data from your hotel booking system to Personalization using the Booking Add-On ETL.
Booking Add-On ETL File Schema: If you send booking add-on data from your hotel booking system to Personalization, configure your file according to the Booking Add-On ETL file schema.
Update a Booking: You can use the Booking ETL data feed to update booking information in Personalization, such as updating a check-in time that wasn’t in the initial booking.
Booking ETL: You can send data from your hotel booking system to Personalization using the Booking ETL data feed.
Guidelines for Sending Multiple Identities in a Booking ETL File: If you use the multiple identities system, you must include at least one identity attribute in the Booking ETL file. You can send multiple identity attributes for a single bookingID by adding multiple identity attribute columns in the file.
Booking ETL File Schema: If you send data from your hotel booking system to Personalization, configure your file according to the Booking ETL file schema.
Hotel Rules: Use hotel rules for web and server-side campaign targeting, or for segmenting customers. You can group or target customers based on traveler details. For example, hotel rules can consider travel party size, booking status, scheduled check-in or check-out time, number of nights’ stay over a time range, or add-ons purchased.
About Hotel Rules: Learn more about hotel rules used in the Hotel Gear integration.
Create a Hotel Rules Segment: Build segments using hotel rules. Segment customers based on such factors as travel party size, booking status, the number of nights someone stays over a time range, or the add-ons the customer purchased. Use the Hotel rules segment for campaign targeting in mobile or email campaigns.
Use Hotel Rules for Web and Server-Side Campaign Targeting: Use hotel rules for web and server-side campaign targeting. Target customers based on traveler details. For example, hotel rules can consider travel party size, booking status, scheduled check-in or check-out time, number of nights’ stay over a time range, or add-ons purchased.
Unified Profiles and Identity Management: The concept of individual identity plays an essential role in personalizing your customer experiences. Personalization aggregates all your customer data in one place for analysis and personalization purposes. The aggregated customer data helps you understand each of your customers on an individual level so you can engage with them more effectively across your various channels. Personalization uses specific identifiers to determine how to process web events, API events, and channel events to identify and aggregate users from various sources.
Unique User Profiles: To provide a unique experience for each of your customers, Marketing Cloud Personalization identifies each customer with a user profile. However, as users engage with your various channels, it’s possible to end up with multiple user profiles for the same person. When identity data comes from different sources, Personalization attempts to merge the information into a Unified Customer Profile.
Identity System Setup for the Event API: With Personalization’s identity system, you can configure the identifiers in the Event API to create Unified Customer Profiles for each of your customers. To merge user profiles from various sources, you designate an identity type to use when matching users between the Event API and Personalization. You can use multiple identifiers in the Event API.
Identity System for Mobile Apps: The Personalization identity system enables you to select a default identity attribute to match users between your mobile application and Personalization. Personalization uses only one identity attribute in looking up and merging mobile app events.
Configure the Identity System for Mobile Apps: Select the identity attribute that Personalization uses for identity lookup and merging user profiles in mobile apps. If you have active mobile app campaigns, changing this setting can impact the content that appears for those campaigns.
Identity System Setup for Open Time Email: To create unified customer profiles for each of your customers, use Personalization’s identity system to configure the identifiers in your Open Time Email campaigns. To merge user profiles from various sources, you designate an identity type to use when matching users between your email service provider and Personalization. You can use only one identity type. If you send multiple identifiers in an Open Time Email campaign, Personalization ignores all but the designated identity type.
Troubleshooting Identity System Issues: Review these troubleshooting tips if you’re experiencing general identity system configuration issues or problems with user merges.
Troubleshoot User Merges in the Identity System: If you’ve confirmed that your Personalization identity system is configured correctly but users aren’t merging as expected, review these tips and considerations.
Identity Types and Attributes: Personalization’s identity system uses deterministic matching to create a Unified Customer Profile for each of your customers. Specific identifiers, called identity types, determine how to process web events, API events, and channel events to identify users from various sources. Personalization includes several built-in identity types, such as email address and customer ID. If the built-in identity types don’t meet the needs of your organization, you can create additional identity types.
Built-In Identity Types: Identity types are specific identifiers that determine how Personalization processes web events, API events, and channel events to identify users from various sources. Personalization includes several built-in identity types, such as email address and customer ID. The built-in identity types don’t require configuration other than setting up event capture mechanisms, such as the sitemap or ETL jobs.
Create an Identity Type: Personalization includes several built-in identity types, such as email address and customer ID. However, if the built-in identity types don’t meet the needs of your organization, you can create three additional identity types. After you create an identity type, you can’t edit it or delete it.
Merge User Profiles: One of Personalization’s key goals is to identify each of your customers with a Unified Customer Profile so that you can provide unique personalized experiences. However, as users engage with your various channels, it’s possible to end up with multiple user profiles for the same person. When identity data comes from different sources, Personalization uses specific identifiers to attempt to merge that data into a Unified Customer Profile. There’s no way to split a merged user profile.
Identity Merge Scenarios: How merging occurs depends on the identity types Personalization receives.
User Profile Merge Logic: How Personalization merges two or more user profiles depends on whether or not those profiles share identity types.
Set Up the Identity System for the Salesforce Interactions SDK: To create unified customer profiles for each of your customers, use Personalization’s identity system to configure the identifiers in the Marketing Cloud Personalization module of the Salesforce Interactions SDK. To merge user profiles from various sources, you designate an identity type to use when matching users between channels. You can use multiple identifiers in a web event.
Merging Logic in the Salesforce Interactions SDK: One of Personalization’s key goals is to identify each of your customers with a Unified Customer Profile so that you can provide unique personalized experiences. However, as users engage with your various channels, it’s possible to end up with multiple user profiles for the same person. The Marketing Cloud Personalization module of the Salesforce Interactions SDK supports anonymous and named user profiles by using a first-party cookie to track user behavior on your website. A user profile can transition from anonymous to named based on the setup of the identity types in your Salesforce Interactions SDK.
Integrate with Other Products: Exchange data between Marketing Cloud Personalization and other systems, including other Salesforce products.
TLS Trust and Marketing Cloud Personalization: Marketing Cloud Personalization always employs SSL/TLS and rotates its certificates regularly. All Marketing Cloud Personalization certificates chain to Certificate Authorities (CAs) included on the Mozilla Server Authentication (SSL/TLS) Root Certificates list.
Block Internal Traffic from Logs: You can block internal traffic and behavior from Marketing Cloud Personalization’s logs. For example, you can block internal users who log in to your customer's portals, such Customer Success employees logging in for training. Blocking is by user ID, which can differ from username and email address.
AI-Powered Personalization: Marketing Cloud Personalization uses advanced machine learning algorithms to capture a deep understanding of your business and your users. Einstein Recipes and Einstein Decisions use those algorithms to present personalized recommendations and offer the most relevant experiences to your users in real time.
Benefits of Marketing Cloud Next for Personalization: Marketing Cloud Next for Personalization enables you to extend your Marketing Cloud Personalization data to Data 360 without affecting your existing Marketing Cloud Personalization setup and infrastructure.
What to Know About Exporting Your Catalog Data: The catalog data export tool enables you to export your entire Marketing Cloud Personalization catalog to a CSV file for use in Data 360 sandboxes. Make sure to review this information to understand what is exported, and where it goes.
Metadata Transfer Data Kits and Contents: The .zip file created by the metadata transfer tool contains two data kits–a profile & engagement data kit and a catalog data kit.
Profile Data Stream Bundle Details: The profile bundle data streams contain all necessary metadata to recreate profile objects and catalog objects, and all required Amazon S3 connector streams for catalog objects and user attributes.
Web Data Stream Bundle Details: The web data streams bundle contains all mapped web data streams, along with your web schema definition.
What to Know About Transferring the Data Model: The Marketing Cloud Personalization metadata download tool extracts information from your data model and adds all necessary components as Data 360 metadata to a .zip file. The tool also builds and includes data kits for deploying the metadata to Data 360. The data model transfers the data using two data stream bundles–one for a web bundle data streams and another for profile bundle data streams.
Download the Marketing Cloud Personalization Data Model and Data 360 Data Kit: Use the Marketing Cloud Personalization data model download tool to generate a .zip file containing the Marketing Cloud Personalization data model as Data 360 metadata. This tool also generates a data kit with Data 360 objects and setup infrastructure.
Export the Marketing Cloud Personalization Catalog: Use the catalog data export tool to create CSV files containing your Marketing Cloud Personalization catalog data. This data includes the product, article, blog, or similar data objects along with all associated fields.
Transferring Marketing Cloud Personalization Metadata: Transfer Marketing Cloud Personalization data model to Data 360 with the assistance of the data model download tool. This purpose-built tool generates a .zip file of your Marketing Cloud Personalization catalog model as Data 360 metadata. You can then use this file to transfer metadata to Data 360 using data kit deployment.
Marketing Cloud Next for Personalization Requirements: Marketing Cloud Next for Personalization is intended only for customers currently using Marketing Cloud Personalization, and requires the use of a specific edition and certain Salesforce products.
Sitemap and Data Ingestion: Use these guidelines and descriptions when modifying sitemap event types, custom catalog attributes, content zone properties, and replacing campaign response with Web Personalization Manager and sitemap transformers.
Available Utility Functions: Though the SalesforceInteractions.mcis namespace is removed in Salesforce Personalization, many other utility functions remain available through other namespaces. These utility objects and their methods work the same way in both SDKs.
Sitemap Consent Management: Both the Marketing Cloud Personalization and Data 360 Web SDKs provide APIs for managing user consent preferences. Use these examples to update consent status, retrieve current consents, and listen for consent change events in your Data 360 sitemap.
Content Zone Handling Differences: How content zone handling is configured is different between the Marketing Cloud Personalization and Data 360 SDKs.
Marketing Cloud Personalization Sitemap Conversion: The Marketing Cloud Personalization sitemap and the Data 360 sitemap are very similar in construction. However, certain Marketing Cloud sitemap components are incompatible with the Data 360 sitemap. These technical differences require modification before using the sitemap in Data 360.
Cookie and Identity SDK Differences: The Marketing Cloud Personalization and Salesforce Personalization SDK differ in what identity cookies they use and how cookie security is configured. Anonymous ID management configuration is identical for both SDKs.
Deprecated Methods: Certain methods that exist in the Marketing Cloud Personalization SDK aren’t included in the Data 360 SDK, because they aren’t used by Salesforce Personalization. Use this reference to determine what to use instead.
Sitemap Initialization and Module Settings: The Marketing Cloud Personalization Web SDK and Data 360 Web SDK initialization patterns differ. The Data 360 Web SDK also includes specialized modules to enable specific functions like Web Personalization Manager and flicker defense. Use these examples when modifying the Data 360 Web SDK.
Sitemap Conversion Quicklook: This table groups sitemap modifications into general areas, and provides guidelines for necessary changes in those areas. When converting the Marketing Cloud Personalization sitemap for use in Data 360, refer back to this article for general guidance, or use it as a checklist to help track modifications as you check them.
Moved or Renamed Features: These Marketing Cloud Personalization Web SDK features were either moved or renamed in the Data 360 Web SDK.
Sitemap Namespace Settings: When modifying the sitemap, keep these namespace and global object settings in mind.
Removed Features: These Marketing Cloud Personalization Web SDK features were removed from the Data 360 Web SDK. They have no direct equivalent in Salesforce Personalization.
Troubleshooting Your Sitemap Conversion: We’ve outlined many of the modifications the sitemap converter tool makes to a Marketing Cloud Personalization sitemap during conversion. When reviewing changes to your converted sitemap, use this information as general guidance to locate areas requiring manual intervention or added attention.
Using the Conversion Report: Following sitemap conversion, the sitemap conversion tool provides a report detailing the changes made, any errors during the conversion process, and other areas of the sitemap that require added attention.
Convert a Marketing Cloud Personalization Sitemap: Start the process of converting an existing Marketing Cloud Personalization sitemap for use in Data 360. The sitemap converter tool makes modifications to the sitemap, making its configuration more compatible with Data 360.
Sitemap Converter Expectations: Use the sitemap converter tool to identify and automatically modify components in a Marketing Cloud sitemap that are known to be incompatible with Data 360. The resulting output provides a sitemap that’s more closely aligned with Data 360 sitemap components and construction.
Retrieving an Existing Sitemap: Before you can convert a Marketing Cloud Personalization sitemap using the sitemap converter too, you must retrieve it.
Mobile Campaigns: With Personalization mobile campaigns, you can build and deploy personalized experiences for your Android and iOS mobile apps using native app code, including Java, Objective-C, and Swift. Before you can create a mobile campaign, you must complete the Personalization Mobile SDK implementation.
About Mobile Campaigns: There are three types of mobile campaigns you can create with Marketing Cloud Personalization: In-App Message, Push, and Data campaigns.
Create a Mobile Data Campaign: Create Mobile Data campaigns so your iOS and Android apps can process Personalization campaign data. Personalization triggers campaigns and delivers the data to your app.
Dynamic Message Content: You can use dynamic message content in your mobile campaigns to display the value of variables like mobile app user name, location, and email dynamically.
Use Dynamic Values in Mobile Campaigns: You can add dynamic values, such as the mobile app user’s name, location, and email, to all mobile campaign types.
Add a Fallback Value for Dynamic Content: If dynamic content doesn’t appear because there’s no correlating value, you can add a fallback value that shows instead.
Mobile Experience-Level Rules: For all types of mobile campaigns, if you set experience-level rules, each experience needs a qualifying rule. Mobile app users who qualify for the campaign see the first experience in the list for which they qualify. If you set a control percentage, it applies only to users who have qualified for the experience.
Add Mobile Experience Targeting Rules: Experience-level rules are available only for rule-based campaigns. They control qualification criteria of campaign experiences based on segments and the actions of mobile app users.
Mobile Campaign-Wide Rules: For all types of mobile campaigns, campaign-wide rules control visibility at the campaign level based on things such as segments, visit count, visit duration, user actions, and date and time. Set rules at the campaign level when you want to holistically control how a campaign displays for qualified mobile app users.
Create a Mobile In-App Message Campaign: You can use a Mobile In-App Message campaign to build and deploy messages within mobile apps. Mobile In-App Message campaigns are similar to the infobar messages you can add to your website. You build, manage, and deploy Mobile In-App Message campaigns from within Personalization so you get the same real-time data and personalization you rely on with your other campaigns. You don't need an engineer's help or App Store approval to deploy new or changed messages.
Mobile Message-Level Rules: Message-level rules control visibility at the message level based on mobile app user actions and display frequency. For Mobile In-App Message and Mobile Push campaigns, you can use the message level to define who sees your message and when.
Add Mobile Message Targeting Rules: After you create a Mobile In-App Message or Mobile Data campaign, you can add message rules and promote content in Message Rules. Message rules control when a mobile in-app message shows for a visitor. For example, show the message when a visitor takes a specific action. Or only show the message a certain number of times per visit, during a specific time period, or all of the time. Use Promoted Content to promote a specific item or multiple items either by selecting the item or by using Einstein Recipes algorithms or Einstein Decisions AI.
Create a Mobile Push Campaign: Create a Mobile Push campaign to send push notifications to your iOS and Android app users. For Android users, the campaigns support Firebase Cloud Messaging (FCM) and require an app integration with the Personalization Android SDK 1.3 and later. For iOS users, the campaigns support Apple Push Notification service (APNs) and Firebase Cloud Messaging (FCM), and require an app integration with Personalization iOS SDK 1.3 and later.
Create a Mobile Push Campaign: Create a mobile push campaign to send push notifications to your iOS and Android app users.
Add a Mobile Push Frequency: To prevent spamming a mobile app user with excessive alerts from a Mobile Push campaign, you can limit the number of notifications a user can receive within a certain time frame.
Complete Mobile Push Setup: Before you publish a Mobile Push campaign, you must generate and upload a certificate for Apple Push Notification service (APNs) or Firebase Cloud Messaging (FCM). If you enter credentials for both APNs and FCM, you must pick one when you add the app to a Mobile Push campaign. To prevent duplicate notifications, Personalization only sends to one platform.
Use Mobile Campaign Rules: A critical part of a good personalization strategy is giving mobile app users information related to what they’re doing or feeling in the moment. Use campaign, experience, and message rules to deliver your message to the right person at the best time for them.
Schedule a Mobile Campaign: You can use the Set Schedule option to define when your Mobile In-App Message or Mobile Data campaign shows to qualified mobile app users. You can configure start and end points. You can also display your campaign only during specific hours for a time period or for all time.
Add Mobile Campaign Targeting Rules: Campaign-wide rules control the visibility of mobile campaigns based on things like segments, visit count and duration, and user actions. Set rules at the campaign level when you want to holistically control how a campaign displays.
Summer '23 and Earlier Marketing Cloud Personalization Updates: View Marketing Cloud Personalization features and updates released between January 2021 and the Salesforce Summer 2023 release. For the latest, most detailed release information, see the Marketing Cloud Release Notes.
Personalization Account Settings: During your Marketing Cloud Personalization implementation, your development and marketing teams work with your Salesforce account manager to configure the Personalization account settings for your organization. Within those settings, you define and configure your data model and integration setup. You can then access and adjust key configurations.
Personalization IP Addresses: Marketing Cloud Personalization uses several IP addresses that you can flag to allow access for security reasons, or to exclude from data consumption tracking.
Attribute Update Logic: You can use multiple sources to update attributes. Attributes retain values from authenticated sources such as ETL or Channel: Server (/authevent API) over lower priority sources, such as the web.
Campaign Promotions: Offer your customers special deals or advertise specific products with campaign promotions in Marketing Cloud Personalization. A promotion is an image that encourages customers to click through for more details. You can deploy promotion images on a web page or in an email, including call-to-action messages or incentives to engage customers and achieve specific business goals. You can also use promotions with Einstein Decisions for rule-based decisions and machine learning to target customers in multiple channels.
Add Assets to a Promotion: For a promotion to appear in a campaign, it must have an associated asset, such as an uploaded image or a URL that points to an external image.
Create a Custom Promotion Attribute: Use custom attributes to determine which promotions appear in a campaign. Similar to other catalog item types, custom attributes can also be returned as the output of a decision. When creating a promotion, adding a custom attribute is optional, but it’s recommended.
Create a Promotion: Create a campaign promotion to offer special deals and promote specific products. When creating a promotion, the only required information is the name and the URL of the landing page. For a promotion to return in a campaign, you must have an asset associated with the promotion. Adding eligibility criteria, promotion attributes, and related catalog objects is recommended. A promotion attribute determines which promotions appear in a campaign. Personalization uses related catalog objects to track and measure customer affinities across item types in your catalog.
Promotion and Asset Limits: Marketing Cloud Personalization has limits per dataset for promotions, segments, and assets.
Non-Image-Based Promotions: Use a non-image-based promotion with Einstein Decisions to return strings of text as decisions, such as a call-to-action selection. Typically, you use a non-image-based promotion with a server-side campaign, and the Personalization response is a string that the client computer uses. The process for creating a non-image-based promotion is the same as an image-based promotion. Depending on your template options, you can also define a promotion fallback.
Create a Related Catalog Object for a Promotion: Use related catalog objects to track and measure customer affinities across item types in your catalog. Related catalog objects provide Einstein Decisions with data about the promotion to improve the quality of its decisioning. Related catalog objects are optional in promotions, but they’re recommended for providing more accurate recommendations.
How to Access Reports: Access Personalization reports to view sophisticated yet easy-to-understand analytics, statistics, and attribution metrics. By default, Personalization shows the Reports Dashboard as the first page.
Activity Reports: Activity Reports show a variety of metrics that are tracked on your site. You see a real-time list of recent visitors, the path that they took, and their actions while visiting.
Actions Report: Use the Actions report to see activity tracked by Personalization, organized by the actions tracked in the dataset.
Cohorts Report: Cohorts help you visualize the way your site visitors flow from one activity or status to another over an extended period. You see how the prevalence of certain goal activities changes over time so you can examine the net effectiveness of multiple campaigns pushing toward the same goal. You can also monitor how the general traffic to certain page groups changes to detect migrations away from or towards certain parts of your site.
Day and Time Report: Visually analyze trends or traffic spikes using the Day and Time report. This report provides view options for total visitor count, average length of visit time, total revenue, average revenue across each visit, and the bounce rate. Each dot on the graph represents an hour in a day.
Event Stream Report: View the Event Stream report to see a queue of all the events that occur within your dataset in real-time, automatically refreshed every 15 seconds. You can add filters for UserID, Company, and Event Type. And you can filter for a channel audience member, referred to as a user in Personalization.
Funnels Report: Use the Funnels report to view the stages or steps your visitors take, and the order in which they take them, based on a series of actions. When you configure a funnel, you select and order the actions that a user takes to move through the funnel.
Modules Report: Group actions using the Modules report to see aggregate stats across the group. You can add actions to more than one module.
Paths Report: See how visitors navigate your site using the Paths report, so you can better target your communications and content strategy.
Recent Visitors Report: The Recent Visitors report shows the visitors who came to your site since the beacon was activated, updated in real time.
Report Categories: Marketing Cloud Personalization provides reports that cover a number of categories. These reports provide metrics about user-focused activities, results and goal completions, customer visits and engagement, and metrics to help manage your Marketing Cloud Personalization product consumption.
Change a Report Lookback Period: The default lookback period is the past week to the current day. You can change the lookback period for most reports. The new lookback period persists for the session or until you make other changes.
Create a Cohorts Report: Create Cohorts reports to see how certain customer types completed an activity over a time period. For example, group visitors by the week that they first visited your site, and then see how long it took each group to complete an activity such as View Item.
Read Cohort Reports: Cohort reports give quick visual cues about a cohort’s pattern. Use the report to group visitors by different time periods, so you can view the data from different perspectives.
Use Cohorts Reports: Use Cohorts reports to visualize the way your site visitors flow from one activity or status to another over an extended period.
Reports Dashboard: Gain insights about visitor and campaign activity on your site using the Reports Dashboard. Depending on your industry or function, the Reports Dashboard provides different sections. If you track transactions in the Personalization system, the dashboard shows Total Stats first. If you don’t track transactions in the Personalization system, Activity appears first. If your site tracks content views or product purchases, the dashboard shows the Items section at the bottom.
Modify the Consumption Report Time Range: You can view historical consumption data in 12-month increments. The report shows data for the past 12 months from the month and year that you select.
Results Reports: Understanding the metrics for revenue, the purchase funnel, and goal completions helps you optimize your personalization initiatives. Results reports include the Revenue Report, the Purchase Funnel Report, the Goal Comparison Report, and the Goal Completions Report.
Goal Comparison Report: Use the Goal Comparison Report to view a comparison of goal completions based on a filter.
Goal Completions Report: Use the Goal Completions report to view total goal completions and the completion rate.
Purchase Funnel Report: Use the Purchase Funnel Report to compare segments of visitors against all visitors based on segment membership, product views, adds to cart, and purchases.
Revenue Report: Use the Revenue report to compare first-time and returning visitors against various metrics.
Usage Reports: Monitor org total and dataset-specific Personalization product metrics, proactively manage Personalization usage, and view historical Personalization product consumption data.
Consumption Report: Use the Consumption report to track org-wide total and dataset-specific consumption metrics. The metrics include monthly unique visitors, named individual profiles, batch export and import of data, cross-channel triggers, campaign responses, and events.
User Deletion Impact on Reports: In Marketing Cloud Personalization, some reports run on cumulative statistics, whereas others run on data that's aggregated across individual records. Because reports can use different data gathering or accumulation methods, natural reporting discrepancies can occur when individual records are deleted from the dataset.
Visits Reports: The Visits section of Personalization reports shows metrics on visitor behavior, visitor technologies, and referring sources. Each of the three reports in the Visits section offer multiple views.
Behavior Report: Use the Behavior report to view the number of new versus returning visitors based on visits, engagement, logged-in status, and purchases. You can define the date range and apply one filter to narrow the results by campaign or by other criteria.
Referring Sources Report: Personalization starts the moment a visitor arrives on your site, so you want to know how they got there. Use the Referring Sources report to view how people arrived on your site so that you can customize your messaging for each visitor.
Technology Report: Use the Technology report to gain insights on the types of browsers and devices that your visitors use when they view your site. You can define the date range and apply a filter to narrow the results.
Integrate Marketing Cloud Personalization with Data 360: Share data between Marketing Cloud Personalization and Salesforce Data 360. Enrich Data 360 customer profiles with user profile data and events from Personalization. Target your Personalization web and mobile campaigns using Data 360 segments.
Configure Anonymous Data Export to Data 360: By default, Marketing Cloud Personalization sends only named users and events to Data 360. You can configure Personalization to send anonymous user and event data as well.
Personalization Data Integration Considerations: Before integrating Marketing Cloud Personalization with Data 360, consider each data component so you can maximize the strengths of both sides of the integration solution. Identify which data to feed into which system so you can architect your implementation appropriately.
Export Personalization Data to Data 360: Enrich Salesforce Data 360 customer profiles with user profile and event data from Marketing Cloud Personalization.
Integrate Marketing Cloud Personalization with Salesforce CRM: Share data between Marketing Cloud Personalization and Salesforce CRM. Send Personalization user and visitor information to Salesforce CRM. Receive CRM data associated with text fields, dropdown menus, numeric values, or segments.
Plan Data Sharing Between Personalization and Salesforce CRM: Before initializing data sharing, decide what data you want to exchange between Salesforce CRM and Personalization and how you want to match data for merging. After initialization, Marketing Cloud Personalization shares data with Salesforce CRM on a nightly basis. Contacts and accounts are shared automatically, but leads sharing is optional.
Troubleshoot Personalization Integration with Salesforce CRM: Troubleshoot common issues with the integration between Marketing Cloud Personalization and Salesforce CRM. Changes to any Salesforce CRM security settings—at the OAuth App level, the Salesforce User level, or the Field Security level—can disrupt the integration.
Show Personalization Data in Salesforce CRM: In Salesforce CRM, display data that was shared by Marketing Cloud Personalization. For shared contacts, accounts, and leads, configure the applicable record layout in Salesforce CRM.
Integrate Marketing Cloud Personalization with CRM Analytics: In Salesforce CRM Analytics, connect to Marketing Cloud Personalization’s Data Warehouse and explore personalization data. Import prediction scores from CRM Analytics into Personalization using ETL data feeds.
Integrate Marketing Cloud Personalization with Experience Cloud: Personalize, make recommendations, and track user behavior in Salesforce Experience Cloud using standard Marketing Cloud Personalization functionality, such as banner recommendations and global templates.
Integrate Personalization with Account Engagement: Share data between Marketing Cloud Personalization and Marketing Cloud Account Engagement. Send segments and Open Time email components to Account Engagement. Receive ETL data feeds from Account Engagement for user, user attributes, and campaign events data.
Integrate Personalization with Advertising: Share data from Marketing Cloud Personalization to Marketing Cloud Advertising. Send Personalization segments into Marketing Cloud Engagement using Automation Studio so you can use the data for retargeting across paid or social channels through Advertising.
Integrate Personalization with Audience Studio: Share data between Marketing Cloud Personalization and Marketing Cloud Audience Studio. Send file-based data to Audience Studio. Receive data from Audience Studio via client-side sync and ETL data feeds.
Integrate Personalization with Automation Studio: Share data between Marketing Cloud Personalization and Marketing Cloud Automation Studio. Import data from Automation Studio using ETL data feeds. Export Personalization segments to Automation Studio.
Integrate Marketing Cloud Personalization with Intelligence: In Marketing Cloud Intelligence, explore personalization data in Marketing Cloud Personalization’s Data Warehouse. Marketing Cloud Intelligence supports advanced roll-up analysis and deeper media spend analytics.
Integrate Marketing Cloud Personalization with Sales and Service Cloud: The Personalization for Sales and Service Cloud managed package connects the experience of a call center to the machine learning recipes in Marketing Cloud Personalization. You can have more meaningful conversations with customers and prospects because you have an understanding of what each person is truly interested in.
Configure an API Token for Personalization Experiences: You need an API token when integrating Marketing Cloud Personalization with Sales and Service Cloud. Use API tokens to authenticate and authorize all API requests to Personalization's REST API.
Install Personalization for Sales and Service Cloud: Download the Personalization for Sales and Service Cloud managed package from AppExchange to access real-time product recommendations and customer affinities and events directly in Sales and Service Cloud. Also get near real-time Sales and Service Cloud data in the Personalization platform.
Configure Server-Side Campaigns for Next-Best-Offers: To use the next-best offers component, you must configure server-side campaigns in Marketing Cloud Personalization. A developer must create the server-side template.
Mapping Values From Sales and Service Cloud to Personalization: Using the Personalization action element, you select a dataset to send Sales and Service Cloud data to. You can then map data from Sales and Service Cloud to identities, user attributes, and profiles to attributes or profile object types in the Personalization dataset.
Add the Customer Event Stream Component to a Contacts or Leads Page: Watch your customers interact with your business in real-time as well as view historical activities right on a Contacts or Leads page with the event stream component of the Personalization managed package. Events are based on the data provided by the Interactions SDK or Sitemap. For custom events, you can view event name, URL (if applicable), timestamp, and channel.
Define Segments for Marketing Cloud Personalization: Audiences are the specific individuals, referred to as users, or accounts, such as companies and organizations, that qualify to be members of a segment. You can create segments to group audiences according to a set of criteria that you define.
Create A/B Test Segments for Marketing Cloud Personalization: Use A/B test segments for tasks like wanting to ensure a user falls into a specific segment across multiple campaigns, or to split campaign traffic into intervals, such as halves, thirds, or quarters.
About A/B Test Segments: Using A/B test segments in your campaigns gives you additional flexibility and control over how the Personalization system distributes traffic, and which users see which experiences. Scenarios that work well with A/B test segments typically involve more than one campaign.
Create an A/B Test Segment: Create an A/B test segment to ensure a user falls into a specific segment across multiple campaigns. For example, you can also use an A/B test segment to split campaign traffic into intervals, such as halves, thirds, or quarters.
A/B Test Intervals: Learn how A/B test segments can split campaign traffic into intervals, such as halves, thirds, and quarters.
About Audience Segments: A segment is a real-time grouping of users or accounts, based on criteria you define using a set of segment categories and rules. With segments, you can add another layer of personalization to your campaigns, and gain deeper insight into your customers. Segments can even include groups you've already defined in your CRM, DMP, or marketing automation platform.
Segment Categories and Rules: Marketing Cloud Personalization provides various categories and accompanying rules for use with segments. When a user interacts with one of your channels, the Personalization system identifies the segments they belong to based on real-time session activity. Because segment updates happen in real time, membership changes occur immediately.
Clone a Segment for Marketing Cloud Personalization: You can clone a segment so you can reuse all or part of it in another campaign. This approach saves you time because you don't have to create an entire segment.
Create a Segment Based on Account Profile Attributes: Use account profile attributes to create segments for your campaigns that target accounts based on those attributes. This feature is available only if your account is set up to market to businesses.
Create a Segment Based on a Specific Action Count: Create segments for your campaigns to target users who complete one or more actions a specific number of times. To capture users who complete an action a specific number of times, create two action rules that relate to each other.
Create a Segment Based on B2B Detect Data: Create segments for your campaigns that target users according to IP data sources and NAICS industry codes. This feature is available only with B2B Detect. Using B2B Detect, you can create personalized calls-to-action, case studies, and banner images based on a user’s industry or company name. You use three location rules to create the segment for B2B Detect data.
Create Manual Segments for Marketing Cloud Personalization: Manual segments consist of a fixed, specified list of users, as opposed to rule-based segments, whose users are determined in real time based on a defined set of criteria. Create manual segments to group known users, or accounts, based on data that the Personalization system doesn’t collect or data that’s available through third-party integrations.
Create a Nested Segment for Marketing Cloud Personalization: A nested segment is a segment that excludes or includes at least one existing segment. You can combine segments into a nested segment by selecting at least one existing segment to use as an exclusion or inclusion.
Create a Segment Based on User Location: Create segments for your campaigns to target users based on location, such as their ZIP codes, cities, regions, countries, and ISPs. If you have B2B Detect, you can use location-based segments to target visitors from specific companies and industries. Location-based segments are also helpful in understanding the data that the Personalization system captures about your site.
Set Up Identity Types for Segment Exports: You must set up the identity types in the Personalization system to support exporting Personalization segments to Journey Builder.
Export a Segment to Journey Builder: The Personalization system constantly gathers data about your users, your catalog, and other systems through channel events, API events, and data feeds to update segments in real time. Use segments to add users to journeys in Journey Builder within moments of the data changing as they join segments. Complete the following steps to export a segment to Journey Builder.
Export Segments to Marketing Cloud Engagement: Configure a process in Automation Studio to automatically load CSV export files from the Personalization system to data extensions in Marketing Cloud Engagement. Complete these tasks in sequence.
Set Up Journey Builder for Segment Exports: To support exporting Personalization segments to Journey Builder, perform setup tasks in Journey Builder for Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Export a Segment to Marketing Cloud Engagement: Set up a nightly feed or a one-time export to synchronize Personalization segments with Marketing Cloud Engagement. For example, you can synchronize a segment to target a specific group with an email communication.
Export a Segment to the Marketing Cloud Personalization SFTP: Set up a nightly feed or a one-time export to synchronize segments with the Personalization SFTP. You can then use these segments in other systems to target cross-channel communications. For example, you can synchronize a segment to Marketing Cloud Engagement to target a specific group with an email communication.
Find a Segment’s ID: You use a segment’s ID when defining its automation process in Automation Studio. There are also instances when you need a segment’s ID for an ETL data feed.
Create a Target Data Extension in Marketing Cloud Engagement: Set up a target data extension in Marketing Cloud Engagement to map the fields in the segment that you’re exporting. After you create the data extension, save the external key to set up data extracts in Automation Studio.
Segment Properties: A segment is a real-time grouping of users, or accounts, based on criteria you define using a set of segment categories and rules. With segments, you can add another layer of personalization to your campaigns, and gain deeper insight into your customers.
Disable a Scheduled Segment Export: Stop a scheduled segment export. The Segment File Exporter saves your configuration so it's easy to enable the sync again.
Bulk Delete Profiles By Segment: Permanently delete all profiles in a selected segment from Marketing Cloud Personalization. Bulk deletion reduces the number of named profiles in the system.
Steps to Bulk Delete Profiles: Complete these steps to permanently delete profiles that are members of a Personalization segment. Once deleted, the user data cannot be recovered.
Identify User Segment Membership: Identifying which segments a user belongs to. This information can help troubleshoot certain problems, for example, when a user isn’t receiving a certain message, or isn’t qualifying for a specific campaign.
Server-Side Campaigns: Server-side campaigns integrate testing and personalization at the server-to-server level. While Marketing Cloud Personalization handles the campaign logic, you need a developer to write the code to call the appropriate APIs and provide information about the website visitor.
About Server-Side Campaigns: Learn about how server-side campaigns work and about implementation roles and responsibilities.
Create a Server-Side Campaign: You can create server-side campaigns to personalize experiences across multiple channels with a single campaign.
Publish a Server-Side Campaign: After you test your campaign thoroughly, publish it so that it’s visible to qualified users.
Manage Access and User Data: Administrators control user and Salesforce employee access to Personalization. Access to Personalization starts within Marketing Cloud Engagement, but administrators manage user roles and permissions in Personalization. Administrators also manage user data changes, SFTP users and files, and two-factor authentication.
Activate a User Account: A Marketing Cloud Engagement admin must enable Personalization features and add permissions for users. After this is done, a user can open Personalization in the marketing app, to finalize their account. Then, a Personalization administrator can assign role-based permissions.
User Role Permissions: You can create roles by combining dataset-specific permissions.
User Roles and Dataset Permissions: Personalization includes default roles that you can assign to users. Because roles are specific to a dataset, you can assign access to users only at the level they need. You can also create custom roles to grant particular permissions.
Default User Roles: Personalization user roles are customizable with granular permissions. Personalization includes seven roles that you can modify or delete. You can also add roles.
Create an SFTP Account: Send and receive data from an automated platform safely and securely using ETL Integration. After you create an SFTP account, add the credentials to your FTP client.
Configure an SFTP IP Allowlist: Use SFTP IP allow lists to improve system security. Using allowlists to identify individual IP addresses or ranges of IP addresses that belong to your network, Personalization can prevent bad actors from gaining SFTP access. If you don’t create an allowlist, or your allowlist is empty, Personalization accepts SFTP connections from any IP address.
Use Surveys in Web Campaigns: Use surveys to design, test, and deploy questions to your visitors and customers to gather feedback in web campaigns.
Surveys: Surveys are deployed in web campaigns. Use data collected from a survey to create user segments, enhance personalization experiences, or perform A/B tests to validate business impact.
Build Surveys: Use surveys in web campaigns to ask your site visitors questions and gather feedback.
Clone a Survey: Cloning saves time building a survey. Cloning also preserves the data integrity of a live survey that needs updates.
Create a Survey: Create a survey for a web campaign. Surveys are deployed in web campaigns, so you have access to all the targeting rules and testing capabilities in Personalization. You can use survey data to create user segments, enhance personalization experiences, A/B test to validate business impact, and analyze feedback results.
Edit a Survey: You can edit a survey to add questions, change answers, and make configuration and layout changes.
Change the Layout of Survey Answers: You can display radio group and checkbox answers horizontally or vertically and choose the order answers appear. You can also set conditions that determine when a question is visible to a respondent.
Change Survey Navigation Behavior: You can control how survey navigation buttons appear and behave. You can also change how the survey behaves when respondents click a navigation button.
Group Survey Questions Together: You can group survey questions together into sections and add visibility rules to each section by creating a panel. For example, you can group similar questions together and title the panel so the respondent understands how they’re related.
Survey Question Types: The Survey Designer Toolbox is loaded with preconfigured question types. Each question type has different options.
Add Question Visibility Conditions: All survey questions are visible to all visitors who qualify to see the survey campaign. You can use the visibility setting to make a question invisible or apply visibility conditions. Visibility conditions always take priority over the visibility setting. With visibility conditions, you can make questions appear only if respondents answer in a certain way. For example, only show a follow-up question if the respondent gave a specific answer to the initial question.
Analyze Survey Results: After a survey is live in a campaign on your site and visitors have responded, you can begin analyzing the survey feedback.
Configure a Third-Party Integration: By integrating with third-party products, you can synchronize user information that you collect and store in other applications to deliver real-time personalized experiences across channels. Specifically, this type of integration focuses on tracking incoming clicks from external, or third party, campaigns but not impressions.
View and Edit External Campaigns: After you create an external campaign for a third-party product integration, external campaigns appear in the Uncategorized folder as users begin arriving at a landing page. The external campaigns have click-throughs, but not impressions because Personalization doesn’t track impressions for external campaigns. Only the first event of a visit counts toward third-party campaign attribution.
About Integrating with Third-Party Solutions: Marketing Cloud Personalization integrates with a variety of third-party solutions (external to Salesforce). Integration options include data management platforms, email service providers, third-party campaign detection products, analytics products, content management systems, social media, and tag managers.
UTM Parameter Mapping: UTM parameters are customizable codes that you use in URLs and links to track and measure the success of various aspects of your third-party campaigns. UTM parameters can track traffic, referral sources, external campaigns, keywords, and content zones.
Triggered Campaigns: A trigger is a specific event, such as a visitor behavior or environmental change that prompts a Marketing Cloud Personalization action, such as sending an email. You can create a triggered campaign to target different user segments, provide different experiences for different users, include A/B testing, or define a campaign schedule or frequency
Behavior Filters: A user behavior filter is based on customer interaction with the trigger items. Your developer configures these item actions in your account. You can add multiple user behavior filters, and the user must meet all the criteria to qualify for the trigger.
Catalog Filters: A catalog filter is based on the catalog attributes and dimensions that you’ve assigned to the item type.
Create a Triggered Campaign: Use a triggered campaign to launch a journey when a specific action or event occurs. For example, send a promotion to a shopper who spent time viewing a product but didn’t purchase. You can recommend unread articles or products to a visitor who has spent more than 5 minutes reading about a topic. You can remind new users to complete onboarding steps, or alert sales reps when target prospects spend a certain amount of time on your site. When creating a triggered campaign, you can define when to trigger the campaign, which users to target, and which experiences to deliver.
Code Examples for Triggered Campaign Data in Marketing Cloud Engagement Emails: Marketing Cloud Personalization sends recommendations and other trigger-related catalog data, such as abandoned cart items, to Marketing Cloud Engagement in JSON format. You can render the data in your Engagement emails using Guided Template Language and Server-Side JavaScript. These code examples show how to render triggered campaign data in an email recommendations block.
Filters for Triggered Campaigns: You can apply user behavior or catalog filters for some triggered campaigns to refine qualification for trigger activation. A user behavior filter is based on customer interaction with the trigger items. A catalog filter is based on catalog attributes. For example, you can add a catalog filter to a product back in stock trigger to have it activate only if the item price is less than $100. Or, you can add a behavior filter so the trigger only activates if the user favorites the product.
Change the Frequency Limit for a Campaign: When you create a triggered campaign, you configure how many times the campaign activates for a profile during a specific time or for all time. You can change the frequency limits for an existing campaign.
View Triggered Campaign Statistics: Get insights on campaign performance and the impact on revenue and conversions. You can also see a breakdown of each phase of the triggering process to troubleshoot a failed trigger.
Triggered Campaign Results: Marketing Cloud Personalization gives you insight into the performance of your triggered campaigns.
Configure a Triggered Campaign Template: A triggered template defines the data to pass to Journey Builder. You can modify it for each campaign experience, such as which recipe to show to the qualified user. To create a triggered campaign, you must have a triggered template in your dataset. Marketing Cloud Personalization includes a standard template that you can add fields to. If you need options other than what’s included in the default template, have your developer create a template.
View Detailed Statistics for Every Triggered Campaign: View detailed graphs and charts to get insight into the effectiveness of every triggered campaign. For example, you can see information about how the campaign affected conversions and revenue. Or, you can view revenue and purchases attributed to a campaign and see details about trigger success and failure.
Browse Abandonment Trigger: Use the Browse Abandonment trigger to reengage a customer who spent time viewing a product but didn’t purchase it. A Browse Abandonment campaign activates when the customer ends their visit, is inactive for 1 hour, and satisfies trigger rules that you set. If you upload event data for the user through the Event API, the user is considered active during that event.
Cart Abandonment Trigger: Use the Cart Abandonment trigger to reengage a customer who leaves items in their cart. When a customer has at least one item in their cart, ends their visit, and is inactive for 30 minutes, they’re eligible for a Cart Abandonment trigger. This trigger activates when a user adds an item to their cart but doesn’t complete the purchase in the same web session. This trigger activates only one time for a cart, unless the user changes the cart contents. It activates again if the customer adds items, removes items, or updates item quantities in the cart.
Event Action Trigger: Use the Event Action trigger if you want to trigger a campaign based on an action instead of using a segment. This trigger activates immediately when a qualified user completes any of the actions you define.
Trigger Frequency: Frequency limits apply to the number of triggers that Marketing Cloud Personalization sends for a user profile for a specified time period.
About Trigger Frequency: You can set a limit on the number of triggers that Marketing Cloud Personalization sends for a user profile at a few levels.
Set a Global Trigger Frequency Limit: You can control how many triggers activate during a specific time across all campaigns and for every item in your catalog. For example, you can set a global trigger frequency limit to 3 times a week, 12 times a year, and 50 times maximum. This limit applies to all campaigns and items.
New Item in High-Engagement Category Trigger: Reach users when you add a catalog item in a category that they’ve expressed high interest in. This trigger checks for new items in the user’s high-engagement categories every 6 hours and activates if the user hasn’t viewed any of the items for the specified minimum view time. A high-engagement category is based on behavior criteria that you set, such as view time and a minimum number of items purchased.
Product Back in Stock Trigger: Use this trigger to reach customers when an out-of-stock product that they viewed becomes available. The user must have viewed the product while it was out of stock for a minimum amount of time within a specified number of days. The trigger checks for products that are back in stock every hour.
Product Expiring Soon Trigger: Use this trigger to reach customers when a product that they spent time viewing but didn’t purchase will no longer be available. The user must have viewed the product for a minimum amount of time within a specified number of days. Marketing Cloud Personalization uses the minimum view time to filter out customers that look at a product only for 1 second before they navigate away. Before activating the trigger, Personalization checks that the user didn’t purchase the product and that the product has at least 5 minutes until expiration.
Product Low Inventory Trigger: Use this trigger to reach customers when a product they spent time viewing but didn’t purchase has a low inventory. The user must have viewed the product for a minimum amount of time within a specified number of days. Marketing Cloud Personalization uses the minimum view time to filter out customers that look at a product only for 1 second before they navigate away. The trigger checks every hour for qualifying products that have an inventory count below the configured threshold.
Product Price Reduction Trigger: Use this trigger to reach customers when a product they viewed but didn’t purchase drops in price. The user must have viewed the in-stock product (the product’s inventory count or units in stock value is greater than zero, null, or empty) for a minimum amount of time within a specified number of days. Marketing Cloud Personalization uses a minimum view time to filter out customers that look at a product only for 1 second before they navigate away. The trigger checks every 30 minutes for qualifying products that have a price drop greater than the configured minimum price percent reduction.
Segment Membership Triggers: A segment membership trigger activates when a user joins or leaves a segment that you select. Marketing Cloud Personalization updates the segments in real time, so you can use the triggers to immediately respond to specific user actions. If you select multiple segments, the user must join or leave only one of the segments to qualify for the campaign.
Catalog Triggers: A catalog trigger activates a campaign based on updates or changes to item data in your catalog. The trigger activates after a change in your catalog, but what drives the trigger is the amount of time the user views an item before the catalog change occurs.
User Triggers: A user trigger activates a campaign based on user behavior.
Unified Account Profile: If you market to businesses, the Unified Account Profile displays aggregate information that Personalization collects about a particular account. The Unified Account Profile provides a comprehensive view of each of your accounts according to the cross-channel interactions of customers and prospects.
View a Unified Account Profile: If you market to businesses, the Unified Account Profile displays aggregate information that Personalization collects about a particular account. The information that you see depends on the type of business your administrator selects for your dataset—ecommerce, demand generation, or SaaS.
Unified Customer Profile: The Unified Customer Profile provides a comprehensive view of each of your users—visitors, customers, prospects, and subscribers—based on their interactions with your various channels.
Unified Customer Profile for Demand Generation: The Unified Customer Profile provides an overview of the information that Personalization collects about a particular user. The information that is shown depends on the type of business you select (demand generation).
Unified Customer Profile for Ecommerce: The Unified Customer Profile provides an overview of the information that Personalization collects about a particular user. The information that is shown depends on the type of business you select (ecommerce).
Unified Customer Profile for SaaS: The Unified Customer Profile provides an overview of all information that Marketing Cloud Personalization collects about a particular user. The information that displays depends on the type of business you select (SaaS).
Set the Unified Customer Profile Type: The Unified Customer Profile provides an overview of all information that Personalization collects about a particular user—or account if your organization also markets to businesses. If you market to businesses, the Unified Account Profile displays aggregate information for the account. The information that displays depends on the type of business you select—ecommerce, demand generation, or SaaS.
View a Unified Customer Profile: The Unified Customer Profile provides an overview of all information that Personalization collects about a particular user. The information that you see depends on the type of business your administrator selects for your dataset—ecommerce, demand generation, or SaaS.
Consider Personalization Use Cases: Browse the Use Case Library to look for ideas and inspiration for your own personalization solutions. The use cases represent popular examples. But they’re not templates, nor do they encompass the full range of possible use cases for your business. Before you commit to implementing one or more personalization use cases, determine whether the use case aligns with your business goals, priorities, and other suitability criteria.
Demand Generation Use Cases: Collect high-quality sales leads with personalization use cases that other customers have used in demand generation campaigns.
Open-Time Email Use Cases: Drive impact via email. Check out these example personalization use cases that other customers have used in open-time email campaigns.
Financial Services Use Cases: Drive impact with personalization use cases that other customers have used for financial services campaigns.
Health and Life Sciences Use Cases: Drive impact with personalization use cases that other customers have used for health and life sciences campaigns.
Journey Builder Triggered Use Cases: Drive impact with customer journeys. Check out these example personalization use cases that other customers have used in Journey Builder triggered campaigns.
Retail Use Cases: Drive conversions, build long-term customer loyalty, and remain competitive with personalization use cases that other customers have used for retail campaigns.
Sales to Service Cloud Use Cases: Drive impact for online-to-offline marketing strategies. Check out these example personalization use cases that other customers have used in Sales Cloud to Service Cloud campaigns.
Triggered Campaigns Use Cases: Drive impact through Triggered Campaigns, passing real-time information to Marketing Cloud Engagement. Check out these example personalization use cases that other customers have used in triggered campaigns.
Web Use Cases: Drive impact on websites with personalization use cases that other customers have used in web campaigns.
Demand Generation - Web Use Cases: Drive impact on websites with personalization use cases that other customers have used in web campaigns for demand generation.
Financial Services - Web Use Cases: Drive impact on websites with personalization use cases that other customers have used in web campaigns for financial services.
Health and Life Sciences - Web Use Cases: Drive impact on websites with personalization use cases that other customers have used in web campaigns for health and life sciences.
Retail - Web Use Cases: Drive impact on websites with personalization use cases that other customers have used in web campaigns for retail.
Travel - Web Use Cases: Drive impact on websites with personalization use cases that other customers have used in web campaigns for travel.
Access Management: Administrators control user and Salesforce employee access to Personalization. Access to Personalization starts within Marketing Cloud Engagement, but administrators manage user roles and permissions in Personalization. Administrators also manage user data changes, SFTP users and files, and two-factor authentication.
Modify User Account Access: Though you can’t delete a user from Marketing Cloud Personalization after their account is created, you can refine user access to Marketing Cloud Personalization at any time. By disabling account administrator permissions and removing any roles for individual datasets, you can effectively remove access to the Marketing Cloud Personalization app for that user.
Edit a User Account: Change account details like the user email address, first name, last name, and role. After the account is created, you can’t change the username.
User Data Changes: Change or delete stored data associated with every visitor, customer, or user based on their interactions across channels. You can change or delete data from the Personalization interface, or using an API call.
Management of Sensitive User Information: Personalization uses the JavaScript Beacon to collect behavioral information for users of your digital properties and provide them with personalized experiences based on those behaviors. The JavaScript Beacon collects the data through a user’s browser, encrypts it using SSL, and transfers it to the Personalization servers. Personalization doesn’t store sensitive data, such as credit card numbers and some personally identifiable information. You can decide which sensitive data to collect. Personalization stores non-personally identifiable and nonsensitive data in its cloud service.
Create a User Profile Attribute: User profile attributes can collect data you can use in segmentation, reporting, or with integrated third-party systems. For example, if you create a form in Personalization, you can assign each field to an existing attribute. Depending on the configuration of your dataset, the attributes can either collect the data for reporting, or can write it to a third-party integrated system.
User Profile Objects: Gain a deeper understanding of your users by creating user profile objects.
Create a User Profile Object: Create user profile objects and their relationships to better define your Personalization users. Once created, you can use these objects in segmentation and campaign targeting to improve cross-channel personalization. You update, add, and remove user profile object data profile with the User Profile Object ETL.
User Profile Object Limits: Marketing Cloud Personalization imposes limits per dataset for user profile objects.
User Profile Object Rules: Use built-in user profile object rules to help improve cross-channel personalization in segmentation and web campaign targeting. User profile objects have two built-in rules—object aggregation and object match.
Add a User Role: Use a default role that you can modify, or create roles with permissions that meet your security requirements and business needs. Because roles are dataset-specific, Personalization users can have different roles in different datasets. Although a role is dataset-specific, when you add a role, it’s available to select in all datasets.
Delete a User Role: Delete roles that are no longer needed. When you delete an assigned role, permissions default to any other roles a Personalization user has. To access Personalization, users must have an assigned role.
Edit a User Role: Modify a default role, or create roles with permissions that meet your security requirements and business needs. Because roles are dataset-specific, Personalization users can have different roles in different datasets. Changes to roles are effective immediately. Although a role is dataset-specific, when you modify a role, it’s available to select in all datasets.
About Web Campaigns and Templates: Campaigns are at the heart of providing personalized website experiences that resonate with your users. Using a web campaign, you can personalize various aspects of your website for your users based on their behavior, affinities, preferences, location, or other qualifying criteria.
A/B Test Campaigns: When creating an A/B test campaign, you include multiple experiences, and assign each experience a percentage of traffic. A/B tests give you flexibility and control over how Personalization distributes traffic and which users see which experiences.
About Web Campaigns: Campaigns are at the heart of providing personalized website experiences that resonate with your users. Using a web campaign, you can personalize various aspects of your website for your users based on their behavior, affinities, preferences, location, or other qualifying criteria.
Banner with Call-to-Action Web Campaigns: You can create a banner with call-to-action web campaign that replaces the existing banner on your website. Use the built-in global template or use a custom template that a developer creates.
Slide-In with Call-to-Action Web Campaigns: Slide-ins enter a web page from the bottom-right corner, and subtly present a message to the users of your website. Use the built-in global template or use a custom template that a developer creates.
Clone a Web Campaign: You can clone a web campaign so you can reuse all or part of it in another web campaign. For example, if you have a web campaign with experiences and templates you want to use, but want to change the rules, you can clone the campaign. Then you adjust the rules, test the campaign, and publish it.
Comparison Shopping Web Campaigns: Online shoppers have many options available, and savvy shoppers visit several websites to compare products before making a purchase. Marketing Cloud Personalization helps you target these comparison shoppers to help boost your conversion rates and reduce your bounce rates.
Create a Web Campaign: Using a web campaign, you can personalize various aspects of your website for your users based on their behavior, affinities, preferences, location, or other qualifying criteria. You can create web campaigns from templates in your dataset. The templates provide a framework that defines the campaign placement, copy and creative locations, and general campaign design.
Einstein Decisions Web Campaigns: You can use the Einstein Decisions machine learning algorithms to create next best offers for your web campaign. Use the built-in global template or a custom template that a developer creates.
Einstein Recommendations Web Campaigns: Use Einstein Recipes to create web campaigns that recommend your products, blogs, articles, or other content from your catalog. Use the built-in global template or a custom template that a developer creates.
Web Campaign Experiences: A web campaign experience is the experience an individual customer has with a particular web personalization or activation campaign. You can use experiences to create different personalization results within the same campaign.
Test a Campaign Experience: Although you can see your web campaign render as you create it, you can also test each campaign experience to see how it will appear to your intended audience. Testing the campaign experience allows you to view it, regardless of the qualification rules at the experience or campaign level. With campaign experience testing, you can review how the experience looks on the page.
Infobar Web Campaigns: Infobars appear at the top or bottom of a web page, and are designed to capture a user’s attention. Infobars typically have limited real estate and are most often used to communicate important temporary information, such as a special announcement or a one-day discount.
Use Marketing Cloud Personalization Trends: Personalization Trends uses social validation to increase conversions. Most consumers are overwhelmed by the product choices available to them and can find it challenging to confidently buy products online. Use view and purchase counters to influence users of your website in real time and build confidence in their product selections.
Install the Salesforce Interactions SDK Launcher: Install the Salesforce Interactions SDK Launcher, a Google Chrome browser extension, which includes the Visual Editor. You use the Visual Editor to add personalization features to your website. Using web campaign templates, you can create personalization campaigns targeted to specific groups, individual users, or events.
Replace the SDK URL Locally: If the Server-Side JavaScript beacon is already present on your site, you can change the dataset used on the site in your local browser with the Force SDK URL option. This option is useful if you want to work on a different dataset, for example, to maintain a development or testing dataset and a live production dataset.
Manual Promotion Selector Web Campaigns: Create a web campaign using your existing promotions. Use the built-in global template or use a custom template that a developer creates.
Popup Web Campaigns: Popup web campaigns are useful for preventing cart or browse abandonment or for capturing email addresses. You can test different text, imagery, and calls-to-action to determine which one is best at grabbing the attention of your users.
Manage Web Campaign Priorities: When a customer qualifies for multiple web campaigns that target the same content zone and match a particular page or action, Marketing Cloud Personalization shows only one of those campaigns. You can adjust the priority values for campaigns to determine which campaign displays. Campaigns with a higher priority value have precedence. When campaigns have the same priority value, the campaign that was created first has precedence.
Publish a Web Campaign: After you thoroughly test your campaign, you publish it to your website so that it’s visible to qualified users.
Rule Categories: There are a variety of rules that you can add for campaign targeting and rule-based campaign experiences when you create or edit a campaign.
Campaign Targeting Rules and Rule-based Tests: Rules determine when, where, and how your campaigns display and who sees them. You can add rules when you create or edit a campaign at the campaign level for campaign targeting or when defining rule-based test experiences.
Schedule a Web Campaign: You can schedule your web campaigns to ensure that personalized experiences only display between certain dates, during certain days of the week, or even during certain hours of the day. This increased control helps you further target and tailor personalized content to your users across various channels.
Web Campaigns and Templates: Campaigns are at the heart of personalizing your web channel to provide experiences that resonate with your users. Using a web campaign, you can personalize various aspects of your website for your users based on their behavior, affinities, preferences, location, or other qualifying criteria.
About Templates for Web Campaigns: You create web campaigns using a web campaign template that a developer creates. Templates offer flexibility to developers who can create a campaign framework to achieve specific business goals. Preconfigured templates make it easy for you to get started with Marketing Cloud Personalization templates. Using a well-planned template, any member of your team can create, test, and publish a web campaign.
Clone a Web Campaign Template: Your Marketing Cloud Personalization account includes a set of built-in global templates that your developer can clone to create custom web campaign templates. Each template provides a structure for delivering personalized experiences and activation campaigns to your website users. You can also clone your custom templates to create additional templates.
Content Zones: A content zone is an area on your website configured to be available for personalization in a web campaign. A developer defines content zones in the sitemap for your site. You use content zones to display text, images, buttons, and input fields. Examples of content zones include a homepage hero, a popup, and an infobar.
Web Campaign Template Properties: A web campaign template provides a structure for delivering personalized experiences and activation campaigns to your website users. Your Personalization account includes a set of built-in global templates to get you started creating web campaigns. Each template is a starting framework that your developer can modify to create custom templates that support your organization’s needs.
View Web Campaign Templates: Your Marketing Cloud Personalization account includes a set of built-in global templates that you can use to deliver personalized experiences and activation campaigns to your website users. Each template is a starting framework that your developer can modify to create custom templates that support your organization’s needs.
Test a Web Campaign: Use the campaign testing mode to test your campaigns before you publish them to ensure they display the way you intend.
Add Domains to the Visual Editor Allowlist: You can use the Visual Editor only with website domains that you include on the Allowed Domains list. If you don’t list your domains on the allowlist, you can’t log in to the Visual Editor.
Marketing Cloud Web Site Personalization: Integrate Marketing Cloud Personalization with your organization's web site. During implementation, your development team works with Salesforce to create your organization’s site map and plan your web integration.
Salesforce Personalization: Salesforce Personalization in Marketing Cloud Next is a Customer 360 application that uses Data 360 to provide personalized experiences across Salesforce clouds.
Configure a Personalization Point: When you configure a personalization point, you define the data space that the personalization point uses for data and the profile data graph to use for making decisions. You also select a personalization type to define the kind of personalization to provide and a schema to ensure that decision responses appear in a consistent format.
Configure a Personalization Content Schema: Personalization content schemas are required when configuring personalization points and personalization decisions. A personalization content schema defines the configuration options available to marketers when they’re building a personalization decision. The content schema also ensures that all decision responses for a given personalization point return data in the same format.
Configure a Recommender: A recommender presents personalized recommendations to visitors based on the recommendation type and criteria that you select.
A/B Test Summary: The A/B Test Summary contains summary and comparison information about one or more A/B test campaigns for the date range you specify.
Account Send Summary: Displays all potential response counts or rates for an account organized by send. Enterprise or Reseller reports also display respective member results organized by account.
Attribute by Tracking Event Report for Email Studio in Analytics Builder: Use the Attribute by Tracking Event Report for Email Studio in Analytics Builder to check how your subscribers reacted to a certain email send. The report lists the subscribers who interacted with an email send during the timeframe you select. Choose a subscriber attribute to include in the report. The report works only with values of the chosen attribute at the time of reporting and not the value at the time of send. For example, use this report to evaluate the effectiveness of a campaign in generating subscriber clicks for men versus women.
Campaign Email Tracking: The Campaign Email Tracking report shows send tracking data for a specific campaign.
SMS Deactivation Summary: The SMS Deactivation Summary displays a daily and historic overview of the subscriptions updated in your account. This standard report is available for US short codes in MobileConnect. The report shows an overview up to the 90 days from when the report was created.
Contact Data Portability Report: View information included in the Contact Data Portability report for Contact Builder in Reports.
Contacts Count Report in Analytics Builder: The Contact Count report contains information on the total number of contacts in an account, and it runs weekly. The report also shows the Month End Report that runs on the last day of the month.
Conversion Tracking Statistics: Run this report to compare the effectiveness of links within campaigns or the effectiveness of campaigns in number and value of conversions. This report contains a list of conversions for links included in emails across multiple sends during a time frame.
Email Performance by Attribute Report in Analytics Builder: Run this report to view data for a specific subscriber included in a specific send. This report runs against Legacy List-Based Attributes only and doesn’t account for the Sendable DEs field. To display the relevant data, give the Sendable DEs field the same name and ensure that the data is within the Legacy List-Based Attributes.
Email Performance by Domain: This report provides data for the top 10 email domains for an email send. Use this report to analyze how domains responded to a particular email send.
Email Performance by List: This report contains graphics to illustrate Emails Sent by List, Open Rate by List, Bounce Rate by List, and Click Through Rate by List. This report shows only unique opens and clicks. Use this report to analyze which lists responded most favorably to a particular email send.
Email Performance for All Domains: This report shows performance data for each email domain included in sends during a specific period. You can use this analysis identify domains that are bouncing your email so you can begin to resolve the delivery issue.
Email Performance Over Time: This report shows data for all sends during a specific period. You can use this report to evaluate when a previously effective email is no longer effective.
Email Send Performance by Segment: To see performance data by audience segment, use the Email Send Performance in Audience Builder Segment report.
Email Send: Use the Email Send report to view account activity. This report is often used by Agency users for billing their child accounts. Enterprise users can also use this report to view the activity of their Lock and Publish accounts.
Email Sends by User: Learn about the information provided in the Email Sends by User report.
Who Can Access Reports?: By default, every Marketing Cloud Engagement user can access the reports that relate to channels that the user has permission to work with. For example, if Email Studio is enabled but MobileConnect isn’t, the user can access only Email Studio reports. An admin can edit the permission model.
Can I Schedule a Report?: Yes. You can schedule any standard Analytics Builder report to run at specified dates and times. When scheduling end dates, don’t enter a date after the year 2077.
Forwarding Activity Details: Use this report to analyze forwarding activity for your email sends. You can use this report to enable providing incentives to subscribers whose forwarded emails result in new subscribers.
GroupConnect LINE Outbound Message: View the success of a list send in the LINE Outbound Message report in the Reports tool. This report displays a summary of outbound messages sent to LINE followers, including the delivered message count. Select a date range, whether to include child accounts,
GroupConnect LINE Triggered Sends Summary: View how many people you sent a follow or response message to in the LINE Triggered Sends Summary report in the Reports tool. Select a date range, whether to include child accounts, the time zone, and the culture code.
Track Impressions by Job Report for Email Studio: The Impression Tracking by Job report in Analytics Builder is two reports combined into one. The Job Summary section shows overview tracking information. The Impression Tracking Details section lists the different areas of the report that contained impression tracking and contains data for each area. You can only track emails that use dynamic content or AMPscript.
Impression Tracking for Triggered Sends Report in Analytics Builder: Use the Impression Tracking for Triggered Sends report for Email Studio in Marketing Cloud Analytics Builder to monitor triggered sends over a specific time. You can only track emails that use dynamic content or AMPscript.
Journey Builder Email Send Summary: Create this report in The Reports tool to view tracking and engagement metrics for emails sent in journeys over a specified time frame. Choose specific journeys and versions to include in the report.
Journey Builder Email Sends by Day: Create the Journey Builder Email Sends by Day report in the Reports tool. View tracking and engagement metrics for emails sent in journeys, aggregated by day, for a specified time frame, along with specific journeys and versions to include in the report.
Journey Builder Reports: View a list and description of Journey Builder reports available in the Reports tool.
List Demographics: This report displays the status, subscription method, and domains of the subscribers on a list. Use this report to see what percentage of your subscribers are using a certain domain.
List Performance Over Time: This report provides statistics for all sends to a list during a specified time period.
List Size Over Time Report for Email Studio: To check how your Marketing Cloud Engagement lists grow over time, use the List Size Over Time report in Analytics Builder. Because the data shows first-time events for a status change, data could overlap. Also, more than one event or status can occur with a subscriber in the time period that you define. The report shows you the most recent status change that occurred during the specified time.
Mobile Chat Messaging Journey Builder Activity Summary Report: View your LINE Journey Builder message sends report using this report available in the Reports tool. This report displays LINE message sends created in Journey Builder using a LINE activity. You can see your message type and name, audience size, and number of successfully delivered messages.
Mobile Chat Messaging Summary Report: View the success of your chat messaging API message sends with this report accessible in the Reports tool. This report displays API messages sent to LINE and Facebook Messenger followers, including the last status and message sends, errors, and error definitions. With this report, you can filter by a date range, whether to include child accounts, final status, platform, or content type.
Mobile Studio Reports: View a list and description of Mobile Studio reports available in the Reports tool.
Multi-Campaign Email Tracking Summary: This report shows the Email Tracking by campaign, for all campaigns during the selected date range. The report also includes a grand total of all selected campaigns for each tracking category. Use this report to compare the email performance across multiple campaigns.
Push Account Summary: Learn about the information presented in the MobilePush Account Summary report in the Reports tool.
Push Message Detail: Learn about the information presented in the Push Message Detail report in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Push Message Summary: Learn about the information included in the MobilePush Message Summary report in the Reports tool.
Recent Email Sending Summary: The Recent Email Sending Summary provides a summary of your account activity over a specific date range . You can use this report to confirm that your email jobs were completed successfully.
Region Performance Over Time: The Region Performance Over Time report shows how a single section of content performs over a period across multiple sends. You can use this report to see how a specific link is performing over a certain period. Only emails that contain dynamic content or AMPscript can be tracked in this report.
Get Started with Reports: The Reports Overview screen provides access to all reports available for Email Studio, Mobile Studio, CloudPages, Microsites, Journey Builder, and Contact Counts.
Response Trend Analysis for an Email Send: Use this report to analyze when subscribers respond to your email relative to when you send it. For example, if you want to send an announcement of an event at a specific time, you can run this report against other sends to determine how far in advance you must send the message to ensure that most your subscribers open it.
Send Classification by Email Tracking: This report shows the send performance data of transactional and commercial sends. Use this report when you want to compare the send performance data of transactional and commercial sends.
Single Email Performance by Device: The Single Email Performance by Device report displays email performance on mobile devices versus desktop devices.
SMS Account Summary: The SMS Account Summary report is a summary of all activity at the account level. It includes the number of opted-in subscribers and the number of inbound and outbound messages.
SMS Link Clicks Report: The SMS Link Clicks report includes engagement data for all links, including clicked and unclicked links. This report is available only when you use Marketing Cloud Engagement shortener and enable link tracking.
SMS Message Detail: This page describes information found in the SMS Message Detail report.
SMS Message Summary Report: The SMS Message Summary Report, in the Reports tool, provides activity summaries for keywords in an account. Also included is overall tracking information and message content for each keyword.
Spam Complaint Bucketing: Learn how Spam Complaint Bucketing for email sends works in the Reports tool.
Spam Complaints Over Time: This report provides historical data on the level of spam complaints received.
Use Standard Reports for Data Management and Analytics: Marketing Cloud Engagement provides many standard reports to track the effectiveness of your campaigns. You can run reports manually, schedule them to run automatically, and choose who receives the reports. For Hyperforce-supported reports, use Intelligence Reports. When you deactivate a user who created reports, their reports are deleted.
Subscriber Engagement: Use this report to identify your most engaged subscribers. You could target these subscribers for special offers. This report includes the number of emails that you have sent each subscriber over a specified period, and the number of emails the subscriber has opened or clicked.
Subscriber Most Recent Activity: The Subscriber Most Recent Activity report shows when each subscriber last opened or clicked a message.
Subscribers Not Sent To: This report shows a list of emails for subscribers who weren’t included in a send during a time frame that you select.
Triggered Sends Tracking: The Triggered Sends Tracking report contains standard tracking information for a triggered send over a time period. You can use this report to determine the effectiveness of a triggered send in producing opens and clicks and not causing unsubscribes.
Unengaged Subscribers for a List Report: The Unengaged Subscribers report shows a list of inactive subscribers stored in Marketing Cloud Engagement. Use this information to suppress people from certain lists or to clean up your lists.
Server Time Zone Changes: Marketing Cloud Engagement servers use the Central Standard Time zone (CST), but don’t observe Daylight Savings Time (DST).
Web Analytics Connector: Use the Web Analytics Connector to extend a web analytics service, such as Google Analytics, to track and analyze data based on your Marketing Cloud Engagement sends.
Web Analytics Connector Scenario: Learn how a fictitious company, Northern Trail Outfitters, uses the Web Analytics Connector to share tracking information between Marketing Cloud Engagement and a third-party web analytics service.
Manage Marketing Needs: Account Engagement admins have access to tools that can help your marketing team get the most out of their efforts.
Restrict or Limit Iframing for Account Engagement Assets: To help secure your data, specify which web domains can render iframed Account Engagement forms and landing pages. You can restrict iframing completely, allow it only for specific domains, or have no restrictions.
Data Usage and Limits: There are limits on objects in Account Engagement, such as mailable prospects, email templates, and landing pages. The limits for each object depend on your edition of Account Engagement. You can view your current usage and move objects to the recycle bin as needed.
Use Account Engagement Actions in Agentforce: Create a dedicated Account Engagement Lead Management Agent with Agentforce actions. View and update prospect records and add them to nurture campaigns from anywhere in Salesforce.
Use Marketing Cloud Account Engagement APIs: Use the Account Engagement APIs to create integrations that meet your business needs. Access prospect and visitor data in a third-party system, automate processes, and more.
Automatically Remove Unconverted Visitor Records: Free up system bandwidth to improve overall business unit performance and adhere to privacy regulations by automatically deleting stale unconverted visitor records. Deleting stale unconverted visitors is permanent. You can’t retrieve the records after they’re deleted.
Control How Users Can Change Email Template Content: Email templates that you create in Account Engagement are editable by default. If you want users to edit only parts of a template, you can define which elements are editable. When you define at least one element as editable, the default behavior changes and any element that you don’t define as editable is locked.
Test with Inbox Previews: If you’re using the Advanced Email Analytics package for Account Engagement, you have access to expanded testing tools. You can preview how your email and subject line looks in different email clients and get a spam analysis for your content. Each inbox preview render is stored for 90 days from its creation date.
Send Test Emails: You can send emails to test lists or directly to individual email addresses. The test email contains an unsubscribe link to verify that it works. When you click the link, you see the same confirmation that a prospect would see, but nothing changes in Account Engagement. Completion actions also don’t execute.
Preview and Test Classic Emails: The classic email builder in Account Engagement includes tools to preview and test your email. You can send to test email lists, send individual test emails, and generate inbox previews across email clients.
URL Encoding in Emails: To ensure that links resolve correctly, you must manually encode special characters that appear in the URL.
Copy Forms from Your Account Engagement Business Unit to a CMS Workspace: To use your Account Engagement forms for future marketing campaigns, copy the forms to a CMS Marketing workspace. When you copy a form, the folder permissions in Account Engagement don’t transfer to the CMS workspace.
Copy Files from Your Account Engagement Business Unit to a CMS Workspace: To use your Account Engagement files for future marketing campaigns, copy the files to a CMS Marketing workspace. When you copy a file, the folder permissions in Account Engagement don’t transfer to the CMS workspace.
Enable Copy to CMS for Account Engagement Business Units: To let marketers use their Account Engagement marketing content for future marketing campaigns, enable copying assets to a CMS Marketing workspace in Salesforce. When you enable copying assets, a new content workspace is created.
Connecting Account Engagement and Data 360: Data 360 organizes and unifies data across Salesforce and other external data sources. To drive calculated insights and build segments, ingest Account Engagement data into Data 360.
Build Segments and Analytics with Data 360: To drive calculated insights, build segments, and get the most out of other Data 360 features, use Account Engagement data with Data 360.
Delete Visitor Records to Restore Paused Prospects: A prospect is paused when their activity level is high enough to impact Account Engagement performance, including prospects used for testing. You can restore a prospect by permanently deleting their visitor records. A paused prospect is restored when they have fewer than 1,000 visitor records.
Identify Prospects Who Confirmed Their Opt-In: To identify whether a prospect has confirmed their subscription, create a custom prospect field in Account Engagement. This field doesn’t need to sync with Salesforce.
Create Dynamic Lists to Manage Opt-Ins: To manage your confirmed opt-in process, create two dynamic lists in Account Engagement. The first is for people who submitted your signup form but haven’t confirmed their subscription. The second dynamic list is for subscribers who have clicked the confirmation link in the autoresponder email.
Add a Confirmation Link to an Email Template: To confirm their opt-in, a subscriber clicks the confirmation link in an email you send after they submit your signup form. You can add the confirmation link to an existing Account Engagement email template, or create a template to use.
Update Prospect Opt-In Status with a Form Handler: To mark a prospect as confirmed opt-in, create a form handler with a completion action to update the confirmed opt-in custom prospect field. The endpoint URL for the form handler is the confirmation link you include in your email to new subscribers. After the prospect clicks the link, the completion action updates the custom prospect field to confirm their opt-in status.
Set Up a Confirmed Opt-In Process in Account Engagement: This process ensures that someone didn’t mistype the email address or fraudulently subscribe on behalf of someone else. To verify that an opt-in request is coming from the owner of the email address, set up a confirmed opt-in process. After setup is complete, new subscribers are added to an unconfirmed opt-in list and receive an email with a link asking them to verify that they opted in. When they click the link, they’re added to a confirmed opt-in list and directed to a landing page confirming their subscription.
Automatically Send Prospects an Email When They Submit Your Signup Form: When someone submits your signup form, they receive the email template you created with a link to confirm their subscription. Add a completion action to the Account Engagement form or form handler that you use as your email signup form.
Feature Availability by Account Engagement Edition: Marketing Cloud Account Engagement is sold in four editions: Growth, Plus, Advanced, and Premium. All editions require Salesforce Enterprise or Unlimited Edition. Certain features require extra SKUs, licenses, or add-ons.
Einstein Assistant in Account Engagement: Use Content Creation for Account Engagement, powered by Einstein to draft forms and landing pages and to create email subject lines, headers, and body copy. The Einstein Assistant prompts you to describe what you want to draft. The more specific you are, the more useful and accurate your results. The Einstein Assistant window appears when you create a landing page, form, or email, or edit an existing one. After acknowledging you’re about to use generative AI, Einstein is ready to help. If you don’t see the assistant window, ask your admin to enable it in Einstein Generative AI Setup.
Configure Einstein Generative AI: Enable Einstein generative AI to help draft forms, landing pages, and email subject lines and body copy. You can remove a business unit or disable the Einstein Generative AI option completely at any time. The feature isn’t enabled by default.
Add and Verify a Domain for Email Sending: To send emails in Account Engagement, you must add at least one verified sending domain. A domain is verified by a validation key that you add to your DNS records.
Execute External Actions with Completion Actions: Trigger external actions when prospects interact with your Account Engagement assets. For example, register a prospect for a webinar after they complete a sign-up form or send a text message after a prospect clicks a custom redirect link. External Action completion actions are available on forms, form handlers, files, custom redirects, emails, and page actions. External action completion actions aren’t available for classic emails.
Failed Email Sends Report: The Failed Email Sends report helps you identify email send failures, such as those related to invalid email addresses or sender domains, missing content, or other reasons. It includes information about the related prospect, when the failure occurred, and why the email failed to send.
Find Duplicate Prospects: Keep your Account Engagement business unit’s data clean and accurate by merging duplicate prospect records in Optimizer.
Account Engagement Limits: Understand the maximum usage recommendations and limits in Marketing Cloud Account Engagement. These recommendations are intended to optimize performance and avoid service disruptions. Some of these guidelines trigger warnings or exceptions if you exceed them, while others are suggestions for maintaining high performance.
Automatically Match Email Consent Between Account Engagement and Marketing Cloud Next: To align email consent automatically between Account Engagement and Marketing Cloud Next, turn on consent matching in your Account Engagement business unit. You can match consent for specific lists, or for all emails based on each prospect’s Opted Out field.
Get Started with Marketing Cloud Next for Account Engagement: With Marketing Cloud Next for Account Engagement, you gain access to next-generation features while keeping the campaigns, assets, and engagement programs that you’ve created over the years. These resources outline some of the latest offerings and other recommendations from across Salesforce.
Manually Match Consent and Subscriptions Between Account Engagement and Marketing Cloud Next: Marketing Cloud Next consent management is powered by Data 360 so that you can manage multiple marketing channels with subscriptions. By default, consent isn’t shared between Account Engagement and Marketing Cloud Next. To use your prospect consent preferences in Marketing Cloud Next, export them from Account Engagement or API, and then import them into Marketing Cloud Next, one subscription at a time. The resulting output file includes prospects that need a corresponding subscription in Marketing Cloud Next. We recommend using a small, simple subscription to start.
Prepare Account Engagement Content for Campaigns in Marketing Cloud: Reuse your Account Engagement content in Marketing Cloud campaigns by copying assets to Salesforce CMS. Marketing Cloud allows users to share content across CMS workspaces from a source workspace in the Shared with Workspaces folder.
Create a Campaign and View Performance in Marketing Cloud Next: Marketing Cloud Next campaigns provide a centralized hub where you can design, automate, and track your marketing efforts. When creating a campaign in Marketing Cloud Next, you select a preconfigured flow to start with, such as a single email or signup form.
Prerequisites for Using Data 360: Data 360 lays the foundation for data storage and activation in Marketing Cloud Next. To use next-gen marketing campaigns and Agentforce, start by working with an admin and a Salesforce account executive.
Key Concepts: Before you start using next-gen campaign features, get familiar with key concepts and how functionality differs between Account Engagement and Marketing Cloud Next.
Guide: Set Up Account Engagement+: Whether you are setting up Marketing Cloud Account Engagement+ for the first time or enhancing your current implementation, it’s important to tackle configuration tasks in a specific order. This guide outlines common, required tasks, but doesn’t include every configuration option. Always review the provided Salesforce Help topics and resources for more information and in-depth steps.
Monitor External Actions Errors: Identify, diagnose, and resolve errors from third-party apps tied to your Account Engagement automations using the External Actions Error Table.
Operational Emails in Engagement Studio Limitations: Operational emails can be sent directly from Engagement Studio. Sending operational emails bypasses prospect opted-in status, so only non-marketing emails can be sent. You can filter your Engagement Studio screen to find programs with Operational Emails.
Monitor Business Unit Health with Account Engagement Optimizer: Use Optimizer to help you diagnose and correct critical configuration issues and review recommendations to improve processing efficiency in your business unit. You can also pause and resume actions that are currently processing and see which features are causing the most changes to prospect records.
Convert Dynamic Lists to Static: Dynamic lists require system bandwidth every time they update. To preserve dynamic lists you want to keep but don’t need updated automatically, convert them to static.
About Account Engagement Optimizer: The tables on the Optimizer page show configuration issues and performance improvement measures for your business unit. You can also access other tools to help you assess how efficiently your business unit is running and make improvements.
Monitor Features That Cause Prospect Changes in Account Engagement: Understand which features and automations are causing the most prospect changes in your business unit. Use the information to help you adjust your automations, import habits, API integrations, and more.
Pause or Resume In-Progress Actions in Account Engagement: Pause and resume actions that are processing in your business unit. For example, if you see that there’s an action in progress to archive prospects, you can pause that action to prioritize a critical list email send. When an action is paused, the system reprioritizes to focus on the remaining active jobs. You can also cancel an action.
How to Avoid Excessive Prospect Activity: When a prospect accumulates enough activity to have activity tracking paused, it’s often the result of a bot and not a real prospect. However, sometimes the problem isn’t caused by bot activity. If you’re experiencing paused tracking, consider these scenarios to prevent future issues.
Define Email Tracking Settings: You can control whether Account Engagement tracks email opens, which are based on a tracking pixel in your HTML email sends. Email opens are tracked in all business units by default, but an admin can change the setting in each business unit as needed. Other settings are provided for click tracking and Advanced Email Analytics data tracking.
Managing Prospects with Excessive Tracked Activity: When a prospect’s activity levels are high enough to impact performance for your business unit, Account Engagement pauses activity tracking for the prospect. Often, this level of activity is the result of a bot.
Retroactive First-Touch Tracking: To respect privacy concerns, tracking cookies aren’t added the first time a visitor clicks a custom redirect, social click, or email link. However, you can use retroactive tracking to capture first-touch attribution after the prospect consents. This option is enabled by default, but it can be disabled under Account Engagement Settings.
Review External Actions Usage: Third-party app extensions use the Account Engagement API for External Actions for your Account Engagement automations. All accounts have a database limit of 100,000 third-party app extension calls per day, starting at 12:00 AM to 11:59 PM, based on your business unit time zone. You can review your external usage to ensure that you don’t exceed your database limit.
Prospect Security and Privacy: Account Engagement offers tools to help you protect the privacy of your prospects and the security of their data. Many of these tools are enabled by default when you create your business unit.
CMS File Types: You can copy these file types to Salesforce CMS from your Account Engagement business unit.
Quick Start: Set Up WhatsApp for Account Engagement: This Quick Start guide covers the steps that are required to set up WhatsApp for Marketing Cloud Account Engagement. It outlines the most direct implementation, to get your team get up and running.
When to Use Copy to CMS with Account Engagement Marketing Assets: Prepare your Account Engagement marketing assets for use in the Salesforce content builder. Before you copy your Account Engagement forms and emails to CMS, review which elements are copied.
Salesforce Message Credits: As a Marketing Cloud Engagement customer with Marketing Cloud Next, you consume Salesforce message credits every time you send a message from Marketing Cloud Next or Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Journey Decisioning Flows and Data Extensions: For each use case you set up in Marketing Cloud Next, several items are automatically created for you. For each journey use case, two flows and two data extensions are created. For a flow-only use case, two flows are created, but since data extensions aren’t applicable, they aren’t created.
Journey Decisioning Subscriber Key Resolution: This content describes the behavior of specific Agentforce actions related to the Marketing Cloud Engagement inputs, particularly focusing on the crucial step of resolving customer identifiers.
Create and Use the Journey Decisioning Agent: Harness the power of Agentforce in your journeys with the Journey Decisioning agent. The agent dynamically assigns the best customer journey and creates custom content for each individual based on real-time behavior profile details and context.
Recommendations for Message Sending: With Marketing Cloud Engagement+, you can continue to send messages by using the Engagement apps you know and love, such as Email Studio, Mobile Studio, and Journey Builder. You can also augment and extend your existing marketing programs by using Salesforce Platform tools such as Flow Builder to send your messages. The right product to use depends on your objectives and use case.
Explore Your Data with MDP: Explore your data and ensure it is accurate before exporting it for further analysis and consumption.
MDP Activation Center: Use the Activation Center to connect to third-party platforms, such as Slack, Facebook Ads, and Google Ads, to trigger alerts, collaborate, and automate workflows in other systems. For example, you can create an action that sends a notification in Slack every time a certain campaign hits the target value you set for it.
Create Action Rules in the Activation Center: Action rules define how a rule is triggered. For example, the action can be triggered by time or by a specific event. You can create a rule for several actions.
Trigger an Action Rule from the Management Screen: Triggering an action manually allows you to run an action rule at any time. If the action rule condition is met, the rule executes the actions specified in it. For example, if your stakeholders ask for an updated report in the middle of the week, you can trigger the action rule and see the latest information.
Use Database Exports to Export Datasets: Export data from Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines, and connect it to an enterprise database such as Snowflake and PostgreSQL. With Database Exports, automate the export of MDP marketing data. Enhance enterprise-wide analytics by making marketing insights accessible, and get a full view of your company’s data.
Adding or Editing Database Integrations: Configure an external database to import data from Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines. You configure the database before creating a database export. The user whose credentials are used when connecting to the database must have INSERT and DELETE permissions for at least one table in the database.
Configure the Destination Database and Connect Data: Set the external database where you’re exporting the data to. Databases are configured in Workspace Integrations. Configure the database first, and then you can select it.
Configure the Database Export Feed: After you connect to the database and map your fields, configure how the exported data is inserted into your database table and how often to execute the export. This step defines what happens when new data is loaded into the database and how to handle it.
Create a Database Export: Create a database export to export marketing data from Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines, and import it to an external database. Select the criteria that you want to export, define scheduling to determine when the export occurs, and map the source data fields to the database fields.
Define the Data to Export: Define the source dataset by selecting the dataset, required dimensions, and measurements and date range.
Troubleshoot Database Exports: After a database export is created, view and manage exports execution in the History tab. If an export fails, troubleshoot to find out what happened. You can download a report, and even rerun or reprocess it.
Manage Your Data with MDP: Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines offers multiple tools for managing your data. In the Manage tab, you can create workflows and actions to manage your data, and remove data that you no longer need.
Delete Data Streams: When you delete data streams in your workspace within the Delete Data tab, only the measurements are deleted. The dimension values associated with the deleted data aren’t deleted. The dimension values can still appear in the platform, for example, in VLOOKUPs. Classification data, dimension-only data, CRM entities, and overarching entities are also not deleted. To delete all data from a data stream, delete the data stream from the Data Stream List.
Pivot Tables in Salesforce MDP: Explore your data from multiple perspectives using pivot tables. You can calculate, summarize, and analyze data by seeing comparisons, patterns, and trends in your data. You can also create custom reports without using query formulas, such as SQL queries.
Reports in MDP: Use reports to retrieve, view, and share a detailed analysis of the data that you’ve integrated into Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines. You can save them locally or share them via email or the cloud. The data uploaded into MDP is displayed as a flat file and includes selected dimensions and measurements within a defined time range.
MDP Configure Report Scheduling and Delivery: You can choose when and how to run and share a report. You can set up multiple schedules for a report. For example, you can send the report to the management team on a weekly basis and to the analyst team daily.
MDP Create a Data Report: A data report is based on the data that exists in your workspace. You can save it as an Excel, CSV, TSV, or TXT file.
MDP Manage Reports: After you create a report, it appears in your reports list. From your reports list, you can view all your reports and edit, delete, and create a copy.
Connect MDP with Tableau: Connect Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines with Tableau to easily query your data. With the MDP Tableau integration, you get harmonization capabilities with MDP’s ETL solution and Tableau’s advanced visualization tools.
Push Reports from MDP to Tableau: Use the push method to integrate your marketing data to create Tableau views, group them together, and then download them to Tableau Desktop. With the push method, you work in Salesforce Marketing Intelligence Data Pipelines. You can control where to send your data, which server to use, and which views you want to make available to your users. You can push a single view or multiple views.
Push Multiple Views from MDP to Tableau: When you push multiple views, you match the values between the views in Tableau Desktop. You can then publish to Tableau Server or Online.
Push a Single View from MDP: Integrate Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines with Tableau by pushing a single view. During the process, you create a Tableau view, a Tableau feed, run the data source, and then visualize your data in Tableau Online.
MDP Uploading Data: One of the most crucial steps when working with Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines, is uploading data. Since MDP supports numerous types of data, you can choose from many different ways to upload it. During the upload stage, you can map your data to determine which fields appear in MDP and you can even create custom calculated fields to get the most out of your data. All these actions are done in the Import tab.
MDP Advanced Settings in Data Streams: Define advanced settings to your data stream to select load modes, load rules, or configure additional settings. The available settings vary based on the type of data stream that you’re creating.
Data Stream Version History: Use data stream version history to save versions of your data streams. Save your changes without processing the data, and then edit the data stream later. Create versions to compare their settings and apply the settings that you prefer.
Navigate Your Version History: Access your version history to view your data stream versions, make edits, and apply changes.
MDP Automatic Data Refresh in Data Streams: You can use automatic data refresh to import data from a third-party technical vendor or to have data sent automatically via email or FTPS/SFTP. Automatic data refresh allows you to avoid uploading your data manually each time new data must be ingested into the data stream.
MDP Import Data via Technical Vendor: Importing data via technical vendors schedules the data stream to update automatically via a remote server. This method tells the platform to import files from remote servers according to the delivery method of your choice. The settings are dynamic and based on the technical vendor you select. Typically, you use this method when you want to retrieve data from an external source and have it update automatically. Available for TotalConnect data streams.
MDP Send Data via Email to the Data Stream: This method allows you to send files via email to the data stream. Every data stream has its own unique email address and can accept attachments or files downloaded through links.
MDP Data Load Rules: You can use Data Load rules to filter out unwanted data before you upload it to Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines. Create a load rule to set the criteria for the data that you want to upload. Then apply that rule to a data stream, and then apply a rule to filter out data before it’s loaded. For example, you want to upload data from your latest campaign, but due to an input error, the campaign dates are incorrect in your spreadsheet. Rather than create another spreadsheet, you can create a rule that tells MDP to ignore this campaign’s data.
MDP Create a Load Rule: Data load rules filter out unwanted data before you upload data to Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines. After you create load rules, they can be applied to data streams.
MDP Define Additional Settings to a Data Stream: Define additional settings to your data stream, such as ignore empty rows, execute only when part of a workflow and more. The settings are dynamic according to the data stream type you’re creating or editing.
MDP Upload Files Using FTPS or SFTP: This method allows you to upload files into a TotalConnect data stream by using an FTPS or SFTP connection. Available for TotalConnect Data Streams
Control Flow Operators in MDP: Marketing Intelligence Data Pipelines supports an assortment of control flow operators, so you can perform advanced scripting operations. Aside from the custom functions that are supported in the formula editor, you can write formulas based in C and Java Script syntax to make more complex decisions.
MDP Manage Data Streams: After you create data streams, they appear in the data streams list. Here you can create new data streams, edit existing data streams, view history logs, create templates, and more.
MDP Apply Changes to Data Streams: You have multiple options to make changes to the data that’s pulled into your data stream. Choose the option that fits your use case the best.
MDP Update Data Manually: You can edit raw measurement data for specific data in a data stream. Dimension data can’t be edited and remains as is. Also, dimension values appear as they do in the raw data. If you made changes in the Dimension Explorer, you don’t see those changes here.
MDP Re-process, Re-run, and Recreate Data Streams: When you make changes to data streams, for the changes to take effect, sometimes you must rerun some of your data or recreate your data stream. Other times, such as when the changes only apply to data going forward, all it takes is saving the data stream.
Mapping Your Source Data in MDP: Mapping connects the source fields in your uploaded file to the corresponding Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines fields. MDP uses machine learning algorithms to map your data. The mapping process is similar regardless of which method you use to upload your data, with some minor differences. If you’re using an API connector to upload your data, MDP automatically maps the fields for you, but you can make changes to the mapping. If you’re using TotalConnect, MDP identifies the most suitable data stream type according to your data and offers an initial mapping suggestion.
MDP Mapping Actions: There are some handy actions you can apply when mapping. Some appear in the toolbar, while others can be found in the More Actions dropdown list.
Date Format Syntax: When setting up date formats in TotalConnect, you may need to convert textual data to dates using formulas. The PARSEDATE function can be used for the conversion. The function receives text containing the date information, and an expression that specifies how to construct the date using the text.
Map a Source Field to a MDP Field: Map source fields to Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines fields to connect the data and create a match between your source data and MDP.
MDP Use the Formula Editor to Map: You can apply formulas directly to your field mappings to perform complex manipulations of your data. The formulas are intuitive and use a similar syntax found in Excel. For more complex manipulations, you can also use MVEL, a Java-based expression language. You apply formulas during the mapping stage when creating data streams.
Mapping Formulas: Use the mapping formula editor to apply formulas directly in your mapping fields. Using functions in your mapping formulas, such as text and date functions, allows you to perform more complex manipulations to your data.
FUZZYVLOOKUP: The FUZZYVLOOKUP mapping formula helps identify two elements of text, strings, or entries that are similar but not identical.
REPLACE: Use the REPLACE function to replace characters or patterns in a string.
VLOOKUP: Use the VLOOKUP function to retrieve specific data from a table. You can use it when you’re mapping fields from your source file to Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines.
Mapping Functions in MDP: Functions are used when creating mapping formulas, allowing you to perform complex manipulations to your data. These functions are available in Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines and are divided into different groups to easily search for the function you’re looking for.
Formula Operators: A formula is a mathematical relationship or rule expressed in symbols. With Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines, you can use formulas to create calculated measurements and dimensions when mapping your data. Operators specify the type of calculation to perform on the terms in a formula—such as addition, subtraction, multiplication, or division.
MDP Change the Data Stream Type: All data in Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines is categorized using data steam types. A data stream type is assigned automatically when data is uploaded. For example, if the data includes advertising data, such as clicks, impressions, and campaigns, MDP applies the Ads data stream type. You can change the data stream type if it isn’t correct, or use a different type.
MDP Mapping Validations: TotalConnect and API data streams offer enhanced mapping validations during the Map to Model stage of data ingestion. The mapping validations allow you to check if there are errors or irregularities with your mapping. They also provide details on how you can rectify errors.
MDP View How Your Data Is Mapped: On the mapping page, you can see all the fields that were mapped and unmapped in your data stream.
Mapping Geolocation Dimensions in MDP: Geolocation refers to the geographical location of an internet-connected device. Found from the user's IP address, geolocation includes information about the device user's location, such as country, region, and city.
Map Geolocation Dimensions: If your data stream contains geolocation information, you can use the different geolocation dimensions when mapping.
View Location Data in Your Workspace: To determine which location data is available in Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines, go to the Dimensions List.
The MDP Data Model: Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines (MDP) pulls data from a variety of sources with different data types. Each one of these different data types has its own unique combination of dimensions and measurements. The dimensions are made up of entities that have a certain relationship, or hierarchy, between them. It’s important to maintain this relationship in the Salesforce MDP database, otherwise the data can get aggregated incorrectly.
Prioritize Processing Tasks in MDP: Use the processing queue to prioritize your data stream processing tasks. With the processing queue, you can drag an urgent task to the top of the queue to prioritize it over other tasks. In the processing queue, a task is a collection of data streams with the same date range, triggered to process together. By default, all scheduled tasks, regardless of their date range, are grouped as one task that takes precedence over any manually triggered tasks. The Processing Queue doesn’t determine the order in which processing tasks are executed, and it doesn’t guarantee that prioritized data streams are completed first. Rather, the Priority Queue ensures that the prioritized task receives priority if any tasks compete for the same resources. However, if the tasks don’t compete for the same resources, the tasks can be processed simultaneously.
Prioritize a Task in the Processing Queue in MDP: Prioritize your data stream processing tasks by organizing them in the queue based on priority. Place the task at the top of the queue for the highest priority. Priority is allocated based on the placement of the tasks in the queue.
Data Source Authentication in MDP: Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines Data Source Authentication connects you to various API connectors securely and easily.
Create a Data Source Authentication in MDP: Create a data source authentication manually via the Import tab so you can easily connect to different API connectors. During this process you can decide who has access to this authentication and who can create data streams with it.
Data Stream List: View, manage, and create data streams from the Data Stream List, in the Import tab.
MDP Data Stream Types: Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines includes different data stream types to map your data. A data stream type defines which MDP fields are available for mapping based on your data source. For example, if your data source contains campaign, placement, and ad ID fields, MDP recognizes this as ads data and offers the Ads data stream type when mapping.
MDP Competitive Data Stream Type: The competitive data stream type is suitable for datasets coming from public APIs and competitive analysis tools. This data stream type is designed to fit multiple content worlds, all under the competitive data category. It includes vendor-specific measurements like Facebook page and Twitter likes and generic measurements suitable for multiple cases, such as lifetime likes.
MDP Competitive Data Stream Type Entities: The competitive data stream type has three entities, with the competitive page entity being the data stream type’s main entity.
MDP CRM Data Stream Types: CRM stands for Customer Relationship Management. There are two data stream types for uploading CRM data. One type for uploading leads data called CRM Leads, and one for opportunities data called CRM. The CRM data stream type is equipped with slowly changing type 2 dimensions such as lead stage, lead status, and lead modified date. The CRM leads data stream type ingests data from lead generation platforms such as Marketing Cloud Account Engagement, Hubspot Marketing, and Intercom. It also ingests data from CRM platforms such as Salesforce, Sugar CRM, and CRM Creation.
MDP Measurements in the CRM Data Stream Types: There are two system-generated measurements, one for each CRM data stream type: Leads Count, and Opportunities Count. These measurements perform a distinct count at Lead Key and Opportunity Key level. For example, if you have a lead with three stages, the Leads Count measurement returns the result of one as opposed to three.
MDP Slowly Changing Dimensions Type 2: With CRM data, opportunity or lead attributes are updated over time because an opportunity can go through different stages. The CRM leads data stream type uses the slowly changing dimensions type 2 method to enable a data display suitable for these changes in dimension values. After a dimension’s value changes, the new value appears from the modification date and onwards. The value isn’t updated retroactively.
MDP Ecommerce Data Stream Type: The ecommerce data stream type ingests different data types from ecommerce platforms. It provides levels of data for product catalogs, placed orders, number of purchased items within each order, and more.
MDP Ecommerce Data Stream Type Entities: The ecommerce data stream type contains the entities Ecommerce Order, Clients, Campaigns, Order Item, and Products.
MDP Mapping Advertiser Data to Campaign Data: Campaign data isn’t connected to advertiser data, so you can’t see campaign data with the ecommerce data stream type. Instead, you can manually map your campaign data to either the order level or order item (SKU) level.
MDP Reducing the Number of Rows Produced with the Ecommerce Data Stream Type: Ecommerce data contains different levels, from product to order level data. As a result, it can include a large number of rows to map to get the desired insights. For example, you can have a woman’s dress in three colors and three sizes. When viewing this data, each level has several rows. To reduce the number of rows, you can aggregate the data on a less granular level using these options.
MDP Generic Data Stream Type: The generic data stream type ingests data that doesn’t comply with any of the existing MDP data models. All entities in a generic data stream type are in a many-to-many relationship. It offers 50 custom attributes for each entity and 100 custom measurements. The generic data stream type is flexible and caters to a wide range of data types.
Create a Generic Data Stream: Create a generic data stream when you must upload data that doesn’t comply with any of the existing MDP data models. For example, create a generic data stream if you have survey data that you want to analyze but it doesn’t fit into any of the preset data stream types.
MDP Messaging Data Stream Type: The messaging data stream type ingests email, mobile phone, and journey data. A message can be in the form of an email, text message, or app notification. It’s typically associated with measurements such as how many people received, opened, or clicked a message. Txhis data stream type can be used to ingest data from platforms such as Marketing Cloud Engagement, Marketo, and Adobe.
MDP Create Data Streams: Whenever you upload data, data streams are created. These data streams can be referenced throughout the MDP platform, for example in pivot tables and reports. There are several methods available for creating data streams in Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines. You can use an API connector to connect via API, TotalConnect to upload external files, or LiteConnect if you have data from a single source. You can choose which method is best for you.
MDP Creating Data Streams with API Connectors: API connectors enable you to easily connect data sources such as Google Ads or Facebook to Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines. When you connect an API connector, an API data stream is created that automatically maps the data fields the vendor provides to the MDP data model, allowing you to access your information.
Adobe Analytics Custom 2.0 API Connector: The Adobe Analytics 2.0 Custom API Connector integrates with the latest Adobe Analytics 2.0 API endpoints. The new custom connector allows for simplified query methods and increased capacity for multiple breakdown reports making it the optimal choice for high volume use cases.
MDP Use API Connectors to Connect Your Data: Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines offers thousands of API connectors that you can use to connect to MDP. The API connectors vary from marketing vendors to technical vendors. You can also download additional connectors via the Marketplace.
MDP Account Analytics API Connector: With the Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines Account Analytics connector, you can monitor engagement, page views, audit changes, and entity creation logs. You can use this data to create customized views, add dynamic dashboards, and pull actionable reports. The connector includes logs for both unpublished and published pages.
Adform API Connector: The Adform API connector retrieves Leads data. The data is aggregated and can only be seen at the campaign level.
Adglow API Connector: Adglow is a Social Media Advertising Campaign Management Tool.
Adjust API Connector: Adjust provides analytics, measurement, and fraud prevention solutions for mobile app marketers worldwide.
Adobe Analytics API Connector: Adobe Analytics is a Web Analytics service that tracks and reports website traffic and interaction.
Adobe Analytics Custom API Connector: The Adobe Analytics Custom API Connector allows you to retrieve a custom set of Measurements and Dimensions from the Adobe Analytics API into Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines.
Adocean Gemius API Connector: Adocean is an Ad Server platform that offers advertising space to several Ad Providers at the same time, allowing the same space to be used for direct sales. This enables the automatic optimization of revenue from a single advertising space.
Adroll API Connector: AdRoll is an Ecommerce Growth Platform helping brands grow revenue through marketing and ads.
Affiliate Future API Connector: Affiliate Future provides advertisers with an effective marketing solution through its affiliate network and tools.
AirPush API Connector: Airpush is a mobile ad network that displays data on mobile advertising.
Amazon Advertising API Connector: This API connector retrieves data for Amazon Campaign Types Sponsored Products and Headline Search Ads
Amazon Attribution API Connector: Amazon Attribution is a platform that gives marketers insights into how their non-Amazon marketing channels across search, social, video, and display impact shopping activity and sales performance on Amazon.
Amazon Vendor Brand Analytics API Connector in Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines: First-party sellers, such as manufacturers and distributors, use the Amazon Vendor Central web interface for selling products directly to Amazon. Connecting to the Amazon Vendor Brand Analytics API gives you information about sales and traffic, consumer behavior, and operations.
Amazon DSP API Connector: Amazon DSP is a demand-side platform that enables advertisers to programmatically buy display, video, and audio ads both on and off Amazon.
MDP Amazon Seller Central API Connector: Amazon Seller Central is a web interface used by brands and merchants to market and sell their products directly to Amazon customers.
MDP Amazon Vendor Central API Connector: Amazon Vendor Central is a web interface used by first-party sellers, such as direct manufacturers and distributors, for selling products directly to Amazon.
Apple Search Ads API Connector: The Apple Search Ads API retrieves data related to Search Campaigns advertised on Apple App Store. By using this API, you’ll be able to retrieve standard Display data. The Dimensions and Measurements that are pulled through the API match the data that’s displayed on each of the Ad Groups views within the Apple Search UI.
AppNexus Advertiser API Connector: AppNexus is a global internet technology company that operates an independent marketplace for digital advertising, and enterprise technology for buyers and sellers of digital ads. AppNexus Advertiser is used to retrieve performance, revenue, and profit data across a selected advertiser's creatives and campaigns.
AppNexus Network API Connector: AppNexus is a global internet technology company that operates an independent marketplace for digital advertising, and enterprise technology for buyers and sellers of digital ads. AppNexus Network is used to retrieve high-level performance data for a selected member of the AppNexus Network.
AppNexus Reports API Connector: AppNexus is a global internet technology company that operates an independent marketplace for digital advertising, and enterprise technology for buyers and sellers of digital ads. AppNexus for Reports is used to retrieve a selection of AppNexus reports.
AppsFlyer API Connector: The AppsFlyer API connector retrieves App Analytics data. Through our API, you are able to retrieve the data that’s available under the ‘Geo Daily Report’ in the AppsFlyer Reports section. The report includes Campaigns data, broken down by Countries and Media Sources.
AWIN API Connector: AWIN is a global affiliate marketing network that delivers marketing solutions for advertisers, agencies, and publishers around the world.
Baidu API Connector: Baidu, Inc. operates as an Internet Search Provider, which offers internet search solutions and online marketing solutions.
Basis by Centro API Connector: Basis by Centro is a provider of enterprise software for digital advertising organizations. Its technology platform, Basis, is the first of its kind SaaS advertising solution unifying programmatic and direct media buying, along with workflow automation, cross-channel campaign planning, universal reporting, and business Intelligence Data Pipelines.
Bing Ads API Connector in Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines: Use Bing Ads to track and manage your pay-per-click advertising Bing and Yahoo! search engines. Bing Ads is a search channel connector, the data stream types are Ads, Conversion Tag, Conversion Tag with Keywords, and Search Keywords. The data lagging is one day. Bing Ads data is reported in the UTC timezone.
Brandwatch API Connector: Brandwatch is a Social Media Monitoring Tool that allows your business to analyze and use business conversations from across the social web.
BrightEdge API Connector: BrightEdge is an SEO and content performance marketing platform, helping customers generate more organic traffic.
Call Tracking Metrics API Connector: All fields retrieved are unmapped by default. When you save the data stream you’ll be directed to the mapping screen. Choose the relevant data stream type under the Extended Properties section.
Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines Connector for B2C Commerce: Use the Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines Connector for B2C Commerce to pull aggregated orders or product-level data from your B2C Commerce site. B2C Commerce gathers data from your realm and configures it into logical datasets called dashboards.
Create an API Data Stream Using the Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines Connector for B2C Commerce: Create an API data steam to connect your Commerce Cloud site data to Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines. You can bring in either product-level or order-level data. Product-level data includes revenue generated for each product (SKU) according to the date range. Order-level data is aggregated order revenue over time without the details of specific products.
Comscore API Connector: Comscore provides a comprehensive, consistent, and unique view of media consumption across media and screens to accurately capture modern media consumption
Convertr API Connector: Convertr is a Customer Acquisition Management Platform helping publishers, brands, and agencies improve their leads and the business model that generates them.
Facebook Attribution API Connector: Facebook Attribution tool, a platform that gives marketers a better picture of their clients’ journey by measuring performance across publishers, channels, devices and conversions.
Troubleshooting Reach Data for Facebook Ads Custom: After you set up reach, ensure that all parameters in the Facebook platform match the parameters and granularities set in Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines.
Define Reach Data in Facebook Ads Custom API Connector: Define how to calculate reach data in the Facebook Ads custom API. Facebook uses user-level data to calculate reach. When a date or field is adjusted in Facebook, the granularity changes, and Facebook recalculates the reach value based on the new parameters. Processing historical reach data streams requires unique date ranges for each process. Set a unique reach value for each day based on the granularity. Every date must be processed separately to return the aggregated value for that date.
Facebook Page Insights API Connector in Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines: Use Facebook Page Insights to track user interaction on your Facebook Fan Page. Facebook Insights is seen by all the Admins of your page to help you track the number of active users so you can better understand your page performance. Facebook Page Insights is an organic social channel connector, the data stream type is social objects, and the data lagging is three days.
Facebook Post Insights API Connector in Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines: Use the Facebook post insight connector to understand data on how users engage with your Facebook post so you can make informed decisions on the content you post. Facebook post insights is social channel connector, the data stream type and there’s no data lagging. Facebook post insights pulls data from Graph API, and Insights.
Google Ads API Connector in Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines: Use the Google Ads API connector to retrieve a predefined set of dimensions and measurements from the Google Ads API. Google Ads is a display and search channel connector. The data stream type is Ads, and the data lagging is one day.
Google Analytics Custom API Connector in Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines: Use the Google Analytics Custom API connector to retrieve custom dimensions and metrics. Use custom dimensions to collect and analyze data that Google Analytics doesn’t automatically track. You can combine Analytics data with non-Analytics data using the custom connector. Google Analytics Custom is a web analytics channel connector, and the data lagging is one day.
Google Analytics Attribution API Connector: The Google Analytics Attribution tool is available on the Google Analytics platform. It enables a view of the conversion path a client goes through before the conversion takes place. Tracking starting in the client's first interest until the conversion takes place, across different marketing channels.
Gartner API Connector: Gartner is a global research and advisory firm providing information, advice, and tools for leaders in IT, finance, HR, customer service and support, communications, legal and compliance, marketing, sales, and supply chain functions.
Google Campaign Manager API Connector: Google Campaign Manager is a web-based ad management system for advertisers and agencies, which helps you manage digital campaigns across websites and mobile.
Google Campaign Manager Custom API Connector: Google Campaign Manager Custom, is a web-based ad management system for advertisers and agencies, which helps you manage digital campaigns across websites and mobile platforms.
Google Display and Video 360 API Connector: Google Display & Video 360 is a Demand-Side-Platform (DSP) providing global Display Media Buying across Ad Exchanges. Google Display & Video 360 (DV360) was formerly known as DoubleClick Bid Manager (DBM).
Google Display and Video 360 TrueView API Connector: TrueView line items allow you to create video campaigns with a range of formats to engage customers on YouTube and across the web on partner sites and apps.
Google My Business API Connector: The Google My Business API connector retrieves data related to listings of businesses that are advertised on Google.
Google Ads Manager Custom API Connector: Google Ad Manager Custom, formerly known as DoubleClick for Publishers (DFP). Use the Google Ad Manager custom API connector to create the dimension and metric combinations that work best for your use cases. With the custom connector you can analyze your custom data that isn’t available in the standard connector.
Google Search Console API Connector: Google Search Console is a free service offered by Google that helps you monitor, maintain, and troubleshoot your site's presence in Google Search results.
Hubspot API Connector: Hubspot is a marketing automation tool, Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines currently supports only Email Marketing data.
Instagram by Facebook Connector in Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines: The Instagram by Facebook API connector retrieves lifetime post data from Instagram using Facebook’s graph API. This connector pulls a larger variety of measurements, such as organic impressions. Instagram by Facebook is a social channel connector, the data stream type is social objects, and there’s no data lag.
Instagram Public API Connector: The Instagram Public (competitive) API allows you to get basic metadata and metrics for other Instagram Business Accounts.
Integrate API Connector: Integrate is a Demand Generation Marketing Orchestration Software that provides tools for management and scalability of demand marketing efforts
Kenshoo API Connector: Kenshoo provides digital marketing solutions in Search, Social, and Display.
Line Ads API Connector: LINE Ads is a performance-based ad platform for services related to the LINE chat app that enables you to retrieve delivery data from the platform.
Customer Data Platform API Connector: Marketing Cloud Customer Data Platform allows you to unify all your data - from anywhere - for a complete view of your customers. The Customer Data Platform API connector allows you to pull either your calculated insights from Customer Data Platform or use Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines predefined insights in order to get advanced insights with a click of a button.
Salesforce Marketing Cloud Data Extensions: Salesforce Marketing Cloud is a platform for delivering relevant, personalized journeys across channels and devices - enabling marketers to deliver the right message at the right time throughout all phases of the relationship.
MediaMath API Connector: MediaMath is a Demand-Side Platform (DSP) that provides advertisers and marketers with tools to buy ads online through a single interface.
MOZ API Connector: MOZ API is a Search Engine Optimization tool, which among other things, provides different competitive views. By using our API, you’re able to select Domains, and retrieve a variety of Measurements related to them.
Naver API Connector: Naver is a Korean search engine, it’s also frequently referred to as 'the Google of South Korea'. This integration allows you to retrieve your search and delivery data from the platform.
NetBase API Connector: Netbase is a Social Listening Platform. They develop Natural Language Processing technology that is used to analyze social media and other web content.
Oauth2 Authentication: Oauth2 is an authentication method commonly used as a way for users to authorize websites or applications to access their information on other vendors using authentication tokens, without giving them the credentials to the vendor. Oauth2 is used when the connection to a vendor is done through a mediator app.
MDP Order Management System API Connector: Order Management System (OMS) is a central hub for handling all aspects of the order life cycle, including order capture, fulfillment, shipping, payment processing, and services.
MDP Create an Order Management System Data Stream: To connect your Order Management System (OMS) data to MDP to pull orders, fulfillment, shipping, payment processing, and more, you create an API data stream.
Pinterest API Connector: Pinterest is an online pinboard for collecting visual pieces of multimedia and sharing the content with other users within the platform.
Pinterest Ads API Connector: Pinterest Ads is Pinterest’s Advertising Channel, through which Promoted Pins are created, edited, and managed.
Python Data Stream Retrievals: Python scripts are an effective, fast growing and easy to use technology, and they are now supported in Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines as a Retrieval Method for TotalConnect Data Streams. Although in some cases the same results can be achieved using HTTP requests, Python retrievals are more robust while still being flexible, powerful, and relatively easy to set up.
Quora Ads API Connector: Quora is an online community that allows users to share knowledge (by asking and answering questions). Quora is one of the highest-quality user-generated content platforms.
Radarly API Connector: Radarly by Linkfluence, is a social listening platform that uses Artificial Intelligence Data Pipelines (AI) to turn social data into valuable insights. With Radarly, users can leverage social data and gather valuable consumer insights online.
Reddit Ads API Connector: Reddit is a social news aggregation, web content rating, and discussion website. Reddit Ads is a platform users can purchase and manage advertising space.
SEMrush API Connector: SEMrush is a competitive research platform that allows you to analyze your competitors' domains, looking into their traffic, relevant keyword, and so on, SEMrush offers different types of data so you can set up the connector to your liking.
Salesforce Marketing Cloud For Email & Mobile API Connector: Salesforce Marketing Cloud is a platform for delivering relevant, personalized journeys across channels and devices - enabling marketers to deliver the right message at the right time throughout all phases of the relationship. This API connector can be used to retrieve Email data from Email Studio, including device, browser, operating system, geolocation and domain breakdowns, and campaign details.
Salesforce Pardot API Connector: Pardot is Salesforce’s B2B marketing automation solution. If you’re a business that sells to other businesses (or B2B), Pardot can automate your marketing activities and unite your marketing and sales departments so that they can work better together.
Salesforce Reports API Connector: The Salesforce Reports API connector retrieves reports created in Salesforce, in this connector you will have access to all the reports in Salesforce to which you have permissions for. Since the reports in Salesforce are customizable, once you save the stream you will be directed to the Mapping screen to allow you the same level of customization in Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines.
Snapchat API Connector: Snapchat Ads is an ads platform that provides three types of advertising - Snap Ads, Snapchat Geofilters, and Lenses.
Socialbakers API Connector: The Socialbakers platform is an AI-powered social media marketing company offering social media analysis on Facebook, Instagram, Twitter, YouTube, LinkedIn, Google+, VK, and Pinterest. With this new integration, Socialbakers users can retrieve their owned accounts data across different social media platforms.
Social Studio API Connector: Salesforce Social Studio is a Management Center and Social Listening Platform for owned social accounts on popular social networks, such as Facebook, LinkedIn, Twitter, Instagram, Pinterest, and Google+. It’s also a platform for Social Listening.
Spotify Ads API Connector: Spotify Ad Studio is an ad server that provides tools for advertisers to create campaigns and track them in Spotify, a digital music service. Through Spotify's integration with Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines, you can access your Ad Studio campaign data within Intelligence Data Pipelines's platform
Sprout Social API Connector: With the Sprout connector you can pull analytics of owned social profiles you’ve integrated with Sprout. Profile-level data is shown in PST and Post-level data is shown according to the social channels own timezone. Sprout Social is a social channel connector and the data stream type is social objects and Lifetime.
Synthesio API Connector: Synthesio is a social Intelligence Data Pipelines tool that provides the ability to listen to and analyze consumer conversations across social and mainstream media.
MDP TikTok Ads API Connector: TikTok is a video-sharing social media network. The API connector enables you to retrieve data from the TikTok Ads Manager platform, providing tools for advertisers to create campaigns and track them in TikTok.
The Trade Desk (My Reports) API Connector: A Demand-Side Platform (DSP) that allows ad buyer teams to manage data-driven digital advertising campaigns across various advertising formats, including display, video, and social, on a multitude of devices.
The Trade Desk (My Reports) Custom API Connector: The Trade Desk (TTD) is a Demand-Side Platform that allows ad buyer teams to manage data-driven digital advertising campaigns across various advertising formats, including display, video, and social, on a multitude of devices. The TTD Custom API connector allows you to retrieve a custom set of Measurements and Dimensions from the API into Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines. It enables you to pull data from any of the TTD (My Reports) reports. While the standard TTD (My Reports) API connector is preset to be automatically mapped to the Data Model, the Custom connector requires manual setup.
MDP Twitter Social Engagement API Connector: Use the Twitter Social Engagement API to pull organic data from your Twitter accounts. The Twitter Social Engagement connector uses the Twitter Engagement API connector. This connector measures the performance of content using metrics that aren’t available in other Twitter connectors.
Verizon Media API Connector: Verizon Media, is an advertising platform that provides simplicity, flexibility and transparency to buying media, managing campaigns, and maximizing performance.
Weborama API Connector: Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines connects to Weborama’s Ad Server solution, retrieving data pertaining to the marketing activity conducted in Weborama, and its performance.
Yahoo Gemini API Connector: Yahoo Gemini is Yahoo’s platform for native advertising and mobile search ads.
Yahoo Japan Display API Connector: Yahoo! JAPAN Display delivers ads based on Yahoo’s ad distribution technology on several Yahoo! JAPAN services such as News, Auction, and Shopping. This API integration allows you to retrieve ad data from the Yahoo Japan platform.
Yahoo Japan Search Ads API Connector: Yahoo! Japan Search Ads is a platform from which users can purchase and manage advertising space on Yahoo! Japan.
Yandex API Connector: The report retrieved from Yandex is the "Statistics for all Campaigns" report. The report includes data at the campaign level only.
YouTube Ads API Connector in Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines: Use YouTube ads to discover videos in various ways: by searching on the YouTube search page, clicking suggested videos on the watch page, or choosing a video from the homepage feed. You can use YouTube ads to advertise more effectively to people who are searching for your product or brand. The YouTube ads connector is a display connector with a data lag of one day.
YouTube Insights API Connector: YouTube is a video sharing service where users can create their own profile, upload videos, watch, like, and comment on other videos
MDP Create a Data Stream with an API Connector: Use an API connector to create an API data stream. You can choose from one of thousands of API connectors, or you can go to the Marketplace and install connectors.
MDP Re-process Data in API Data Streams: Re-process is a common action that updates the data within a selected data stream. The most popular use for Re-process is when a dataset changes on the platform’s side, such as Facebook, and the user wants to pull the update back to Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines. This action proactively pulls the new data instead of waiting for a scheduled update to take place (if applicable).
MDP Re-run Data in API Data Streams: Re-run doesn’t initiate the retrieval of new data into the data stream, it reruns the data stream’s existing data.
MDP Troubleshoot API Data Streams: Errors can occur that prevent API data streams from being created or processed. For example, it’s possible you used invalid credentials and processing failed. You can view errors using the Log button. The log contains important technical information and can help you diagnose issues.
MDP Update Data in API Data Streams: You have two options to update the data in an API data stream after it’s been created: Re-process and Re-run.
MDP Creating Data Streams with LiteConnect: With LiteConnect, you can upload a file into Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines as is and utilize the data automatically. You don’t need to consider the predefined structure and constraints of the data model or map fields.
MDP Create a Data Stream with LiteConnect: Create a LiteConnect data stream to upload a single data source as is without any manipulations. You can upload any flat file.
MDP Add Fields to a LiteConnect Data Stream: You can add fields that don’t exist in the source data. Define the new fields by either applying code that is based on the existing columns or creating a new value.
MDP Harmonizing LiteConnect with Other Data Sources: You can harmonize or integrate LiteConnect data streams with other data streams using Vlookup, data fusion, or calculated dimensions. However, LiteConnect data streams are naturally harmonized at the date level, so you can consolidate measurements by date.
Creating Data Streams with TotalConnect: If you need to upload data from a source and no API connector exists, you can create a data stream with TotalConnect. For example, if you have a proprietary dataset in Excel, CSV, or another file format, or if a custom report is sent to you by a data partner that is beyond the scope of what their API can provide.
MDP Mapping Your Source Data in TotalConnect: Mapping connects the source fields in your uploaded file to the corresponding MDP fields. Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines uses machine learning algorithms to map your data. The mapping process is similar regardless of which method you use to upload your data, with some minor differences. If you’re using TotalConnect, MDP identifies the most suitable data stream type according to your data and offers an initial mapping suggestion.
MDP Preview Source Data: After you upload your data with TotalConnect, a preview of your source data lets you see how MDP reads the raw data, including fields and their types. The table reflects all the fields (columns) from your source file. Each field is defined with a type—text, number, or date—and you change the type if needed. You can also change the date format.
Transformers: Transformers are a set of configurations applied to files that are uploaded into Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines. Transformers are used to alter the structure of the data files in order to pull the exact data sets you need. They instruct the platform as to what data table must be extracted from your source file allowing you to manipulate the file structure.
MDP Apply File Transformers: Use file transformers when you want to transform a file that has special characteristics like uncommon delimiters, multiple sheets, or specific file encoding. For example, if a file uses ~~ as the delimiter instead of a comma or a tab, use the file transformer to specify the custom delimiter so that you can map the file correctly.
MDP Apply Data Transformer: Select the data transformer checkbox to manipulate actual data contained in the files you upload.
MDP Apply Header Transformers: If you want to customize the header structure when headers aren’t available or span multiple rows, you can use a header transformer. For example, if a file has a two-line header that must be combined into one row.
MDP Apply Pivot Transformers: The pivot transformer can transform values from selected columns into new individual columns, which then contain aggregated values for the measurements.
MDP Apply Table Transformers: The table transformer enables you to customize a table’s start and end rows and columns.
MDP Total Rows Transformers: Use the total rows transformer when you want to change the default behavior of Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines to strip out “totals” rows from all files. For example, if a file has non-additive measurements, and you want only the totals row mapped, use this transformer.
MDP Transpose Transformers: Use a transpose transformer when you want to reconstruct a flat-file format by translating columns of data into rows. For example, if a file has three conversion types in three separate columns that you want to aggregate into “total conversions,” they must be transposed into rows from columns. A column of data in a flat-file corresponds to a field that could be mapped in the Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines data model. So anytime you can streamline the number of potential mapped fields, you free up fields that can be used for other dimensions or measurements. After transpose settings are set for a data stream, new files uploaded to the data stream automatically inherit the predefined pattern that was specified upon initial integration.
MDP Apply Transpose Transformers: Apply a transpose transformer when you want to reconstruct a flat-file format by translating columns of data into rows.
MDP Apply Unnest Transformers: The unnest transformer enables you to transform concatenated values into separate rows. The measurement values linked to the nested row are duplicated to each new row. For example, If there are three values, comma-separated, and one field must be broken out into individual rows of data, this transformer creates individual rows for each value in that field.
MDP Troubleshoot TotalConnect Data Streams: Errors can occur that prevent data streams from being created or processed. You can view errors using the Log button. The log contains important technical information and can help you diagnose issues.
MDP Create a Data Stream with TotalConnect: You can upload data manually, automatically using FTP, or an email address, or by scheduling an update with a technical vendor.
Data Stream Templates in MDP: Use data stream templates to create a mapping template that you can replicate to create data streams. Store the template on the workspace or account level. You can share data stream templates between workspaces and accounts. The data stream template saves formulas used in the original data stream.
Create a Data Stream Template: You can create a data stream template for a TotalConnect data stream or an API data stream. To create an API data stream you must have at least one template for the source in your workspace.
Workflows in MDP: Use workflows to execute data streams, reports, and actions in your workspace. For example, create a workflow to generate a report after specific data streams are processed.
Create a Workflow: Create a workflow to set the order of when to execute data streams, reports, and actions. You can also chain workflows together so that the end of the workflow initiates the next workflow.
Execute a Workflow: You can execute a workflow manually, even if it has a defined schedule. You can run up to 10 workflows per hour.
Troubleshoot a Workflow: If a workflow fails, view the log file to see what caused the failure. A workflow can run for 6 hours. If the workflow doesn’t finish executing in that time, it times out.
Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines: Integrate, harmonize, and unify your disparate marketing data, making it accessible to your entire organization-wide data strategy with Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines (MDP). Automate your marketing data integration and easily export it into your data warehouse and data consumption tools of choice. Actively monitor and update your raw data and receive notifications when something goes awry.
Get Started with MDP: With Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines, you can integrate all your data from marketing and advertising platforms, web analytics, CRM, e-commerce, and more. You can then use this unified view of your data to optimize campaign performance and discover and act on insights in real time.
MDP Accounts and Workspaces: A Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipeline account is divided into workspaces. An account can contain multiple workspaces. Each workspace is a separate work environment with its own set of permissions. Changes that you make in a workspace apply only to that workspace.
MDP Supported Browsers: You can access Marketing Intelligence Data Platforms from a browser on a Windows, macOS, or Linux computer.
What Are Cookies?: Cookies temporarily store a small amount of information in a user’s browser. For example, logging in to a website, preferences for particular content, capping how often a user sees ads, or tracking what a user does online. Cookies are set at the user level, allowing every user to customize their own cookie settings.
Manage Cookie Settings: You can manage your Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines cookie settings.
MDP Cookies: Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines divides cookies into three areas: Required, Functional, and Usage.
Custom Date Range in MDP: You can define your own date range categories using formulas or functions. You can use your custom date ranges anywhere a date can be selected in the workspace, such as reports, and pivot tables.
Exchange Rates in MDP: Manage your exchange rates easily and intuitively, see market rates, and export and customize your exchange rate table. You can set exchange rates at both the account and workspace levels.
Add an Exchange Rate at the Account Level in MDP: You can select an exchange rate at both the account and workspace levels. You can set your workspace to inherit the exchange rate set at the account level.
Date Ranges in MDP: Use a date range to display specific data. You can set a date range for a pivot table, and a report. You can select a predefined date range from the date picker, such as Last 30 days or This Month, or you can enter a range. When you set a date range, your data updates according to the dates selected.
Add an Exchange Rate at the Workspace Level: If you are setting an exchange rate at the workspace level, then you have the option to inherit the account level exchange rates by checking the Inherit account rates checkbox. If the inherit account rates checkbox is checked you can’t add new currency exchange rates on the workspace level.
Get Ready for MDP: Before we start, explore the Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines platform. Then check that you are using one of Salesforce’s support browsers. Finally, familiarize yourself with the user roles that MDP includes.
Invite a Partner in MDP: Invite certified partners to gain access to your Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines workspace, using the access invitation tab. Partner users have two weeks to accept or decline invitations. An email confirmation is sent to you when the invitation is accepted. You can view the invitation statuses in the Access Invitation tab.
Change Your MDP Platform Language: You can change the default language for a user or just for the current session at login. This is done per user at the account level.
Manage the Account Activity Logs in MDP: Users can view and audit changes made in the account in the activity logs. The Account activity log shows high-level changes, such as adding and deleting users.
Account Deactivation in MDP: Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines offers two types of customer accounts: Paying and POC. If an account expires and no renewal contract has been issued, a deactivation process is automatically initiated.
Activity Log in MDP: Users can view and audit changes made in the account in the activity logs. The Account activity log shows high-level changes, such as adding and deleting users. The Entity activity log lists the changes made to a specific entity, such as a data stream, report, and collection.
Re-enable a Disabled User in MDP: Users can be manually disabled, or you can disable users automatically if they’re inactive for a certain number of days. You can re-enable a user after they have been disabled if you want to.
Manage the Entity Activity Log in MDP: The entity activity log shows a detailed view of any changes made to a specific entity, such as a data stream or report.
Delete a User in MDP: When a user creates an entity, that user is the entity owner. If an entity owner is deleted, the entities created by that user become unowned. Some entities, such as actions, report schedulers, and data streams with specific retrieval settings, require an owner to function properly. When a user is being deleted, Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines checks whether the user owns entities that require an owner. You can then assign the entity to a new owner to keep the entities functioning properly.
Switching Between Accounts in MDP: Switching between accounts can be done through the account settings. This enables you to view another account’s settings, account users, workspaces, and data streams.
Manage Users in MDP: Users with Manage Account Users permissions can view and manage users across their account and workspaces from account settings in the Manage Users tab.
MDP Navigate the Platform: The Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines platform is divided into five tabs. Here you can explore the different tabs.
MDP Security: Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines uses a variety of industry-standard and state-of-the-art security technologies and procedures to help protect your information from unauthorized access, use, or disclosure. You can decide on which methods best suit your needs. Keeping up with the evolving security landscape is an ongoing, joint partnership between MDP and our customers. As security threats grow more common, it’s important to implement stronger measures to protect your business and customers.
Multi-Factor Authentication in MDP: Multi-factor authentication (MFA) requires users to enter two or more pieces of evidence, or factors, to prove identification. One factor is something the user knows, such as a username and password combination. Other factors are verification methods that the user has in possession, such as an authenticator app or security key.
MDP Supported Verification Methods: When a user logs in to Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines for the first time using MFA, the user must select at least one verification method.
Single Sign-On (SSO) in MDP: SSO makes access easier and more secure for everyone. You can connect to Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines without another password to manage.
Set Up SSO in Your Account: After you configure your identity provider, set up SSO in Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines with the information you configured.
Customize Your Account in MDP: After an account is created, you can customize it with your logo and specify access settings.
Add a User in MDP: When you add users, you can specify their user role and permissions to control which actions they can take and which features they have access to.
MDP User Groups: You can create a user group to apply a set of content permissions and workspace user filters to users who need access to specific accounts or workspaces. A user role determines what a user can and can’t do, while a user group determines where the user can apply these permissions. You can assign a user to more than one user group.
Create a User Group: Create a user group to apply content permissions and workspace filters to a group of users who need access to specific accounts or workspaces.
Workspace Integrations in MDP: Workspace integrations bring together multiple systems allowing them to work collaboratively with Marketing Intelligence Data Pipelines. For example with the Slack integration you can send alerts directly into Slack from MDP.
MDP Insights for Slack Integration: MDP Insights for Slack provides seamless collaboration with colleagues and clients allowing marketing teams to work together and communicate on campaigns and improve cross-functional work.
Create a Slack Integration for Workspaces in MDP: Configure Marketing Intelligence Data Pipelines Insights for Slack to send alerts from MDP to Slack. After the integration is set up, users with permissions and access to the workspace can share alerts to Slack.
Workspace Settings in MDP: Each Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines account can have multiple workspaces. Each workspace has its own data streams, dashboards, and reports. You typically use workspaces to separate clients, business units, channel views, internal views, or role-based views—whatever best fits your needs.
Restore Deleted Workspace Items in MDP: When you delete data streams, reports, pivot tables, calculated dimensions, dimension hierarchies, calculated measurements, or filtered measurements, they are placed in the workspace bin. You can restore these items if needed.
Sharing Entities Between Workspaces in MDP: You can share common entities across workspaces and accounts. When the original entity is modified, you can opt to push the changes to all the workspaces that share the item. You can change only the original item, but you can de-link a shared item and then change it. You can also import new entities without updating existing shared items.
MDP Dimensions: In Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines, a dimension is a qualitative non-numerical attribute that provides information about your dataset, for example, campaign name and campaign ID. A dimension can’t be counted, even when it includes a number. For instance, a campaign ID consists of numbers but you can’t calculate them.
MDP Related Measurements in Calculated Dimensions: A related measurement is linked to a calculated dimension and used to populate the dimension values in a list. You can add a related measurement when creating a calculated dimension, in the Advanced section.
MDP Calculated Dimensions: A calculated dimension is a non-numerical field or dimension that you can create on top of your existing data. Calculated dimensions don’t exist physically in the database. Rather, each calculated dimension represents a query that can be referenced to from any report or pivot table.
MDP Calculated Dimension Functions: Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines provides basic functions you can use to create dynamic calculated dimensions
Export Your Data with MDP: Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines offers multiple tools for exporting your data to consume it in your tool of choice. You can export your data into a database, report, or Tableau.
MDP Manage Your Account: Manage your account to view data, user actions, and analytics for your account.
Account Row Usage: View your current account row usage and your usage by the workspaces in your account.
Data Retention: Data in MDP is stored for 90 days from the last process time so that you can clean and harmonize your data before exporting it for external consumption. After 90 days since your data was last processed, you can’t consume, query, report, or export your data when you create, reprocess, rerun, or recreate a data stream.
MDP Data Row Usage: When you upload data into Salesforce Marketing Intelligence Data Pipelines, each row of data in the source file occupies a row of data in MDP. Each MDP account has a set number of rows, depending on the license acquired, that can be divided among the workspaces in the account.
Processed Rows: Processed rows are the number of rows in the source file that are ingested to the data stream every time that data is processed.
Workspace Row Usage: View your current workspace row usage and usage over time by the data sources and data streams in your workspace.
MDP Harmonize Your Data: Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines offers multiple tools for harmonizing your data. Because you can upload data from various sources, you need a way to merge the data and provide a complete view of your marketing activity. In most cases, no single data source holds all relevant data on a marketing event or campaign. The data is shared by the multiple platforms that digital marketers use to do things like promoting the campaign on multiple channels. To analyze the full picture, harmonize data from all sources into one. If data isn’t harmonized, you must analyze each source individually—making it a challenge to gain insights quickly and efficiently.
MDP Harmonize Data with the Harmonization Center: The Harmonization Center in the Harmonize tab, unifies, enriches, and validates your data in one place. In the Harmonization Center, create and manage your naming convention patterns, classifications, and harmonized dimensions.
MDP Manage and Monitor Harmonized Dimensions: After harmonized dimensions are created, they appear in a list so you can easily manage them. Add classifications and validations, see previews, find and replace in bulk, and more.
MDP Multi-Delimiter Patterns and Structure Compliance: A multi-delimiter pattern contains different types of delimiters in a pattern, such as an underscore, colon, and comma. Structure compliance determines how and when extractions take place. With a single delimiter pattern, an extraction occurs only for dimension values that adhere to the pattern’s exact structure. For example, dimensions that have the same number of positions as the dimension that you’re currently creating this pattern for. When working with multi-delimiter patterns, the logic is different.
MDP Naming Convention Patterns: In the distraction-filled world of a digital marketer, clarity is important. Therefore, when using different marketing platforms, digital marketers often name an activity with all the information in the name. Proper naming allows them to differentiate between the different campaigns, and understand campaign goals and details at a glance without having to look elsewhere.
MDP Create a Naming Convention Pattern: Create a naming convention pattern to deconstruct your dimension, which is in a naming convention form, and create harmonized dimensions for each segment of your naming convention. A harmonized dimension acts like any regular calculated dimension and can be used in the platform, for example in reports.
MDP Data Classification: Classify your data without using a single line of code. For example, classify your sites by news, sports, or entertainment, and so on. Upload a classification file and create a classification rule.
MDP Configure Classification Rules: After you upload or create a classification file using data classification, customize and configure the columns in your file. Determine which column is the Key column and which is the Value column. Control the way the system recognizes values in your file as well.
MDP Classification Rule Example: This table shows how configuration types affect data classification and what happens when data is classified.
MDP Create a Data Classification Rule: Create a classification rule to classify your data. You can upload a classification file or define the classification from scratch.
MDP Classification Files: Use classification files when creating classification rules and to tell MDP how to classify the values.
MDP Create a Classification File from Scratch: When creating classification rules you either upload a classification file or you create it from scratch. The file tells MDP how to classify your data.
MDP Fusing Data Between Datasets: Data fusion creates a link between dimensions that don’t already have a data model relationship between them.
MDP Create a Data Fusion: Create a data fusion to link two datasets with a shared dimension together.
MDP Applying Filters to Fused Dimensions: When applying a filter to fused dimensions, the filtering impacts the datasets associated with all the fused dimensions.
MDP When to Use Data Fusion: Use data fusion to unify data that doesn’t naturally harmonize by virtue of the data model based on shared dimension values.
Parent-Child Connections in MDP: A parent-child connection describes a case where two or more data streams are linked by a matching entity key. This connection establishes hierarchical dependencies between entities, allowing for grouping at various granular levels such as campaign, media buy, or creative. Matching entity keys between the data streams are required to establish a parent-child relationship.
MDP Define a Parent Data Stream: Define a parent data stream to determine a connection between two data streams using a shared entity.
MDP Parent-Child Use Cases: You can use parent-child connections when there are multiple data streams that share the same keys, but have unique attributes, and you must share a hierarchy between them. Here are examples of when parent-child can be used.
MDP Validate and Maintain Your Harmonized Data in the Harmonization Center: Keeping track of your naming convention patterns, classifications, and harmonized dimensions is overwhelming and time-consuming. Fix & Maintain offers a solution for identifying data that doesn’t adhere to your predefined naming conventions or data classifications. Validate and maintain harmonized data with Fix & Maintain and if issues arise, fix, and adjust as needed.
MDP Fix and Maintain Interface: Fix & Maintain, part of the Harmonization Center, identifies data that doesn’t adhere to predefined naming conventions or data classifications. In the Harmonization Center landing page, click Fix & Maintain.
MDP Fixing Data in Fix & Maintain: Use Fix & Maintain to make corrections to source dimensions, harmonized dimensions, and data classification values. There are two ways to fix data. To make bulk changes, export exception reports manually, fix incorrect values, and then import the fixed data. To make a few changes, use in-line editing within Fix & Maintain and make changes directly in Salesforce Marketing Intelligence Data Pipelines.
MDP Modify Harmonized Dimension: If after applying fixes to a harmonized dimension the setup changes by deleting a pattern or adding or removing a dimension, future fixes aren’t saved.
MDP Fix Multiple Files Using Import and Export: Use import and export to fix multiple files when exceptions occur. There are two types of export options; export and download a file, or use schedule export to export the report at a set time and send to specific recipients.
MDP Fix Single File Using In-Line Edit: To fix an entity inside Fix & Maintain, use in-line editing. A list of your harmonized data, including harmonized dimensions, source dimensions, and data classifications appears in order of least successful harmonization to most successful.
MDP Calculated Measurements: A calculated measurement is a numerical custom calculation that you can create on top of your existing data. The calculated measurement doesn’t physically exist in the database. Rather, it represents a query that you can reference from any report, or pivot table.
MDP Aggregation and Total Aggregation Functions: An aggregation function computes numerical calculations on data, allowing the query to return summarized information about a given column or result set. You can use an aggregation function to calculate each row at the dimension level or the total value. In MDP, you define the aggregation function when creating a calculated measurement.
Filtered Measurements: A filtered measurement is used to customize an existing measurement to include information relating to a specific dimension attribute.
Create a Filtered Measurement: Create a filtered measurement to customize a measurement to include only information correlating with certain dimensional attributes. The filtered measurement is a separate measurement and does not affect the original measurement it is based on.
MDP Granularity in Calculated Measurements: Granularity is the level of detail considered and then represented in an analysis or query. The greater the granularity, the deeper the level of detail. With more detail, you can better understand the smaller components of your data and create a fuller picture.
MDP System Calculated Measurement: Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines calculates popular industry measurements that you can use as data in reports, and pivot tables. The measurements are calculated using fixed formulas using your workspace’s data. A measurement is available only if its formula’s components are mapped in an existing data stream. For example, if you uploaded Impressions and Media Cost data, CPM appears. This table describes the available system calculated measurements and their formulas.
MDP Measurements: In Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines, measurements are quantitative numerical data that you can count, for example, number of clicks and emails opened. Measurements are used to set KPIs and analyze your data.
Opt-Out Keywords for SMS Messages in Marketing Cloud Next: To meet consent and privacy regulations, your recipients must know how to opt-out of SMS messages. In your messages, provide specific opt-out keywords and clear instructions for using them. Include keywords in promotional or transactional messages every time you send.
Access the Features of Marketing Cloud Engagement+: Marketing Cloud Engagement+ unifies your existing Marketing Cloud Engagement data with the Salesforce Platform. This integration enhances your marketing efforts by giving you access to more features, and by giving you a single view of your overall marketing program. You can access these features and capabilities from your existing Marketing Cloud Engagement account, or directly through the Salesforce Platform.
Business Units in Marketing Cloud Engagement+: Use business units in Marketing Cloud Engagement+ to scale and control your brand and your marketing activities. Business units make it possible for divisions within an organization to focus on their own marketing objectives, while also enabling reporting and access control across the entire enterprise.
Differences Between Marketing Cloud Engagement and Marketing Cloud Next: Marketing Cloud Next has a concept of business units that’s separate and different from the concept of business units in Marketing Cloud Engagement This table lists some of the main differences between the ways that business units work in the two apps.
Get Started with Business Units: Your Marketing Cloud Next account uses one business unit by default. To use business units in your account, complete these steps.
Recommendations for Existing Marketing Cloud Engagement Customers: For customers who use business units in Marketing Cloud Engagement, we recommend that you create a 1:1 business unit architecture. In other words, for each business unit that you use in Marketing Cloud Engagement, create and map a corresponding business unit in Marketing Cloud Next.
Configure Marketing Cloud Engagement+: Before your marketing team can access the next-generation features of Marketing Cloud Next, complete these setup steps. For many customers, the setup process takes about 1–2 hours to complete.
Connect Marketing Cloud Engagement: Start the setup process by identifying the Marketing Cloud Engagement account to connect to Marketing Cloud Next.
Configure Data 360 Components for Marketing Cloud Engagement+: Integrate your Marketing Cloud Engagement data with Data 360. Data 360 uses the data to create unified customer profiles, evaluate conditions in flows, and personalize your message content.
Set Up Marketing Performance: Configure the Marketing Performance dashboards to give your marketing team deep insights into the performance of their campaigns.
Configure Test Environments in Marketing Cloud Engagement+: Marketing Cloud Next and Marketing Cloud Engagement use different approaches to non-production environments, also known as sandbox or test environments. If your organization uses Marketing Cloud Engagement+, these different approaches impact the way that you test your marketing programs.
Unify Legacy Engagement Data: Some legacy Marketing Cloud Engagement data isn’t compatible with Marketing Cloud Next features. If it’s necessary to modify your Engagement data, you can do it in Setup.
Manage Incoming and Existing Engagement Data: After you update your data configuration, update your incoming Marketing Cloud Engagement data to the unified data model. Then, update the model for your existing Engagement data.
Update Your Data Configuration: To help you unify your data, we provide a CSV file that lists the processes in your org that need to be updated. Generate the CSV file, update your data mapping, then use the file to make the necessary changes.
Assign User Access: Create accounts for your marketing users and assign them the permissions that they need to complete their work.
Working with Data Extensions: Bring the data from your existing Marketing Cloud Engagement data extensions into Data 360. Your data can power the next-generation marketing capabilities of Marketing Cloud Next, including drag-and-drop segmentation, custom reporting, and flows with the power of Agentforce.
Synchronize Data Extensions with Marketing Cloud Next: Synchronize your data extensions with Marketing Cloud Next on a schedule that you define. When you synchronize a data extension, your team can continue to use any integrations that rely on data extensions in Marketing Cloud Engagement. At the same time, you can start using that data to create campaigns, segments, and flows in Marketing Cloud Next.
Send Flow Members to a Journey: With Marketing Cloud Engagement+, you can send customers from your flows into existing Engagement journeys.
Add a Journey to a Campaign in Marketing Cloud Engagement+: Organize your existing journeys in Marketing Cloud Next by adding them to campaigns. Adding your campaigns to journeys is a great way to view all of your journeys that are related to a specific theme or objective.
Get Started with Marketing Cloud Engagement+: With Marketing Cloud Engagement+, you gain access to the next-generation features of Marketing Cloud Next. You also keep all of the campaigns, data extensions, and journeys that you’ve created over the years in Marketing Cloud Engagement. It’s the best of both worlds!
Share Email Sending Domains with Marketing Cloud Next: Share your established sending domains from Marketing Cloud Engagement with Marketing Cloud Next to preserve your domain authentication and brand identity and simplify setup. Shared domains remain active in Marketing Cloud Engagement, so you can send emails concurrently from both products during and after your transition.
Assign Contributors to the Marketing Landing Pages Site: Salesforce Experience Cloud helps you create branded digital experiences using no-code, low-code, and pro-code tools. With Marketing Cloud Next, you can use Experience Cloud to create landing pages for your marketing campaigns. You can assign permissions to your users based on the level of access they need for your landing pages.
Digital Wallet: Monitor Data Usage and Cost: Marketing Cloud Engagement+ uses consumption billing for certain features and functionality. Digital Wallet tracks this consumption so that you can monitor spending and allocation. Standard and custom reports and dashboards provide trend analysis and forecasting for budgeting purposes across business units and lines of business. You can even set alerts to help you avoid overages.
Orchestration: Trigger Journeys with a Flow: As a Journey Builder expert, you maintain tried-and-true journeys. Keep using and optimizing them with your access to Marketing Cloud Next, which uses Flow Builder for automation. When you add journey elements to flows, you can create complex automations that work easily with data from third-parties and the Salesforce Platform.
Journey Decisioning: Let AI Choose the Next Best Step: It can be hard to identify the best next step for all of the people who move through your automated journeys. The trusted tools in Marketing Cloud Engagement+ handle that difficult processing task for you. Platform tools like Agent Builder and Flow Builder ensure that your marketers, prospects, and customers each have an ideal customer journey.
Unified Reporting: Aggregate Engagement Data Across Apps: Create insightful reports across Marketing Cloud Engagement+ activities and the next-gen content that you build in . These reports include marketing data and data from other Salesforce products such as Sales Cloud, Service Cloud, and Data 360. Best of all, marketers can create in-depth, Tableau Next reports and dashboards without writing any code.
Configure Consent Mapping from Marketing Cloud Engagement to Marketing Cloud Next: The next-gen marketing app uses communication subscriptions to manage list membership. To share consent between Marketing Cloud Next and Marketing Cloud Engagement, map engagement lists and publication lists to communication subscriptions for email and SMS.
Unified Reporting Tools in Marketing Cloud Engagement+: Marketing Cloud Engagement+ includes two reporting tools that give you deep insights into your sending and engagement data. These reports include data from Marketing Cloud Engagement and Marketing Cloud Next.
Create Custom Analytics Reports in Marketing Cloud Engagement+: The unified reporting system in Marketing Cloud Engagement+ includes powerful analytics tools that you can use to create custom reports anytime you need them. In these reports, you can select the data you want to report on, filter it to meet your needs, and create visualizations, without writing a single line of code.
Historical Data in the Unified Reporting System: When you set up Marketing Cloud Engagement+, an automated process imports historical send and engagement data from Marketing Cloud Engagement. Use this historical data to create segments and add flow logic in Marketing Cloud Next.
Key Data Model Object Fields for Unified Reporting: The unified reporting system for Marketing Cloud Next for Engagement uses a unified data model that’s shared across the Salesforce Platform. Some of the terms, fields, and values in the unified system are unfamiliar to Marketing Cloud Engagement customers. As a marketer, it’s helpful to understand the Data Model Objects (DMOs) that you’re most likely to encounter when you build reports using the unified reporting system.
Key Email Data Model Objects for Unified Reporting: In the unified reporting system for Marketing Cloud Engagement+, there are three data model objects (DMOs) that contain helpful data for creating email-related reports. These DMOs contain information about your email send definitions, engagement data, and message content data.
Key Push Data Model Objects for Unified Reporting: In the unified reporting system for Marketing Cloud Engagement+, there are three data model objects (DMOs) that contain helpful data for creating reports related to push messaging. These DMOs contain information about your send definitions, engagement data, and message content.
Key SMS Data Model Objects for Unified Reporting: In the unified reporting system for Marketing Cloud Engagement+, there are three data model objects (DMOs) that contain helpful data for creating reports related to SMS messaging. These DMOs contain information about your send definitions, engagement data, and message content.
Key WhatsApp Data Model Objects for Unified Reporting: In the unified reporting system for Marketing Cloud Engagement+, there are three data model objects (DMOs) that contain helpful data for creating reports related to WhatsApp messaging. These DMOs contain information about your send definitions, engagement data, and message content.
Customizing the Marketing Semantic Data Model: Extend or customize the semantic data model (SDM) that’s included with Marketing Cloud Next. You can associate objects from Data 360, such as data from Sales or Service Cloud. The SDM can also include other data, such as data from your data extensions in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Unified Reporting Concepts and Terminology: The unified reporting suite in Marketing Cloud Engagement+ is built on the Salesforce Platform. It uses some concepts and terms that might be unfamiliar to existing Marketing Cloud Engagement users.
Troubleshoot Unified Reporting Issues: Troubleshoot common reporting issues to resolve discrepancies and ensure accurate marketing performance data in Marketing Cloud Engagement+.
Video Library for Marketing Cloud Engagement+: Accelerate your marketing journey with video walkthroughs that spotlight important features and setup steps for Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Where to Start with Marketing Cloud Engagement+: To find out which next-generation marketing features are the best first steps for you, consider whether you already use Data 360 or Journey Builder. Think through which features are likely to bring the most value based on the entities and assets that you already have.
Assign Workspace Contributors: Marketing Cloud Next gives you a dedicated content workspace where you can store message content, images, and notes to use with your campaigns. To give a user the ability to interact with the content in the Marketing workspace, add them as a contributor.
AI Reporting and Analytics in Marketing Cloud Next: Monitor your campaigns with AI. Use reports, the command center, and insights to track performance, surface anomolies, and act on AI-powered recommendations.
Change the Audience: Audiences are automatically generated from a connected brief for a workspace. Modify the audience by entering a request in the prompt window or by selecting an audience manually.
Collaborate on Content: Work together with your team in real time. Share workspaces with team members, see who else is viewing or editing a workspace, and comment on content to gather feedback before you publish.
Key Concepts: To help you get the most out of generating and using agentic content, get familiar with key concepts.
Manage Agentic Content in Marketing Cloud Next: Generate, refine, and publish personalized, on-brand content and images for email, SMS, MMS, and RCS campaigns in a collaborative AI workspace. Ground generated content in your marketing briefs, customer data, and brand guidelines. Generate channel-ready content variations side by side, while applying personalization and localization. Teams can review, refine, and approve content and images. When content is ready, publish it to Salesforce CMS for use in campaigns.
Create and Manage Multi-Channel Agentic Content Blocks: Reuse shared campaign content across email, SMS, MMS, and RCS messages using content blocks. Maintain consistency across channels for shared assets, such as footers, logos, legal text, and promotional offers. Create channel-specific variants when an audience or channel requires distinct formatting or a simplified layout.
Work with Content Variants: Create alternate versions of generated content to test different creative directions, audiences, or locales while keeping the same campaign context and grounding. Make targeted edits, update images, change personalization options, generate a localized variant, or create other options with differing subject lines. For example, if your marketing brief or prompt defines more than one audience, you can request to generate a variant with a unique style, tone, and data strategy for each audience.
Create a Workspace and Generate Content: Create an agentic content workspace, add grounding, and generate personalized content for email and messaging channels, tailored to your requirements and audience.
Edit Content Manually: Edit generated content for email and messaging channels directly for precise messaging and design control, including HTML, CSS, and image updates. Select an element in the canvas, such as text, an image, or a button, to reveal editing tools available for that element.
HTML Requirements for Manually Edited Content: The agentic content code editor supports standard and workspace-specific HTML tags. Review the required data attributes so that manually added or edited HTML elements stay selectable and editable in the visual editor.
Before You Generate Content: For the best results, create your brand, marketing briefs, images, and other assets before generating content. Use these resources to ground your content and make sure that your content follows corporate standards and aligns with campaign goals.
Preview and Publish Content: Preview content across devices and locales, preview personalization as a specific recipient, and send test emails before you publish. Publish content from your content workspace to Salesforce CMS so that it's available to use in campaigns.
Refine Agentic Content: In the prompt window, ask to refine generated content for email and messaging channels, including headlines, subject lines, tone, images, and other elements.
Set Up Agentic Content: Before marketers can generate and refine agentic content and images, prepare your org. Confirm prerequisites and permissions, turn on required channels, configure personalization, and set up the channels you want to create agentic content for.
Turn On the Privacy Preference Manager Tab for Marketers: To allow users to edit the default email preference page or to access Preference Manager tools in the Marketing app, turn on the Privacy Preference Manager tab. Edit the Standard User Profile to make the tab Default On.
Customize the Analytics Page: To help users find and interact with Marketing Cloud Next reports and dashboards, create collections and filters.
Use the Order Return via API Event: Trigger automation flows when customers initiate returns in your external commerce system, enabling automated return confirmations and processing communications.
Use the Order Status via API Event: Trigger automation flows when order statuses change in your external commerce system, such as when orders are placed, processed, or updated.
Use the Order Shipment Status via API Event: Trigger automation flows when order shipment statuses change in your external commerce system, such as when orders are shipped or delivered.
Order Lifecycle API Automation Events: Use Order API events to start an automation event-triggered flow when an order lifecycle event occurs in an external commerce system. Order lifecycle API events provide an API-first approach to marketing automation, allowing merchant systems to trigger flows instantly when order-related events occur. This enables marketers to respond in real time with automated customer communications for order-based activities. Marketers can also use order data from the API payload to personalize the customer experience
Comply with Privacy Regulations: Stay in compliance with privacy and consent regulations that apply to your business with consent management tools in Marketing Cloud Next. Use the default marketing communication subscription to collect and track consent data, or create your own custom subscriptions. Built-in preference pages make it easy for subscribers to manage their own communication preferences.
Turn On Custom Preference Pages: If you enabled Marketing Cloud Next before April 2026, turn on custom preference pages. If you enabled Marketing Cloud Next after April 2026, you have this functionality by default.
Configure Custom Engagement Values for Marketing Triggers: Retail marketing triggers detect shopper actions, such as viewing a product or adding an item to a cart, from engagement values in your data model. If your data uses values other than the defaults, configure custom engagement values so that your triggers build audiences from your own data instead of hard-coded defaults.
Configure Identity Resolution Rulesets for Marketing Cloud Next: Identity resolution is a critical step to organizing and unifying your data. Usually, when your data originates from many systems, it’s modeled and labeled differently in each place. Identity resolution rulesets define the relationships among data model objects (DMOs) and their fields. After you configure these rules, Data 360 can organize related and duplicate data into unified individual records that marketers can use to target audiences.
Deploy Data Kits for Marketing Cloud Next: Data kits contain the objects, fields, and data connections that make Marketing Cloud Next work. Marketing data kits are required for all Marketing Cloud Next users, but the sales data kit is optional based on how you manage your CRM data.
Configure Your Marketing Data: One of the things that makes Marketing Cloud Next so powerful is its relationship to Data 360. To prepare your Salesforce org, install and deploy the data kits that include the data model objects (DMOs) that support marketing assets. Then, use identity resolution rulesets to organize and unify your data.
Dedicated IP Provisioning in Marketing Cloud Next: Build and maintain your sender reputation with a dedicated IP pool for your org. Marketing Cloud Next provides you a dedicated IP pool as your send volume grows, so Internet Service Providers (ISPs) see a consistent sending history for your messages.
Dedicated IP Pools, Requirements, and Status: See how dedicated IP addresses are organized into pools, what to confirm before you request a dedicated IP pool, and how to check provisioning status.
Set Up Distributed Marketing and Alerts: With Distributed Marketing and Alerts, marketers can help ensure quality content and consistent branding by sharing approved email templates with other users. To make Distributed Marketing and Alerts available, an admin must turn on the feature, assign permissions, and add the Distributed Marketing and Alerts components to campaign, lead, contact, and person account records.
DMO Mappings for Abandoned Shopping Cart Trigger: For the abandoned shopping cart trigger, map profile, engagement, and contact point DMOs with your customer data. Some engagement DMOs require a specific value to be used for a DMO.
DMO Mappings for Abandoned Page Trigger: For the abandoned page trigger, map profile, engagement, and contact point DMOs with your customer data. Some engagement DMOs require a specific value to be used for a DMO.
DMO Mappings for Abandoned Product Browse Trigger: For the abandoned product browse trigger, map profile, engagement, and contact point DMOs with your customer data. Some engagement DMOs require a specific value to be used for a DMO.
DMO Mappings for Replenishment Trigger: For the replenishment trigger, map profile, engagement, product, and contact point DMOs with your customer data.
Domain Settings in Marketing Cloud Next: Depending on your business needs, you can configure one or more domains to handle different jobs. You can choose My Domain to use a Salesforce subdomain or configure your own custom domain for hosting content. You can also create a tracking domain if you plan to use SMS messaging. Configuring DKIM (DomainKeys Identified Mail) authentication for sending emails is required.
Quick Start: Set Up Email Sending: This Quick Start guide covers the steps that are required to send email with Marketing Cloud Next. It outlines the simplest implementation, so that your team can get up and running. For in-depth information, special features, or customization options, we provide additional resources along the way.
Set Up Flow Performance: Get detailed flow performance analytics for Marketing Cloud Next automation event-triggered, activation-triggered, and audience flows, powered by Tableau Next. These analytics can provide deeper insights into your flow's element runs, so you can make data-driven decisions.
Create a Flow for Your Triggers from a Template: Create a flow from a flow template to send trigger messages without starting from scratch. Each template includes ready-to-use email content, and merges field values such as {First Name} are personalized from the event payload when the flow runs. With a template, marketers launch a personalized, multichannel journey when a customer qualifies, without building audience segments or writing custom code.
Set Up Identity-Licensed Users in Marketing Cloud Next: Identity-licensed users can access Marketing Cloud Next using Salesforce single sign-on. You can assign Identity-licensed users the same permissions as Marketing Cloud Managers, including full access to campaigns, segments, flows, and shared Analytics reports. Clone the Identity-licensed user profile and customize the permissions for Marketing Cloud Next, and then assign the profile to new users.
Install and Connect Analytics Objects: Install the analytics packages and add users to analytics folders. Then, head to Digital Experiences to finalize the data connection.
Manage Your Marketing App: Salesforce admins, marketing admins, and admins for Data 360 have a role to play in configuring and managing Marketing Cloud Next. Before you get started, determine whether one user fills these admin roles or if many people are involved.
Set Up Marketing Performance Intelligence: Set up Tableau Next to unify marketing data and analytics with Data 360, Tableau Next, and the Marketing Semantic Data Model. Use embedded reports and comprehensive dashboards to analyze campaign and content performance, track marketing goals, understand customer journeys, and identify opportunities to improve ROI.
Recommended Page Customization: To help marketers find related information on frequently used pages, add components to Lightning record pages in the Marketing app. A Salesforce or marketing admin can access the Lightning App Builder from the Setup menu on any record page or from the Object Manager.
User Permissions in Marketing Cloud Next: Marketing Cloud Next comes with two permission sets: Marketing Cloud Admin and Marketing Cloud Manager. Many individual permissions are available for managing access more granularly throughout the app. The permissions list can help you build a custom permission set or troubleshoot access issues.
Set Up Analytics Reports and Dashboards: Marketing analytics packages include preconfigured dashboards and folders with reporting data about your marketing efforts.
Discover Marketing Cloud Next Feature Sets with Salesforce Go: Feature sets organize features and Agentforce tools by the specific marketing goals they support, such as running email campaigns or reaching customers on messaging channels. Each set contains the Marketing Cloud Next features and generative AI capabilities that you need to accomplish a specific job, and shows your configuration progress as you go.
Set Up an Abandoned Page Trigger: Configure an abandoned page trigger to reach visitors who view key pages and leave before completing a desired action. Use this trigger for high-value pages such as signup, plan comparison, or checkout- related pages.
Set Up an Abandoned Product Browse Trigger: Configure an abandoned product browse trigger to engage shoppers who view products or product categories, but leave without adding items to their cart or making a purchase.
Set Up an Abandoned Shopping Cart Trigger: Configure an abandoned shopping cart trigger to re-engage shoppers who add items to a cart, but leave before completing their purchase.
Set Up a First Purchase Anniversary Trigger: Configure a first purchase anniversary trigger to reach customers on the anniversary of their first purchase or a set number of days before it.
Set Up a Birthday Trigger: Configure a birthday trigger to reach customers on their birthday or a set number of days before it. This trigger runs every day.
Set Up a Product Back In Stock Trigger: Configure a product back in stock trigger to notify subscribed shoppers when an unavailable product becomes available again.
Set Up a Product Low Inventory Trigger: Configure a product low inventory trigger to notify shoppers when product inventory falls below a defined threshold.
Set Up a Product Price Drop Trigger: Configure a product price drop trigger to notify shoppers when the products they viewed are reduced in price.
Set Up a Reengagement Trigger: Configure a reengagement trigger to win back previously active customers who were engaged before a lookback period, but not within it.
Set Up a Replenishment Trigger: Configure a replenishment trigger to remind customers to reorder a consumable product as they approach the end of its consumption cycle.
Set Up Marketing Triggers: Drive conversions with retail marketing triggers and unique coupon codes. Configure triggers to detect shopper behaviors and events, then send personalized messages across channels. Create a coupon list so each recipient gets a unique code in your marketing emails.
Set Up a Visitor Conversion Trigger: Configure a visitor conversion trigger to reach customers who visit your website a minimum number of times in a set period, but don't purchase or view a product page in that time. Salesforce evaluates your customers every day and automatically launches a personalized, multichannel journey when a shopper qualifies, so what once took days of segment building and journey wiring now takes minutes with no custom development.
Set Up AI in Marketing Cloud Next: To use AI features in Marketing Cloud Next, set up your data and connect the channels you use for campaigns. Then, use AI to create content, personalize customer experiences, and optimize campaign performance.
Set Up Agentic Campaigns: Configure the message budget, business goals, and approvals that marketers need before they can create and activate agentic campaigns.
Set Up Campaign Agent Components: Marketing planning and operations, agentic campaigns, and agentic content are related but independent capabilities. You can set up and use these features together or separately. Confirm that your org meets the product requirements before you start setup. Requirements differ depending on which capability you're setting up.
Set Up Channels in Marketing Cloud Next: Marketing Cloud Next supports a multichannel marketing strategy that includes email, landing pages, SMS, and WhatsApp. Learn how to configure the required settings for each channel.
Ensure Compliance with Consent Settings: Marketing Cloud Next can help you stay in compliance with regulatory bodies and provide your customers with their preferred experience. These tools help you organize contact details, communication subscriptions, and preference forms.
Add Site Contributors to Marketing Cloud Next: To let users preview landing pages in Marketing Cloud Next as authenticated users, add contributors to the Marketing Landing Pages site. Assign the Viewer role to each contributor. Site contributors must also be site members.
Add Workspace Contributors to Marketing Cloud Next: When marketers create content in Marketing Cloud Next, they use Digital Experiences tools, which require a different set of permissions. Choose a contributor role for each user who needs access to manage or create marketing content, such as emails and forms.
Enable AI Features in Marketing Cloud Next: Marketing Cloud Next includes features that use generative AI and predictive AI to save time and improve your key performance indicators (KPIs). These features aren't dependent on each other, so you can choose the features that best fit the needs of your business.
Configure Required Email Settings: To send emails, you must authenticate a domain for sending, verify at least one sender email address, and provide a physical address to include in your email. In some cases, such as upgrading from Starter or Pro Suite, you can transfer email sending capabilities to Marketing Cloud Next.
Set Up Mobile App Messaging in Marketing Cloud Next: In Marketing Cloud Next, you can use segments and Flow Builder to send timely, personalized notifications to users of your apps. To start sending mobile app messages, add and configure your app in Setup.
Getting Started with Marketing Cloud Next Setup: To get started with Marketing Cloud Next, complete some basic settings, then continue through the required and recommended steps. The time it takes to complete setup depends on the features that you want to use.
Assign Permission Sets for Marketing Cloud Next: After you set up data streams, create users and assign permissions. To make sure that users have access to the right objects and features, use the Marketing Cloud Admin or Marketing Cloud Manager permission sets. You can assign permission sets to individual users or assign them in bulk.
Set Up RCS in Marketing Cloud Next: Reach customers directly in their native messaging app with interactive, rich-media content, including rich cards, carousels, and suggested actions.
Set Up Reporting in Marketing Cloud Next: To get detailed reporting insights and embedded dashboards for your campaigns, install the Marketing Performance Intelligence app. Marketing Cloud Next also includes preconfigured reports and dashboards that you can customize on the Analytics page.
Set Up Marketing Cloud Next with Salesforce Go: Salesforce Go brings marketing setup tasks into one place so that you can get started quickly. Explore the available feature sets and configure the included features to support your marketing goals.
Set Up a Sandbox in Marketing Cloud Next: A sandbox is a copy of your Salesforce org that you can use for development, testing, and training without compromising the data and apps in your production org. Marketing Cloud Next supports every sandbox type: Developer, Developer Pro, Partial Copy, and Full Copy.
Deploy Sandbox Changes in Marketing Cloud Next: After you make changes in a sandbox, deploy those changes back to the production org or to another sandbox by using Salesforce Platform DevOps features.
Set Up a Sandbox Blackhole for Email: When you test email in a sandbox, a blackhole prevents the accidental sending of test messages to real customer email addresses. Use a blackhole to test high-volume email sends, flow executions, or complex, multichannel campaign builds without consuming message credits.
Environments and Limitations for Sandboxes in Marketing Cloud Next: When you create a sandbox, most Marketing Cloud Next features are available for customization and testing. If an object isn’t replicated from the production org, you can re-create it in the sandbox org.
Sandbox Testing for Marketing Cloud Next: Marketing Cloud Next uses the Salesforce Platform sandbox infrastructure, which means that you get truly isolated environments for lifecycle development. Learn about the types of sandboxes and their recommended uses, how sandboxes can be used to test email sends, how sandboxes consume credits, and other considerations.
Set Up SMS Messages in Marketing Cloud Next: When you have the SMS messaging add-on, you can create and send SMS messages from Marketing Cloud Next. Before you can start sending, your business must request and register one or more codes. Short codes and long codes are the numbers associated with incoming and outgoing messages. The registration process can take several weeks, so make sure to plan ahead.
Set Up WhatsApp in Marketing Cloud Next: Reach a global audience with personalized conversational messages that can include text, audio, video, and other rich content.
Quick Start: Set Up SMS Prerequisites: This Quick Start guide covers the preliminary steps that are required to send SMS messages with Marketing Cloud Next using United States and Canada 10-digit long codes (10DLC). It outlines the simplest implementation, so that your team can get up and running. For in-depth information, special features, or customization options, we provide additional resources along the way.
Quick Start: Manage Your SMS Audience: After you’ve completed the setup prerequisites for SMS and requested your brand, campaign, and code, it’s time to create subscriptions to manage audiences and consent for your SMS messages.
Quick Start: Request an SMS Brand, Campaign, and 10DLC: Now that you’ve completed the prerequisites, it’s time to request a brand, campaign, and code to send SMS messages in the United States and Canada. Every SMS send from a 10DLC in the United States and Canada requires an approved brand, campaign, and code.
Turn On Unified Engagement History Dashboards: To make valuable engagement data available for your sales and marketing teams, turn on Unified Engagement History Dashboards. Then, add the components to account, lead, contact, and opportunity record pages.
Manage User Access: Add users and assign roles and permissions to make sure your team can access the necessary tools to complete their work in Marketing Cloud Next.
Quick Start: Send a WhatsApp Campaign: This guide covers the basic steps to send a promotional WhatsApp message to opted-in leads and contacts with Marketing Cloud Next. It outlines the simplest path, so that you can get a feel for using the tools.
Quick Start: Set up WhatsApp: This Quick Start guide covers the steps that are required to set up WhatsApp with Marketing Cloud Next. It outlines the simplest implementation, so that your team can get up and running. For in-depth information, special features, or customization options, we provide additional resources along the way.
Set Up a Buyer Engagement Agent: The Buyer Engagement agent unifies marketing and sales teams to generate qualified pipeline and grow revenue through personalized multichannel interactions. It helps businesses manage high volumes of leads, even when they lack the resources to provide a human touch to every interaction.
Build a Buyer Engagement Agent: Now that you completed the steps to prepare your org, you’re ready to create a Buyer Engagement agent. To ground your agent with communication preferences, product, branding, qualification guidelines, and other customization options, follow the guided steps in the app.
Complete Required Setup for the Buyer Engagement Agent: Now that you’ve created an agent, complete the remaining steps to configure it for email messaging or web chat. Then configure supervisors to monitor agent performance, and edit record pages so that agents can access qualification details.
Prepare Your Org for a Buyer Engagement Agent: To get started, confirm the prerequisites and turn on the Buyer Engagement template. The Buyer Engagement template includes the settings and features that are required for the agent to interact with customers through marketing channels. Then assign user permissions, configure the agent’s user record, and complete the remaining tasks to set up your org.
Create an Agent from the Distributed Marketing Agent Template: The Distributed Marketing agent helps users prioritize follow-ups. From any lead or contact record, ask the agent to identify top-engaged customers or show marketing engagement data. The agent can even recommend email templates based on that data. Plus, discover recent marketer-approved email templates to personalize and send.
Adaptive Campaign Audiences: Adaptive campaign audiences use AI arbitration to match customers with the agentic campaigns they're most likely to engage with, while keeping message frequency within the limits you set.
Create an Agentic Campaign: Create an agentic campaign by describing your goal, grounding it in a business unit and an optional plan and a brief, and letting the agent assemble a draft for you to review and activate.
Use Goals in Agentic Campaigns: A goal defines the conversion that an agentic campaign is measured on, such as orders or form submissions. The target is the count or amount that you want to achieve during the campaign dates. After you activate the campaign, the Marketing Campaign Agent measures attributed conversions against the target and uses behavioral signals, such as clicks and views, to optimize channel, content, and timing. For example, for an Orders goal with a $150,000 target, the agent attributes email and SMS engagement to order revenue and shows progress and forecast against the $150,000 target.
Monitor Agentic Campaigns with Agentic Campaign Insights: Use Agentic Campaign Insights to track goal progress, review the campaign forecast and audience assignment, and compare channel and message performance. Insights populate as the campaign records sends, attributes conversions, and completes assignment runs.
Define Your Campaign Audience: Define who's eligible for an agentic campaign by generating a segment from a natural language prompt or by choosing an existing segment. Agentic campaigns use Data 360 segments, so you can also create a segment in Data 360 and then use it in the campaign.
Use Content in an Agentic Campaign: Give your agentic campaign approved, on-brand content to send. Generate email and message content in an agentic content workspace, publish it to Salesforce CMS, and add it to your campaign as variants. The agent decides which variant each person receives and favors the variants that perform best.
Use AI in Campaigns and Flows: Create campaigns by using generative AI. Create content, define your audience, and use AI arbitration to maximize campaign engagement and reach your goals.
Content Quality: Learn how email content quality and legal compliance impact your email deliverability. Some of the most basic elements of an email can indicate to a spam filter or its recipients whether your message is trustworthy. Spam filters can flag messages that just "look spammy," such as containing a lot of capital letters or exclamation points.
Bounces, Unsubscribes, and Spam Complaints: Salesforce marketing email reports contain metrics about bounces, unsubscribes, and spam complaints. After you understand the differences among these responses, you can act on the insights that you receive and optimize your email marketing program.
Data Quality: Like other areas of marketing strategy, your messaging efforts are only as good as your data. Target your audiences effectively by ensuring your underlying lists, groups, and segments are built on recent, relevant, and permission-based data.
Addressing Delivery and Reputation Issues: To help you identify and address deliverability and reputation issues, Salesforce provides metrics and reports that help you monitor your messaging performance. We recommend evaluating these metrics every three to six months.
Clean Data Recommendations: The right tools and processes help you build a clean database, maintain good data, and request the necessary updates.
Data Hygiene: For marketing messages, data quality outperforms quantity. Using outdated or mismatched data can mean that you send emails to users who forgot they opted in or have lost interest. Keeping stale data increases unsubscribes, spam complaints, and erodes trust.
Legal Requirements: Different countries and regions manage their own policies and regulations around how and when you send marketing or promotional messages. Some countries require a type of explicit consent, such as confirmed opt-in, where someone signs up to receive your content and then verifies their email address.
Branding and Messaging: High-quality emails can bypass spam filters and capture recipient attention. The quality of your messaging is based on system filters and user preferences. Content that passes a spam filter isn't always engaging to users, and vice versa.
Preference Management and Segmentation: When you capture subscriber choices, you can create better targeted segments and deliver more relevant content. Proper preference management can also help you honor opt-ins and maintain regulatory compliance.
Hard Bounce Management: Salesforce marketing apps automatically suppress hard bounces to prevent sends to invalid addresses. Although suppression protects your sender reputation while retaining the record data for reporting and analytics, it's not intended to replace long-term data hygiene. Plan to remove hard-bounced email addresses from your data regularly.
Authentication: Email authentication is like showing your ID to prove that you are who you say you are. Mailbox providers (MBPs) and spam filters check for authentication to verify that your emails come from a legitimate source. Authenticate your emails with DomainKeys Identified Mail (DKIM) and Sender Policy Framework (SPF). Most MBPs, including Gmail and Microsoft, use these methods along with DMARC (Domain Message Authentication Reporting and Conformance), when they evaluate incoming messages.
Testing and Quality Assurance: Use the preview and testing features in Salesforce marketing tools to review content before sending. Preview messages to confirm that images load, text formats correctly, and links work. Then, create a test email list to verify that messages render as expected across different browsers and email clients.
Deliverability Fundamentals: Effective email marketing starts with good deliverability, which means that the messages you send are reliably arriving in recipients' email inboxes. Mailbox providers (MBPs) and spam filters evaluate the emails that you send. Part of an email sender's job is to keep data updated and create relevant content that supports a positive reputation.
Marketing Email: Frequently Asked Questions: Answers to your questions about messaging with Marketing Cloud Next, Marketing Cloud Engagement, and Marketing Cloud Account Engagement.
Processing an Email: A lot happens between clicking Send and an email arriving in someone’s inbox. Salesforce kicks off processes that prepare, build, and deliver your message. The exact sending infrastructure and tooling varies by product, but the overall process is similar for most email sends.
Monitoring, Reporting, and Optimization: Salesforce Marketing apps provide tools and features that help you monitor your deliverability and performance. Beyond best practices for tracking and optimizing your marketing efforts, you can learn more about specific features that are available in each marketing product.
Ongoing Optimization: Establish a routine for key maintenance tasks. To ensure your messages reach and engage your audience, set up processes to maintain data hygiene, monitor feedback and performance, and run tests to refine your strategy. Separately, evaluate the advanced features in your Salesforce Marketing app.
Sending Reputation and Warming: To increase the likelihood that emails land in inboxes where recipients can engage with them, you need a consistent sending history and a good sending reputation. If a sender lacks these qualities, mailbox providers (MBPs) can slow down or block delivery of messages. Each time that you launch a new brand or start working with a new ESP, always schedule time to "warm up" your reputation by establishing a positive sending history.
Prospect Field Conversion Mapping: To ensure accurate data transfer, see how the prospect’s fields map to the fields in the Lead, Contact, or Account on conversion.
Target Audiences with Marketing Cloud Next: The strongest campaigns target the right audience. After you determine your ideal audience member, you can reach them by filtering Data 360 data into a segment or creating an actionable list of specific leads or contacts.
Use Actionable Lists in Marketing Cloud Next: An actionable list is a fixed collection of audience members. Static lists are ideal for quickly reaching a specific set of known individuals, such as people who subscribed to emails at a trade show. Create and manage lists from the Actionable Lists tab. You can also create a list from a campaign, or add people to a new or existing list when you import lead or contact records.
People Records in Marketing Cloud Next: Marketing Cloud Next includes records that can store data about people who interact with your business at different stages of your marketing, sales, or service lifecycles.
Manually Create a Segment in Marketing Cloud Next: To create a segment, you drag in attributes that describe your target audience. When you build segment rules, make sure that you select objects and fields that align with your data model.
Understanding Segmentation in Marketing Cloud Next: The Segments page in Marketing Cloud Next is the same one available in the Data Cloud Lightning app for Data 360. However, if you plan to use your segment with marketing campaigns, some specific field settings are required.
Segmentation Concepts and Examples: The segment canvas offers several features to help you identify the right audience. Understanding the data behind the attribute library and the robust nesting and grouping features available can help you create the segments you need.
Use Segments in Marketing Cloud Next: Use segments to find the right audience for your campaigns. Segments update dynamically based on filters, such as profile attributes or behavioral data. You can build segments manually or with Einstein generative AI.
Add the Business Unit Field to Your Campaign Page: By default, the business unit field doesn’t appear on a campaign page. To see the business unit lookup field in the campaign page, add it to the page layout of the Campaign object.
Assign a Communication Subscription to Business Units: When you create a communication subscription, you can assign it to either a single business unit or all business units. All existing subscriptions are assigned to all business units. A subscription’s business unit assignment determines which channels can be added to it and in which business units it can be used.
Enable Common Assets for Business Units: Common Assets is a library that makes content available to all business units. Enable common assets so that business unit members can copy content from their workspaces and post it to common assets. Any other business unit can then copy and use that content in their own workspaces. By default, the common assets feature for customers who purchase Marketing Cloud Next in Summer ’26 is enabled in new orgs.
Configure Identity Resolution Rulesets for a Business Unit: Identity resolution is a critical step to organizing and unifying your data. Usually, when your data originates from many systems, it’s modeled and labeled differently in each place. Identity resolution rulesets define the relationships among data model objects (DMOs) and their fields. After you configure these rules, Data Cloud can organize and reference related and duplicate data into unified individual records that marketers can use to target audiences.
Configure Web Tracking for a Business Unit: To track visitor activities for your campaign on external web pages, create a website connector that collects activity data from your external site. Then, create the embed code to add to your external site, and associate it with your website connector, business unit, and a campaign. You can then copy the embed code to your website.
Create Business Units in Marketing Cloud Next: To get started with business units in Marketing Cloud Next, create the first two business units. The first two business units are created consecutively. Next, select the marketing permission sets for the users to add to the first business unit.
Create People and Account Scoring Rules for a Business Unit: To begin scoring leads, contacts, prospects, and accounts, create scoring models and use default scoring rules or customize them. When you create a scoring model or scoring rule for a business unit, you work from the business unit settings page instead of the main scoring model page in Salesforce Setup. Otherwise, the steps are the same.
Customize Page Layouts for Business Units: To display Data 360 Lightning components, such as Profile Engagement and Profile Insights, in the context of a business unit on a record page, use the Business Unit Container component. This container component contains a business-unit dropdown and is available in the Lightning App Builder for the Contact, Lead, and Prospect records.
Deactivate a Business Unit: If you are sure that you no longer need a business unit, you can deactivate it. Deactivating a business unit is permanent and can't be undone. After deactivation, business unit members lose access to the related data space and workspaces unless they have direct access through permissions. Also, the data space that’s related to the business unit can't be used by any other business unit in the future.
Set up Einstein Features for Business Units: To maximize engagement in each business unit, enable Einstein’s predictive AI features—Send Time Optimization, Engagement Frequency, and Scoring. These tools leverage historical and global data to personalize message timing and frequency.
Enable Marketing Cloud Next: Before you create your first business units, review the prerequisites, and enable Marketing Cloud Next for your org.
Enable Opportunity Influence for a Business Unit: Opportunity Influence uses engagement data to tie opportunity revenue back to a specific campaign. An engagement activity is eligible for attribution 30 days before the related opportunity is created to the date that the opportunity is set to Closed/Won. Use this attribution data to help you report on ROI, adjust your strategy for current campaigns, and make decisions about future campaigns.
Install the Required Data Kits for a Business Unit: Data kits and packages contain the objects, fields, and data connections that make Marketing Cloud Next work. You install data kits in each data space that supports a business unit. After you install the data kits, most of the related data streams are deployed. In some cases, you manually deploy the data streams in Data Cloud.
Distribute Content With Common Assets in Business Units: Use common assets to make high-performing content available across business units. Post content to common assets, and members from other business units can copy that content to their own workspace.
Set Up Agentforce for Business Units: Agentforce in Marketing Cloud Next helps you create campaign briefs, campaigns, message content, and more using Einstein technology. Einstein predictive features provide insights and data to inform the content and timing of your marketing activities.
Set Up Basic Personalization for Business Units: To select attributes for content personalization and flow decisions, create a data graph that’s based on the Unified Individual object. As you build the data graph, select all the data points that you anticipate by using in personalization and automations, such as targeting rules for dynamic content or cross object merge fields.
Manage Marketing Channels for Business Units: You can assign channels to all business units or a single business unit. Channels include email, SMS, WhatsApp, and Mobile App Messaging. Assign channels to all business units for a single sender address, such as an SMS code or email domain, to be used across the entire organization. Alternatively, assign channels to a single business unit so that individual divisions can use dedicated sender addresses. You can also unassign channels from business units.
Set Up Marketing Performance Intelligence for Business Units: To get detailed analytics, configure the Marketing Performance Intelligence app for a specific business unit. Get embedded reporting in your campaign records, and access a comprehensive dashboard with insights and trends about your overall marketing efforts.
Set Up Business Units: When you have multiple business units, you configure some Marketing Cloud Next settings for each business unit separately, and other settings for the overall org. This means that you complete some tasks on the Business Units Setup page, some tasks in the Marketing Cloud Next Setup Assistant, and other tasks on specialized setup for messaging channels or other features.
Work with Business Units: After your admin sets up business units, marketers can create campaigns, manage content, and run marketing activities within your assigned business unit.
Connect Marketing Cloud Engagement Journeys to Campaigns: Organize journeys and enhance reporting by linking Marketing Cloud Engagement journeys to Campaigns. Connecting journeys to a Campaign helps group them into a larger marketing effort. It also automatically creates a grouped view of their marketing performance.
Create a Brief: Define your campaign goals, audience, measures, key messages, and calls to action in a marketing brief.
Automate Tasks with a Campaign: To take some manual work off your plate, automate common marketing tasks with a flow. Flow can listen for customer actions or events and then automate message sends, update or create records, and so on. For example, send an SMS message when someone signs up for an event.
Get Started with Marketing Campaigns and Flows: Kick-start your marketing efforts with a centralized campaign hub where you can design and automate content. Each marketing campaign starts with a flow. Flows automate content distribution and data collection.
Create a Signup Form with a Campaign: Create a campaign flow so customers can opt in to receive your marketing messages. Start with a signup form flow template, build and customize the form, and configure settings to collect data for consent and lead records. You can host a signup form on a marketing landing page or your external website.
Marketing Cloud Engagement Journeys and Campaigns: Use the campaign object as a shared workspace across Marketing Cloud Engagement and Marketing Cloud Next. Associate journeys to a campaign to streamline workflows and facilitate in-depth reporting.
Quick Start: Send an Email Campaign: This guide covers the basic steps to send a promotional email to opted-in leads and contacts with Marketing Cloud Next. It outlines the simplest path, so that you can get a feel for using the tools. For more details, features, and customization options, visit Salesforce Help.
Flow Status Reference: The tasks that are available or restricted on a flow at a particular time are defined by its status. Individual flow occurrences generate their own statuses, which can help you understand why something didn't occur as expected.
Attribute Revenue to a Specific Campaign: Opportunity Influence for Marketing Cloud Next uses engagement data to tie opportunity revenue back to a specific campaign. An engagement activity is eligible for attribution 30 days before the related opportunity is created to the date that the opportunity is set to Closed/Won. Use this attribution data to help you report on ROI, adjust your strategy for current campaigns, and make decisions about future campaigns.
Campaign Record vs. Flow Canvas: A campaign record includes a detailed summary for each flow that's designed to reflect certain elements from the Flow Builder canvas. Some features and settings that appear in Flow Builder aren't available on the campaign, and vice versa. A campaign also includes a comprehensive overview to help you keep tabs on campaign content across flows, and monitor campaign performance.
Send a Message with a Campaign: To send marketing messages, start your campaign with a flow triggered by a list or segment. Then, build out your flow with message elements and add content from your CMS workspace. After you activate the flow, messages send to members of your list or segment.
Work with Campaigns: When you create a marketing campaign, the first task is to decide what flow to start with. You can add more flows to your campaign as you go and each flow can be as simple or as complex as you need.
Configure Dynamic From Addresses: A Dynamic From Address personalizes the sender information recipients see, using CRM data resolved at send time.
Configure Dynamic Reply Addresses: A dynamic reply address routes replies directly to a mailbox resolved from CRM data, such as the contact owner or the account's customer success manager.
Create a Communication Subscription in Marketing Cloud Next: Create a communication subscription for each category of marketing content that you send, such as product updates. For each subscription that you create, add marketing channels, such as email, SMS, and RCS. Subscribers must give consent to receive promotional messages from each channel type.
Review Marketing Consent Data: You can review consent statuses on individual record pages in Marketing Cloud Next or in bulk in Data 360.
Import Consent Data to Marketing Cloud Next: If you collect consent data outside of Marketing Cloud Next, import it as a CSV. Each import corresponds to a single marketing channel, communication subscription, and consent status.
Formatting Marketing Consent Import Files: Before you import consent data into Marketing Cloud Next, make sure that your import file is saved as a CSV and that the columns and values are formatted correctly.
Manage Preference Pages: Allow your customers to update their own subscription preferences, or opt out of marketing messages with preference pages. Each preference page is channel-specific and customized to the recipient when they view the page. Control the look and feel of each page, and which subscriptions to include.
Preference Pages in Marketing Cloud Next: A preference page is a web page where your customers opt in or out of marketing messages. You control the look and feel of each page, decide which subscriptions appear, and add or remove subscriptions as needed. Marketing Cloud Next includes a customizable email preference page, and you can create custom pages for any marketing channel. Each page is personalized for the recipient and retains their contact point and subscription preferences.
Understanding Consent Concepts in Marketing Cloud Next: Review the tools and concepts that can help you collect and store consent data. You can collect consent for multiple engagement channels with communication subscriptions. Email is included with Marketing Cloud Next and all other channels are available as paid add-ons.
Track Activity on External Sites: Track visitor activities on web pages hosted outside of Salesforce, such as your company website. To protect the privacy of your site visitors, use a consent banner to collect consent to track. You’re responsible for complying with privacy laws and regulations applicable to your business.
Configure Web Tracking for Marketing: Track visitor activities and engagement across your marketing landing pages and external sites. Use the data to create more targeted segments and inform your marketing strategy.
Considerations for Agentic Campaigns: To use agentic campaigns, consider supported functionality, usage, limitations and allowances, limits, and other issues.
Manage Content in Marketing Cloud Next: Marketing Cloud Next provides the tools you need to create and store a variety of content to support your marketing efforts. The Content tab, powered by Salesforce CMS, is where you can organize your content in workspaces and folders. When you’re ready to create something new, create or clone and then edit a variety of marketing-specific content types in a consistent editing environment.
Brand Your Content in Marketing Cloud Next: Apply a consistent look and feel, and build trust across your marketing content, while grounding the content that your Agentforce agents generate.
Create and Manage a Contact Card: A Contact Card (VCF) is a digital business card that allows customers to save your brand’s verified identity including your logo, phone number, website, and address to their mobile devices.
Conversational Email in Marketing Cloud Next: Conversational Email enables two-way email engagement directly from Marketing Cloud Next. Instead of sending one-way broadcast emails, you can configure messages that support replies.
Create Content in Marketing Cloud Next: From the Content tab, you can create and edit any content type. After you select a content type, a curated selection of components appears for you to choose from. You can also edit messaging content and landing pages from Flow Builder or the campaign record.
Set Up Dependent Fields on a Form: Use visibility rules to show or hide a field based on the answers a user gives to other fields on a form. With these dependent fields, each field appears when it's relevant to a user.
Create a Custom Font in Marketing Cloud Next: Create a custom font to store a licensed font file in your marketing workspace. After you publish the font, your content creators can apply your brand typography in emails, landing pages, forms, and more.
Monitoring Performance for Distributed Marketing Messages: There are a few ways to track how recipients engage with your Distributed Marketing and Alerts messages. To get engagement data across your individual and bulk sends, check the Distributed Sends Performance tab. To view engagement highlights on lead, contact, and person account record pages, check the Unified Engagement History dashboard.
Send an Email with an Approved Distributed Marketing Template: To create and send compliant Distributed Marketing and Alerts messages, choose a template or load a previously sent version, personalize with approved content, preview, and schedule or send immediately.
Make an Approved Email Template Available: To make marketer-approved emails and email templates available, first create an event-triggered flow manually or from a pre-built template. Then, customize the flow to include your approved template and configure the sender settings, scheduling options, and delivery preferences. When you activate the flow, users can personalize and send distributed messages by using the template.
Configure an Approved Email Template: Create a Distributed Marketing and Alerts template that includes approved content options, instead of creating content from scratch or uploading your own each time. Plus, set parts of the template as default or required to maintain brand compliance and consistency.
Email in Marketing Cloud Next: Email marketing continues to be a part of your digital strategy. Next-gen marketing tools offer solutions that streamline your efforts and automate personalized experiences for your prospects and customers.
Add Required Consent Details to Promotional Emails: To comply with privacy and consent laws and regulations, including the U.S. CAN-SPAM Act, add an opt-out link and a physical mailing address to emails. Use the corresponding merge fields in text-based components in the email body.
Create an Email in Marketing Cloud Next: The content editing experience in Marketing Cloud Next provides tools to build an email, preview and test it, and publish it for use with a campaign. To make major changes to a published email or to prevent it from sending in a campaign, you can unpublish it.
Create an Email in Code View in Marketing Cloud Next: In code view, view and edit message HTML and CSS for custom control over your email design. Also, advanced users can use Handlebars templating language to add scripting and conditional logic and perform data lookups. As you author, code view provides syntax validation, inline coding assistance, and search. Preview and test the email and publish it for use with a campaign. To change a published email or prevent it from sending in a campaign, you can unpublish it.
Create Email Language Variants in Marketing Cloud Next: Translate content in Email Builder or XLIFF files without re-creating layouts for every language. All translated variants automatically inherit layout, style, and data source updates from the default variant to streamline your localization workflow.
Create an Expression for a Personalized Merge Field in Marketing Cloud Next: Get more consistency and control over how data is referenced in your marketing content by saving personalized merge field criteria in an expression. Define filter and sort options across related data objects to select the right attribute for the merge field. Save the expression, including the references to those data objects, in Salesforce CMS. You can reuse the expression in email, SMS, MMS, RCS, WhatsApp, In-App, and Push messages.
Extend Preview and Test in Marketing Cloud Next: Preview and Test is a built-in feature in Marketing Cloud Next for reviewing your message content before sending. From the Preview and Test modal, you can see how your email, SMS, or WhatsApp message appears to recipients, personalize the preview with specific segment members, and validate merge fields. The modal includes dedicated tabs for previewing rendered content and running test sends.
Create and Manage Forms in Marketing Cloud Next: To capture user information, create a form and add it as a component on a landing page. Landing pages and forms are connected together with a campaign and flow. We recommend that you use a signup form campaign because it automatically creates and connects a form and flow for you.
Data Sources for Forms in Marketing Cloud Next: A data source represents a Salesforce object, which you can use with a form. It creates a bridge between a form field and a CRM object field so that you can save the captured form data in Salesforce records.
Using a Form on External Sites: Not only can you use forms on marketing landing pages, but you can also take advantage of the same end-to-end experience to build, design, test, preview, deploy, and report on forms being used on your own hosted web pages. After you configure your external site and Salesforce, grab a form's code block from its detail page. Then, embed it into the HTML of an external site, delivering the form from exactly where you need it. Plus, you can assign custom branding to a form that matches your external site.
Prepare to Use Forms on an External Site: Before you embed a form on an external site, configure your Salesforce org so that the site can communicate with your Experience Cloud site.
Use a Form Handler to Update Salesforce Objects with Form Data: Use a form handler to capture data from a form on an external website and use that data to create or update records in Salesforce. Form handlers make it possible to use the existing forms on your site without updating your site to use forms created in Salesforce. When you create a form handler, you specify the field names in your existing form and the Salesforce fields that they map to.
Use Hidden Fields and Default Values on a Form: Enhance data collection without compromising user experience with short forms that are easy to complete. Use hidden fields to gather contextual data behind the scenes, or add default values in visible fields to speed up form completion. Hidden fields and default values are available on the Checkbox, Dropdown, Number, Plain Text, and Text Area input components.
Using a Form with Landing Pages: Landing pages can support campaign goals, such as customer awareness or lead generation. In Marketing Cloud Next, you can create a landing page with or without a form, depending on your needs. Each landing page can contain one form only.
Protect Forms with reCAPTCHA: Protect your marketing landing pages with forms from bots, fraudulent activities, spam, and abuse with Google reCAPTCHA. The Google reCAPTCHA v2 integration evaluates visitors' reputations and shows a reCAPTCHA to suspicious actors. It's available only for marketing landing pages with forms, and it doesn’t apply to LWR sites or other sites built from templates.
Add Progressive Profiling and Turn On Pre-Fill for Forms: Use progressive profiling to dynamically show new fields to returning users based on previously gathered information. Turn on pre-fill to automatically provide known profile values in mapped fields when a form loads, which helps reduce friction for your users. Progressive profiling and pre-fill require that you associate a read data provider with the form.
Track Content Performance with Impression Regions: Use impression region tracking to measure how individual content blocks perform, giving you metrics that help inform your content decisions. See how dynamic content variations compare, or how a single content block performs across sends to different segments. Turn on tracking for a component, and then create custom reports to view engagement metrics. You can define an impression region with Handlebars or AMPscript functions.
Impression Region Handlebars Examples: When you implement impression regions with Handlebars or AMPscript functions, you customize them with content that you want to track. These examples cover some common use cases and show you some different configurations for impression regions using Handlebars.
Create a Mobile In-App Message: Create and send a banner, modal, full-screen or push primer message to engage users while they're using your mobile app. The message contains body text and can optionally include a title, an image, buttons, and additional text.
SEO Page Properties for Landing Pages in Marketing Cloud Next: To improve search engine optimization (SEO), use head tags to add structured data to your landing page. Including structured data provides more control over how your landing page and its information looks in search results.
Create and Manage a Landing Page Template in Marketing Cloud Next: To reuse proven landing page designs and keep all your organization’s landing pages consistent with brand guidelines, create and share landing page templates. Select a template when creating a landing page.
URL Details for Marketing Landing Pages: Each landing page has its own URL that accepts or redirects traffic to the page. In Marketing Cloud Next, you can edit and manage URL details such as the public URL, URL alias, and the URL redirect from the content detail page on the URL tab.
Messaging in Marketing Cloud Next: Next-gen marketing tools support a collection of messaging types. These services typically require preparation work to validate accounts, request sending codes, or complete other registration, and regulations vary by country.
MMS Guidelines: For successful delivery across all mobile carriers, adhere to file format and size requirements.
Mobile Apps in Marketing Cloud Next: When you connect your in-house mobile apps to the next-gen Marketing, you can create in-app and push notifications that target your users. Build and deploy banners, carousels, and other message types.
Track Marketing Content Performance: Find out how users engage with your content so you can make informed marketing decisions. Monitor content performance in a few different ways.
Content Personalization in Marketing Cloud Next: To increase customer engagement and improve conversations, personalize your marketing content. Create one email with dynamic content variations that appear for different recipients based on targeting rules. Get timely and accurate results for merge fields in marketing messages, landing pages, and reusable content blocks by referencing personalized data. For example, include a name attribute from a customer’s unified individual profile, include product purchase or subscription event data, or reference attributes from across related data objects, such as a contact from an account.
Create and Manage Variations in Marketing Content: Personalize emails or landing pages with dynamic content. Create a single variation and configure a targeting rule to determine when that variation appears. Or create variations that use existing personalization settings and targeting rules by cloning a personalization point. Prioritize the most relevant content if someone qualifies for more than one variation.
Manage Data Sources for Personalizing Content: To embed personalized data in your marketing content, add a data source. A data source represents an object or element from your org that contains fields and data. After you select a data source, its fields and attributes are available to use in merge fields, expressions, repeater components, and dynamic content.
How Dynamic Content and Salesforce Personalization Work Together: Dynamic content in Marketing Cloud Next improves conversations and relationships with customers, and it can lead to more effective campaigns. Personalization points, decisions, and targeting rules from Salesforce Personalization power dynamic content. Dynamic components and fields are associated with personalization points, and variations are associated with decisions and targeting rules.
Personalize Content with Merge Fields in Marketing Cloud Next: Use merge fields to personalize your marketing content with customer data. For example, personalize an email with your customer's name or customize a landing page with products you know they're interested in.
Add an ML-Based Recommender to a Marketing Email: Instead of writing rules to decide which content each contact sees, let a recommender choose the best content for each contact at send time. The recommender is powered by Salesforce Personalization and improves over time as it learns from engagement.
Link Components to an Existing Personalization Point in Dynamic Content: To control multiple dynamic components with the same personalization settings and rules, link multiple components or fields to one personalization point. When you add or delete variations, edit targeting rules, or reorder priorities, your changes apply to all the components or fields linked to that personalization point.
Linked Personalization Points in Dynamic Content: To control variations in an email or landing page with the same personalization settings, link multiple components to a personalization point. Any changes that you make to the personalization settings apply to all the linked components. You can also personalize more components in an email without going over the limit of 25 personalization points per content item.
Add a Repeater to a Marketing Email: Show a series of items such as new or best-selling products, recent order updates, upcoming events or promotions, and more with a repeater component. Connect the repeater to a data source, such as an event or default data graph attribute. Customize the repeater layout, and add merge fields to the nested components to show data from the repeater source.
Create and Manage an RCS Message: Build interactive RCS messages that include suggestions and rich content to engage customers on their mobile devices. Unlike standard SMS, RCS allows you to use branded media and suggestions to streamline promotions and transactional follow-ups.
Rich Card Specifications: Learn about the supported media formats, layout options, and interactive elements available for RCS Rich Cards.
Reusable Content in Marketing Cloud Next: Certain content types, such as brands and tracked links, are available for reuse within other content types. For example, after you establish your brand settings, marketers can apply those brand styles to other content they build.
Create and Manage a Reusable Content Block: Content admins and content managers can combine text, images, links, and buttons into reusable content blocks. The blocks are stored in a marketing workspace, where they’re easily available to content authors, who can add them to any email or landing page. Create different content blocks for different audiences, and use variation rules to personalize which block is delivered to which audience.
Create and Manage an SMS or MMS Message: Create an SMS or MMS message for your marketing campaigns and reach your customers directly on their mobile devices. For example, use SMS messaging to promote something new or follow up on an ongoing transaction. MMS is supported only in the United States and Canada.
Create an SMS Message from a DLT Template: Create an SMS message directly from an approved Distributed Ledger Technology (DLT) template. This process automatically pulls your approved text into the marketing workspace, where you can define variables, personalize content with merge fields, and prepare the message for use in automated flows.
SMS Message Length in Marketing Cloud Next: To avoid sending multiple messages and using extra message credits, be mindful of the length of your SMS message. When you exceed the character limit for a single message, the message count increases. Using non-GSM characters, links, or merge fields increases message length.
Understand UTM Parameters: Use UTM (Urchin Tracking Module) parameters to track campaign performance and gain insights into traffic sources, how users arrive at your page, and the overall success of your SMS campaigns.
Marketing Cloud Next Content Types and Statuses: An item’s status indicates whether the content is ready to use in a campaign. Understand what each status means and how it relates to your marketing campaigns and flows.
Types of Marketing Content: Create and manage all your marketing content from your CMS workspace. You can create content such as emails, landing pages, forms, images, and SMS messages for use in marketing campaigns.
Understand the previewData Object: Your custom LWC receives a previewData object that contains contextual information about the message being previewed. The fields available in previewData vary by channel.
Manage Your Marketing Cloud Engagement SMS Codes in Marketing Cloud Next: Use your existing United States and Canada Marketing Cloud Engagement SMS short codes and long codes in Marketing Cloud Next. By sharing codes across platforms, you can unify your messaging strategy and manage outbound and inbound traffic for both Journey Builder and Flows from a single code.
Apply UTM Tracking Parameters to Your Content: UTM parameters are set at the org level and apply to all content by default. When you're building a message, you can override those defaults for a specific content asset or for individual links.
Web Content in Marketing Cloud Next: Forms and landing pages are integral to your lead generation practice. Next-gen marketing tools support forms and landing pages that are hosted inside and outside of Salesforce. Builder tools guide marketers through the creation experience.
Create a WhatsApp Template Message: Use a template for common, reusable messages that share the same basic content and structure. You can use templates to send welcome messages, order confirmations, appointment reminders, and one-time passcodes.
Enable Marketing Messages Lite API: Achieve a higher return on investment and delivery rates by transitioning to the user-friendly Marketing Messages Lite (MMLite) API to execute large-scale campaigns.
Create a WhatsApp Session Message: After a customer initiates a conversation, you sometimes need to respond with a custom message. A session message is an on-the-fly reply that you can send within 24 hours of the customer's message, without having to select a preapproved templated message.
Organize and Share Content in a Marketing Workspace: When you create content in Marketing Cloud Next, it’s stored in a marketing workspace. You can use the default Content Workspace for Marketing Cloud, or create additional workspaces to focus campaign assets, manage collaboration across teams, or organize content by initiatives. Delete unused workspaces that you no longer need. To keep your workspace tidy, add folders. All your workspaces are listed on the Content tab.
Coupon Management in Marketing Cloud Next: Use unique coupon codes in your messages to drive conversions. A Marketing coupon is a list of unique coupon codes that you can assign to recipients in messages.
Create a Carousel Push Notification: A carousel message is a push notification that contains several cards that the user can scroll through. You can specify a unique image, text, and open behavior for each card.
Create a Basic Push Notification: A basic push notification is a single message that you send to users of your app. A basic push notification contains body text and an open behavior, which determines what happens when a recipient taps the message. It can optionally include a title, a subtitle, and an image.
Set Up Personalization Features in Marketing Cloud Next: When you personalize marketing messages using merge fields or dynamic content, you can improve the customer experience and increase engagement. Before you can start personalizing content, set up Personalization and configure a data graph based on the Unified Individual object. A data graph is also necessary for personalizing flow decisions.
Marketing Objects in Marketing Cloud Next: A marketing object stores data for your marketing use cases. If you used Marketing Cloud Engagement in the past, think of marketing objects as similar to data extensions. Create a marketing object by importing data from a file.
Marketing Object Data Types and Resource Allocations: When you create a marketing object, you can select from three supported data types to match your data requirements. Understanding the available data types and system storage capacity helps you design marketing objects that support your business needs while maintaining system performance.
Configure Marketing Objects: Complete some basic setup steps so that your users can work with marketing objects. Individual users can also configure their accounts so that the Data Management tab appears earlier in the list of Marketing tabs.
Manage Marketing Objects: You can create a marketing object by importing data from a CSV file. You can also delete a marketing object that you don’t need.
Use Marketing Object Data in Messages: To include data from marketing objects in your messages, use AMPscript or Handlebars code. You can include AMPscript and Handlebars in messages that you create by using the visual editor, or messages you create by using the API.
Default Scoring System in Marketing Cloud Next: Leads, contacts, prospects, and accounts are scored based on the rules that you publish. You can use the default rules for both engagement and fit, or you can customize them to fit your needs. All engagement rules are available for the Account object and all people objects. Fit rules are available only for the object that they’re listed under.
Score People and Accounts in Marketing Cloud Next: Score leads, contacts, prospects, and accounts based on how engaged they are with your marketing efforts, how closely they resemble your ideal customer, or how likely an account is to buy from you. Customize default scoring rules and decide how engagement and fit scores factor into the overall marketing scores for individuals and accounts. Use the scores to build segments and create targeted content.
Configure Scoring Models in Marketing Cloud: To begin scoring leads, contacts, prospects, and accounts, select the Unified Individual or Account object to score on. Then, create scoring models and use default scoring rules or customize them. You can also add or delete rules, and create complex rules with multiple conditions.
Get the Most Out of Scoring in Marketing Cloud Next: After you configure and publish a scoring model, add scoring to your lead and contact pages, share scores with your sales team, and use scores to build segments and create targeted content.
Distributed Marketing and Alerts: To increase productivity and maintain brand consistency, marketers can share approved email templates with sales reps and other Salesforce users. Distributed Marketing and Alerts makes it easier for non-marketing users to send email content that’s on brand and approved by marketing.
Add a Dynamic Content Block: Add a dynamic content block to a message to show different content to different recipients based on their attributes or behavior. Use dynamic content to personalize offers, imagery, or messaging without creating separate content assets for each audience segment.
Dynamic From and Reply Addresses: Dynamic From and reply addresses personalize an email's sender and reply information with related CRM or Data 360 records.
Feature Availability by Marketing Cloud Next Edition: Marketing Cloud Next is available in Growth and Advanced editions, and requires Salesforce Enterprise or Unlimited editions. Some features are limited by edition or purchased add-on. All functionality is available in Lightning Experience only.
Considerations for the Account Discovery Agent: Before you create an agent with the Account Discovery agent template, consider supported functionality, usage, limitations and allowances, limits, and other issues.
Monitoring Weekly Einstein Send Time Optimization Predictions: Visualize and analyze customer engagement over the course of a week. Using Data 360 Data Model Object (DMO) information, you can create a chart that shows Einstein Send Time Optimization scores per contact point email rather than by a unified individual. Use the information to adjust your send time parameters and align with maximum engagement send times. Access and run your Email Send Time Optimization report from Data 360 reports or Analytics in the Marketing app.
Agentforce Agents in Marketing Cloud Next: Use AI to draft, refine, and generate multichannel and conversational marketing campaigns. Start by drafting a campaign brief and describing your campaign objective when prompted. View and refine campaign previews directly in the brief record for faster, more effective campaign creation. Use AI to refine saved campaign content directly in Content Builder, and use AI to analyze and optimize campaign performance.
AI Data Usage in Marketing Cloud Next: AI is built on data. When using Marketing Cloud Next, review this table to understand the type of data used by AI agents and features.
Considerations for the Distributed Marketing Agent: Before you create an agent with the Distributed Marketing agent template, consider supported functionality, usage, limitations and allowances, limits, and other issues.
Explore AI in Marketing Cloud Next: AI in Marketing Cloud Next helps you create campaigns, message content, landing pages, segments, and more. Predictive AI features provide insights and data to inform the content and timing of your marketing activities.
Increase Productivity with AI: To improve work outcomes and increase day-to-day productivity, try predictive and generative AI tools in Marketing Cloud Next.
Model Card: Einstein Engagement Frequency: In Marketing Cloud Next, Einstein Engagement Frequency analyzes each contact’s engagement record to determine the optimal frequency for sending messages to that contact.
Model Card: Einstein Engagement Scoring: In Marketing Cloud Next, Einstein Engagement Scoring predicts email opens and clicks, subscriber retention, web conversion, and overall engagement for each individual consumer contact.
Model Card: Einstein Metrics Guard: In Marketing Cloud Next, Einstein Metrics Guard analyzes email open and click events and calculates the likelihood that each event is real. The model primarily focuses on filtering emails through large-scale email providers that open messages before the customer opens them. The model is also effective for opens and clicks from email scanners on private, corporate email servers.
Model Card: Einstein Send Time Optimization: In Marketing Cloud Next, Einstein Send Time Optimization analyzes the optimal time to send a message to an individual to maximize the probability of the individual engaging with the message.
Add Structure and Logic to a Marketing Flow: A marketing flow contains elements that represent certain actions along a customer's journey. To create the structure, you can add, remove, and move elements around the flow canvas. To customize the customer experience more, you can also add logic, such as branching paths and exit rule filters.
Flow Builder Features and Elements for Marketers: Flow Builder is a tool for creating automation solutions to business challenges faced by various industries and roles. Marketers have access to portions of Flow Builder that are helpful for accomplishing marketing jobs.
Comparison of Marketing-Oriented Flow Types: With Marketing Cloud Next, you can create several types of flows that help you implement your marketing use cases. When you add flows to your campaigns, it’s important to understand the abilities and usage considerations for each flow type.
Marketing for Retail in Marketing Cloud Next: Configure retail triggers so marketers can launch ready-made journeys for key user milestones, reengagement, and replenishment. Drive new customers and sales by delivering a unique coupon code to each recipient.
Leads Worked Billable Usage Types: Learn how a Buyer Engagement agent for marketers or an Engagement agent for sales reps measures Leads Worked, consumes Flex Credits, and bills related products and services separately.
Marketing Cloud Next: Marketing Cloud Next brings the power of the platform to your team’s marketing efforts. You can integrate multiple data sources with Data 360, build content with Experience Cloud, power complex customer journeys with Flow Builder, and optimize with Agentforce along the way.
Marketing Performance Intelligence: Marketing Performance Intelligence (MPI) combines marketing data and analytics in one place so that you can measure performance across paid, owned, B2B, and offline channels. Use consistent metrics to evaluate campaigns and customer journeys, understand which touchpoints drive conversions, and improve your marketing strategy.
About Marketing Planning and Operations: Marketing Planning and Operations connects strategy, planning, governance, and results in one place. Leaders and marketers always know whether marketing work aligns with company objectives and is on track to achieve them.
Plan with Agentforce in Marketing Planning and Operations: Use a generative AI assistant to build your marketing plan in conversation. The agent creates programs and goals, builds multilevel hierarchies, and looks up your planning hierarchy setup so you select the right group and level.
What the Marketing Planning and Operations Agent Does: The Marketing Planning and Operations agent is a generative AI assistant that creates marketing programs and goals in conversation. Describe the plan that you want, and the agent builds it.
Subagent: Goal Hierarchy: The Goal Hierarchy subagent creates marketing goals and builds multilevel hierarchies of goals under a marketing program. It links each goal to its parent program or goal as it creates them.
Subagent: Hierarchy Definitions: The Hierarchy Definitions subagent looks up your planning hierarchy setup and the fields that you can set on a program or goal. Use it to select the right group, level, and field values before you create a work.
Subagent: Program Hierarchy: The Program Hierarchy subagent creates marketing programs and places them in the planning hierarchy. It creates a program at the hierarchy group and level you name, and links new goals to the program as it creates them.
Marketing Planning and Operations Subagent Reference: A subagent defines an agent's range of capabilities for a specific job. Subagents help the agent identify the type of request, determine its scope, make decisions, and perform actions. The Marketing Planning and Operations agent contains standard subagents that create marketing programs and goals and look up your planning hierarchy setup.
Plan and Operate Marketing Campaigns in Marketing Planning and Operations: A campaign is where your team turns plans into live work and real spend. Marketing Planning and Operations connects a campaign to a program and to your company's targets. You plan the work, move it through reviews and approvals, and track progress in one place. Campaign managers use Marketing Planning & Operations to keep campaigns aligned with their goals, on budget, and on brand.
Add Goals to a Campaign in Marketing Planning and Operations: Campaign managers add goals to a campaign to set the targets it drives, such as leads, registrations, or revenue. Campaign goals can track their actuals manually. They're the only goals that also calculate them automatically from a metric.
Marketing Goals in Marketing Planning and Operations: Goals set measurable targets for marketing work and track real results against them as the work runs. They connect executive objectives to the programs and campaigns that deliver them. Goals roll up through the planning hierarchy, and their actuals stay current as the work runs.
About Marketing Goals in Marketing Planning and Operations: Connected goals define success at every level of planned marketing work. They break executive objectives into targets at each level. Results then roll up through the hierarchy to show progress, reveal gaps and trends, and flag lagging targets. For example, a $500 million revenue objective breaks down into a $50 million marketing directive to expand into new European markets.
Metric Examples for Campaign Goals in Marketing Planning and Operations: A campaign goal calculates its actual from a semantic metric definition whose data resolves to a campaign. How you connect the data depends on where the campaign lives in your semantic model. Three examples show how the metric's data connects to the campaign in each case.
Example: Track Click-Through Rate for a Campaign Goal in Marketing Planning and Operations: The marketing team at Northern Trail Outfitters (NTO) sets a goal on an email nurture campaign to reach a 5% click-through rate. They want the goal to track click-through rate automatically, without manual updates. The engagement data connects to the campaign only through the email message. So, the admin uses that relationship to create a click-through-rate metric. Use this example when your metric's data doesn't store the campaign but connects to it through a related object that stores the campaign.
Example: Track Delivered Emails for a Campaign Goal in Marketing Planning and Operations: The marketing team at Northern Trail Outfitters (NTO) sets a goal on an email campaign to deliver 50,000 marketing emails. They want the goal to track delivered emails automatically, without manual updates. Because the email data in Marketing Intelligence already includes the campaign, the admin creates one metric that counts delivered emails. Use this example when your metric's data already stores the campaign.
Example: Track Registrations for a Campaign Goal in Marketing Planning and Operations: The events team at Northern Trail Outfitters (NTO) sets a goal on a webinar campaign to reach 2,000 registrations. The registrations come from an external system, with no campaign field. They want the goal to track registrations automatically, without manual updates. So, the admin ingests the registrations as a custom data object, joins that object to the campaign, and then creates a metric that counts registrations. Use this example when your metric's data has no campaign field, so you join it to the campaign in the semantic model.
Set Up Metrics for Marketing Goals in Marketing Planning and Operations: With a semantic metric, a campaign goal calculates its actual from your Data 360 data and refreshes it daily without manual updates. Complete these tasks to make metrics available for goal owners to select for their goals.
Marketing Governance in Marketing Planning and Operations: Governance keeps marketing work aligned with brand, regulatory, and policy standards before it moves forward. It runs compliance reviews against campaigns, programs, and tactics and tracks whether each one passes review. Compliance controls define these standards, and reviews apply them, from controls requested for specific work to controls required across a company.
Add Compliance Controls for Governance in Marketing Planning and Operations: Marketing Planning and Operations supports only manual compliance controls, not automated validations. After you create a control and activate a version of it, the marketing team can add it as a review on their marketing work.
Create Rules for Mandatory Compliance Controls in Marketing Planning and Operations: A company can require compliance controls across a whole category of marketing work. A mandatory compliance rule captures that requirement and applies controls to a type of work. When someone creates work that matches an active rule, that work gets its required reviews automatically.
How Compliance Reviews Work in Marketing Planning and Operations: A compliance review applies to marketing work in one of two ways. Someone requests a review for a specific piece of work, or a company requires a control across a whole category of work. Either way, the owner sends the review requests, and each review goes to a reviewer, who checks the work and notes whether it passes. Each record then rolls up its reviews into one overall compliance status.
Planning Hierarchies in Marketing Planning and Operations: A planning hierarchy links marketing work to the strategy that it supports, so teams stay aligned and results roll up to the objectives they drive. Set up hierarchies that match how your company plans and runs marketing.
Configure Planning Hierarchies in Marketing Planning and Operations: Configure the planning hierarchy tiers that your marketing teams use to organize and track work. Define the tiers that connect executive objectives to executable plans, and then assign those tiers to hierarchy groups. Create multiple groups when different teams need different hierarchy structures.
How Planning Hierarchies Work in Marketing Planning and Operations: A marketing planning hierarchy is the cascading structure that connects company objectives to the marketing work that supports them. Each level represents a different scope of ownership and responsibility, from CEO-level objectives down to the plans that marketers work on.
Learn About Marketing Planning and Operations: Before you get started with Marketing Planning and Operations, it helps to know where it's available, who administers and uses it, and how its data model works.
Developer Resources for Marketing Planning and Operations: Developers work with Marketing Planning and Operations data through standard objects, Tooling API objects, and Connect REST APIs. Use these developer resources to build integrations and automate marketing work.
Approval Tracking in Marketing Planning and Operations: When you submit a program, campaign, or tactic for approval, it goes to an approver to review before it goes live. You can follow where each request stands from submission to decision, and act on the requests that others send you to approve.
Get a Complete View of the Marketing Schedule in Marketing Planning and Operations: See your whole marketing plan on a page. Marketing leaders and managers can see when work runs across the hierarchy, in a timeline view and a calendar view that the Marketing Calendar powers. You can open it on marketing programs, on campaigns, and on the home page of the Marketing Planning & Operations app.
Team Collaboration in Slack for Marketing Planning and Operations: Marketing teams collaborate on their work in Slack, so conversations stay in the context of what they're working on. Bring a marketing program, goal, tactic, or tactic template into a Slack channel to keep the discussion linked to the record. Messages sync between Salesforce and Slack in real time, so the team stays aligned as work moves forward.
Marketing Planning and Operations: Marketing Planning and Operations helps marketing teams plan, govern, and track their work from strategy through execution in one connected system. Leadership sets cascading objectives, targets, and goals. Teams route programs, campaigns, and tactics through governance and approval checks before they go live. As work progresses, marketing leaders and teams track spend and outcomes to guide what marketing does next.
Marketing Programs in Marketing Planning and Operations: Marketing leaders create marketing programs to organize marketing work in the planning hierarchy and align it with company objectives. Leaders and managers then build each program's goals, tactics, and tasks, and move the program through compliance reviews, approvals, and the calendar.
Set Up Marketing Planning and Operations: Before your marketing team can plan and run their work, set up Marketing Planning and Operations. Complete these tasks to get the app up and running for your team.
Set Up the Marketing Planning and Operations Agent: Create an Agentforce agent from the Marketing Planning and Operations agent template. The agent creates marketing programs and goals, and builds multilevel hierarchies of programs and goals. It also looks up your planning hierarchy setup to help your team select the right group and level for programs.
Approval Routing Configuration in Marketing Planning and Operations: An approval routes a piece of marketing work to a person for sign-off before it goes live, such as a marketing director approving a tactic. The marketing team can submit a campaign, marketing program, or marketing tactic for approval. An approval is separate from a compliance review.
Availability of Marketing Planning and Operations: Marketing Planning and Operations requires specific Salesforce editions and licenses. Learn about the editions, licenses, and add-ons that provide access, including the add-on for planning agents.
Discover and Set Up Marketing Planning and Operations with Salesforce Go: Salesforce Go in Setup brings everything you require to configure Marketing Planning and Operations onto a single page. Set up your marketing team from one place, so you can get started quickly. When you turn on Marketing Planning and Operations from Salesforce Go, you're automatically given access to administer it. You can also complete most of your remaining administration tasks to get your marketing team up and running.
Public Group Considerations for Marketing Planning and Operations: Users who belong to specific public groups can create marketing programs, act as compliance reviewers, and get personalized home pages. Create the public groups that your team needs, so they're ready to use.
Override the Default Marketing Planning and Operations Home Page: The Marketing Planning and Operations Home page uses the Command Center Lightning page type, which supports personalization by user group and profile. Create different versions of the Home page and assign each to the right users. For example, show reviewers only their pending reviews, or give marketing managers a custom dashboard of top trending goals.
Picklist Values for Object Fields in Marketing Planning and Operations: Some object fields in Marketing Planning and Operations don't come with a predefined set of picklist values. Add the values that your team uses, so team members can classify records with options relevant to your company and marketing team.
Record Types for Marketing Planning and Operations: Record types distinguish the kinds of work that your team runs on marketing programs, campaigns, and tactics. Compliance admins can then create rules that apply controls to specific record types.
Task Subjects for Marketing Planning and Operations: By default, the Subject field on the Task object comes with only generic values. Add subjects tailored to the marketing work your team plans and runs to give task creators a consistent, relevant list to choose from.
Marketing Tactics in Marketing Planning and Operations: Build and manage the marketing tactics that deliver your campaigns and programs. Create tactics, link their content, add tasks, submit them for approval, and reuse proven tactics as templates.
About Marketing Tactics in Marketing Planning and Operations: A marketing tactic is the execution work that delivers a campaign or program: a specific email, a paid social ad, or a landing page. Unlike a campaign, which is the effort you plan and track, a tactic is the individual piece of work that carries it out. Each tactic gathers the content that runs it from Salesforce CMS and tracks its own progress from draft to complete.
Create a Marketing Tactic in Marketing Planning and Operations: Campaign and marketing managers create a tactic under a program or campaign to organize the content and channels that deliver the work. Build a tactic from scratch, or start from a template to reuse a proven setup.
How Marketing Tactics Are Reviewed and Approved in Marketing Planning and Operations: Before a marketing tactic goes live, it clears two separate checks: a compliance review and an approval. The compliance review checks the work against brand, regulatory, and policy standards, and the approval routes the work to a person for sign-off. These two checks are independent, so one doesn't stand in for the other. A tactic can pass one while the other is still open.
Considerations for Prospects: When working with prospects in Marketing Cloud Next, keep these considerations in mind.
Convert Prospects in Marketing Cloud Next: After a prospect meets the required engagement score, convert them to leads or contacts manually or set up an automated flow to convert them.
Working with Prospects: Focus on high-value prospects, while unqualified ones remain hidden until they reach the required engagement score. You can add prospects to Marketing Cloud Next manually or import them in bulk.
Marketing Cloud Next Quick Start Guides: If you're new to Marketing Cloud Next, get up and running with a quick start guide. Quick start guides focus on a single marketing channel and walk you through the simplest, most direct path to accomplish your goals.
Quick Starts: Email for Marketing Cloud Next: Quick Start guides provide step-by-step instructions for tackling common tasks in Marketing Cloud Next. The guides in this section outline the admin tasks for setting up email tools and introduce how a marketer can create and send promotional email campaigns.
Quick Starts: SMS for Marketing Cloud Next: Quick Start guides provide step-by-step instructions for tackling common tasks in Marketing Cloud Next. The guides in this section outline the admin tasks that are required for setting up SMS tools for use in the U.S. and Canada.
Quick Starts: WhatsApp for Marketing Cloud Next: Quick Start guides provide step-by-step instructions for tackling common tasks in Marketing Cloud Next. The guides in this section outline the admin tasks for setting up WhatsApp tools and introduce how a marketer can create and send promotional WhatsApp campaigns.
Measure Success in Marketing Cloud Next: Monitoring performance and reporting on your successes are a significant part of a marketer’s job. Marketing Cloud Next includes reporting options powered by Data 360 and Tableau Next.
B2B Analytics for Marketers: B2B Analytics for Marketers helps marketing teams connect campaign and engagement activity to pipeline and revenue. The B2B Analytics for Marketers dashboard collections brings CRM and engagement data together in ready-to-use dashboards, so teams can see what's working without reviewing separate systems or building custom analytics.
Supported Dashboards for B2B Analytics for Marketers: B2B Analytics for Marketers includes a set of ready-to-use dashboards, such as account-based marketing and pipeline analysis. After you complete B2B Analytics setup, you can view the dashboards from the Marketing Analytics tab. Use the dashboard filters to narrow widget data by date range, account, and other available values.
Set Up B2B Analytics for Marketers: Set up B2B Analytics for Marketers to connect CRM and engagement data, deploy the required data kits, and install the dashboards.
Customize an Analytics Dashboard in Marketing Cloud Next: Analytics dashboards are located on the Analytics tab and powered by Data 360. You can use the dashboards as-is or customize them to meet your business needs. Analytics dashboards are created from a group of report widgets. You can rearrange the widgets, change labels, filter data, and more.
Metrics Formulas for Marketing Cloud Next: Reports and dashboards in Marketing Cloud Next contain a combination of direct and calculated values. The available metrics vary by channel and report location.
Reporting in Marketing Cloud Next: After you set up Marketing Performance Intelligence and install the required analytics packages, you get access to a number of different reporting options in Marketing Cloud Next.
Set Up Lead Assignment Rules: After a prospect is converted to a lead, lead assignment rules determine how the record owner is assigned. To assign a different record owner for leads, you can create a new rule.
Create and Manage a Custom Tracked Link: A custom tracked link reports clicks from content that you manage outside of Marketing Cloud Next, such as an ad, that points to a connected external website.
Track Activity on Marketing Landing Pages: To track visitor activities on your marketing landing pages, install the required integration on the default Marketing Landing Pages site. To protect the privacy of your landing page visitors, collect their consent to track with a custom consent banner that you design in Salesforce CMS. You’re responsible for complying with privacy laws and regulations applicable to your business.
Demo Videos for Marketing Cloud Next: Accelerate your marketing journey with video walkthroughs that spotlight key Marketing Cloud Next features.
Activate Offers: When your offers and offer treatments are approved, you can activate offers to share them with customers in different formats by using various communication channels.
Send Offer Messages from Marketing Cloud Next with Outbound Engagement: Marketing managers get communication templates with an offer launch message and a follow-up reminder message for email, SMS, push notification, and WhatsApp channels. After an offer is ready for activation, marketing managers can create an outbound engagement to automate message delivery to offer target audiences.
Send Offer Emails from Marketing Cloud Engagement: Marketing managers can use the Offer content block to design personalized offer emails and send the emails by using journeys in Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Agent Topics for Promotion and Offer Briefs: Use the Brief Preview, Offer Management: Brief Generation, and Offer Save topics to draft briefs, preview promotions and offers, and create offers from approved previews.
Review and Approve Offers: The reviewer plays a critical role in the offer lifecycle by making sure that offers meet brand standards, legal requirements, and budgetary constraints before activation. Reviewers can easily access offers that are pending review from the Offer Console tab.
Real-Time Offer Management Billable Usage Types: When you purchase a Real-Time Offer Management license, offer credits are granted upon contract activation. You can use these credits according to the contract length, without any daily or monthly limits.
Replicate Offers to Save Design Time: Instead of building an offer from scratch, marketing managers can clone existing offers and then edit them. For example, clone seasonal and repetitive offers. When you clone an offer, the new offer inherits the configuration of the source offer, including linked promotions, campaigns, and eligibility settings.
Design Offers: Use the Offer Console on the Home page of the Promotions & Offers app to design offers. Define the offer's duration and configure eligibility criteria to ensure that you reach the intended audience and meet your marketing objectives.
Create Engagement Channel Types: Engagement channel types define the supported output formats for each channel. To ensure offer treatments use the correct output format, create engagement channel types before marketing managers create treatments.
Create a Promotion or Offer from a Brief with Agentforce: Instead of building a promotion or offer from scratch in the Offer Console, marketing managers can capture their goals, eligibility criteria, and reward details in a promotion brief or offer brief, and then use Agentforce to turn that brief into a live promotion or offer.
Create Offers: Create offers that align with your business and engagement goals. Use the intuitive designer to build tailored creatives for channels such as email, SMS, and social media. Refine your work with real-time previews and develop multiple variations for the same channel to cater to diverse audiences. Send offers and offer treatments for reviews and approval.
Examples of Offer Personalization: Learn how you can configure recommenders and personalization points to apply the most relevant offers.
Offers on Your Experience Cloud Site: Run offers on Experience Cloud sites for your logged-in customers and partners, or give site users the same guided experience that marketing managers use to create and manage offers.
Assign Offers to Offer Groups: Use offer groups to organize offers for contextual delivery and ensure that customers receive targeted promotions at specific touchpoints in their journey. An offer group categorizes and bundles related offers. You can assign a single offer to one or more groups to support targeted delivery and reuse across different engagement channels and experiences.
Design and Manage Offers with Offer Management: Offer Management enables you to design, configure, and distribute personalized promotional content across multiple channels. Create offers that align with your business goals, then define channel-specific offer treatments to ensure brand consistency across every touchpoint. Accelerate approval cycles through automated workflows and activate offers across channels.
Offer Personalization Setup: Use Salesforce Personalization to identify and deliver the most relevant offers to customers based on their unique profiles and real-time activity.
Personalize Offers: Identify relevant offers by creating recommenders that analyze real-time behavior, profile data, and product catalogs. Create personalization points for eligible customer touchpoints, and configure decisions and targeting rules to ensure individuals receive the most relevant content based on their context.
Create Picklist Values for Offer Status: Real-Time Offer Management provides default status picklist values that define the common stages in an offer lifecycle. If necessary, create additional picklist values that define offer status and represent stages in approval workflows.
Offer Console: Marketing managers use the Offer Console tab on the home page of the Promotions & Offers app to manage offers, approvals, and content assets.
Create Offer Record Types: To simplify creation, to support decisioning when recommending offers, and to improve reporting, create record types for offer categories before marketing managers create offers. Each record type provides the page layouts, fields, and picklist values for that category. For example, if your company provides offers for credit cards and loans, create a record type for each offer category.
Role-Based Permissions for Offer Management: Salesforce admins manage access to Offer Management features by assigning permissions based on a user's specific responsibilities. Within the Offer Management ecosystem, admins must provide themselves, marketing managers, creative designers, system integrators, and Experience Cloud site users with the necessary permissions to design, approve, and distribute offers. Depending on the user’s role, determine which permission sets are assigned to users.
Set Up Offer Personalization: Configure Data Cloud and Salesforce Personalization to set up the data required to show personalized offers. For example, show offers based on a customer's browsing and purchase history.
Set Up Record Access for Offers: Provide record access to users who run offer-related APIs. They require access to all records that the APIs return. The integration user runs these APIs to show offers and offer treatments on external systems. If your implementation requires users in Salesforce to run the APIs, the users also require access to offer and offer treatment records.
Set Up Offer Management: Assign permissions to allow marketing managers to design and activate offers. Create Offer and Offer Treatment record types to customize user journeys for different offer types and channel-specific treatments. Customize automated workflows for cross-team collaboration. Set up Data Cloud to define target audiences.
Advanced Approvals for Offers: After finalizing an offer and its treatment, the marketing team initiates a review and approval cycle that typically spans multiple departments. This includes teams such as marketing, finance, content, compliance, and legal to ensure regulatory adherence and quality. The review process can also include collaboration with external agencies. To accelerate approval process setup, Offer Management provides a set of preconfigured flow templates. Admins can clone these templates and customize the flow logic to mirror the company’s offer approval stages. To trigger the approval process, the admin can configure a simple automation.
Ways to Inform Approvers About Offers Pending Review: The Offers Console tab of the Promotions & Offers app provides users an option to manage offer approvals. On the Approvals page, approvers can view offers pending their review and submitters can view the approval status of their offers. You can also embed Lightning App Builder components on pages that approvers visit frequently to inform them about offers that are in their queue.
Approval Flows for Offers: The flow templates for offer approval are designed to manage the end-to-end offer review and approval process across departments. The flow templates mimic the approval lifecycle that most companies align with. Admins can customize the flows based on the company's unique review process and requirements.
Offer Communication Setup: The marketing team can automate the process of sending offer communications by using either Marketing Cloud Next or Marketing Cloud Engagement. With Marketing Cloud Next, send offer messages across email, SMS, push notification, and WhatsApp channels. Complete the setup that's required to send offer communications.
Set Up Marketing Cloud Next for Offers: Set up Marketing Cloud Next and Outbound Engagement to empower marketing managers to automate the process of sending offer messages across email, SMS, push notification, and WhatsApp channels with minimal effort.
Set Up Marketing Cloud Engagement for Offers: Connect your Salesforce org with your Marketing Cloud Engagement instance. Install and set up Marketing Cloud Connect to sync offer data from the Salesforce org to Engagement. To help marketing managers design personalized offer emails, install the Offer content block in Engagement.
Data 360 for Offer Management: Marketing teams use customer segments from Data 360 to define target audiences for offers. Sync offer details such as validity period, coupon code, and eligible products in Data 360. Users who work with Salesforce Personalization use offer, offer treatment, and profile data from Data 360 to create rules that recommend offers to customers.
Set Up Data 360 for Offer Management: Install the Global Promotions Management data stream bundle to send data from Offer Management objects to Data 360.
Create Channel-Specific Communication Content for Targeted Outreach: After creating an offer, marketing managers can use the Treatment Designer to create tailored content for different delivery channels. Define headings, body text, and call-to-action details to optimize your offer messaging for various customer touchpoints.
Active Prospects: An active prospect has performed an activity, such as submitting a form, visiting a page, or clicking a link. Active prospects have a green person icon next to their name. A prospect who has never been active has a red person icon.
Activities That Trigger a Sync: Some prospect, user, and system activities trigger prospects to sync from Account Engagement to Salesforce.
Add Default Mail Merge Values to Fields: Set up a default mail merge value to appear when there’s no value available for a prospect field. For example, set the First Name field to show 'Valued Customer' if the first name is missing from a prospect record.
Add the Google Analytics Connector: Adding the Google Analytics connector can simplify the flow of information between Google Analytics, Account Engagement, and Salesforce.
Business Unit Settings for Account Engagement: Admins can control settings for the entire business unit. Depending on your edition or app, some feature-level settings also appear on the Account Engagement Settings page. Review feature-specific help for information about those settings.
Check Business Unit Usage: Admins can find out what’s available in your business unit and where you stand on usage limits.
Add Email Signatures: Make sure that prospects have all your contact details and other relevant information in every message you send.
Allowing Multiple Prospects with the Same Email Address: Choose whether to use an email address or CRM ID as the unique identifier for your prospects. The identifier we use is based on whether the record was created via prospect import, the Salesforce connector, a form submission, or a third-party connector. This feature is enabled by default for business units created after June 14, 2016.
Account Engagement API Use Cases: Use the API to extend Account Engagement to fit your business needs. To help you get started, here are a few common use cases here.
Re-Enable Email After a BCC Failure: When BCC email compliance is enabled, all live and test emails are also sent to the BCC email address. If an email sent to the BCC email address bounces, all email sending is suspended until a valid BCC email address is provided. You receive an in-app notification when a BCC failure occurs.
Set Up BCC Email Compliance: An Account Engagement admin can configure the BCC email compliance feature in your business unit settings. Before you set up this feature, make sure that you have a BCC email address that is accepting emails.
BCC Email Compliance: In some industries, businesses must retain a record of all emails sent, including the content and each email recipient. The blind carbon copy (BCC) email compliance feature can be used with a third-party archival system to store emails sent from Account Engagement. Configure this feature to send a copy of every Account Engagement email to your BCC address.
Change Your Language and Locale: To use Account Engagement in a different language, update your personal language and locale settings. Admins can change language and locale at the account level.
Change the Currency Format: An admin can edit the default currency in your business unit. Currency is displayed in paid search and campaign reporting.
Database Limits: Learn how mailable prospects count toward your database limit.
Enforce Browser Do-Not-Track Settings: Browsers with Do Not Track enabled don’t allow a third party to capture activities on one site and use them on another site. The tracking code used by Account Engagement is first party, so it doesn’t honor do-not-track settings by default. You can change this behavior in your account settings.
Email Signatures: Users can create custom email signatures for their newsletters and automated emails. Admins can customize signatures for any user.
CSV Exports Table: The CSV Export table shows details and download links for recent exports.
Remove a Visitor Filter: Admins can delete visitor filters. When you delete a visitor filter, the change takes effect immediately and you can't restore the filter.
Create a Visitor Filter: Admins can create a visitor filter based on an IP address or hostname.
Filtering Visitors: Use filters to exclude some types of visits, clicks, or other actions from your campaign results and email notifications. A common use is to exclude your company’s IP address to avoid skewing your reporting.
Find the Sending IP Address: An Account Engagement admin can find the sending IP address for allowlisting in business unit settings.
Add a Tracker Domain in Account Engagement: Use a tracker domain in Account Engagement to rewrite links and vanity URLs for tracking. To set up a tracker domain, work with an IT partner or a hosting provider to edit CNAME records.
Considerations for First-Party Tracking: Before using first-party tracking, make sure you review some key points. Business units created after February 13, 2023 use first-part tracking by default.
Enable First-Party Tracking in Account Engagement: If your business unit was created before February 13, 2023, an admin must enable first-party tracking. Business units created after February 13, 2023 have first-party tracking enabled by default.
Upgrade to First-Party Tracking: To protect consumers’ privacy, web browsers are moving away from supporting tracking visitor activity with third-party cookies. Instead, use first-party tracking to record prospect activity, ensure campaign attribution, and block traffic that doesn’t come from your domains. Business units created after February 13, 2023 use first-part tracking by default.
Update Tracker Domains for First-Party Tracking: First-party tracking requires that tracker domains have a default campaign. After you enable first-party tracking, add a default campaign to existing tracker domains.
Implement Tracking Code: Each Account Engagement campaign has its own unique tracking code. Add the code to a web page to track visitor and prospect activity. We recommend that you add the code to high-value pages only, such as landing pages or specific product listings. Don’t place the code on more general pages like the home page on your website.
Enable or Disable HTTPS for Account Engagement Assets: Browsers can request an SSL-enabled marketing asset over HTTP. To create a more secure browsing experience for your prospects, Account Engagement redirects these request to HTTPS for tracker domains that default to HTTPS. You can change this default behavior at any time.
Insert an Email Signature: Use variable tags to pull content, including sender signatures, into your email body. These tags work when you send from assigned and specific users. They don’t work when you send from a general user.
Manage Encryption Keys with Bring Your Own Encryption Key (BYOK): Organizations find BYOK useful for key lifecycle management and control, data protection and security, regulatory compliance, data portability, and more. With BYOK, you can secure your marketing database with an encryption key that you manage and then, in an emergency, revoke access to your Account Engagement data. No one has access to this key–not even Salesforce–so after access is removed, the data becomes unreadable.
Keyboard Shortcuts: Try keyboard shortcuts to get around more quickly. To get a list of available shortcuts, type Shift+? (Windows) or Ctrl+? (Mac) at the same time.
Designate an Admin for Marketing Setup Tasks: Setup and feature configuration often requires both a Salesforce admin and an Account Engagement admin. To bypass the need for multiple admins, you can create a custom permission set in Salesforce to delegate Account Engagement tasks to a marketing admin. This custom permission set grants access to all the nodes in Marketing Setup without granting full access to Salesforce Setup.
Configure Cookie Duration: To limit the number of days Account Engagement stores a customer cookie, you can adjust the duration of visitor_id and pi_opt_in tracking. The default duration is set to 365 days.
User Email Preferences: Account Engagement sends notifications for some prospect activities, inactive automations, and search marketing reports. A user’s email preferences control which notification emails are sent.
Product and Service Notifications: Account Engagement sends different types of product and service notifications. You can designate a different point of contact for each notification in the Product and Service Notifications table in your business unit settings.
Edit Product and Service Notifications: You can choose who to send different product and service notifications from the Product and Service Notifications table in your business unit settings.
Use the Recycle Bin: When you delete an asset, it isn’t deleted. Instead, it’s moved to the recycle bin. You can restore most assets from the recycle bin. You can’t empty the recycle bin.
Role-Based Email Addresses: Because role-based email addresses often represent multiple recipients, they’re more likely to generate spam complaints. To help protect your sending reputation, Account Engagement restricts importing and sending to these email addresses by default. If you have a legitimate business reason to import role-based email addresses, contact Salesforce Customer Support.
System Emails: Admins can see a log of all system email notifications for the past 14 days.
Change the Default Protocol for Tracker Domains: If your business unit was created before February 15, 2021, you can default tracker domains to use HTTP or HTTPS. We recommend securing all tracker domains by defaulting them to HTTPS. Business units created after February 15, 2021 default all tracker domains to HTTPS.
Visitor Tracking for Account Engagement: To collect activity data and give visitors a seamless experience, set up tracker domains and add Account Engagement tracking code to your web pages. When you create marketing assets, you can choose which tracker domain you want to use for vanity URLs and link rewriting.
Automatically Secure New Tracker Domains with SSL Certificates: To automatically secure all new tracker domains, enable SSL when you validate your domain. For business units created after February 15, 2021, this behavior is enabled by default and can’t be changed.
Manually Enable SSL for Tracker Domains: If your business unit was created before February 15, 2021, you can enable SSL for individual tracker domains to access content over HTTPS. Business units created after February 15, 2021 automatically enable SSL for all tracker domains.
Secure Domains for HTTPS: Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a standard security protocol for establishing a secure HTTPS connection. If your business unit was created before February 15, 2021, you can automatically secure new tracker domains with an SSL certificate. You can also enable SSL certificates manually for individual domains. Business units created after February 15, 2021 automatically create SSL certificates for all tracker domains and the behavior can’t be changed.
Control Tracking Opt-In Preferences in Account Engagement: You can request that visitors opt in to tracking. When tracking opt-in is enabled, new visitors are asked to consent to tracking cookies. The message doesn’t appear again unless they clear their cookies. If a prospect hasn’t opted in, page views and form views aren’t tracked. Email link clicks and form submissions still appear in their activity history.
Update Your User Profile: Most users can update their own personal information and email preferences on the My Profile page. Only an admin can update a Sales user’s profile or change a user’s role.
Managing Your Business Unit: You can edit your business unit settings in different places in Account Engagement, based on whether you use Lightning Experience or the standalone app.
Account-Based Marketing App Dashboards: The Account-Based Marketing app includes prebuilt dashboards that explore the characteristics and performance. Each dashboard features several widgets that outline or visualize helpful metrics.
Marketing Campaign Intelligence Dashboards: The Marketing Campaign Intelligence app includes prebuilt dashboards to meet the needs of everyone on your sales and marketing teams. Each dashboard features several widgets that outline or visualize helpful metrics. Use global filters to focus the data on a time frame, campaigns, or accounts.
Create a Marketing Campaign Intelligence App: To explore sales and marketing dashboards and lenses, create an app with the Marketing Campaign Intelligence (MCI) app template. As feature updates become available to the app, you must upgrade it.
Marketing Campaign Intelligence App: The Marketing Campaign Intelligence app brings your marketing and sales efforts into alignment. The Campaign Engagement card shows prospect engagement data from Account Engagement, and the Campaign Performance card shows associated campaign data from Salesforce. Explore the dashboard and create an Einstein Discovery story that helps you improve prospect engagement.
Object Sync for Account Engagement: If you use hundreds of custom prospect fields, it can take time to load and manipulate the data in CRM Analytics apps. If you have tens of millions of prospects, turning on Object Sync can improve load times. Object Sync gives you more control over how data is shared from Account Engagement and replication scheduling.
Considerations for Object Sync: Object Sync improves performance in the CRM Analytics platform by updating prospect data separately from other large datasets. Before you use Object Sync with Account Engagement, review these considerations.
Remove Fields from Object Sync: To remove your Object Sync custom fields from CRM Analytics, complete a few tasks in Salesforce and Account Engagement.
Turn Off Object Sync: To disable Object Sync, deselect syncing fields, update settings, and turn off the feature in Marketing Setup.
Turn On Object Sync: To enable Object Sync, open Marketing Setup in Account Engagement.
Analytics for Account Engagement: Use the analytics features in Account Engagement to explore the connection between your marketing efforts and sales outcomes. Get answers to your performance questions when you create custom lenses and dashboards.
Set Up B2B Marketing Analytics Plus: To get started with B2B Marketing Analytics Plus, review the data requirements and make sure that the prerequisite features are in use. After everything is set up, invite users to create their own apps in Analytics Studio.
Use the Tracking and Consent API: The tracking and consent API provides functions for each step in the page view tracking process, giving you control over how Account Engagement tracks page views. After you activate the API in business unit settings, work with your developer to implement custom compliance solutions.
Associate a Visitor with a Prospect: Most prospects are related to their visitor activity when they convert, but you can manually associate a visitor with a prospect. This feature comes in handy when you’re in contact with a potential prospect whose company is in your visitor report.
Automating Prospect Assignments: Account Engagement offers tools to automate prospect assignment based on a prospect’s information and actions.
Page Actions: Page actions are completion actions that are triggered by a prospect’s page views. You can apply page actions to any page that contains your tracking code.
Automate Your Marketing Processes With Account Engagement: Prospect nurturing is critical but time consuming. Automate how you target and engage prospects with tools like Engagement Studio, automation rules, completion actions, segmentation rules, and prospect lists.
Call Out Prospect Page Views as a Separate Activity: Help your sales team spot significant prospect buying signals by using page actions to designate a page on your website as a priority page. Priority pages let you call out important page views as a separate prospect activity, instead of bundling them with other page views.
Automation Rule Actions: Automation rules filter prospects by criteria and then apply an action to matching prospects. The actions are available in the first dropdown in the Actions section of your automation rule.
Create an Automation Rule: Create an automation rule to perform criteria-based actions on prospects.
Automation Rule Criteria: Automation rules use criteria to filter matching prospects to apply actions to. The criteria are available in the first dropdown in the Rules section of your automation rule.
Automation Rule Examples: Automation rules perform actions based on criteria. Here are some examples of common automation rule use cases.
Automation Rules: Automation rules are repeatable, criteria-based rules that find matching prospects and apply actions to them.
Streamline Marketing Efforts with Automation Tools: Streamline marketing efforts by automating tasks. Use automation tools to perform actions on prospects, build prospect lists based on criteria, and react to prospect actions.
Give Analytics Integration User Access to B2B Marketing Analytics: The Analytics Integration User in your org facilitates the transfer of analytics data to B2B Marketing Analytics. For transfers to work properly, add field-level security to the Analytics Cloud Integration User profile.
Account-Based Marketing Dashboard: Use Account-Based Marketing dashboards to understand how opportunities and contacts from one account engage with your marketing and sales assets. To use Account-Based Marketing dashboards, enable the integration user’s access to B2B Marketing Analytics.
After Your Upgrade: Now that you’ve prepared your tracking spreadsheet and upgraded the B2B Marketing Analytics app, reinstate your customizations.
Permissions for B2B Marketing Analytics: Create and assign permission sets for the connector user and B2B Marketing Analytics users. The app version that you use determines which permission names are available.
Before You Upgrade: Before you upgrade a B2B Marketing Analytics app, identify and log the dataset IDs that are referenced in your dataflows, lenses, and dashboards. The upgrade automatically replaces the IDs that are necessary for the standard dashboards in your app.
B2B Marketing Analytics Dashboards: B2B Marketing Analytics includes three prebuilt dashboards to meet the needs of everyone on the team. With a few more steps, you can also create a Multi-Touch Attribution dashboard, Account-Based Marketing dashboard, or an Einstein Behavior Scoring dashboard. Each dashboard features widgets that outline or visualize helpful metrics. Data for these dashboards originates in Account Engagement, Salesforce, or both sources. Each dashboard is built on predetermined datasets and filters, or lenses, that help you draw insights from your marketing data.
B2B Marketing Analytics Datasets: Several datasets become available when you set up B2B Marketing Analytics. To create helpful metrics that tell you more about your marketing and sales performance in the B2B Marketing Analytics app, combine and filter different fields.
Einstein Behavior Scoring Dashboard for B2B Marketing Analytics: The Einstein Behavior Scoring dashboard provides a look into how Einstein uses engagement data to create its model. You can learn which engagement activities impact opportunities the most. Select an activity to learn more about which individual assets perform best.
Create and Upgrade B2B Marketing Analytics Apps: To explore dashboards and lenses, create an app with the B2B Marketing Analytics template. As feature updates become available to B2B Marketing Analytics, you must upgrade your apps. You can also change an app’s settings at any time by reconfiguring it.
Migration for Legacy Users: Datasets in legacy B2B Marketing Analytics apps are longer updated. Legacy apps include any custom apps that you made without selecting the B2B Marketing Analytics app template during setup. To get access to the most recent features and data, upgrade to templated apps.
Multi-Touch Attribution Dashboard: Multi-Touch Attribution dashboards show you which marketing efforts are most influential during each stage of the purchase lifecycle. After you enable Connected Campaigns, users can find asset engagement from Account Engagement and data from Sales Cloud together in one dashboard.
Optional Uses for B2B Marketing Analytics: Your business goals dictate how you set up each B2B Marketing Analytics app. For example, track opportunities at each touchpoint or dig into engagement on a specific account. Optional dashboards are available with B2B Marketing Analytics.
Create a B2B Marketing Analytics App: To create a B2B Marketing Analytics app in your org, navigate to Analytics Studio and answer the setup questions.
B2B Marketing Analytics: B2B Marketing Analytics is a CRM Analytics app containing marketing and sales data populated via your Salesforce connector.
Permissions for the Analytics Embedded App License: The app version that you use determines which permissions are available. After you determine which Salesforce permission set license you have, assign the other permission sets and system permissions to different types of users.
Prospect and Activity Dataset: To identify which content influences prospects in your sales funnel, add the optional Prospect and Activity dataset. Create a lens using this dataset to identify the individual prospect record that acted on a certain asset.
Prospect and Activity Dataset for Object Sync: To identify which content influences prospects in your sales funnel, add the optional Prospect and Activity dataset. Create a lens using this dataset to identify the individual prospect record that acted on a certain asset.
Reconfigure B2B Marketing Analytics: If you make a mistake during setup or have new business needs, you can change the configuration of your B2B Marketing Analytics app at any time.
Set Up B2B Marketing Analytics: Review the prerequisites and permissions details for B2B Marketing Analytics, and then enable the feature in the Marketing Setup app.
Prerequisites for B2B Marketing Analytics: The setup process for B2B Marketing Analytics varies based on when the feature was purchased or previously set up. Your permission set license affects how you enable B2B Marketing Analytics. To get the newest tools and data after the initial setup, users must update their apps periodically.
Upgrade a B2B Marketing Analytics Template: Each time Salesforce releases new datasets and improvements to the B2B Marketing Analytics template, each user must update their B2B Marketing Analytics app. When an upgrade is available, a link to upgrade appears in the app header.
Cookies and Activity Tracking: Account Engagement tracks visitor and prospect activities on your website and landing pages by setting cookies on their browsers. Cookies are set to remember preferences (like form field values) when a visitor returns to your site. We also set a cookie for logged-in users to maintain the session and remember table filters.
Variable Tag Modifiers: A modifier is a string added to a prospect field variable tag that tells the system how to format the output. You can also use a modifier to protect your embedded data and ensure that it’s inserted properly.
Account Engagement Basic Resources: Explore downloadable implementation guides, keyboard shortcuts, tracking basics, glossary terms, and more.
Build and Send Classic Emails: The classic email builder in Account Engagement guides you through creating emails and templates that you can use again and again. Always test your emails and templates so that you can improve your content. In the classic email builder, you can easily move between editing and testing your content.
Automation and Asset Builder Versions: As Account Engagement interfaces are developed, content and automation tools are enhanced. You can access classic builders in the standalone app. In Account Engagement Lightning App, you can choose from classic builders and the enhanced experiences.
Campaign Performance Report: The Campaign Performance report gives a high-level overview of a campaign’s overall health in comparison to other campaigns in an interactive graph. Use this report to visually compare ROI, cost per opportunity and more across your campaigns.
Campaign Report Table Metrics: The Campaign Report table gives you a quick statistical overview of Account Engagement campaigns.
Account Engagement Campaign Reporting: All your marketing assets are related to a campaign that tracks your prospect’s first interaction with your brand. Use campaign reports to get insights and check the effectiveness of your marketing efforts.
Create an Account Engagement Campaign: Admins and marketing users can create Account Engagement campaigns to track and report on prospects. If you’re using Connected Campaigns, users can only create Salesforce campaigns.
Account Engagement Campaigns: An Account Engagement campaign tracks the first interaction that a prospect has with your online marketing materials. Associate your assets to a campaign to organize and track your marketing efforts.
Associating Prospects with Campaigns: A prospect is related to an Account Engagement campaign based on the first marketing asset that they interact with as a visitor, even before converting to a prospect.
Salesforce Campaigns in Account Engagement: You can sync campaigns to Salesforce to display them in Account Engagement with campaign members and statuses. You can also add prospects to Salesforce campaigns from Account Engagement.
Change Field Sync Behavior: Admins can configure default and custom prospect field sync behavior. When you update field sync behavior, it applies only to future data syncs.
Layout Templates for Landing Pages: In the classic landing page experience, you can use layout templates to format landing pages, forms, and site search results. You can also use content regions to control which sections of your layout templates are editable.
Classic Landing Pages: The classic landing page experience uses HTML and WYSIWYG editors.
Review and Clear Prospect Sync Errors: After you resolve prospect sync errors, you can resync those prospects from the sync error page in Account Engagement. Depending on the errors, it’s possible your Salesforce admin has to resolve them.
Available Completion Actions: Automate marketing tasks and follow-ups with completion actions. You can use standard actions that apply to all prospects equally or actions that apply only to prospects that meet the conditions you specify.
Add Completion Actions to Assets: Add completion actions to your Account Engagement assets to take action when prospects interact with them. You can combine standard and conditional actions on a single asset. Completion actions are available on forms, form handlers, files, custom redirects, emails, and page actions. Conditional completion actions aren’t available for classic emails.
Filter Prospects with Conditional Completion Actions: For more control over which prospects you take action on, add conditional completion actions to your marketing assets. While standard actions execute on all prospects who interact with an asset, conditional actions execute only on prospects who also meet criteria that you define. You can combine both types of actions on one asset to target your prospects more effectively.
Conditional Group Prospect Criteria: To add conditional completion actions to assets, create a conditional group based on prospect criteria. The criteria are available in the first dropdown when you add a conditional group.
Considerations for Completion Actions: Before you configure standard or conditional completion actions, review their processing behavior, limits, and throttling periods.
Completion Actions: Completion actions automate basic marketing tasks so your team can focus on other things. Add an action to adjust a prospect’s score when they access a file, or add prospects to a list when they fill out a form. For more precision, add conditional completion actions to execute only on prospects who meet criteria that you specify. Completion actions are available on forms, form handlers, files, custom redirects, emails, and page actions.
Connect Account Engagement and Salesforce Users: Salesforce User Sync connects your Account Engagement and Salesforce users and lets you manage Account Engagement user access from Marketing Setup. User Sync transfers user management to Salesforce and Account Engagement user records become read-only. User Sync is the recommended method for managing Salesforce and Account Engagement users. However, if that’s not the right solution for you at this time, map Salesforce and Account Engagement users and enable Salesforce single sign-on to allow them to access Account Engagement.
Extending Account Engagement with Connected Apps: A connector enables Account Engagement to sync with a third-party application, like a webinar service or Google Ads, so that you don’t have to manage content and tasks in multiple apps. The connection passes data back and forth between the two applications.
Add the Bitly Connector: You can generate a default Bitly short link for landing pages, multivariate tests, and files. To track link performance, set up the Bitly connector. If you use a custom domain Bitly account, that domain is used in your shortened URLs.
Create Social Posts: Social posting tools help you manage and post content on Facebook and LinkedIn.
Eventbrite Field Mappings: When you enable the Pull Additional Prospect Fields connector setting, extra fields are mapped and synced. Eventbrite doesn’t overwrite prospect data, but it adds data when the field is empty in Account Engagement.
Integrating with Eventbrite: Account Engagement syncs with Eventbrite to provide reporting and scoring on event registrations and attendance and track prospect events activity.
Add the Facebook Connector: To post to Facebook pages and track engagement, add the Facebook connector. You can add up to 25 connectors for company pages.
GoToWebinar Connector: To bring GoToWebinar data into Account Engagement, set up the connector.
Add the LinkedIn Profile Lookup Connector: The LinkedIn profile lookup connector lets you view LinkedIn profiles for your prospects based on their first name, last name, and company (if provided). This connector is automatically enabled in new accounts.
Add the LinkedIn Social Posting Connector: The LinkedIn social posting connector posts to individual accounts and company pages, but not LinkedIn Groups. Choose where you want to post during setup. You can have as many LinkedIn social posting connectors as you want.
Add the Olark Connector: To track visitors who engage with you via Olark chat, add the Olark connector.
Integrating with Olark: Use the Olark connector to create prospects from your chats and view chat activities on prospect records.
Add Competitors to Track: Track how well your site stacks up against your competitors in general SEO terms. View competitor data, like the number of inbound links, page and domain authority, links to the root domain, root domain external links, and Alexa Rating.
Competitor Table Metrics: The Competitors table shows metrics about the competitors you track in Account Engagement.
Tracking Search Keywords and Competitor SEO: Search marketing tools help you monitor your site and search results. Add keywords that you want to monitor, or use a default list of common keywords.
Keyword Table Metrics: The Keywords table lists your keywords and their SEO metrics.
Integrate with Third-Party Site Search: Integrate your third-party site search to report on prospect queries. Searches on your website show a prospect’s intent. A prospect searching your site for "pricing" is a more clear indicator of interest than just a pricing page view. Site search details vary by provider, so these instructions are general guidelines.
Social Posting with Account Engagement: You can schedule and post updates to Facebook and LinkedIn accounts and company pages. Set up each connector to gather insight on link clicks, replies, comments, and likes. See prospects who clicked a link in your post, which social media channels received the most clicks, and how engagement has changed over time. Social post clicks are visible as prospect activities on individual prospect records.
Add the Twilio Connector: If you use Twilio, create a connector to instantly follow up with prospects via phone. The selected user gets a call when a prospect submits a connected form so that the user can connect with the prospect by phone. Twilio activities appear on prospect records, where you can view details about calls.
Add the UserVoice Connector: To add suggestions, support tickets, and other UserVoice data to prospect records, add the UserVoice connector.
Wistia Prospect Activities: Video plays are recorded when prospects watch a Wistia video embedded on a page with your Account Engagement tracking code. You can view plays and video heatmaps from a prospect record.
Add the Wistia Connector: To track prospect video engagement, set up the Wistia connector. After you create the connector, it pulls in only new engagement data as it becomes available. The connector requires an Advanced or Premium Wistia plan.
Integrating with Wistia: Wistia is a video hosting service that measures engagement with your content. Use the Wistia connector to record prospects’ video activity and create prospects from video conversions.
Wistia Turnstiles: You can use the Wistia connector together with turnstile forms to collect email addresses and create prospects. When a visitor submits a turnstile form with their email address, the engagement is added to a matching prospect with the most recent engagement. If a matching record isn’t found, a prospect record is created.
Integrating with WordPress.org Sites: Use the Pardot WordPress plug-in to add marketing forms and dynamic content to your WordPress pages and posts without using code. The plug-in is available only for sites that use WordPress.org.
Using the WordPress Plug-In: The Pardot plug-in for WordPress adds a button to the WordPress Visual Editor. To add dynamic content and forms to your posts and pages, click the button and choose your content. Forms and dynamic content are also available when editing a widget.
Custom Redirect Reporting: When a visitor or prospect clicks a custom redirect, the click is recorded in the Custom Redirect Statistics table. You can filter the table by tags, campaign, and date range.
Track Link Clicks: Use custom redirects to track banner ad clicks, links to third-party sites, links on social media, and access to files hosted outside of Account Engagement. Clicks are tracked as an activity on a prospect’s record. You can get an overview of the redirect’s performance with the custom redirect report.
Customize Asset Links with Tracker Domains: Asset links use your primary tracker domain by default, but you can customize them with any validated tracker domain. Custom asset links are available for all assets except for non-template emails.
Customize Links to Marketing Assets: Marketing assets that you create in Account Engagement have a unique link. You can use any validated tracker domain to customize those asset links. You can also create vanity URLs for landing pages, files, custom redirects, and email preference center pages.
Create Dynamic Content: Use dynamic content to display variations to prospects based on criteria you select.
Use Dynamic Content in an Email: To add variations of content for different people in a classic email, add dynamic content with merge fields.
Add Dynamic Content to Pages: You can add dynamic content to your web page or to landing pages, forms, and layout templates that you create with Account Engagement. The CSS on your web page or layout template affects the embedded content.
Target Prospects with Custom Content: Use dynamic content to display custom HTML on your website or Account Engagement forms, landing pages, layout templates, and emails based on prospect criteria. When a prospect matches the criteria for your dynamic content, a variation of the content displays.
Test Dynamic Content on a Page: You can view each variation as it appears on the page to a prospect who matches the criteria. When you test your dynamic content, you can also verify that your CSS correctly styles the variations.
File Reporting: When a visitor or prospect clicks a link to a file that’s hosted by Account Engagement, the click is recorded in the File Statistics table. You can filter the table by tags and date range.
Delete Hosted Files: Whether you’re running out of storage space or just want to tidy up outdated files in Account Engagement, you can delete a hosted file at any time. When you delete a file, it’s deleted permanently instead of being archived in the recycle bin. After you delete the files, they’re no longer visible or available online.
File Hosting with Account Engagement: You can upload images and other files to use in your marketing emails, forms, and landing pages. Most hosted files have tracked URLs based on your tracker domain. When prospects access a tracked file, it’s reflected in their activities.
Create a Folder: Use folders to organize your marketing assets.
Limit Access with Folder Permissions: To protect your content in folders, assign access to specific user groups with permissions. Before you apply folder permissions, make sure that you’ve created user groups and organized your content in folders.
Organize Marketing Assets with Folders: You can organize and nest your content and marketing assets in a way that makes sense for your team. Apply folder permissions to control which users have access to your marketing assets and content.
Gating Content with Forms: Gated content requires visitors to submit a form to access resources, such as a white paper. It’s a great way to convert visitors to prospects. You can gate content that’s hosted with Account Engagement and content hosted elsewhere.
Inserting Images: You can use images in your marketing assets, such as emails and landing pages. Depending on where you store your images, you can choose to insert them from your gallery or from another location.
Personalize Assets in Account Engagement: From asset administration to powerful content customization and reuse, Account Engagement offers the tools you need to engage with your customers. Try folders to organize your projects, track engagement data with personalized links, and develop reusable templates that enhance your marketing workflow.
Manage Marketing Content in Salesforce: In Salesforce, you can configure access to the landing pages, marketing forms, and marketing links that users create in Account Engagement. To make this content available in Salesforce, configure settings in Lightning Experience Object Manager or the Object Management Settings in Salesforce Classic.
Upload an Image: Upload image files to use as you build content for your emails, email templates, social posts, forms, and landing pages.
Create a Vanity URL for Assets: You can assign a vanity URL on different marketing assets. Open a landing page, file, custom redirect, or email preference center page in Account Engagement to customize its vanity URL.
Customize Asset Links with Vanity URLs: A vanity URL is a custom link that uses your tracker domain to point to an asset that you’ve created in Account Engagement. An autogenerated address is assigned by default. To coordinate the link with your brand or campaign, you can provide a descriptive path to replace the default string.
Considerations for Vanity URLs: You can create a vanity URL for landing pages, files, custom redirects, and email preference center pages. Keep these considerations in mind when using vanity URLs.
Converting Visitors to Prospects: A prospect is a visitor with a known email address. Account Engagement tracks visitors and converts them to prospects when an email address can be assigned, which typically happens via a form submit.
Copy a Sent List Email: In Account Engagement, you can copy sent classic list emails and send them to new recipients. When you copy a list email, everything is copied to the new email, except the initial delivery date. The copy email option is available for any sent classic email that includes the Email Preference Center merge field. You can’t copy operational emails that don’t include this merge field.
Create an Email Template in Account Engagement: Design email templates that your team can use again and again for any type of email that you send in Account Engagement. Choose from a variety of responsive layouts and then customize the template with your own branding and content.
Create an Email Test List: Use test lists to send your team the email that you’re working on before sending it to prospects. You can see how your merge fields populate and ensure that links are rewritten properly.
Create Engagement Programs: After you segment your audience and finalize the content that drives your marketing, you’re ready to create an engagement program.
Create a Form: To create and host a marketing form in Account Engagement, use the Form Builder.
Create a Form Handler: To post data from third-party forms back to Account Engagement, configure a form handler.
Add Prospects Manually: If you often meet prospects in person or want to test a prospect record, you can create a prospect record manually.
How Does Account Engagement Handle Deleted Leads and Contacts?: When a synced lead or contact is deleted in Salesforce, it’s flagged as [[crm_deleted]] and sent to the Account Engagement recycle bin. Account Engagement doesn’t recreate the lead or contact in Salesforce, but some actions can remove the flag.
Automate with Custom Objects: As with other objects in Account Engagement, you can use custom objects in automation rules. Because an automation matches prospects, a custom object automation rule matches prospects related to a custom object. Custom objects aren’t available as criteria in automation rule groups.
Create a Custom Object in Account Engagement: You can create custom objects in Account Engagement to sync with Salesforce custom objects. Before you create a custom object, it must exist in Salesforce.
Custom Object Syncing with Salesforce: You can run automations around custom Salesforce objects that are related to a prospect record through a prospect ID. To tie a custom Salesforce object to a prospect ID, link the object to a contact, lead, or account record.
Default Account Object Field Mapping: To facilitate syncing between systems, certain account object field mappings are created when you verify your Salesforce connector in Account Engagement. By default, Salesforce is the primary system.
Default Prospect Field Mapping: To facilitate syncing between systems, certain prospect fields are mapped to lead or contact records when you verify your Salesforce connector in Account Engagement. In most cases, Salesforce is the primary system.
Default User Roles: Account Engagement includes four default user roles: Administrator, Marketing, Sales Manager, and Sales. You can’t edit the default user roles.
Delete Multiple Prospects: You can mass delete incorrectly imported, hard-bounced, unengaged, or duplicate prospects using a list.
Delete a Prospect: You can delete a duplicate, test, or spam prospect from the prospect’s record.
Delete or Undelete Prospects: When you delete a prospect, the record is moved to the recycle bin. From the recycle bin, you can restore the prospect or permanently delete the record. Deleting a prospect doesn’t delete the record that it’s syncing with in Salesforce.
Edit Engagement Programs: Pause and edit engagement programs to adjust step settings, delete or add steps, update recipient lists, and make other changes. When you resume the program, it picks up where it left off.
Activate an Email for Use in Marketing Automations: To use an Account Engagement email in Engagement Studio, automation rules, and completion actions, you must activate it for use in automation. To automate the most recent content, activate an email content record each time you make any changes.
Use Custom Components in Email: Marketers can use custom components to enhance their email templates and content by bringing in information and assets, such as surveys or event details, from third parties. Partners or developers can create custom components. Admins install custom components from an unmanaged package or via AppExchange. After a component is installed, a user can choose it when they build email content.
Create Enhanced Emails: Provide basic email information to create an email content record, and then build from scratch or edit existing email content. To make email creation even easier, Account Engagement offers email templates that help you reuse email designs.
Design, Test, and Send Emails: Interactively design emails from scratch or from a template and send emails from the email content record. You can also preview and test your email before sending it.
Boost Your Email Performance with Einstein: Einstein features help you learn more about your prospects. Einstein Send Time Optimization identifies the optimal send time for the individual prospects. Einstein Engagement Frequency helps you better understand the volume of email your prospects prefer to receive.
Guidelines for Creating Custom Report Types for Email Content: Create custom report types that include email content and list email data. Marketers can then create reports to analyze and better understand the performance of their email content. Review the following guidelines and examples of reports.
Considerations for Using Handlebars Merge Language Fields in the Enhanced Email Experience: Some Handlebars Merge Language (HML) fields in Salesforce aren’t supported in Account Engagement. To use these field values, map custom fields from Account Engagement to existing Salesforce fields. Keep these scenarios in mind when you use HML fields in the enhanced email experience.
Preview and Test Emails: Before sending your email, preview it as a specific prospect, and then test send it to troubleshoot personalization issues. You can send a test email to a test list or to individual email addresses. Test emails don’t include merge field data.
Reuse Email Content for List Emails: Edit and reuse existing email content to create and send new emails. Resend email content to different recipients and segments as unique list email sends. You can also view related email sends for specific email content.
Send Emails: After you design your email content, define a campaign, an audience, tracker domain, sender options, and completion actions.
Assign Admin Permissions for Enhanced Email: Make sure that the person configuring enhanced email in Account Engagement has the appropriate access. You can quickly create a permission set with the necessary permissions on the Content Setup page. A Salesforce admin is best equipped to assign the permissions that are required.
Configure Digital Experiences for Enhanced Email: When you send enhanced email with Account Engagement, you can use the Digital Experiences app as a unified image repository. Digital Experiences offers a CMS workspace where you can save files and control user access and a CMS channel where those files can be published. When you use Digital Experiences with enhanced email, the images published to your channel become available while marketers are building emails.
Create a Domain for Enhanced Email: Stored images used for your emails are associated with a domain you manage. Enhanced email requires a domain that’s configured using a content delivery network (CDN) over HTTPS. Select any verified domain that meets that criteria.
Set Up Enhanced Email in Account Engagement: To set up the enhanced email experience for interactive and engaging email design, we recommend that a Salesforce admin and an Account Engagement admin work together.
Assign User Permissions for Enhanced Email: To give users access to the Email Content object and to Salesforce Digital Experiences, assign permissions. A Salesforce admin is best equipped to assign the required permissions.
Using Email Templates and Email Content Together: With the enhanced email experience in Account Engagement, you can select an email template before you start building your email content. An email template is a reusable layout. It can help you boost productivity and encourage consistency among content creators, but it isn’t a required component of an enhanced email send. It’s your choice whether email templates are a good fit for your business processes.
Account-Based Marketing App: The main dashboard that comes with the Account-Based Marketing app in B2B Marketing Analytics Plus includes metrics and graphs, such as Top 10 values and expected revenue amounts. Use the Pipeline, Accounts, and Closed Opportunity cards to find valuable information about your prospect accounts. On each dashboard, dive into any widget to filter data or open related records.
Set Up the Account-Based Marketing App: To explore prospect account-focused dashboards and lenses, create an app with the Account-Based Marketing (ABM) app template. As feature updates become available to the app, you must upgrade it.
B2B Marketing Analytics Plus: B2B Marketing Analytics Plus is a collection of intelligent marketing tools for B2B marketers. The Account-Based Marketing and Marketing Campaign Intelligence apps help you explore your data and identify improvements with Einstein Discovery.
Considerations for Einstein Attribution: Einstein Attribution relies on certain data and some other Salesforce features. Make sure you have the correct setup before you begin.
Explore Einstein Attribution in B2B Marketing Analytics: Attribution results appear in Campaign Influence related lists and reports. Still, it can be helpful to see these values in aggregate and identify trends across campaigns and engagement activities. Inside the Multi-Touch Attribution dashboard of the B2B Marketing Analytics app, you can interpret this data through different models, including the Einstein Attribution Data-Driven Model.
How Einstein Attribution Works: The Einstein Attribution model is based on a concept borrowed from cooperative game theory called the Shapley Value. The Shapley Value calculates the contribution of each player in a cooperative game, where players use different skill sets to achieve a collective reward. We adapt this method for marketing attribution by distributing an opportunity amount among the campaigns that are associated with the opportunity.
Einstein Attribution: Einstein Attribution combines Campaign Influence with Einstein’s intelligent analysis to more accurately assign campaign attribution. Instead of choosing a model before you start reporting, you can use Einstein Attribution to analyze historical campaigns and find emerging patterns. Einstein allocates conversion credit to multiple campaigns, so you can see which campaigns are most effective at generating pipeline.
Set Up Einstein Attribution: Einstein Attribution relies on Connected Campaigns and Customizable Campaign Influence to work properly. It can take some time to configure and map your connected campaigns, so make sure that’s complete before you enable Einstein Attribution.
How Behavior Scoring Works: Einstein Behavior Scoring uses machine learning to uncover the most influential behavior signals across past and current prospect engagement. For each prospect, Einstein considers all types of prospect engagement activities, and identifies positive and negative interactions. An evolving Einstein scoring model weights each activity and assigns a score from 0 through 100.
Einstein Behavior Scoring: Einstein Behavior Scoring identifies prospects whose behavior suggests that they’re ready to buy, and scores them based on Einstein’s engagement model. After you turn on the feature in Marketing Setup, decide where to show scoring data. To get a picture of how Einstein creates your scoring model, set up B2B Marketing Analytics and include the optional Einstein Behavior Scoring dashboard.
The Einstein Behavior Scoring Dashboard: A dashboard is available to show how each type of engagement activity impacts your Einstein Behavior Scoring model. This optional dashboard can be turned on during setup for the B2B Marketing Analytics app. After you add Behavior Scoring components to your pages, head over to Analytics Studio to add the dashboard and see how Einstein calculates the scores.
Enable Einstein Behavior Scoring: To add behavior scores to lead and contact pages and list views in Salesforce, first enable Einstein Behavior Scoring for Account Engagement.
Einstein Campaign Insights: Add Einstein Campaign Insights to your Lightning pages to learn what factors drive campaign performance. Einstein’s intelligence can help you optimize campaign assets and find new audiences. Turn on the feature in Marketing Setup and add the Einstein Insights component to your Lightning pages.
How Einstein Campaign Insights Works: Einstein Campaign Insights uses Einstein machine learning to find data related to engagement activity, content, and audience characteristics to provide real-time insights about your running campaigns. Insights are updated up to every four hours, or when a new insight is detected.
Einstein Engagement Frequency: Use Einstein to better understand the volume of email your prospects prefer to receive. Einstein Engagement Frequency scans each prospect’s engagement behaviors to predict if they receive too many emails, too few emails, or just the right amount.
Enable Einstein Campaign Insights: To make Einstein Campaign Insights visible in Salesforce, first enable the feature in Marketing Setup.
Turn On Einstein Engagement Frequency: To start using Einstein Engagement Frequency for Account Engagement (EEF), an admin must enable it in Marketing Setup. The model training period can take up to 72 hours.
How Einstein Engagement Frequency Works: Einstein Engagement Frequency (EEF) considers a prospect’s email engagement data from the past 90 days. The model then focuses on the past 28 days of engagement data to create a status: undersaturated, on target, or saturated.
Einstein Engagement Frequency for Account Engagement: Einstein Engagement Frequency (EEF) scans individual customer engagement behaviors to predict the optimal send frequency for marketing emails. The frequency status is stored in a prospect field, which you can use to filter prospect lists or to create rules in Engagement Studio.
Use Einstein Engagement Frequency: You can filter prospects by using the Einstein Engagement Frequency (EEF) status in segmentation rules, automation rules, and Engagement Studio. The field is saved as an Account Engagement default field.
Einstein Key Accounts Identification for Account Engagement: Einstein’s AI helps you identify candidates for your account-based marketing efforts. It creates a scoring model based on your previous opportunity creation data and provides a tier ranking for individual accounts. You can use the account tier to target ideal prospects in engagement programs, automation rules, and dynamic lists. In addition, account attributes and engagement metrics are included as insights to help you focus your plans.
Create an Account Tier Field in Account Engagement: Users can filter automation rules by Einstein Key Accounts Identification account tier. To show the account tier field when users are creating rules, an admin must first map the field in Account Engagement as a custom field.
How It Works: Einstein Key Accounts Identification handles the selection phase of your account-based marketing efforts by offering two values: a tier ranking and key factors.
Set Up Einstein Key Accounts Identification: Turn on Einstein Key Accounts Identification in Marketing Setup, and tell users that they can add the Einstein Account Tier field to their list views or custom reports.
Use the Account Tier Field in Automations: After an admin sets up the account tier field to work with Account Engagement automations, you can use it as a filter for automation rules, dynamic lists, and in Engagement Studio.
Einstein Account Engagement: Scoring and Insights: Use Einstein artificial intelligence to prioritize work and generate data-driven attribution data for your sales and marketing teams. Einstein features analyzes data from Account Engagement and Salesforce to show straightforward scores and insights on your most engaged prospects and effective campaigns.
Send an Einstein Optimized Email: When you choose Einstein Optimized sending, select a time frame for sending emails. During that period, Einstein’s model evaluates the best time to send for each prospect and handles each delivery for you.
How Einstein Send Time Optimization Works: Einstein evaluates historical email engagement data to recommend an optimal send time for the individual prospects on your lists.
Optimize Send Times with Einstein: When you’re ready to send a list email, boost prospect engagement with the power of AI. Einstein evaluates historical email engagement data in Account Engagement to recommend an optimal send time for the individual prospects on your lists.
Einstein Send Time Optimization: Use the power of AI to optimize your list email sends. Einstein evaluates historical email engagement data from Account Engagement to recommend an optimal send time for the individual prospects on your lists.
Find Optimized Email Reports: After you schedule an Einstein Optimized email, you can open its email report from the success message at the top of the screen. When you dismiss the message, you can access the report from the Account Engagement Email tab. After the email starts its sending period, the report appears in the Account Engagement Reports tab.
How Email Address Changes Sync: When you change a contact or lead email address in Salesforce, it can sync the new address to the corresponding prospect record in Account Engagement. This functionality is useful if your sales team updates email addresses manually or via a data append service, or if you merge lead records.
Implement DKIM Authentication for Account Engagement Email: To improve your email deliverability, set up DomainKeys Identified Mail (DKIM) as an additional form of email authentication. Work with your IT team to implement DKIM for each domain that you want to send emails from in Account Engagement.
Reset Bounces on a Prospect Record: When a receiving email server can’t deliver a message, the message is bounced back to Account Engagement. Depending on the reason, the returned email is recorded as either a hard or soft bounce. A prospect can have one hard bounce or up to five soft bounces before their mailability status becomes Undeliverable. After you resolve a bounce issue, you can reset the bounce count on a prospect’s record.
Navigating the Classic Builder: The classic email builder in Account Engagement is divided into three tabs: Building, Testing, and Sending. When you open an email or email template, you’re on the Building tab where you can compose and edit your email content. The Building tab works the same whether you’re editing a one-off email or a reusable email template.
Change Your Sending IP Type: Account Engagement Advanced and Premium editions come with a dedicated sending IP. If you send more than 250,000 emails per month, you’re required to use a dedicated sending IP. You can change the IP type in your business unit settings.
Use a Dedicated Sending IP Address: A dedicated sending IP address gives you full control of your email sending, so you’re fully responsible for the reputation of your own IP address.
Other Email Settings: You have several settings options for the emails you send from Account Engagement. Select email recipient lists, control unsubscribe settings, and choose email tracking options.
Classic Email for Account Engagement: Email is a key part of any marketing strategy, so it’s important to get the most out of your efforts. Account Engagement offers two email experiences: enhanced and classic. For the latest features, use the enhanced email experience, which is built on the Salesforce platform. If you’re not ready to move to the enhanced email experience, the classic email experience provides all the basic tools to test, send, and track emails.
Emailing Prospects with Account Engagement: The email tools in Account Engagement give you the power to manage your sending reputation, ensure high email deliverability, and connect to your customers through email.
Metrics Guard for Account Engagement: Metrics Guard for Account Engagement is built-in protection for your email activity data. This feature works behind the scenes to filter out most email security scanner clicks and opens without blocking legitimate visitor activity.
Permission Passes: A permission pass is a one-time email you send to prospects on an out-of-date list. Recipients who click an opt-in link are added back to your list. You can use a permission pass one time per list. Never use a permission pass on a purchased list.
Use Custom Redirects for a Permission Pass: You can create a landing page for permission pass recipients and set up a redirect that tracks when your prospects visit. Then use an automation rule to clean your list.
Use Forms for a Permission Pass: Set up a custom opt-in field for a new form that you share with prospects. Send an email with a link to the form, and then run an automation rule to remove prospects who don’t opt in.
Email Sending Reputation and Deliverability: Email sending reputation and deliverability are important for Account Engagement and our customers. Deliverability describes how likely it is that your message is delivered to a recipient’s inbox. Email sending reputation describes how respected your IP address is by a receiving email server. A good email sending reputation helps ensure the best possible deliverability rates.
Sender and Reply-To Options: You can configure a sender and a custom reply-to address for your classic email in Account Engagement. The sender is the name and email address that appears in a prospect’s inbox. Optionally, you can specify a different email address to receive replies from your prospects. If you don’t specify a reply-to email address, Account Engagement uses the sender email address.
Identify and Suppress Unengaged Prospects: Keep your deliverability high by practicing good list management and not emailing unengaged prospects. Use a dynamic list to suppress an unengaged prospect from receiving marketing emails.
Reuse Email Designs with Account Engagement Templates: To save time and standardize your marketing content, create email templates for the types of emails that you send most often in Account Engagement. A template is a starting point for a list email that your team can use repeatedly. Using a template also reduces the chance that you forget something important, like a piece of branding or standard contact information.
A/B Testing for Classic Emails: Send two different versions of your email to a small subset of your recipient list. Then use engagement data to choose a winning version and send that version to the remainder of your list.
Enable A/B Testing for an Email: You can enable A/B testing for any Account Engagement classic email. After A/B testing is enabled, you can switch between the two versions to edit your content. A/B testing begins only after you schedule or send your email.
Disable A/B Testing for an Email: If you haven’t started an A/B test, you can disable testing for the email and choose which version to keep as the draft.
Add a Custom Email Preference Center to an Email: You can create custom email preference center pages to let your subscribers manage which email lists they subscribe to. To use custom email preference center pages in your emails, add a variable tag for the page.
Allowed Characters in Email Addresses: Account Engagement complies with the RFC’s 2822 standard for email address verification for both prospect and user email addresses. Addresses with non-UTF8 characters, such as Japanese or Russian characters, can’t be validated.
Reschedule a List Email: You can change the scheduled send date on list emails before they’re sent.
Handling Email Replies: When sending an email, you can designate a sender and a Reply To email address. Selecting a Reply To address affects where replies to emails are sent.
Include Files in Emails: You can’t send files as attachments to your emails, but you can include them as links. Add a download link to your email content for files that you host in Account Engagement.
Email Link Tracking: Account Engagement uses your tracker subdomains to rewrite and uniquely track link clicks in emails. Some links aren't rewritten, based on where they come from or how they're formatted, and can’t be tracked.
Tracking Email Engagement: You can track email engagement based on several different metrics, including email opens and link clicks. If you choose to track all email opens, Account Engagement inserts an invisible, single-pixel image into each HTML email. When a recipient opens the email, the image loads, and it’s counted as an HTML open.
Personalize Email Subject Lines: Personalize email subjects with variable tags and dynamic content. You can also use emoji in your subject lines.
Considerations for Using Email Preference Pages: The email preference center is a central location for your prospects to tell you what they want from your email marketing. Keep these considerations in mind when you share a link to the email preference center.
Email Preference Pages: Prospects can use an email preference center page to manage the public lists that they’re subscribed to. An email preference page is provided by default or you can create custom pages.
When Prospects Can Receive an Email Template More Than One Time: Most of the time, it’s possible for a prospect to receive the same email template more than one time. There are a few scenarios in which we prevent prospects from receiving the same email template again.
Manage Email Unsubscribe Settings: Your business unit includes a customizable email unsubscribe page. You can control the settings, messages, and buttons that recipients see when they unsubscribe.
End an Editing Session: Admins can end an open editing session to unlock an engagement program, email, or template.
Engagement and Activity Report Metrics: The Engagement and Activity report shows how your recipients engage with your email. The data is collected in aggregate and available to you as percentages based on total email opens.
Comparison of Engagement History Features: Engagement History is a generic term for a collection of fields, related lists, and other Lightning components that make it possible to show valuable prospect engagement data on your most used records.
Using Engagement History Metrics Lightning Component: Add the Engagement History Metrics Lightning component to your campaign records to show high-level metrics associated with the marketing assets in your connected campaigns.
Add the Engagement History Custom Lightning Component: Add the Engagement History Custom Lightning component to your lead, contact, and person account records to show how people interact with your marketing assets. This component comes with your Account Engagement AppExchange package.
Report on Engagement History Data: Engagement History gives you access to prospect engagement data in Salesforce. To better understand this data, create a custom report that contains engagement metrics alongside campaign and opportunity data. We recommend five common custom report types for reporting on marketing assets.
Engagement History Dashboard Differences: The Engagement History Dashboard is available on a few types of records, and shows slightly different information based on where it’s placed.
Turn On Engagement History Dashboards: Start exploring Account Engagement marketing data on your Salesforce campaign, account, lead, contact, and person account records. Use Marketing Setup to turn on the feature and assign permissions. Then, embed a dashboard by adding the Engagement History Dashboard component to Lightning pages.
Engagement History Dashboards: An Engagement History Dashboard is powered by CRM Analytics and gives sales and marketing users the power to explore and visualize important data. Embed an Engagement History Dashboard component on campaign, account, lead, contact, person account, or opportunity records. The dashboard shows widgets that are tailored to each type of record.
Track Prospect Engagement in Salesforce: Your campaigns track valuable engagement data that can tell you how well your marketing assets resonate with your customer base. When you bring all of the activity types and metrics in one place, you have a collection of features called Engagement History. Decide what Account Engagement data is most valuable to you and your users, and surface it throughout Salesforce.
Using the Engagement History Related List: The Engagement History related list includes an activity feed of recent prospect engagement. It appears by default on most of your marketing asset records, but you can also add it to your list email, lead, contact, account, or person account records.
Use Engagement History Metrics Related Lists: Add the Engagement History Metrics related list to your campaign records to find the relationships that grow among campaigns, prospects, and assets.
Use the Metrics Fields Component: Add Engagement History metrics as fields on connected campaigns and asset records. You can also build a custom report based on the Campaign object. These tools can help you determine which marketing assets are most effective.
Configure Engagement History Features: Engagement History features display marketing engagement data on connected Salesforce records. After you configure Connected Campaigns in Account Engagement, you can add Engagement History components. You can decide which components to include and customize your records in Marketing Setup.
Engagement Program Actions: In an engagement program, action steps do something to prospects, such as sending them an email or changing a field value.
Engagement Program Reporting: To gauge how well your engagement program nurtures your prospects, review program metrics in the Report tab of a running or paused program. Tools are available in the toolbar, the canvas, and on individual cards.
Engagement Program Rules: In an engagement program, rule steps define criteria-based paths for prospects. A single rule step can evaluate up to five conditions.
Engagement Program Suppression List Example: Occasionally, a prospect is on several lists that you use to feed engagement programs. To make sure that the prospect receives only the most important emails, use suppression lists to keep them from going through lower-priority programs.
Engagement Program Triggers: In an engagement program, use trigger steps to define paths based on prospect actions.
Add Steps to an Engagement Program: After you create an engagement program, add steps and branching paths. For best performance, add up to 300 steps.
Build Engagement Studio Programs: Before you begin working with programs in Engagement Studio, review our content on how Engagement Studio works and come up with a plan for your engagement programs. You can pause and edit running programs at any time to adjust your steps or program settings.
How Engagement Studio Works: Engagement Studio programs consist of conditional steps that define the prospect journey. You choose which recipient lists you want to use for a program, build your program according to your marketing plan, and then let Engagement Studio do the heavy lifting for you. Engagement programs can be paused or edited at any time.
Engagement Studio Overview: Engagement Studio is a robust lead nurturing tool in Account Engagement, which you can adapt to your needs. Here’s an overview of how engagement programs work and how to work with them.
Nurture Leads with Engagement Studio: Engagement Studio programs are completely customizable so you can tailor the prospect experience to generate the most promising leads for your sales team. Build, test, and report on powerful engagement programs that let you target prospects based on behavior and critical qualifying values. Provide a personalized experience for your prospects, and turn them into marketing-qualified leads.
Let Prospects Repeat Engagement Programs: Remind prospects of recurring events, renewals, and other activities with repeating engagement programs. Allowing prospects to enter a program more than one time simplifies your workflow and saves you the time of rebuilding duplicate programs.
Engagement Program Steps: Engagement programs are made up of steps that serve different purposes. There are three basic types of steps: trigger steps, rule steps, and action steps.
Automation Rules for Enterprise Customers: With automation rules in Account Engagement, you can create repeatable, criteria-based rules that find matching prospects and apply actions to them. If you have millions of prospects in your database, use these tips to ensure the best performance.
Dynamic Lists for Enterprise Customers: Dynamic lists in Account Engagement automatically add or remove prospects based on the criteria that you set up. If you have millions of prospects in your database, use these tips to ensure the best performance.
Email Marketing for Enterprise Customers: The powerful email sending tools in Account Engagement help you connect you with your prospects. If you have millions of prospects in your database, use these tips to ensure the best performance.
Salesforce Connector for Enterprise Customers: Connect Account Engagement with Salesforce to sync information between prospects, contacts, leads, and other objects. If you have millions of prospects in your database, use these tips to ensure the best performance.
Export Prospects: Export prospects in CSV format to perform a bulk update, fix sync errors, or use prospect data for external reporting.
Automate Data Sharing with Third-Party Apps: If you use multiple platforms to engage with prospects, connect them to Account Engagement to simplify data sharing and workflows. For each external app that you use, create a marketing app extension in Marketing Setup in Salesforce. You can then take advantage of External Activity and External Actions to supercharge your automations. External Activity captures prospect activity that occurs outside Account Engagement. Use External Actions to automate actions in third-party apps.
How Marketing App Extensions Work: A marketing app extension represents a third-party app that you use with prospects. You can add activity types or action types to an extension to capture external prospect activity or make external actions available to use in Engagement Studio programs.
Add an External Action to a Marketing App Extension: To execute a task externally, add an action type and an invocable action to your marketing app extension. Standard invocable actions are available in Marketing Setup. You can also install an action from AppExchange or work with your developer to create one.
External Actions: Next Steps: After you have a marketing app extension, a business unit assignment, and an action type, work with a developer to customize the action for Engagement Studio. Control which inputs are required when the action is added as a step in an Engagement Studio program. You can also use HML merge fields to automatically populate certain fields when the action executes.
Execute External Actions on Prospects: Use External Actions with Engagement Studio programs to execute tasks outside of Account Engagement. For example, register a prospect for a webinar or create a new lead in Salesforce.
Supported Standard Invocable Actions: Invocable actions are the foundation for external actions. An invocable action is a call that adds functionality to an application. You can work with a developer to create a custom action, or choose from the standard supported actions available in Marketing Setup when you create an action type.
Assign a Marketing App Extension to a Business Unit: To flow data through a marketing app extension, associate it with a business unit and at least one activity or action type. Create an assignment for each business unit that you want to have access to the external activity data.
Create a Marketing App Extension: A marketing app extension represents a third-party app that you use to work with prospects outside of Account Engagement. We recommend setting up a marketing app extension for each third-party app that you use to interact with prospects and store data. For example, if you have a webinar provider, a video platform, and you send out surveys, set up an extension for each vendor.
External Activities: Next Steps: After you set up a marketing app extension, assign it to a business unit, and add an activity type, it’s time to complete the integration. We recommend working with your developer to connect the activity types that you created to your third-party app or integration service.
Capture External Prospect Activity: Use external activities to capture important prospect activity that happens outside of Account Engagement. Use the prospect data to enhance your automations and Engagement Studio programs. For example, send an email when a prospect registers for a webinar.
Prospect Field Types: The field type defines the kind of data a field captures. Several field types are available in Account Engagement.
Create Custom Prospect Fields: When the default fields in Account Engagement don’t capture the prospect data you need, create your own custom fields. You can map and sync your custom fields with the CRM.
Default Prospect Field Character Limits: Default prospect fields use character limits, measured in bytes. Most simple letters use one byte each, but more complex pictographs use more bytes per character. As such, the number of characters doesn’t always match the number of bytes used, but can be a helpful guideline.
Edit Form Fields: Tailor prospect fields on individual forms. For example, customize a form’s field labels for a seasonal campaign, or change the values in a dropdown for a specific use.
Edit Global Field Settings: An Account Engagement admin can edit a field’s default settings. For example, you can change a field’s type from radio button to checkbox to set it as the default for all new forms.
Use Predefined Values in Custom Fields: Relabel values in custom fields and assign profiles, and add prospects to lists based on the value prospects choose.
Single Form Handler Metrics: View a single form handler’s report to get detailed information about its performance.
Form Handlers: Form handlers are an alternative to hosted forms that you create in Account Engagement. You can use a form handler to integrate your third-party or custom forms and track submission data.
Integrate a Form Handler with a Form: After you’ve created a form handler, integrate it with an external form to track submissions in Account Engagement.
Capture Leads with Forms and Form Handlers: Account Engagement offers a few ways to collect visitor information and create identified prospects. Design and manage hosted forms using the Form Wizard. Or, funnel data from external forms into Account Engagement with a form handler. Enhance your customer’s journey by directing prospects to a form embedded on a custom landing page.
Add CSS Classes to Fields in Forms: You can add CSS classes to individual fields. Adding a class to a field lets you target that field with CSS.
Add a Honeypot Field to External Forms: A honeypot is a hidden field that is visible to bots but not humans. When a bot fills out a form, the bot sees the hidden field and fills it out. Account Engagement rejects submissions that contain a value in the honeypot field. You can add the honeypot field to your external forms that you have integrated with form handlers.
Bot Protection and Forms: Online forms are easy targets for bots and can fill your database with spam prospects. Choose from built-in and optional solutions for bot protection. You can turn on reCAPTCHA for marketing forms and landing pages to limit the number of spam submissions, but its protection doesn’t eliminate all spam.
Change Form Font Styles: You can change your form’s font by adding code to your layout template. If your form is on a landing page that you created in Account Engagement, add the code to the landing page’s layout template.
Form CSS Classes and Examples: When your form’s layout template has a <style> tag, you can customize your hosted form’s CSS by targeting the default style classes.
Customizing Forms: To create hosted forms in Account Engagement, use the form wizard. For more control over your form’s look and feel, use layout templates and customize your form code.
Set Up Dependent Form Fields: A dependent field appears based on a value entered in another field on the form. You can create a dependent field based on any text or dropdown field. For example, you can make the State field dependent on the Country field. When a prospect selects USA for the country, the form displays the State field.
Add a Form to Your Website: If you don’t want to use an Account Engagement landing page to host your marketing form, you can place a form on your website using an iframe.
Disable Activity Throttling for Form Handler Submissions: Although Account Engagement captures submitted data for each submission, visitor activities and autoresponder emails are throttled to prevent rapid submissions from spawning duplicate activities and emails. For example, if prospects submit a form handler again to correct their name, you don’t want them to receive the autoresponder email again. If you want to allow multiple activities and autoresponder emails, disable this behavior on a per-form-handler basis.
Form Field Options: Several configuration options are available when editing fields in a form.
Integrate Form Handlers with Web-to-Lead Forms: Use a form handler with an existing Salesforce Web-to-Lead form to track campaigns and sources in the micro-level web analytics available in Account Engagement. The integration posts form data to both Salesforce and Account Engagement almost simultaneously.
What Is Kiosk / Data Entry Mode?: Typically, a prospect’s form submissions are related to a prospect record via a unique browser cookie. However, sometimes you don’t want to cookie every visitor because it can cause one prospect’s information to be related to another prospect’s cookie. For example: you want to manually enter prospect data into a form from a signup sheet or have prospects fill out forms at a tradeshow booth.
Layout Template Form Code: The contents of the form tab is inserted into the %%content%% tag of your layout template.
Gather Prospect Data Over Time: Keep your forms short to drive a higher conversion rate by gathering more prospect information over time. Progressive profiling displays fields based on fields that a prospect completed on previous forms.
Prospect Fields: Account Engagement includes a set of standard prospect fields to gather information. You can also create custom fields to capture information tailored to your needs. You can configure fields globally and on a per-form basis.
Single Form Report Metrics: View a single form’s report to get detailed information about its performance. From the Forms Statistics table, click the name of the form that you want to view details for.
Form and Form Handler Reporting: Use form reports to gain insight into the total number of views, submissions, and conversions generated by a form or form handler.
What Is the Difference Between Form Submissions and Conversions?: A form submission takes place when a visitor or prospect completes a form and clicks submit. A conversion is a specific type of submission during which an anonymous visitor provides an email address and converts into a prospect.
Change Submit Button Image in Forms That Use Layout Templates: When you use a custom layout template with forms and landing pages, you can insert an image for the submit button. Add custom CSS to the layout template that’s associated with either the form or the landing page it’s embedded on.
Form Statistics Table Metrics: The Form Statistics table provides high-level statistics for the hosted forms you create in Account Engagement.
Testing Forms: To test a hosted form, open it in a browser and complete it like a prospect does. When you’re testing forms, keep these considerations in mind.
Hosted Forms Versus Form Handlers: Forms and form handlers are different. You design and manage hosted forms in Account Engagement. Form handlers connect your external forms so that you can funnel prospect information into Account Engagement. Review the features to determine which form type you want to use.
Google Ads Connector: Account Engagement connects with your Google Ads account to track prospects that reach you through paid search. You can tie cost data from Google Ads to opportunity data from Salesforce to determine your true cost per qualified lead and search engine marketing ROI.
Add the Google Ads Connector: Add the Google Ads connector to track prospects that reach your marketing assets via paid search. To add the connector, you need an Account Engagement admin and a Google Ads admin.
Change Individual Ads Campaigns: You can change the Account Engagement campaign that prospects are tagged with for individual Google Ads campaigns.
Change the Default Google Ads Campaign: Prospects that come to your site for the first time through a Google ad are tagged with the Google Ads campaign in Account Engagement. After the initial Google Ads campaign sync, an admin can change this default campaign in your business unit settings.
Considerations for Using Google Ads: With the Google Ads connector, you can track prospects via paid search. Before using the Google Ads connector with Account Engagement, keep these considerations in mind.
Tracking Google Ads Conversions: To track prospect conversions, you can add your Google Ads conversion code to hosted marketing forms. To track Google Ads conversions, add your conversion code to the Thank You Code area of the hosted form. If your form redirects to a separate Thank You Page, place your Google Ads conversion code on the Thank You Page that you redirect to.
Set Up Tracking for Google Ads: To track Google Ads in Account Engagement, add a Final URL Suffix to each ad. It’s up to you on whether to place the suffix on your Google Ads account, ad groups, campaigns, individual ads, or keywords.
Google Analytics Connector: The Google Analytics connector pulls UTM parameters into Account Engagement, where they can then sync with Salesforce. Five Google Analytics tags are collected: campaign name, medium, source, content, and term. This connector simplifies the flow of Google Analytics data between Account Engagement and Salesforce.
Handlebars Merge Fields in Account Engagement: Handlebars Merge Language (HML) offers fields that represent business unit information, user information, and data from prospect records. To further personalize your content, create merge fields for any custom prospect or prospect account field not set to record multiple responses.
Personalize Content with Handlebars Merge Fields: Customers are more likely to engage with your messaging when it’s personalized. Use Handlebars merge fields to personalize content you create in Account Engagement with information from your prospect records. You can also insert information about your company, like your business address, and create defaults to use when prospect records don’t contain certain values.
Use HML Conditional Merge Fields: You can use Handlebars merge fields to create simple conditional logic statements in your Account Engagement content. These statements render default content when prospect records don’t contain a value for certain fields.
How Wait Periods Work in Engagement Programs: When you add or edit a program step, you can choose to hold prospects for a specific period before moving them to the next step. How wait periods function in a program depends on whether the step is a trigger, action, or rule.
How a Prospect’s Source Field Is Populated: The value in a prospect’s source field is determined by the referring URL. The referring URL is the page the visitor was on before they visited a page with tracking code for the first time. Account Engagement pulls in source data when the referring URL is present and matches up with the expected website for a given vendor.
Implement Tracking Code for Third-Party Cookies: If you still use third-party tracking, you can copy the code and place it on your web pages. Use tracking code only on high-value web pages like a product listing or landing page.
Create Layout Templates for Landing Pages: Create a layout template to format landing pages, forms, and site search results in the classic landing page experience. Layout templates don’t support server-side scripting languages.
Test Landing Page Versions: Multivariate tests let you compare the effectiveness of different landing pages over a time and determine the top performer. You can test classic and builder landing pages.
Draw in Visitors with Account Engagement Landing Pages: A landing page is a web page that a visitor reaches after clicking a link or advertisement. This page generally displays content that is specific to the advertisement, search keyword, or link clicked. Landing page visitors can be more likely to convert when you present them with relevant, actionable content.
Tracking Most Recent Prospect Activity: The Last Activity field shows the date and time a prospect last interacted with your marketing assets. The field updates when a prospect takes an action, such as clicking a link or submitting a form. Most prospect activity updates the Last Activity field, but there are some exceptions. The field doesn’t update if the activity is the initiated by an Account Engagement user, such as sending an email.
Create Layout Templates for Forms: Layout templates are used to format landing pages, forms, and site search results. Layout templates do not support server-side scripting languages.
Grading Prospects: Prospects are graded based on profiles. Profiles use criteria that you choose to determine how good of a fit the prospect is for your company. The more criteria that a prospect matches, the better the grade.
Using Profiles to Grade Prospects: Profiles are used to grade your prospects based on your ideal customer. Set criteria, such as location, company size, job title, and other factors, and use the information to tier your prospects. Using profiles to grade prospects has two stages: assigning the profile and then matching the criteria.
Qualifying Leads with Account Engagement: Qualify your leads with scoring and grading tools. Scoring is based on what a prospect does, and grading is based on who a prospect is. Together, they help you determine when a lead is a good fit and sales-ready. Go even further with Einstein Behavior Scoring and Einstein Campaign Insights to identify prospects who are ready to buy and learn which factors drive campaign performance.
Scoring Prospects: When a visitor converts to a prospect, the prospect is given a score. Prospect scores changes over time as they interact with your marketing assets. Use scoring to measure a prospect’s intent and interest.
Default Scoring System: Prospects are scored when they convert, and their scores change based on their behavior. Account Engagement provides a scoring system that you can customize.
Scoring Categories: Use scoring categories to score prospects on more than one product or business unit. Assign a scoring category to a folder. When prospects interact with assets in that folder, Account Engagement creates a separate prospect score for the category.
Add a Scoring Category: Add a scoring category for each product you want to score prospects for.
Customize Scoring Rules: The default scoring rules that come with Account Engagement are editable. Modify the rules to suit your business needs, based on your company’s definition of what a marketing qualified lead looks like.
Account Engagement in Lightning Experience: With the Account Engagement Lightning app, sales and marketing can operate side by side on a single platform rather than work in separate applications.
What Salesforce Data Is Available in Account Engagement?: Account Engagement and Salesforce have different authorization and sharing models. Data is shared through the Salesforce connector via the connector user, so Account Engagement can show any data that the connector user has access to. Because of how the systems connect, you can assume that Account Engagement users have at least as much access to Salesforce data as the connector user.
List Email Report: The List Email report breaks down the most important data about your sent emails. It includes the number of emails sent, unique clicks, unique click rate, total clicks, and total click rate.
List Email Report Metrics: The List Email report breaks down important data for your sent emails, including the number of emails sent, unique clicks, unique click rate, total clicks, and total click rate.
Set Up the Enhanced Landing Page Experience: The enhanced landing page experience is automatically enabled at the same time as the enhanced email experience. If you’ve already set up one of these features in Account Engagement, no other setup is needed.
Create an Enhanced Landing Page: When you create an enhanced landing page, you associate it with a campaign and then edit the content. Drag in templates from the Layout section to quickly insert rows and columns. Then you can add these component types: Image, Pardot Form, Rich Text, Button, and HTML.
Edit an Enhanced Landing Page: You can edit a published landing page at any time. Two parts of a landing page are editable: record details and content.
Enhanced Landing Page Record Fields: Enhanced landing pages in Account Engagement include a variety of fields that contain content, redirect instructions, and other helpful information. Sections include Information, Engagement Metrics, Publication Information, System Information, and Content and Settings tabs.
Enhanced Landing Page Experience: As of Winter ’22, Account Engagement Lightning App users can choose which experience to use when creating landing pages. The enhanced landing page experience uses a drag-and-drop editor and can be accessed from Account Engagement Lightning App only. It’s built on Salesforce, and supports list views, actions, reporting, and other functionality that comes with Salesforce Lightning Experience.
Publish an Enhanced Landing Page: When you finish designing an enhanced landing page, you can publish it to the web. Before publishing, add settings such as vanity URL, unpublish redirect URL, and search engine indexing on the landing page record.
Style Account Engagement Forms on Enhanced Landing Pages: You can adjust the colors, fonts, and other styles of an Account Engagement form in the editing panel of the enhanced landing page builder. The styles that you add here apply to the landing page only and don’t overwrite the form record’s original styles.
Using Form Styles with Enhanced Landing Pages: You can customize styles on the form component in enhanced landing pages. Make sure that you’re familiar with the relationship between Account Engagement form records and enhanced landing pages before you get started.
Use Custom Code with Enhanced Landing Pages: To further customize landing pages, you can add custom code, including script, style, comment, noscript, and link tags to the header and footer code. You can also copy, edit, or remove code at any time. The header and footer code blocks are available on the Settings tab of an enhanced landing page record.
Manually Change a Prospect’s Opt-In Status: If a prospect asks to be opted in or out of receiving marketing emails, you can complete their request manually. When a prospect syncs with Salesforce, Account Engagement records the opt-in status from the most recently updated record.
Manage Prospect Mailability: You can view and edit a prospect’s mailability status on their prospect record in Account Engagement. If a prospect asks to be opted in or out, you must complete their request manually. You can also use the Do Not Email field to suppress prospects from marketing emails.
HML Merge Field Modifiers in Account Engagement: The merge field values you embed in your content can vary in format and use. Modifiers are strings added to merge fields that tell the system how to format the output. Handlebars Merge Language (HML) supports modifiers that protect sensitive information and keeps your embedded data clean for people to read.
Merge Prospects: Duplicate prospects sometimes end up in your database. You can merge up to three prospects at once and select one to be the primary. When merged, the activities of the merged prospects are aggregated, and Account Engagement recalculates the primary prospect’s score. Non-primary prospects are permanently deleted and don’t go to the recycle bin.
Monthly Cohort Graph: The Monthly Cohort graph gives you a visual overview of how many prospects and opportunities were created in a date range.
Enable Operational Email Sending: When you send critical notifications and other operational messages, you want to reach all your customers—not just people who have opted in to receive marketing email from you. Turn on operational email sending to bypass opt-in status for certain types of messages.
Sending Non-Marketing Emails: Prospects with a mailability status of Operational Emails Only aren’t eligible to receive marketing emails from Account Engagement. However, if an admin enables operational email sending, these prospects can still receive emails that are considered critical, such as order confirmations or legal notifications. Operational emails can be sent as list emails and through Engagement Studio. They can’t be sent using automation rules.
Use Custom Opportunity Fields in Automations: You can use custom opportunity fields in automation and segmentation rules. The prospect opportunity rule criteria uses relation group functionality that lets users define multiple rules. When used with the Match All rule type, the opportunity must match all criteria for that prospect to be considered a match.
Opportunity Syncing with Salesforce: A Salesforce opportunity tracks pending or actual revenue from a sale. After you set up the Salesforce connector, your Salesforce opportunities become available in Account Engagement for ROI reporting. This feature is available as part of the connector, and doesn’t have to be enabled.
Prospects with Paused Activity Tracking: When a prospect is paused due to bot-like activity, an icon appears next to their name on the prospect table, and an error appears on their prospect record. Paused prospects aren't eligible for automations, including dynamic lists.
Create Custom Account Fields: When a default field doesn’t capture the prospect account data you need, an admin can create custom fields in Account Engagement. Then, map and sync custom fields with Salesforce account fields.
Prospect Accounts: A prospect account groups prospects that work for the same company under the same umbrella, keeping all the information about the company in one place. Use prospect accounts to reduce duplication and keep information consistent across prospect records. If you use Salesforce, this account information syncs from Salesforce to Account Engagement.
Prospect Actions: In Account Engagement, actions are applied to prospects in various ways. Not all actions are available in every type of asset. Automation rules, completion actions, engagement programs, and segmentation rules have different available actions.
Assigning Prospects: Assign a prospect to an Account Engagement user to give the user ownership of the record and sync it to Salesforce. You can manually assign a prospect or use automation rules and completion actions to assign a prospect to the appropriate rep based on activity and information.
Assignment Actions: Use actions to assign a prospect to a user, group, queue, or active assignment rule. However, assignment actions don’t reassign prospects who have an owner. You can use assignment actions with manual assignments, automation rules, and completion actions.
Prospect Audits: Each prospect record includes an audit table that displays details about changes to the record.
Prospect Import Field Validation: Validating prospect field values during import helps you keep your data clean and consistent. An Account Engagement admin can validate prospect default and custom fields that use predefined values. When a field is set to validate, a value updates on import only when it matches a predefined value.
Prospect Field Global Settings: Admins can control the default behavior of default and custom prospect fields in Account Engagement.
Prospect Field Sync Behavior: For most fields, admins can set sync behavior to control whether a field can be updated in Account Engagement, Salesforce or both.
Prospect Import Errors: When your prospect import has errors, the import confirmation email includes a link to the import error CSV. Prospects with errors aren’t imported or updated, so use this report to fix errors and then reimport the prospects.
Importing Prospects: You can import a CSV file of new prospects or perform a bulk update of existing prospects.
Prospect List Table Views: Marketing, administrator, and sales manager users can change the prospect table view to sort and filter prospects by category.
Prospect Mailability Status: To give you insight into which emails prospects can receive from Account Engagement, all prospect records include a mailability section. Prospect mailability depends on a few factors, including opt-in status and previous email bounces.
Enable Prospect Resubscribe: To add a prospect resubscribe prompt on all your forms in Account Engagement, customize the messaging in your business unit settings.
Considerations for Prospect Resubscribe: When a prospect resubscribes to receive emails, some record field settings change. Review these considerations before enabling prospects to resubscribe in Account Engagement.
Customize or Disable Resubscribe Messaging: After an admin enables automated prospect resubscribe for Account Engagement forms, marketing users can customize the messaging on each form. If resubscribe messaging isn’t needed for a particular form, the marketing user can disable it.
Help Prospects Resubscribe to Account Engagement Emails: Set up an automated prospect resubscribe prompt for your forms to let unsubscribed prospects opt back into receiving your marketing emails. After you enable Prospect Resubscribe and choose an email template, we ask unsubscribed prospects if they want to receive a resubscribe email when they fill out a form. An Account Engagement admin can customize the default resubscribe messaging globally, and a marketing user can control the messaging on individual forms. Prospect Resubscribe isn’t available for form handlers.
Suppress Individual Prospects: Use the Do Not Email field on prospect records to suppress individual prospects from receiving marketing emails. The Do Not Email field is an internal suppression tool, and selecting it doesn’t change a prospect’s opt-in status. Prospects marked Do Not Email can still receive operational emails.
Suppress Prospects from Receiving Emails: To avoid emailing prospects too often or sending irrelevant content, use one of the suppression tools available in Account Engagement. You can suppress many prospects at once with a static or dynamic suppression list or suppress them individually by editing the prospect record.
Syncing Prospects: When syncing prospects between Account Engagement and Salesforce, changes to prospect records are pushed to Salesforce, and information from Salesforce records is pulled into the corresponding fields on prospect records. Syncing occurs every 2–4 minutes.
Syncing Prerequisites for Accounts That Allow Multiple Prospects with the Same Email Address: Syncing a prospect to Salesforce requires a corresponding Salesforce record or the prospect must be assigned to a user in Account Engagement. If your business unit allows multiple prospects with the same email address, prospects sync to Salesforce records with matching CRM IDs (lead or contact ID).
Managing Visitors and Prospects: Account Engagement helps you acquire, qualify, and convert prospects into customers. Everything starts with an unidentified visitor. After visitor provides an email address, you have a prospect and you’re ready to go. Assign prospects to users and create opportunities to track the customer journey.
Assignment Actions for Salesforce: You can integrate prospect assignment with Salesforce with Account Engagement automation tools. Assign prospects to queues, or use active assignment rules.
Import Prospects: To create or mass update prospects in Account Engagement, upload a CSV file with prospect data.
Prospect Table Actions: Apply mass actions to the prospect table without having to use an automation rule. You can select the entire table or individual prospects.
Report on and Analyze Account Engagement Data: Built-in reports show how prospects interact with your marketing assets and connected apps. Go further with B2B Marketing Analytics and B2B Marketing Analytics Plus to explore performance relationships and sales outcomes.
Account Engagement Reporting: Account Engagement offers standard reports on marketing assets, connected apps, campaigns, and the prospect lifecycle.
A/B Testing Reports: A/B testing emails track the same metrics as regular list emails. The overview report shows email reporting metrics for both versions of the email. Each email version also has its own report.
Advanced Email Analytics Reports: This add-on package offers engagement and email client reporting, which enhance built-in email marketing testing and metrics.
Bulk API Export Table: The Bulk API Export table shows details about exports created with the Export API.
Heatmap Key: The Click-Through Rate (CTR) report uses a heatmap to explain what percentage of prospects clicked links in an email. In addition to showing the values for each link, the heatmap uses a color code to show click traffic at a glance.
Click-Through Rate Reports: A Click-Through Rate report shows link statistics visually. A heatmap of prospects’ clicks appears on top of your email design, so you know right away which content performed best. This report isn’t available for text-only emails.
Conversions Report Metrics: A Conversions report shows visitors who have converted to prospects, along with their score, conversion point, and source referrer information.
Customize the Email Statistics Table: The List Email Statistics table in Account Engagement reports provides a high-level view of your email marketing activities and how your prospects interact with them. Filter, sort, add or remove columns, and more.
Email Template Report Metrics: Each Email Template report includes metrics that help you understand which types of emails your prospects prefer. Email template metrics include activities from all list emails, automated emails, and 1:1 emails that are sent with that email template.
Email Template Reports: An Email Template report shows statistics about emails sent with a specific email template. The data includes the number of emails sent, unique clicks, unique click rate, total clicks, and total click rate.
Eventbrite Reports: If you have a verified Eventbrite connector, use the Events report to get valuable data about your events and prospects.
Export Email Statistics Data: You can download the List Email Statistics table data at any time. Choose whether to export the full table or a customized version.
Google Ads Report Metrics: If you use a Google Ads connector, the Paid Search report page shows metrics associated with your Google Ads keywords and search ads.
Landing Page Report Statistics: After your landing page form collects some data from visitors, review the Landing Page report for insights.
Landing Page Reports: Landing Page and Multivariate Test reports show how many people viewed a page and how many visitors submitted a form and converted to prospects.
Individual Prospect Lifecycle Report: Get insight into a prospect’s score at each stage of the lifecycle from the Lifecycle tab of a prospect’s record. This report shows how a particular prospect moved through the sales lifecycle and which prospect-initiated activities changed the prospect’s score.
Lifecycle Report Metrics: The Lifecycle report includes the Pipeline funnel, trends over time, and prospect velocity information.
Prospect Lifecycle Reporting: The Prospect Lifecycle report combines marketing and sales data to give you a high-level view of your sales cycle’s health. By reviewing the report, you can determine how well your marketing and sales teams are working together to qualify leads and close deals.
Email Statistics Data: The List Email Statistics table contains information about each sent email. You get in-depth email marketing metrics and details about your associated reports and campaigns.
List Email Statistics Table: The List Email Statistics table shows data from all your sent list emails. Customize or filter the table to show the information you want and hide what you don’t.
Multivariate Test Reports: A Multivariate Test report shows how each test version of a landing page performed and which one is the winner. The report includes the page URL, page name, views, and conversions.
Natural Search Report Metrics: Each keyword in the Natural Search report includes metrics that tell you how visitors, prospects, and opportunities found your content.
Natural Search Reports: Search keywords drive visitors to your site. See which search terms visitors, prospects, and opportunities use.
Olark Reporting: The Olark report shows details about prospects who have chatted in from pages with Account Engagement tracking code.
Paid Search Reports: Paid Search reports show metrics associated with your keywords and search ads. The table presents common keywords, how many people used them, and their potential and actual value.
Paid Search Report Metrics: Paid Search reports indicate who clicks your ad and how that reflects ad costs and return on investment.
Social Posts Reports: Find out how your social messages perform in the Reports section.
View the Click-Through Rate Report: After you send an email, look at the Click-Through Rate report to see which links your prospects clicked. Use this information to optimize content or link placement in other email sends.
View the Natural Search Report: Review the search terms your visitors, prospects, and opportunities use to find your content. Drill into a specific term to learn more about it.
Access Reports in Account Engagement: Some reports are specific to your Account Engagement content and connectors. If you use Account Engagement Lightning App with Salesforce, you also have access to the Salesforce reports that are based on Salesforce objects.
Email Bounce Report: The Email Bounce Report contains soft and hard bounced email addresses from all types of email sends from the past year. The at-a-glance KPIs at the top of the report reflect the unique emails sent and breakdowns of delivered vs. bounced emails, and hard vs. soft bounces.
Automation Open Rules Audit: Email service providers are making changes to increase privacy protections for their users. In part, these changes affect the accuracy of email open data. The Open Rules Audit page in Account Engagement identifies which of your automations rely on open data. Use this information as needed to move toward more reliable engagement metrics.
Opportunities Reporting: The Opportunities report includes opportunities that have synced from Salesforce or were manually created or imported. Statistics include the created date and time, value, probability percentage, stage, and status. Access the report at Reports > Opportunities.
Sales Emails and Alerts: The Sales Emails and Alerts feature helps marketing share content with sales reps. Sales reps can use marketing-approved email templates to contact prospects at the right moment and track the effectiveness of the messages in Salesforce.
Edit Email Limits and Options: In your Account Engagement settings for Sales Emails and Alerts, an admin can set a campaign send limit, exclude opted out prospects from emails, turn off tracking for Gmail, and set a default template to use with these campaigns. These settings apply to all Sales and Email Alerts users in your business unit.
Add Prospects to Lists from Records: You can add a prospect to a static list from the prospect’s record in Account Engagement and Salesforce. You can also add prospects to Engagement Studio programs from Salesforce.
Add Multiple Prospects to a List: You can add multiple prospects to a list from the prospect table in Account Engagement or from a list view in Salesforce.
Managing Prospect List Membership: After you’ve created a static list, you can manually add prospects to the list and remove them. You can also use automation and segmentation rules, completion actions, and imports to manage prospect list membership.
Archive a List: Archive lists to clean up the number of lists displayed in your Lists table. When a list is archived, you can’t add prospects or use it for list emails. Automations continue to work as expected.
Create a Static List: A list is a group of prospects that you can use to send list emails or to feed engagement programs. To add prospects to a static list, you can add them manually or use automations.
Create a Dynamic List: A rule-based dynamic list automatically adds prospects when they match the criteria and removes them when they don’t.
Delete a List: Deleting a list places it in the recycle bin. Deleting a list doesn’t delete the prospects on the list.
Dynamic List Rule Criteria: Dynamic list rules use filtering criteria to match prospects and add them to your list. The criteria are available in the Building step when you create a dynamic list.
Static and Dynamic Prospect Lists: A static list consists of prospects that you build one time and edit manually to make changes. A dynamic list is rule-based and automatically updates when a prospect’s data changes.
Segmentation: Use Account Engagement lists and tags to segment your prospects. Lists are groups of prospects for sending list emails or feeding to engagement programs. Use tags to sort, filter, and organize your prospects and marketing assets.
Create a Dynamic Suppression List: To prevent your customers from experiencing marketing fatigue, space out the timing of your emails with a suppression list. Create a dynamic list with a rule type that filters based on the recency and frequency of email sends.
Segmentation Rule Actions: Segmentation rules filter prospects by criteria and then apply a segmentation action to matching prospects. The actions are available in the first dropdown in the Actions section of your segmentation rule.
Segmentation Rule Criteria: Segmentation rules use criteria to filter matching prospects to apply actions. The criteria are available in the first dropdown in the Rules section of your segmentation rule.
Segmentation Rules: You can use segmentation rules to create a list of prospects and apply a segmentation action based on specific criteria. Unlike automation rules, segmentation rules don’t run continuously. Segmentation rules run once and match only the prospects that meet the rule’s criteria when the rule runs.
Create a Segmentation Rule: Create a segmentation rule to run a one-time segmentation action on prospects that meet your criteria.
Split a List: You can split a list into smaller lists. Prospects are divided randomly between the lists. If you split a dynamic list, the new lists are static lists.
Suppress Multiple Prospects with a Suppression List: A suppression list omits prospects from list emails or engagement programs. Use suppression lists to prioritize engagement programs, prevent emailing prospects content that isn’t relevant to them, and to avoid emailing prospects too often. You can use any non-test list as a suppression list. Designate the list as a suppression list when building an email or engagement program.
Organizing with Tags: You can create tags and apply them to assets and prospects from almost any table, record, or action. Use tags to filter data tables and asset lists, label prospects, and label assets for easier updating.
Delete Tags: Deleting a tag is permanent, and removes the tag from all assets and prospects.
Combine Tags: If you want to reorganize or consolidate your tags, you can merge tags in Account Engagement.
Send a List Email: A lot goes into getting a quality marketing email out the door. It takes time to build your content, preview and test your email, and configure your send settings. Refer to these high-level steps as you build and send a classic email in Account Engagement.
Send a One-to-One Email: You can send an email to a single prospect from the prospect record in Account Engagement. This feature is useful to test sending a one-to-one email. For communicating with leads and contacts, we recommend sending one-to-one emails in Salesforce rather than Account Engagement.
Setting Up the Salesforce Connector for Business Units Purchased Before February 11, 2019: The Salesforce connector syncs prospect and opportunity data between Account Engagement and Salesforce. Account Engagement can sync with Salesforce Professional Edition and higher. If you purchased Account Engagement before February 11, 2019, follow these steps to install and configure the Salesforce connector.
Transfer User Management to Salesforce: After your Salesforce admin has assigned users to Account Engagement, your Account Engagement admin can map Salesforce profiles to user roles in Account Engagement. Then, the Account Engagement admin transfers user management to Salesforce to create an Account Engagement profile for users assigned from Salesforce.
Using Account Engagement with Clickjack Protection: If your Salesforce org has clickjack protection enabled, the Account Engagement tab that’s installed with the Account Engagement AppExchange package is blank. To display the components in Salesforce, you can either disable clickjack protection or create a tab that is compatible with clickjack protection.
Considerations for Accounts That Allow Multiple Prospects with the Same Email Address: The most important aspect of the Salesforce sync is creating a one-to-one relationship between an Account Engagement prospect and a Salesforce lead, contact, or person account. The Salesforce connector uses CRM ID as the matching criteria for syncing in both directions in business units that allow multiple prospects with the same email address.
Data Skew and Account Engagement: When a record is associated with too many other records, it’s possible to experience issues from data skew. Data skew can cause many systemic problems, such as slow processing times, syncing issues, and interruptions to activity tracking.
Disable Clickjack Protection: When you disable clickjack protection, the Account Engagement tab displays normally, but disabling clickjack protection can make your Salesforce org less secure.
Account Engagement Integration User: The integration user is an automatically provisioned user that connects to Salesforce to sync data. After a Salesforce admin completes Account Engagement setup, the integration user allows the two systems to sync.
Map a Checkbox Field to a Salesforce Multi-Select Field: You can map a checkbox field from Account Engagement to a Salesforce picklist (multi-select) field. If you edit an existing Account Engagement custom field or manually enter the values, make sure that the values match exactly in both systems.
Automatically Merge and Delete Prospects: You can control how Account Engagement treats prospects when records are merged or deleted in Salesforce. Merging and deleting prospects operates differently in each system.
Managing Multiple Business Units: Whether your enterprise has marketing goals based on geography or product lines, help each division focus on their own unique marketing objectives using multiple Account Engagement business units. Prospects and marketing assets are partitioned by business unit, so your divisions can market independently and still get a global view with B2B Marketing Analytics.
Create the Send Account Engagement Email Button for Person Accounts: The Send Account Engagement Email button makes it easy to email prospects from Salesforce. Create the custom button, and then add it to account page layouts. Don’t add this button if your layout already has the Send Engage Email button.
Create a Person Account: If you don’t use leads in Salesforce, or if you want to sync prospects to person accounts instead of leads, set up a person account.
Add the Send to Account Engagement Button to Person Account Records: The Send to Account Engagement button makes it easy to sync person account records with Account Engagement prospects. After the custom button is created, add it to account page layouts in Salesforce.
Enable Person Account Syncing: To sync prospects to person accounts instead of leads, enable a setting on the Salesforce connector.
Run a Full Sync: Sync all your prospect records with Salesforce.
Create a Sandbox for Account Engagement: To test configuration updates, integrations, and other high-stakes changes before you implement them, create an Account Engagement sandbox.
Set Up the Account Engagement Sandbox-to-Production Flow: Copy changes and content from your Account Engagement sandbox to a production org with a preconfigured flow in Flow Builder. First, set up authentication between your sandbox org and the production org. Then, test the flow and add the flow component to record pages so that you can easily push changes to production.
Account Engagement Sandboxes: Test new features, integrations, and other high-stakes changes with an Account Engagement sandbox. Sandboxes are isolated test environments so you can make sure everything is working as expected before pushing changes to your production org.
Set Up Send as CRM User: You can send Account Engagement emails from any Salesforce user associated with a prospect record by creating a custom field.
Add the Salesforce Connector in Account Engagement (v1): Now that the app is installed and the connected user is configured, you’re ready to create and configure the connector itself. This process applies only to version 1 of the Salesforce connector.
Assign Object Permissions to the Connector User: Because of Salesforce security restrictions, an admin must manually configure your connector user’s permissions for Salesforce standard objects. These objects aren’t covered by the Pardot Connector User permission set. This step applies only to Account Engagement business units with Salesforce connector v1, or business units using Marketing Data Sharing.
Add Custom Buttons to Salesforce Page Layouts: You can add two custom actions to lead and contact pages: Send to Account Engagement and Send Account Engagement Email. To sync Salesforce leads or contacts with prospects in Account Engagement, use the Send to Account Engagement button. By using the Send Account Engagement Email button, Salesforce users who are assigned the Account Engagement permission set can send a tracked email from Salesforce.
Configure the Connector User: The connector user is a user that facilitates data syncing. These tasks apply only to business units that aren’t using the Pardot integration user.
Trigger the Initial Prospect Sync: After you’ve connected Salesforce and Account Engagement, import existing leads and contacts into Account Engagement. The connector doesn’t automatically create prospects from existing Salesforce leads and contacts. After import, Account Engagement syncs the prospect record with the existing Salesforce lead or contact record. Future updates to records in either system then sync automatically.
Adding Account Engagement Standard Actions to Salesforce: Add Account Engagement buttons and actions to Salesforce as standard actions in list views and on certain record pages. Quick action record buttons are only supported in production orgs, not in Salesforce sandboxes.
Map Custom Lead Fields to Contact Fields: Mapping fields in Salesforce ensures that the contact record pulls in all Account Engagement data from the lead record during conversion.
Map Salesforce and Account Engagement Usernames: If you have existing Account Engagement users, map them to their user record in Salesforce before you proceed with Salesforce User Sync. If users aren’t mapped, the system ignores those users and they don’t sync. For business units without User Sync, map users and then enable Salesforce Single Sign-on (SSO). Salesforce credentials are required to access Account Engagement.
Best Practices for the Salesforce Connector: Although not critical to a successful connector setup, these references and tasks can help you make the most out of your Salesforce connector implementation.
Assign the Connector User Permission Set: After the Account Engagement package is installed in your Salesforce org, you grant the connector user the Account Engagement Connector User permission set.
Step 1: Install the Salesforce Connector (v1): After you install the AppExchange package, make sure that your connector user has the appropriate permissions. Then create the connector in Account Engagement. This process applies only to version 1 of the Salesforce connector.
Marketing Data Sharing: Use Marketing Data Sharing to create rules for syncing a subset of leads, contacts, opportunities, and custom objects.
Show Account Engagement Data in Salesforce: The AppExchange application adds Account Engagement fields and Visualforce pages, but they’re not displayed automatically. To display them, add them to your Salesforce lead and contact page layouts.
Set Up Salesforce Single Sign-On for Account Engagement: If you don’t use Salesforce User Sync, manually enable Salesforce single sign-on (SSO) to allow users access to Account Engagement. SSO lets users log in to Account Engagement with their Salesforce credentials.
Choose a Sync Method: When the integration user is set as the connector user, the connector syncs all records for objects that sync between Account Engagement and Salesforce. If you want to sync a subset of records, use Marketing Data Sharing to select the records to sync. Use the included integration user, or configure your own connector user.
Test the Salesforce Connector: After you set up the Salesforce Connector, you can test it to make sure that it syncs properly.
Assign Salesforce Users to Account Engagement: From Marketing Setup in Salesforce, assign users to Account Engagement. You can assign users individually, or based on public group, role, or role and subordinates.
User Sync Basics: User Sync moves Account Engagement user access settings to Marketing Setup in Salesforce. Synced user records in Account Engagement are read-only and inherit information from Salesforce.
Manage Users with Salesforce User Sync: Salesforce User Sync is the simplest way to manage Account Engagement user access. This feature permanently transfers user management to Salesforce so that you can add or remove Account Engagement users from Salesforce Marketing Setup.
Update Profile and Role Mapping: Salesforce User Sync includes a Map Salesforce Profiles to Account Engagement Roles table on the User Sync tab Account Engagement Settings. An Account Engagement admin can use the table to remap these roles at any time.
Setting Up a Salesforce Connector for Business Units Purchased After February 11, 2019: For business units purchased after February 11, 2019, only a Salesforce admin can install and enable Account Engagement. To complete setup, the Salesforce admin appoints an Account Engagement admin who can configure Account Engagement. These admins can be different users. Review prerequisites before you begin.
Salesforce Connector v2 Setup: Connector setup is split into three main steps: install and enable Account Engagement, configure Salesforce, and then configure Account Engagement.
Step 1: Install the Package and Enable Account Engagement: To share prospect and opportunity data, a Salesforce admin can install the Account Engagement AppExchange package. If you purchased your business unit after February 11, 2019, enable the package from Salesforce.
Considerations for Upgrading to v2 of the Salesforce Connector: Version 2 of the Salesforce connector offers improvements, like on-demand metadata sync, Business Unit Switcher, and the integration user. Before you upgrade, familiarize yourself with the changes from v1 to v2.
Using Account Engagement with Salesforce: To streamline your sales and marketing efforts into one platform, connect Account Engagement with Salesforce. Bring data, assets, and actions together with tools like Engagement History, Sales Emails and Alerts (Salesforce Engage), and the Salesforce connector.
Step 3: Configure Account Engagement: An Account Engagement admin can map custom fields and users, test the connector, and perform an initial prospect sync.
Create or Connect Users: To learn how to connect your Account Engagement and Salesforce user records, see Connect Account Engagement and Salesforce Users.
Pause the Salesforce Connector v2: An Account Engagement admin can pause syncing to make configuration or data changes that could impact the data that syncs. Pausing the connector temporarily stops the flow of data until you resume syncing. It doesn’t make any permanent changes and doesn’t archive your business unit.
Configure and Unpause the Salesforce Connector (v2): Version 2 of the Salesforce connector is created in a paused state. An Account Engagement admin must configure the connector and unpause it to begin syncing data.
Add Send Engage Email Button: With campaigns in Sales Emails and Alerts (Engage Campaigns), users can send emails to leads, contacts, and campaign members. To use this feature, add the Send Engage Email button to your lead, contact, opportunity, and account search layouts and detail pages. You can also add the button to your campaign detail pages.
Use the Add to Nurture Action in Page Layouts: With the Add to Nurture action, Sales Emails and Alerts users can add leads and contacts to marketing lists from lead, contact, and person account records.
Install Engage Alerts Desktop: Engage Alerts Desktop lets users get real-time lead and contact activity notifications right from their desktop. It works exactly like Sales Emails and Alerts in browsers, with the benefit of pop-up notifications.
Sales Emails and Alerts: Alerts: Sales Emails and Alerts offers real-time services that inform you about prospect activity. Match prospects based on criteria, and display them in a card-based view. Some basic filters come predefined. However, you can create your own filters to display the most relevant prospects.
API Permissions for Sales Emails and Alerts: Sales Emails and Alerts requires some API permissions to function correctly. Assign a Salesforce Engage permission set and license to a user to grant these required permissions.
Campaigns in Sales Emails and Alerts: Campaigns in Sales Emails and Alerts (Engage Campaigns) help you send targeted emails to groups of leads and contacts, and then track engagement metrics from Salesforce.
Enable the Engage Sales Tools Page: The Engage Sales Tools Visualforce page gives users access to more resources for Sales Emails And Alerts.
Sales Emails and Alerts Filter Criteria: You can define your own criteria to get a targeted list of prospects in real time. The criteria is based on prospect attributes that you’re interested in, such as what kinds of marketing materials they have interacted with, or what territory they are in.
Engage for Outlook: Engage for Outlook lets Sales Emails and Alerts users work from their inbox and track opens and sends on emails sent through Outlook.
Reporting for Sales Emails and Alerts: Use reports to track how leads and contacts interact with the campaigns you create with Sales Emails and Alerts. Sales managers, marketers, and admins can report on team email usage and impact.
User Reports for Sales Emails and Alerts: Track how leads and contacts interact with the campaigns you create in Sales Emails and Alerts. Use reports to discover which emails and templates performed the best over time.
Team Reports Custom Object and Field Definitions: The Team Reports package for Sales Emails and Alerts includes several custom objects. Editing or deleting records related to these custom objects can break team reports. To customize a report, make a copy.
Team Reports for Sales Emails and Alerts: Sales managers, marketers, and admins can report on team usage and impact of Sales Emails and Alerts activity. View aggregated stats on emails that were sent via campaigns for Sales Emails and Alerts, Engage for Gmail, or Engage for Outlook. Drill in and compare stats for individual sales reps, and identify the top-performing templates by email opens and clicks.
Set Up Team Reports: Install and configure Team Reports for Sales Emails and Alerts to make them available to your users.
Set Template Options for Sales Emails and Alerts: An Account Engagement admin can control which email templates are available for Sales Emails and Alerts. You can allow classic email templates, Lightning email templates, or both. Classic email templates are allowed by default.
Enable Account Engagement in Salesforce: A Salesforce admin must enable new business units and appoint an Account Engagement admin. If you have multiple business units, appoint an Account Engagement admin to each unit.
Streamline Tasks with Marketing Cloud Account Engagement for Slack: Automatically notify teams about important prospect activity with the Marketing Cloud Account Engagement app for Slack. Install the Account Engagement app in your Slack workspace and set up the connector in your business unit. Then, the completion action to notify a Slack channel is available for marketing assets in Account Engagement.
Create and Manage Snippets: After you create a snippet, you can edit it at any time and the changes appear wherever it’s used. You can also change which campaign a snippet is assigned to. Use the merge field picker to choose and place the snippet you need in the marketing asset you’re working with.
Delete a Snippet: If you’re done with a snippet and know that you don’t need it anymore, you can delete the snippet record or just its assignment. Don’t forget to remove the snippet tag from any assets that use it.
Enable Snippets: Before you can use a snippet in an asset, prepare your Salesforce org for the feature and create some snippets. Make sure that the necessary users have access to the Snippets tab and the right related lists.
Reuse Content in Marketing Assets: Reuse your content with Snippets to streamline how you create recurring marketing assets for your campaigns and business as a whole. A snippet works across assets related to a campaign, and can contain helpful strings like dates, links, images, and logos. Snippets can be reused in emails, email templates, forms, and landing pages.
How Sync Behavior Works: Most prospect fields can be configured to control whether the Account Engagement value or the Salesforce value is primary.
Test and Start Engagement Programs: Engagement Studio includes a robust testing experience that lets you navigate steps and preview associated assets. Make sure that your program flows and works as you intended, and make needed adjustments before you start the program.
Tracking Prospect Field Updates: The Updated At field displays the date and time that the prospect record was last updated. Account Engagement users and prospects can trigger changes to this field.
How User Merge Fields Populate in Account Engagement Emails: When sending an email, the way your user Handlebars Merge Language (HML) fields populate depends on a few factors. Is the recipient assigned to a user? Is the email sent from a user or from a general name and address? When choosing a From address sender, the email send logic cascades to the next specified sender.
Account Engagement User Roles: A user role defines which features and data a user has access. Choose a default or custom role when you create a user.
Find the Right User Sync Documentation: Salesforce User Sync was updated on July 20, 2020 with the Summer ’20 release. The process for User Sync setup varies depending on when your business unit was created and if you currently use the legacy version. You can check the current User Sync status in your Business Unit Settings.
Copy a User Role: You can base a custom user role on an existing custom or default role by cloning the role and making changes.
Create a Custom User Role: Admins can create custom roles. If you want to modify a few permissions for a default role, it’s quicker to copy and edit the role.
Create a User Group for Round-Robin Assignments: Use groups for round-robin lead assignment. When you assign a prospect to a group, the prospect is assigned to a group member, equally distributing leads.
Create Account Engagement Users: If you don’t use Salesforce User Sync to manage users, you can create users in Account Engagement. To access the app, users must be linked to a Salesforce user and have Salesforce single sign-on (SSO) enabled. Before you add Account Engagement users, verify that they have Salesforce credentials.
Custom User Roles: You can create a custom role to provide specific permissions to users. You can create a role from scratch or clone a default role and modify the permissions.
Reassign Prospects in Account Engagement: You can change lead assignments in Salesforce. If needed, you can also reassign prospects from a user’s record in Account Engagement.
Delete a User in Account Engagement: If you don’t use Salesforce User Sync to manage users, you can disable Salesforce single sign-on and delete a user in Account Engagement. Deleting a user archives them in the recycle bin.
Import Users: You can create or update up to 50 users at once by importing a CSV file.
Managing Users and Preferences: Admins can create and manage users, who can manage some of their own settings and preferences. Logging into Account Engagement requires Salesforce single sign-on (SSO). To simplify user management and transfer it to Salesforce, we recommend setting up Salesforce User Sync.
Personalize Account Engagement Emails with Variable Tags: With variable tags, you can use content from your prospect records to personalize your emails and insert standard company information in email templates. Variable tags are part of a legacy merge language and aren’t available in business units created after June 12, 2020.
Variable Tags: Account Engagement variable tags represent information about your prospects, Account Engagement users, and your business unit. Variable tags are part of a legacy merge language and aren’t available in business units created after June 12, 2020.
Account Engagement Interface Versions: Account Engagement offers two interfaces: a standalone Account Engagement app and an Account Engagement Lightning app. The interfaces differ in appearance and features, but offer the same essential functionality. Both experiences require Salesforce SSO to log in and access the app. The newest features and enhancements are available in Account Engagement Lightning app.
View the List Email Report: Use the List Email report to analyze important data about your email sends, such as open rates and bounces.
Provide an Online Version of an Email: Use the View Online link to provide an online version of your email that your recipients can view in their browser.
Anonymous Visitors: An anonymous visitor is someone who has visited a page with your tracking code on it, but hasn’t converted to a prospect yet. Prospects are visitors who have an associated email address in Account Engagement.
Visitors Report: The Visitors report displays the captured website sessions of anonymous visitors and identified prospects. You can filter sessions based on page views, campaign, and date range. To access the visitors report, navigate to Prospects > Visitors. The visitor report contains at least a year of data for anonymous visitors.
Remove a Prospect from the Recycle Bin: When a prospect is deleted, the record is moved to the recycle bin. From the recycle bin, you can either permanently delete or restore the prospect. Certain activities that either you or the system initiates can also restore a prospect.
Batch Personalization Decisions for Customer Segments: With Batch Personalizations, you can create personalized decisions for a Data 360 segment and save the decisions to Data Model Objects (DMO) in Data 360. You can then send the batch personalization output to other platforms like Marketing Cloud Engagement (MCE), Google Cloud Platform (GCP), Amazon S3, and Azure to power your cross-channel marketing campaigns. For example, using Data 360, Salesforce Personalization, and MCE, you can use recommendations created for a Data 360 customer segment in MCE emails to notify your customers about an upcoming year-end sale.
Agentforce Adaptive Websites: Agentforce Adaptive Websites transform static web pages into intelligent, personalized customer experiences. By combining real-time user behavior signals from Data 360 with Agentforce conversational AI, your website dynamically adjusts content, recommendations, images, and messaging based on individual customer preferences and behaviors.
Set Up Agentforce Adaptive Websites: Building an adaptive website involves orchestrating five key layers of technology: data, AI, conversation, web integration, and behavioral tracking. The process moves from establishing a data foundation to deploying client-side components that render the experience.
Add the Web SDK to Your Website: To power intelligent agent conversations with real-time customer context, add the connector script to your web pages. This setup connects Data 360 behavioral tracking, session storage, and the Adaptive Web Agent Component (AWAC) using your specific deployment configuration.
Set Up the Adaptive Web Agent Component: Now that your Salesforce Agent, Data 360, and Enhanced Chat Configuration are in place, you’re ready to implement the Adaptive Web Agent Component (AWAC). This component enables you to pair conversational AI responses with dynamic content zones on your website. By using custom React templates, you can create personalized experiences that display rich content alongside the agent's chat window.
Configure Data 360: Update the web schema in Data 360 to capture user query intent as a new event and map that data correctly so it can be used for personalization.
Configure Personalization: Get Context Action: Use Salesforce Personalization with Agentforce to enable your agents to make better decisions based on real-time access to summarized profile data.
Configure Personalization: After your data is correctly configured in Data 360, set up the necessary components in Salesforce Personalization.
Configure Context Variables: Context variables pass data, such as a customer's identity or browsing history, from your website to the agent. For example, the AWAC can pass a context variable IndividualId to the agent. This immediate context allows the agent to personalize interactions–like suggesting outdoor gear based on the Northern Trail Outfitters–without asking redundant questions.
Create an Agent: Create the foundational Agentforce Service Agent that serves as your customer-facing representative.
Create an Agent Action: To help your agent automatically recognize customer requests and respond with structured, data-driven suggestions, convert your prompt template into an agent action. Agent actions turn flex prompt templates into conversational building blocks that agents can invoke dynamically.
Leverage Data Graphs for Context-Aware AI Agents: Data graphs bridge the gap between raw data and AI agents. By aggregating disconnected engagement data such as browsing history, cart activity, and past conversations into a single structure, data graphs provide agents with the real-time context needed to personalize interactions.
Agents and Data Usage in Personalization: When using Agentforce along with Salesforce Personalization, review this table to understand the type of data used by agents.
Create an Enhanced Chat Deployment: To integrate agent conversations into your website, create a web deployment. For adaptive website implementations, create a custom web chat deployment to use the Enhanced Chat REST API for agent conversations outside of the standard Salesforce chat widget.
Configure the Agent: Configure and update your agent to handle user queries and deliver personalized recommendations.
Set Up Agent Engagement Tracking: To capture agent interactions and send them to Data 360 to further enrich profiles, configure event listeners. Agent engagement events track conversations, messages, and user actions. These events flow to Data 360 and update customer profiles for improved, future personalization.
Example Prompt Template: Here’s an example prompt template that instructs the agent to act as an outdoor gear advisor and generate personalized Northern Trail Outfitters recommendations in JSON format.
Agentforce for Salesforce Personalization: Learn how Agentforce for Salesforce Personalization in Marketing Cloud Next creates and delivers personalized recommendations, content, and how it can provide essential contextual data for other agents.
Deliver Personalized Recommendations: Improve customer engagement by providing them with the most relevant real-time product and content recommendations. The standard topic, Personalized Recommendations, includes two key Personalization actions - Understand User Intent and Get Recommendations - that work together to interpret what a user is looking for and use that intent to refine and deliver tailored recommendations. This powerful combination allows your agent to handle even new intents from both anonymous and known users, ensuring a personalized experience for every customer.
Prepare Data for Your Agent: Establish the single source of truth for agent-powered experiences by consolidating business-critical data into Salesforce Data 360 DMOs or data libraries. Data 360 transforms disparate information from multiple source systems into standardized, enriched data models with consistent field mappings, hierarchical relationships, and real-time sync. This consolidated repository eliminates data silos and provides the structured foundation needed for AI-powered experiences.
Send Context to the Agent via Enhanced Chat: To allow the agent to fetch context from the data graph, pass the Data 360 Web SDK anonymous ID to the chat client. This configuration makes the Individual_Id available to the agent.
Setup Configuration: Complete a one-time Data 360 and Personalization setup to prepare your system for intent-based recommendations. These steps ensure that user query data is correctly captured and then used to train the recommendation engine, which turns raw data into relevant, personalized experiences. Configuring the agent setup then connects this recommendation engine to your users, enabling the agent with the necessary topics and actions to receive user data, understand their intent, and deliver personalized results.
Configure a Data 360 Web Connector: To enable real-time behavioral tracking and provide the IndividualId context for personalized agent conversations, create a Data 360 web connector. The web connector captures customer engagement events and sends them to Data 360, where they enrich customer profiles for improved personalization.
Salesforce Personalization Analytics: Analytics for Salesforce Personalization in Marketing Cloud Next are designed to provide insights into how your app is running, and the effectiveness of your personalization program. To gain operational insights, you can use the Personalization pipeline intelligence dashboard. To understand personalization effectiveness and performance, you can use the attribution dashboard. The attribution dashboard enables you to visualize preconfigured, ready-to-use attribution configurations available through personalization setup, or custom attribution configurations that you define. You can also visualize any personalization analytics DMOs using Tableau or any JDBC-compatible client.
Create a Custom Attribution Configuration: Instead of using the predefined attribution configurations, you can create your own custom attribution configurations using first-or last-touch models to better meet your needs. These custom configurations can help you evaluate how well your personalization decisions or strategies are working. By defining your own engagement signals and metrics, you can configure a two- to four-stage funnel stage configuration to track customer journeys from initial impression to conversion.
Enable a Draft Attribution Configuration: There are many reasons to make a draft of an attribution configuration. You can let people check the configuration before enabling it. You can also create different attribution configurations to get different attribution data, and turn those configurations on at different times or under different conditions. You can enable a draft attribution configuration at any time.
View Attribution Intelligence for Active Attribution Configurations: You can view analytics for active attribution configurations using the attribution intelligence dashboard. Attribution intelligence provides analytics for all personalization points and all associated content.
View Attribution Intelligence Using Tableau: You can use Tableau to view and analyze attribution metrics for predefined attribution DMOs. By connecting data model objects using the built-in Salesforce Data Cloud Connector in Tableau, you can analyze your attribution data in near real time.
Visualize Personalization Attribution Intelligence: Attribution intelligence leverages engagement data from attribution models to provide deeper insights into the effectiveness of the personalized output you build with Salesforce Personalization. The attribution intelligence dashboard and analytics highlight how engagement with specific personalization points or personalized content relate directly to business goals and important performance indicators.
Predefined Attribution Configurations: Using Salesforce Personalization setup, you can install two predefined attribution configurations. After these configurations are deployed, you can view the attribution data for them from the Attributions tab.
Using the Personalization Attribution Intelligence Dashboard: Use Attribution Intelligence dashboards in Salesforce Personalization to view funnel stage conversions related to a specific attribution model and analytic totals for each stage.
Open a Personalization Pipeline Intelligence Dashboard: View pipeline metrics in a Personalization Pipeline Intelligence dashboard created for a specific data space. Before opening the dashboard, you must first install it from Salesforce Personalization Setup.
Pipeline Intelligence SQL Query Examples: Use these SQL query examples to derive insights and visibility into the Salesforce Personalization pipeline, its metrics, and performance.
Query Personalization Attribution by Personalization Point: This query shows attribution by personalization point over a specified date range. It includes the number of unique profiles, total number of clicks and attributed orders, and attributed revenue by date.
Types of Salesforce Personalization Analytics: The Salesforce Personalization Intelligence app provides two types of analytics — Personalization pipeline intelligence and Personalization attribution intelligence.
View Personalization Pipeline Metrics by Date: This query shows various pipeline metrics grouped by date, personalization point, and personalization decision over the selected date range.
About Salesforce Personalization: Salesforce Personalization Marketing Cloud Next works with Data 360 to provide personalized experiences across Salesforce clouds. It uses objective-based (using ML), or rules-based content recommenders to deliver personalized experiences to customers across channels. For simple use cases, you can also configure rules to surface specific content assets.
Billable Usage Type for Salesforce Personalization: Usage of Salesforce Personalization features impacts Personalization Credit consumption. For more information on how usage is billed, refer to your contract or contact your account executive.
Salesforce Personalization Data Model Objects: The Salesforce Personalization data model subject area includes multiple data model objects (DMOs) that store personalization decision activities.
How Salesforce Personalization Works: Salesforce Personalization uses Data 360 to isolate, organize, and prepare data for use as personalized content. Data 360 data spaces provide logical partitions to organize the data for profile unification, calculated insights, and marketing.
Salesforce Personalization Learning Map: To help you find resources across the Salesforce ecosystem, such as Trailhead badges, videos, blogs, and other guides, we bring them together into a learning map. The Salesforce Personalization learning map includes example use cases and introductory materials about the tools and features that create personalized experiences. Check back often as we add resources soon.
Terminology in Salesforce Personalization: To deliver personalized experience across clouds and other channels, Personalization uses a variety of objects, DMOs, and functions across Data 360 and Salesforce apps. Learn the terms that appear throughout the Salesforce Personalization user interface and documentation.
Create a Batch Personalization: Create and configure a batch personalization to generate personalization decisions for a customer segment.
Batch Personalization FAQs: Answers to your questions about Batch Personalizations for Salesforce Personalization.
Understanding the Batch Personalization Output DMO: When a batch personalization is run, it creates a related decision output DMO in Data 360. The DMO stores the decision payload along with other details related to the batch personalization.
Calculated Affinities: Calculated affinities enable you to gauge an individual’s interest in objects and their selected attributes. The output of a calculated affinity provides a numerical score to indicate preference. Personalization uses this value in segmentation, decision targeting, recommendation filtering, and when grounding Salesforce AI Agents to improve decision-making, enhance personalized output, and build trust.
How Affinities are Calculated: Personalization uses a standard summation model when calculating affinity. This model uses various factors that dictate affinity scoring output.
Configure a Real-Time Calculated Affinity: Define calculated affinity within specific boundaries. These boundaries include the selected data space, objects, and fields that you want to calculate affinity against, and within a defined engagement timeframe. You also specify the strength of an engagement signal, and the relative impact the signal has when calculating the affinity.
Using Calculated Affinities: Calculated affinities (CAs) measure characteristics that indicate a natural interest in or liking of an object. You can create real-time calculated affinities, and use them with personalization decision targeting rules, segments, and recommendation filters, to generate highly-focused personalized content based on customer preferences.
Personalization Campaigns: Use a guided configuration workflow to create a personalization campaign.
Create a Personalization Campaign: Configure a personalization campaign using a guided configuration process that steps you through creating, mapping, and deploying a personalized experience.
Map a Campaign Using Web Personalization Manager: Before you can use a campaign, you must map it to a channel location. You can then test the campaign using the Web Personalization Manager (WPM).
Prerequisites for the Personalization Campaign Guided Configuration: Before using the guided campaign configuration, we recommend that you verify certain required components are in place. Having these components defined can make for a more efficient and streamlined configuration experience.
Content Schemas: Salesforce content schemas define the structure and configuration of data returned by a personalization decision. They act as a bridge between the underlying data structure and a business user's configuration experience, ensuring that personalized content—such as AI-driven recommendations or dynamic content—is delivered in a consistent, uniform format across various channels.
Configure a Personalization Content Schema: To ensure that the requesting application consistently renders your personalization output the same way, you use a personalization content schema (formerly called a response template) to define the shape of the personalization data.
Using Content Schemas: Personalization content schemas (previously called response templates) are required when configuring personalization points, personalization campaigns, and personalization decisions. A content schema defines the configuration options available to marketers when they’re building a personalization decision. The content schema also ensures that all decision responses for a given personalization point or campaign return data in the same format.
Engagement Signals: An engagement signal is a set of data that provides information about an engagement action performed by an individual. Examples of engagement signals include purchases, web clicks, opening or responding to an email response, or downloading a PDF.
Engagement Signals and Metrics: Create engagement signals and metrics to track interactions across channels as individuals engage with your brand. You can then use these engagement signals when creating objective-based recommenders to deliver personalized recommendations with Salesforce Personalization in Marketing Cloud Next.
Configure an Engagement Signal: Engagement signals are configured using a primary engagement data model object (DMO). You then use mapped DMO fields to identify and track individual and account-level engagements.
Configure an Engagement Signal Compound Metric: Engagement signal compound metrics are rate metrics. You create them by combining two single metrics, a numerator and a denominator, using a Divide By function to create a ratio.
Example Engagement Signals: Salesforce Personalization provides several standard engagement DMOs that you can use when creating engagement signals. Use these examples to recreate engagement signals to track individual and account-level engagement with your personalizations, or use them to familiarize yourself with how to construct your own engagement signals.
Example: Add To Cart: This engagement signal monitors for and tracks when items are added to the cart by individuals. Configuring this engagement signal creates a default add-to-cart count metric.
Example: Knowledge Article Click: This engagement signal monitors for and tracks knowledge article click engagement by individuals. Configuring this engagement signal creates a default article click count metric.
Example: Product Click: This engagement signal monitors for and tracks catalog product (object) click engagement by individuals. Configuring this engagement signal creates a default click count metric.
Example: Product View: This engagement signal monitors for and tracks catalog product (object) views by individuals. Configuring this engagement signal creates a default view count metric.
Example: Product Order: This engagement signal monitors for and tracks catalog product (object) order engagement by individuals. Configuring this engagement signal creates a default product order count metric.
Example: Product Order for an Account: This engagement signal monitors for and tracks catalog product (object) order engagement by individuals on behalf of an account. Configuring this engagement signal creates a default product order count metric.
Example: Product Order with Offer: The engagement signal considered in this example, monitors and tracks catalog product (object) order engagement where a promotion is applied at checkout. Use this engagement signal when you define a custom objective that recommends promotions or related offers based on a customer's product interests.
Configure an Engagement Signal Metric: Engagement signal metrics enable you to track and view user engagement with your personalized content. Use these metrics when creating custom objectives for objective-based recommenders and when creating attribution configurations.
Example Engagement Signal Metrics: Use these examples to create engagement signal metrics. You can use count metrics to define compound engagement signal rate metrics.
Einstein Studio Model Predictions for Personalization: Use real-time predictions from Einstein Studio models in Salesforce Personalization targeting rules to refine your personalization decisions. For example, consider you have a predictive model in Einstein Studio that predicts the chances of customers buying an item from your website. You can use this output in your targeting rules to determine the customers eligible for a special discount.
Visualizing Experiment Performance: Review experiment performance, compare variations against your control variation, and see whether the experiment has a clear winner. The Data Visualization tab shows you which variations won and which need more data or a revised strategy.
Primary Metric Results: The third section of the dashboard shows results specific to the primary metric selected for the experiment. Results for the primary metric determine the experiment's winner.
Secondary Metric Results: The last section of the dashboard shows results specific to any secondary metric selected for the experiment. These results show more information about individual activity related to the experiment, but don’t directly determine the experiment's winner.
Experiment Status and Controls: The top of the dashboard provides status information for the experiment, along with controls for stopping, editing, or deleting the experiment.
Experiment Summary: The second section of the experiment dashboard shows the experiment summary metrics. These metrics provide participant totals for the control cohort and all variant cohorts. When compared against the control or against other variations (when no control is used), individual activity totals and lift values for each variant are provided as percent differences.
Experiment Analytics: Experiment analytics summarize and visualize the measures you selected when you configured your experiment in Salesforce Personalization. Review participant totals, primary metric results, and performance charts to see whether the experiment has a clear winner.
View Experiment Analytics: Use the Analytics tab to control an experiment and view summary and detailed results in tables. Use the Data Visualization tab to compare variations against the control cohort in charts and summary cards, and see whether the experiment has a clear winner.
Experiment Considerations: When creating and running an experiment, keep these considerations in mind.
Create an Experiment: Create and run experiments to determine which recommender or personalized content performs best for a defined personalization point. Selecting metrics for the experiment to measure, and creating targeting rules for selecting eligible participants, you can test recommender effectiveness against control and variant cohorts that you define.
Experimentation Example: Recommender Comparison: Experimentation supports various test scenarios. These scenarios can include testing personalized dynamic content, recommender-based content, or agent-based experiences. This experiment tests a rule-based recommender against an objective-based recommender to determine which option performs better.
Configure the Example Objective-Based Recommender: The object-based recommender provides Maximize Revenue recommendations based on increased checkout frequency, increased cart value at checkout, or both.
Configure the Example Personalization Point: This personalization point is for use on a website cart or checkout page, providing recommendations to site visitors who have added items to their carts.
Recommender Comparison Example Configuration: Experiments are created, started, and managed on personalization points. For this experiment example, configure two cohorts — one as the control and the other as a variation — using the recommenders that you created and want to test. Each cohort is configured with 50 percent of the defined test population.
Configure the Example Content Schema: The content schema (previously called the response template) defines the configuration options marketers can use to build a personalization decision. The content schema also makes sure that all personalization point decision responses return data in the same format. For this example, the personalization point requires a content schema that uses a recommendations personalization type.
Manage an Experiment: When you configure and save a personalization experiment and save it, its status is Created. You can start, stop, archive, edit or delete an experiment at any time from the personalization point Related tab.
Experiment Prerequisite Configurations: Before creating the experiment, we created the required components that the experiment uses during configuration. These components include the two recommenders that the experiment compares, the response template that defines the format and shape of the personalized content, and the personalization point that gathers these components together for presentation.
Experimentation: Experiments provide customer insights that help you make better decisions. Create experiments with Salesforce Personalization in Marketing Cloud Next to learn which personalized and agentic experiences resonate best with your customers.
Personalization Experiences: Create and manage personalization experiences and experience templates to deliver targeted content to your customers.
About Personalization Experiences: A personalization experience is a set of instructions for rendering results and specifying where they appear. For example, a personalization experience can define that a personalization point shows product recommendations on every product page, after the "Product Details" section, as soon as the page loads. Personalization experiences are available for web and mobile channels.
Configure Your Mobile App for Personalization: Before you set up personalization, complete the Data 360 configuration for your mobile app. These steps make sure your app sends the data personalization needs and that the connector is ready to deliver personalized content.
Register and Define Mobile Personalization Components: Register the components your mobile app supports so that experience templates and personalization experiences can use them. First register components in connector setup. Then define custom components in your app code.
Register and Define Mobile Content Zones: Register the content zones your mobile app supports so that personalization experiences can target specific locations in your app. First register content zones in connector setup and connect the allowed components. Then define the matching content zones in your app code.
Create a Mobile Personalization Experience: Create a personalization experience to deliver personalized content to customers in your mobile app. An experience connects a personalization point, an experience template, and a content zone, and specifies where the content appears.
Track Engagement with Personalized Content: To measure how customers interact with personalized content, configure engagement tracking on your connector. Tracking sends view, click, and dismiss events to Data 360 when users interact with personalized content. Configure tracking once per content schema, and it applies automatically to every personalization point that uses that schema.
Mobile Personalization Experiences: Mobile personalization lets your team deliver personalized content in a mobile app without rebuilding the app for each new experience. Developers define a set of reusable building blocks one time. You then create and publish personalized experiences on your own, without writing code.
Set Up Mobile Personalization: Setting up mobile personalization requires configuration across your mobile app code, the Data 360 connector, and the Salesforce Personalization app. Developers complete the technical setup first. You then create and publish experiences.
Preview a Mobile Personalization Experience with a QR Code: Before you publish, preview a personalization experience in your mobile app by scanning a QR code. The QR code opens the experience directly in your app so you can confirm the rendering is correct.
Publish a Mobile Personalization Experience: After confirming that an experience renders correctly in the preview, publish it to make it available to all customers in your mobile app.
Create a Mobile Experience Template: Create an experience template to define how personalized content renders in your mobile app. A mobile template references a component registered in connector setup, which handles the native rendering. The template carries the content data the component displays.
Experience Templates: An experience template provides a structural layout for how personalized content, such as a hero banner or product carousel, appears to customers. The template transforms raw data from the personalization engine into specific variables, such as a product name or image URL, with the help of a guided interface.
Create an Experience Template: Set up an experience template to use predefined structures for a personalization experience. You can build the template from scratch or use a predefined global template.
Template Variables Advanced Options: These advanced options are primarily for building agentic experiences. For standard experience templates, use the default configurations.
Web Personalization Experiences: Web personalization experiences let your team deliver personalized content on your website without developer involvement for each new experience. Use experience templates to define how content renders, and use the Web Personalization Manager to create, preview, and manage experiences directly on your site.
Intelligence SQL Queries in Salesforce Personalization: You can view Personalization analytics using any Java database connectivity (JDBC) compatible client to connect to Data 360 and run queries against the data model objects.
Personalization Points in Salesforce Personalization: Use Salesforce Personalization in Marketing Cloud Next to create a personalization point. This object delivers personalized content by tying together a data space, profile data graph, personalization type, and response template. After you define these entities, you can add decisions and targeting rules to the personalization point.
Add a Decision to a Personalization Point: A decision consists of targeting rules. The personalization point uses the decision to determine whether the individual who is engaging with your website or app is eligible to receive personalization content.
Modify a Decision: You can change decision properties or priority for a personalization point.
Profile Data Graphs in Personalization Points: Whether you select a standard or real-time profile data graph for your personalization point impacts how Salesforce Personalization processes personalization requests.
Real-Time Profile Data Graphs in Personalization Points: Use real-time profile data graphs for latency sensitive channels, like web and mobile. Using a real-time profile data graph with a personalization point ensures that Salesforce Personalization has the most up-to-date understanding of individuals, including any in-session behavior, when evaluating decision or experiment eligibility and when making personalized decisions.
Standard Profile Data Graphs in Personalization Points: Real-time data graphs work across all personalization scenarios, however some use cases don’t necessarily require a real-time understanding of an individual. Use a standard profile data graph in such scenarios.
Create a Targeting Rule: A targeting rule determines who's eligible for a personalization decision and which personalized content to return.
Add a Merge Field: To include profile data in personalization decision text, use merge fields.
Display Segment Membership in Merge Fields (Example): To deliver Data 360 segment membership IDs on your website, use merge fields. In this example, we show you how to personalize customer experience by displaying Data 360 segment membership information on your website.
Add Recommended Rules to Your Identity Resolution Ruleset: To get the most out of Identity Resolution, we recommend adding two custom rules to the Individual object ruleset. First, add a rule to match exact values when a lead converts to a contact. If you use web tracking on Marketing Cloud Next landing pages or a connected external site, add a rule that attributes activity to the correct unified individual.
Assigning Permissions to Admins and Users: To set up Salesforce Personalization, you work in Salesforce Setup, Data 360 Setup, and the Data 360 and Salesforce Personalization apps. Before you begin, make sure you and other admins on your team have the necessary roles and permissions.
Configure a Custom Ruleset: You can manually configure a custom ruleset for the Individual or Unified Individual object. A custom ruleset creates unified records that meet your specific business needs and specifications.
Configure and Map Data Streams: Installing the data kits add the objects and fields that store marketing data. However, the data kits only deploy datastreams used for analytics and attribution. To bring external data and make it available to your marketing tools and processes, you must deploy data streams and map them to the Data 360 objects.
Configure Identity Resolution Rules: Identity resolution is a critical step to organizing and unifying your data. Usually, when your data originates from many systems, it’s modeled and labeled differently in each place. Identity resolution rulesets define the relationships among data model objects (DMOs) and their fields. After you configure these rules, Data 360 can organize related and duplicate data into unified individual records that marketers can use for cross-channel personalization.
Configure a Website Connector: To allow data to move between interactions on your website and Salesforce Personalization, you must create a connector, create a sitemap, and install the SDK that sends interaction data back to Salesforce Personalization.
Create Calculated Insights for Targeting: Calculated Insights can streamline your personalization strategy for rules-based recommenders and recommendation filters. For example, add a calculated insight to your item data graph to identify most viewed or most purchased products or to restrict products for certain recommendations.
Create Required Data Graphs: Instead of querying your entire database every time you want to serve personalized content, Data 360 and Salesforce Personalization use data graphs, which organize and store only relevant data. For Salesforce Personalization, you can use two data graphs: a real-time profile data graph for person details, and a standard item data graph for product and content information.
Setup Guide: Data 360 for Salesforce Personalization: This guide covers the steps to set up Data 360 to support Salesforce Personalization for Marketing Cloud Next. It outlines basic recommendations, so that your team can get up and running. For in-depth information, special features, or customization options, we provide additional resources along the way.
Enable Data 360 and Deploy Personalization Data Kits: Turn on Data 360 and deploy data kits to provide the unified data and necessary infrastructure to power the core capabilities of Salesforce Personalization.
Getting to Know Salesforce Personalization: Salesforce Personalization Marketing Cloud Next works with Data 360 to provide personalized experiences across Salesforce clouds. It uses objective-based (using ML), or rules-based content recommenders to deliver personalized experiences to customers across channels. For simple use cases, you can also configure rules to surface specific content assets.
Schedule Required Calculated Insights: After the calculated insights from the data kit are available, you must schedule them to run periodically. This data is used to generate the metrics that measures and populates the personalization pipeline intelligence dashboard. A Data 360 Admin can complete this task in the Data 360 app.
Install the Sitemap Builder Chrome Extension: Install the Salesforce Data 360 Sitemap Builder Chrome extension to help simplify sitemap creation for Salesforce Personalization.
Using Sitemap Builder Modes: The sitemap builder provides several modes for use in your sitemap development and testing cycles.
Using Sitemap Builder Tabs: Sitemap builder tabs are organized to help step you through the sitemap creation process. These tabs highlight key configuration steps for the sitemap, as well as important outputs for review.
Learn Sitemap Builder Basics: Before using the Salesforce Data 360 Sitemap Builder tool, you can take a tour of the extension to learn more about it.
Building a Data 360 Sitemap for Personalization: To assist with building a Data 360 sitemap for Personalization, you can use the Salesforce Data 360 Sitemap Builder. This tool is a low-code to no-code Chrome extension tool that helps to simplify the creation of Data 360 sitemaps and schemas. The purpose of this extension is to help decrease the need for JavaScript programming knowledge, and make personalization implementation more accessible to non-developers.
Upload an Event Schema: When you set up a website connector to send event data to Data 360, you must upload a schema file in JSON format that outlines the structure of the event data that you’re tracking.
Creating and Training Salesforce Personalization Recommenders: Salesforce Personalization in Marketing Cloud Next generates multichannel, focused, and individualized recommendations based off of deep, digital, and offline behavioral and business context data. To create personalized recommendations, you configure a recommender and train it using Data 360 data graphs that you select.
Configure an Objective-Based Recommender: That use a deep learning model, an objective-based recommender generates personalized, targeted recommendations for individuals to advance a specific business-related goal. You can choose to use an existing, predefined objective or create a new, custom objective for the recommender. Salesforce Personalization supports five predefined objectives – Maximize Revenue, Maximize Revenue with Promotions, Maximize Clicks, Maximize Email Clicks, and Maximize Revenue with Email Content. These predefined objectives require you to map and include certain Data 360 entities in your profile and item data graphs. If you’re using a predefined objective, make sure that you configure the data graphs correctly. The predefined objectives help recommend content for individuals. To recommend content based on the activities of an account, create a custom objective.
Configure a Rule-Based Recommender: Leverage business logic and Data 360 calculated insights to mathematically determine a list of personalized recommendations, enhancing user experience and driving engagement.
Create a Custom Objective for Offers: Using indirect engagement signals, create custom objectives for offers in objective-based recommenders. This objective trains the machine learning model to deliver relevant, personalized offers that drive your business goals. To do this, the model links promotional offers to downstream conversions, such as product purchases.
Create a Custom Objective: Using specific engagement signals, you can create custom business objectives to use with objective-based recommenders. You can reuse this objective to enhance the customer journey and deliver real-time, personalized recommendations, simplifying setup and boosting customer engagement. You can also use custom objectives to support recommendations for accounts. Common scenarios include upsell and cross-sell product recommendations for an account. Use these recommendations to guide your sales and service teams, or buyers visiting an account's partner extranet site.
Custom Objective for Offers: Custom objectives use deep learning models to predict the offers that are most likely to drive your business outcomes, even when customers don't directly interact with the offer itself.
Deep Learning for Personalized Recommendations: Deep Learning for Personalized Recommendations (DLPR) is the core model that powers every objective-based recommender you configure. It analyzes the sequence of engagement actions a user takes, and predicts the item that the user is most likely to engage with next, weighted by the business goal that you've defined.
Cold Start Strategies for Recommendations: Cold start describes any scenario where a recommender doesn't have enough engagement data to personalize confidently. Cold start is the only automatic switch the recommender makes. Every recommender starts in cold start when engagement is sparse and transitions to full personalization as engagement data accumulates.
Conversational Intent-Based Recommenders: A conversational recommender brings personalization into Agentforce by interpreting a user's intent in real time and feeding it into DLPR alongside engagement history. Live conversation becomes a primary engagement signal.
Item Recommenders: An item recommender presents items from your catalog based on each user's engagement history. An item can be a product, an article, a property listing, a course, a service, or any other entity you serve to users. The item recommender is the default recommender configuration for personalized recommendations across web, email, Agentforce, and other channels.
Promotion and Offer Recommenders: A promotion recommender recommends the most relevant promotions, offers, or discounts to each user. The underlying model is the same DLPR, but mapping different engagement signals to the recommender, and ranking it against a different catalog.
Example Filters for Promotion Eligibility Criteria: Promotions often include criteria around who is eligible to receive it. While Salesforce Personalization does not enforce end-stage validation criteria, such as meeting a minimum spend at checkout, you can suppress recommendations by filtering by profile criteria or user context.
Filter Recommendations Using Dynamic Context Variables: Build recommender filters that adapt to each user's context at runtime. Specify dynamic context variables for string, number, or date fields instead of fixed values, and the recommender resolves them from the personalization request.
Recommendation Filters: Use Recommendation Filters to control which items the recommender suggests to your customers.
Recommendation Filter Operators: Select the appropriate operator to compare catalog fields against static values, customer profile attributes, or session context to refine recommendation logic.
How Recommendation Models Work: Objective-Based Recommenders use the Deep Learning for Personalized Recommendations (DLPR) model to deliver personalized recommendations that align with your business goals. DLPR powers every recommender.
Choosing a Recommendation Type: The recommendation type defines the method that the recommender uses to provide content. You can choose either objective-based recommendations or rule-based recommendations. Objective-based recommendations use a deep learning model to produce personalized, targeted recommendations for an individual. Rule-based recommendations use business logic to mathematically determine a list of recommendations based on Data 360 calculated insights. For both recommendation types, you can add filters to include or exclude items.
Training a Personalization Recommender: After you create a personalization recommender, it starts training on all profile and engagement attributes enabled in the recommender's profile data graph. Track the training progress on the recommender record.
Set Up a Fallback Recommender: Select a fallback recommender to use when your recommender doesn’t return sufficient recommendation items. If restrictive filters or insufficient data prevent a recommender from returning sufficient items, Salesforce Personalization uses the fallback recommender to fill the remaining slots.
Simulate a Recommender: After you create a recommender and train it, you can preview recommendations for specific users and for the items that the user is viewing at the time the recommendations are presented. By previewing recommendation results, you can verify the simulation before publishing the recommender.
Salesforce Personalization References: Use these references when configuring or validating Salesforce Data 360 calculated insights for using Salesforce Personalization in Marketing Cloud Next.
Behavioral Events Data Mappings: Map fields in your website connector’s behavioral events DLO to the DMO. Behavioral event data is divided into subsections on the mapping canvas.
Product Top Sellers Standard Insight: This insight calculates the sum of products that have been sold. Salesforce Personalization uses the output from this insight to create a list of top-selling products. The Maximize Revenue objective-based recommender requires the provided SQL code in the calculated insight.
Salesforce Personalization and Data 360 Setup: Salesforce Personalization in Marketing Cloud Next is a Customer 360 application that connects and provides personalized experiences across clouds. To use Salesforce Personalization, define the appropriate permissions, and install and configure Data 360 to work with Personalization data model objects.
Assign a Standard Permission Set: Select a predefined set of permissions to assign Personalization Admin or Personalization user roles to users.
Personalization Standard Permission Sets: Use standard, predefined permission sets to define Salesforce Personalization user roles, or clone a standard permission set and customize it.
Configure the Top Sellers Standard Insight for Rule-Based Recommenders: Salesforce Personalization enables you to generate recommendations using controlled business logic. Using a rule-based recommender, you can provide recommendations for top selling, most viewed, co-bought, or co-browsed products, and much more. To rank and sort recommendable content, rule-based recommendations rely on inputs from calculated insights that you add to the item data graph.
Set Up Salesforce CRM Connector for Salesforce Personalization: Bring your Salesforce Personalization data into Data 360 from another Salesforce org using the Salesforce CRM Connector. You must have admin permissions for the org that you’re connecting.
Salesforce Personalization and Data 360: To generate and present unique, personalized content experiences, Salesforce Personalization in Marketing Cloud Next uses profile and item data graphs, calculated insights, segments, and real-time behavioral data from Data 360.
Data 360 Prerequisites: Salesforce Personalization requires Data 360. Set up Personalization to work with Data 360.
Using Data Graphs With Personalization: Salesforce Personalization requires the Data 360 profile data graph and item data graph. The profile data graph provides real-time data to determine personalization eligibility. The item data graph provides data to the Personalization recommenders that are used to generate recommendations.
Data Space Requirements for Personalization: You can connect Salesforce Personalization to any data space. A default data space is provided when you install Data 360, and you can purchase an add-on license to create more data spaces. When setting up Data 360 with Personalization ensure that enhanced data space security is enabled in the data space section of the Data 360 setup page.
Assign a Default Data Graph to a Data Space: You can assign default profile data graphs to specific data spaces, providing selection guidance for Salesforce Personalization configurations. After the data graph is assigned, it is automatically populated as the default data graph whenever you select its associated data space in a Salesforce Personalization configuration.
Deploy Personalization Foundational Data: Deploying Salesforce Personalization foundational data installs objects and preconfigured insights required for Personalization to function with Data 360.
Including Personalization Components in Data Kits: To streamline installations and deploy more complete solutions for Salesforce Personalization, add packageable personalization components to a Data 360 data kit. You can publish the data kit using Package Manager, and then deploy your customized solution in Data 360.
Configure Data 360 Insights for Personalization: You can configure Data 360 insights to define and calculate multidimensional metrics for use by Salesforce Personalization. Using insights, you can define specialized metrics to provide more in-depth views into customer activity, better understand site or app interaction, or gauge customer satisfaction.
Calculated Insight DMO Name and Field Requirements: How you name calculated insight DMOs and their field references depends on the data space that you configure them in. If you configure an insight in the default data space, prepend all DMO names and DMO fields with ssot__. If you’re configuring an insight in a non-default data space, prepend all DMO names and DMO fields with {prefix}__.
Using Data 360 Insights with Personalization: You can use any Data 360 insight type with Salesforce Personalization. After you configure the insight types, you add them to data graphs that Personalization uses when making decisions or filtering personalized recommendation content.
Install Salesforce Personalization Data and Personalization Intelligence: Before you can use Salesforce Personalization, you must deploy required foundational data elements to the Data 360 data space that you want Personalization to use. You can also install a personalization pipeline intelligence dashboard or deploy optional attribution intelligence data.
Install a Personalization Pipeline Intelligence Dashboard: Install the Personalization Pipeline Intelligence dashboard to view pipeline intelligence personalization metrics. You can install one pipeline intelligence dashboard in a data space.
Configure Item Data Graph for Email Content Recommenders: To use the Maximize Email Clicks or Maximize Revenue with Email Content recommender, create an item data graph with Electronic Media as the primary data model object.
Configure Item Data Graph for the Maximize Revenue Recommender: When configuring an item data graph for use with the Maximize Revenue recommender, make sure to include these related objects and fields. The Maximize Revenue recommender uses the Product Sales calculated insight. Configure the insight before creating the item data graph.
Localize Recommendations for Salesforce Personalization: Deliver recommendations in your customers' preferred languages. By mapping locale-related fields to Data Model Objects (DMOs), you ensure the system returns translated content and appropriate fallback attributes automatically.
Using Localization for Personalization: Deliver language-consistent recommendations to global audiences by using automatic attribute fallbacks and translation schemas.
Data Graph Configuration for Objective-Based Recommenders: Supplement your Data 360 data graph setup with the required fields to leverage the Maximize Revenue or Maximize Clicks objective-based recommenders. These recommenders require certain object and field configurations in both their profile and item data graphs.
Customize Permission Sets: While the standard permission sets cover most use cases, you can clone a permission set to create a custom version with more granular control.
Deploy Preconfigured Personalization Attribution Intelligence Data: If you plan to track attribution for add-to-cart, order, or revenue metrics, you can deploy preconfigured Salesforce Personalization attribution intelligence data to Data 360. Attribution analysis requires the product browse engagement, shopping cart engagement, and product order engagement objects. If you don’t plan to use these objects, then deploying personalization attribution objects to Data 360 isn't necessary.
Real-Time Identity Resolution for Personalization: Real-time identity resolution matches information about active users to a unified profile object, consolidating profile data from different sources. Each unified profile contains all unique contact point values from all sources, providing a comprehensive view of each individual. Combining real-time identity resolution and Salesforce Personalization, you can deliver personalized content to individuals using your app or website within milliseconds.
Define Segments for Salesforce Personalization: You can define real-time segments based on customer interactions to deliver immediate responses. For example, use segments to assess user engagement in real time to segment customers based on interests and preferences. You can also define standard segments to determine which products you want to recommend to individuals. For example, you can exclude products that users have purchased in the past 15 days from a recommendation list.
Using Segmentation with Salesforce Personalization: Segmentation breaks down your data into segments to help you understand, target, and analyze your website and app users. You can create different types of segments to work with Salesforce Personalization.
Salesforce Personalization Permissions: Configure the right permissions for creating and managing personalization, and empower your users to leverage Web Personalization Manager and the Personalization Intelligence app.
Creating and Deploying a Preconfigured Personalization Use Case: Using preconfigured templates and data kits, you can more quickly and easily create a recommender-based Personalization use case for one-time deployment to a data space that doesn't have a profile data graph.
Deploy a Preconfigured Personalization Use Case: Deploy a recommender-based use case that generates personalized, targeted recommendations for individuals to advance a specific business-related goal. The use case setup process currently supports two predefined use cases–Maximize Revenue and Maximize Clicks. These predefined objectives map and include certain Data 360 entities in your profile and item data graphs.
What the Use Case Setup Deploys: You can currently select from two different use cases to deploy – Maximize Revenue and Maximize Clicks. Each use case creates and deploys different assets.
What to Know About Personalization Use Case Setup: The use case setup provides a one-time configuration and deployment of a Personalization use case to a data space. The setup process creates all assets necessary for a complete and functional Personalization use case.
Web Personalization Manager for Salesforce Personalization: Salesforce Personalization in Marketing Cloud Next can manage personalized content on non-Salesforce websites. Use Web Personalization Manager to create and refresh tailored experiences that appear at the right moment and location using customer interaction data captured by Salesforce Interactions Web SDK, along with AI-driven recommendations. You can create multiple personalization experiences and designate specific ones for different pages of your website, improving relevance and visitor engagement.
Create a Bookmarklet: To activate Web Personalization Manager on your website without manually adding the string to the URL each time, you can create a browser bookmarklet in Google Chrome.
Access Web Personalization Manager: Accessing Web Personalization Manager requires only appending a simple query string to your website URL.
Creating a Personalization Experience: A personalization experience helps you tailor the content displayed on your website, ensuring that it appears at the right moment and location. Each personalization experience is based on an available personalization point. You can create multiple personalization experiences and designate specific ones for different web pages. When creating a personalization experience, you can use an experience template or personalize page elements yourself.
Manually Personalize Page Elements: The Web Personalization Manager enables you to modify HTML elements manually. Using the visual editor interface, you can select multiple elements on individual web pages, and modify attributes to provide personalized content to site visitors.
Prerequisites: Before using Web Personalization Manager, you need to configure the Salesforce Interactions Web SDK, set up personalization points, and ensure users have the necessary permissions.
Preview the Experience: After creating personalized content, you can use the Web Personalization Manager to preview the content from the perspective of specific site visitors. The preview function helps ensure a consistent and engaging personalized experience before publishing.
Use Experience Templates: You can use custom experience templates to add your personalized content to the website, or replace existing content with personalized options. Experience templates offer the benefits of reuse and extensive styling flexibility, enabling you to customize a wide range of attributes efficiently. Experience templates also provide faster creation, support for personalization features like product recommendations, and greater stability, especially on complex pages.
Use Marketing Cloud Next for Outbound Engagement: When you set your communication method as Marketing Cloud, you must add Marketing Cloud Next as an outbound engagement to send emails at different stages of the promotion journey. Emails at the Promotion Launched stage are segment-based and uses Data 360 segments to target the right audience. For all other stages, emails are event-based, that trigger a flow for content distribution.
Add Rewards: Referral programs incentivize the advocates and referred friends for engaging with the brand. Marketing managers can design a range of rewards such as commission payouts, cashbacks, or gift cards that appeal to the target audience. They can add multiple rewards types in a referral program and offer different rewards to advocates and their friends. If a referral program includes multiple promotions, each promotion can offer a unique set of rewards to both advocates and their friends.
Advocate Participation and Referral Channel Performance: Use the Advocate Participation and Referral Channel Performance dashboard to get insights into advocate participation, the effectiveness of referral channels, and advocate performance.
Referral Marketing Analytics Dashboards: Use the Referral Analytics app to gain insights into your referral program performance, member participation, referral conversion, promotion revenue, and channel effectiveness.
Work with Referral Marketing Analytics: The Referral Marketing Analytics app provides insights into the performance of your referral programs based on referral data, advocate participation, referral conversion, and promotion revenue.
Likelihood Score for Referral Marketing Model Card: The Predict Customer Likelihood of Referring model predicts the likelihood of referral program members referring to their contacts. The model generates a score between 1 and 100, with 100 indicating the highest probability of referral.
Promotion Performance Analysis: Embed the Promotion Performance Analysis dashboard in the Promotions page to analyze the performance of your promotion program based on member participation, conversion rate, and revenue.
Referrals and Referral Conversions: Use the Referrals and Referral Conversions dashboard to effectively track and analyze referral program performance based on referral data, member advocate participation, referral conversion, and promotion revenue.
Referral Program Analysis: Embed the Referral Analyze dashboard on the Loyalty Program page to get insights into the performance of your referral program based on referrals, new customers, and revenue.
Budget Management for Promotions and Campaigns in Referral Marketing: Use Budget Management to allocate funds, estimate utilization, and track spending for promotions and campaigns. Define hierarchical structures to organize budgets based on business requirements, and track utilization across time periods for financial control and accounting.
Customer Enrollment into Referral Program: New and existing customers of your B2C Commerce site can join the referral program. Customers new to your site can join the referral program when creating an account on the site. Existing customers can join the referral program from their My Account page. Customers can review the terms and conditions of the referral program before joining the referral program.
Data Export from B2C Commerce to a Salesforce Org: Run jobs that export product-related information from your B2C Commerce site to the reference org provided by Salesforce. Import the data about members who joined or left the referral program into Referral Marketing. View jobs by navigating to Operations in Administration on your B2C Commerce site. Automate jobs based on your company's requirements in your production site.
Advocate Data Export from B2C Commerce to Referral Marketing: If any issues occur while syncing advocate data from the B2C Commerce site to Referral Marketing, run the Referral Marketing Enrollment Fallback Sync job to get the unsynced advocate data. The job gets details of the advocates who joined or left the referral program but whose Loyalty Program Member records haven't been synced in Referral Marketing or on your site.
Prerequisites for Adding the Cartridge: Complete a set of prerequisites on the org that's provided and on your B2C Commerce site before you add the cartridge to your site.
Update Referral Program Labels on B2C Commerce Site: The cartridge adds pages and updates pages on your site. You can customize the default labels of the new and updated pages based on your company's branding requirements.
Referral Program Prerequisites: Complete the prerequisites to prepare the reference org to run Referral Marketing-specific processes for orders placed by members on your B2C Commerce site.
Referral Marketing for Commerce Cartridge: The Referral Marketing cartridge contains metadata and HTML pages that allow you to configure your referral program preferences and run the program on the B2C Commerce site. The cartridge must be added to your B2C Commerce site. You can add the cartridge only to sites in which SFRA 6.1.0 is installed and Open Commerce API (OCAPI) settings is complete.
Promotions: Members can view the promotions that are applicable for a product or its category on the product's page on the B2C Commerce site.
Member Profile and Activity Details: Referral program members can view their membership and reward details on the My Dashboard page. Members can also view the details of their activities on the My Activities page of the B2C Commerce site.
Voucher Redemption for Order Payment: Referral program members can use their issued vouchers to pay for orders. Members can pay for an order with vouchers, and other payment methods.
Create a Referral Program: The launchpad for any referral strategy is the referral program. After marketing managers create a referral program, they can manage and implement all aspects for their referral strategy from the referral program.
Create Voucher Definitions: Marketing managers create voucher definitions that act as templates to issue vouchers. The values that marketing managers add in a voucher definition are used as the values of the vouchers.
Manage Data Protection and Privacy for Referral Marketing: When brands run their referral programs, they must comply with local and global data protection and privacy regulations. As part of your brand’s referral program strategy, decide how you want to delete, export, archive, restrict access, manage consent, and restrict the processing of customer data stored as part of the referral programs.
Data Access and Export for Referral Marketing: When your customers request it, prepare and pack up the data that you received from them to comply with data protection and privacy regulations. Determine the best way to work toward complying with the regulations that apply to your company.
Consent Management for Referral Marketing: Honor and respect the wishes of your customers when they request only specific forms of contact from your company or when they opt out of certain types of data-sharing. We provide details to help you determine the best way to comply with the data protection and privacy regulations that apply to your company.
Data Deletion for Referral Marketing: Delete the personal data of customers when it’s necessary to comply with data protection and privacy regulations. Determine a plan of action for complying with the regulations that apply to your company.
Restrict Data Processing for Referral Marketing: When situations require you to do so, prevent the processing of your customers’ data. We give guidance to help you restrict the forms of data processing. That way, you can work toward complying with the laws that are important to your company.
Enable Lightning Out 2.0 for Referral Marketing: Before you can embed widgets on external sites by using Lightning Out 2.0, you must generate Omnistudio components that are necessary to embed the widgets.
Advocate Enrollment Without Person Account: When you don’t have person accounts enabled in your org, the process of enrolling advocates differs from the standard procedure.
Build Solutions Based on Your Requirements: Every company has their own business needs and marketing strategies. Referral Marketing is flexible and you can extend it to meet your business needs. Review these common solutions that you can build with Referral Marketing.
Offer Gift Cards to Advocates and Friends: Integrate Referral Marketing with gift card solutions to offer your advocates and their referred friends gift cards instead of vouchers.
Run Referral Promotions As Part of the Company's Loyalty Program: In orgs that have both Loyalty Management and Referral Marketing, marketing managers can run referral promotions as part of the company's loyalty program. Your company can run a referral promotion that's targeted towards members of the company's loyalty program. With loyalty program members as advocates of your referral promotion, you can generate high-quality referrals from customers who are already trust your brand. The referral promotion increases the engagement of loyalty program members with the brand by offering members rewards for the referrals.
Extended Rewards Prerequisites: To create tailored incentives that resonate with your audience, define diverse reward types based on your company's requirement. Make sure marketing managers can view issued extended rewards by adding extended rewards related list across relevant records.
Create Extended Reward Definitions: Marketing managers can design various reward types for your company's referral program, such as gift cards and cashback for both advocates and referrals. With extended rewards, marketing managers can add multiple reward types within a referral program that resonate with the target audience.
Orchestration of Extended Rewards: Use extended rewards to gain precise control over your referral programs. Dynamically adjust reward values, control when extended rewards are issued, and communicate them clearly with customers. Gain granular control over the events that trigger rewards. With extended rewards, you can integrate with external platforms to deliver a wider range of rewards. After you activate a referral program with extended rewards, understand how they are processed and connected with external systems.
Add Values to Type Picklist on Extended Reward Definition: Marketing managers can use extended rewards to design diverse incentives like gift cards and cashback for both advocates and referred friends in the company's referral program. To define these varied reward types, configure the values for the Type picklist on Extended Reward Definition.
Learn About Referral Marketing: Learn about the key terms and roles in Referral Marketing. Explore the Referral Marketing data model and the referral program workflow.
Learn About Communication Methods: You can configure the communication method according to your business requirements on the Referral Marketing Settings page, accessible under Setup.
CRM Analytics App Assets: The template configuration that you created to predict the likelihood of contacts referring their friends installs a CRM Analytics app. The app contains preconfigured recipes that generate datasets, a model, and a dashboard.
Input Features: Select input features from a set of calculated values to get predictions about the likelihood of your non-advocate contacts referring their friends.
Create a CRM Analytics Template Configuration: Create and set up a template configuration in Scoring Framework to install a customizable CRM Analytics app that generates predictions about the likelihood of non-advocate contacts referring their friends.
Prepare Orders and Order Items Dataset: During the template configuration, you can select an external Orders and Order Items dataset in the Scoring Framework for feature calculations. Prepare the dataset that you want the app to use for generating predictions.
Get Predictions about Non-Advocate Contacts’ Likelihood of Referring: Use Scoring Framework to get predictions about the likelihood of non-advocate contacts referring their friends. Use these scores to pursue the right contacts with the right promotions. Increase the number of your customers, control the customer acquisition cost, and focus on contacts with higher referral likelihood scores.
Get Predictions about Advocates’ Likelihood of Referring: Use Scoring Framework to get predictions about the likelihood of advocates referring their friends. Use these scores to pursue the right members with the right promotions. Increase your customers, control the customer acquisition cost, and reduce your contacts’ displeasure with being pursued by focusing on advocates with higher referral likelihood scores.
CRM Analytics App Assets for Advocates’ Likelihood of Referring Predictions: The template configuration that you created to predict the likelihood of advocates referring their friends installs a CRM Analytics app. The Advocates' Likelihood to Refer app template contains preconfigured recipes that generate datasets, a model, and a dashboard.
Prepare Orders and Order Items Dataset: During the template configuration, you can select an external Orders and Order Items dataset in the Scoring Framework for feature calculations. Prepare the dataset you want the app to use for generating predictions.
Find an Advocate's Segment with Data Graph: Use prebuilt data graphs to check whether an advocate belongs to a referral promotion's eligible segment if your company expects a high volume of advocates to join referral promotions simultaneously throughout the day.
Referral Marketing: Referral Marketing helps your brand run referral programs with evergreen and time-bound promotions for your customers. Marketing managers can design and launch referral promotions within minutes. Referral Marketing takes care of the rest with its inbuilt automations. The inbuilt automations track referrals across their complete lifecycle, send targeted marketing emails, and reward brand advocates and their referred friends. After the launch, marketing managers and business executives can track the performance of the referral program by using prebuilt CRM Analytics dashboards.
Add Advocates: Advocates of a referral program are the customers who are willing to refer your brand to their friends. Marketing managers can either add all customers as advocates or add a select set of customers to the referral program. If the number of customers to be added is small, marketing managers can add the advocates one by one. Or, marketing managers can work with the admin to set up a process that adds all the advocates simultaneously.
Referral Activity Tracking: The activities of advocates and their referred friends are tracked in a referral program. Rewards are automatically provided to advocates and their referred friends when reward-eligible activities are completed. You can use a Business API or a flow action to create records that track the activities of advocates and their referred friends.
Referral Event Action: Use the Process Referral Event action in Flow Builder to create tracking records for referral activities that advocates and their referred friends complete during the last three stages of promotions. The action also automates the issuing of rewards after advocates and their referred friends complete eligible activities. For each activity, a transaction journal is created and other records are created or updated. Use the additional elements in Flow Builder to decide the eligibility criteria for referral activities. You can also add follow-up actions after the Process Referral action.
Referral Event Business API: Use the Referral Event Business API to create tracking records for referral activities that advocates and their referred friends complete during the last three stages of promotions. The API also automates the issuing of rewards after advocates and their referred friends complete eligible activities. For each activity, a transaction journal is created and other records are created or updated. Integrate the API with any site or external website where advocates and their referred friends perform the activities. For example, you can integrate the API with your ecommerce site, point of sale (POS), or customer portal.
How Activities are Tracked in Referral Marketing: A referral promotion must track activities that advocates and their referred friends complete through the promotion's stages. For activities in each stage, a set of records is created or updated, and emails are sent to either the advocates or their referred friends.
Advocate Enrollment: After marketing managers activate referral promotions, the marketing manager, the admin, and the developer can decide how they want the brand’s advocates to join the referral promotions. For a promotion, the brand can choose to either embed the promotion’s widget on a site or use a business API to process advocate enrollments.
Advocate Enrollment by Using Business API: Use the Referral Advocate Enrollments Business API to enroll existing and new customers in referral promotions. Integrate the API with any site or external system where customers can join the referral promotion. For example, you can integrate the API with your brand’s ecommerce site or POS system.
How Advocate Enrollments are Tracked in Referral Marketing: Each time a referral program advocate or a customer joins a referral promotion, the enrollment is tracked by using a Transaction Journal record and a set of related records. An email is also sent to the enrolled advocates.
Advocate Enrollment by Using Refer A Friend Widget: The Refer A Friend widget is available with every referral promotion and the marketing manager can customize the widget based on the brand’s requirements. The widget lets advocates join the promotion and refer their friends. The widget also lets new customers sign up with the brand, join the promotion, and then refer their friends. You can embed the widget on Experience Cloud sites and on external websites.
Options to Extend Referral Marketing: Referral Marketing is prebuilt with a set of standard objects and an API to help admins and developers extend Referral Marketing.
Configure Referral Processes: After marketing managers create the referral program and add its promotions, the admin or the developer can configure the everyday processes. The processes include advocate enrollment, activity tracking, and voucher redemption.
Voucher Redemption: Use the Redeem Voucher API to redeem the vouchers that advocates and their referred friends use. Integrate the Redeem Voucher API with one or more of your external systems where vouchers are redeemed. For example, you can integrate the API with the ecommerce site and POS system where customers use their voucher.
Design a Referral Program: Marketing managers can design a referral program and its promotions by completing a few simple steps in the Referral Marketing app.
Manage Activities: While marketing managers review the performance of a referral program and its promotions, they can review the activities completed by advocates and their referred friends.
Manage Advocates: After a brand launches their referral promotion, marketing managers can review the details of the advocates who are part of the referral program and can add advocates to referral promotions.
Track Advocate Count for Promotions: After an advocate joins a promotion, a Loyalty Program Member Promotion record is automatically created to track the advocate's participation in the promotion. From the Loyalty Program Member Promotion related list on a promotion, marketing managers can track the count of advocates who have joined the promotion and their details. The marketing managers can use a promotion's advocate count as a key performance indicator of the promotion. The Loyalty Program Member Promotion related list also helps marketing managers find out the promotion's active advocate count.
Plan Promotions by Using the Promotion Calendar: Marketing managers and business executives can visualize the brand’s referral promotions on the promotion calendar. The calendar lists the brand’s referral promotions and events, so the marketing managers can check whether promotions are planned during company and social events. Like any other calendar, marketing managers can move across date ranges to see the promotions that are running or that are scheduled. Along with the marketing managers, business executives get a high-level view of the brand’s promotions, easily find white spaces where new promotions can be added, and identify duplicate promotions.
View Promotion Configuration: View the detailed configuration of a referral promotion with one click. Users with read-only access to referral entities can quickly view the promotion configuration. Promotion owners can review the promotion details and determine the changes they want to make without deactivating the promotion.
Track Referrals: Referral records help marketing managers track the progress of an advocate’s referral. When an advocate’s referral progresses across the promotion stages, the Referral record is also updated to the current stage.
Track Issued Vouchers: Vouchers issued to advocates are associated with the advocate's contact and vouchers issued to referred friends are associated with the friend's person account. Marketing managers can keep a track of the vouchers issued to a person by viewing their contact or person account.
Manage a Referral Program: After advocates join the brand’s referral promotion and start referring their friends, marketing managers can track the progress of each referral.
Activate Promotions: Activate your promotion on the day when you want to launch the promotion for the target audience. If you've activated the promotion's launch email, then the launch email is sent to the target audience after the promotion is activated. After the promotion is activated, advocates can start joining the promotion from the promotion's start date.
What Happens After a Promotion is Activated: After a promotion is activated, journeys are created for each stage of the promotion in the Marketing Cloud Engagement business unit associated with the promotion. Advocates who belong to the promotion's referral program and belong to the promotion's target audience can join the promotion and refer their friends from the promotion's start date. Referred friends can also start to engage with the brand for the first time by using the advocate's referral link or code.
Marketing Cloud Engagement Journeys: Referral Marketing uses journeys in Marketing Cloud Engagement to send messages to advocates and their referred friends as they progress along the promotion stages. A promotion's journeys are created in the Engagement business unit that's associated with the promotion.
Marketing Cloud Next: When you activate a promotion, campaigns and flows work together to distribute content. Each campaign you create comes with a preconfigured flow to get you started. A flow executes the campaign and automates content distribution. You can set an event in the flow that automatically sends the communication when the event is triggered.
Salesforce Email Or External Email Services: When you activate the promotion, Salesforce Email or the external email services use a flow builder or Apex based logic to leverage the business APIs, invocable actions or process rules to distribute content.
Promotion Audience: B2C referral promotions can be targeted either towards your entire customer base or towards specific customer groups. Before you use the B2C Referral Promotion guided flow to design a promotion, decide the promotion’s target audience. If you want to target a specific customer group, you can filter the target audience by using a Data 360 segment or a campaign.
Eligible Activities for Promotions: A promotion rewards advocates and their referred friends when an eligible activity is completed. Before you create a referral promotion, decide the promotion's eligible activities for advocates and their referred friends. Eligible activities are represented as journal subtypes in Salesforce.
Promotion FAQs: Review the frequently asked questions about referral promotions and understand how you can work around some of the limitations.
Customize Promotion Journeys in Marketing Cloud Engagement: The journeys that are created in Referral Marketing’s connected Marketing Cloud Engagement org for activated promotions can be customized after a promotion is activated. The journeys can be customized based on the promotion’s marketing and communications strategy. For example, you can add a push notification to the journeys.
Create a Promotion: Promotions are the primary vehicle that runs your referral program. Marketing managers can design different types of promotions with varying duration, audience, rewards, and stages.
Referral Promotion Prerequisites: Before marketing managers design a referral promotion, they must ensure that all the information that's required to design a promotion is already available.
Promotion Rewards: Based on the promotion template that you want to use for your promotion, decide the rewards that you want to offer as part of the promotion. If the promotion template rewards both advocates and their friends, then decide whether you want to give the same reward to advocates and their friends, or different rewards.
Promotion Template: Promotion templates determine the configuration of promotions. In a promotion template, decide stage names, the stages at which advocates and their referred friends are rewarded, and the activities that rewards are provided for. Each promotion is based on a promotion template. The promotion template decides the promotion's stage names, the activities for which the promotion rewards advocates and their referred friends, and the promotion's email content. Before you create a promotion, decide if you want to use an existing promotion template or create a unique template for your promotion.
Design a Referral Promotion Using a Guided Flow: Use a guided flow to design and launch a referral promotion within minutes. The guided flow consists of four simple steps that let marketing managers add the promotion’s rewards, decide the target audience, set limits, and design the promotion’s marketing content.
Communication Stages: The electronic messages are categorized by the stages during which they’re sent. If your company's communication method is Marketing Cloud, you can view the promotion stages and email templates after you complete the promotion configuration and add outbound engagement.
Communication Assets: On the third step in the guided flow, customize and enable the promotion’s communication channels and the Refer A Friend widget. The communication channels include email and WhatsApp.
Emails and WhatsApp Messages: Referral Marketing includes a set of email and WhatsApp message templates. The promotion template that you select for a promotion determines the electronic messages that are available for the promotion. The content of the electronic messages changes based on when the selected promotion template rewards advocates and their referred friends.
The Refer a Friend Widget: Every referral promotion comes with a widget that allows advocates to sign up for the promotion and then send referral emails and SMS messages to their friends.. The widget also allows people visiting the brand’s site to sign up with the brand and then join the referral promotion. After you customize the widget based on the brand’s guideline, admins can embed the widget’s flexcard on Experience Cloud sites or external sites. On the Referral Promotion guided flow, the widget is placed in the Promotion Launched stage.
Create a Custom Refer A Friend Widget: On the Referral Promotion guided flow, marketing managers can change the style and text of the Refer A Friend widget, but they can’t add a customer input or a custom widget state. To customize the business logic or add components—such as mobile number field, consent checkbox, or terms and conditions—create and customize the widget's Apex class. Then, update the widget’s data source so that Referral Marketing uses the class when users access the widget.
Promotion Definition: In the first step of the guided flow, define the key attributes of the promotion.
Rewards and Audience: In the second step of the guided flow, select the promotion’s rewards, limits, and target audience.
Summary: In the last step of the guided flow, review the journey of the advocates and their referred friends in the promotion.
Considerations for Using WhatsApp: Marketing managers manage promotional WhatsApp messages to make communications more efficient and personalized.
WhatsApp Setup: To engage with customers via WhatsApp, you must set up your WhatsApp account in Marketing Cloud Engagement. You need a customer's consent to receive messages from a business through WhatsApp. This consent, called WhatsApp opt-in, is essential for businesses to initiate contact and build a list of interested customers. The delivery of messages on WhatsApp depends on the sender's quality rating, emphasizing the importance of maintaining high-quality communication.
Referral Promotion Strategy: Each brand has a unique way of designing and marketing its referral program. Referral Marketing helps a brand design and run multiple promotions simultaneously or one promotion at a time based on the brand’s marketing strategy. The brand can also tailor each promotion’s stages, rewards, audience, and outreach strategy based on its business needs.
Set Up Referral Marketing: Set up capabilities that enable marketing managers in your company to design and run referral programs.
Create the Referral Marketing Analytics App: Referral Marketing comes with a CRM Analytics app template. The Referral Marketing app template consists of a set of dashboard and components that help marketing managers and business executives track the performance of referral programs and of their promotions. The admin can use a guided setup to create a CRM Analytics app by using the Referral Marketing app template.
Permission to Create Target Audience for Promotions: Use Referral Marketing to target promotions towards specific customer groups. Filter contacts in the org by using Data 360 segments or campaigns. Provide marketing managers the permission to create segments and campaigns in the org.
Set Up Communicaion Method: You can configure how you communicate with advocates and their friends throughout various stages of the promotion journey. Follow the data protection and privacy policies of your region and obtain the required consent from the target audience.
Data 360 for B2C Referrals: Unlock insights about your company's referral program and customers with Data 360. A prepacked data bundle enables admins to set up the connection that sends data from Referral Marketing to Data 360. To create targeted customer segments, users must be assigned the Data Cloud Activation Specialist permission set.
Referral Marketing Data Kit Components: The Referral Marketing data kit includes a data stream bundle that helps your company send data from Referral Marketing to Data 360. The kit also includes data model objects (DMOs) and data lake objects (DLOs) that are specific to Referral Marketing. When you install the data kit, it adds field mappings and associates the DLOs with their corresponding DMOs.
Add the Extended Rewards Related List: In Referral Marketing orgs, advocates have a Contact record, Person Account record, and a Loyalty Program Member record, while referred friends have a Person Account record and a Contact record. To ensure marketing managers can view issued extended rewards on Contact, Loyalty Program Member, and Person Account records, add the Extended Rewards related list to the Contact, Loyalty Program Member, and the Person Account page layouts.
Set Up Marketing Cloud Next: When you configure Marketing Cloud Next as your communication method, you can use the email and SMS channels to communicate with your target audience. The communications render contextually based on the promotion template that you use.
Set Up Marketing Cloud Engagement: To set up Marketing Cloud Engagement, connect Referral Marketing with Engagement business units and complete the required setup tasks in both. This involves installing Marketing Cloud Connect, configuring it in both Referral Marketing and Engagement instances, and creating Synchronized Data Sources for Referral Marketing objects.
Automated Referral Marketing Data Sync in Marketing Cloud Engagement: Referral Marketing relies on the Marketing Cloud Connect managed package to send data from the Referral Marketing org to a Marketing Cloud Engagement instance. The marketing journeys that are created in the connected Engagement org for activated promotions use the Referral Marketing data to send out promotion emails. The admin must install Marketing Cloud Connect in the Referral Marketing org and complete the Marketing Cloud Connect’s setup in the Referral Marketing org and in the connected Engagement instance. After setting up Marketing Cloud Connect, the admin must create Synchronized Data Sources for Referral Marketing objects in the Engagement instance.
Provide Referral Marketing Access to Marketing Cloud Engagement API Users: The Marketing Cloud Engagement API user connects the Referral Marketing org and the Engagement instance. To ensure that the connected Engagement instance receives the Referral Marketing data, provide the Engagement API user access to Referral Marketing and its objects.
Install and Set Up Marketing Cloud Connect Package: Install the Marketing Cloud Connect managed package in the Referral Marketing org and complete the package’s set up in the Referral Marketing org and the Marketing Cloud Engagement instance.
Access Referral Marketing Data in Marketing Cloud Engagement: To access the data that Referral Marketing objects store, use Synchronized Data Sources in Marketing Cloud Engagement. The marketing journeys that send emails for activated promotions require data from Referral Marketing objects. Create Synchronized Data Sources for the Referral Marketing objects whose data the marketing journeys use.
Prerequisite to Activate Referral Promotions: To automatically create marketing journeys for active referral promotions, the connected Marketing Cloud Engagement instance requires at least one event definition. Before marketing managers design and activate promotions, create an event definition in the connected Engagement instance.
Marketing Cloud Engagement Business Unit Connection: Marketing Cloud Engagement journeys send emails to advocates and their friends at different stages of a referral promotion. To send promotion emails with journeys, connect Referral Marketing with Engagement business units. To set up the connection, complete the required setup tasks in your Engagement business units and in Referral Marketing.
Create a Package to Connect to Referral Marketing: Referral Marketing and Marketing Cloud Engagement are two different instances. To connect an Engagement business unit with Referral Marketing, create a package in the business unit that you want to connect. The package consists of the scope of the connection and the API integration details required to connect Referral Marketing with the business unit.
Reasons to Connect Referral Marketing with Multiple Business Units: Companies usually run multiple Marketing Cloud Engagement business units, and each business unit contains the marketing assets for a specific brand, geography, or business line. Companies can also use a similar strategy for their referral promotions. Companies can run a single referral program for accounting purposes and create multiple referral promotions for different brands, geographies, or business lines.
Connect Referral Marketing with a Marketing Cloud Engagement Business Unit: Create a send classification and a package in your Marketing Cloud Engagement business unit to connect Referral Marketing with the business unit. Then, use the send classification and package details to connect Referral Marketing and the business unit in the Referral Marketing org.
Assign Permission Set to Activate Referral Promotions: A permission set named Marketing Cloud Authorization is created when you connect Referral Marketing with a Marketing Cloud Engagement business unit. With this permission set, users can activate promotions and launch the automated process to create journeys in the connected Engagement business unit for the activated promotion. Assign this permission set to marketing managers or to other users who activate referral promotions.
Add Send Classifications for Referral Marketing Emails: Send emails to advocates and their referred friends using journeys in connected Marketing Cloud Engagement business units for active referral promotions. To uniquely classify emails sent for referral promotion, create Referral Marketing-specific send classifications in the business units that you want to connect with Referral Marketing.
Object Permissions for B2C Referrals: B2C Referrals comes with a set of objects to view and manage referral programs. Admins must provide role-specific object access to users in the org. For example, marketing managers need permission to view, create, and edit referral programs and their related records whereas admins need access to delete records as well.
Omnistudio for Referral Marketing: Referral Marketing’s promotion widget template is based on Omnistudio’s Flexcard. When you install the Omnistudio package in the org, marketing managers can design widgets for their promotions and embed promotion widgets on Experience Cloud sites or external websites.
OmniOut: Use OmniOut to deploy flexcards on external sites. After marketing managers design widgets for their referral promotions, they deploy the widgets on external websites by using OmniOut.
Assign Users the Permission Set to Work with Omnistudio: The Omnistudio package adds two permission sets in the org. The Omnistudio Admin permission set provides users the Read, Create, Edit, and Delete access to Omnistudio objects. The Omnistudio User permission set provides Read access to Omnistudio objects. Marketing managers and admins need the OmniStudio Admin permission set to design and deploy referral promotion widgets.
Disable Omnistudio’s Managed Package Runtime Setting: To speed up the activation of referral promotion widgets and their corresponding flexcards, disable Omnistudio’s Managed Package Runtime setting. After a marketing manager activates a promotion’s widget, the widget’s corresponding flexcard is automatically activated. Admins can embed the widget’s activated flexcard on Experience Cloud sites and external websites.
Optional Capabilities and Setup: Admins can configure and extend the brand’s implementation of Referral Marketing by using the set of tools included in the Referral Marketing license. Admins can also complete optional setup tasks based on other licenses that are enabled in the org.
Matching Rules and Duplicate Rules for Contacts and Person Accounts: When you run a referral program, customers and their referred friends often try to sign up with the brand more than one time. When a new customer signs up with the brand and joins a referral promotion, a Contact record is created for the customer. Each time a referred friend signs up with the brand, a Contact record and a Person Account record is created for the friend. Create duplicate rules and matching rules to avoid creating duplicate contacts and person accounts for customers and their referred friends if they try to sign up more than one time.
Page Layout Customizations: If you enable Referral Marketing and Loyalty Management in the same org, the admin must update the page layouts of a few objects that Referral Marketing and Loyalty Management share.
Role-Based Permissions for Referral Marketing: Salesforce admins provide access to features based on the user's role in the company. For Referral Marketing, admins provide themselves, marketing managers, and business executives the permissions that they require to work with referrals. Depending on the user’s role, determine which permission sets are assigned to users.
Set Up Salesforce Email or External Email Services: When you use Salesforce Email as your communication method, use the out-of-the-box email templates to increase productivity and ensure consistent messaging. Send personalized emails by customizing the email content.
Data 360 Segment-Based Referral Promotion Audience Segmentation: Typically, marketing managers design referral promotions that target specific customer groups. Advocates of your company's referral promotions are categorized into customer groups by using Data 360 segments and campaigns. The segments can be a part of any Data 360 companion org. If marketing managers want to use Data 360 segments as the target audience for promotions, admins determine how to verify whether advocates are part of a promotion's segment.
Set Up Data 360 for Referral Marketing: Enable the flow of near real-time data about advocates, referrals, referral promotions, products, and rewards from Referral Marketing objects to Data 360 with preconfigured data streams. The data streams automatically map the data to Referral Marketing data model objects (DMOs) and their corresponding data lake objects (DLOs) in Data 360.
Find an Advocate's Segment with Query API: The Refer A Friend widget and the Referral Advocate Enrollments API can choose to use Data 360's Query API to verify if advocates are eligible to join a promotion based on the promotion's Data 360 segment. If your company plans to enroll a low volume of advocates to referral promotions simultaneously, use the Query API.
Enable Advocate Segment Verification: After you’ve completed the setup that enables marketing managers to use Data 360 segments as promotion target audience, select how the Refer A Friend widget and the Referral Advocate Enrollments API must verify advocate segments.
Ways to Verify Advocate's Data 360 Segment: When advocates try to join a referral promotion, there are ways to verify whether the advocate belongs to the promotion's eligible Data 360 segment. Companies can verify whether an advocate belongs to the promotion's eligible segment using either Data 360's Query API or using data graphs.
Add the Vouchers Related List to Person Account and Contact: In Referral Marketing orgs, advocates have a Contact record and a Loyalty Program Member record, while referred friends have a Person Account record and a Contact record. Marketing managers can view vouchers that are issued to advocates and friends on their Contact, Loyalty Program Member, or Person Account records. The Voucher related list is added by default on the Loyalty Program Member page layout. To ensure marketing managers can view issued vouchers on Contact and Person Account records, add the Vouchers related list to the Contact page layouts and the Person Account page layouts that marketing managers view.
Referral Marketing Dashboards in Tableau Next: Provide your marketing managers with actionable insights into referral programs to help them devise strategies to increase membership, retain customers, improve processes, and grow your business.
Promotion Performance Dashboard: Use the Promotion Performance Dashboard to evaluate a referral promotion's participation and return on investment (ROI). Monitor it to identify bottlenecks, assess whether reward costs align with revenue generated, and make data-driven decisions about continuing or adjusting the promotion. For example, if you see high referrals but low conversions, consider adjusting friend rewards or improving the sign-up experience.
Referral Workflow: The workflow of a referral program involves two personas, an advocate and their referred friends. Before you create a referral program, learn how advocates and their referred friends interact with the referral program.
Agentforce for Real-Time Offer Management: Marketing managers can use Agentforce to efficiently create and update promotions. Agentforce in self-service channels empowers customers to easily retrieve details about their profile and promotions. The topics are available in the Agentforce (Default) agent.
Agent Topic: Offer Content Generation: Marketing managers can use the Offer Content Generation topic to instantly draft specific promotional offer assets, such as offer heading, offer body, or call-to-action (CTA) text.
Agent Topic: Offer List: Marketing managers can use the Offer List topic to retrieve, filter, and view specific offers in a list by using criterias, such as Data Cloud segments, promotions, product, categories, specific channels, or time ranges.
Real-Time Offer Management Console: Marketing managers use the Real-Time Offer Management console app to manage promotions and offers from one workspace. Move between planning, creation, and analysis tasks on the Overall Summary, Planning, Definition, Analytics, and Setup tabs without switching consoles.
Learn About Real-Time Offer Management: Real-Time Offer Management enables you to orchestrate the end-to-end promotion and offer lifecycle. It comprises Global Promotion Management and Offer Management. Use Global Promotion Management to define incentives for purchases and activities. Then, use Offer Management to specify how these promotions are delivered to customers across multiple segments and channels. Leverage Salesforce Personalization to deliver relevant content based on real-time user context and behavior. Process promotion-related incentives and track conversion attribution across offers.
Offer Analytics Dashboard for Real-Time Offer Management: Use the Offer Analytics Overview dashboard to track offer health and identify offers that need attention. Monitor active offer counts, channel coverage, intent, and segment distribution to spot gaps in your offer strategy before they affect performance.
Key Personas in Real-Time Offer Management: Learn about the different user personas involved in a typical Real-Time Offer Management implementation and their responsibilities.
Set Up Real-Time Offer Management with Salesforce Go: Salesforce Go provides preconfigured feature sets and features to quickly configure Real-Time Offer Management capabilities, including Data Cloud, permission sets, and Offer Treatment metadata.
Set Up Agentforce for Real-Time Offer Management: Admins must set up Einstein Generative AI and Agentforce to enable marketing managers and other users to work with the standard Agentforce topics.
Set Up Real-Time Offer Management: Set up Global Promotions Management and Offer Management so your marketing managers can create promotions and run offers.
Bulk Quick Send from Quick Send Message Records: Allow Marketing Cloud Engagement Distributed Marketing business users to send a single, personalized quick send message to up to 100,000 contacts, leads, or person accounts at once from any Quick Send message record. When enabled, users can send to a single custom or standard Salesforce list view that contains from 1 through 100,000 results.
Authenticate and Configure Domains in Unified Messaging: To send authenticated emails, you must set up and verify your sending domains in Unified Messaging. Authenticating your sending domains helps Internet Service Providers (ISPs) and enterprise mail servers recognize emails sent through Salesforce originate from your organization, not Salesforce itself. This authentication builds trust with Email Service Providers (ESPs), improves email deliverability, and strengthens your sender reputation.
Configure Domains for Dynamic Reply and CC Addresses in Marketing Cloud Next: To use a dynamic reply-to or CC address in your marketing emails, add and verify an authorized email domain. After you create and verify a domain, you can use any email address on that domain as a dynamic reply-to or CC address.
Set Up Email Carbon Copy in Unified Messaging: Set up email carbon copy (CC) for your marketers to send copies of emails to external and internal recipients. Both the primary recipients and the CC recipients can see who's copied on the message. Each email sent to a CC recipient consumes a Salesforce Message Credit, in addition to credits for the primary recipient.
CNAME Records for Functional Subdomains: To route inbound email responses correctly, each functional subdomain must have a corresponding CNAME record in your DNS provider.
Set Up Compliance BCC in Unified Messaging: Send a blind carbon copy (BCC) of every outgoing email to a designated address and control whether individual flows can override the setting. Each email sent to a carbon copy (CC) and BCC recipient consumes a Salesforce Message Credit.
Configure CNAME Records with Your DNS Provider: To simplify setup, Unified Messaging provides the complete CNAME record names and values. You can copy the values directly into your DNS provider’s interface.
Configure the Human Rep Escalation Experience: You must configure the human escalation experience before enabling conversational email. Configuring the human escalation experience ensures that end-users or customers can reach a human representative when the Agentforce agent can’t resolve an inquiry. Escalated emails are ongoing conversations that transfer from an Agentforce agent to a human rep’s queue. Escalation occurs when a user needs complex support, requests human assistance, or meets specific routing criteria.
Implement Conversational Email: Conversational Email enables two-way engagement in Marketing Cloud Next. You can configure outbound messages to accept replies. The system evaluates replies to determine intent and triggers automated actions or routes conversations to AI agents or human reps within the same email thread.
DNS Provider Behavior: DNS providers differ in how they handle domain naming conventions. Understanding these differences helps prevent configuration errors.
Turn On Einstein Metrics Guard for Unified Messaging: Einstein Metrics Guard identifies and filters clicks and opens that likely come from bots, security scanners, or automatic opens. This process helps you better understand actual recipient engagement.
Email Engagement Data in Unified Messaging: Unified Messaging captures email engagement data in two data model objects (DMOs) in Data 360. Every send or interaction with your email messaging activities generates this information. You can use these fields to segment audiences or populate reports on your messaging activities.
Authenticate a From Address for Unified Messaging: Add an authenticated From address using an authenticated domain when sending messages from a Unified Messaging email channel. This address appears in the From section of all emails sent from this channel.
Functional Subdomains in Unified Messaging: After you send an email, Email Service Providers (ESPs) and subscribers communicate back to the sender for scenarios, such as bounces, replies, or unsubscribes. To manage these inbound communications, Unified Messaging uses functional subdomains.
Human Rep Experience: Agentforce agents respond within the original email thread using the same From Address and From Name as the marketing email. They have access to the full conversation history and use plain-text response templates when replying.
Managed Dedicated IP Addresses: Managed dedicated IP addresses help reduce the time required to start sending email. Whether sending your first message or scaling to larger audiences, they provide easier access to sending infrastructure that aligns with your business needs as they grow.
Monitor Conversational Engagement: After your conversational campaigns are active, use real-time monitoring and historical reporting to track the health of your interactions. You can use the Command Center to monitor active and completed conversational engagements, review escalation activity, and track agent performance.
Routing Scenarios: Examples: These examples show how the system evaluates and routes inbound replies based on campaign state, routing type, and Reply Mail Management (RMM) settings.
Email Send Validations in Unified Messaging: Unified Messaging automatically performs several validation checks during the email send process. These checks help protect sender reputation, ensure compliance, and reduce the likelihood of sends with rendering errors.
Set Up Service Agents for Conversational Email: The Agentforce agent powers your automated conversations. Before routing email replies, configure an Agentforce Service agent that supports email conversations. This setup ensures responses follow approved templates and comply with legal and brand guidelines. The agent uses these templates to generate consistent, compliant email responses.
Set Up and Authenticate a Sending Domain: Set up and verify your sending domains in Unified Messaging to authenticate that emails originate from your organization and not from Salesforce itself.
Set Up Email Archiving in Unified Messaging: Save copies of all sent emails for regulatory, legal, and auditing compliance. Email archives are stored in the standard Email Message object. To minimize Salesforce storage costs and export archived emails, use the Archive app.
Set Up Conversational Email: After defining your Agentforce Service agent, enable conversational capabilities on the specific From Address used in your marketing campaigns. You must enable each From Address you want to use for conversational email.
Set Up Conversational Email Campaigns: Marketers use Flow to design conversational journeys that respond dynamically to customer replies. Before creating a campaign, ensure that an Agentforce agent is available to handle replies.
Set Up Email Relay in Unified Messaging: Route the email that the system sends through your company's own Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) server instead of sending it directly from Salesforce.
Verify and Activate Your Domain: After you add all DNS records, verify your configuration in Unified Messaging to confirm that Salesforce recognizes and authenticates your domain. Salesforce checks the correctness of all records before activating the domain for authenticated sending in Unified Messaging.
Set Up RCS Agent: Configure an RCS agent for conversational messaging to make sure that you’re a verified sender.
RCS Billing and Message Types: Your RCS billing depends on the type of content that you send and how your message is routed. The Usage Type in your rate table shows how the system categorizes each delivered message.
Guide for Sending RCS Messages to Brazil: Review the requirements and restrictions for using Rich Communication Services (RCS) to send business messages to customers in Brazil. The information provided doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Instead, all information is for general informational purposes only. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on its use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements. RCS messaging in Brazil is regulated by local carriers and Google.
Guide for Sending RCS Messages to Colombia: Review these guidelines and requirements for using RCS for business messaging in Colombia. The information provided doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Instead, all information is for general informational purposes only. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on its use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements. RCS messaging in Colombia is regulated by local carriers and Google.
Manage RCS Consent in Unified Messaging: Unified Messaging manages consent to the RCS channel with communication subscriptions. If a recipient opts out of an RCS channel, they opt out of all communication subscriptions that are mapped to that RCS channel and agent.
RCS Consent Keywords: Use this information to create your opt-in, opt-out, and help text for your RCS messages.
Set Up Conversational RCS Messaging: Conversational RCS enables two-way messaging by connecting customers to bots and agents directly through your RCS agent. By using Omni-Channel routing and Einstein Bots, you can automate responses or route the conversation to AI agents.
Create a Conversational Flow for RCS Messages: To send RCS messages, evaluate customer replies, and automatically route the conversation based on their response, build a segment-triggered flow.
Guide for Sending RCS Messages to France: Review these guidelines and requirements for using RCS (Rich Communication Services) for business messaging in France. The information provided doesn’t, and isn’t intended to, constitute legal advice. Instead, all information is for general informational purposes only. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on its use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements. RCS messaging in France is regulated by local carriers and Google.
Guide for Sending RCS Messages to Germany: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending RCS messages to recipients in Germany. This information is for general informational purposes only and doesn’t constitute legal advice. Consult your independent legal counsel for guidance on specific use cases and to ensure compliance with all applicable legal and industry requirements.
Create Messaging Components for RCS: Messaging components define the interactive content that your support reps and Agentforce agents send in RCS conversations. RCS uses the Guided Actions component type, which presents tap-to-reply suggestion buttons that guide the customer's next action. Create at least one component before your channel goes live.
Configure Guided Actions Components for RCS: After creating a Guided Actions component, configure the message body, suggestion buttons, and activation status in the component editor.
Guide for Sending RCS Messages to India: Review these guidelines and requirements for using RCS (Rich Communication Services) for business messaging in India. The information provided doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Instead, all information is for general informational purposes only. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on its use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending RCS Messages to Italy: Review these guidelines and requirements for using RCS for business messaging in Italy. The information provided doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Instead, all information is for general informational purposes only. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on its use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements. RCS messaging in Italy is regulated by local carriers and Google.
Guide for Sending RCS Messages to Mexico: Review these guidelines and requirements for using RCS (Rich Communication Services) for business messaging in Mexico. The information provided doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Instead, all information is for general informational purposes only. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on its use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements. RCS messaging in Mexico is regulated by local carriers and Google.
Guide for Sending RCS Messages to the Netherlands: Review these guidelines and requirements for using RCS (Rich Communication Services) for business messaging in the Netherlands. The information provided doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Instead, all information is for general informational purposes only. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on its use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements. RCS messaging in the Netherlands is regulated by local carriers and Google.
Guide for Sending RCS Messages to Norway: Review these guidelines and requirements for using RCS (Rich Communication Services) for business messaging in Norway. The information provided doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Instead, all information is for general informational purposes only. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on its use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements. RCS messaging in Norway is regulated by local carriers and Google.
Set Up Unified RCS: Create an RCS channel to send rich media content to your customers. To set up an RCS channel, you must first request an RCS agent to verify your business identity, and then launch the agent in the required country.
Guide for Sending RCS Messages to Peru: Review these guidelines and requirements for using RCS for business messaging in Peru. The information provided doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Instead, all information is for general informational purposes only. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on its use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements. RCS messaging in Peru is regulated by local carriers and Google.
Guide for Sending RCS Messages to Poland: Review these guidelines and requirements for using RCS (Rich Communication Services) for business messaging in Poland. The information provided doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Instead, all information is for general informational purposes only. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on its use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements. RCS messaging in Poland is regulated by local carriers and Google.
Prepare for RCS Agent Setup: Before you create and launch your RCS agent, determine your regional requirements, billing category, and use case. These settings define how your agent handles data, how you’re charged, and what content you can send.
Guide for Sending RCS Messages to Singapore: Review these guidelines and requirements for using RCS (Rich Communication Services) for business messaging in Singapore. The information provided doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Instead, all information is for general informational purposes only. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on its use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements. RCS messaging in Singapore is regulated by local carriers and Google.
Guide for Sending RCS Messages to Slovakia: Review these guidelines and requirements for using RCS (Rich Communication Services) for business messaging in Slovakia. The information provided doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Instead, all information is for general informational purposes only. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on its use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements. RCS messaging in Slovakia is regulated by local carriers and Google.
Supported Countries and Compliance: RCS messaging is supported only in specific countries, each with its own connectivity and compliance requirements.
Guide for Sending RCS Messages to Sweden: Review these guidelines and requirements for using RCS (Rich Communication Services) for business messaging in Sweden. The information provided doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Instead, all information is for general informational purposes only. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on its use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements. RCS messaging in Sweden is regulated by local carriers and Google.
Guide for Sending RCS Messages to Ukraine: Review these guidelines and requirements for using RCS (Rich Communication Services) for business messaging in Slovakia. The information provided doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Instead, all information is for general informational purposes only. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on its use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements. RCS messaging in Ukraine is regulated by local carriers and Google.
Guide for Sending RCS Messages to the United Kingdom: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending RCS messages to recipients in the United Kingdom. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending RCS Messages to the United States: Review these guidelines and requirements for using RCS for business messaging in the United States. The information provided doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Instead, all information is for general informational purposes only. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on its use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements. RCS messaging in the US is regulated by network carriers and Google.
Set Up an SMS Unified Messaging Channel: Create an SMS channel that supports both marketing and service interactions. To set up an SMS channel requires requesting the code to send your SMS messages, including any brands or campaigns used as part of your sends.
Request a 10-Digit Long Code: You can request a 10-digit long code for sending SMS messages in the United States. Processing your code request can take up to 2 business days, depending on how long it takes for carriers and aggregators to provide approval.
Set Up 10-Digit Long Code: Learn how to request a 10-digit long code brand, campaign, and SMS codes for sending SMS in the United States.
Activate Your SMS Code: After your SMS code request is approved, your code appears in the SMS Codes section of Setup with an Inactive status. You must activate your SMS code to use it.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Albania: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Albania. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Algeria: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Algeria. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Argentina: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Argentina. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Australia: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Australia. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Austria: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Austria. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Bahrain: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Bahrain. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Belarus: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Belarus. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Belgium: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Belgium. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Bosnia and Herzegovina: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Bosnia and Herzegovina. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Request a 10DLC Brand: You can request one brand per purchased 10-digit long code. Processing your brand request can take up to 5 business days, depending on the third-party SMS vetting partner to provide approval.
Vet Your SMS Brand: Improve and maintain your sending reputation by validating your identity when you complete SMS channel setup. When you vet your brand, you can send moreSMS messages from newly approved long and short codes.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Brazil: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Brazil. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Bulgaria: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Bulgaria. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Request a Campaign for a United States 10-Digit Long Code: Before you can request a campaign, obtain a brand. You can request one campaign per purchased 10-digit long code. Although you can use up to 49 codes for a single campaign, we recommend you to use only one code per campaign. Processing your campaign request can take up to 10 business days, depending on the time needed for carriers and aggregators to provide approval.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Chile: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Chile. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to China: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in China. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Colombia: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Colombia. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Set Up an SMS Conversation in Unified Messaging: When you set up Conversational SMS, recipients can reply to your marketing and service messages. Then, you can route those replies to people or bots that can address them. To set up a conversation, enable settings and create a flow.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Croatia: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Croatia. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Cyprus: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Cyprus. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Czechia: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Czechia. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Denmark: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Denmark. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Set Up SMS for India: To send SMS messages in India and comply with Telecom Regulatory Authority of India (TRAI) regulations, upload your registered brand headers and templates in Salesforce Setup. This process verifies the SMS traffic through the Distributed Ledger Technology (DLT).
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Ecuador: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Ecuador. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Egypt: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Egypt. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
SMS Engagement Data in Unified Messaging: Unified Messaging captures SMS engagement data in a data model object (DMO) in Data 360. Every send or interaction with your SMS messaging activities generates this data. You can use these fields to segment audiences or populate reports on your messaging activities.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Estonia: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Estonia. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Finland: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Finland. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to France: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in France. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Germany: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Germany. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Ghana: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Ghana. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Greece: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Greece. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Honduras: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Honduras. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't and isn't intended to constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Hong Kong: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Hong Kong. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't and isn't intended to constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Hungary: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Hungary. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Iceland: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Iceland. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to India: In India, the Telecom Regulatory Authority of India (TRAI) enforces strict Distributed Ledger Technology (DLT) guidelines to combat spam messages and streamline SMS campaigns. To send SMS messages in India, all businesses must register as a Principal Entity (PE) and get preapproval on their headers (sender IDs) and message templates.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Indonesia: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Indonesia. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Ireland: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Ireland. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Israel: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Israel. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Italy: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Italy. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Japan: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Japan. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Jordan: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Jordan. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Kenya: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Kenya. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Kuwait: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Kuwait. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Latvia: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Latvia. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Lebanon: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Lebanon. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Liechtenstein: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Liechtenstein. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Lithuania: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Lithuania. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Request a Long Code for Two-Way Sending: To communicate with your customers through a dedicated UK phone number, request a long code, also called a virtual mobile number (VMN).
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Luxembourg: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Luxembourg. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Macau: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Macau. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Malaysia: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Malaysia. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Malta: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Malta. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Mexico: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Mexico. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Morocco: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Morocco. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Mozambique: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Mozambique. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to the Netherlands: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in the Netherlands. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Nigeria: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Nigeria. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Norway: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Norway. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to New Zealand: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in New Zealand. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Oman: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Oman. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Pakistan: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Pakistan. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Pause Traffic in a Unified SMS Channel: To troubleshoot your channel configurations, pause your messaging traffic. You can pause all traffic to the channel, or just pause sent or received messages via Flow and access to bots and human agents.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Peru: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Peru. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't and isn't intended to constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to the Philippines: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in the Philippines. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Poland: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Poland. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Qatar: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Qatar. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Messaging Considerations and Compliance: To improve your chances of receiving approval for your brand, campaign, and code requests, follow these guidelines. Requests that don't meet these guidelines are likely to be rejected and could delay your marketing efforts.
Request a Location-Specific Sending Code: Salesforce supports SMS messaging in many countries. After you review the rules and limits for each country that you're sending from and sending to, you can request a sender code.
Request an International One-way Sending Code: Use an international one-way sending code to directly contact SMS recipients in several different countries at the same time. Follow these instructions to request a code for use in this sending activity. You can use the same code to send to many different countries, but each country has its own rules and limits. Make sure that each send follows these rules.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Saudi Arabia: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Saudi Arabia. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Serbia: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Serbia. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Set Up SMS for Australia: You can set up one-way sending or two-way sending for Australia. For one-way sending, set up an alphanumeric code either for your own brand or for other brands. For two-way sending, set up a long code. It can take up to 7 business days for the Australian Communications and Media Authority (ACMA) to approve a code request. After your request is approved, you’re added as a verified sender.
Set Up SMS for France: Set up one-way or two-way SMS sending for France. For high-volume, two-way sending, request a short code. For one-way sending, request a Dynamic Alpha sender ID.
Set Up SMS for Italy: You can set up one-way sending or two-way sending for Italy. For one-way sending, set up an alphanumeric code either for your own brand or for other brands. For two-way sending, set up a long code. It can take up to 7 business days for the Autorità per le Garanzie nelle Comunicazioni (AGCOM) to approve a code request. After your request is approved, you’re added as a verified sender.
Set Up SMS for the United Kingdom: Set up one-way or two-way SMS sending for the United Kingdom. For one-way sending, use an Alphanumeric Sender ID. For low-volume, two-way sending, request a long code. For high-volume, two-way sending, request a short code.
Request a Short Code: You can request a short code for sending SMS messages in the United States. Processing your short code request can take 10–12 weeks depending on how long it takes for carriers and aggregators to provide approval.
Request a Short Code Brand: Procuring a US short code is a regulated process that ensures messaging security and compliance. Use the self-service registration flow to register your brand and secure a 5 or 6-digit short code.
Short Code Brand Requirements: Learn about the different entity, program, and short code types required for requesting a US short code brand.
Request a Short Code: To send high-volume text messages in Canada, you must register a dedicated 5-digit or 6-digit short code. The Canadian Wireless Telecommunications Association (CWTA) manages the registration process on behalf of Canadian mobile network operators.
Set Up Short Code: Learn how to request a short code brand and SMS codes for sending SMS in the United States.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Singapore: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Singapore. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't and isn't intended to constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Slovakia: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Slovakia. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Slovenia: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Slovenia. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to South Africa: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in South Africa. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to South Korea: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in South Korea. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Spain: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Spain. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Sri Lanka: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Sri Lanka. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Sweden: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Sweden. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Switzerland: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Switzerland. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Taiwan: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Taiwan. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Thailand: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Thailand. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to the United Kingdom: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in the United Kingdom. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Vietnam: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Vietnam. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Guide for Sending SMS Messages to Zimbabwe: Review the guidelines and restrictions for sending SMS messages to recipients in Zimbabwe. This information is for general informational purposes only. This information doesn't, and isn't intended to, constitute legal advice. Consult your own independent legal counsel for guidance on use cases and applicable legal and industry requirements.
Activate and Deactivate SMS Channels: You can activate or deactivate Short Message Service (SMS) channels in your sandbox and production orgs. However, the same SMS channel can't be activated in both orgs at the same time. SMS usage in the sandbox or production org will deduct from your SMS credits. Before activating the SMS code in a sandbox org, make sure that the code isn't being used in a production org.
Create a Unified WhatsApp Messaging Channel: Create a WhatsApp channel that supports both marketing and service interactions. Give reps access to a full customer profile that includes both marketing and support interaction history.
Unified WhatsApp Engagement Data: Use Journey Builder to transfer a WhatsApp conversation with a customer from a marketing interaction to a service bot to give the customer additional assistance.
Message Content and Keyword Insight Sample Queries: Use these queries to better understand the messages and keywords that your customers send through the WhatsApp channel. For example, you can identify the keywords that occur most frequently, or the keywords that most often result in transfers.
Agent or Bot Transfer Report Sample Queries: Use these sample queries to monitor WhatsApp engagement by tracking how many conversations were sent to agents or bots for resolution.
Configure Messaging During a Support Session for Unified WhatsApp: Specify whether a message is sent to customers while they work with Service Cloud support. You can prevent customers from receiving promotional or other low-priority content during conversations with an agent or bot. This feature is available for only Unified WhatsApp numbers.
Configure Marketing Cloud Engagement for Unified WhatsApp: Use a journey to route a customer's response to a marketing campaign. These instructions assume that you've already activated Marketing Cloud Engagement and Service Cloud in your org. To enjoy the latest marketing advancements in Salesforce, we recommend upgrading from Marketing Cloud Engagement to Marketing Cloud Next.
Configure Marketing Cloud Next for Unified WhatsApp: Use a flow to route a customer's response to a marketing campaign. These instructions assume that you've already activated Marketing Cloud Next and Service Cloud in your org.
Unified Messaging Consent: To send messages to your subscribers, you must have their explicit consent. You can’t transfer consent from one Unified Messaging number or channel to another. You can set different required consent levels for each application within a Unified Messaging number or channel. For example, in a unified SMS channel used for both service and marketing, change the consent requirements of your marketing interactions to require an explicit opt-in or double opt-in. You can manage how subscribers provide or withdraw that consent within Unified Messaging.
Manage SMS Consent in Unified Messaging: We manage consent to the SMS channel in Unified Messaging via communication subscriptions. Each SMS code is mapped to one or more communication subscriptions. When a recipient opts in to an SMS channel, they opt in to the communication subscriptions mapped to the SMS channel and code. If a recipient opts out of an SMS channel, they opt out of all communication subscriptions mapped to that SMS channel and code. Manage SMS consent and keywords for each connected number.
Billing Considerations for Unified Messaging: When you send a message, Unified Messaging uses both messaging services and Data 360 services. In addition to Salesforce Message Credits, these activities also consume Data 360 credits.
Establish the Cross-Cloud Relationship in Unified WhatsApp: Unified WhatsApp allows outbound marketing campaigns through Marketing Cloud Next (MCN), Marketing Cloud Engagement (MCE), or both. Unified WhatsApp allows AI agents, bots, or service reps to field inbound messages with Service Cloud's Digital Engagement (DE). Set capabilities and a default cloud to choose where outbound conversations originate from and how inbound conversations are handled.
Set Your Default Cloud and Routing Options for Unified WhatsApp: Determine how incoming customer messages are directed across Marketing Cloud Engagement (MCE), Marketing Cloud Next (MCN), and Digital Engagement (DE). We recommend that you establish your Unified WhatsApp default app first, and then determine if custom routing logic via a marketing journey (MCN), marketing flow (MCE), or Omni flow (DE) is necessary.
Connect to Data 360 for Unified Messaging: Before you can send messages, connect to Data 360 and deploy the required data kits. A data kit is similar to a managed package, and it contains everything that you need to get started. Use a data kit to create data streams, which establish the relationships that are required to track engagement and honor consent. Create a Data 360 connection for each channel that you plan to use.
Migrate to Unified WhatsApp: Migrate from a business service provider, Marketing Cloud Engagement WhatsApp, or Service Cloud WhatsApp. After migration, your existing message templates are available in Unified WhatsApp.
Prepare for Unified WhatsApp Messaging: Before setting up a WhatsApp channel in Unified Messaging, get to know how it works. Compare Unified Messaging channels side by side with Marketing Cloud Engagement and Service Cloud Digital Engagement, and learn about number reuse and conversation transitions that can occur within a WhatsApp Unified Messaging channel.
Inactive Unified Messaging Channels and Deprovisioning: Your Unified Messaging channel becomes inactive if your Salesforce Message Credits contract for that channel expires, you cancel your Salesforce contract, your contract no longer includes Data 360, or you inactivate your Data 360 instance. When your channel is inactive, you can still review the configuration and tracking information, but all send activities cease immediately. To reactivate your channel, contact your Salesforce account executive.
Set Up a Messaging Console: Create a page where reps message with customers. If you already have voice or other messaging channels set up in Service Cloud, you likely have this page set up already.
Route Unified WhatsApp Sessions in Service Cloud: When you set up your Messaging Channel Routing Type for Unified WhatsApp, you chose to route Unified WhatsApp sessions to an Omni-Flow, a queue, or a user. If you selected Omni-Flow, you can route work between service agents, bots, or service reps.
Create a Branded Domain for Unified Messaging: Use a branded domain to shorten URLs to personalized links. You can then use shortened text in your messages and use the links to track interactions. A branded domain requires a valid CA-signed HTTPS certificate.
Unified Messaging Setup: Configure each channel in the Unified Messaging section of Salesforce Setup. All channels include required setup steps as well as optional configuration steps specific to that channel. For example, you can enable WhatsApp for Digital Engagement and Marketing Cloud Engagement. To fully enable a WhatsApp channel for these apps, you must both create the connection and deploy data kits and streams for each channel in Data 360. These streams establish the relationships required to target subscriber segments and capture data on how subscribers engage with your messages.
Set Up Unified WhatsApp: Unified WhatsApp setup takes place in Data Cloud, Marketing Cloud, Service Cloud and Meta. The help docs for Unified WhatsApp setup are listed in a recommended order.
Unified Messaging: Connect Marketing Cloud and Service Cloud Digital Engagement to messaging capabilities across email, SMS, and third-party messaging apps such as WhatsApp. Configure these channels with your own addresses and accounts, and then send marketing and service messages. Depending on your business needs, you may decide to implement all channel types or just one.
What’s Unified Messaging?: Learn how Unified Messaging makes it easier to message with current and potential customers from Salesforce.
Unified WhatsApp Functionality: Explore the functionality of Unified WhatsApp, and compare it with WhatsApp channels in Service Cloud Digital Engagement and Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Number Migration in Unified WhatsApp Messaging: If you don’t plan to create a new WhatsApp Business Account or number for Unified WhatsApp, you can migrate an existing one. We accept WABA or number migration from another business service provider, Marketing Cloud Engagement, or Service Cloud. Review these considerations about reusing or migrating phone numbers.
Pause Traffic in a WhatsApp Unified Messaging Channel: If you need to pause traffic in a Unified Messaging WhatsApp channel, temporarily disconnect the Service Cloud Digital Engagement and Marketing Cloud Engagement apps in Setup.
Add a Phone Number After WhatsApp Business Account Migration: To reduce the downtime associated with migrating a WhatsApp Business Account (WABA) and a phone number at the same time, migrate just the WABA first. When you choose to add a phone number later, template migration can begin within a few hours of WABA migration. If you migrate a phone number with your WABA, template migration can take 1-2 days.
Capture Data from Click to WhatsApp Ads: Track which Meta ads start your WhatsApp conversations, link those conversations to known customers, and send the resulting conversion events back to Meta. When a customer clicks a Click to WhatsApp Ad (CTWA) on Facebook or Instagram and starts a WhatsApp conversation with your business, Salesforce automatically captures the ad's referral data, including the unique click ID, and stores it in Data Cloud.
Maintain Conversation Continuity with Meta Contact Book for Unified WhatsApp: Meta Contact Book helps maintain the association between a WhatsApp user’s BSUID and phone number. When both identifiers are available, Salesforce can more reliably match incoming messages to an existing messaging user and preserve conversation continuity.
Choose Your Unified WhatsApp Data Residency: Ensure industry and regulatory compliance by selecting the country where your Unified WhatsApp data is stored at rest. While you make your selection in Salesforce Setup, your data storage is managed by Meta. This step is required for companies that comply with GDPR regulations.
Unified WhatsApp Migration: To migrate a WhatsApp Business Account or phone number to Unified WhatsApp, follow these setup steps.
Re-Register a WhatsApp Phone Number: If your WhatsApp display name is updated, a business account lock is lifted, or a channel is in an unexpected broken state, you can re-register your WhatsApp phone number with Meta to fix it. When you click Refresh Connection, Salesforce calls the Meta API on the already-registered number. We also ensure that the channel is aligned and correct any missing information.
